As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 18, 2008

File No. 001-10994

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

AMENDMENT NO. 4

TO

FORM 10

GENERAL FORM FOR REGISTRATION OF SECURITIES

Pursuant to Section 12(b) or (g) of The Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. *

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)

 

Delaware

(State or Other Jurisdiction of

Incorporation or Organization)

 

95-4191764

(IRS Employer

Identification No.)

 

 

100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

(800) 248-7971

(Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including

Area Code, of Registrant’s Principal Executive Offices)

 

 

With copies to:

 

Kevin J. Carr

Vice President and Counsel

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

(800) 248-7971

 

Gary I. Horowitz, Esq.

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

(212) 455-2000

 

 

Securities to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each Class to be so Registered

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which

Each Class is to be Registered

Common stock, par value $.01 per share

Preferred Share Purchase Rights

 

The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

 

 

 

*The registrant was formerly named Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.


INFORMATION INCLUDED IN INFORMATION STATEMENT

AND INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE IN FORM 10

CROSS-REFERENCE SHEET BETWEEN INFORMATION STATEMENT AND ITEMS OF FORM 10

This registration statement on Form 10 (the “Form 10”) incorporates by reference information contained in the information statement filed as Exhibit 99.1 hereto (the “information statement”). The cross-reference table below identifies where the items required by Form 10 can be found in the information statement.

 

Item No.

  

Item Caption

  

Location in Information Statement

1.    Business    “Summary;” “Risk Factors” and “Business”
2.    Financial Information    “Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial Data;” “Capitalization;” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data;” “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation”
3.    Properties    “Business—Our Properties and Facilities”
4.    Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management    “Security Ownership by Certain Beneficial Owners and Management”
5.    Directors and Executive Officers    “Management”
6.    Executive Compensation    “Compensation of Executive Officers”
7.    Certain Relationships and Related Transactions    “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off”
8.    Legal Proceedings    “Business—Our Legal Proceedings”
9.    Market Price of and Dividends on the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters    “Summary;” “Risk Factors;” “The Spin-Off;” “Capitalization;” “Dividend Policy” and “Description of Our Capital Stock”
10.    Recent Sale of Unregistered Securities    None
11.    Description of Registrant’s Securities to be Registered    “Description of Our Capital Stock”
12.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers    “Indemnification and Limitation of Liability of Directors and Officers” and “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off”
13.    Financial Statements and Supplementary Data    “Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial Data;” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data;” “Selected Consolidated Financial Data;” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements” including the Consolidated Financial Statements
14.    Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure    None

 

1


ITEM 15. Financial Statements and Exhibits

 

(a) List of Financial Statements

The following financial statements are included in the information statement and filed as part of this registration statement on Form 10:

(1) Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. as of and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and for the year ended December 31, 2007;

(2) Consolidated Financial Statements for Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, including the Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm; and

(3) Unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements for Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007.

 

(b) Exhibits. The following documents are filed as exhibits hereto:

 

Exhibit
Number

 

Exhibit Description

2.1   Separation and Distribution Agreement between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.1   Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.2   Amended and Restated Bylaws of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.1**   Certificate of Designations of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.)
4.2**   Form of Rights Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and Mellon Investor Services LLC, as Rights Agent
4.3**   Form of Certificate of Designations of Series C Junior Participating Preferred Stock (attached as an exhibit to the Rights Agreement attached as Exhibit 4.3 hereto)
4.4**   Form of Rights Certificate (attached as an exhibit to the Rights Agreement attached as Exhibit 4.3 hereto)
10.1   Transition Services Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.2   Tax Separation Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.3   Employee Matters Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.4   Change in Control Agreement between George R. Aylward, Jr. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
10.5   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan
10.6**   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Excess Investment Plan
10.7**   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan
10.8**   Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.), Harris Bankcorp, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

 

2


Exhibit
Number

 

Exhibit Description

10.9  

Loan Agreement, dated December 30, 2005, by and between Phoenix Life Insurance Company and Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

10.10   First Amendment, dated June 1, 2006, to the Loan Agreement, dated December 30, 2005, by and between Phoenix Life Insurance Company and Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (attached hereto as Exhibit 10.9)
21.1**   List of Subsidiaries of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
99.1   Information Statement of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., dated December 23, 2008

 

  * To be filed by amendment
  ** Previously filed

 

3


SIGNATURE

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:   /s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name: George R. Aylward, Jr.

Title:   President

Dated: December 18, 2008

 

4


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
Number

 

Exhibit Description

2.1   Separation and Distribution Agreement between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.1   Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.2   Amended and Restated Bylaws of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.1**   Certificate of Designations of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.)
4.2**   Form of Rights Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and Mellon Investor Services LLC, as Rights Agent
4.3**   Form of Certificate of Designations of Series C Junior Participating Preferred Stock (attached as an exhibit to the Rights Agreement attached as Exhibit 4.3 hereto)
4.4**   Form of Rights Certificate (attached as an exhibit to the Rights Agreement attached as Exhibit 4.3 hereto)
10.1   Transition Services Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.2   Tax Separation Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.3   Employee Matters Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.4   Change in Control Agreement between George R. Aylward, Jr. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
10.5   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan
10.6**   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Excess Investment Plan
10.7**   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan
10.8**   Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.), Harris Bankcorp, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.9  

Loan Agreement, dated December 30, 2005, by and between Phoenix Life Insurance Company and Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

10.10   First Amendment, dated June 1, 2006, to the Loan Agreement, dated December 30, 2005, by and between Phoenix Life Insurance Company and Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (attached hereto as Exhibit 10.9)
21.1**   List of Subsidiaries of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
99.1   Information Statement of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., dated December 23, 2008

 

* To be filed by amendment
** Previously filed

Exhibit 2.1

EXECUTION VERSION

SEPARATION AGREEMENT,

PLAN OF REORGANIZATION AND DISTRIBUTION

by and between

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.

and

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Dated as of December 18, 2008


SEPARATION AGREEMENT, PLAN OF REORGANIZATION AND DISTRIBUTION

 

ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS    2

Section 1.01.

   Definitions    2
ARTICLE II REORGANIZATION; CONVEYANCE OF CERTAIN ASSETS; ASSUMPTION OF CERTAIN LIABILITIES; CERTAIN PAYMENTS; AND TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS    12

Section 2.01.

   Reorganization    12

Section 2.02.

   Conveyance of Assets; Discharge of Liabilities    13

Section 2.03.

   Ancillary Agreements    14

Section 2.04.

   Issuance of Spinco Common Stock    14

Section 2.05.

   Resignations    15

Section 2.06.

   Limitation of Liability    15

Section 2.07.

   Novation of Liabilities; Consents    16
ARTICLE III THE DISTRIBUTION    17

Section 3.01.

   Cooperation Prior to the Distribution    17

Section 3.02.

   Conditions Precedent to the Distribution    17

Section 3.03.

   The Distribution    19
ARTICLE IV COVENANTS    19

Section 4.01.

   Bank Accounts    19

Section 4.02.

   Guaranteed Spinco and PNX Liabilities    20

Section 4.03.

   Insurance    21

Section 4.04.

   No Hire; No Solicit; Limited Non-Compete    23

Section 4.05.

   Legal Names and Signage    24

Section 4.06.

   Auditors and Audits; Annual and Quarterly Financial Statements and Accounting    26

Section 4.07.

   No Restrictions on Post-Closing Competitive Activities; Corporate Opportunities    27

Section 4.08.

   Right of Offset    29
ARTICLE V LITIGATION MATTERS    30

Section 5.01.

   Case Allocation    30

Section 5.02.

   Litigation cooperation    31
ARTICLE VI INDEMNIFICATION    32

Section 6.01.

   Spinco Indemnification of the PNX Group    32

Section 6.02.

   PNX Indemnification of Spinco Group    32

Section 6.03.

   Contribution    32

 

i


Section 6.04.

   Insurance and Third Party Obligations    33

Section 6.05.

   Indemnification Obligations Net of Insurance Proceeds and Other Amounts on a Net Tax Benefit Basis    33

Section 6.06.

   Notice and Payment of Claims    34

Section 6.07.

   Notice and Defense of Third Party Claims    34
ARTICLE VII EMPLOYEE MATTERS    35

Section 7.01.

   Employee Matters Agreement    35
ARTICLE VIII TAX MATTERS    35

Section 8.01.

   Tax Separation Agreement    35
ARTICLE IX ACCOUNTING MATTERS    36

Section 9.01.

   Intercompany Accounts    36
ARTICLE X TRANSITION Services    36

Section 10.01.

   Transition Services Agreement    36
ARTICLE XI INFORMATION; SEPARATION OF DATA    36

Section 11.01.

   Provision of Corporate Records    36

Section 11.02.

   Access to Information    36

Section 11.03.

   Retention of Records    37

Section 11.04.

   Confidentiality    37

Section 11.05.

   Privileged Matters    38

Section 11.06.

   Ownership of Information    40

Section 11.07.

   Separation of Data    40
ARTICLE XII INTEREST ON PAYMENTS    40

Section 12.01.

   Interest    40
ARTICLE XIII MISCELLANEOUS    41

Section 13.01.

   Expenses    41

Section 13.02.

   Notices    41

Section 13.03.

   Amendment and Waiver    42

Section 13.04.

   Entire Agreement    42

Section 13.05.

   Consolidation, Merger, Etc.; Parties in Interest; Termination.    42

Section 13.06.

   Further Assurances and Consents    43

Section 13.07.

   Severability    43

Section 13.08.

   Governing Law; Jurisdiction    43

Section 13.09.

   Counterparts    43

Section 13.10.

   Third Party Beneficiaries    43

 

ii


Section 13.11.

   Specific Performance    44

Section 13.12.

   Limitations of Liability    44

Section 13.13.

   Force Majeure    44

Section 13.14.

   Construction    44

Section 13.15.

   Disputes.    44

 

iii


Exhibits:

 

Exhibit A    Employee Matters Agreement
Exhibit B    Tax Separation Agreement
Exhibit C    Transition Services Agreement

Schedules:

 

Schedule 1.01(a)    Assumed Spinco Liabilities
Schedule 1.01(b)    Spinco Contracts
Schedule 1.01(c)    Spinco Liabilities
Schedule 1.01(d)    Spinco Liabilities related to Indebtedness
Schedule 2.02(f)    Conveyance of Assets
Schedule 2.06(b)    Limitation of Liability
Schedule 3.02(o)    Released Obligations
Schedule 4.01(a)    Spinco Bank Accounts
Schedule 4.02(a)    Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities
Schedule 4.02(b)    Guaranteed PNX Liabilities
Schedule 5.01(a)    Spinco Actions
Schedule 5.01(b)    PNX Actions
Schedule 5.01(e)    Joint Actions
Schedule 9.01(a)    Intercompany Accounts
Schedule 11.02    Shared Records
Schedule 11.03    Retention of Shared Records
Schedule 13.01(a)    Expenses to be paid by Spinco
Schedule 13.01(b)    Expenses to be paid by PNX

 

iv


SEPARATION AGREEMENT, PLAN OF REORGANIZATION AND DISTRIBUTION

SEPARATION AGREEMENT, PLAN OF REORGANIZATION AND DISTRIBUTION (this “ Agreement ”), dated as of December 18, 2008, by and between The Phoenix Companies, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ PNX ”), and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ Spinco ” and together with PNX, the “ Parties ”, and each individually, a “ Party ”).

RECITALS

A. Spinco is an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of PNX holding title to the stock of certain PNX subsidiaries, the assets and liabilities of which constitute the asset management business of PNX.

B. Spinco has entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company (“ PIMCO ”), Spinco, Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“ Harris ”) and PNX (the “ Investment Agreement ”), pursuant to which, among other things, (i) PIMCO contributed all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of Virtus Partners, Inc. (formerly known as Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.) that PIMCO held to Spinco in exchange for (x) all of the outstanding shares of Spinco Common Stock (as defined herein), (y) 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series A Preferred Stock ”), all of which was sold to Harris subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, and (z) 35,217 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series B Preferred Stock ”) and (ii) PIMCO will, after such contribution and immediately after the Distribution (as defined herein), subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, sell to Harris all of the Series B Preferred Stock owned by PIMCO and exchange all shares of the Series A Preferred Stock previously delivered to Harris with the same number of shares of the Series B Preferred Stock in a two-step transaction for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million.

C. The Board of Directors of PNX has determined that it is in the best interests of PNX and its shareholders to transfer and assign to Spinco effective at and after the Effective Time (as defined herein) certain related assets and to receive in exchange therefor all of the outstanding shares of Spinco Common Stock.

D. The Board of Directors of PNX has further determined that it is in the best interests of PNX and its shareholders to make a distribution (the “ Distribution ”) to the holders of PNX Common Stock (as defined herein) of all of the outstanding shares of Spinco Common Stock at the rate of one (1) share of Spinco Common Stock for every twenty (20) shares of PNX Common Stock outstanding as of the Record Date (as defined herein).

E. The Parties have determined that it is necessary and desirable to set forth the principal corporate transactions required to effect the Distribution and to set forth other agreements that will govern certain other matters following the Distribution.


NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing premises and the mutual agreements and covenants contained in this Agreement and other good and valuable consideration the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the Parties agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

Section 1.01. Definitions . As used herein, the following terms have the following meaning:

Action ” means any claim, suit, arbitration, inquiry, proceeding, or investigation by or before any court, governmental or other regulatory or administrative agency or commission or any other tribunal.

Affiliate ” means, when used with respect to a specified Person, a Person that directly or indirectly, through one or more intermediaries, controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with such specified Person. For the purposes of this definition, “ control ”, when used with respect to any specified Person, shall mean the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of such Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities or other interests, by contract or otherwise.

Ancillary Agreements ” means all of the written agreements, instruments, understandings, assignments and other arrangements (other than this Agreement) entered into in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby, including, without limitation, the Employee Matters Agreement, the Tax Separation Agreement, the Transition Services Agreement and other documents relating to the transfer of assets and liabilities in contemplation of the Distribution.

Applicable Rate ” means the Prime Rate plus 2.0% per annum.

Assets ” means all properties, rights, contracts, leases and claims, of every kind and description, wherever located, whether tangible or intangible, and whether real, personal or mixed.

Assumed Spinco Liabilities ” means those Spinco Liabilities assumed by PNX as set forth on Schedule 1.01(a) .

Claims Administration ” means the administration of claims made under the Third Party Policies, including the reporting of claims to the unaffiliated, third-party insurance carriers that issued the Third Party Policies, management and defense of such claims, negotiating the resolution of such claims, and providing for appropriate releases upon settlement of such claims.

Code ” means the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Commission ” means Securities and Exchange Commission.

Confidential Information ” means all business or operational information concerning a Party and/or its subsidiaries (including (i) earnings reports and forecasts, (ii) macro-economic reports and forecasts, (iii) business and strategic plans, (iv) general market evaluations and surveys, (v) litigation presentations and risk assessments, (vi) budgets, (vii) financing and credit-related information, (viii) specifications, ideas and concepts for products and services, (ix) quality assurance policies, procedures and specifications, (x) customer information, (xi)

 

2


Software, (xii) training materials and information, and (xiii) all other know-how, methodology, procedures, techniques and trade secrets related to design, development and operational processes) which, prior to or following the Effective Time, has been disclosed by a Party or its subsidiaries to the other Party or its subsidiaries, in written, oral (including by recording), electronic, or visual form to, or otherwise has come into the possession of, the other (except to the extent that such information can be shown to have been (i) in the public domain through no action of such Party or its subsidiaries, (ii) lawfully acquired from other sources by such Party or its subsidiaries to which it was furnished or (iii) independently developed by such Party or its subsidiaries; provided , however , in the case of clause (ii) that, to the furnished Party’s knowledge, such sources did not provide such information in breach of any confidentiality obligations).

Distribution ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

Distribution Agent ” means Mellon Investor Services, LLC, in its capacity as agent for PNX in connection with the Distribution.

Distribution Date ” means the date upon which the Distribution shall be effective, as determined by the Board of Directors of PNX, or such committee of such Board of Directors as shall be designated by the Board of Directors of PNX.

Effective Time ” means 5:00 p.m. New York time on the Distribution Date.

Employee Matters Agreement ” means the Employee Matters Agreement, substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto, entered into at or prior to the Effective Time between PNX and Spinco, as amended from time to time.

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

Force Majeure ” means, with respect to a Party, an event beyond the reasonable control of such Party (or any Person acting on its behalf), which by its nature could not have been foreseen by such Party (or such Person), or, if it could have been foreseen, was unavoidable, and includes acts of God, storms, floods, earthquakes, hurricanes, riots, pandemics, fires, sabotage, strikes, lockouts, civil commotion or civil unrest, interference by civil or military authorities, acts of war (declared or undeclared) or armed hostilities or other national or international calamity or one or more acts of terrorism.

Form 10 ” means the registration statement on Form 10 filed by Spinco with the Commission to effect the registration of the Spinco Common Stock pursuant to the Exchange Act, as such registration statement may be amended from time to time.

Goodwin ” means Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc.

Goodwin Business ” means the business now or formerly conducted by Goodwin and its present and former subsidiaries, joint ventures and partnerships.

 

3


Goodwin Investment Professional ” means any employee of PNX or the PNX Group who is a portfolio manager or credit analyst who is engaged in the provision of investment management services to any Restricted Fund.

Goodwin Transfer ” is defined in Section 2.01.

Governmental Entity ” means any nation or government, any state, municipality or other political subdivision thereof and any entity, body, agency, commission, department, board, bureau or court, whether domestic, foreign or multinational, exercising executive, legislative, judicial, regulatory or administrative functions of or pertaining to government and any official thereof.

Group ” means the PNX Group or the Spinco Group, as the context so requires.

Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities ” means the Spinco Liabilities on which any member of the PNX Group is an obligor by reason of any guarantee or contractual commitment, including Liabilities under any contract assumed by any member of the Spinco Group from any member of the PNX Group with respect to which any member of the PNX Group remains liable.

Guaranteed PNX Liabilities ” means (i) the PNX Liabilities on which any member of the Spinco Group is an obligor by reason of any guarantee or contractual commitment, including Liabilities under any contract assumed by any member of the PNX Group from any member of the Spinco Group with respect to which any member of the Spinco Group remains liable, and (ii) the Assumed Spinco Liabilities.

Harris ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

Head Records Coordinator ” means the employee designated in writing by a Party as the person who is responsible for administering the document retention protocol for Shared Records set forth in Article XI on behalf of such Party.

Indebtedness ” means (i) any indebtedness for borrowed money or the deferred purchase price of property as evidenced by a note, bonds or other instruments, (ii) obligations as lessee under capital leases, (iii) obligations secured by any mortgage, pledge, security interest, encumbrance, lien or charge of any kind existing on any asset owned or held by any Person, whether or not such Person has assumed or becomes liable for the obligations secured thereby, (iv) any obligation under any interest rate swap agreement, (v) accounts payable, (vi) reimbursement obligations with respect to surety and performance bonds or letters of credit, and (vii) obligations under direct or indirect guarantees of (including obligations, contingent or otherwise, to assure a creditor against loss in respect of) indebtedness or obligations of the kinds referred to in clauses (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi) above.

Indemnifiable Loss ” means any and all damage, loss, liability, and expense (including, without limitation, reasonable expenses of investigation and reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) in connection with any and all Actions or threatened Actions.

 

4


Information ” means information, whether or not patentable or copyrightable, in written, oral, electronic or other tangible or intangible forms, stored in any medium, including studies, reports, records, books, contracts, instruments, surveys, discoveries, ideas, concepts, know-how, techniques, designs, specifications, drawings, blueprints, diagrams, models, prototypes, samples, flow charts, data, computer data, disks, diskettes, tapes, computer programs or other software, marketing plans, customer names, communications by or to attorneys (including attorney-client privileged communications), memos and other materials prepared by attorneys or under their direction (including attorney work product), communications and materials otherwise related to or made or prepared in connection with or in preparation for any legal proceeding, and other technical, financial, employee or business information or data.

Information Statement ” means the information statement required by the Commission to be sent to each holder of PNX Common Stock in connection with the Distribution, and prepared in accordance with the Exchange Act.

Insurance Administration ” means, with respect to each Third Party Policy: (i) the accounting for premiums, retrospectively-rated premiums, defense costs, indemnity payments, deductibles and self-insured retentions, as appropriate, under the terms and conditions of such Third Party Policy; (ii) the reporting to the relevant unaffiliated, third-party insurer that issues such Third Party Policy of any losses or claims which may be covered by such Third Party Policy; and (iii) the distribution of Insurance Proceeds related to such Third Party Policy, subject to the terms of Section 4.03.

Insurance Proceeds ” means those monies (i) received by an insured from an unaffiliated third-party insurer under any Third Party Policy, or (ii) paid by such third-party insurer on behalf of an insured under any Third Party Policy, in either case net of any applicable premium adjustment, retrospectively-rated premium, deductible, self-insured retentions, or cost of reserve paid or held by or for the benefit of such insured.

Insured Claims ” means those Liabilities that, individually or in the aggregate, are covered within the terms and conditions of any of the Third Party Policies, whether or not subject to deductibles, co-insurance, uncollectibility or retrospectively-rated premium adjustments.

Intellectual Property ” means all intellectual property and industrial property rights of any kind or nature, including all United States and foreign (i) patents, patent applications, patent disclosures, and all related continuations, continuations-in-part, divisionals, reissues, re-examinations, substitutions and extensions thereof, (ii) Trademarks, (iii) copyrights, whether statutory or common law, registered or unregistered and published or unpublished, (iv) rights of publicity, (v) moral rights and rights of attribution and integrity, (vi) rights in Software, (vii) trade secrets and all other confidential information, know-how, inventions, improvements, proprietary processes, formulae, models and methodologies, (viii) rights to personal information, (ix) telephone numbers and internet protocol addresses, (x) rights, priorities and privileges arising under applicable law in the foregoing and in other similar intangible assets, (xi) applications and registrations for the foregoing, and (xii) rights and remedies against past, present, and future infringement, misappropriation, or other violation of the foregoing.

 

5


Intercompany Accounts ” means any receivable, payable or loan between any member of the PNX Group, on the one hand, and any member of the Spinco Group, on the other hand, that exists prior to the Effective Time and is reflected in the Records of the relevant members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group, except for any such receivable, payable or loan that arise pursuant to this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement.

Investment Agreement ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

IRS ” means the United States Internal Revenue Service.

Joint Action ” means any current or future Action with respect to which it is unclear at the onset of such Action whether Liabilities will arise primarily in connection with the Spinco Business or the PNX Business, including any of the Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(e) .

Law ” means any United States or non-United States federal, national, supranational, state, provincial, local or similar statute, law, ordinance, regulation, rule, code, order, requirement or rule of law (including common law).

Liabilities ” means any and all claims, debts, liabilities and obligations, absolute or contingent, matured or not matured, liquidated or unliquidated, accrued or unaccrued, known or unknown, whenever arising, including all costs and expenses relating thereto, and including, without limitation, those debts, liabilities and obligations arising under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, any law, rule, regulation, action, order or consent decree of any governmental entity or any award of any arbitrator of any kind, and those arising under any contract, commitment or undertaking.

NASDAQ ” means The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC.

Other Party’s Marks ” is defined in Section 4.05(a).

Party ” is defined in the Preamble to this Agreement.

PIMCO ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

PIMCO Transfer ” is defined in Section 2.01.

PNX ” is defined in the Preamble to this Agreement.

PNX Accounts ” is defined in Section 4.01(a).

PNX Action ” means any current or future Action that does not relate primarily to the Spinco Business and in which one or more members of the Spinco Group is a defendant or the party against whom any claim or investigation is directed, including any of the Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(b) , but excluding any Joint Action.

PNX Asset ” means:

(a) the capital stock of each member of the PNX Group; and

 

6


(b) except as otherwise provided in an Ancillary Agreement, all Assets of any member of the PNX Group or the Spinco Group that are not Spinco Assets.

PNX Business ” means the business now or formerly conducted by PNX and its present and former subsidiaries, joint ventures and partnerships, other than the Spinco Business but including the Goodwin Business.

PNX Common Stock ” means the outstanding shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per share, of PNX.

PNX Group ” means PNX and its subsidiaries, affiliates, joint ventures and partnerships, excluding any member of the Spinco Group but including Goodwin.

PNX Indemnitees ” is defined in Section 6.01.

PNX Liabilities ” means (i) Liabilities of any member of the PNX Group under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, (ii) the Assumed Spinco Liabilities and (iii) any other Liabilities of any member of the Spinco Group or the PNX Group, whether arising before, at, or after the Effective Time, that do not constitute Spinco Liabilities.

FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBT, NO LIABILITY SHALL BE A PNX LIABILITY SOLELY AS A RESULT OF PNX OR ANY OTHER MEMBER OF THE PNX GROUP BEING NAMED AS PARTY TO, OR IN, ANY ACTION.

Person ” means any natural person, firm, individual, corporation, business trust, joint venture, association, company, limited liability company, partnership or other organization or entity, whether incorporated or unincorporated, or any Governmental Entity.

Plan ” shall have the meaning set forth in the Employee Matters Agreement.

Policies ” means insurance policies and insurance agreements or arrangements of any kind (other than life and benefits policies, agreements or arrangements), including primary, excess and umbrella policies, comprehensive general liability policies, director and officer liability, fiduciary liability, automobile, aircraft, property and casualty, business interruption, workers’ compensation and employee dishonesty insurance policies, bonds and self-insurance company arrangements, together with the rights, benefits and privileges thereunder.

Prime Rate ” means the rate of interest announced by Bloomberg from time to time as the “prime rate,” “prime lending rate,” “base rate” or similar reference rate. In the event the Prime Rate is discontinued as a standard, the holder hereof shall designate a comparable reference rate as a substitute therefor. For purposes hereof, the Prime Rate as published by Bloomberg at www.Bloomberg.com under “Market Data: Rates & Bonds: Key Rates” at the close of business on each business day shall be the Prime Rate for that day and any immediately succeeding non-business day or days.

Record Date ” means the date designated by or under the authority of PNX’s Board of Directors as the record date for determining the shareholders of PNX entitled to receive the Distribution.

 

7


Record Holder ” means the Party or its agent in possession or control of the Shared Record for storage or archival purposes. Each Party shall be deemed to be the Record Holder for any Shared Record that is possessed or controlled by a member of such Party’s respective Group.

Record Requestor ” means the Party or its agent that is not identified as the Record Holder, which may require or request copies of, or access to, any Shared Record(s) possessed or controlled by the Record Holder.

Records ” means any Information, agreements, documents, books, records or files.

Request for Shared Record(s) ” means the request that shall be delivered by the Record Requestor to the Head Records Coordinator of the Record Holder setting forth the Shared Record(s) to which the Record Requestor is seeking access and, if applicable, clearly identifying the request as one of a regulatory nature.

Request to Extend Retention Period ” means the written request that shall be delivered by the Record Requestor to the Head Records Coordinator of the Record Holder within ninety (90) days of the end of the Retention Period applicable to any specific Shared Record(s) for which the Record Requestor is seeking an extension of the Retention Period. The written request shall state a specific extension of the Retention Period of up to, but not in excess of, one additional (1) year.

Restricted Fund ” means the Virtus Multi-Sector Short Term Bond Fund, or any fund utilizing a substantially similar strategy.

Restricted Fund Activities ” are defined in Section 4.04(d).

Retained Liabilities ” is defined in this Section 1.01 as set forth in the definition of “Spinco Liabilities.”

Retention Period ” means the retention period applicable to any specific Shared Record(s), as set forth in Schedule 11.02 to the Agreement and as it may be extended by a Request to Extend Retention Period, which period, whether or not extended, shall not exceed seven (7) years.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

Series A Preferred Stock ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

Series B Preferred Stock ” is defined in the recitals to this Agreement.

Shared Record(s) ” means those Records set forth on Schedule 11.02 , as amended from time to time by written agreement of the Parties.

Software ” means all computer programs (whether in source code, object code, or other form), algorithms, databases, compilations and data, and technology supporting the foregoing, and all documentation, including flowcharts and other logic and design diagrams, technical, functional and other specifications, and user and training materials related to any of the foregoing.

 

8


Spinco ” is defined in the Preamble to this Agreement.

Spinco Accounts ” is defined in Section 4.01(a).

Spinco Action ” means any current or future Action relating primarily to the Spinco Business in which one or more members of the PNX Group is a defendant or the party against whom a claim or investigation is directed, including any of the Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(a) , but excluding any Joint Action.

Spinco Articles ” means the articles of incorporation of Spinco in the form filed as an exhibit to the Form 10 at the time it becomes effective.

Spinco Assets ” means:

(a) the capital stock or partnership interests, as applicable, of Spinco;

(b) the Spinco Contracts; and

(c) except as otherwise provided in an Ancillary Agreement, all Assets that are (i) owned of record or held in the name of a member of the Spinco Group on the Distribution Date, (ii) treated for internal financial reporting purposes of PNX prior to the Distribution Date or on the Spinco Business Balance Sheet as owned by a member of the Spinco Group, excluding those relating primarily to Goodwin, (iii) on the Distribution Date used exclusively by one or more members of the Spinco Group, or (iv) transferred to a member of the Spinco Group pursuant to any Ancillary Agreement.

Spinco Business ” means the business comprised of the Spinco Assets and the Spinco Liabilities, excluding the Goodwin Business.

Spinco Business Balance Sheet ” means the consolidated balance sheet of the Spinco Group as set forth in the Information Statement, excluding the Goodwin Business.

Spinco Bylaws ” means the bylaws of Spinco in the form filed as an exhibit to the Form 10 at the time it becomes effective.

Spinco Common Stock ” means the outstanding shares of common stock, $.01 par value per share, of Spinco.

Spinco Contracts ” means the following agreements or arrangements to which PNX or any of its Affiliates is a party or by which it or any of its Affiliates or any of their respective Assets is bound, except for any such agreement or arrangement or part thereof (i) that is expressly contemplated not to be transferred or assigned by any member of the PNX Group to Spinco, or (ii) that is expressly contemplated to be transferred or assigned to (or remain with) any member of the PNX Group, in each case, pursuant to any provision of this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement:

(i) any agreement or arrangement entered into in the name of, or expressly on behalf of, any division, business unit or member of the Spinco Group;

 

9


(ii) any agreement or arrangement that relates primarily to the Spinco Business;

(iii) any agreement or arrangement representing capital or lease obligations of facilities or equipment primarily used by any member of the Spinco Group;

(iv) any agreement or arrangement or part thereof that is otherwise expressly contemplated pursuant to this Agreement or any of the Ancillary Agreements to be retained by, transferred or assigned to, any member of the Spinco Group;

(v) any guarantee, indemnity, representation or warranty of any member of the Spinco Group relating to, arising out of or resulting from the Spinco Business; and

(vi) the agreements or arrangements listed or described on Schedule 1.01(b) .

Spinco Group ” means Spinco, any of its respective subsidiaries and affiliates and any subsidiary or division of any member of the PNX Group that is included in the assets of the Spinco Business as reflected in the Spinco Business Balance Sheet, excluding Goodwin.

Spinco Indemnitee ” is defined in Section 6.02.

Spinco Liabilities ” means:

(i) the Liabilities listed or described on Schedule 1.01(c) and any and all Liabilities that are expressly contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement as Liabilities to be retained, assumed or retired by any member of the Spinco Group;

(ii) any and all Liabilities of PNX, Spinco, or any of their respective Affiliates, primarily relating to, arising out of or resulting from:

(A) the operation or conduct of the Spinco Business, or the ownership or use of the Spinco Assets, as conducted at any time prior to, on or after the Effective Time (including any Liability relating to, arising out of or resulting from any act or failure to act by any director, officer, employee, agent or representative of PNX, Spinco, or any of their respective Affiliates (whether or not such act or failure to act is or was within such Person’s authority)); or

(B) the operation or conduct of any business conducted by any member of the Spinco Group at any time on or after the Effective Time (including any Liability relating to, arising out of or resulting from any act or failure to act by any director, officer, employee, agent or representative of Spinco, or any of its Affiliates after the Effective Time (whether or not such act or failure to act is or was within such Person’s authority));

 

10


(iii) except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, Liabilities set forth on the Spinco Business Balance Sheet;

(iv) any and all Liabilities to the extent relating to, arising out of or resulting from any terminated, sold, discontinued or divested entity, business, real property, or Asset formerly and primarily owned or managed by, or associated with any member of the Spinco Group or the Spinco Business, or arising out of the sale thereof;

(v) any Liabilities relating to or arising out of the acquisition (whether through an acquisition of stock or assets or a merger, share exchange or other form of business combination) of any business prior to the Effective Time by any member of the Spinco Group, except to the extent such Liabilities arise out of or are based upon the issuance of securities of PNX in any such business combination transaction;

(vi) Liabilities arising under or in connection with the Form 10, except to the extent such Liabilities arise out of or are based upon information about PNX included in the sections of the Information Statement attached as Exhibit 99.1 to the Form 10 entitled “Summary—Our Company,” “Summary—Summary of the Spin-Off,” and “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off”, and excluding information included in the Information Statement regarding whether the Distribution is taxable;

(vii) any and all Liabilities, including those Liabilities listed on Schedule 1.01(d) , relating to, arising out of or resulting from any Indebtedness (including debt securities and asset-backed debt) of any member of the Spinco Group (whether incurred prior to, on or after the Effective Time);

(viii) any and all Liabilities of the guarantor under the Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities;

(ix) any and all Liabilities relating to, resulting from, or arising out of any Action that is primarily related to the Spinco Business, including any Spinco Action;

(x) any and all obligations of an insured Person under each Third Party Spinco Policy and each Third Party Policy to the extent related to or arising out of the Spinco Business; and

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Spinco Liabilities shall in any event not include:

(A) (i) any Liabilities that are expressly contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement as Liabilities to be retained or assumed by any member of the PNX Group, including any Liabilities of Goodwin and those set forth on Schedule 1.01(a) , and (ii) the Assumed Spinco Liabilities and any Liabilities of a guarantor under the Guaranteed PNX Liabilities (the Liabilities under this clause (A)(i) and (A)(ii), collectively, the “ Retained Liabilities ”);

(B) any Liabilities related or attributable to, or arising in connection with, the employment, service, termination of employment or termination of service of Spinco employees, which shall be exclusively governed by the Employee Matters Agreement; and

 

11


(C) any Liabilities related or attributable to, or arising in connection with, Taxes or Tax returns, which shall be exclusively governed by the Tax Separation Agreement.

FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBT, NO LIABILITY SHALL BE A SPINCO LIABILITY SOLELY AS A RESULT OF SPINCO OR ANY OTHER MEMBER OF THE SPINCO GROUP BEING NAMED AS PARTY TO, OR IN, ANY ACTION.

Tax ” shall have the meaning given to such term in the Tax Separation Agreement.

Tax Separation Agreement ” means the Tax Separation Agreement, substantially in the form of Exhibit B hereto, entered into at or before the Effective Time between PNX and Spinco, as amended from time to time.

Third Party Claim ” means a claim or demand made against a PNX Indemnitee or a Spinco Indemnitee by any Person who is not a Party or an Affiliate of a Party as to which such PNX Indemnitee or Spinco Indemnitee, as applicable, is or may be entitled to indemnification pursuant to this Agreement.

Third Party Spinco Policies ” means all Policies, whether or not in force on the Effective Time, issued by unaffiliated third-party insurers to PNX, Spinco, or any of their respective Affiliates that cover risks that relate exclusively to the Spinco Business.

Third Party Policies ” means all Policies, whether or not in force on the Effective Time, issued by unaffiliated third-party insurers to PNX, Spinco or any of their respective Affiliates that cover risks that relate to both the PNX Business and the Spinco Business.

Trademarks ” means all United States and foreign trademarks, service marks, corporate names, trade names, domain names, logos, slogans, designs, trade dress and other similar identifiers of source or origin, whether registered or unregistered, together with the goodwill connected with the use of and symbolized by any of the foregoing.

Transition Services Agreement ” means the Transition Services Agreement, substantially in the form of Exhibit C hereto, entered into at or prior to the Effective Time between PNX and Spinco, as amended from time to time.

ARTICLE II

REORGANIZATION; CONVEYANCE OF CERTAIN ASSETS;

ASSUMPTION OF CERTAIN LIABILITIES;

CERTAIN PAYMENTS; AND TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS

Section 2.01. Reorganization . On or prior to the Distribution Date, PIMCO, the direct parent of Spinco and a wholly-owned subsidiary of PNX, shall transfer to PNX all of the capital stock of Spinco held by PIMCO (the “ PIMCO Transfer ”). On or prior to the Distribution Date, Spinco shall transfer to PNX all of the capital stock of Goodwin held by Spinco (the “ Goodwin Transfer ”). On or prior to the Distribution Date and effective as of the

 

12


Effective Time, PNX shall transfer and assign to Spinco all of the Spinco Assets in exchange for a number of shares of Spinco Common Stock that, when combined with the shares of Spinco Common Stock already owned by PNX, shall equal all the shares to be distributed as provided in Section 3.03 below.

Section 2.02. Conveyance of Assets; Discharge of Liabilities . Except as otherwise expressly provided herein or in any of the Ancillary Agreements:

(a) Effective as of the Effective Time (i) all Spinco Assets are intended to be and shall become Assets of the Spinco Group, (ii) all Spinco Liabilities are intended to be and shall become the Liabilities of the Spinco Group, and (iii) all other Assets and Liabilities of PNX and its subsidiaries are intended to be and shall remain exclusively the Assets and Liabilities of the PNX Group.

(b) Effective as of the Effective Time, PNX agrees to transfer or cause to be transferred to Spinco or to such other members of the Spinco Group as Spinco may designate all right, title and interest of the PNX Group in and to all of the Spinco Assets.

(c) Spinco agrees that, effective as of the Effective Time, it will transfer or cause to be transferred to PNX or to such other member of the PNX Group as PNX may designate all right, title and interest of the Spinco Group in and to all Assets that are not Spinco Assets.

(d) Spinco agrees that it will, or will cause another member of the Spinco Group designated by Spinco to, (i) assume any of the Spinco Liabilities for which a member of the Spinco Group is not the obligor, effective as of the Effective Time, and (ii) timely pay and discharge all of the Spinco Liabilities, at and after the Effective Time.

(e) PNX agrees that it will, or will cause another member of the PNX Group designated by PNX to, (i) assume any of the PNX Liabilities for which a member of the PNX Group is not the obligor, effective as of the Effective Time, and (ii) timely pay and discharge all of the PNX Liabilities, at and after the Effective Time.

(f) In the event that any conveyance of an Asset, including conveyance of any Asset listed in Schedule 2.02(f) , required hereby is not effected at or before the Effective Time, the obligation to transfer such Asset shall continue past the Effective Time and shall be accomplished as soon thereafter as practicable.

(g) If any Asset may not be transferred by reason of the requirement to obtain the consent of any third party and such consent has not been obtained by the Effective Time, then (unless otherwise expressly agreed by PNX and Spinco) such Asset shall not be transferred until such consent has been obtained. PNX and Spinco, as the case may be, shall (i) cause the owner of such Asset to use commercially reasonable efforts to provide to the appropriate member of the other Group all the rights and benefits under such Asset, (ii) cause such owner to enforce such Asset for the benefit of such member, and (iii) cause such member to assume all obligations of such Asset, in each case to the extent that such action does not cause a breach or default under such Asset. Both parties shall otherwise cooperate and use commercially reasonable efforts to provide the economic and operational equivalent of an assignment or transfer of the Asset as of the Effective Time.

 

13


(h) From and after the Effective Time, each Party shall promptly transfer or cause the members of its Group promptly to transfer to the other Party or the appropriate member of the other Party’s Group, from time to time, any property received that is an Asset of the other Party or a member of its Group. Without limiting the foregoing, funds received by a member of one Group upon the payment of accounts receivable that belong to a member of the other Group shall be transferred to the other Group by wire transfer as promptly as practicable after the receiving party becomes aware of having received such funds.

(i) Except as expressly set forth in this Agreement, any Ancillary Agreement, or any instrument or document contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, neither any member of the PNX Group nor any member of the Spinco Group has made or shall be deemed to have made any representation or warranty as to (i) the Assets, business or Liabilities retained, transferred or assumed as contemplated hereby or thereby, (ii) any consents or approvals required in connection with the transfer or assumption by such party of any Asset or Liability contemplated by this Agreement, (iii) the value or freedom from any lien, claim, equity or other encumbrance of, or any other matter concerning, any Assets of such Party, (iv) the absence of any defenses or right of setoff or freedom from counterclaim with respect to any claim or other Asset of such Party, or (v) the legal sufficiency of any assignment, document or instrument delivered to convey title to any Asset transferred. EXCEPT AS MAY BE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY ANCILLARY AGREEMENT, ALL ASSETS WERE, OR ARE BEING, TRANSFERRED, OR ARE BEING RETAINED, ON AN “AS IS”, “WHERE IS” BASIS AND THE RESPECTIVE TRANSFEREES WILL BEAR THE ECONOMIC AND LEGAL RISKS THAT ANY CONVEYANCE OR OTHER TRANSFER SHALL PROVE TO BE INSUFFICIENT TO VEST IN THE TRANSFEREE A TITLE THAT IS FREE AND CLEAR OF ANY LIEN, CLAIM, EQUITY OR OTHER ENCUMBRANCE.

Section 2.03. Ancillary Agreements . Concurrently with the execution of this Agreement, PNX and Spinco (or their appropriate subsidiaries) will execute and deliver:

(a) A duly executed Employee Matters Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto;

(b) A duly executed Tax Separation Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit B hereto;

(c) A duly executed Transition Services Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit C hereto; and

(d) Such other agreements, leases, subleases, documents, or instruments as the Parties may agree are necessary or desirable in order to achieve the purposes hereof.

Section 2.04. Issuance of Spinco Common Stock . On or before the Distribution Date, and in exchange for the transfer of the assets as provided above, and the surrender for reissue of all certificates representing outstanding Spinco Common Stock, Spinco will issue and deliver to PNX a certificate representing shares of Spinco Common Stock constituting all the shares to be distributed as provided in Section 3.03 below.

 

14


Section 2.05. Resignations .

(a) On the Distribution Date, Spinco will deliver or cause to be delivered to PNX resignations of each individual who will be an employee of Spinco or another member of the Spinco Group from and after the Distribution Date and who is an officer or director of PNX or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates in the PNX Group immediately prior to the Distribution Date, except as otherwise agreed to in writing by the Parties.

(b) On the Distribution Date, PNX will deliver or cause to be delivered to Spinco resignations of each individuals who will be an employee of PNX or another member of the PNX Group from and after the Distribution Date and who is an officer or director of Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates in the Spinco Group immediately prior to the Distribution Date, except as otherwise agreed to in writing by the Parties.

Section 2.06. Limitation of Liability .

(a) Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement, no Party or any member of such Party’s Group shall have any Liability to any other Party or any member of each other Party’s Group in the event that any Information exchanged or provided pursuant to this Agreement (but excluding any such information included in the Form 10) which is an estimate or forecast, or which is based on an estimate or forecast, is found to be inaccurate.

(b) Except as provided in Section 4.02, Section 9.01 or as set forth in subsection (c) below, neither Party nor any member of such Party’s Group shall have any Liability to any other Party or any member of such other Party’s Group based upon, arising out of or resulting from any agreement, arrangement, course of dealing or understanding existing on or prior to the Effective Time (other than this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or any agreement entered into in connection herewith or therewith in order to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby), and each Party hereby terminates, and shall cause all members in its Group to terminate, any and all agreements, arrangements, course of dealings or understandings between it or any members in its Group and the other Party, or any members of its Group, effective as of the Effective Time (other than this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or any agreement entered into in connection herewith or in order to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby), unless such agreement, arrangement, course of dealing or understanding is set forth in any Ancillary Agreement or on Schedule 2.06(b) , and any such Liability, whether or not in writing, which is not reflected in any Ancillary Agreement or on such Schedule, is hereby irrevocably cancelled, released and waived effective as of the Effective Time. No such terminated agreement, arrangement, course of dealing or understanding (including any provision thereof which purports to survive termination) shall be of any further force or effect after the Effective Time.

(c) The provisions of Section 2.06(b) shall not apply to any of the following agreements, arrangements, course of dealings or understandings (or to any of the provisions thereof):

(i) any agreement or arrangement to which any Person other than the Parties and their respective Affiliates is a Party (it being understood that to the extent that the rights and obligations of the Parties and the members of their respective Groups under any such agreements or arrangements constitute PNX Assets or Spinco Assets, PNX Liabilities, or Spinco Liabilities, such agreements or arrangements shall be assigned or retained pursuant to this Article II); and

 

15


(ii) any agreements, arrangements, commitments or understandings to which any non-wholly-owned subsidiary or non-wholly-owned Affiliate of PNX or Spinco is a Party.

Section 2.07. Novation of Liabilities; Consents .

(a) Each Party, at the request of the other Party, shall use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain, or to cause to be obtained, any consent, release, substitution or amendment required to novate or assign all obligations under agreements, arrangements, licenses and other obligations or Liabilities for which a member of such Party’s Group and a member of the other Party’s Group are jointly or severally liable and that do not constitute Liabilities of such other Party as provided in this Agreement (such other Party, the “ Other Party ”), or to obtain in writing the unconditional release of all parties to such arrangements (other than any member of the Group who assumed or retained such Liability as set forth in this Agreement), so that, in any such case, the members of the applicable Group will be solely responsible for such Liabilities; provided , however , that no Party shall be obligated to pay any consideration therefor to any third party from whom any such consent, substitution or amendment is requested (unless such Party is fully reimbursed by the requesting Party).

(b) If the Parties are unable to obtain, or to cause to be obtained, any such required consent, release, substitution or amendment, the Other Party or a member of such Other Party’s Group shall continue to be bound by such agreement, arrangement, license or other obligation that does not constitute a Liability of such Other Party and, unless not permitted by Law or the terms thereof, as agent or subcontractor for such Party, the Party or member of such Party’s Group who assumed or retained such Liability as set forth in this Agreement (the “ Liable Party ”) shall, or shall cause a member of its Group to, pay, perform and discharge fully all the obligations or other Liabilities of such Other Party or member of such Other Party’s Group thereunder from and after the Effective Time; provided , however , that the Other Party shall not be obligated to extend, renew or otherwise cause such agreement, arrangement, license or other obligation to remain in effect beyond the term in effect as of the Effective Time. The Liable Party shall indemnify each Other Party and the members of such Other Party’s Group and hold each of them harmless against any and all Liabilities arising in connection therewith; provided , that the Liable Party shall have no obligation to indemnify the Other Party or any member of such Other Party’s Group with respect to any matter to the extent that such Other Party has engaged in any knowing violation of Law, fraud or misrepresentation in connection therewith. The Other Party shall, without further consideration, promptly pay and remit, or cause to be promptly paid or remitted, to the Liable Party or to another member of the Liable Party’s Group, all money, rights and other consideration received by it or any member of its Group in respect of such performance by the Liable Party (unless any such consideration is an Asset of such Other Party pursuant to this

 

16


Agreement). If and when any such Consent, release, substitution or amendment shall be obtained or such agreement, lease, license or other rights or obligations shall otherwise become assignable or able to be novated, the Other Party shall promptly assign, or cause to be assigned, all rights, obligations and other Liabilities thereunder of any member of such Other Party’s Group to the Liable Party or to another member of the Liable Party’s Group without payment of any further consideration and the Liable Party, or another member of such Liable Party’s Group, without the payment of any further consideration, shall assume such rights and Liabilities.

ARTICLE III

THE DISTRIBUTION

Section 3.01. Cooperation Prior to the Distribution .

(a) PNX and Spinco shall prepare, and PNX shall mail to the holders of PNX Common Stock, the Information Statement, which shall set forth appropriate disclosure concerning Spinco, the Distribution and any other appropriate matters. PNX and Spinco shall also prepare, and Spinco shall file with the Commission, the Form 10, which shall include the Information Statement. PNX and Spinco shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause the Form 10 to become effective under the Exchange Act.

(b) PNX shall, as the sole shareholder of Spinco, approve and adopt the Spinco employee benefit plans contemplated by the Employee Matters Agreement and PNX and Spinco shall cooperate in preparing, filing with the Commission under the Securities Act and causing to become effective not later than the Distribution Date any registration statements or amendments thereto that are appropriate to reflect the establishment of or amendments to any employee benefit plan of Spinco contemplated by the Employee Matters Agreement, including without limitation, a Form S-8 with respect thereto.

(c) PNX and Spinco shall take all such action as may be necessary or appropriate under the securities or blue sky laws of states or other political subdivisions of the United States in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement.

(d) Spinco shall prepare, file, and use all reasonable efforts to cause to be approved prior to the Record Date, the application to permit listing of the Spinco Common Stock on NASDAQ.

Section 3.02. Conditions Precedent to the Distribution . In no event shall the Distribution occur unless the following conditions shall have been satisfied or, in the case of any condition other than the condition set forth in Sections 3.02(i), (j) and (o) below, waived by PNX:

(a) PNX’s Board of Directors or a duly appointed committee thereof, shall, in its sole discretion, have established the Record Date and the Distribution Date and any appropriate procedures in connection with the Distribution;

(b) all necessary regulatory approvals shall have been received;

 

17


(c) the Information Statement shall have been mailed to the holders of PNX Common Stock;

(d) the Form 10 shall have become effective under the Exchange Act, and all registration statements referred to under Section 3.01(b) shall have become effective under the Securities Act;

(e) the Spinco board of directors, as named in the Form 10, shall have been elected by PNX, as sole shareholder of Spinco, and the Spinco Articles and Spinco Bylaws shall have been adopted and be in effect;

(f) the Spinco Common Stock shall have been approved for listing on NASDAQ, subject to official notice of issuance;

(g) PNX and Spinco shall have taken all such action as may be necessary or appropriate under the securities or blue sky laws of states or other political subdivisions of the United States in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement;

(h) PNX shall have received a solvency certificate from the chief financial officer of PNX, in form and substance satisfactory to PNX, regarding PNX after the Distribution;

(i) Spinco shall have received a viability opinion, in form and substance satisfactory to PNX, regarding Spinco after the Distribution;

(j) Spinco shall have established insurance arrangements with insurers of recognized financial responsibility for Policies in such amounts and covering such risks as is adequate for the conduct of the Spinco Business and the value of Spinco’s properties and as is customary for companies engaged in similar businesses in similar industries;

(k) the transactions described in Section 2.01, including the PIMCO Transfer and the Goodwin Transfer, shall have occurred;

(l) no order, injunction, or decree issued by any court of competent jurisdiction or other legal restraint or prohibition preventing consummation of the Distribution shall be in effect;

(m) PNX and Spinco shall each have performed its obligations under this Agreement and each Ancillary Agreement, which are required to be performed prior to or at the time of the Distribution;

(n) the Parties shall have consummated those other transactions in connection with the Distribution that are contemplated by the Information Statement to be consummated prior to or at the time of the Distribution and are not specifically referred to in this Agreement or the Ancillary Agreements identified in Sections 2.03(a) - (d); and

 

18


(o) all members of the Spinco Group shall have been released from their obligations as guarantors with respect to the guarantees listed or described on Schedule 3.02(o) .

Section 3.03. The Distribution . On or before the Distribution Date, subject to satisfaction or waiver of the conditions set forth in this Agreement, PNX shall deliver to the Distribution Agent a certificate or certificates representing all of the then outstanding shares of Spinco Common Stock held by the PNX Group, endorsed in blank, and shall instruct the Distribution Agent to distribute to each holder of record of PNX Common Stock on the Record Date one (1) share of Spinco Common Stock for every twenty (20) shares of PNX Common Stock so held by crediting the holder’s brokerage account. Spinco agrees to provide all certificates for shares of Spinco Common Stock that the Distribution Agent shall require in order to effect the Distribution.

ARTICLE IV

COVENANTS

Section 4.01. Bank Accounts .

(a) The Parties agree to take, or cause the respective members of their respective Groups to take, at the Effective Time (or such earlier time as the Parties may agree), all actions necessary to amend all agreements or arrangements governing each bank and brokerage account owned by Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group (the “ Spinco Accounts ”), including all Spinco Accounts listed or described on Schedule 4.01(a) , so that such Spinco Accounts, if currently linked (whether by automatic withdrawal, automatic deposit, or any other authorization to transfer funds from or to, hereinafter “ linked ”) to any bank or brokerage account owned by PNX or any other member of the PNX Group (the “ PNX Accounts ”) are de-linked from the PNX Accounts. From and after the Effective Time, no current or former employee of any member of the PNX Group shall have any authority to access or control any Spinco Account other than those who will be Spinco employees.

(b) The Parties agree to take, or cause the respective members of their respective Groups to take, at the Effective Time (or such earlier time as the Parties may agree), all actions necessary to amend all agreements or arrangements governing the PNX Accounts so that such PNX Accounts, if currently linked to a Spinco Account, are de-linked from the Spinco Accounts. From and after the Effective Time, no current or former employee of any member of the Spinco Group shall have any authority to access or control any PNX Account other than those who will be PNX employees.

(c) With respect to any outstanding checks issued by PNX, Spinco, or any of their respective subsidiaries prior to the Effective Time, such outstanding checks shall be honored following the Effective Time by the entity or Group owning the account on which the check is drawn.

(d) As between the two Parties (and the members of their respective Groups) all payments and reimbursements received after the Effective Time by any Party (or member of its Group) that relate to a business, Asset or Liability of another Party (or member of its

 

19


Group), shall be held by such Party in trust for the use and benefit of the Party entitled thereto (at the expense of the Party entitled thereto) and, promptly upon receipt by such Party of any such payment or reimbursement, such Party shall pay over, or shall cause the applicable member of its Group to pay over to the other Party the amount of such payment or reimbursement without right of set-off.

Section 4.02. Guaranteed Spinco and PNX Liabilities .

(a) Spinco shall use commercially reasonable efforts (excluding payment of money or incurrence of Liabilities) to obtain as promptly as practicable after the Distribution Date the release of all members of the PNX Group from any obligations with respect to Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities, including removing all members of the PNX Group from their obligations as guarantors with respect to the guarantees listed or described on Schedule 4.02(a) . In no event shall any member of the Spinco Group take any action with respect to any Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities which could be reasonably expected to adversely affect the PNX Group members in any way, including, without limitation, extending the term of any Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities or increasing the liability guaranteed thereunder, unless the guarantee or obligation of all PNX Group members is released as to any extended or modified liability obligations under such Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities or PNX otherwise consents in writing.

(b) PNX shall use commercially reasonable efforts (excluding payment of money or incurrence of Liabilities) to obtain as promptly as practicable after the Distribution Date the release of all members of the Spinco Group from any obligations with respect to Guaranteed PNX Liabilities to which they have not been released as of the Distribution Date, including removing all members of the Spinco Group from their obligations as guarantors with respect to the guarantees listed or described on Schedule 4.02(b) . In no event shall any member of the PNX Group take any action with respect to any Guaranteed PNX Liabilities which could be reasonably expected to adversely affect the Spinco Group members in any way including, without limitation, extending the term of any Guaranteed PNX Liabilities or increasing the liability guaranteed thereunder, unless the guarantee or obligation of all Spinco Group members is released as to any extended or modified liability obligations under such Guaranteed PNX Liabilities or Spinco otherwise consents in writing.

(c) In the event that any PNX Group member is required to pay or otherwise satisfy any Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities, without limiting any of PNX’s rights and remedies against Spinco under this Agreement or otherwise, in order to secure Spinco’s indemnity obligations to PNX hereunder in respect of such Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities, PNX shall be entitled to all the rights of the payee in any property of any member of the Spinco Group pledged as security for such Guaranteed Spinco Liabilities.

(d) In the event that Spinco Group member is required to pay or otherwise satisfy any Guaranteed PNX Liabilities, without limiting any of Spinco’s rights and remedies against PNX under this Agreement or otherwise, in order to secure PNX’s indemnity obligations to Spinco hereunder in respect of such Guaranteed PNX Liabilities, Spinco shall be entitled to all the rights of the payee in any property of any member of the PNX Group pledged as security for such Guaranteed PNX Liabilities.

 

20


Section 4.03. Insurance .

(a) Directors and Officers and Fiduciary Liability Policies. Following the Distribution, PNX will maintain directors’ and officers’ liability and fiduciary liability insurance coverage for a period of six (6) years from the Distribution Date for the directors and officers of Spinco who were directors or officers of PNX or members of the PNX Group as of the Distribution Date for acts as directors and officers of members of the PNX Group during periods prior to the Distribution Date.

(b) Third Party Policies.

(i) With respect to Third Party Policies, if an occurrence for which coverage is available under such Third Party Policies happens prior to the Effective Time, and a claim arising therefrom has been or is eventually asserted against Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group (including any officer, director, employee or agent thereof) and such claim is reported by Spinco to the carrier, with a copy to PNX, in accordance with the reporting provision of the applicable policy, then PNX will, or will cause the members of the PNX Group that are insured thereunder to, (A) continue to provide Spinco and any other member of the Spinco Group with access to and coverage under the applicable Third Party Policies and (B) reasonably cooperate with Spinco and take commercially reasonable actions as may be necessary or advisable to assist Spinco in submitting such claims under the applicable Third Party Policies, provided that Spinco shall be responsible for its portion of any deductibles or self-insured retentions or co-payments legally due and owing relating to such claims. For the avoidance of doubt, if an occurrence for which coverage is available under such Third Party Policies happens after the Effective Time (and is not attributable and related to an occurrence which occurred prior to the Effective Time), or a claim arising from an occurrence prior to the Effective Time is not reported by Spinco to PNX on or before the date when such occurrence must be reported to the carrier under the applicable Third Party Policy, then no payment for any damages, costs of defense, or other sums with respect to such claim shall be available to Spinco under such Third Party Policies.

(ii) With respect to all Third Party Policies, Spinco agrees and covenants (on behalf of itself and each other member of the Spinco Group, and each other Affiliate of Spinco) not to make any claim or assert any rights against PNX and any other member of the PNX Group (including the captive insurance companies that are insured under the Third Party Policies), or the unaffiliated third-party insurers of such Third Party Policies, except as expressly provided under this Section 4.03(b).

(c) Administration of Third Party Policies; Other Matters.

(i) From and after the Effective Time, Spinco or a member of the Spinco Group shall be responsible for the administration of all Third Party Spinco Policies and Spinco shall be responsible for any premium adjustments, audits, deductible bills, collateral, Taxes and claims handling charges or other expenses associated with Third Party Spinco Policies.

 

21


(ii) With respect to all Third Party Policies, from and after the Effective Time, the agent for the applicable policy shall be responsible for the Insurance Administration and Claims Administration of such Third Party Policies; provided that the retention of such administrative responsibilities by an agent of PNX is in no way intended to limit, inhibit or preclude any right to insurance coverage for any Insured Claim of a named insured under such Third Party Policies as contemplated by the terms of this Agreement; provided , further , that the retention of such administrative responsibilities by an agent of PNX shall not relieve the Person submitting any Insured Claim of the primary responsibility for reporting such Insured Claim accurately, completely and in a timely manner, or of such Person’s authority to settle any such Insured Claim within any period permitted or required by the relevant Third Party Policy.

(iii) Where Spinco Liabilities are specifically covered under a Third Party Policy for periods prior to the Effective Time, or where such Third Party Policy covers claims made after the Effective Time with respect to an occurrence prior to the Effective Time, then from and after the Effective Time, Spinco may claim coverage for Insured Claims under such Third Party Policy as and to the extent that such insurance is available up to the full extent of the applicable limits of liability of such Third Party Policy (and may receive any Insurance Proceeds with respect thereto as contemplated by Section 4.03(b) or Section 4.03(c)(v)), subject to the terms of this Section 4.03(c).

(iv) Except as set forth in this Section 4.03(c), PNX and Spinco shall not be liable to one another (or any of the members of their respective Groups) for claims, or portions of claims, not reimbursed by insurers under any Third Party Policy for any reason not within the control of PNX or Spinco, including coinsurance provisions, deductibles, quota share deductibles, self-insured retentions, bankruptcy or insolvency of any insurance carrier(s), Third Party Policy limitations or restrictions, any coverage disputes, any failure to timely file a claim by PNX or Spinco (or any of the members of their respective Groups), or any defect in such claim or its processing. The liability of PNX and Spinco to one another for such claims is expressly limited to the amount of Insurance Proceeds received with respect to such claims and allocated to the respective Parties in accordance with Section 4.03(c)(v). It is expressly understood that the foregoing provisions in this Section 4.03(c)(iv) shall not limit any Party’s liability to any other Party for indemnification pursuant to Article VI.

(v) Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.03(b), Insurance Proceeds received with respect to claims, costs and expenses under the Third Party Policies shall be paid, as appropriate, to PNX with respect to the PNX Liabilities, and Spinco, with respect to Spinco Liabilities. In the event that the aggregate limits on any Third Party Policies are exceeded by the aggregate of outstanding Insured Claims by the Parties or members of their respective Groups, the Parties agree to allocate the Insurance Proceeds received thereunder based upon their respective percentage of the total of their bona fide claims which were covered under such Third Party Policy, and any Party who has received Insurance Proceeds in excess of such Party’s respective percentage of Insurance Proceeds shall pay to the other Party the appropriate amount so that each Party will have received its respective percentage of Insurance Proceeds pursuant hereto. Each of the Parties agrees to use commercially reasonable efforts to maximize available coverage

 

22


under those Third Party Policies applicable to it, and to take all commercially reasonable steps to recover from all other responsible parties in respect of an Insured Claim to the extent coverage limits under a Third Party Policy have been exceeded or would be exceeded as a result of such Insured Claim.

(vi) In the event that the Parties or members of their respective Groups have bona fide claims under any Third Party Policy arising from the same occurrence and for which a deductible or self-insured retention is payable, the Parties agree that the aggregate amount of the deductible or self-insured retention paid shall be borne by the Parties in the same proportion which the Insurance Proceeds received by each such Party bears to the total Insurance Proceeds received under the applicable Third Party Policy pursuant to Section 4.03(c)(v), and any Party who has paid more than such allocable share of the deductible or self-insured retention shall be entitled to receive from the other Party an appropriate amount so that each Party has borne its allocable share of the deductible or self-insured retention pursuant hereto.

(d) Cooperation. The Parties agree to use (and cause the members in their respective Groups to use) all commercially reasonable efforts to cooperate with respect to the various insurance matters contemplated by this Section 4.03.

(e) Miscellaneous.

(i) Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to restrict Spinco or PNX, or any members of their respective Groups, from acquiring at its own expense any insurance Policy in respect of any Liabilities or covering any period. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, from and after the Effective Time, Spinco and PNX shall be responsible for obtaining and maintaining their respective insurance programs for their risk of loss and such insurance arrangements shall be separate programs apart from each other and each will be responsible for its own deductibles and self-insured retentions for such insurance programs.

(ii) Each of the Parties intends by this Agreement that a third-party Person, including a third-party insurer or reinsurer, or other third-party Person that, in the absence of the Agreement would otherwise be obligated to pay any claim or satisfy any indemnity or other obligation, shall not be relieved of the responsibility with respect thereto and shall not be entitled to a “windfall” (i.e., avoidance of the obligation that such Person would have in the absence of this Agreement). To the extent that any such Person would receive such a windfall, the Parties shall negotiate in good faith concerning an amendment of this Agreement.

Section 4.04. No Hire; No Solicit; Limited Non-Compete .

(a) Subject to subsections (b) and (c) below, none of PNX or Spinco or any member of their respective Groups will from the Effective Time through and including the 18 month anniversary of the Effective Time, without the prior written consent of the other Party, either directly or indirectly, on their own behalf or in the service or on behalf of others, (i) solicit, aid, induce or encourage any individual who is an employee of a member of the other Party’s Group to leave his or her employment, or (ii) hire any individual who, at the time of solicitation, is an employee of a member of the other Party’s Group.

 

23


(b) Nothing in this Section 4.04 shall be deemed to prohibit any solicitation of any employee or employment of any employee of one Party or its Group, other than a Goodwin Investment Professional, who (i) initially contacted the other Party, a member of the other Party’s Group or their representatives on his or her own initiative without any solicitation by such Party, a member of such Party’s Group or their representatives, (ii) responded to a solicitation directed at the public in general through advertisement or similar means not targeted specifically at such employee, the Party or member of the Party’s Group employing such employee, (iii) was referred to such Party, a member of such Party’s Group or their representatives, as applicable, by search firms, employment agencies or other similar entities provided that such entities have not been specifically instructed by such Party, a member of such Party’s Group or their representatives to solicit the employee, or (iv) was terminated by the other Party or a member of the other Party’s Group.

(c) Nothing in this Section 4.04 shall be deemed to prohibit the solicitation of any Goodwin Investment Professional who (i) was terminated by PNX or a member of the PNX Group, or has otherwise been removed by PNX or a member of the PNX Group from (or otherwise had his or her responsibilities substantially and adversely reduced with respect to the provision of investment advisory services to any Restricted Fund managed by Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group) without the prior written consent of Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group (for the avoidance of doubt, whether or not such individual’s employment with PNX or any member of the PNX Group has also been terminated), or (ii) (A) was providing investment management services to (or in respect of) any Restricted Fund managed by Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group within the six-month period immediately preceding PNX or any member of the PNX Group having resigned as adviser, sub-adviser or in a similar capacity with respect to any Restricted Fund managed by Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group, and (B) meets any one of the criteria set forth in subsections 4.04(b)(i) through (iii) above.

(d) From the Effective Time through and including the second anniversary of the Effective Time, without the prior written consent of Spinco, neither PNX nor any member of the PNX Group shall sponsor or act as an investment adviser or sub-adviser (or otherwise provide investment advisory services, directly or indirectly) to or in respect of any Restricted Fund (collectively, “ Restricted Fund Activities ”).

Section 4.05. Legal Names and Signage .

(a) Except as otherwise specifically provided in any Ancillary Agreement, each Party shall exercise commercially reasonable efforts to cease (and cause all of the other members of its Group to cease), as soon as reasonably practicable after the Distribution Date, but in any event within six (6) months thereafter: (i) making any use of any names or Trademarks that include (A) any of the Trademarks of the other Party or such other Party’s subsidiaries or Affiliates (including, in the case of Spinco, “ Phoenix Investment Partners ” or “ The Phoenix Companies, Inc. ” or any other name or Trademark containing the word “ Phoenix ”) and (B) any names or Trademarks related thereto including any names or

 

24


Trademarks confusingly similar thereto or dilutive thereof (with respect to each Party, such Trademarks of the other Party or any of such other Party’s subsidiaries or Affiliates, the “ Other Party Marks ”), and (ii) holding themselves out as having any affiliation with the other Party or such other Party’s subsidiaries or Affiliates; provided , however , that the foregoing shall not prohibit any Party or any member of a Party’s Group from (1) stating in any advertising or any other communication that it is formerly a PNX affiliate, (2) making use of any Other Party Mark in a manner that would constitute “fair use” under applicable Law if any unaffiliated third party made such use or would otherwise be legally permissible for any unaffiliated third party without the consent of the Party owning such Other Party Mark or (3) as may be required in any regulatory filing or submission or as may otherwise be required by law. In furtherance of the foregoing, as soon as practicable, but in no event later than six (6) months following the Effective Time, each Party shall (and cause all of the other members of its Group to) remove, strike over or otherwise obliterate all Other Party Marks from all of such Party’s and its subsidiaries’ and Affiliates’ assets and other materials, including any vehicles, business cards, schedules, stationery, packaging materials, displays, signs, promotional materials, manuals, forms, websites, email, computer software and other materials and systems; provided , however , that Spinco shall promptly after the Effective Time post a disclaimer on the “www.Virtus.com” website informing its customers that as of the Effective Time and thereafter Spinco, and not PNX, is responsible for the operation of the Spinco Business, including such website and any applicable services. Any use by any Party or any of such Party’s Subsidiaries or Affiliates of any of the Other Party Marks as permitted in this Section 4.05 is subject to their compliance with all quality control and related requirements and guidelines in effect for the Other Party Marks as of the Effective Time.

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements of Section 4.05(a), if any Party or any member of such Party’s Group exercised good faith efforts to comply with Section 4.05(a) but is unable, due to regulatory or other circumstance beyond its reasonable control, to effect a legal name change or other change in compliance with applicable Law such that an Other Party Mark remains in such Party’s or its Group member’s legal name, then such Party or its relevant Group member will not be deemed to be in breach hereof as long as it continues to exercise good faith efforts to effectuate such name change and does effectuate such name change within nine (9) months after the Effective Time, and, in such circumstances, such Party or Group member may continue to include in its assets and other materials references to the Other Party Mark that is in such Party’s or Group member’s legal name which includes references to “Phoenix” as applicable, but only to the extent necessary to identify such Party or Group member and only until such Party’s or Group member’s legal name can be changed to remove and eliminate such references.

(c) Notwithstanding the foregoing requirements of Section 4.05(a), Spinco shall not be required to change any name including the word “Phoenix” in any third-party contract or license, or in property records with respect to real or personal property, if an effort to change the name is commercially unreasonable; provided , however , that (i) Spinco on a prospective basis from and after the Effective Time shall change the name in any new or amended third-party contract or license or property record and (ii) Spinco shall not advertise or make public any continued use of the “Phoenix” name permitted by this Section 4.05(c).

 

25


Section 4.06. Auditors and Audits; Annual and Quarterly Financial Statements and Accounting .

(a) Each Party agrees to the following:

(i) Annual Financial Statements. For the period ending one hundred and eighty (180) days following the Effective Time and in any event solely with respect to the preparation and audit of each of the Party’s financial statements for any of the years ended December 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, each Party shall provide to the other Party on a timely basis all information reasonably required to meet its schedule for the preparation, printing, filing, and public dissemination of its annual financial statements and, to the extent applicable to such Party, for management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its disclosure controls and procedures and its internal control over financial reporting in accordance with all applicable provisions of Regulation S-K, including, without limitation, Items 307 and 308 of Regulation S-K and, to the extent applicable to such party, its auditor’s audit of its internal control over financial reporting and management’s assessment thereof in accordance with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the Commission’s and Public Company Accounting Oversight Board’s rules and auditing standards thereunder (such assessments and audit being referred to as the “ Internal Control Audit and Management Assessments ”). Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, each Party will provide all required financial and other Information with respect to itself and its Subsidiaries to its auditors in a sufficient and reasonable time and in sufficient detail to permit its auditors to take all steps and perform all reviews necessary to provide sufficient assistance to the other Party’s auditors with respect to information to be included or contained in the other Party’s annual financial statements and to permit the other Party’s auditors and management to complete the Internal Control Audit and Management Assessments.

(ii) Access to Personnel and Records. With respect to the fiscal year 2008, and any future fiscal year of each of PNX and Spinco, then each audited Party shall authorize its auditors, and use commercially reasonable efforts to cause its respective auditors, to make available to the other Party’s auditors (the other Party’s auditors, collectively, the “ Other Party’s Auditors ”), at the sole cost and expense of the Party requesting access, both the personnel who performed or are performing the annual audits of such audited party (each such Party with respect to its own audit, the “ Audited Party ”) and work papers related to the annual audits of such Audited Party, in all cases within a reasonable time prior to such Audited Party’s auditors’ opinion date, so that the Other Party’s Auditors are able to perform the procedures they consider necessary to take responsibility for, or otherwise to review to the extent deemed required, the work of the Audited Party’s auditors as it relates to their auditors’ report on or review of such other Party’s financial statements, all within sufficient time to enable such other Party to meet its timetable for the printing, filing and public dissemination of its annual or interim financial statements. In such an event, each Party shall make available to the Other Party’s Auditors and management its personnel and Records, at the sole cost and expense of the Party requesting access, in a reasonable time prior to the Other Party’s Auditors’ opinion or review date and the other party’s management’s assessment date so that the Other Party’s Auditors and the other Party’s management are able to prepare its annual or interim financial statements or to perform the procedures they consider necessary to conduct the Internal Control Audit and Management Assessments.

 

26


(b) In the event a Party restates any of its financial statements that include such Party’s audited or unaudited financial statements with respect to any balance sheet date or period of operation between January 1, 2005 and December 31, 2008, such Party will deliver to the other Party a substantially final draft, as soon as the same is prepared, of any report to be filed by such first Party with the Commission that includes such restated audited or unaudited financial statements (the “ Amended Financial Report ”); provided , however , that such first Party may continue to revise its Amended Financial Report prior to its filing thereof with the Commission, which changes will be delivered to the other Party as soon as reasonably practicable; provided , further , however , that such first Party’s financial personnel will actively consult with the other Party’s financial personnel regarding any changes which such first Party may consider making to its Amended Financial Report and related disclosures prior to the anticipated filing of such report with the Commission, with particular focus on any changes which would have an effect upon the other Party’s financial statements or related disclosures. Each Party will reasonably cooperate with, and permit and make any necessary employees available to, the other Party, in connection with the other Party’s preparation of any Amended Financial Reports.

(c) If any Party or member of its respective Group is required, pursuant to Rule 3-09 of Regulation S-X or otherwise, to include in its Exchange Act filings audited financial statements or other information of the other Party or member of the other Party’s Group, the other Party shall use commercially reasonable efforts (i) to provide such audited financial statements or other information, and (ii) to cause its outside auditors to consent to the inclusion of such audited financial statements or other information in the Party’s Exchange Act filings.

(d) Nothing in this Section 4.06 shall require any Party to violate any agreement with any third party regarding the confidentiality of confidential and proprietary information relating to that third party or its business; provided , however , that in the event that a Party is required under this Section 4.06 to disclose any such information, such Party shall use commercially reasonable efforts to seek to obtain such third party’s consent to the disclosure of such information.

Section 4.07. No Restrictions on Post-Closing Competitive Activities; Corporate Opportunities .

(a) Except as expressly provided herein or in any of the Ancillary Agreements, it is the explicit intent of each of the Parties that this Agreement shall not include any non-competition or other similar restrictive arrangements with respect to the range of business activities that may be conducted by the Parties. Accordingly, each of the Parties acknowledges and agrees that nothing set forth in this Agreement shall be construed to create any explicit or implied restriction or other limitation on (i) the ability of the other Party hereto to engage in any business or other activity that competes with the business of such Party, or (ii) the ability of the other Party to engage in any specific line of business or engage in any business activity in any specific geographic area.

 

27


(b) Except as expressly provided herein or in any of the Ancillary Agreements, PNX and the PNX Group shall have the right to, and shall have no duty not to, (i) engage in the same or similar business activities or lines of business as Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, (ii) do business with any client or customer of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, and (iii) employ or otherwise engage any officer or employee of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, and neither PNX nor the PNX Group nor any officer or director thereof shall be liable to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group or any of Spinco’s stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty by reason of any such activities of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group or of such person’s participation therein.

(c) Except as expressly provided in the Ancillary Agreements, Spinco and the Spinco Group shall have the right to, and shall have no duty not to, (i) engage in the same or similar business activities or lines of business as PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, (ii) do business with any client or customer of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, and (iii) employ or otherwise engage any officer or employee of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, and neither Spinco nor the Spinco Group nor any officer or director thereof shall be liable to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group or any of PNX’s stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty by reason of any such activities of Spinco or the Spinco Group or of such person’s participation therein.

(d) In the event that PNX or any other member of the PNX Group acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or matter that may be a corporate opportunity for both PNX or any other member of the PNX Group and Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, neither PNX nor any other member of the PNX Group nor any agent or advisor thereof shall have any duty to communicate or present such corporate opportunity to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group and shall not be liable to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group or to Spinco’s stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty as a stockholder of Spinco by reason of the fact that PNX or any other member of the PNX Group pursues or acquires such corporate opportunity for itself, directs such corporate opportunity to another person or entity, or does not present such corporate opportunity to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group.

(e) In the event that Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group acquires knowledge of a potential transaction or matter that may be a corporate opportunity for both PNX or any other member of the PNX Group and Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, neither Spinco nor any other member of the Spinco Group nor any agent or advisor thereof shall have any duty to communicate or present such corporate opportunity to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group and shall not be liable to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group or to PNX’s stockholders for breach of any fiduciary duty as a stockholder of Spinco by reason of the fact that Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group pursues or acquires such corporate opportunity for itself, directs such corporate opportunity to another person or entity, or does not present such corporate opportunity to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group.

(f) For the purposes of this Section 4.07, “corporate opportunities” of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group shall include, but not be limited to, business

 

28


opportunities (i) that Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group is financially able to undertake, (ii) that are, by their nature, in a line of business of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, including the Spinco Business, (iii) that are of practical advantage to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, (iv) in which Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group has an interest or a reasonable expectancy, and (v) in which, by embracing the opportunities, Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group will cause the self-interest of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group or any of their officers or directors to be brought into conflict with that of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, and “corporate opportunities” of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group shall include, but not be limited to, business opportunities (i) that PNX or any other member of the PNX Group is financially able to undertake, (ii) that are, by their nature, in a line of business of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, (iii) that are of practical advantage to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, (iv) in which PNX or any other member of the PNX Group have an interest or a reasonable expectancy, and (v) in which, by embracing the opportunities, PNX or any other member of the PNX Group will cause the self-interest of Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group or any of their officers or directors to be brought into conflict with that of PNX or any other member of the PNX Group.

Section 4.08. Right of Offset .

(a) To the extent PNX or any other member of the PNX Group has the right to receive any amounts hereunder, including under the provisions of Article VI, or under any Ancillary Agreement or under any other arrangement between any member of the PNX Group and Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, then following notice of such proposed offset PNX may satisfy such amounts out of and shall have a right of off-set against any amounts then currently due from Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group to PNX or any other member of the PNX Group hereunder or thereunder. The parties shall conduct a final accounting for such amounts within 60 days of the Distribution Date, and related payments required to be made by either Spinco or PNX to the extent the amounts determined by such final accounting are higher or lower, respectively, than PNX’s estimate shall be made not later than 90 days after the Distribution Date.

(b) To the extent Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group has the right to receive any amounts hereunder, including under the provisions of Article VI, or under any Ancillary Agreement or under any other arrangement between any member of the Spinco Group and PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, then following notice of such proposed offset Spinco may satisfy such amounts out of and shall have a right of off-set against any amounts then currently due from PNX or any other member of the PNX Group to Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group hereunder or thereunder. The parties shall conduct a final accounting for such amounts within 60 days of the Distribution Date, and related payments required to be made by either Spinco or PNX to the extent the amounts determined by such final accounting are higher or lower, respectively, than Spinco’s estimate shall be made not later than 90 days after the Distribution Date.

 

29


ARTICLE V

LITIGATION MATTERS

Section 5.01. Case Allocation .

(a) As of the Distribution Date, Spinco shall, and, as applicable, shall cause the other members of the Spinco Group to, (i) diligently conduct, at its sole cost and expense, the defense of the Spinco Actions, including the Spinco Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(a) and any applicable future Spinco Actions; (ii) notify PNX of material litigation developments related to the Spinco Actions; and (iii) agree not to file any cross claim or institute separate legal proceedings against PNX in relation to the Spinco Actions.

(b) As of the Distribution Date, PNX shall, and, as applicable, shall cause the other members of the PNX Group to, (i) diligently conduct, at its sole cost and expense, the defense of the PNX Actions, including the PNX Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(b) and any applicable future PNX Actions; and (ii) agree not to file any cross claim or institute separate legal proceedings against Spinco in relation to the PNX Actions.

(c) Notwithstanding anything in this Section 5.01 to the contrary, PNX shall have the right to participate in the defense of any Spinco Action and to be represented by attorneys of its own choosing and at its sole cost and expense.

(d) Spinco shall indemnify and hold harmless PNX and other members of the PNX Group against Liabilities arising in connection with Spinco Actions, and PNX shall indemnify and hold harmless Spinco and other members of the Spinco Group against Liabilities arising in connection with PNX Actions, in each case, in accordance with the indemnification provisions of Article VI.

(e) As of the Distribution Date, PNX shall, and, as applicable, shall cause the other members of the PNX Group to, (i) diligently conduct the defense of the Joint Actions, including the Joint Actions listed on Schedule 5.01(e) and any applicable future Joint Actions; (ii) notify Spinco of material litigation developments related to the Joint Actions; and (iii) agree not to file any cross claim or institute separate legal proceedings against Spinco in relation to the Joint Actions; provided that if it becomes clear that a Joint Action relates primarily to the Spinco Business then from and after such time such Joint Action shall instead be deemed to be a Spinco Action subject to clause (a) above; and provided , further , that if it becomes clear that a Joint Action does not relate primarily to the Spinco Business then from and after such time such Joint Action shall instead be deemed to be a PNX Action subject to clause (b) above. PNX and Spinco shall regularly meet to review and discuss the progress of the Joint Actions and the classification thereof. Any dispute regarding whether an Action remains a Joint Action shall be settled pursuant to the dispute resolution mechanics of Section 13.15.

(f) Until such time as the respective Liabilities of the members of the PNX Group and Spinco Group are determined in connection with any Joint Action, PNX and Spinco shall each pay 50% of the cost and expenses associated with the defense of such Joint Action. The parties agree that, to effect the foregoing sharing arrangement, counsel in connection with

 

30


any Joint Action shall be instructed to render separate bills to PNX and to Spinco. In the event that either Party pays any costs or expenses that are the responsibility of the other Party hereunder, the responsible Party shall promptly reimburse the other Party for such amounts. Spinco shall have the right to employ separate counsel to represent it and members of the Spinco Group if Spinco shall have reasonably concluded that there may be a legal defense available to members of the Spinco Group that are different from or in addition to those available to PNX or representation of both PNX (or any member of the PNX Group) and Spinco (or any member of the Spinco Group) by the same counsel would be inappropriate due to actual or potential differing interests between them, in which case fees and expenses of such counsel incurred by Spinco shall be included in the amounts allocated by the next sentence of this paragraph (f). Upon the determination of Liability of the members of the PNX Group and Spinco Group in connection with any Joint Action, Spinco shall indemnify and hold harmless PNX and other members of the PNX Group against the portion of such Liabilities relating primarily to the Spinco Business, and PNX shall indemnify and hold harmless Spinco and other members of the Spinco Group against the portion of such Liabilities relating primarily to the PNX Business, including, in each case, the costs and expenses associated with the defense of such Joint Action since the beginning of such Joint Action, which shall be allocated between PNX and Spinco in proportion to the Liability with respect to such Joint Action of members of the PNX Group, on the one hand, and members of the Spinco Group, on the other hand. Indemnification pursuant to this Section 5.01(f) shall be in accordance with the indemnification provisions of Article VI.

Section 5.02. Litigation cooperation .

(a) Each of PNX and Spinco agrees that at all times from and after the Effective Time, if an Action currently exists or is commenced by a third-party with respect to which a Party (or any member of such Party’s respective Group) is a named defendant but such Action is otherwise not a Liability allocated to such named Party under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, then the other Party shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause the named but not liable defendant to be removed from such Action and such defendant shall not be required to make any payments or contribution in connection therewith.

(b) If, in the case of any Action involving a matter contemplated by Section 5.01, there is believed to be a conflict of interest between the Parties, or in the event that any Third Party Claim seeks equitable relief which would restrict or limit the future conduct of the non-responsible Party or such Party’s business or operations, such Party shall be entitled to retain, at the responsible Party’s expense, separate counsel as required by the applicable rules of professional conduct (which counsel shall be reasonably acceptable to the responsible Party) and to participate in (but not control) the defense, compromise, or settlement of that portion of the Action where there is believed to be a conflict of interest or the Third Party Claim that seeks equitable relief with respect to the named Party.

(c) PNX and Spinco shall each use commercially reasonable efforts to make available to the other, upon written request, its officers, directors, employees and agents, and the officers, directors, employees and agents of its subsidiaries, as witnesses to the extent that such individuals may reasonably be required in connection with any legal, administrative or other proceedings arising out of the business of the other, or of any entity that is part of the

 

31


other Party’s Group in which the requesting Party or a member of its Group may be involved. The requesting Party shall bear all out-of-pocket expenses in connection therewith. On and after the Effective Time, in connection with any matter contemplated by this Section 5.02(c), the Parties will maintain any attorney-client privilege or work product immunity of any member of any Group as required by this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement.

ARTICLE VI

INDEMNIFICATION

Section 6.01. Spinco Indemnification of the PNX Group .

On and after the Distribution Date, Spinco shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless each member of the PNX Group, and each of their respective directors, officers, employees and agents (the “ PNX Indemnitees ”) from and against any and all Indemnifiable Losses incurred or suffered by any of the PNX Indemnitees and arising out of, or due to, (a) the failure of Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group to pay, perform or otherwise discharge, any of the Spinco Liabilities, (b) any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact contained in the preliminary or final Form 10, the preliminary or final Information Statement or any amendment or supplement thereto or the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading (other than the information about PNX included in the sections of the Information Statement attached as Exhibit 99.1 to the Form 10 entitled “Summary—Our Business,” “Summary—Summary of the Spin-Off,” and “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off,” or any amendment or supplement thereto), excluding information in the Information Statement regarding whether the Distribution is taxable, and (c) any breach by Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group of this Agreement; provided , that Spinco shall have no obligation to indemnify PNX or any other member of the PNX Group with respect to any matter to the extent that such party has engaged in any knowing violation of Law, fraud or misrepresentation in connection therewith.

Section 6.02. PNX Indemnification of Spinco Group .

On and after the Distribution Date, PNX shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless each member of the Spinco Group and each of their respective directors, officers, employees and agents (the “ Spinco Indemnitees ”) from and against any and all Indemnifiable Losses incurred or suffered by any of the Spinco Indemnitees and arising out of, or due to, (a) the failure of PNX or any member of the PNX Group to pay, perform or otherwise discharge, any of the PNX Liabilities, (b) any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact regarding PNX included in the sections of the Information Statement attached as Exhibit 99.1 to the Form 10 entitled “Summary—Our Business,” “Summary—The Spin-Off,” and “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off,” or any amendment or supplement thereto or the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading, and (c) any breach by PNX or any member of the PNX Group of this Agreement; provided , that PNX shall have no obligation to indemnify Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group with respect to any matter to the extent that such party has engaged in any knowing violation of Law, fraud or misrepresentation in connection therewith.

Section 6.03. Contribution .

In circumstances in which the indemnity agreements provided for in Sections 6.01(b) and 6.02(b) are unavailable or insufficient, for any reason, to hold harmless an indemnified party in respect of any Indemnifiable Losses arising

 

32


thereunder, each indemnifying party, in order to provide for just and equitable contribution, shall contribute to the amount paid or payable by such indemnified party as a result of such Indemnifiable Losses, in proportion to the relative fault of the indemnifying party or parties on the one hand and the indemnified party on the other in connection with the statements or omissions or alleged statements or omissions that resulted in such Indemnifiable Losses, as well as any other relevant equitable considerations. The relative fault of the parties shall be determined by reference to, among other things, whether the untrue or alleged untrue statement of a material fact or the omission or alleged omission to state a material fact relates to information supplied by Spinco or PNX, the Parties’ relative intents, knowledge, access to information and opportunity to correct or prevent such statement or omission, and any other equitable considerations appropriate in the circumstances.

Section 6.04. Insurance and Third Party Obligations . No insurer or any other third party shall be, by virtue of the foregoing indemnification provisions, (a) entitled to a benefit it would not be entitled to receive in the absence of such provisions, (b) relieved of the responsibility to pay any claims to which it is obligated, or (c) entitled to any subrogation rights with respect to any obligation hereunder.

Section 6.05. Indemnification Obligations Net of Insurance Proceeds and Other Amounts on a Net Tax Benefit Basis .

(a) Any Liability subject to indemnification or contribution pursuant to this Article VI, will (i) be net of Insurance Proceeds that actually reduce the amount of the Liability, (ii) be net of any proceeds received by an Indemnified Party from any third party for indemnification for such Liability that actually reduce the amount of the Liability (“ Third Party Proceeds ”), (iii) be reduced by any Tax benefit actually realized by the Indemnified Party (calculated on a with and without basis) arising from the incurrence or payment of any such Liability and (iv) be increased by any Tax detriment actually incurred by the Indemnified Party (calculated on a with and without basis) as a result of the receipt or accrual of the Indemnity Payment (as defined below) in respect of such Liability. Accordingly, the amount which any Indemnifying Party is required to pay pursuant to this Article VI to any Indemnified Party will be reduced by any Insurance Proceeds, Tax benefits actually realized or Third Party Proceeds theretofore actually recovered by or on behalf of the Indemnified Party in respect of the related Liability, and shall be increased by any Tax detriments actually incurred. If an Indemnified Party receives a payment required by this Agreement from an Indemnifying Party in respect of any Liability (an “ Indemnity Payment ”) and subsequently receives Insurance Proceeds or Third Party Proceeds, then the Indemnified Party will pay to the Indemnifying Party an amount equal to the excess of the Indemnity Payment received over the amount of the Indemnity Payment that would have been due if the Insurance Proceeds or Third Party Proceeds had been received, realized or recovered before the Indemnity Payment was made.

If a Tax benefit or Tax detriment is actually realized or incurred after the payment of any Indemnity Payment hereunder, the Indemnified or Indemnifying Party, as the case may be, shall pay to the other the amount of any such Tax benefit or Tax detriment when actually realized or incurred. Adjustments will made if any such Tax benefits are disallowed or such Tax detriments are not ultimately incurred.

 

33


(b) An insurer who would otherwise be obligated to pay any claim shall not be relieved of the responsibility with respect thereto or, solely by virtue of the indemnification and contributions provisions hereof, have any subrogation rights with respect thereto. The Indemnified Party shall use commercially reasonable efforts to seek to collect or recover any third-party Insurance Proceeds and any Third Party Proceeds to which the Indemnified Party is entitled in connection with any Liability for which the Indemnified Party seeks contribution or indemnification pursuant to this Article VI; provided that the Indemnified Party’s inability to collect or recover any such Insurance Proceeds or Third Party Proceeds shall not limit the Indemnifying Party’s obligations hereunder.

Section 6.06. Notice and Payment of Claims .

If any PNX or Spinco Indemnitee (the “ Indemnified Party ”) determines that it is or may be entitled to indemnification by a Party (the “ Indemnifying Party ”) under this Article VI (other than in connection with any Action or claim subject to Section 6.07), the Indemnified Party shall deliver to the Indemnifying Party a written notice specifying, to the extent reasonably practicable, the basis for its claim for indemnification and the amount for which the Indemnified Party reasonably believes it is entitled to be indemnified. After the Indemnifying Party shall have been notified of the amount for which the Indemnified Party seeks indemnification, the Indemnifying Party shall, within 30 days after receipt of such notice, pay the Indemnified Party such amount in cash or other immediately available funds (or reach agreement with the Indemnified Party as to a mutually agreeable alternative payment schedule) unless the Indemnifying Party objects to the claim for indemnification or the amount thereof. If the Indemnifying Party does not give the Indemnified Party written notice objecting to such claim and setting forth the grounds therefor within the same 30 day period, the Indemnifying Party shall be deemed to have acknowledged its liability for such claim and the Indemnified Party may exercise any and all of its rights under applicable law to collect such amount.

Section 6.07. Notice and Defense of Third Party Claims .

Promptly following the earlier of (a) receipt of notice of the commencement by a third party of any Action against or otherwise involving any Indemnified Party or (b) receipt of information from a third party alleging the existence of a claim against an Indemnified Party, in either case, with respect to which indemnification may be sought pursuant to this Agreement (a “ Third Party Claim ”), the Indemnified Party shall give the Indemnifying Party written notice thereof. The failure of the Indemnified Party to give notice as provided in this Section 6.07 shall not relieve the Indemnifying Party of its obligations under this Agreement, except to the extent that the Indemnifying Party is prejudiced by such failure to give notice. Within 30 days after receipt of such notice, the Indemnifying Party shall by giving written notice thereof to the Indemnified Party, (a) acknowledge, as between the parties hereto, liability for, and at its option elect to assume the defense of such Third Party Claim at its sole cost and expense or (b) object to the claim of indemnification set forth in the notice delivered by the Indemnified Party pursuant to the first sentence of this Section 6.07 setting forth the grounds therefor; provided that if the Indemnifying Party does not within the same 30 day period give the Indemnified Party written notice acknowledging liability or objecting to such claim and setting forth the grounds therefor, the Indemnifying Party shall be deemed to have acknowledged, as between the parties hereto, its liability to the Indemnified Party for such Third Party Claim. Any contest of a Third Party Claim as to which the Indemnifying Party has elected to assume the defense shall be conducted by attorneys employed by the Indemnifying Party and reasonably satisfactory to the Indemnified

 

34


Party; provided that the Indemnified Party shall have the right to participate in such proceedings and to be represented by attorneys of its own choosing at the Indemnified Party’s sole cost and expense. If the Indemnifying Party assumes the defense of a Third Party Claim, the Indemnifying Party may settle or compromise the claim without the prior written consent of the Indemnified Party; provided that the Indemnifying Party may not agree to any such settlement pursuant to which any remedy or relief, other than monetary damages for which the Indemnifying Party shall be responsible hereunder, shall be applied to or against the Indemnified Party, without the prior written consent of the Indemnified Party, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. If the Indemnifying Party does not assume the defense of a Third Party Claim for which it has acknowledged liability for indemnification under Article VI, the Indemnified Party may require the Indemnifying Party to reimburse it on a current basis for its reasonable expenses of investigation, reasonable attorney’s fees and reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in defending against such Third Party Claim, and the Indemnifying Party shall be bound by the result obtained with respect thereto by the Indemnified Party; provided that the Indemnifying Party shall not be liable for any settlement effected without its consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Indemnifying Party shall pay to the Indemnified Party in cash the amount for which the Indemnified Party is entitled to be indemnified (if any) within 15 days after the final resolution of such Third Party Claim (whether by the final nonappealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction or otherwise), or, in the case of any Third Party Claim as to which the Indemnifying Party has not acknowledged liability, within 15 days after such Indemnifying Party’s objection has been resolved by settlement, compromise or the final nonappealable judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE VII

EMPLOYEE MATTERS

Section 7.01. Employee Matters Agreement . All matters relating to or arising out of any employee benefit, compensation or welfare arrangement in respect of any present and former employee of the PNX Group or the Spinco Group shall be governed by the Employee Matters Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto, except as may be expressly stated herein. In the event of any inconsistency with respect to such matters between the Employee Matters Agreement and this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, the Employee Matters Agreement shall govern to the extent of the inconsistency.

ARTICLE VIII

TAX MATTERS

Section 8.01. Tax Separation Agreement . All matters relating to Taxes shall be governed exclusively by the Tax Separation Agreement substantially in the form of Exhibit B hereto, except as may be expressly stated herein. In the event of any inconsistency with respect to such matters between the Tax Separation Agreement and this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, the Tax Separation Agreement shall govern to the extent of the inconsistency.

 

35


ARTICLE IX

ACCOUNTING MATTERS

Section 9.01. Intercompany Accounts .

(a) Each Intercompany Account outstanding immediately prior to the Effective Time, in any general ledger account of PNX, Spinco or any of their respective Affiliates, other than those set forth on Schedule 9.01(a) , shall be satisfied and/or settled by the relevant members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group no later than the Effective Time by (i) forgiveness by the relevant obligor, (ii) one or a related series of distributions of capital, or (iii) cash payment by the relevant obligor to the relevant obligee, in each case as agreed to by the Parties.

(b) To the extent Intercompany Accounts are not satisfied in accordance with Section 9.01(a), each Intercompany Account outstanding immediately prior to the Effective Time under any of the general ledger accounts of PNX, Spinco or any of their respective Affiliates set forth on Schedule 9.01(a) shall continue to be outstanding after the Effective Time and thereafter (i) shall be an obligation of the relevant Party (or the relevant member of such Party’s Group), each responsible for fulfilling its (or a member of such Party’s Group’s) obligations in accordance with the terms and conditions applicable to such obligation, and (ii) shall be for each relevant Party (or the relevant member of such Party’s Group) an obligation to a third-party and shall no longer be an Intercompany Account.

ARTICLE X

TRANSITION SERVICES

Section 10.01. Transition Services Agreement . All matters relating to the provision of support and other services by the PNX Group to the Spinco Group after the Effective Time covered by the Transition Services Agreement, other than as provided in Section 11.07, shall be governed exclusively by the Transition Services Agreements substantially in the form of Exhibit C hereto, except as may be expressly stated herein. In the event of any inconsistency with respect to such matters between the Transition Services Agreement and this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, the Transition Services Agreement shall govern to the extent of the inconsistency.

ARTICLE XI

INFORMATION; SEPARATION OF DATA

Section 11.01. Provision of Corporate Records . As soon as practicable following the Effective Time, PNX and Spinco shall each arrange for the provision to the other of existing Records in its possession relating to the other Party or its business and affairs or to any other entity that is part of such other Party’s respective Group or to the business and affairs of such other entity.

Section 11.02. Access to Information . From and after the Effective Time, PNX and Spinco shall each afford the other and its accountants, counsel and other designated representatives reasonable access (including using commercially reasonable efforts to give access to Persons possessing information) and duplicating rights during normal business hours to all Records in its possession relating to the business and affairs of the other Party or a member of its Group (other than data and information subject to an attorney/client or other privilege), including, but not limited to, the Shared Records, insofar as such access is reasonably required by the other including, without limitation, for audit, accounting, regulatory and litigation purposes.

 

36


Section 11.03. Retention of Records . Except as otherwise required by law or agreed to in writing, each Party shall, and shall cause the members of its Group to, retain all information relating to the other Party’s business and affairs in accordance with the past practice of such Party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, either Party may destroy or otherwise dispose of any information at any time in accordance with the corporate record retention policy maintained by such Party with respect to its own records. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Shared Records shall be accessed, maintained, preserved, safeguarded, transferred, disposed of and destroyed in accordance with the procedures set forth in Schedule 11.03 .

Section 11.04. Confidentiality .

(a) Notwithstanding any termination of this Agreement, the Parties shall hold, and shall cause each of their respective subsidiaries to hold, and shall each cause their respective officers, employees, agents, consultants and advisors to hold, in strict confidence, and not to disclose or release or use, for any ongoing or future commercial purpose, without the prior written consent of the other Party, any and all Confidential Information concerning any other Party; provided , that the Parties may disclose, or may permit disclosure of, Confidential Information (i) to their respective auditors, attorneys, financial advisors, bankers and other appropriate consultants and advisors who have a need to know such information for our auditing and other non-commercial purposes and are informed of their obligation to, and agree to, hold such information confidential to the same extent as is applicable to the Parties and in respect of whose failure to comply with such obligations, the applicable Party will be responsible, (ii) if the Parties or any of their respective subsidiaries are required or compelled to disclose any such Confidential Information by judicial or administrative process or by other requirements of Law or stock exchange rule, (iii) as required in connection with any legal or other proceeding by one Party against any other Party, or (iv) as necessary in order to permit a Party to prepare and disclose its financial statements, or other required disclosures; provided , further , that each Party (and members of its Group as necessary) may use, or may permit use of, Confidential Information of the other Party in connection with such first Party performing its obligations, or exercising its rights, under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that any demand or request for disclosure of Confidential Information is made pursuant to clause (iii) above, each Party, as applicable and to the extent not prohibited by any applicable Laws, shall promptly notify the other of the existence of such request or demand and shall provide the other a reasonable opportunity to seek an appropriate protective order or other remedy, which such Parties will cooperate in obtaining. In the event that such appropriate protective order or other remedy is not obtained, the Party whose Confidential Information is required to be disclosed shall or shall cause the other applicable Party or Parties to furnish, or cause to be furnished, only that portion of the Confidential Information that is legally required to be disclosed and shall take commercially reasonable steps to ensure that confidential treatment is accorded such information.

(b) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, (i) the Parties shall be deemed to have satisfied their obligations hereunder with respect to Confidential Information if they exercise the same degree of care (but no less than a reasonable degree of

 

37


care) as they take to preserve confidentiality for their own similar information and (ii) confidentiality obligations provided for in any agreement between each Party or its Subsidiaries and their respective employees shall remain in full force and effect. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, Confidential Information of any Party in the possession of and used by any other Party as of the Effective Time may continue to be used by such Party in possession of the Confidential Information in and only in the operation of the PNX Business or the Spinco Business, as the case may be; provided , such Confidential Information may be used only so long as the Confidential Information is maintained in confidence and not disclosed in violation of Section 11.04(a). Such continued right to use may not be transferred (directly or indirectly) to any third party without the prior written consent of the applicable Party, except pursuant to Section 13.05(b).

(c) Each Party acknowledges that it and the other members of its Group may have in their possession confidential or proprietary information of third parties that was received under confidentiality or non-disclosure agreements with such third party prior to the Effective Time. Such Party will hold, and will cause the other members of its Group and their respective representatives to hold, in strict confidence the confidential and proprietary information of third parties to which they or any other member of their respective Groups has access, in accordance with the terms of any agreements entered into prior to the Effective Time between one or more members of the such Party’s Group (whether acting through, on behalf of, or in connection with, the separated businesses) and such third parties.

(d) Upon the written request of a Party, the other Party shall promptly, (i) deliver to such requesting Party all original Confidential Information (whether written or electronic) concerning such requesting Party and/or its Subsidiaries, and (ii) if specifically requested by such requesting Party, destroy any copies of such Confidential Information (including any extracts there from). Upon the written request of such requesting Party, the other Party shall cause one of its duly authorized officers to certify in writing to such requesting Party that the requirements of the preceding sentence have been satisfied in full.

Section 11.05. Privileged Matters .

(a) The Parties recognize that legal and other professional services that have been and will be provided prior to the Effective Time have been and will be rendered for the collective benefit of each of the members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group, and that each of the members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group should be deemed to be the client with respect to such pre-separation services for the purposes of asserting all privileges which may be asserted under applicable Law.

(b) The Parties recognize that legal and other professional services will be provided following the Effective Time which will be rendered solely for the benefit of PNX or Spinco, as the case may be. With respect to such post-separation services, the Parties agrees as follows:

(i) PNX shall be entitled, in perpetuity, to control the assertion or waiver of all privileges in connection with privileged information which relates solely to the PNX Business, whether or not the privileged information is in the possession of or

 

38


under the control of PNX or Spinco. PNX shall also be entitled, in perpetuity, to control the assertion or waiver of all privileges in connection with privileged information that relates solely to the subject matter of any claims constituting PNX Liabilities, now pending or which may be asserted in the future, in any lawsuits or other proceedings initiated against or by PNX, whether or not the privileged information is in the possession of or under the control of PNX or Spinco; and

(ii) Spinco shall be entitled, in perpetuity, to control the assertion or waiver of all privileges in connection with privileged information which relates solely to the Spinco Business, whether or not the privileged information is in the possession of or under the control of PNX or Spinco. Spinco shall also be entitled, in perpetuity, to control the assertion or waiver of all privileges in connection with privileged information that relates solely to the subject matter of any claims constituting Spinco Liabilities, now pending or which may be asserted in the future, in any lawsuits or other proceedings initiated against or by Spinco, whether or not the privileged information is in the possession of or under the control of PNX or Spinco.

(c) The Parties agree that they shall have a shared privilege, with equal right to assert or waive, subject to the restrictions in this Section 11.05, with respect to all privileges not allocated pursuant to the terms of Section 11.05(b). All privileges relating to any claims, proceedings, litigation, disputes, or other matters which involve both PNX and Spinco in respect of which both Parties retain any responsibility or Liability under this Agreement, shall be subject to a shared privilege among them.

(d) No Party may waive any privilege which could be asserted under any applicable Law, and in which any other Party has a shared privilege, without the consent of the other Party, which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed or as provided in subsections (e) or (f) below. Consent shall be in writing, or shall be deemed to be granted unless written objection is made within twenty (20) days after notice upon the other Party requesting such consent. Each Party shall use its reasonable best efforts to preserve any privilege held by the other party if that privilege is a shared privilege or has been allocated to the other party pursuant to Section 11.05(b).

(e) In the event of any litigation or dispute between or among any of the Parties, or any members of their respective Groups, either such Party may waive a privilege in which the other Party or member of such Group has a shared privilege, without obtaining the consent of the other Party; provided , that such waiver of a shared privilege shall be effective only as to the use of information with respect to the litigation or dispute between the relevant Parties and/or the applicable members of their respective Group’s, and shall not operate as a waiver of the shared privilege with respect to third parties.

(f) If a dispute arises between the Parties or their respective subsidiaries regarding whether a privilege should be waived to protect or advance the interest of either Party, each Party agrees that it shall negotiate in good faith, shall endeavor to minimize any prejudice to the rights of the other Party, and shall not unreasonably withhold consent to any request for waiver by the other Party. Each Party specifically agrees that it will not withhold consent to waiver for any purpose except to protect its own legitimate interests.

 

39


(g) Upon receipt by either Party or by any subsidiary thereof of any subpoena, discovery or other request which arguably calls for the production or disclosure of information subject to a shared privilege or as to which the other Party has the sole right hereunder to assert a privilege, or if either Party obtains knowledge that any of its or any of its Subsidiaries’ current or former directors, officers, agents or employees have received any subpoena, discovery or other requests which arguably calls for the production or disclosure of such privileged information, such Party shall promptly notify the other Party of the existence of the request and shall provide the other Party a reasonable opportunity to review the information and to assert any rights it or they may have under this Section 11.05 or otherwise to prevent the production or disclosure of such privileged information.

(h) The transfer of all Information pursuant to this Agreement is made in reliance on the agreement of PNX and Spinco as set forth in Section 11.04 and Section 11.05, to maintain the confidentiality of privileged information and to assert and maintain all applicable privileges. Nothing provided for herein or in any Ancillary Agreement shall be deemed a waiver of any privilege that has been or may be asserted under this Agreement or otherwise.

Section 11.06. Ownership of Information . Any Information owned by one Party or any of its subsidiaries that is provided to a requesting Party pursuant to Article VI, Article XIII, or this Article XI shall be deemed to remain the property of the providing party. Unless specifically set forth herein, nothing contained in this Agreement shall be construed as granting or conferring rights of license or otherwise in any such information.

Section 11.07. Separation of Data . Spinco acknowledges and agrees that PNX may, after the Effective Time, delete or cause to be deleted any Information which does not relate to the Spinco Business which is contained in, stored in or accessible through any Software provided to Spinco under the Transition Services Agreement or otherwise. The foregoing will not be deemed to be a violation of any provision of this Agreement or the Transition Services Agreement. The provisions of Section 11.04 apply to Spinco’s use of any such Information prior to its deletion.

ARTICLE XII

INTEREST ON PAYMENTS

Section 12.01. Interest . Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement or an Ancillary Agreement, all payments by one Party to the other under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement shall be paid by company check or wire transfer of immediately available funds to an account in the United States designated by the recipient, within thirty (30) days after receipt of an invoice or other written request for payment setting forth the specific amount due and a description of the basis therefor in reasonable detail. Any amount remaining unpaid beyond its due date, including disputed amounts that are ultimately determined to be payable, shall bear interest at a rate of simple interest per annum equal to the Applicable Rate. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein or in any Ancillary Agreement, in no event shall the amount or rate of interest due and payable exceed the maximum amount or rate of interest allowed by applicable law and, in the event any such excess payment is made or received, such excess sum shall be credited as a payment of principal (or if no principal shall remain outstanding, shall be refunded).

 

40


ARTICLE XIII

MISCELLANEOUS

Section 13.01. Expenses . Except as set forth on Schedule 13.01(a) or as specifically provided in this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, PNX shall pay (a) all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the spin-off and the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (including, without limitation, the costs and expenses set forth on Schedule 13.01(b) , transfer taxes and the fees and expenses of the Distribution Agent and of all counsel, accountants and financial and other advisors), (b) all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the preparation, execution, delivery and implementation of this Agreement and the Ancillary Agreements and (c) all legal, filing, accounting, printing, and other expenses in connection with the preparation, printing and filing of the Form 10 and the Information Statement.

Section 13.02. Notices . All notices and communications under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given (a) when received, if such notice or communication is delivered by facsimile, hand delivery or overnight courier, and, (b) three (3) business days after mailing if such notice or communication is sent by United States registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, first class postage prepaid. All notices and communications, to be effective, must be properly addressed to the party to whom the same is directed at its address as follows:

 

If to PNX, to:   The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
  One American Row
  Hartford, Connecticut 06102
  Attention:   General Counsel
  Fax:   (860) 403-7899
With copies to:   Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP
  425 Lexington Avenue
  New York, New York 10017
  Attention:   Gary I. Horowitz
  Fax:   (212) 455-2502
If to Spinco, to:   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
  100 Pearl Street, 9 th Floor
  Hartford, Connecticut 06103
  Attention:   Kevin J. Carr
  Fax:   (860) 241-1028
With copies to:   Day Pitney LLP
  200 Campus Drive
  Florham Park, New Jersey 07932
  Attention:   Warren J. Casey
  Fax:   (973) 966-1015

 

41


Either Party may, by written notice delivered to the other Party in accordance with this Section 13.02, change the address to which delivery of any notice shall thereafter be made.

Section 13.03. Amendment and Waiver . This Agreement may not be altered or amended, nor may any rights hereunder be waived, except by an instrument in writing executed by the Party or Parties to be charged with such amendment or waiver. No waiver of any terms, provision or condition of or failure to exercise or delay in exercising any rights or remedies under this Agreement, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such term, provision, condition, right or remedy or as a waiver of any other term, provision or condition of this Agreement.

Section 13.04. Entire Agreement . This Agreement, together with the Ancillary Agreements, constitutes the entire understanding of the Parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, superseding all negotiations, prior discussions and prior agreements and understandings relating to such subject matter. To the extent that the provisions of this Agreement are inconsistent with the provisions of any Ancillary Agreement with respect to the subject matter thereof, the provisions of such Ancillary Agreement shall prevail to the extent of the inconsistency.

Section 13.05. Consolidation, Merger, Etc.; Parties in Interest; Termination .

(a) Neither Party (referred to in this Section 13.05(a) as a “ Transferring Party ”) shall consolidate with or merge into any other entity or convey, transfer or lease all or any substantial portion of its properties and assets to any entity, unless, in each case, the other party to such transaction expressly assumes, by a written agreement, executed and delivered to the other Party hereto, in form reasonably satisfactory to such other Party, all of the Liabilities of the Transferring Party under this Agreement and the Ancillary Agreements and the due and punctual performance or observance of every agreement, obligation and covenant of this Agreement and Ancillary Agreements on the part of the Transferring Party to be performed or observed.

(b) Neither of the Parties hereto may assign its rights or delegate any of its duties under this Agreement without the prior written consent of each other Party. This Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the Parties hereto and their respective successors and permitted assigns. Nothing contained in this Agreement, express or implied, is intended to confer any benefits, rights or remedies upon any Person other than members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group and the PNX Indemnitees and Spinco Indemnitees under Article VI hereof.

(c) This Agreement (including Article VI hereof) may be terminated and the Distribution may be amended, modified or abandoned at any time prior to the Distribution by and in the sole discretion of PNX without the approval of Spinco or the shareholders of PNX. In the event of such termination, neither Party shall have any liability of any kind arising from such termination to the other Party or any other Person. After the Distribution, this Agreement may not be terminated except by an agreement in writing signed by the Parties; provided , however , that Article VI shall not be terminated or amended after the Distribution in respect of any PNX Indemnitee or Spinco Indemnitee without the consent of such Person.

 

42


Section 13.06. Further Assurances and Consents . In addition to the actions specifically provided for elsewhere in this Agreement, each of the Parties hereto will use commercially reasonable efforts to (a) execute and deliver such further instruments and documents and take such other actions as any other Party may reasonably request in order to effectuate the purposes of this Agreement and to carry out the terms hereof and (b) take, or cause to be taken, all actions, and do, or cause to be done, all things, reasonably necessary, proper or advisable under applicable laws, regulations and agreements or otherwise to consummate and make effective the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, including, without limitation, using commercially reasonable efforts to obtain any consents and approvals, make any filings and applications and remove any liens, claims, equity or other encumbrance on an Asset of the other Party necessary or desirable in order to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; provided that no Party hereto shall be obligated to pay any consideration therefor (except for filing fees and other similar charges) to any third party from whom such consents, approvals and amendments are requested or to take any action or omit to take any action if the taking of or the omission to take such action would be unreasonably burdensome to the Party or its Group or the business thereof.

Section 13.07. Severability . In the event that any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement should be held invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby, and the Parties shall endeavor in good-faith negotiations to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions with valid provisions, the economic effect of which comes as close as possible to that of the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions.

Section 13.08. Governing Law; Jurisdiction . This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with, and governed by, the laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to the conflicts of law rules of such state. Each of the parties hereto (a) consents to submit itself to the personal jurisdiction of the courts of the State of Connecticut or any federal court with subject matter jurisdiction located in the District of Connecticut (and any appeals court therefrom) in the event any dispute arises out of this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or any transaction contemplated hereby or thereby, (b) agrees that it will not attempt to deny or defeat such personal jurisdiction by motion or other request for leave from any such court, and (c) agrees that it will not bring any action relating to this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or any transaction contemplated hereby or thereby in any court other than such courts.

Section 13.09. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original instrument, but all of which together shall constitute but one and the same Agreement.

Section 13.10. Third Party Beneficiaries . Except as provided in Article VI and except as specifically provided in any Ancillary Agreement, this Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and should not be deemed to confer upon third parties any remedy, claim, liability, reimbursement, cause of action or other right in excess of those existing without reference to this Agreement.

 

43


Section 13.11. Specific Performance . The Parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms. Accordingly, it is hereby agreed that the Parties shall be entitled to provisional or temporary injunctive relief in accordance therewith in any court of the United States, this being in addition to any other remedy or relief to which they may be entitled.

Section 13.12. Limitations of Liability . Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, no Indemnifying Party shall be liable to an Indemnified Party for any special, indirect, incidental, punitive, consequential, exemplary, statutorily-enhanced or similar damages in excess of compensatory damages (provided that any such liability with respect to a Third Party Claim shall be considered direct damages) arising in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or the Ancillary Agreements.

Section 13.13. Force Majeure . No Party (or any Person acting on its behalf) shall have any liability or responsibility for failure to fulfill any obligation (other than a payment obligation) under this Agreement or, unless otherwise expressly provided therein, any Ancillary Agreement, so long as and to the extent to which the fulfillment of such obligation is prevented, frustrated, hindered or delayed as a consequence of circumstances of Force Majeure. A Party claiming the benefit of this provision shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after the occurrence of any such event: (a) notify the other Party of the nature and extent of any such Force Majeure condition, and (b) use due diligence to remove any such causes and resume performance under this Agreement as soon as reasonably practicable.

Section 13.14. Construction . The Parties have participated jointly in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. This Agreement shall be construed without regard to any presumption or rule requiring construction or interpretation against the party drafting or causing any instrument to be drafted.

Section 13.15. Disputes .

(a) Except as otherwise provided in any Ancillary Agreement, all disputes, controversies or claims between members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group, which are parties to this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, arising out of or relating to this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or the performance by the parties of its or their terms, whether based on contract, tort, statute or otherwise, including, but not limited to, disputes in connection with claims by third parties (collectively, “ Disputes ”), shall be resolved only in accordance with the provisions of this Section 13.15; provided , however , that nothing contained herein shall preclude any party to a Dispute from seeking or obtaining (i) injunctive relief to prevent an actual or threatened breach of any of the provisions of this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement, or (ii) equitable or other judicial relief to enforce the provisions of this Section 13.15 hereof or to preserve the status quo pending resolution of Disputes hereunder.

(b) Any party or parties to a Dispute of either Group may give the parties to the Dispute of the other Group written notice of the Dispute initiating the procedures hereunder. Within ten days after delivery of the notice of a Dispute, the receiving parties shall submit to the other a written response. The notice and the response shall include a statement of

 

44


each party’s respective position and a summary of arguments supporting that position and the name and title of the executive who will represent the claimants and of any other individual who will accompany such executive in resolving the Dispute. Within twenty (20) days after delivery of the first notice, the executives of both Groups shall meet at a mutually acceptable time and place, and thereafter as often as they reasonably deem necessary, and shall negotiate in good faith to attempt to resolve the Dispute. All reasonable requests for information made by one party to the another will be honored. If the Dispute has not been resolved by negotiation within forty (40) days of the notice of the Dispute, the board of directors of PNX and Spinco shall appoint independent committees that will negotiate in good faith to attempt to resolve the Dispute.

(c) If the Dispute has not been resolved by negotiation within sixty (60) days of the notice of Dispute, the Dispute may, by mutual consent of both Parties, be submitted for resolution by a panel of three arbitrators conducted in accordance with the CPR Rules for Non-Administered Arbitration or AAA Rules (the “ Rules ”), as modified by this Section 13.15. The Claimants acting jointly, on the one hand, and the Respondents acting jointly, on the other hand, shall each appoint one arbitrator within fourteen (14) days after the Claimants give an arbitration notice. The two arbitrators so appointed shall designate the third arbitrator by mutual agreement within 30 days after the arbitration notice is given. If the two arbitrators so appointed fail to designate the third arbitrator within such period, then any Party may request the International Institute for Conflict Prevention & Resolution (“ CPR ”) to appoint the third arbitrator within fourteen (14) days after such request. The third arbitrator shall be a lawyer licensed to practice in the State of Connecticut who shall not be related to, employed by, affiliated with or have had a substantial or ongoing business relationship with any member of either Group. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the amount in dispute is less than $5,000,000, then the Claimants and Respondents shall appoint, together, a single arbitrator, reasonably acceptable to them, licensed to practice in the State of Connecticut who shall not be related to, employed by, affiliated with or have had a substantial or ongoing business relationship with any member of either Group.

(d) The arbitration shall be conducted in Hartford, Connecticut (or at any other place agreed upon by the parties and the arbitrators). The parties will facilitate the arbitration by: (i) making available to one another and to the arbitrators for examination, inspection and extraction all documents, books, records and personnel under their control if determined by the arbitrators to be relevant to the dispute; (ii) conducting arbitration hearings to the greatest extent possible on successive days; and (iii) observing strictly the time periods established by this Section 13.15, the Rules or by the arbitrators for submission of evidence or briefs. All issues in connection with the Dispute, including procedural issues, shall be decided by the concurrence of at least two arbitrators, and all decisions by the arbitrators shall be accompanied by a written opinion setting forth the findings of fact and conclusions of law relied upon in reaching the decision. The panel of arbitrators s hall decide the issues submitted to it in accordance with the language and commercial purposes of this Agreement or the relevant Ancillary Agreement (as applicable); provided that all questions of law shall be governed by the internal laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to its conflict of laws rules. The arbitrators’ decision shall be final and binding as to all matters at issue in the Dispute; provided , however , if necessary such decision may be enforced by either party in any court having jurisdiction over the parties or the subject matter of the Dispute. Unless the

 

45


arbitrators shall assess the costs and expenses of the arbitration proceeding and of the parties differently, each party shall pay its costs and expenses incurred in connection with the arbitration proceeding, and the costs and expenses of the arbitrators shall be shared equally by the parties.

[Signatures appear on following page.]

 

46


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the day and year first above written.

 

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By:  

/s/ Peter A. Hofmann

Name:   Peter A. Hofmann
Title:   Chief Financial Officer
VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title   President

[Signature Page – Separation Agreement]

Exhibit 3.1

SECOND AMENDED AND RESTATED

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Delaware (hereinafter, the “ Corporation ”), hereby certifies as follows:

1. The name of the Corporation is Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

2. This Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation has been duly adopted by the board of directors of the Corporation (the “ Board of Directors ”) and by the stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with Sections 228, 242 and 245 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, as amended (the “ DGCL ”), and amends and restates the provisions of the existing Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation.

3. The text of the Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation is hereby amended and restated in its entirety to read as follows:

ARTICLE I

The name of the corporation is Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

ARTICLE II

The Corporation’s registered office in the State of Delaware is at 1209 N. Orange Street, City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, Delaware 19801. The name of its registered agent at such address is The Corporation Trust Company.

ARTICLE III

The nature of the business of the Corporation and its purpose is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which corporations may be organized under the DGCL.

ARTICLE IV

Section 1. Authorized Stock . The aggregate number of all classes of stock that the Corporation shall have the authority to issue is 1,000,000,000 shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share (the “ Common Stock ”), and 250,000,000 shares of preferred stock, par value $.01 per share (the “ Preferred Stock ”). The number of authorized shares of the Common Stock and the Preferred Stock or any other class of stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares thereof then outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the combined voting power of the outstanding shares of stock of the Corporation entitled to vote thereon, and, irrespective of Section 242(b)(2) of the DGCL, no vote of the holders of any of the Common Stock, the Preferred Stock or any other class or series of stock,


voting separately as a class, shall be required therefor except as may be otherwise provided in a Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation relating to a series of Preferred Stock.

Section 2. Preferred Stock .

(a) The Preferred Stock may be issued at any time and from time to time in one or more series. The Board of Directors is hereby authorized to provide for the issuance of shares of Preferred Stock in series and, by filing a certificate of designation pursuant to the applicable provisions of the DGCL (hereinafter referred to as a “ Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation ”), to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each such series, and to fix the designation, powers, preferences and rights of shares of each such series and the qualifications, limitations and restrictions thereof.

(b) The authority of the Board of Directors with respect to each series of Preferred Stock shall include, but not be limited to, determination of the following:

(i) the designation of the series, which may be by distinguishing number, letter or title;

(ii) the number of shares of the series;

(iii) whether dividends, if any, shall be cumulative or non-cumulative and the dividend rate of the series;

(iv) whether dividends, if any, shall be payable in cash, in kind or otherwise;

(v) the dates on which dividends, if any, shall be payable;

(vi) the redemption rights and price or prices, if any, for shares of the series;

(vii) the terms and amount of any sinking fund provided for the purchase or redemption of shares of the series;

(viii) the amounts payable on shares of the series in the event of any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the affairs of the Corporation;

(ix) whether the shares of the series shall be convertible or exchangeable into shares of any other class or series, or any other security, of the Corporation or any other corporation, and, if so, the specification of such other class or series or such other security, the conversion or exchange price or prices or rate or rates, any adjustments thereof, the date or dates as of which such shares shall be convertible or exchangeable and all other terms and conditions upon which such conversion or exchange may be made;

(x) restrictions on the issuance of shares of the same series or of any other class or series; and

 

2


(xi) whether or not the holders of the shares of such series shall have voting rights, in addition to the voting rights provided by law, and if so, the terms of such voting rights, which may provide, among other things and subject to the other provisions of this Certificate of Incorporation, that each share of such series shall carry one vote or more or less than one vote per share, that the holders of such series shall be entitled to vote on certain matters as a separate class (which for such purpose may be comprised solely of such series and one or more other series or classes of stock of the Corporation).

(c) The Common Stock shall be subject to the express terms of the Preferred Stock and any series thereof.

(d) Subject to the rights of the holders of any series of Preferred Stock, the number of authorized shares of any series of Preferred Stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares thereof then outstanding) by resolution of the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

(e) Except as otherwise required by law, holders of Common Stock, as such, shall not be entitled to vote on any amendment of this Certificate of Incorporation or to a Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation that relates solely to one or more outstanding series of Preferred Stock if the holders of such series are entitled, either separately or together with the holders of one or more other series of Preferred Stock, to vote thereon as a separate class pursuant to this Certificate of Incorporation or a Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation or pursuant to the DGCL as currently in effect or as the same may hereafter be amended.

Section 3. Voting in Election of Directors . Except as may be required by law or as provided in this Certificate of Incorporation or in a Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation, holders of Common Stock shall have the exclusive right to vote for the election of directors and for all other purposes, and holders of Preferred Stock shall not be entitled to vote on any matter or receive notice of any meeting of stockholders.

Section 4. Owner . The Corporation shall be entitled to treat the person in whose name any share of its stock is registered as the owner thereof for all purposes and shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to, or interest in, such share on the part of any other person, whether or not the Corporation shall have notice thereof, except as expressly provided by applicable law.

ARTICLE V

The Corporation is to have perpetual existence.

ARTICLE VI

In furtherance and not in limitation of the powers conferred by statute, the Board of Directors, acting by resolution adopted by a majority of the entire Board of Directors at any special or regular meeting of the Board of Directors, is expressly authorized to make, adopt, alter, amend or repeal the by-laws of the Corporation if, in the case of such special meeting only, notice of such adoption, alteration, amendment or repeal is contained in the notice or waiver of such meeting.

 

3


ARTICLE VII

Meetings of stockholders may be held within or without the State of Delaware, as the by-laws of the Corporation may provide. The books of the Corporation may be kept outside the State of Delaware at such place or places as may be designated from time to time by the Board of Directors or in the by-laws of the Corporation. Election of directors of the Corporation need not be by written ballot unless the by-laws of the Corporation so provide.

ARTICLE VIII

(a) The business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed by or under the direction of a Board of Directors consisting of not less than three (3) members. Subject to the rights of the holders of shares of any class or series of Preferred Stock, if any, the exact number of directors shall be fixed solely by the Board of Directors and the directors shall be classified, with respect to the time for which they severally hold office, into three classes, one class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in 2009, another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in 2010, and another class to hold office initially for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in 2011, with the members of each class to hold office until their successors have been duly elected and qualified. At each annual meeting of stockholders, the successors to such directors whose terms expire at that meeting shall be elected to hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in the third year following the year of their election and until their successors have been duly elected and qualified.

(b) Advance notice of nominations for the election of directors, other than by the Board of Directors or a duly authorized committee thereof or any authorized officer of the Corporation to whom the Board of Directors or such committee shall have delegated such authority and information concerning nominees, shall be given in the manner provided in the by-laws.

(c) Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock, if any, to elect additional directors under specified circumstances, newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors and any vacancies on the Board of Directors resulting from death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal from office or other cause shall be filled only by a majority vote of the directors then in office and not by stockholders, although less than a quorum, and directors so chosen shall hold office for a term expiring at the next annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of the class to which they have been elected expires. No decrease in the number of directors constituting the Board of Directors shall shorten the term of any incumbent director. Except as otherwise required by applicable law and subject to the rights, if any, of the holders of shares of Preferred Stock then outstanding, any or all of the directors of the Corporation may be removed from office at any time, but only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of the holders of at least a majority of the combined voting power of the Corporation’s then outstanding capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors.

(d) Notwithstanding anything contained in this Certificate of Incorporation to the contrary, but in addition to any vote of the holders of any class or series of the stock of this Corporation required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66  2 / 3 % of the total voting power of all classes of outstanding

 

4


capital stock, voting together as a single class, shall be required to amend, alter or repeal, or to adopt any provision inconsistent with, this Article VIII.

ARTICLE IX

Section 1. Limitation on Liability of Directors . The directors of the Corporation shall be entitled to the benefits of all limitations on the liability of directors generally that are now or hereafter become available under the DGCL. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, no director of the Corporation shall be liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability (i) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the Corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) under Section 174 of the DGCL, or (iv) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit. Any repeal or modification of this Article IX shall be prospective only, and shall not affect, to the detriment of any director, any limitation on the personal liability of a director of the Corporation existing at the time of such repeal or modification.

Section 2. Right of Directors and Officers To Indemnity From the Corporation . Each person who is or was a party to or subject to, or is threatened to be made a party to or to be the subject of, any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative in nature (including any legislative or self-regulatory proceeding), by reason of the fact that he or she is or was, or had agreed to become a director or officer of the Corporation or is or was serving, or had agreed to serve, at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee of, or in a similar capacity for, another corporation or any limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including any employee benefit plan of the Corporation or of any of its affiliates and any charitable or not-for-profit enterprise (any such person being sometimes referred to hereafter as an “ Indemnitee ”), whether the basis of such proceeding is alleged action in an official capacity as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee or in any other capacity while serving as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee, shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Corporation to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law, as the same exists or may hereafter be amended (but, in the case of any such amendment, only to the extent that such amendment permits the Corporation to provide broader indemnification rights than such law permitted the Corporation to provide prior to such amendment), against all expense, liability and loss (including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes or penalties and amounts paid in settlement) reasonably incurred or suffered by such Indemnitee in connection therewith; provided , however , that, except as provided in Section 4 of this Article IX with respect to proceedings to enforce rights to indemnification, the Corporation shall indemnify any such Indemnitee in connection with a proceeding (or part thereof) initiated by such Indemnitee only if such proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

Section 3. Advancement of Expenses . In addition to the right to indemnification conferred in Section 2 of this Article IX, an Indemnitee shall also have the right to be paid by the Corporation the expenses (including attorney’s fees) incurred in defending any such proceeding in advance of its final disposition (hereinafter an “advancement of expenses”); provided , however , that, if the Delaware General Corporation Law requires, an advancement of expenses incurred by an Indemnitee in his or her capacity as a director or officer (and not in any

 

5


other capacity in which service was or is rendered by such Indemnitee, including, without limitation, service to an employee benefit plan) shall be made only upon delivery to the Corporation of an undertaking (hereinafter an “undertaking”), by or on behalf of such Indemnitee, to repay all amounts so advanced if it shall ultimately be determined by final judicial decision from which there is no further right to appeal (hereinafter a “final adjudication”) that such Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified for such expenses under this Section 3 or otherwise.

Section 4 . Right of Indemnitee to Bring Suit . If a claim under Section 2 or 3 of this Article IX is not paid in full by the Corporation within sixty (60) days after a written claim has been received by the Corporation, except in the case of a claim for an advancement of expenses, in which case the applicable period shall be twenty (20) days, the Indemnitee may at any time thereafter bring suit against the Corporation to recover the unpaid amount of the claim. If successful in whole or in part in any such suit, or in a suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Indemnitee shall be entitled to be paid also the expense of prosecuting or defending such suit. In (i) any suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification hereunder (but not in a suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to an advancement of expenses) it shall be a defense that, and (ii) in any suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking the Corporation shall be entitled to recover such expenses upon a final adjudication that, the Indemnitee has not met any applicable standard for indemnification set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law. Neither the failure of the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit that indemnification of the Indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because the Indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law, nor an actual determination by the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) that the Indemnitee has not met such applicable standard of conduct, shall create a presumption that the Indemnitee has not met the applicable standard of conduct or, in the case of such a suit brought by the Indemnitee, be a defense to such suit. In any suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification or to an advancement of expenses hereunder, or brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the burden of proving that the Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified, or to such advancement of expenses, under this Article IX or otherwise shall be on the Corporation.

Section 5. Procedural Matters . The right to indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by this Article IX shall exist, and shall continue, as to any person who formerly was an officer or director of the Corporation in respect of acts or omissions occurring or alleged to have occurred while he or she was an officer or director of the Corporation and shall inure to the benefit of the estate, heirs, executors and administrators of the Indemnitees. Unless otherwise required by law, the burden of proving that the Indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification or advancement of expenses under this Article IX shall be on the Corporation. The Corporation may, by provisions in its by-laws or by agreement with one or more Indemnitees, establish procedures for the application of the foregoing provisions of this Article IX, including a provision defining terms used in this Article IX. The right of an Indemnitee to indemnification or advances as granted by this Article IX shall be a contractual obligation of the

 

6


Corporation and, as such, shall be enforceable by the Indemnitee in any court of competent jurisdiction.

Section 6. Amendment . No amendment, termination or repeal of this Article IX or of the relevant provisions of the DGCL or any other applicable laws shall affect or diminish in any way the rights of any Indemnitee to indemnification under the provisions hereof with respect to any action, suit, proceeding or investigation arising out of or relating to any actions, transactions or facts occurring prior to the final adoption of such amendment, termination or repeal.

Section 7. Other Rights to Indemnity . The indemnification and advancement of expenses provided by this Article IX shall not be exclusive of any other rights to which an Indemnitee seeking indemnification or advancement of expenses may be entitled under any law (common or statutory), agreement, vote of stockholders or action of the Board of Directors or otherwise, both as to action in his or her official capacity and as to action in any other capacity while holding office for the Corporation, and nothing contained in this Article IX shall be deemed to prohibit the Corporation from entering into agreements with officers and directors providing indemnification rights and procedures different from those set forth in this Article IX.

Section 8. Other Indemnification and Advancement of Expenses . In addition to indemnification by the Corporation of current and former officers and directors and advancement of expenses by the Corporation to current and former officers and directors as permitted by the foregoing provisions of this Article IX, the Corporation may, in a manner and to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify current and former agents and other persons serving the Corporation and advance expenses to current and former employees, agents and other persons serving the Corporation, in each case as may be authorized by the Board of Directors, and any rights to indemnity or advancement of expenses granted to such persons may be equivalent to, or greater or less than, those provided to directors, officers and employees by this Article IX.

Section 9. Insurance . The Corporation may purchase and maintain insurance, at its expense, to protect itself and any current or former director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation or of another corporation or a limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise (including any employee benefit plan) in which the Corporation has an interest against any expense, liability or loss incurred by the Corporation or such person in his or her capacity as such, or arising out of his or her status as such, whether or not the Corporation would have the power.

ARTICLE X

Any action required or permitted to be taken by the stockholders of the Corporation must be effected at a duly called meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation, and the ability of the stockholders to consent in writing to the taking of any action is specifically denied. Special meetings of stockholders of the Corporation may be called only by the Board of Directors.

 

7


ARTICLE XI

The Corporation reserves the right to amend, alter, change or repeal any provision contained in this Certificate of Incorporation in the manner now or hereafter prescribed herein and by the laws of the State of Delaware, and all rights conferred upon stockholders herein are granted subject to this reservation.

[ Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank ]

 

8


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has caused this Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation to be executed by George R. Aylward, Jr., its President, this 18th day of December, 2008.

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title:   President

[ Virtus Second Amended and Restated Charter ]

 

9

Exhibit 3.2

 

  

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED

BYLAWS

OF

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

As Adopted on December 18, 2008

 

 


AMENDED AND RESTATED

BYLAWS OF

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

       Page

ARTICLE I

  
Stockholders   

Section 1.01. Annual Meeting

   6

Section 1.02. Special Meetings

   6

Section 1.03. Notice of Meetings; Waiver

   6

Section 1.04. Quorum

   7

Section 1.05. Voting

   7

Section 1.06. Voting by Ballot

   7

Section 1.07. Adjournment

   7

Section 1.08. Proxies

   8

Section 1.09. Organization; Procedure; Conduct of Meeting

   8

Section 1.10. Notice of Stockholder Business and Nominations

   9

Section 1.11. Inspectors of Elections

   13

Section 1.12. Opening and Closing of Polls

   14

ARTICLE II

  
Board of Directors   

Section 2.01. General Powers

   14

Section 2.02. Number of Directors

   15

Section 2.03. Classified Board of Directors; Election of Directors

   15

Section 2.04. The Chairperson

   15

Section 2.05. The Vice Chairperson

   15

Section 2.06. Annual and Regular Meetings

   15

Section 2.07. Special Meetings; Notice

   16

Section 2.08. Quorum; Voting

   16

Section 2.09. Adjournment

   16

Section 2.10. Action Without a Meeting

   16

Section 2.11. Regulations; Manner of Acting

   17

Section 2.12. Action by Telephonic Communications

   17

Section 2.13. Resignations

   17

Section 2.14. Removal of Directors

   17

Section 2.15. Vacancies and Newly Created Directorships

   17

Section 2.16. Compensation

   18

Section 2.17. Reliance on Accounts and Reports, etc.

   18

 


ARTICLE III

  
Committees   

Section 3.01. Standing Committees

   18

Section 3.02. Designation of Members and Chairpersons of Committees

   18

Section 3.03. Notices of Times of Meetings of Committees and Presiding Officers

   18

Section 3.04. Governance Committee

   19

Section 3.05. Compensation Committee

   19

Section 3.06. Audit Committee

   19

Section 3.07. Other Committees

   19

Section 3.08. Powers

   19

Section 3.09. Proceedings

   20

Section 3.10. Quorum and Manner of Acting

   20

Section 3.11. Action by Telephone Communications

   20

Section 3.12. Absent or Disqualified Members

   20

Section 3.13. Resignations

   20

Section 3.14. Removal

   20

Section 3.15. Vacancies

   20

ARTICLE IV

  
Officers   

Section 4.01. Numbers

   21

Section 4.02. Election

   21

Section 4.03. Salaries

   21

Section 4.04. Removal and Resignation; Vacancies

   21

Section 4.05. Authority and Duties of Officers

   21

Section 4.06. The Chief Executive Officer

   21

Section 4.07. The President

   22

Section 4.08. The Vice Presidents

   22

Section 4.09. The Secretary

   22

Section 4.10. The Chief Financial Officer

   23

Section 4.11. The Treasurer

   23

Section 4.12. Additional Officers

   24

ARTICLE V

  
Capital Stock   

Section 5.01. Certificates of Stock; Uncertified Shares

   24

Section 5.02. Signatures; Facsimile

   24

Section 5.03. Lost, Stolen or Destroyed Certificates

   24

Section 5.04. Transfer of Stock

   24

Section 5.05. Record Date

   25

Section 5.06. Registered Stockholders

   25
Section 5.07. Transfer Agent and Registrar    25

 

3


ARTICLE VI

  
Indemnification   

Section 6.01. Nature of Indemnity

   26

Section 6.02. Successful Defense

   26

Section 6.03. Advance Payment of Expenses

   26

Section 6.04. Procedures for Indemnification of Directors and Officers

   27

Section 6.05. Survival; Preservation of Other Rights

   27

Section 6.06. Insurance

   27

Section 6.07. Severability

   28

ARTICLE VII

  
Offices   

Section 7.01. Initial Registered Office

   28

Section 7.02. Other Offices

   28

ARTICLE VIII

  
General Provision   

Section 8.01. Dividends.

   28

Section 8.02. Execution of Instruments

   29

Section 8.03. Deposits

   29

Section 8.04. Voting as Stockholder

   29

Section 8.05. Fiscal Year

   29

Section 8.06. Seal

   29

Section 8.07. Books and Records; Inspection

   29

ARTICLE IX

  
Amendment of Bylaws   

Section 9.01. Amendment

   29

ARTICLE X

  
Construction   

Section 10.01. Construction

   30

 

4


AMENDED AND RESTATED

BYLAWS

OF

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

As Adopted on December 18, 2008

ARTICLE I

Stockholders

Section 1.01. Annual Meeting . The annual meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation for the election of Directors and for the transaction of such other business as properly may come before such meeting shall be held at such place, either within or without the State of Delaware, or, within the sole discretion of the Board of Directors, by remote electronic communication technologies and at such date and at such time, as may be fixed from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors and set forth in the notice or waiver of notice of the meeting.

Section 1.02. Special Meetings . Special meetings of the stockholders may be called at any time by the Chairperson, or by the Board of Directors. Such special meetings of the stockholders shall be held at such places, within or without the State of Delaware, or, within the sole discretion of the Board of Directors, by remote electronic communication technologies, as shall be specified in the respective notices or waivers of notice thereof. Any power of stockholders of the Corporation to call a special meeting is specifically denied.

Section 1.03. Notice of Meetings; Waiver .

(a) The Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall cause notice of the place, if any, date and hour of each meeting of the stockholders, and, in the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which such meeting is called, and the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxy holders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such meeting, to be given personally, by mail or by electronic transmission, not fewer than ten (10) nor more than sixty (60) days prior to the meeting, to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at such meeting. If such notice is mailed, it shall be deemed to have been given to a stockholder when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, directed to the stockholder at his or her address as it appears on the record of stockholders of the Corporation, or, if a stockholder shall have filed with the Secretary of the Corporation a written request that notices to such stockholder be mailed to some other address, then directed to such stockholder at such other address. Such further notice shall be given as may be required by law.

(b) A written waiver of any notice of any annual or special meeting signed by the person entitled thereto, or a waiver by electronic transmission by the person entitled to notice, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the stockholders need be specified in a waiver of notice. Attendance of a stockholder at a meeting of stockholders shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when the stockholder attends a meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting, to the transaction of any business on the ground that the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.


(c) For notice given by electronic transmission to a stockholder to be effective, such stockholder must consent to the Corporation’s giving notice by that particular form of electronic transmission. A stockholder may revoke consent to receive notice by electronic transmission by written notice to the Corporation. A stockholder’s consent to notice by electronic transmission is automatically revoked if the Corporation is unable to deliver two consecutive electronic transmission notices and such inability becomes known to the Secretary, Assistant Secretary, the transfer agent or other person responsible for giving notice, provided, however, the inadvertent failure to treat such inability as a revocation shall not invalidate any meeting or other action.

(d) Notices are deemed given (i) if by facsimile, when faxed to a number where the stockholder has consented to receive notice; (ii) if by electronic mail, when mailed electronically to an electronic mail address at which the stockholder has consented to receive such notice; (iii) if by posting on an electronic network (such as a website or chatroom) together with a separate notice to the stockholder of such specific posting, upon the later to occur of (A) such posting or (B) the giving of the separate notice of such posting; or (iv) if by any other form of electronic communication, when directed to the stockholder in the manner consented to by the stockholder.

(e) If a stockholder meeting is to be held via electronic communications and stockholders will take action at such meeting, the notice of such meeting must: (i) specify the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxy holders may be deemed to be present and vote at such meeting; and (ii) provide the information required by Delaware law for access to the stockholder list. A waiver of notice may be given by electronic transmission.

Section 1.04. Quorum . Except as otherwise required by law or by the Certificate of Incorporation, the presence in person or by proxy of the holders of record of one-third of the shares entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business as such meeting.

Section 1.05. Voting . Except as otherwise specified in the Certificate of Incorporation, each stockholder shall at every meeting of the stockholders be entitled to one (1) vote for each share of stock held by that stockholder having voting rights as to the matter being voted upon. Except as otherwise required by law, the Certificate of Incorporation, these Bylaws or the rules or regulations of any stock exchange on which the Corporation’s stock is traded, the vote of a majority of the voting power of the shares represented in person or by proxy at any meeting at which a quorum is present shall be sufficient for the transaction of any business at such meeting other than director elections which shall be determined by a plurality of the votes cast.

Section 1.06. Voting by Ballot . No vote of the stockholders on an election of Directors need be taken by written ballot or by electronic transmission unless otherwise required by law. Any vote not required to be taken by ballot or by electronic transmission may be conducted in any manner approved by the Board of Directors prior to the meeting at which such vote is taken.

Section 1.07. Adjournment . To the fullest extent permitted by law, if a quorum is not present at any meeting of the stockholders, the stockholders present in person or by proxy, as well

 

6


as the person presiding over such meeting pursuant to Section 1.09 of the Bylaws, shall have the power to adjourn any such meeting from time to time until a quorum is present. Notice of any adjourned meeting of the stockholders of the Corporation need not be given if the place, if any, date and hour thereof are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken, provided, however, that if the adjournment is for more than thirty (30) days, or if after the adjournment a new record date for the adjourned meeting is fixed pursuant to Section 5.05 of these Bylaws, a notice of the adjourned meeting, conforming to the requirements of Section 1.03 hereof, shall be given to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at such meeting. At any adjourned meeting at which a quorum is present, any business may be transacted that might have been transacted on the original date of the meeting.

Section 1.08. Proxies . Any stockholder entitled to vote at any meeting of the stockholders may authorize another person or persons to vote at any such meeting and express such consent or dissent for him or her by proxy. A stockholder may authorize a valid proxy by executing a written instrument signed by such stockholder, or by causing his or her signature to be affixed to such writing by any reasonable means including, but not limited to, by facsimile signature, or by transmitting or authorizing the transmission if a telegram, facsimile or other means of electronic transmission to the person designated as the holder of the proxy, a proxy solicitation firm or a like authorized agent. No such proxy shall be voted or acted upon after the expiration of three (3) years from the date of such proxy, unless such proxy provides for a longer period. Every proxy shall be revocable at the pleasure of the stockholder executing it, unless a proxy states that it is irrevocable and is coupled with an interest sufficient in law to support an irrevocable power. A stockholder may revoke any proxy which is not irrevocable by attending the meeting and voting in person or by filing with the Secretary either an instrument in writing revoking the proxy or another duly executed proxy bearing a later date. Proxies by telegram, facsimile or other electronic transmission must either set forth or be submitted with information from which it can be determined that the telegram, facsimile or other electronic transmission was authorized by the stockholder. Any copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reliable reproduction of a writing or transmission created pursuant to this section may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing or transmission for any and all purposes for which the original writing or transmission could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing or transmission.

Section 1.09. Organization; Procedure; Conduct of Meeting .

(a) Organization; Procedure . At every meeting of stockholders the presiding officer shall be the Chairperson or, in the event of his or her absence or disability, the Vice Chairperson, or in the event of his or her absence or disability, the Chief Executive Officer or the President or in the event of their absence or disability, Executive or Senior Vice Presidents in order designated by the Board of Directors, but if not so designated, then in the order of their rank. The Secretary, or in the event of his or her absence or disability, an Assistant Secretary, if any, or if there be no Assistant Secretary, in the absence of the Secretary, an appointee of the presiding officer shall act as Secretary of the meeting.

(b) Conduct of Meetings . The Board of Directors may adopt by resolution such rules and regulations for the conduct of the meeting of stockholders as it shall deem appropriate. Except to the extent inconsistent with such rules and regulations as adopted by the Board of

 

7


Directors, the person presiding over any meeting of stockholders shall have the right and authority to convene and to adjourn the meeting, to prescribe such rules, regulations and procedures and to do all such acts as, in the judgment of such presiding person, are appropriate for the proper conduct of the meeting. Such rules, regulations or procedures, whether adopted by the Board of Directors or prescribed by the presiding person of the meeting, may include, without limitation, the following: (i) the establishment of an agenda or order of business for the meeting; (ii) rules and procedures for maintaining order at the meeting and the safety of those present; (iii) limitations on attendance at or participation in the meeting to stockholders of record of the Corporation, their duly authorized and constituted proxies or such other persons as the presiding person of the meeting shall determine; (iv) restrictions on entry to the meeting after the time fixed for the commencement thereof; and (v) limitations on the time allotted to questions or comments by participants. The presiding person at any meeting of stockholders, in addition to making any other determinations that may be appropriate to the conduct of the meeting, shall, if the facts warrant, determine and declare to the meeting that a matter or business was not properly brought before the meeting and if such presiding person should so determine, such presiding person shall so declare to the meeting and any such matter or business not properly brought before the meeting shall not be transacted or considered. Unless and to the extent determined by the Board of Directors or the person presiding over the meeting, meetings of stockholders shall not be required to be held in accordance with the rules of parliamentary procedure.

Section 1.10. Notice of Stockholder Business and Nominations .

(a) Annual Meetings of Stockholders .

(i) Nominations of persons for election to the Board of Directors of the Corporation and the proposal of business to be considered by the stockholders may be made at an annual meeting of stockholders only (A) pursuant to the Corporation’s proxy materials with respect to such meeting, (B) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors, or (C) by any stockholder of the Corporation who was a stockholder of record of the Corporation (the “Record Stockholder”) at the time of the giving of the notice required in the following paragraph, who is entitled to vote at the meeting and who complies with the notice procedures set forth in this Section 1.10. For the avoidance of doubt, clause (C) shall be the exclusive means for a stockholder to make nominations and the foregoing business (other than business included in the Corporation’s proxy materials pursuant to Rule 14a-8 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (such act, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, the “Exchange Act”)) before an annual meeting of stockholders.

(ii) For nominations or business to be properly brought before an annual meeting by a Record Stockholder pursuant to clause (C) of paragraph (a)(i) of this Section 1.10, (a) the Record Stockholder must have given timely notice thereof in writing to the Secretary of the Corporation, (b) any such proposed business must constitute a proper matter for stockholder action under Delaware law, and (c) the Record Stockholder and the beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf any such proposal or nomination is made, must have acted in accordance with the representations set forth in the Solicitation Statement required by these Bylaws. To

 

8


be timely, a Record Stockholder’s notice shall be received by the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not less than 45 or more than 75 days prior to the one-year anniversary (the “Anniversary”) of the date on which the corporation first mailed its proxy materials for the prior year’s annual meeting of stockholders (provided, however, that, subject to the fourth sentence of this Section 1.10(a)(ii), if the date of the annual meeting is convened more than thirty (30) days before or more than thirty (30) days after such anniversary date, notice by the stockholder to be timely must be so received not later than the close of business on the later of (i) the 90 th day before such annual meeting or (ii) the tenth (10 th ) day following the day on which public announcement of the date of such meeting is first made by the Corporation; and provided further, that for the 2009 Annual Meeting the anniversary date shall be deemed to be May 21, 2008). Notwithstanding anything in the preceding sentence to the contrary, in the event that the number of directors to be elected to the Board of Directors is increased and there is no public announcement naming all of the nominees for director or specifying the size of the increased Board of Directors made by the Corporation at least 10 days before the last day a Record Stockholder may deliver a notice of nomination in accordance with the preceding sentence, a Record Stockholder’s notice required by this Bylaw shall also be considered timely, but only with respect to nominees for any new positions created by such increase, if it shall be received by the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not later than the close of business on the 10th day following the day on which such public announcement is first made by the Corporation. In no event shall the public announcement of an adjournment or postponement of an annual meeting commence a new time period (or extend any time period) for the giving of a stockholder’s notice as described above. Such Record Stockholder’s notice shall set forth: (A) as to each person whom the stockholder proposes to nominate for election or reelection as a Director (1) all information relating to such person that is required to be disclosed in solicitations of proxies for election of Directors in an election contest, or is otherwise required, in each case pursuant to and in accordance with Regulation 14A under the Exchange Act and Rule 14a-11 thereunder, or any successor provisions, and (2) such person’s written consent to being named in the proxy statement as a nominee and to serving as a Director if elected; (B) as to any business that the stockholder proposes to bring before the meeting, a brief description of the business desired to be brought before the meeting, the text of the proposal or business (including the text of any resolutions proposed for consideration and in the event that such business includes a proposal to amend the Bylaws of the Corporation, the language of the proposed amendment), the reasons for conducting such business at the meeting and any material interest in such business of such Record Stockholder and the beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf the proposal is made; and (C) as to the Record Stockholder giving the notice and the beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf the nomination or proposal is made (1) the name and address of such Record Stockholder, as they appear on the Corporation’s books, and of such beneficial owner, if any, (2) the class, series and number of shares of capital stock of the Corporation which are owned beneficially and of record by such Record

 

9


Stockholder and such beneficial owner, if any, (3) a representation that the stockholder is a holder of record of stock of the Corporation entitled to vote at such meeting and intends to appear in person or by proxy at the meeting to propose such business or nomination, (4) a representation whether the Record Stockholder or the beneficial owner, if any, intends or is part of a group which intends to deliver a proxy statement and/or form of proxy to holders of, in the case of a proposal, at least the percentage of the voting power of the Corporation’s outstanding capital stock required to approve or adopt the proposal or, in the case of a nomination or nominations, at least the percentage of voting power of all of the shares of capital stock of the Corporation reasonably believed by such Record Stockholder or beneficial holder to be sufficient to elect the nominee or nominees proposed to be nominated by such Record Stockholder (such statement, a “Solicitation Statement”), (5) any option, warrant, convertible security, stock appreciation right, or similar right with an exercise or conversion privilege or a settlement payment or mechanism at a price related to any class or series of shares of the Corporation or with a value derived in whole or in part from the value of any class or series of shares of the Corporation, whether or not such instrument or right shall be subject to settlement in the underlying class or series of capital stock of the Corporation or otherwise (a “Derivative Instrument”) directly or indirectly owned beneficially by such Record Stockholder or beneficial owner, if any, and any other direct or indirect opportunity to profit or share in any profit derived from any increase or decrease in the value of shares of the Corporation, (6) any proxy, contract, arrangement, understanding, or relationship pursuant to which either of the Record Stockholder or beneficial owner has a right to vote any shares of any security of the Company, (7) any short interest in any security of the Company held by such party (for purposes of this Section 1.10(a)(ii), a person shall be deemed to have a short interest in a security if such person directly or indirectly, through any contract, arrangement, understanding, relationship or otherwise, has the opportunity to profit or share in any profit derived from any decrease in the value of the subject security), (8) any rights to dividends on the shares of the Corporation owned beneficially by such Record Stockholder and such beneficial owner, if any that are separated or separable from the underlying shares of the Corporation, (9) any proportionate interest in shares of the Corporation or Derivative Instruments held, directly or indirectly, by a general or limited partnership in which the Record Stockholder or beneficial owner is a general partner or, directly or indirectly, beneficially owns an interest in a general partner, and (10) any performance-related fees (other than an asset-based fee) that such Record Stockholder and beneficial owner is entitled to based on any increase or decrease in the value of shares of the Corporation or Derivative Instruments, if any, as of the date of such notice, including without limitation any such interests held by members of each such Record Stockholder’s or beneficial owner’s immediate family sharing the same household (which information set forth in this paragraph shall be supplemented by such Record Stockholder or such beneficial owner, as the case may be, not later than ten (10) days after the record date for the meeting to disclose such ownership as of the record date);

 

10


(iii) The foregoing notice requirements of this Section 1.10 shall be deemed satisfied by a stockholder if the stockholder has notified the Corporation of his, her or its intention to present a proposal or nomination at an annual meeting in compliance with applicable rules and regulations promulgated under the Exchange Act and such stockholder’s proposal or nomination has been included in a proxy statement that has been prepared by the Corporation to solicit proxies for such annual meeting. The Corporation may require any proposed nominee to furnish such other information as it may reasonably require to determine the eligibility of such proposed nominee to serve as a Director of the Corporation.

(b) Special Meetings of Stockholders . Only such business shall be conducted at a special meeting of stockholders as shall have been brought before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board of Directors. The notice of such special meeting shall include the purpose for which the meeting is called. Nominations of persons for election to the Board of Directors may be made at a special meeting of stockholders at which Directors are to be elected (a) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors or any committee thereof, (b) by any Record Stockholder at the time the notice provided for in this Section 1.10 is delivered to the Secretary of the Corporation, who is entitled to vote at the meeting and delivers a written notice to the Secretary setting forth the information set forth in Section 1.10(a)(ii)(A) and 1.10(a)(ii)(C). Nominations by stockholders of persons for election to the Board of Directors may be made at such a special meeting of stockholders only if the Record Stockholder’s notice required by the preceding sentence shall be received by the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the Corporation not later than the close of business on the later of the 90th day prior to such special meeting or the tenth (10 th ) day following the day on which public announcement is first made of the date of the special meeting and of the nominees proposed by the Board of Directors to be elected at such meeting. A person shall not be eligible for election or reelection as a director at a special meeting unless the person is nominated (i) by or at the direction of the Board of Directors or (ii) by a Record Stockholder in accordance with the notice procedures set forth in Section (a) of Section 1.10. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1.10, a stockholder shall also comply with all applicable requirements of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder with respect to matters set forth in this Section 1.10. Nothing in this Section 1.10 shall be deemed to affect any rights of stockholders to request inclusion of proposals in the Corporation’s proxy statement pursuant to Rule 14a-8 under the Exchange Act. In no event shall the public announcement of an adjournment or postponement of a special meeting commence a new time period (or extend any time period) for the giving of a stockholder’s notice as described above.

(c) General .

(i) Only such persons who are nominated in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 1.10 shall be eligible to be elected at an annual or special meeting of stockholders of the Corporation to serve as Directors and only such business shall be conducted at a meeting of stockholders as shall have been brought before the meeting in accordance with the procedures set forth in this

 

11


Section 1.10. Except as otherwise provided by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, the chairperson of the meeting shall have the power and duty (A) to determine whether a nomination or any business proposed to be brought before the meeting was made or proposed, as the case may be, in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 1.10 (including whether the stockholder or beneficial owner, if any, on whose behalf the nomination or proposal is made solicited (or is part of a group which solicited) or did not so solicit, as the case may be, proxies in support of such stockholder’s nominee or proposal in compliance with such stockholder’s representation as required by clause (a)(ii)(C)(4) of this Section 1.10) and (B) if any proposed nomination or business was not made or proposed in compliance with this Section 1.10, to declare that such defective proposal or nomination shall be disregarded or that such proposed business shall not be transacted. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1.10, unless otherwise required by law, if the stockholder (or a qualified representative of the stockholder) does not appear at the annual or special meeting of stockholders of the Corporation to present a nomination or proposed business, such nomination shall be disregarded and such proposed business shall not be transacted, notwithstanding that proxies in respect of such vote may have been received by the Corporation. For purposes of this Section 1.10, to be considered a qualified representative of the stockholder, a person must be a duly authorized officer, manager or partner of such stockholder or must be authorized by a writing executed by such stockholder or an electronic transmission delivered by such stockholder to act for such stockholder as proxy at the meeting of stockholders and such person must produce such writing or electronic transmission, or a reliable reproduction of the writing or electronic transmission, at the meeting of stockholders.

(ii) For purposes of this Section 1.10, “public announcement” shall include disclosure in a press release reported by the Dow Jones News Service, Associated Press or comparable national news service or in a document publicly filed by the Corporation with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to Sections 13, 14 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act.

(iii) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 1.10, a stockholder shall also comply with all applicable requirements of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder with respect to the matters set forth in this Section 1.10. Nothing in this Section 1.10 shall be deemed to affect any rights (A) of stockholders to request inclusion of proposals or nominations in the Corporation’s proxy statement pursuant to applicable rules and regulations promulgated under the Exchange Act or (B) of the holders of any series of Preferred Stock, if any, to elect Directors if so provided under any applicable Preferred Stock Certificate of Designation (as defined in the Certificate of Incorporation).

Section 1.11. Inspectors of Elections . Preceding any meeting of the stockholders, the Board of Directors shall appoint one (1) or more persons to act as Inspectors of Elections, and may designate one (1) or more alternate inspectors. In the event no inspector or alternate has been so appointed or is able to act, the person presiding at the meeting shall appoint one (1) or more

 

12


inspectors to act at the meeting. Each inspector, before entering upon the discharge of the duties of an inspector, shall take and sign an oath faithfully to execute the duties of inspector with strict impartiality and according to the best of his or her ability. The inspector shall:

(a) ascertain the number of shares outstanding and the voting power of each;

(b) determine the shares represented at a meeting and the validity of proxies and ballots;

(c) specify the information relied upon to determine the validity of electronic transmissions in accordance with Section 1.08 hereof;

(d) count all votes and ballots;

(e) determine and retain for a reasonable period a record of the disposition of any challenges made to any determination by the inspectors;

(f) certify his or her determination of the number of shares represented at the meeting, and his or her count of all votes and ballots;

(g) appoint or retain, if he or she so desires, other persons or entities to assist in the performance of the duties of inspector; and

(h) when determining the shares represented and the validity of proxies and ballots, be limited to an examination of the proxies, any envelopes submitted with those proxies, any information provided in accordance with Section 1.08 of these Bylaws, ballots and the regular books and records of the Corporation. The inspector may consider other reliable information for the limited purpose of reconciling proxies and ballots submitted by or on behalf of banks, brokers or their nominees or a similar person which represent more votes than the holder of a proxy is authorized by the record owner to cast or more votes than the stockholder holds of record. If the inspector considers other reliable information as outlined in this section, the inspector, at the time of his or her certification pursuant to paragraph (f) of this section, shall specify the precise information considered, the person or persons from whom the information was obtained, when this information was obtained, the means by which the information was obtained, and the basis for the inspector’s belief that such information is accurate and reliable.

Section 1.12. Opening and Closing of Polls . The date and time for the opening and the closing of the polls for each matter to be voted upon at a stockholder meeting shall be announced at the meeting. The inspector shall be prohibited from accepting any ballots, proxies or votes or any revocations thereof or changes thereto after the closing of the polls, unless the Court of Chancery upon application by a stockholder shall determine otherwise.

ARTICLE II

Board of Directors

Section 2.01. General Powers . Except as may otherwise be provided by law or the Certificate of Incorporation, the business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed by or

 

13


under the direction of the Board of Directors and the Board of Directors may exercise all the powers of the Corporation.

Section 2.02. Number of Directors . Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock, if any, the number of Directors shall be fixed from time to time exclusively pursuant to a resolution adopted by a majority of the entire Board of Directors; provided, however, that the Board of Directors shall at no time consist of fewer than three (3) Directors.

Section 2.03. Classified Board of Directors; Election of Directors . The Directors of the Corporation, subject to the rights of the holders of shares of any class or series of Preferred Stock, shall be classified with respect to the time which they severally hold office, into three (3) classes, one class (“Class I”) whose initial term expires at the 2009 annual meeting of stockholders, another class (“Class II”) whose initial term expires at the 2010 annual meeting of stockholders, and another class (“Class III”) whose initial term expires at the 2011 annual meeting of stockholders, with each class to hold office until its successors are duly elected and qualified. Except as otherwise provided in Sections 2.14 and 2.15 of these Bylaws, at each annual meeting of stockholders of the Corporation, and subject to the rights of holders of shares of any class or series of Preferred Stock, the successors of the class of Directors whose term expires at that meeting shall be elected to hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders held in the third year following the year of their election and until their successors have been duly elected and qualified.

Section 2.04. The Chairperson . The Directors shall elect from among the members of the Board of Directors a Chairperson of the Board of Directors. The Chairperson shall have such duties and powers as set forth in these Bylaws or as shall otherwise be conferred upon him or her from time to time by the Board of Directors. The Chairperson shall preside over all meetings of the stockholders and of the Board of Directors.

Section 2.05. The Vice Chairperson . The Directors may, but need not, elect from among the members of the Board of Directors a Vice Chairperson of the Board of Directors. The Vice Chairperson shall have such duties and powers as set forth in these Bylaws or as shall otherwise be conferred upon him or her from time to time by the Board of Directors. In the absence or disability of the Chairperson, the Vice Chairperson shall preside over all meetings of the stockholders and of the Board of Directors.

Section 2.06. Annual and Regular Meetings . The annual meeting of the Board of Directors for the purpose of electing officers and for the transaction of such other business as may come before the meeting shall be held as soon as reasonably practicable following adjournment of the annual meeting of the stockholders at the place of such annual meeting of the stockholders. Notice of such annual meeting of the Board of Directors need not be given. The Board of Directors from time to time may by resolution provide for the holding of regular meetings and fix the place (which may be within or without the State of Delaware) and the date and hour of such meetings. Notice of regular meetings need not be given, provided, however, that if the Board of Directors shall fix or change the time or place of any regular meeting, notice of such action shall be mailed promptly, or sent by telephone, including a voice messaging system or other system or technology designated to record and communicate messages, telegraph, facsimile, electronic mail or other

 

14


electronic means, to each Director who shall not have been present at the meeting at which such action was taken, addressed to him or her at his or her usual place of business or to such other addresses as any Director may request by notice to the Secretary, or shall be delivered to him or her personally. Notice of such action need not be given to any Director who attends the first regular meeting after such action is taken without protesting the lack of notice to him or her, prior to or at the commencement of such meeting, or to any Director who submits a waiver of notice, whether before or after such meeting.

Section 2.07. Special Meetings; Notice . Special meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held whenever called by the Chairperson or, in the event of his or her absence or disability, by the Vice Chairperson, if any, or, in the event of his or her absence or disability, by the Chief Executive Officer or, in the event of his or her absence or disability, by the President or, in the event of his or her absence, by Executive or Senior Vice Presidents in the order designated by the Board of Directors, but if not so designated, then in order of their rank, at such place (within or without the State of Delaware), date and hour as may be specified in the respective notices or waivers of notice of such meetings. Special meetings of the Board of Directors also may be held whenever called by any three (3) Directors. Special meetings of the Board of Directors may be called on twenty-four (24) hours’ notice, if notice is given to each Director personally or by telephone, including a voice messaging system, or other system or technology designed to record and communicate messages, telegraph, facsimile, electronic mail or other electronic means, or on five (5) days’ notice if notice is mailed to each Director (or on three (3) days’ notice if notice is sent by a nationally recognized overnight mail service), addressed to him or her at his or her usual place of business or to such other address as any Director may request by notice to the Secretary. Notice of any special meeting need not be given to any Director who attends such meeting without protesting the lack of notice to him or her, prior to or at the commencement of such meeting, or to any Director who submits a waiver of notice, whether before or after such meeting, and any business may be transacted thereat.

Section 2.08. Quorum; Voting . At all meetings of the Board of Directors, the presence of at least a majority of the total authorized number of Directors shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. Except as otherwise required by law, the vote of at least a majority of the Directors present at any meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board of Directors.

Section 2.09. Adjournment . A majority of the Directors present, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn any meeting of the Board of Directors to another time or place. No notice need be given of any adjourned meeting unless the time and place of the adjourned meeting are not announced at the time of adjournment, in which case notice conforming to the requirements of Section 2.07 of these Bylaws shall be given to each Director.

Section 2.10. Action Without a Meeting . Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors may be taken without a meeting if all members of the Board of Directors consent thereto in writing or by electronic transmission, and such writing or writings or electronic transmissions are filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board of Directors. Such filing shall be in paper form if the minutes are maintained in paper form and may be in electronic form if the minutes are maintained in electronic form.

 

15


Section 2.11. Regulations; Manner of Acting . To the extent consistent with applicable law, the Certificate of Incorporation and these Bylaws, the Board of Directors may adopt such rules and regulations for the conduct of meetings of the Board of Directors and for the management of the property, affairs and business of the Corporation as the Board of Directors may deem appropriate. The Directors shall act only as a Board of Directors and the individual Directors shall have no power in their individual capacities unless expressly authorized by the Board of Directors.

Section 2.12. Action by Telephonic Communications . Members of the Board of Directors may participate in a meeting of the Board of Directors by means of conference telephone or other communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and participation in a meeting pursuant to this provision shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

Section 2.13. Resignations . Any Director may resign at any time by submitting an electronic transmission or by delivering a notice of resignation in writing or by electronic transaction, given by such director, to the Chairperson, the Vice Chairperson, the Chief Executive Officer, the President or the Secretary. Unless otherwise specified therein, such resignation shall take effect upon delivery.

Section 2.14. Removal of Directors . Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock, if any, to elect additional Directors under specified circumstances, any Director may be removed at any time, but only for cause, upon the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the combined voting power of the then outstanding stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of Directors. Any vacancy in the Board of Directors caused by any such removal shall be filled only by a majority vote of the Directors then in office and not by stockholders, although less than a quorum, in the manner provided in Section 2.15 of these Bylaws.

Section 2.15. Vacancies and Newly Created Directorships . Subject to the rights of the holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock, if any, to elect additional Directors under specified circumstances, and except as provided in Section 2.14, if any vacancies shall occur in the Board of Directors, by reason of death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal or otherwise, or if the authorized number of Directors shall be increased, the Directors then in office shall continue to act, and such vacancies and newly created directorships shall be filled only by a majority vote of the Directors then in office and not by stockholders, although less than a quorum. Any Director filling a vacancy shall be of the same class as that of the Director whose death, resignation, retirement, disqualification, removal or other event caused the vacancy, and any Director filling a newly created directorship shall be of the class specified by the Board of Directors at the time the newly created directorships were created. A Director elected to fill a vacancy or a newly created directorship shall hold office for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of office of the class to which they have been elected expires and until such director’s successor shall have been duly elected and qualified or until his or her earlier death, resignation, retirement, disqualification or removal.

 

16


Section 2.16. Compensation . The amount, if any, which each Director shall be entitled to receive as compensation for such Director’s services as such shall be fixed from time to time by resolution of the Board of Directors.

Section 2.17. Reliance on Accounts and Reports, etc . A Director or a member of any committee designated by the Board of Directors shall, in the performance of such Director’s or member’s duties, be fully protected in relying in good faith upon the records of the Corporation and upon information, opinions, reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of the Corporation’s officers or employees, or committees designated by the Board of Directors, or by any other person as to the matters the Director or the member reasonably believes are within such other person’s professional or expert competence and who has been selected with reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation.

ARTICLE III

Committees

Section 3.01. Standing Committees . The Board of Directors shall have the following standing committees, each consisting of not fewer than three (3) Directors, as shall be determined by the Board of Directors:

Audit Committee

Compensation Committee

Governance Committee

Section 3.02. Designation of Members and Chairpersons of Committees . The Board of Directors shall by resolution designate from among the Directors the members of the standing committees and the members of each committee established pursuant to Section 3.07 which will continue in existence and from among the members of each such committee a chairperson thereof, which members and chairperson shall each serve, at the pleasure of the Board of Directors, so long as they shall continue in office as Directors until their removal or the appointment of their respective successors. The Board of Directors may by similar resolution designate one (1) or more Directors as alternate members of such committees, who may replace any absent member or members at any meeting of such committees. No officer or employee may be designated as a member or alternate member of the Audit Committee, the Compensation Committee or the Governance Committee. Vacancies among members or chairpersons of any committee may be filled in the same manner as original designations at any regular or special meeting of the Board of Directors.

Section 3.03. Notices of Times of Meetings of Committees and Presiding Officers . Meetings of each standing committee shall be held upon call of the Chairperson, or upon call of the chairperson of such committee or of two (2) members of such committee. Meetings of such committee may also be held at such other times as it may determine. Meetings of a committee shall be held at such places and upon such notice as it shall determine or as shall be specified in the calls of such meetings. Any such chairperson, if present, or such member or members of each committee as may be designated by the members of such committee shall preside at meetings thereof of, and in the event of an absence or disability of any thereof or failing such designation, the committee shall select from among its members present a presiding officer.

 

17


Section 3.04. Governance Committee . The Governance Committee may, to the extent permitted by law, exercise all powers of the Board of Directors during intervals between meetings of the Board of Directors and shall nominate qualified candidates to the Board of Directors and provide advice with respect to the Company’s operations, including but not limited to recommending a set of categorical standards to assist the Board of Directors in making independence determinations for those nominated to the Board of Directors.

Section 3.05. Compensation Committee . The Compensation Committee shall exercise general supervision over compensation, personnel administration and other activities carried on by the Corporation and its subsidiaries in the interest of the health, welfare and safety of the employees of the Corporation, if any, and those of its subsidiaries.

Section 3.06. Audit Committee . The Audit Committee shall exercise general supervision of accounting and auditing controls over cash, securities, receipts, disbursements and other financial transactions; shall cause to be made such examinations thereof as it may deem necessary through certified public accountants or otherwise; shall provide general oversight of the financial condition of the Corporation and the scope and results of the independent audit and any internal audits; shall recommend the selection of independent certified public accountants; and, in respect to such matters, may require such reports from the officer in charge of internal audit functions for the Corporation as it may deem necessary or desirable. The Audit Committee shall also exercise general supervision of the Corporation’s policies on ethical business conduct and compliance therewith.

Section 3.07. Other Committees . The Board of Directors by resolution may designate one (1) or more other committees, and the powers and purposes thereof, each such committee to consist of such number of Directors as from time to time may be fixed by the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors, at the time of such designation or at any time thereafter, may by resolution designate from among the Directors the members and alternate members of such committees, as well as the chairperson thereof. Any such committee may be abolished or re-designated from time to time by the Board of Directors. Each member (and each alternate member) of any such committee (whether designated at an annual meeting of the Board of Directors or otherwise or to fill a vacancy or otherwise) shall hold office until such committee is abolished or if earlier, until his or her successor shall have been designated or until he or she shall cease to be a Director, or until his or her earlier death, resignation or removal.

Section 3.08. Powers . Each committee, except as otherwise provided in this section, shall have and may exercise such powers of the Board of Directors as may be provided in these Bylaws or by resolution or resolutions of the Board of Directors. No committee shall have the power or authority:

(a) to approve or adopt, or recommend to the stockholders, any action or matter expressly required by the Delaware General Corporation Law to be submitted to stockholders for approval (other than the election or removal of directors); or

(b) to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation.

 

18


Section 3.09. Proceedings . Each such committee may fix its own rules of procedure and may meet at such place (within or without the State of Delaware), at such time and upon such notice, if any, as it shall determine from time to time. Each such committee shall keep minutes of its proceedings and shall report such proceedings to the Board of Directors at the meeting of the Board of Directors next following any such proceedings.

Section 3.10. Quorum and Manner of Acting . Except as may be otherwise provided in the resolution creating such committee, at all meetings of any committee, the presence of members (or alternate members) constituting a majority of the total authorized membership of such committee shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business. The act of the majority of the members present at any meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of such committee. Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of any such committee may be taken without a meeting, if all members of such committee shall consent to such action in writing or by electronic transmission and such writing or writings or electronic transmission or transmissions are filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the committee. Such filing shall be in paper form if the minutes are in paper form and may be in electronic form if the minutes are maintained in electronic form. The members of any such committee shall act only as a committee, and the individual members of such committee shall have no power in their individual capacities unless expressly authorized by the Board of Directors.

Section 3.11. Action by Telephone Communications . Unless otherwise provided by the Board of Directors, members of any committee may participate in a meeting of such committee by means of conference telephone or other communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and participation in a meeting pursuant to this provision shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

Section 3.12. Absent or Disqualified Members . In the absence or disqualification of a member of any committee, if no alternate member is present to act in his or her stead, the member or members thereof present at any meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not he, she or they constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of any such absent or disqualified member.

Section 3.13. Resignations . Any member (and any alternate member) of any committee may resign at any time by delivering a notice of resignation, in electronic transmission or writing, given by such member, to the Chairperson, the Vice Chairperson, the Chief Executive Officer, the President or the Secretary. Unless otherwise specified therein, such resignation shall take effect upon delivery.

Section 3.14. Removal . Any member (and any alternate member) of any committee may be removed at any time, either for or without cause, by resolution adopted by a majority of the whole Board of Directors.

Section 3.15. Vacancies . If any vacancy shall occur in any committee by reason of disqualification, death, resignation, removal or otherwise, the remaining members (and any alternate members) shall continue to act, and any such vacancy may be filled by the Board of Directors.

 

19


ARTICLE IV

Officers

Section 4.01. Numbers . The officers of the Corporation shall be chosen by the Board of Directors (except as otherwise provided in Section 4.12) and there shall be a Chief Executive Officer, a President, one or more Vice Presidents, a Chief Financial Officer, a Secretary and a Treasurer. The Board of Directors also may elect one or more Assistant Vice Presidents, Assistant Secretaries and Assistant Treasurers in such numbers as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

Section 4.02. Election . Unless otherwise determined by the Board of Directors, the officers of the Corporation shall be elected by the Board of Directors at the annual meeting of the Board of Directors, and shall be elected to hold office until the next succeeding annual meeting of the Board of Directors. Each officer shall hold office until his or her successor has been elected and qualified, or until his or her earlier death, resignation or removal.

Section 4.03. Salaries . The salaries, if any, of all officers of the Corporation shall be fixed by, or in accordance with procedures established by, the Board of Directors.

Section 4.04. Removal and Resignation; Vacancies . Any officer may be removed for or without cause at any time by the Board of Directors. Any officer may resign at any time by delivering a written notice of resignation, signed by such officer, to the Chairperson, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, or the Secretary, or, if permitted by law, by submitting an electronic transmission. Unless otherwise specified therein, such resignation shall take effect upon delivery. Any vacancy occurring in any office of the Corporation by the death, resignation, removal or otherwise, shall be filled by the Board of Directors or, in its discretion, may be left vacant.

Section 4.05. Authority and Duties of Officers . The officers of the Corporation shall have such authority and shall exercise such powers and perform such duties as may be specified in these Bylaws, except that in any event each officer shall exercise such powers and perform such duties as may be required by law.

Section 4.06. The Chief Executive Officer . The Chief Executive Officer shall have general control and supervision of the policies and operations of the Corporation and shall see that all orders and resolutions of the Board of Directors are carried into effect. He or she shall manage and administer the Corporation’s business and affairs and shall also perform all duties and exercise all powers usually pertaining to the office of a chief executive officer of a corporation. Subject to such limitations as the Board of Directors may from time to time impose, he or she shall have the authority to sign, in the name and on behalf of the Corporation, checks, orders, contracts, leases, notes, drafts and other documents and instruments in connection with the business of the Corporation, and together with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, conveyances of real estate or other documents and instruments to which the seal of the Corporation is affixed. He or she shall have the authority to cause the employment or appointment of such employees and agents of the Corporation as the conduct of the business of the Corporation may require, to fix their compensation, and to remove or suspend any employee or agent appointed by the Chief Executive Officer or any subordinate officer or elected by the Board of Directors other than the Chairperson

 

20


or the Vice Chairperson. The Chief Executive Officer shall perform such duties and have such other powers as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe.

Section 4.07. The President . The President, subject to the authority of the Chief Executive Officer, or, if the President is the Chief Executive Officer, then subject to the authority of the Chairperson, shall have primary responsibility for, and authority with respect to, the management of the day-to-day business and affairs of the Corporation. Subject to such limitations as the Board of Directors may from time to time impose, the President shall have the authority to sign, in the name and on behalf of the Corporation, checks, orders, contracts, leases, notes, drafts and other documents and instruments. The President shall have the authority to cause the employment or appointment of such employees and agents of the Corporation as the conduct of the business of the Corporation may require, to fix their compensation, and to remove or suspend any employee or agent elected or appointed by the President or any subordinate officer or elected by the Board of Directors except the Chief Executive Officer, the Chairperson or the Vice Chairperson. The President shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe.

Section 4.08. The Vice Presidents . In the absence of the Chief Executive Officer and the President or in the event of their inability to act, the Executive or Senior Vice Presidents in the order designated by the Board of Directors, or in the absence of any designation, then in the order of their rank, shall, if and to the extent determined by the Board of Directors, perform the duties of the Chief Executive Officer and the President, and when so acting, shall have all the powers of and be subject to all the restrictions upon the Chief Executive Officer and the President. The Vice Presidents shall have such designations, perform such other duties and have such other powers as the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or the President may from time to time prescribe.

Section 4.09. The Secretary . The Secretary shall have the following powers and duties:

(a) he or she shall keep or cause to be kept a record of all the proceedings of the meetings of the stockholders and of the Board of Directors in books provided for that purpose;

(b) he or she shall cause all notices to be duly given in accordance with the provisions of these Bylaws and as required by law;

(c) whenever any committee shall be appointed pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors, he or she shall furnish a copy of such resolution to the members of such committee;

(d) he or she shall be the custodian of the records and of the seal of the Corporation and cause such seal (or a facsimile thereof) to be affixed to all certificates representing shares of the Corporation prior to the issuance thereof and to all instruments the execution of which on behalf of the Corporation under its seal shall have been duly authorized in accordance with these Bylaws, and when so affixed he or she may attest the same;

(e) he or she shall properly maintain and file all books, reports, statements, certificates and all other documents and records required by law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws to be so maintained by the Secretary;

 

21


(f) he or she shall sign (unless the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer or an Assistant Secretary shall have signed) certificates representing shares of the Corporation, the issuance of which shall have been authorized by the Board of Directors;

(g) he or she shall have the power to authorize the seal of the Corporation to be affixed to any or all papers that may require it; and

(h) he or she shall perform, in general, all duties incident to the office of secretary and such other duties as may be specified in these Bylaws or as may be assigned to him or her from time to time by the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or the President.

Section 4.10. The Chief Financial Officer . The Chief Financial Officer of the Corporation shall have the following powers and duties:

(a) he or she shall have charge and supervision over and be responsible for the moneys, securities, receipts and disbursements of the Corporation, and shall keep or cause to be kept full and accurate records of all receipts of the Corporation;

(b) he or she shall cause the monies and other valuable effects of the Corporation to be deposited in the name and to the credit of the Corporation in such banks or trust companies or with such bankers or other depositories as shall be selected in accordance with Section 8.03 of these Bylaws;

(c) he or she shall cause the moneys of the Corporation to be disbursed by checks or drafts upon the authorized depositories of the Corporation and cause to be taken and preserved proper vouchers for all moneys disbursed;

(d) he or she shall render to the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or the President, whenever requested, a statement of the financial condition of the Corporation;

(e) he or she shall be empowered from time to time to require from all officers or agents of the Corporation reports or statements giving such information as he or she may desire with respect to any and all financial transactions of the Corporation;

(f) he or she may sign (unless the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer or the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary shall have signed) certificates representing stock of the Corporation, the issuance of which shall have been authorized by the Board of Directors; and

(g) he or she shall perform, in general, all duties incident to the office of Chief Financial Officer and such other duties as may be specified in these Bylaws or as may be assigned to him or her from time to time by the Board of Directors or the Chief Executive Officer.

Section 4.11. The Treasurer . The Treasurer shall perform such duties and exercise such powers as may be assigned to him or her from time to time by the Chief Executive Officer, President or Chief Financial Officer or by the Board of Directors. In the absence or disability of the Treasurer, the duties of the Treasurer shall be performed and his or her powers may be exercised by the Chief Financial Officer; subject in any case to review and superseding action by the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or the President.

 

22


Section 4.12. Additional Officers . The Board of Directors may appoint such other officers and agents as it may deem appropriate, and such other officers and agents shall hold their offices for such terms and shall exercise such powers and perform such duties as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors from time to time may delegate to the Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Vice President the power to appoint subordinate officers or agents and to prescribe their respective rights, terms of office, authorities and duties. Any such officer may remove any such subordinate officer or agent appointed by him or her, for or without cause.

ARTICLE V

Capital Stock

Section 5.01. Certificates of Stock; Uncertified Shares . The shares of the Corporation shall be uncertificated shares, provided that the Board of Directors may provide by resolution or resolutions that some or all of any or all classes or series of the stock of the Corporation shall be represented by certificates. In accordance with the adoption of such a resolution by the Board of Directors, every holder of stock in the Corporation represented by certificates and upon request every holder of uncertificated shares shall be entitled to have a certificate signed by, or in the name of, the Corporation, by the Chief Executive Officer, the President or a Vice President, and by the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer or an Assistant Treasurer, or the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, representing the number of shares registered in certificate form. Such certificate shall be in such form as the Board of Directors may determine, to the extent consistent with applicable law, the Certificate of Incorporation and these Bylaws.

Section 5.02. Signatures; Facsimile . All signatures on the certificate referred to in Section 5.01 of these Bylaws may be in facsimile, engraved or printed form, to the extent permitted by law. In case any officer, transfer agent or registrar who has signed, or whose facsimile, engraved or imprinted signature has been placed upon, a certificate shall have ceased to be an officer, transfer agent or registrar before such certificate is issued, it may issued by the Corporation with the same effect as if he or she were an officer, transfer agent or registrar at the date of issue.

Section 5.03. Lost, Stolen or Destroyed Certificates . The Board of Directors may direct that a new certificate be issued in place of any certificate theretofore issued by the Corporation alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, upon delivery to the Corporation of an affidavit of the owner or owners of such certificate, setting forth such allegation. The Corporation may require the owner of such lost, stolen or destroyed certificate, or his or her legal representative, to give the Corporation a bond sufficient to indemnify it against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss, theft or destruction of any such certificate or the issuance of any such new certificate.

Section 5.04. Transfer of Stock . Under surrender to the Corporation or the transfer agent of the Corporation of a certificate for shares, duly endorsed or accompanied by appropriate evidence of succession, assignment or authority to transfer, the Corporation shall issue a new certificate to the person entitled thereto, cancel the old certificate and record the transaction upon its books. Within a reasonable time after the transfer of uncertificated stock, the Corporation shall send to the registered owner thereof a written notice containing the information required to be set

 

23


forth or stated on certificates pursuant to the laws of the State of Delaware. Subject to the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation and these Bylaws, the Board of Directors may prescribe such additional rules and regulations as it may deem appropriate relating to the issue, transfer and registration of shares of the Corporation.

Section 5.05. Record Date .

In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders, or to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights or to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may, except as otherwise required by law, fix a record date, which record date shall not precede the date on which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted and which record date shall not be more than sixty (60) nor less than ten (10) days before the date of any meeting of stockholders, nor more than sixty (60) days prior to the time for such other action as hereinbefore described; provided, however, that if no record date is fixed by the Board of Directors, the record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held, and, for determining stockholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of rights or to exercise any rights of change, conversion or exchange of stock or for any other purpose, the record date shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts a resolution relating thereto.

A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided, however, that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

Section 5.06. Registered Stockholders . Prior to due surrender of a certificate for registration of transfer, the Corporation may treat the registered owner as the person exclusively entitled to receive dividends and other distributions, to vote, to receive notice and otherwise to exercise all the rights and powers of the owner of the shares represented by such certificate, and the Corporation shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or legal claim to or interest in such shares on the part of any other person, whether or not the Corporation shall have notice of such claim or interests. Whenever any transfer of shares shall be made for collateral security, and not absolutely, it shall be so expressed in the entry of the transfer if, when the certificates are presented to the Corporation for transfer or uncertificated shares are requested to be transferred, both the transferor and transferee request the Corporation to do so.

Section 5.07. Transfer Agent and Registrar . The Board of Directors may appoint one (1) or more transfer agents and one (1) or more registrars, and may require all certificates representing shares to bear the signature of any such transfer agents or registrars.

 

24


ARTICLE VI

Indemnification

Section 6.01. Nature of Indemnity . Each person who is or was a party to or subject to, or is threatened to be made a party to or to be the subject of, any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding (a “ Proceeding ”), whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative in nature (including any legislative or self-regulatory), by reason of the fact that he or she is or was or has agreed to become a Director or officer of the Corporation or is or was serving or has agreed to serve, at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee of, or in a similar capacity for, another corporation or any limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, including any employee benefit plan of the Corporation or of any of its affiliates and any charitable or not-for-profit enterprise (any such person being sometimes referred to hereafter as an “ Indemnitee ”), whether the basis of such proceeding is alleged action in an official capacity as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee or in any other capacity while serving as a director, officer, manager, partner or trustee, shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Corporation to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law, as the same exists or may hereafter be amended (but, in the case of any such amendment, only to the extent that such amendment permits the Corporation to provide broader indemnification rights than such law permitted the Corporation to provide prior to such amendment), against all expense, liability and loss (including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes or penalties and amounts paid in settlement) reasonably incurred or suffered by such Indemnitee in connection therewith Notwithstanding the foregoing, but subject to Section 6.04 of these Bylaws, the Corporation shall not be obligated to indemnify a Director or officer of the Corporation in respect of a Proceeding (or part thereof) instituted by such Director or officer, unless such Proceeding (or part thereof) has been authorized by the Board of Directors.

Section 6.02. Successful Defense . To the extent that a present or former Director or officer of the Corporation has been successful on the merits or otherwise in defense of any Proceeding referred to in Section 6.01 hereof or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, such person shall be indemnified against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection therewith.

Section 6.03. Advance Payment of Expenses . In addition to the right to indemnification conferred in Section 6.01 of this Article VI, an Indemnitee shall also have the right to be paid by the Corporation the expenses (including attorney’s fees) incurred in defending any such Proceeding in advance of its final disposition (hereinafter an “advancement of expenses”); provided, however, that, if the Delaware General Corporation Law requires, an advancement of expenses incurred by an Indemnitee in his or her capacity as a director or officer (and not in any other capacity in which service was or is rendered by such Indemnitee, including, without limitation, service to an employee benefit plan) shall be made only upon delivery to the Corporation of an undertaking (hereinafter an “undertaking”), by or on behalf of such Indemnitee, to repay all amounts so advanced if it shall ultimately be determined by final judicial decision from which there is no further right to appeal (hereinafter a “final adjudication”) that such Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified for such expenses under this Section 6.03 or otherwise.

 

25


Section 6.04. Procedures for Indemnification of Directors and Officers . If a claim under Section 6.01 or 6.03 of this Article VI is not paid in full by the Corporation within sixty (60) days after a written claim has been received by the Corporation, except in the case of a claim for an advancement of expenses, in which case the applicable period shall be twenty (20) days, the Indemnitee may at any time thereafter bring suit against the Corporation to recover the unpaid amount of the claim. If successful in whole or in part in any such suit, or in a suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Indemnitee shall be entitled to be paid also the expense of prosecuting or defending such suit. In (i) any suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification hereunder (but not in a suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to an advancement of expenses) it shall be a defense that, and (ii) in any suit brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the Corporation shall be entitled to recover such expenses upon a final adjudication that, the Indemnitee has not met any applicable standard for indemnification set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law. Neither the failure of the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit that indemnification of the Indemnitee is proper in the circumstances because the Indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in the Delaware General Corporation Law, nor an actual determination by the Corporation (including its directors who are not parties to such action, a committee of such directors, independent legal counsel, or its stockholders) that the Indemnitee has not met such applicable standard of conduct, shall create a presumption that the Indemnitee has not met the applicable standard of conduct or, in the case of such a suit brought by the Indemnitee, be a defense to such suit. In any suit brought by the Indemnitee to enforce a right to indemnification or to an advancement of expenses hereunder, or brought by the Corporation to recover an advancement of expenses pursuant to the terms of an undertaking, the burden of proving that the Indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified, or to such advancement of expenses, under this Article VI or otherwise shall be on the Corporation.

Section 6.05. Survival; Preservation of Other Rights . The foregoing indemnification provisions shall be deemed to be a contract between the Corporation and each Director, officer and agent who serves in any such capacity at any time while these provisions as well as the relevant provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law are in effect and any repeal or modification thereof shall not affect any right or obligations then existing with respect to any state of facts then or previously existing or any Proceeding previously or thereafter brought or threatened based in whole or in part upon any such state of facts. Such a “contract right” may not be modified retroactively without the consent of such Director, officer or agent.

The indemnification provided by this Article VI shall not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which those indemnified may be entitled under any bylaw, agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested Directors or otherwise, both as to action in such person’s official capacity and as to action in another capacity while holding such office, and shall continue as to a person who has ceased to be a Director, officer or agent and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors and administrators of such a person.

Section 6.06. Insurance . The Corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was or has agreed to become a Director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a Director, officer,

 

26


employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise against any liability asserted against such person and incurred by such person or on such person’s behalf in any such capacity, or arising out of such person’s status as such, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify him or her against such liability under the provisions of this Article VI, provided that such insurance is available on acceptable terms, which determination shall be made by a vote of a majority of the entire Board of Directors.

Section 6.07. Severability . If this Article VI or any portion hereof shall be invalidated on any ground by any court of competent jurisdiction, then the Corporation shall nevertheless indemnify each Director or officer and may indemnify each employee or agent of the Corporation as to costs, charges and expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement with respect to a Proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, including a Proceeding by or in the right of the Corporation, to the fullest extent permitted by any applicable portion of this Article VI that shall not have been invalidated and to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.

ARTICLE VII

Offices

Section 7.01. Initial Registered Office . The initial registered office of the Corporation in the State of Delaware shall be located at Corporation Trust Center, 1209 N. Orange Street in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle.

Section 7.02. Other Offices . The Corporation may maintain offices or places of business at such other locations within or without the State of Delaware as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine or as the business of the Corporation may require.

ARTICLE VIII

General Provision

Section 8.01. Dividends .

(a) Subject to any applicable provisions of law and the Certificate of Incorporation, dividends upon the shares of the Corporation may be declared by the Board of Directors from time to time and any such dividend may be paid in cash, property, or shares of the Corporation’s capital stock.

(b) A member of the Board of Directors, or a member of any committee designated by the Board of Directors shall be fully protected in relying in good faith upon the records of the Corporation and upon such information, opinions, reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of its officers or employees, or committees of the Board of Directors, or by any other person as to matters the Director reasonably believes are within such other person’s professional or expert competence and who has been selected with reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation, as to the value and amount of the assets, liabilities and/or net profits of the Corporation, or any other facts pertinent to the existence and amount of surplus or other funds from which dividends, might properly be declared and paid.

 

27


Section 8.02. Execution of Instruments . Subject to such limitations as the Board of Directors may from time to time impose and subject to the provisions of these Bylaws, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, the Chief Financial Officer or the Treasurer may enter into any contract or execute and deliver any instrument in the name and on behalf of the Corporation. The Board of Directors may authorize any other officer or agent to enter into any contract or execute and deliver any instrument in the name and on behalf of the Corporation. Any such authorization must be in writing or by electronic transmission and may be general or limited to specific contracts or instruments.

Section 8.03. Deposits . Any funds of the Corporation may be deposited from time to time in such banks, trust companies or other depositories as may be determined by the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Financial Officer or the Treasurer, or by such officers or agents as may be authorized by the Board of Directors to make such determination.

Section 8.04. Voting as Stockholder . Unless otherwise determined by resolution of the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, the Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer or any Vice President shall have full power and authority on behalf of the Corporation to attend any meeting of stockholders of any corporation, partnership or other entity, in which the Corporation may hold stock or other equity interests, and to act, vote (or execute proxies to vote) and exercise in person or by proxy all other rights, powers and privileges incident to the ownership of such stock. Such officers acting on behalf of the Corporation shall have full power and authority to execute any instrument expressing consent to or dissent from any action of any such corporation, partnership or other entity, without a meeting. The Board of Directors or any such officers may from time to time confer such power and authority upon any other person or persons.

Section 8.05. Fiscal Year . The fiscal year of the Corporation shall commence on the first day of January of each year (except for the Corporation’s first fiscal year which shall commence on the date of incorporation) and shall terminate each case on December 31.

Section 8.06. Seal . The seal of Corporation shall be in such form as the Board of Directors may from time to time determine and shall contain the name of the Corporation, the year of its incorporation and the words “Corporate Seal” and “Delaware”. The form of such seal shall be subject to alteration by the Board of Directors. The seal may be used by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed, affixed or reproduced, or may be used in any other lawful manner.

Section 8.07. Books and Records; Inspection . Except to the extent otherwise required by law, the books and records of the Corporation shall be kept at such place or places within or without the State of Delaware as may be determined from time to time by the Board of Directors, the Chief Executive Officer or the President.

ARTICLE IX

Amendment of Bylaws

Section 9.01. Amendment . These Bylaws may be amended, altered or repealed:

(a) by resolution adopted by a majority of the Board of Directors at any special or regular meeting of the Board of Directors if, in the case of such special meeting only, notice of such amendment, alteration or repeal is contained in the notice or waiver of such meeting; or

 

28


(b) at any regular or special meeting of the stockholders upon the affirmative vote of the holders of three-fourths (3/4) or more of the combined voting power of the outstanding shares of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of Directors and notice of such amendment, alteration or repeal is contained in the notice or waiver of notice of such meeting.

ARTICLE X

Construction

Section 10.01. Construction . In the event of any conflict between the provisions of these Bylaws as in effect from time to time and the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation as in effect from time to time, the provisions of such Certificate of Incorporation shall be controlling.

 

29

Exhibit 10.1

EXECUTION VERSION

TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT

by and between

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.

and

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Dated as of December 18, 2008


TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT

 

ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS

   1
 

Section 1.01.

  

Definitions

   1
 

Section 1.02.

  

Currency

   5

ARTICLE II TRANSITION SERVICE SCHEDULES

   5

ARTICLE III SERVICES

   5
 

Section 3.01.

  

Services Generally

   5
 

Section 3.02.

  

Service Levels

   6
 

Section 3.03.

  

Impracticability

   6
 

Section 3.04.

  

Additional Resources

   6

ARTICLE IV OPERATING COMMITTEE

   6
 

Section 4.01.

  

Organization

   6
 

Section 4.02.

  

Decision Making

   6
 

Section 4.03.

  

Meetings

   7

ARTICLE V TERM

   7

ARTICLE VI COMPENSATION

   7
 

Section 6.01.

  

Charges for Services

   7
 

Section 6.02.

  

Payment Terms

   7
 

Section 6.03.

  

Taxes

   8
 

Section 6.04.

  

Performance under Ancillary Agreements

   8
 

Section 6.05.

  

Error Correction; True-up; Accounting

   8

ARTICLE VII GENERAL OBLIGATIONS

   8
 

Section 7.01.

  

Performance Metrics

   8
 

Section 7.02.

  

Disclaimer of Warranties

   9
 

Section 7.03.

  

Transitional Nature of Services; Changes

   9
 

Section 7.04.

  

Responsibilities for Errors; Changes

   9
 

Section 7.05.

  

Cooperation and Consents

   9
 

Section 7.06.

  

Alternatives

   10
 

Section 7.07.

  

Personnel

   10
 

Section 7.08.

  

Insurance

   11

ARTICLE VIII TERMINATION

   11
 

Section 8.01.

  

Termination

   11
 

Section 8.02.

  

Survival

   12
 

Section 8.03.

  

Payment

   12

 

i


 

Section 8.04.

  

User ID; Passwords

   12

ARTICLE IX RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE PARTIES

   13

ARTICLE X SUBCONTRACTORS

   13
 

Section 10.01.

  

Subcontractors

   13
 

Section 10.02.

  

Assignment

   13

ARTICLE XI INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

   14
 

Section 11.01.

  

Allocation of Rights by Ancillary Agreements

   14
 

Section 11.02.

  

Existing Ownership Rights Unaffected

   14
 

Section 11.03.

  

Third Party Software

   14
 

Section 11.04.

  

Termination of Licenses

   14

ARTICLE XII NO OBLIGATION

   14

ARTICLE XIII CONFIDENTIALITY

   14
 

Section 13.01.

  

Confidentiality

   14
 

Section 13.02.

  

Confidential Information

   15
 

Section 13.03.

  

Permitted Purpose

   15
 

Section 13.04.

  

Disclosure

   15
 

Section 13.05.

  

Custody

   15
 

Section 13.06.

  

Expiration of Confidentiality Provisions

   15

ARTICLE XIV LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION

   16
 

Section 14.01.

  

Indemnification

   16
 

Section 14.02.

  

Limitation of Liability

   17
 

Section 14.03.

  

Provisions Applicable with respect to Indemnification Obligations

   17
 

Section 14.04.

  

Survival

   17

ARTICLE XV DISPUTE RESOLUTION

   17

ARTICLE XVI ASSIGNMENT

   18
 

Section 16.01.

  

Prohibition of Assignment

   18
 

Section 16.02.

  

Assignment to the PNX Group

   18

ARTICLE XVII MISCELLANEOUS

   18
 

Section 17.01.

  

Notices

   18
 

Section 17.02.

  

Governing Law

   18
 

Section 17.03.

  

Judgment Currency

   18
 

Section 17.04.

  

Entire Agreement

   18

 

ii


 

Section 17.05.

  

Conflicts

   18
 

Section 17.06.

  

Force Majeure

   19
 

Section 17.07.

  

Amendment and Waiver

   19
 

Section 17.08.

  

Further Assurances

   19
 

Section 17.09.

  

Severability

   19
 

Section 17.10.

  

Counterparts

   20

 

iii


TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT

TRANSITION SERVICES AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”), dated as of December 18, 2008, by and between The Phoenix Companies, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ PNX ”), and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ Spinco ” and together with PNX, the “ Parties ”, and each individually, a “ Party ”). Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meaning ascribed to them in the Separation Agreement (as defined below).

RECITALS

WHEREAS, PNX and Spinco have entered into a Separation Agreement, Plan of Reorganization and Distribution, dated December 18, 2008, pursuant to which the Parties set out the terms and conditions relating to the separation of the Spinco Business (such that the Spinco Business is to be held, as at the Effective Time, directly or indirectly, by Spinco (such agreement, as amended, restated or modified from time to time, the “ Separation Agreement ”).

WHEREAS, in connection therewith, PNX and the other members of the PNX Group, on the one hand, and Spinco and the other members of the Spinco Group, on the other hand, will provide certain transitional services to each other following the Distribution Date, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

WHEREAS, Spinco has entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company (“ PIMCO ”), Spinco, Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“ Harris ”) and PNX (the “ Investment Agreement ”), pursuant to which, among other things, (i) PIMCO contributed all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of Virtus Partners, Inc. (formerly known as Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.) that PIMCO held to Spinco in exchange for (x) all of the outstanding shares of the common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of Spinco, (y) 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series A Preferred Stock ”), all of which was sold to Harris subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, and (z) 35,217 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series B Preferred Stock ”) and (ii) PIMCO will, after such contribution and immediately after the Distribution, subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, sell to Harris all of the Series B Preferred Stock owned by PIMCO and exchange all shares of the Series A Preferred Stock previously delivered to Harris with the same number of shares of the Series B Preferred Stock in a two-step transaction for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing premises and the mutual agreements and covenants contained in this Agreement and other good and valuable consideration the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the Parties agree as follows:

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

Section 1.01. Definitions . For the purposes of this Agreement, the following words and expressions and variations thereof, unless a clearly inconsistent meaning is required under the context, shall have the meanings specified or referred to in this Section 1.01:

Affiliate ” of any Person means any other Person that, directly or indirectly, controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with such first Person as of the date on which or at any time during the period for when such determination is being made. For purposes of this definition, “ control ” means the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of such Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities or other interests, by contract or otherwise, and the terms “ controlling ” and “ controlled ” have meanings correlative to the foregoing.


Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in the Preamble to this Agreement and in Article II.

Ancillary Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in the Separation Agreement.

Applicable Law ” means any applicable law, statute, rule or regulation of any Governmental Authority or any outstanding order, judgment, injunction, ruling or decree by any Governmental Authority.

Business Concern ” means any corporation, company, limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, trust, unincorporated association or any other form of association.

Business Day ” means any day excluding (i) Saturday, Sunday and any other day which, in Hartford, Connecticut, is a legal holiday or (ii) a day on which banks are authorized by Applicable Law to close in Hartford, Connecticut.

Chief Representative ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.07(c).

Commercially Reasonable Efforts ” means the efforts that a reasonable and prudent Person desirous of achieving a business result would use in similar circumstances to ensure that such result is achieved as expeditiously as possible in the context of commercial relations of the type envisaged by this Agreement; provided , however , that an obligation to use Commercially Reasonable Efforts under this Agreement does not require the Person subject to that obligation to assume any material obligations or pay any material amounts to a Third Party.

Confidential Information ” has the meaning set forth in Section 13.02.

Consent ” means any written approval, consent, ratification, waiver or other authorization.

Contract ” means any contract, agreement, lease, license, commitment, consensual obligation, promise or undertaking (whether written or oral and whether express or implied) that is legally binding on any Person or any part of its property under Applicable Law.

Distribution Date ” has the meaning set forth in the Separation Agreement.

Dollars ” or “ $ ” means the lawful currency of the United States of America.

Effective Time ” has the meaning set forth in the Separation Agreement.

 

2


Event of Default ” has the meaning set forth in Section 8.01.

Expiration Date ” has the meaning set forth in Article V.

Fair Market Value ” means, in relation to the pricing of services under this Agreement, terms that would be agreed between non-affiliated third parties for comparable services on a comparable scale, as initially proposed in the reasonable judgment of PNX and reasonably approved by Spinco.

Force Majeure Event ” has the meaning set forth in Section 17.06.

Governmental Authority ” means any court, arbitration panel, governmental or regulatory authority, agency, stock exchange, commission or body.

Governmental Authorization ” means any Consent, license, certificate, franchise, registration or permit issued, granted, given or otherwise made available by, or under the authority of, any Governmental Authority or pursuant to any Applicable Law.

Group ” means the PNX Group or the Spinco Group, as the context requires.

Harris ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

Impracticability ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.03.

Investment Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

Liabilities ” has the meaning set forth in the Separation Agreement.

Operating Committee ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.01.

Party ” has the meaning set forth in the Preamble to this Agreement.

PIMCO ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

PNX ” has the meaning set forth in the Preamble to this Agreement.

PNX Group ” means PNX, its Subsidiaries and Affiliates from time to time after the Effective Time.

PNX Group Company ” means any Person forming part of the PNX Group.

PNX Indemnified Parties ” has the meaning set forth in Section 14.01.

Permitted Purpose ” has the meaning set forth in Section 13.03.

Person ” means any individual, Business Concern or Governmental Authority.

Prime Rate ” means the rate of interest announced by Bloomberg from time to time as the “prime rate,” “prime lending rate,” “base rate” or similar reference rate. In the event the

 

3


Prime Rate is discontinued as a standard, the holder hereof shall designate a comparable reference rate as a substitute therefor. For purposes hereof, the Prime Rate as published by Bloomberg at www.Bloomberg.com under “Market Data: Rates & Bonds: Key Rates” at the close of business on each business day shall be the Prime Rate for that day and any immediately succeeding non-business day or days.

SEC ” means the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Sales Taxes ” means any sales, use, consumption, goods and services, value added or similar tax, duty or charge imposed pursuant to Applicable Law.

Separation Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

Series A Preferred Stock ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

Series B Preferred Stock ” has the meaning set forth in the Recitals to this Agreement.

Service(s) ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.01(c).

Service Manager ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.07(c).

Service Provider ” means PNX or a member of the PNX Group, or Spinco or a member of the Spinco Group, as the case may be, when it is providing a Service to Spinco or a member of the Spinco Group, or PNX or a member of the PNX Group, as the case may be, hereunder in accordance with a Transition Service Schedule.

Service Recipient ” means PNX or a member of the PNX Group, or Spinco or a member of the Spinco Group, as the case may be, when it is receiving a Service from Spinco or a member of the Spinco Group, or PNX or a member of the PNX Group, as the case may be, hereunder in accordance with a Transition Service Schedule.

Spinco ” has the meaning set forth in the Preamble to this Agreement.

Spinco Group ” means Spinco, its Subsidiaries and Affiliates from time to time after the Effective Time.

Spinco Indemnified Parties ” has the meaning set forth in Section 14.01.

Subcontractor ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.01.

Subsidiary ” of any Person means any corporation, partnership, limited liability entity, joint venture or other organization, whether incorporated or unincorporated, of which a majority of the total voting power of capital stock or other interests entitled (without the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees thereof is at the time owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person.

Term ” has the meaning set forth in Article V.

 

4


Third Party ” means a Person that is not a Party to this Agreement, other than a member of the PNX Group or a member of the Spinco Group.

Transition Service Schedule ” has the meaning set forth in Article II.

Section 1.02. Currency . Except as otherwise specified in a Transition Service Schedule, all references to currency herein are to lawful money of the United States of America.

ARTICLE II

TRANSITION SERVICE SCHEDULES

This Agreement will govern individual transition Services as requested by either Spinco or any other member of the Spinco Group, on the one hand, or PNX or any other member of the PNX Group, on the other hand, the details of which are set forth in the Transition Service Schedules attached to and forming part of this Agreement. Each Service shall be covered by this Agreement upon execution of a transition service schedule in the form attached hereto (each transition service schedule, a “ Transition Service Schedule ”).

For each Service, the Parties shall set forth in a Transition Service Schedule substantially in the form of Schedule 1 hereto, among other things, (i) the time period during which the Service will be provided if different from the Term of this Agreement, (ii) a summary of the Service to be provided and (iii) the method for determining the charge, if any, for the Service and any other terms applicable thereto. Obligations regarding a Transition Service Schedule shall be effective upon the later of the Distribution Date or the date of execution of the applicable Transition Service Schedule. This Agreement and all the Transition Service Schedules shall be defined as the “ Agreement ” and incorporated herein wherever reference to it is made.

ARTICLE III

SERVICES

Section 3.01. Services Generally . (a) Except as otherwise provided herein, for the Term hereof, PNX and other members of the PNX Group shall provide to Spinco and the other members of the Spinco Group, and shall cause the other applicable members of the PNX Group to provide or cause to be provided to Spinco and the other members of the Spinco Group, the Services described in the Transition Service Schedule(s) attached hereto identified on such Schedules as Services to be provided by members of the PNX Group.

(b) Except as otherwise provided herein, for the Term hereof, Spinco and other members of the Spinco Group shall provide to PNX and the other members of the PNX Group, and shall cause the other applicable members of the Spinco Group to provide or cause to be provided to PNX and the other members of the PNX Group, the Services described in the Transition Service Schedule(s) attached hereto identified on such Schedules as Services to be provided by members of the Spinco Group.

(c) The Service(s) described on a single Transition Service Schedule shall be referred to herein as a “ Service .” Collectively, the services described on all the Transition Service Schedules shall be referred to herein as the “ Services .” PNX and Spinco shall cause the members of their respective Groups to, if applicable, comply with the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement or in the Transition Services Schedules.

 

5


Section 3.02. Service Levels . Except as otherwise provided in a Transition Service Schedule for a specific service: (i) the Service Provider shall provide the Services only to the extent such Services are being provided immediately prior to the Distribution Date and at a level of service substantially similar to that provided immediately prior to the Distribution Date and (ii) the Services will be available only for purposes of conducting the business of the Service Recipient substantially in the manner it was conducted prior to the Effective Time; provided , however , that nothing in this Agreement will require a Party to favor the other Party over its other business operations. Except as otherwise provided in a Transition Service Schedule in respect of a specific Service, each Party will not be entitled to any new service.

Section 3.03. Impracticability . A Service Provider shall not be required to provide any Service to the extent the performance of such Service becomes impracticable as a result of a cause or causes outside the reasonable control of the Service Provider, including unfeasible technological requirements, or to the extent the performance of such Services would require the Service Provider to violate any Applicable Law, or would result in the breach of any license, Governmental Authorization or Contract (an “ Impracticability ”).

Section 3.04. Additional Resources . In accordance with Section 7.07 below and except as specifically provided in a Transition Service Schedule for a specific Service, in providing the Services, a Service Provider shall not be obligated to: (i) hire any additional employees; (ii) maintain the employment of any specific employee; (iii) purchase, lease or license any additional facilities, equipment or software; or (iv) pay any costs related to the transfer or conversion of the Service Recipient’s data to the Service Provider or any alternate supplier of Services.

ARTICLE IV

OPERATING COMMITTEE

Section 4.01. Organization . The Parties shall create an operating committee (the “ Operating Committee ”) and shall each appoint one (1) employee to the Operating Committee for the Term. The Operating Committee will oversee the implementation and application of this Agreement and shall at all times reasonably and in good faith attempt to resolve any dispute between the Parties. Each of the Parties shall have the right to change its Operating Committee member at any time with employees of comparable knowledge, expertise and decision-making authority.

Section 4.02. Decision Making . All Operating Committee decisions shall be taken unanimously. If the Operating Committee fails to make a decision, resolve a dispute, agree upon any necessary action, or if a Party so requests, in the event of a material breach of this Agreement, a senior officer of PNX and a senior officer of Spinco, neither of whom shall have any direct oversight or responsibility for the subject matter in dispute, shall attempt within a period of fourteen (14) days to conclusively resolve any such unresolved issue.

 

6


Section 4.03. Meetings . During the Term, the Operating Committee members shall meet, in person or via teleconference, at least once in each week during the first six (6) months and thereafter on a monthly basis, or less frequently if agreed by the members of the Operating Committee. In addition, the Operating Committee shall meet as often as necessary in order to promptly resolve any disputes submitted to it by any representative of either Party.

ARTICLE V

TERM

The term of this Agreement shall commence on the Distribution Date and end twelve (12) months following the Distribution Date, unless earlier terminated under Article VIII or extended as hereinafter provided (the “ Term ”). Each Party shall have the right to extend the term of the agreement for a renewal term of three months upon written notice to the other Party no later than thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the initial term (the last day of the initial term or renewal term, as applicable, the “ Expiration Date ”). Under certain circumstances and for certain Services, as specified in the applicable Transition Service Schedule, each Party shall have the right to extend the term of the agreement for a second renewal term of three (3) additional months. The Parties may agree on an earlier expiration date respecting a specific Service by specifying such date on the Transition Service Schedule for that Service. Services shall be provided up to and including the date set forth in the applicable Transition Service Schedule, subject to earlier termination as provided in Article VIII. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Service Recipient, upon and after expiration or early termination of this Agreement with respect to a specific Service, to perform, render and provide for itself (or to make arrangements with one or more Third Party service providers to perform, render and provide) such Service, and to do all necessary planning and make all necessary preparations in connection therewith.

ARTICLE VI

COMPENSATION

Section 6.01. Charges for Services . The Service Recipient shall pay the Service Provider the charges, if any, set forth on the Transition Service Schedules for each of the Services listed therein as adjusted, from time to time, in accordance with the processes and procedures established under Section 7.01 hereof, or, if no such charges are specifically indicated otherwise on a Transition Service Schedule, the Fair Market Value of the Services. If there is any inconsistency between the Transition Service Schedule and this Section 6.01, the terms of the Transition Service Schedule shall govern. The Parties also intend, having regard to the reciprocal and transitional nature of this Agreement and other factors, for charges to be easy to administer and justify; and, therefore, they hereby acknowledge that it may be counterproductive to try to recover every cost, charge or expense, particularly those that are insignificant or de minimis.

Section 6.02. Payment Terms . Except as otherwise specified in a Transition Service Schedule, the Service Provider shall invoice the Service Recipient monthly (or on such other basis as the Parties may mutually determine) for all charges pursuant to this Agreement. Such invoices shall specify the Services provided to the Service Recipient during the preceding month and identifying the Service fee applicable to each Service so specified, and shall be accompanied by reasonable documentation or other reasonable explanations supporting such

 

7


charges. Except as otherwise specified in a Transition Service Schedule, the Service Recipient shall pay, net of applicable withholding tax, if any, the Service Provider for all Services provided hereunder within thirty (30) days after receipt of an invoice therefor by wire transfer of immediately available funds to the account designated by the Service Provider for this purpose. Late payments shall bear interest at a rate per annum equal to the Prime Rate plus 2.0%, calculated for the actual number of days elapsed, accrued from and excluding the date on which such payment was due up to and including the date of payment.

Section 6.03. Taxes . The fees and charges payable by the Service Recipient under this Agreement and set forth on the Transition Service Schedules shall be exclusive of any Sales Taxes or excise taxes or any customs or import charges or duties or any similar charges or duties which may be imposed by any Governmental Authority in connection with the purchase or delivery of the Services or materials to the Service Recipient. The Service Recipient shall remit to the Service Provider any Sales Taxes properly payable to the Service Provider pursuant to this Agreement. Applicable Sales Taxes shall be indicated by the Service Provider separately on all of the Service Provider’s invoices. The Parties shall co-operate with each other to minimize any applicable Sales Taxes and each shall provide the other with any reasonable certificates or documents which are useful for such purpose.

Section 6.04. Performance under Ancillary Agreements . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Service Recipient shall not be charged under this Agreement for any obligations that are specifically required to be performed under the Separation Agreement or any other Ancillary Agreement; and any such other obligations shall be performed and charged for (if applicable) in accordance with the terms of the Separation Agreement or such other Ancillary Agreement.

Section 6.05. Error Correction; True-up; Accounting . The Parties shall agree to develop, through the Operating Committee or otherwise, mutually acceptable reasonable processes and procedures for conducting internal audits and making adjustments to charges as a result of the movement of employees and functions between the Parties, the discovery of errors or omissions in charges, as well as a true-up of amounts owed. In no event shall such processes and procedures extend beyond eighteen (18) months after completion of a Service.

ARTICLE VII

GENERAL OBLIGATIONS

Section 7.01. Performance Metrics . Subject to Sections 3.02 to 3.04 and any other terms and conditions of this Agreement, each Party shall maintain, and shall cause the relevant other members of its respective Group to maintain, sufficient resources to perform their obligations hereunder. Specific performance metrics for each Party for a specific Service may be set forth in the corresponding Transition Service Schedule. Where none is set forth, each Party and the other relevant members of its respective Group shall use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to provide Services, or to cause the Services to be provided, in accordance with the policies, procedures, service levels and practices in effect before the Distribution Date and shall exercise the same care and skill as each Party exercises in performing similar services for itself or for the other members of its respective Group. To the extent within the possession and control of a Service Recipient, such Service Recipient shall provide, and shall cause the other relevant

 

8


members of its respective Group to provide, the Service Provider with information and documentation sufficient for the Service Provider and the other relevant members of its respective Group to perform the Services they are obligated to perform hereunder as they were performed before the Distribution Date and shall make available, as reasonably requested by the Service Provider, sufficient resources and timely decisions, approvals and acceptances in order that the Service Provider may perform its obligations hereunder in a timely manner.

Section 7.02. Disclaimer of Warranties . Except as expressly provided in this Agreement, no Party makes any warranties or conditions, express, implied, conventional or statutory, including but not limited to, the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability, of quality or fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the Services or other items or deliverables provided by it or any other member of its respective Group hereunder or any transactions contemplated herein.

Section 7.03. Transitional Nature of Services; Changes . The Parties acknowledge the transitional nature of the Services and that a Service Provider may make changes from time to time in the manner of performing the Services if the Service Provider is making similar changes in performing similar services for itself and if the Service Provider provides to the Service Recipient reasonable notice of the circumstances regarding such changes.

Section 7.04. Responsibilities for Errors; Changes . Except as set forth in Article XIV and in the case of Service Provider’s gross negligence, bad faith or willful misconduct, the Service Provider’s sole responsibility to the Service Recipient:

(a) for material errors or omissions in Services, shall be to furnish correct information, payment and/or adjustment in the Services, at no additional cost or expense to the Service Recipient; provided that the Service Provider must promptly advise the Service Recipient of any such material error or omission of which it becomes aware; and

(b) for failure to deliver any Service because of Impracticability, shall be to use Commercially Reasonable Efforts, subject to Section 3.03, to make the Services available or to resume performing the Services as promptly as reasonably practicable.

Section 7.05. Cooperation and Consents . The Parties shall, and shall cause the other relevant members of their respective Groups to, cooperate with each other in all matters relating to the provision and receipt of Services. Such cooperation shall include exchanging information, performing true-ups and adjustments, and obtaining all Third Party Consents, licenses or sublicenses necessary to permit each Party to perform its obligations hereunder (including by way of example, not by way of limitation, rights to use Third Party software needed for the performance of Services). Pursuant to Section 11.03, the costs of obtaining such Third Party Consents, licenses or sublicenses shall be borne by the Service Recipient. The Parties shall maintain, and shall cause the other relevant members of their respective Groups to maintain, in accordance with its standard document retention procedures, documentation supporting the information relevant to cost calculations contained in the Transition Service Schedules.

 

9


With respect to those Services that, in the reasonable opinion of a Service Recipient, relate to matters of internal control over financial reporting and with respect to which such Service Recipient reasonably believes testing of certain key controls maintained by the Service Provider is necessary in order to permit such Service Recipient’s management to perform an adequate assessment of internal control over financial reporting (and to permit its auditors or internal auditors to audit its internal control over financial reporting), upon request by such Service Recipient no later than sixty (60) days before the end of a calendar year where such management assessment and related audit of its internal control over financial reporting is actually required for SEC reporting, the Service Provider and such Service Recipient shall jointly identify key controls over financial reporting maintained by the Service Provider. The Service Provider will provide such Service Recipient’s external and internal auditors access to information, systems and those individuals responsible for execution of any key controls maintained by the Service Provider so as to enable the independent auditors or internal auditors to determine such controls over the practices and procedures relating to the Service Provider’s performance of such Services under this Agreement are in effect. The Service Provider will, and will use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to cause its external and internal auditors to, provide information to such Service Recipient and the Service Recipient’s external and internal auditors in order to allow such Service Recipient or the Service Recipient’s internal and external auditors to perform procedures with respect to key controls which must be tested as part of such Service Recipient’s management assessment process and required by generally accepted auditing standards, including, without limitation, PCAOB auditing standards, and by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the rules promulgated and guidance issued thereunder. All expenditures incurred by a Service Provider in performing its obligations under this paragraph shall be payable by the Service Recipient.

Section 7.06. Alternatives . If the Service Provider reasonably believes it is unable to provide any Service because of a failure to obtain necessary Consents, licenses or sublicenses pursuant to Section 7.05 or because of Impracticability, the Parties shall reasonably and in good faith cooperate to determine the best alternative approach. Until such alternative approach is found or the problem otherwise resolved to the reasonable satisfaction of the Parties, the Service Provider shall use Commercially Reasonable Efforts subject to Sections 3.02, 3.03 and 3.04, to continue providing the Service. To the extent an agreed upon alternative approach requires the occurrence of costs or expenditures above and beyond that which is included in the Service Provider’s charge for the Service in question, such additional costs and expenditures shall be discussed between the Parties and, unless otherwise agreed, be borne by the Service Recipient.

Section 7.07. Personnel .

(a) Right to designate and change personnel . The Service Provider will have the right to designate which personnel it will assign to perform the Services. The Service Provider also will have the right to remove and replace any such personnel at any time or designate any of its Affiliates or a Subcontractor at any time to perform the Services, subject to the provisions of Article X; provided , however , that the Service Provider will use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to limit the disruption to the Service Recipient in the transition of the Services to different personnel or to a Subcontractor. In the event that personnel with the designated level of experience are not then employed by the Service Provider, the Service

 

10


Provider will use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to provide such personnel or Subcontractor personnel having an adequate level of experience; provided , however , that the Service Provider will have no obligation to retain any individual employee for the sole purpose of providing the applicable Services.

(b) Financial Responsibility . The Service Provider will pay for all personnel expenses, including wages, of its employees performing the Services.

(c) Service Managers and Chief Representatives . During the Term of this Agreement, each Party will appoint (i) one of its employees (the “ Service Manager ”) who will have overall responsibility for managing and coordinating the delivery of the Services and who shall serve as such Party’s representative on the Operating Committee and (ii) one of its employees for each service as indicated in each Transition Service Schedule (the “ Chief Representative ”). The Service Manager and the Chief Representatives will coordinate and consult with the Service Recipient. The Service Provider may, at its discretion, select other individuals to serve in these capacities during the Term of this Agreement upon providing notice to the other Party. For greater certainty, a Chief Representative may serve as such in respect of one or more Transition Service Schedules.

Section 7.08. Insurance . Each Party shall obtain and maintain at its own expense insurance of the type generally maintained in the ordinary course of its business. Except as otherwise specified in a Transition Service Schedule, the Service Provider shall not be required to obtain and maintain any particular insurance in relation to providing any Service.

ARTICLE VIII

TERMINATION

Section 8.01. Termination . The Service Recipient may terminate any Service, with or without cause, at any time upon at least sixty (60) days prior notice to the Service Provider. As soon as reasonably practicable following receipt of any such notice, the Service Provider shall advise the Service Recipient as to whether termination of such Service will (a) require the termination or partial termination of, or otherwise affect the provision of, certain other Services, or (b) result in any early termination costs, including those related to Subcontractors. In the event that such termination is expected by the Service Provider to result in any early termination costs, the Service Provider will provide to the Service Recipient such information as it has reasonably available regarding the estimated amount of such costs, which in the case of a Subcontractor may be based upon information provided by such Subcontractor. Any early termination costs shall be borne by the Service Recipient as set forth in Section 8.03. If either will be the case, the Service Recipient may withdraw its termination notice within five (5) Business Days. If the Service Recipient does not withdraw the termination notice within such period, such termination will occur in accordance with the original notice.

In addition, the Parties agree that either Party may terminate this Agreement (and the corresponding Transition Service Schedule) with respect to a specific Service upon providing notice to the other Party in the event that an Event of Default occurs in relation to such other Party, and such termination shall take effect immediately upon the non-defaulting Party providing such notice to the other (except as otherwise specified in clause (d) below).

 

11


For the purposes of this Agreement, each of the following shall individually and collectively constitute an “ Event of Default ”:

(a) in relation to the Service Recipient, if the Service Recipient defaults in payment to the Service Provider of any payments which are due and payable by it to the Service Provider pursuant to this Agreement, and such default is not cured within thirty (30) days following receipt by the Service Recipient of notice of such default;

(b) in relation to the Service Provider, if the Service Provider defaults in payment to the Service Recipient of any payments which are due and payable by it to the Service Recipient pursuant to this Agreement (if any), and such default is not cured within thirty (30) days following receipt by the Service Provider of notice of such default;

(c) either Party breaches any of its material obligations to the other Party pursuant to this Agreement (other than as set out in paragraphs (a) and (b) above), and fails to cure it within thirty (30) days after receipt of notice from the non-defaulting Party specifying the default in reasonable detail and demanding that it be rectified, provided that if such breach is not capable of being cured within thirty (30) days after receipt of such notice and the Party in default has diligently pursued efforts to cure the default within the thirty (30) day period, no Event of Default under this paragraph (c) shall occur;

(d) either Party (i) is bankrupt or insolvent or takes the benefit of any statute in force for bankrupt or insolvent debtors, or (ii) files a proposal or takes any action or proceeding before any court of competent jurisdiction for its dissolution, winding-up or liquidation, or for the liquidation of its assets, or a receiver is appointed in respect of its assets, which order, filing or appointment is not rescinded within sixty (60) days.

Section 8.02. Survival . Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of any termination or expiration with respect to one or more Services, but less than all Services, this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect with respect to any Services not terminated or expired.

Section 8.03. Payment . Immediately following the Expiration Date, the Service Provider shall cease, or cause the other members of the Group to which it belongs, or its Subcontractors to cease, providing the Services, and the Service Recipient shall promptly pay or cause the other members of the Group to which it belongs, to promptly pay all fees accrued pursuant to Article VI but unpaid to the Service Provider; provided , however , that in case of earlier termination without cause, the Service Recipient shall in accordance with Section 8.01 above reimburse the Service Provider only to the extent of the reasonable termination costs actually incurred by the Service Provider resulting from the Service Recipient’s early termination of such Services, including those owed to Subcontractors. The Service Provider will use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to mitigate any such termination costs.

Section 8.04. User ID; Passwords . The Parties shall use Commercially Reasonable Efforts upon the termination or expiration of this Agreement or of any specific Service hereto to ensure that access by one Party to the other Party’s systems is cancelled.

 

12


ARTICLE IX

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE PARTIES

The Service Provider is and will remain at all times an independent contractor in the performance of all Services hereunder. In all matters relating to this Agreement, the Service Provider will be solely responsible for the acts of its employees and agents, and employees or agents of the Service Provider shall not be considered employees or agents of the Service Recipient. Except as otherwise provided herein, the Service Provider will not have any right, power or authority to create any obligation, express or implied, on behalf of the Service Recipient nor shall the Service Provider act or represent or hold itself out as having authority to act as an agent or partner of the Service Recipient, or in any way bind or commit the Service Recipient to any obligations. Nothing in this Agreement is intended to create or constitute a joint venture, partnership, agency, trust or other association of any kind between the Parties or Persons referred to herein, and each Party shall be responsible only for its respective obligations as set forth in this Agreement. Neither the Service Provider nor its employees shall be considered an employee or agent of the Service Recipient for any purpose, except as expressly agreed by the Parties. The Service Provider shall have sole responsibility for the supervision, daily direction and control, payment of salary (including withholding of income taxes and deductions at source), worker’s compensation, disability benefits and the like of its employees.

ARTICLE X

SUBCONTRACTORS

Section 10.01. Subcontractors . The Service Provider may, subject to Section 10.02, engage a “Subcontractor” to perform all or any portion of the Service Provider’s duties under this Agreement, provided that any such Subcontractor agrees in writing to be bound by confidentiality obligations at least as protective as the terms of Section 11.04 of the Separation Agreement regarding confidentiality and non-use of information, and provided further that the Service Provider remains responsible for the performance of such Subcontractor and for paying the Subcontractor. As used in this Agreement, “ Subcontractor ” will mean any Person or entity engaged to perform hereunder, other than employees of the Service Provider or its Affiliates.

Section 10.02. Assignment . In the event of any subcontracting by the Service Provider to a non-Affiliate of the Service Provider of all or any portion of the Service Provider’s duties under this Agreement, the Service Provider shall assign and transfer to the Service Recipient the full benefit of all such non-Affiliate subcontractor’s performance covenants, guarantees, warranties or indemnities (if any), to the extent same are transferable or assignable, in respect of the portion of the Services provided to the Service Recipient pursuant to such subcontracting; and if any such guarantees, warranties, indemnities and benefits are not assignable, the Service Provider shall use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to procure the benefit of same for the Service Recipient through other legal permissible means. The Service Provider will also reasonably endeavor to permit the assignment of any Subcontractor engagement to a Service Recipient or its Affiliates at the request of the Service Recipient upon termination of Service hereunder.

 

13


ARTICLE XI

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

Section 11.01. Allocation of Rights by Ancillary Agreements . This Agreement and the performance of this Agreement will not affect the ownership of any patent, trademark or copyright or other intellectual property rights allocated in the Separation Agreement or any of the Ancillary Agreements.

Section 11.02. Existing Ownership Rights Unaffected . Neither Party will gain, by virtue of this Agreement, any rights of ownership of copyrights, patents, trade secrets, trademarks or any other intellectual property rights owned by the other.

The Service Recipient agrees to reimburse the Service Provider for any reasonable out-of-pocket expenses arising out of the obligations under this Section 11.02. The Service Provider hereby waives, and shall cause its employees to waive, the whole of its and their rights to any copyright material developed under this Agreement.

Section 11.03. Third Party Software . In addition to the consideration set forth elsewhere in this Agreement, the Service Recipient shall also pay any amounts (and applicable Sales Taxes) that are required to be paid to any licensors of software that is used by the Service Provider (other than as a part of its normal operations), to the extent that such software is used in connection with the provision of any Service hereunder, and any amounts (and applicable Sales Taxes) that are required to be paid by the Service Provider to any such licensors to obtain the Consent of such licensors to allow the Service Provider to provide any of the Services hereunder. Subject to the immediately preceding sentence and to the terms of the Separation Agreement, the Service Provider will use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to obtain any Consent that may be required from such licensors in order to provide any of the transition Services hereunder.

Section 11.04. Termination of Licenses . Any license granted hereunder by the Service Provider shall terminate ipso facto upon the expiration or early termination of this Agreement.

ARTICLE XII

NO OBLIGATION

Neither Party assumes any responsibility or obligation whatsoever, other than the responsibilities and obligations expressly set forth in this Agreement (including the exhibits and schedules hereto), in the Separation Agreement or in a separate written agreement between the Parties.

ARTICLE XIII

CONFIDENTIALITY

Section 13.01. Confidentiality . The terms of the Confidentiality provisions set forth in Article XI of the Separation Agreement shall apply to all confidential information disclosed in the course of the Parties’ interactions under this Agreement. This Article XIII of the Agreement sets out additional requirements regarding confidential information for the purposes of this Agreement.

 

14


Section 13.02. Confidential Information . The term “ Confidential Information ” means all business or operational information concerning a Service Recipient (including (i) earnings reports and forecasts, (ii) macro-economic reports and forecasts, (iii) business and strategic plans, (iv) general market evaluations and surveys, (v) litigation presentations and risk assessments, (vi) budgets, (vii) financing and credit-related information, (viii) specifications, ideas and concepts for products and services, (ix) quality assurance policies, procedures and specifications, (x) customer information, (xi) Software, (xii) training materials and information, and (xiii) all other know-how, methodology, procedures, techniques and trade secrets related to design, development and operational processes) which, prior to or following the Effective Time, has been disclosed by such Service Recipient to the Service Provider, in written, oral (including by recording), electronic, or visual form to, or otherwise has come into the possession of, the Service Provider (except to the extent that such information can be shown to have been (i) in the public domain through no action of the Service Provider, (ii) lawfully acquired from other sources by the Service Provider to which it was furnished or (iii) independently developed by the Service Provider; provided , however , in the case of clause (ii) that, to the knowledge of the Service Provider, such sources did not provide such information in breach of any confidentiality obligations).

Section 13.03. Permitted Purpose . The term “ Permitted Purpose ” means the provision of a Service by the Service Provider to the Service Recipient under this Agreement.

Section 13.04. Disclosure . The Service Provider may use Confidential Information in connection with a Permitted Purpose, provided that for purposes of this Agreement, Confidential Information shall not be used by the Service Provider for any purpose other than a Permitted Purpose or in any way that is detrimental to the Service Recipient. In particular,

(a) the Service Provider shall not disclose any Confidential Information to any employee of the Service Provider who does not have a need to know such Confidential Information in order to perform the Permitted Purpose; and

(b) the Service Provider shall not use the Confidential Information other than for such purposes as shall be expressly permitted under this Agreement.

Section 13.05. Custody . The Confidential Information, including any derivative documents prepared by the Service Provider, will be held in safe custody and kept confidential on the terms set forth in this Agreement. Each employee of the Service Provider who is authorized to have or be aware of Confidential Information will store that information in his possession in separate paper and/or electronic files.

Section 13.06. Expiration of Confidentiality Provisions . The obligations of the Parties under this Article XIII shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement; provided , however , that in any event, the obligations of the Parties under this Article XIII shall expire on the fifth anniversary of the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

 

15


ARTICLE XIV

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION

Section 14.01. Indemnification . PNX shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Spinco, each other member of the Spinco Group and each of their respective directors, officers and employees, and each of the heirs, executors, trustees, administrators, successors and assignors of any of the foregoing (collectively, the “ Spinco Indemnified Parties ”), from and against any and all Liabilities of the Spinco Indemnified Parties incurred by, borne by or asserted against any of them relating to, arising out of or resulting from any of the following items (without duplication):

(a) the breach or the failure of performance by PNX of any of the covenants, promises, undertakings or agreements which it is obligated to perform under this Agreement;

(b) death of or injury of any person whomsoever, including but not limited to directors, officers, employees, servants or agents of Spinco, of another member of the Spinco Group or contractors, resulting from the acts or omissions of PNX or its Affiliates under or in connection with this Agreement, to the extent that such Liabilities are not covered by worker’s compensation;

(c) loss of, or damage to, or destruction of any property whatsoever, including without limitation, property of Spinco or of another member of the Spinco Group, resulting from the acts or omissions of PNX or its Affiliates under or in connection with this Agreement, to the extent such liabilities are not covered by insurance; or

(d) any claim or assertion that the execution or performance by Spinco of its obligations under this Agreement violates or interferes with any contractual or other right or obligation or relationship of PNX to or with any other Person,

caused by, arising out of, or in any way related to this Agreement, but subject however to the limitations of liability provided in Section 14.02 of this Agreement.

Spinco shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless PNX, each other member of the PNX Group and each of their respective directors, officers and employees, and each of the heirs, executors, trustees, administrators, successors and assignors of any of the foregoing (collectively, the “ PNX Indemnified Parties ”), from and against any and all Liabilities of the PNX Indemnified Parties incurred by, borne by or asserted against any of them relating to, arising out of or resulting from any of the following items (without duplication):

(a) the breach or the failure of performance by Spinco of any of the covenants, promises, undertakings or agreements which it is obligated to perform under this Agreement;

(b) death of or injury of any person whomsoever, including but not limited to directors, officers, employees, servants or agents of PNX, of another member of the PNX Group or contractors, resulting from the acts or omissions of Spinco or its Affiliates under or in connection with this Agreement, to the extent that such Liabilities are not covered by worker’s compensation;

 

16


(c) loss of, or damage to, or destruction of any property whatsoever, including without limitation, property of PNX or of another member of the PNX Group, resulting from the acts or omissions of Spinco or its Affiliates under or in connection with this Agreement, to the extent such liabilities are not covered by insurance; or

(d) any claim or assertion that the execution or performance by PNX of its obligations under this Agreement violates or interferes with any contractual or other right or obligation or relationship of Spinco to or with any other Person,

caused by, arising out of, or in any way related to this Agreement, but subject however to the limitations of liability provided in Section 14.02 of this Agreement.

Section 14.02. Limitation of Liability . Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 14.01, the total aggregate liability of a Party to the other Party for all events, acts or omissions of such Party under or in connection with this Agreement or the Services provided by such Party hereunder, whether based on an action or claim in contract, warranty, equity, negligence, tort or otherwise, shall not exceed an amount equal to the value of the Services payable by such Party to the other Party under this Agreement; provided that the foregoing limit shall not apply with respect to any liability arising out of or relating to such Party’s gross negligence or willful misconduct or the gross negligence or willful misconduct of its personnel, contractors, subcontractors or agents or other Persons for which it is responsible under Applicable Law.

In no event shall any member of the PNX Group or the Spinco Group be liable to any member of the other Group for any special, consequential, indirect, collateral, incidental or punitive damages, lost profits, or failure to realize expected savings, or other commercial or economic loss of any kind, however caused and on any theory of liability (including negligence), arising in any way out of this Agreement, whether or not such Person has been advised for the possibility of any such damages; provided , however , that the foregoing limitations shall not limit either Party’s indemnification obligations for liabilities to with respect to Third Party Claims as set forth in Article VI of the Separation Agreement.

Section 14.03. Provisions Applicable with respect to Indemnification Obligations . Article VI of the Separation Agreement shall apply mutatis mutandis with respect to any Liability subject to indemnification or reimbursement pursuant to Article XIV of this Agreement.

Section 14.04. Survival . The rights and obligations of the Parties under this Article XIV shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

ARTICLE XV

DISPUTE RESOLUTION

The Separation Agreement with respect to Dispute Resolution, effective as of the Effective Time, among the Parties and other parties thereto shall govern all disputes, controversies or claims (whether arising in contract, delict, tort or otherwise) between the Parties that may arise out of, or relate to, or arise under or in connection with, this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby (including all actions taken in furtherance of the transactions contemplated hereby), or the commercial or economic relationship of the Parties relating hereto or thereto.

 

17


ARTICLE XVI

ASSIGNMENT

Section 16.01. Prohibition of Assignment . Neither Party shall assign or transfer this Agreement, in whole or in part, or any interest or obligation arising under this Agreement except as permitted by Section 7.07(a), Article X and Section 16.02, without the prior written consent of the other Party.

Section 16.02. Assignment to the PNX Group . PNX may elect to have one or more of the members of the PNX Group assume the rights and obligations of PNX under this Agreement.

ARTICLE XVII

MISCELLANEOUS

Section 17.01. Notices . All notices and other communications hereunder shall be given in the manner set forth in Section 13.02 of the Separation Agreement.

Section 17.02. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with, and governed by, the laws of the State of Connecticut, without regard to the conflicts of law rules of such state.

Section 17.03. Judgment Currency . The obligations of a Party to make payments hereunder shall not be discharged by an amount paid in any currency other than Dollars, whether pursuant to a court order or judgment or arbitral award or otherwise, to the extent that the amount so paid upon conversion to Dollars and transferred to an account indicated by the Party to receive such funds under normal banking procedures does not yield the amount of Dollars due; and each Party hereby, as a separate obligation and notwithstanding any such judgment, agrees to indemnify each other Party against, and to pay to such Party on demand, in Dollars, any difference between the sum originally due in Dollars and the amount of Dollars received upon any such conversion and transfer.

Section 17.04. Entire Agreement . This Agreement, the other Ancillary Agreements, the Separation Agreement and exhibits, schedules and appendices hereto, including the Transition Services Schedules, and thereto and the specific agreements contemplated herein or thereby, contain the entire agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all previous agreements, negotiations, discussions, writings, understandings, commitments and conversations with respect to such subject matter. No agreements or understandings exist between the Parties other than those set forth or referred to herein or therein.

Section 17.05. Conflicts . In case of any conflict or inconsistency between this Agreement and the Separation Agreement, this Agreement shall prevail. In case of any conflict or inconsistency between the terms and conditions of this Agreement (excluding, for the purpose of this Section 17.05, any Transition Service Schedule thereto) and the terms of any Transition Service Schedule, the provisions of the Transition Service Schedule shall prevail.

 

18


Section 17.06. Force Majeure . No Party shall be deemed in default of this Agreement to the extent that any delay or failure in the performance of its obligations under this Agreement results from superior force (“ Force Majeure ”) or any act, occurrence or omission beyond its reasonable control and without its fault or negligence, such as fires, explosions, accidents, strikes, lockouts or labor disturbances, floods, droughts, earthquakes, epidemics, seizures of cargo, wars (whether or not declared), civil commotion, acts of God or the public enemy, action of any government, legislature, court or other Governmental Authority, action by any authority, representative or organization exercising or claiming to exercise powers of a government or Governmental Authority, compliance with Applicable Law, blockades, power failures or curtailments, inadequacy or shortages or curtailments or cessation of supplies of raw materials or other supplies, failure or breakdown of equipment of facilities or, in the case of computer systems, any failure in electrical or air conditioning equipment (a “ Force Majeure Event ”). If a Force Majeure Event has occurred and its effects are continuing, then, upon notice by the Party who is delayed or prevented from performing its obligations to the other Party, (i) the affected provisions or other requirements of this Agreement shall be suspended to the extent necessary during the period of such disability, (ii) the Party which is delayed or prevented from performing its obligations by a Force Majeure Event shall have the right to apportion its Services in an equitable manner to all users and (iii) such Party shall have no liability to the other Party or any other Person in connection therewith. The Party which is delayed or prevented from performing its obligations by the Force Majeure Event shall resume full performance of this Agreement as soon as reasonably practicable following the cessation of the Force Majeure Event (or the consequences thereof).

Section 17.07. Amendment and Waiver . This Agreement may not be altered or amended, nor may any rights hereunder be waived, except by an instrument in writing executed by the Parties. No waiver of any terms, provision or condition of or failure to exercise or delay in exercising any rights or remedies under this Agreement, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such term, provision, condition, right or remedy or as a waiver of any other term, provision or condition of this Agreement.

Section 17.08. Further Assurances . Each Party agrees to use Commercially Reasonable Efforts to execute any and all documents and to perform such other acts as may be necessary or expedient to further the purposes of this Agreement and the relations contemplated hereby. Without limiting the foregoing and the provisions of the Separation Agreement, each Party shall make available during normal business hours for inspection and copying by the other Party and such other Persons as the other Party shall designate in writing, all books and records in the possession which relate to the Services and which are necessary to confirm the said Party’s compliance with its obligations under this Agreement.

Section 17.09. Severability . The provisions of this Agreement are severable and should any provision hereof be void, voidable or unenforceable under any applicable law, such provision shall not affect or invalidate any other provision of this Agreement, which shall continue to govern the relative rights and duties of the Parties as though such void, voidable or unenforceable provision were not a part hereof.

 

19


Section 17.10. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original instrument, but all of which together shall constitute but one and the same Agreement.

[Signatures appear on following page.]

 

20


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed and delivered this Agreement as of the day and year first above written.

 

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By:  

/s/ Peter A. Hofmann

Name:   Peter A. Hofmann
Title:   Chief Financial Officer
VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title   President

[ Signature Page – Transition Services Agreement ]

Exhibit 10.2

EXECUTION VERSION

TAX SEPARATION AGREEMENT

This TAX SEPARATION AGREEMENT is dated as of December 18, 2008, by and between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“ PNX ”), a Delaware corporation, and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (“ Spinco ”), a Delaware corporation.

WHEREAS, as of the date hereof, PNX is the common parent of an affiliated group of domestic corporations within the meaning of Section 1504(a) of the Code, and the members of the affiliated group have heretofore joined in filing consolidated federal income Tax returns (the “ Affiliated Group ”);

WHEREAS, Phoenix Investment Management Company (“ PIMCO ”), a Delaware corporation, is a direct wholly-owned subsidiary of PNX;

WHEREAS, Spinco has entered into an Investment Agreement (as defined herein), pursuant to which, among other things, (i) PIMCO contributed (the “ Contribution ”) all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of Virtus Partners, Inc. (formerly known as Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.) that PIMCO held to Spinco in exchange for (x) all of the shares of common stock, par value $0.01, of Spinco (the “ Spinco Common Stock ”), (y) 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series A Preferred Stock ”), all of which was sold to the Investor (as defined herein) subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, and (z) 35,217 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Spinco (the “ Series B Preferred Stock ”) and (ii) PIMCO will, after such Contribution and immediately after the Distribution (as defined herein), subject to the terms and conditions of the Investment Agreement, sell to the Investor all of the Series B Preferred Stock owned by PIMCO and exchange all shares of the Series A Preferred Stock previously delivered to Harris with the same number of shares of the Series B Preferred Stock in a two-step transaction for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million.

WHEREAS, for United States federal income tax purposes, it is intended that the Contribution and the issuance and sale of the Spinco Common Stock, Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock will not qualify as tax-free under Section 351 of the Code;

WHEREAS, PNX and Virtus have entered into a Separation Agreement (as defined herein) whereby, subject to the terms and conditions thereof, PNX will, after the contribution by PIMCO of all of the outstanding shares of Spinco to PNX in accordance with the Separation Agreement, including the transfer of all the assets and liabilities of the Spinco Business (as defined herein) and subject to the terms and conditions of the Separation Agreement, distribute (the “ Distribution ”) to PNX’s stockholders all the shares of Spinco Common Stock;

WHEREAS, prior to the Distribution, PNX intends to cause Spinco to distribute Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc. to PNX (the “ Internal Distribution ”). For all purposes of this Tax Separation Agreement, Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc. shall be treated as a subsidiary of PNX, and not a subsidiary of Spinco; and

WHEREAS, as a result of the Distribution, the Parties desire to enter into this Tax Separation Agreement to provide for certain Tax matters, including the assignment of responsibility for the preparation and filing of Tax Returns, the payment of and indemnification for Taxes, entitlement to refunds of Taxes, and the prosecution and defense of any Tax controversies;


NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual agreements, provisions and covenants contained in this Agreement, the Parties hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE I. DEFINITIONS

SECTION 1.1.  General . Capitalized terms used in this Agreement and not defined herein shall have the meanings that such terms have in the Separation Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Affiliated Group ” shall have the meaning specified in the preamble hereof.

Agreement ” shall mean this Tax Separation Agreement.

Business Day ” or “ Business Days ” shall mean a day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or a day on which banks in New York City are authorized or required by law to close.

Closing of the Books Method ” shall mean the apportionment of items between portions of a taxable period based on a closing of the books and records on the Distribution Date (as if the Distribution Date was the end of the taxable period), provided that any items not susceptible to such apportionment (such as real or personal property taxes imposed on a periodic basis) shall be apportioned on the basis of elapsed days during the relevant portion of the taxable period.

Code ” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Confidentiality Agreement ” shall mean any agreement pursuant to which the parties named therein have agreed to terms under which they were permitted to review certain financial information relating to Spinco or the Spinco Business.

Combined Group ” shall mean a combined, unitary, or consolidated tax group that includes PNX or any of its subsidiaries, not including Spinco or any of its subsidiaries, on the one hand, and Spinco or any of its subsidiaries.

Consolidated Return ” shall mean any Tax Return relating to Income Taxes filed pursuant to Section 1502 of the Code, or any comparable combined, consolidated, or unitary group Tax Return relating to Income Taxes filed under state or local tax law which, in each case, includes PNX and at least one subsidiary.

Contribution ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Distribution ” shall have the meaning specified in the Separation Agreement.

Distribution Date ” shall mean the Business Day on which the Distribution is effected.

 

2


Final Determination ” shall mean the final resolution of liability for any Tax for any taxable period, including any related interest or penalties, by or as a result of: (i) a final and unappealable decision, judgment, decree or other order by any court of competent jurisdiction; (ii) a closing agreement or accepted offer in compromise under Section 7121 or 7122 of the Code, or comparable agreement under the laws of other jurisdictions which resolves the entire Tax liability for any taxable period; or (iii) any allowance of a refund or credit in respect of an overpayment of Tax, but only after the expiration of all periods during which such refund may be recovered by the jurisdiction imposing the Tax.

Income Tax ” shall mean any income, franchise or similar Taxes imposed on (or measured by) net income or net profits.

Income Tax Returns ” shall mean all Tax Returns relating to Income Taxes.

Indemnification Tax Benefit ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.4(b).

Indemnified Tax ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.4(b).

Internal Distribution ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Investment Agreement ” shall mean the agreement entitled “Investment and Contribution Agreement,” entered into by and among PIMCO, Spinco, the Investor and PNX, dated as of October 30, 2008.

Investor ” shall mean Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

IRS ” shall mean the Internal Revenue Service.

Other Tax ” shall mean any Tax other than an Income Tax.

Party ” shall mean either PNX or Spinco, as the case maybe.

Payment Period ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.4(c).

PIMCO ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

PNX ” shall have the meaning specified in the preamble hereof.

Preferred Stock ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Proceeding ” shall mean any audit, examination or other proceeding brought by a Taxing Authority with respect to Taxes.

Refund ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.2.

Retained Liabilities ” shall have the meaning specified in the Separation Agreement.

 

3


Retained Liability Payment ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.5.

Retained Liability Tax Benefit ” shall have the meaning specified in Section 2.5.

Separation Agreement ” shall mean the agreement entitled “Separation Agreement, Plan of Reorganization and Distribution,” entered into by and between PNX and Spinco, dated as of December 18, 2008.

Series A Preferred Stock ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Series B Preferred Stock ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Spinco ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Spinco Business ” shall have the same meaning as “Spinco Business” as defined in the Separation Agreement.

Spinco Common Stock ” shall have the meaning set forth in the preamble hereof.

Straddle Period ” shall mean any taxable period commencing prior to, and ending after, the Distribution Date.

Tax ” or “ Taxes ” shall mean any federal, state, local or foreign income, gross receipts, property, sales, use, license, excise, franchise, employment, payroll, withholding, alternative or add on minimum, ad valorem, transfer or excise tax, or any other tax, custom, duty, governmental fee or other like assessment or charge of any kind whatsoever, together with any interest or penalty, imposed by any Taxing Authority.

Taxing Authority ” shall mean any governmental authority (whether United States or non-United States, and including, any state, municipality, political subdivision or governmental agency) responsible for the imposition of any Tax.

Tax Returns ” shall mean all reports or returns (including information returns and amended returns) required to be filed or that may be filed for any period with any Taxing Authority in connection with any Tax or Taxes (whether domestic or foreign).

SECTION 1.2.  References; Interpretation . References in this Agreement to any gender include references to all genders, and references to the singular include references to the plural and vice versa. The words “include,” “includes” and “including” when used in this Agreement shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase “without limitation.” Unless the context otherwise requires, references in this Agreement to Articles, Sections, Exhibits and Schedules shall be deemed references to Articles and Sections of, and Exhibits and Schedules to, such Agreement. Unless the context otherwise requires, the words “hereof,” “hereby” and “herein” and words of similar meaning when used in this Agreement refer to this Agreement in its entirety and not to any particular Article, Section or provision of this Agreement.

 

4


ARTICLE II. ALLOCATION OF TAX LIABILITIES

SECTION 2.1.  Indemnity . (a) Without duplication, PNX shall indemnify Spinco from all liability for (i) Income Taxes of Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or relating to the Spinco Business with respect to taxable periods ending on or before the Distribution Date, (ii) Income Taxes of Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or relating to the Spinco Business for any Straddle Period, but only to the extent attributable to the portion of the Straddle Period ending on or before the Distribution Date, (iii) Income Taxes of any member of the Affiliated Group or any Combined Group, other than Spinco or any of its subsidiaries, for any taxable period, and (iv) Income Taxes resulting from the Internal Distribution. Taxes for a Straddle Period shall be apportioned in accordance with the Closing of the Books Method.

(b) Spinco shall indemnify PNX from all liability for (i) Other Taxes (excluding any such Taxes covered by Section 2.6) of Spinco or relating to the Spinco Business for any taxable period, (ii) any Income Taxes of Spinco or its subsidiaries or relating to the Spinco Business accruing after the Distribution Date under the Closing of the Books Method, including the portion of any Straddle Period beginning on the Distribution Date.

SECTION 2.2.  Refunds . (a) Subject to Section 3.5, if a Party receives a refund, offset, credit, or other benefit (including interest received thereon) (a “ Refund ”) of Tax which the other Party would have been obligated to indemnify had the Refund been a payment, then the Party receiving the Refund shall promptly pay the amount of the Refund to the other Party, less reasonable costs and expenses incurred in connection with such Refund, including any Taxes on such Refund or interest thereon (net of any tax benefit actually realized for paying over such Refund).

(b) Each Party shall, if reasonably requested by the other Party, cause the relevant entity to file for and use its reasonable best efforts to obtain and expedite the receipt of any Refund to which such requesting Party is entitled under this Section 2.2.

SECTION 2.3.  Contests .

(a) In the case of any Proceeding that relates to Taxes for which PNX is responsible under Section 2.1 hereof, PNX shall have the right to control, in its sole discretion, the conduct of such Proceeding. Subject to the foregoing, Spinco shall have the right to participate jointly in any Proceeding if the consequences of the resolution of such Proceeding could reasonably be expected to affect the tax liability of Spinco for any tax period to the extent such tax liability of Spinco is not subject to an indemnification by PNX hereinunder.

(b) In the case of any Proceeding that relates to Taxes for which Spinco is responsible under Section 2.1 hereof, Spinco shall have the sole right to control the conduct of such Proceeding. Subject to the foregoing, PNX shall have the right to participate jointly in any Proceeding if the consequences of the resolution of such Proceeding could reasonably be expected to affect the tax liability of PNX for any tax period to the extent such tax liability of PNX is not subject to an indemnification by Spinco hereinunder.

 

5


(c) In the case of any Proceeding that relates to a Straddle Period of Spinco or the Spinco Business, the parties shall use reasonable efforts to cause such Proceeding to be bifurcated between the period ending on the Distribution Date and the period beginning after the Distribution Date. If the parties are able to cause the audit to be so bifurcated, then Sections 2.3(a) and (b) hereof shall govern the control of such Proceedings. To the extent that the parties are unable to cause such bifurcation, PNX and Spinco shall jointly control such Proceeding.

(d) After the Distribution Date, each Party shall promptly notify the other Party in writing upon receipt of written notice of the commencement of any Proceeding or of any demand or claim upon it, which, if determined adversely, would be grounds for indemnification from such other Party pursuant to Section 2.1 or could reasonably be expected to have an adverse Tax effect on the other Party. The failure of one Party to promptly forward such notification in accordance with the immediately preceding sentence shall not relieve the other Party of any obligation under this Agreement, except to the extent that the failure to promptly forward such notification actually prejudices the ability of the other Party to contest such Proceeding. Each Party shall, on a timely basis, keep the other Party informed of all developments in the Proceeding and provide such other Party with copies of all pleadings, briefs, orders, and other correspondence pertaining thereto.

SECTION 2.4.  Treatment of Payments; After Tax Basis .

(a) PNX and Spinco agree to treat any indemnification payments (other than payments of interest pursuant to Section 2.4(c)) pursuant to this Agreement, including any payments made pursuant to Section 2.5, as either a capital contribution or a distribution, as the case may be, between PNX and Spinco occurring immediately prior to the Distribution, and to challenge in good faith any other characterization of such payments by any Taxing Authority. If, notwithstanding such good faith efforts, the receipt or accrual of any such payment (other than payments of interest pursuant to Section 2.4(c)) results in taxable income to the indemnified Party, such payment shall be increased so that, after the payment of any Taxes with respect to the payment, the indemnified Party shall have realized the same net amount it would have realized had the payment not resulted in taxable income.

(b) To the extent that any liability for Taxes that is subject to indemnification under Section 2.1 (an “ Indemnified Tax ”) gives rise to an Indemnification Tax Benefit to the indemnified Party in any taxable period, the indemnified Party will promptly remit to the indemnifying Party the amount of any such Indemnification Tax Benefit actually realized. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Indemnification Tax Benefit ” means a reduction in the amount of Taxes that are required to be paid or increase in refund due, whether resulting from a deduction, from reduced gain or increased loss from disposition of an asset, or otherwise. For purposes of this Agreement, an indemnified Party will be deemed to have actually realized an Indemnification Tax Benefit at the time the amount of Taxes such indemnified Party is required to pay is reduced or the amount of any refund due is increased. The amount of any Indemnification Tax Benefit in this Section 2.4(b) shall be calculated by comparing (i) the indemnified Party’s actual Tax liability taking into account any Indemnified Tax with (ii) what the indemnified Party’s Tax liability would have been without taking into account any Indemnified Tax. If, pursuant to this Agreement, the indemnified Party makes a remittance to the indemnifying Party of any Indemnification Tax Benefit and all or part of such

 

6


Indemnification Tax Benefit is subsequently disallowed, the indemnifying Party will promptly pay to the indemnified Party that portion of such remittance equal to the portion of the Indemnification Tax Benefit that is disallowed.

(c) Payments made pursuant to this Agreement that are not made within the period prescribed in this Agreement or, if no period is prescribed, within thirty (30) days after demand for payment is made (the “ Payment Period ”) shall bear interest for the period from and including the date immediately following the last date of the Payment Period through and including the date of payment at a rate equal to the monthly average of the “prime rate” as published in the Wall Street Journal, compounded semi-annually. Such interest will be payable at the same time as the payment to which it relates and shall be calculated on the basis of a year of 365 days and the actual number of days for which due; provided , however , that this provision for interest shall not be construed to give the Party responsible for such payment the right to defer payment beyond the due date hereunder.

SECTION 2.5.  Retained Liabilities . To the extent that any payments made by PNX in respect of the Retained Liabilities (a “ Retained Liability Payment ”) gives rise to a Retained Liability Tax Benefit to Spinco in any taxable period, Spinco will promptly remit to PNX the amount of any such Retained Liability Tax Benefit actually realized. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Retained Liability Tax Benefit ” means a reduction in the amount of Taxes that are required to be paid or increase in refund due, whether resulting from a deduction, credit, increased basis, or otherwise. For purposes of this Agreement, Spinco will be deemed to have actually realized a Retained Liability Tax Benefit at the time the amount of Taxes Spinco is required to pay is reduced or the amount of any refund due is increased. The amount of any Retained Liability Tax Benefit in this Section 2.5 shall be calculated by comparing (i) Spinco’s actual Tax liability taking into account any Retained Liability Payment with (ii) what Spinco’s Tax liability would have been without taking into account any Retained Liability Payment. If, pursuant to this Agreement, Spinco makes a remittance to PNX of any Retained Liability Tax Benefit and all or part of such Retained Liability Tax Benefit is subsequently disallowed, PNX will promptly pay to Spinco that portion of such remittance equal to the portion of the Retained Liability Tax Benefit that is disallowed.

SECTION 2.6.  Transfer Taxes . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, PNX shall bear any and all stamp, duty, transfer, sales and use or similar Taxes incurred in connection with the Distribution and Internal Distribution.

ARTICLE III. RETURNS AND TAXES ATTRIBUTABLE TO SPINCO

SECTION 3.1.  PNX’s Responsibility for the Preparation of Tax Returns and for the Payment of Taxes .

(a) PNX shall prepare and file or cause to be prepared and filed all Tax Returns of Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or relating to the Spinco Business that are due on or before the Distribution Date (taking into account any valid extensions thereof), all Income Tax Returns relating to taxable periods ending on or before the Distribution Date and all Income Tax Returns of the Affiliated Group or any Combined Group.

 

7


(b) To the extent that Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or the Spinco Business is included in any Consolidated Return for a taxable period that includes the Distribution Date, PNX shall include in such Consolidated Return the results of Spinco and the Spinco Business on the basis of the Closing of the Books Method. To the extent permitted by law or administrative practice with respect to other Income Tax Returns, the taxable period relating to Spinco or the Spinco Business shall be treated as ending on the Distribution Date, and if the taxable period does not, in fact, end on the Distribution Date, the Parties shall apportion all tax items between the portions of the taxable period before and after the Distribution Date on the Closing of the Books Method.

SECTION 3.2.  Spinco’s Responsibility for the Preparation of Tax Returns and for the Payment of Taxes . Spinco shall prepare and file or cause to be prepared and filed all Tax Returns relating to Other Taxes of Spinco or any of its subsidiaries or the Spinco Business that have not been filed before the Distribution Date. Spinco shall prepare and file or cause to be prepared and filed all Income Tax Returns relating to taxable periods of Spinco and its subsidiaries after the Distribution Date, except for Income Tax Returns of the Affiliated Group or any Combined Group and Income Tax Returns of Spinco for any Straddle Period as described in Sections 3.1 and 3.3.

SECTION 3.3.  Responsibility for the Preparation of Straddle Period Income Tax Returns and for the Payment of Straddle Period Income Taxes . PNX shall prepare and file or cause to be prepared and filed all Income Tax Returns of Spinco for any Straddle Period. All such Income Tax Returns that are to be prepared and filed by PNX pursuant to this paragraph shall be submitted to Spinco not later than thirty (30) days prior to the due date for filing of such Tax Returns (or if such due date is within 45 days following the Distribution Date, as promptly as practicable following the Distribution Date). Spinco shall have the right to review such Tax Returns and to review all work papers and procedures used to prepare any such Tax Return. If Spinco, within ten (10) business days after delivery of any such Tax Return, notifies PNX in writing that it objects to any of the items in such Tax Return, PNX and Spinco shall attempt in good faith to resolve the dispute and, if they are unable to do so, the disputed items shall be resolved (within a reasonable time, taking into account the deadline for filing such Tax Return) by an internationally recognized independent accounting firm chosen by both PNX and Spinco. Upon resolution of all such items, the relevant Straddle Period Tax Return shall be filed on that basis. The costs, fees and expenses of such accounting firm shall be borne equally by PNX and Spinco.

SECTION 3.4.  Manner of Preparation . All Income Tax Returns filed on or after the Distribution Date shall be prepared and filed on a timely basis (including pursuant to extensions) by the Party responsible for such filing under this Agreement. In the absence of a Final Determination to the contrary, a controlling change in law or circumstances, or accounting method changes pursuant to applications that are approved by the Internal Revenue Service, all Income Tax Returns of Spinco for tax periods commencing prior to the Distribution Date shall be prepared on a basis consistent with the elections, accounting methods, conventions, assumptions and principles of taxation used with respect to the Spinco Business for the most recent taxable periods for which Tax Returns of the Affiliated Group have been filed.

 

8


SECTION 3.5.  Carrybacks . Spinco agrees and will cause its subsidiaries not to carry back any net operating losses, capital losses or credits for any taxable period ending after the Distribution Date to a taxable period, or portion thereof, ending on or before the Distribution Date. To the extent that Spinco or any of its subsidiaries is required by applicable law to carry back any such net operating losses, capital losses or credits, any refund of Taxes attributable to such carryback shall be for PNX’s account.

SECTION 3.6.  Retention of Records; Cooperation; Access .

(a) PNX and Spinco shall, and shall cause each of their subsidiaries to retain adequate records, documents, accounting data and other information (including computer data) necessary for the preparation and filing of all Tax Returns required to be filed by PNX or Spinco and for any Tax matter covered by this Agreement, including any Proceeding relating to such Tax Returns or to any Taxes payable by PNX or Spinco or any of their subsidiaries.

(b) Subject to the provisions of Section 3.8, PNX and Spinco shall reasonably cooperate with one another in a timely manner with respect to any Tax matter covered by this Agreement, including any Proceeding described in Section 2.3. PNX and Spinco shall, and shall cause each of their subsidiaries to cooperate and provide reasonable access to (i) all records, documents, accounting data and other information (including computer data) necessary for the preparation and filing of all Tax Returns required to be filed by PNX or Spinco and for any Proceeding relating to such Tax Returns or to any Taxes payable by PNX or Spinco and (ii) its personnel and premises, for the purpose of the preparation, review or audit of such Tax Returns, or in connection with any Tax matter covered by this Agreement, including any Proceeding described in Section 2.3 as reasonably requested by either PNX or Spinco. The Party requesting or otherwise entitled to any books, records, information, officers or employees pursuant to this Section 3.6(b) shall bear all reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses (except reimbursement of salaries, employee benefits and general overhead) incurred in connection with providing such books, records, information, officers or employees; provided , however , that any costs (including but not limited to attorneys’ fees and expenses) arising from the requested Party’s failure to cooperate under this Section 3.6(b) shall be payable by such Party.

(c) The obligations set forth above in Sections 3.6(a) and 3.6(b) shall continue until the longer of (i) the time of a Final Determination or (ii) expiration of all applicable statutes of limitations, to which the records and information relate. For purposes of the preceding sentence, each Party shall assume that no applicable statute of limitations has expired unless such Party has received notification or otherwise has actual knowledge that such statute of limitations has expired.

SECTION 3.7. Tax Treatment. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, the Parties hereto acknowledge that PIMCO intends to treat the Contribution and the issuance and sale of the Spinco Common Stock, Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock as not qualifying as a transfer to a controlled corporation under Section 351(a) or (b) of the Code, and Investor agrees not to take any position for United Stated federal income tax purposes that is inconsistent with that treatment.

 

9


SECTION 3.8.  Confidentiality; Ownership of Information; Privileged Information . The provisions of Article XI of the Separation Agreement relating to confidentiality of information, ownership of information, privileged information and related matters shall apply with equal force to any records and information prepared and/or shared by and among the Parties in carrying out the intent of this Agreement.

ARTICLE IV. MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 4.1.  Complete Agreement; Construction . This Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and shall supersede all previous negotiations, commitments and writings with respect to such subject matter, including, without limitation, any tax sharing agreement previously entered into by the Parties.

SECTION 4.2.  Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same agreement, and shall become effective when one or more such counterparts have been signed by both Parties.

SECTION 4.3.  Survival of Agreements . Except as otherwise contemplated by this Agreement, all covenants and agreements of the Parties contained in this Agreement shall survive the Distribution Date.

SECTION 4.4.  Notices . All notices and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and hand delivered or mailed by registered or certified mail (return receipt requested) or sent by any means of electronic message transmission with delivery confirmed (by voice or otherwise) to the Parties at the following addresses (or at such other addresses for a Party as shall be specified by like notice) and will be deemed given on the date on which such notice is received:

To PNX:

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

One American Row

Hartford, Connecticut 06102

Attention: General Counsel

Fax: (860) 403-7899

With copies to:

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

Attention: Gary I. Horowitz

Fax: (212) 455-2502

 

10


To Spinco:

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

100 Pearl Street, 9 th Floor

Hartford, Connecticut 06103

Attention: Kevin J. Carr

Fax: (860) 241-1028

With copies to:

Day Pitney LLP

200 Campus Drive

Florham Park, New Jersey 07932

Attention: Warren J. Casey

Fax: (973) 966-1015

SECTION 4.5.  Waivers . The failure of any Party to require strict performance by the other Party of any provision in this Agreement will not waive or diminish that Party’s right to demand strict performance thereafter of that or any other provision hereof.

SECTION 4.6.  Amendments . This Agreement may not be modified or amended except by an agreement in writing signed by the Parties hereto.

SECTION 4.7.  Assignment . This Agreement shall not be assignable, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, by any Party hereto without the prior written consent of the other Party hereto, and any attempt to assign any rights or obligations arising under this Agreement without such consent shall be void.

SECTION 4.8.  Successors and Assigns . The provisions to this Agreement shall be binding upon, inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns.

SECTION 4.9.  Additional Members . Any new members of the Affiliated Group shall automatically become a Party to this Agreement upon becoming members.

SECTION 4.10.  Third Party Beneficiaries . This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties hereto and should not be deemed to confer upon third parties any remedy, claim, liability, reimbursement, claim of action or other right in excess of those existing without reference to this Agreement.

SECTION 4.11.  Title and Headings . Titles and headings to sections herein are inserted for the convenience of reference only and are not intended to be a part of or to affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement.

SECTION 4.12.  Exhibits . The Exhibits to this Agreement shall be construed with and as an integral part of this Agreement to the same extent as if the same had been set forth verbatim herein.

 

11


SECTION 4.13.  GOVERNING LAW . THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE, WITHOUT REGARD TO ITS CONFLICTS OF LAW RULES.

SECTION 4.14.  Consent to Jurisdiction . The Parties hereto hereby agree that the appropriate forum and venue for any disputes between any of the Parties hereto arising out of this Agreement shall be any state or federal court sitting in New York, New York and each of the Parties hereto hereby submits to the personal jurisdiction of any such court. The foregoing shall not limit the rights of any Party to obtain execution of judgment in any other jurisdiction.

SECTION 4.15.  Severability . In the event any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement should be held invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein and therein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby. The Parties shall endeavor in good-faith negotiations to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions with valid provisions, the economic effect of which comes as close as possible to that of the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions.

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

 

12


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have caused this Agreement to be duly executed as of the day and year first above written.

 

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By:  

/s/ Peter A. Hofmann

Name:   Peter A. Hofmann
Title:   Chief Financial Officer
VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title:   President

[Signature Page – Tax Separation Agreement]

Exhibit 10.3

EXECUTION VERSION

EMPLOYEE MATTERS AGREEMENT

by and between

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.

and

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Dated December 18, 2008


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          Page

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

   1

Section 1.1

  

Definitions

   1

Section 1.2

  

References; Interpretation

   5

ARTICLE 2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES

   5

Section 2.1

  

Transfer of Employees

   5

Section 2.2

  

Assumption and Retention of Liabilities

   6

Section 2.3

  

Spinco Employee Participation in PNX Benefit Plans

   6

Section 2.4

  

Service Credit

   6

Section 2.5

  

Approval of Spinco Plans by PNX as Majority Shareholder

   7

ARTICLE 3 RETIREMENT PLANS

   7

Section 3.1

  

PNX and Spinco 401(k) Plans

   7

Section 3.2

  

PNX Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan; Spinco Excess Investment Plan

   8

Section 3.3

  

PNX Defined Benefit Retirement Plans

   9

Section 3.4

  

Spinco Notice to PNX of Terminations of Employment

   10

ARTICLE 4 HEALTH AND WELFARE PLANS

   10

Section 4.1

  

Spinco Welfare Plans

   10

Section 4.2

  

Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans

   11

Section 4.3

  

Retiree Welfare Benefits

   11

Section 4.4

  

COBRA and HIPAA

   12

Section 4.5

  

Liabilities

   12

Section 4.6

  

Vacation and Other Time-Off Benefits

   13

Section 4.7

  

Advancements or Reimbursements

   13

Section 4.8

  

Workers’ Compensation Liabilities

   13

ARTICLE 5 LONG-TERM INCENTIVE AWARDS

   13

Section 5.1

  

Treatment of Outstanding PNX Options

   13

Section 5.2

  

Treatment of Outstanding PNX Service-Vested RSUs

   14

Section 5.3

  

Treatment of Outstanding PNX Performance-Vested RSU and Spinco Performance-Vested RSU Awards

   15

Section 5.4

  

PNX ESPP

   15

Section 5.5

  

Cooperation

   16

Section 5.6

  

SEC Registration

   16

Section 5.7

  

Savings Clause

   16

ARTICLE 6 ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION MATTERS

   16

Section 6.1

  

Annual Incentive Awards

   16

Section 6.2

  

PNX Individual Arrangements

   17

Section 6.3

  

Severance Benefits

   17

Section 6.4

  

Relocation Expenses; Talent Acquisition/Retention Agency Fees

   18

Section 6.5

  

Tax Matters

   18


ARTICLE 7 INDEMNIFICATION

   19

ARTICLE 8 GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE

   19

Section 8.1

  

Sharing of Information

   19

Section 8.2

  

Reasonable Efforts/Cooperation

   19

Section 8.3

  

Employer Rights

   20

Section 8.4

  

Effect on Employment

   20

Section 8.5

  

Consent of Third Parties

   20

Section 8.6

  

Beneficiary Designation/Release of Information/Right to Reimbursement

   20

Section 8.7

  

Not a Change in Control

   20

Section 8.8

  

Fiduciary Matter

   20

ARTICLE 9 MISCELLANEOUS

   21

Section 9.1

  

Effect if Distribution Does not Occur

   21

Section 9.2

  

Relationship of Parties

   21

Section 9.3

  

Affiliates

   21

Section 9.4

  

Notices

   21

Section 9.5

  

Entire Agreement

   22

Section 9.6

  

Waivers

   22

Section 9.7

  

Amendments

   22

Section 9.8

  

Termination

   22

Section 9.9

  

Governing Law

   23

Section 9.10

  

Dispute Resolution

   23

Section 9.11

  

Titles and Headings

   23

Section 9.12

  

Counterparts

   23

Section 9.13

  

Assignment

   23

Section 9.14

  

Severability

   23

Section 9.15

  

Exhibits and Schedules

   23

Section 9.16

  

Specific Performance

   23

Section 9.17

  

Waiver of Jury Trial

   24

Section 9.18

  

Authorization

   24

Section 9.19

  

No Third-Party Beneficiaries

   24

Section 9.20

  

Construction

   24

EXHIBIT A

 

ii


EMPLOYEE MATTERS AGREEMENT

This EMPLOYEE MATTERS AGREEMENT (the “ Agreement ”) is entered into December 18, 2008, by and between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. , a Delaware corporation (“ PNX ”), and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. , a Delaware corporation (“ Spinco ”) (each a “ Party ” and together the “ Parties ”), to be effective as of the Distribution Date.

RECITALS

WHEREAS , PNX, acting through its direct and indirect subsidiaries, currently conducts several businesses in the life and annuity and asset management industries;

WHEREAS , the Board of Directors of PNX has determined that it is appropriate, desirable and in the best interests of PNX and its shareholders to separate PNX into two separate, independent, publicly traded companies by creating Spinco and distributing a portion of PNX’s asset management business to Spinco. The remainder of the PNX businesses will continue to be owned and conducted, directly or indirectly, by PNX;

WHEREAS , to effectuate the distribution, the Parties entered into that certain Separation Agreement, Plan of Reorganization and Distribution dated as of December 18, 2008 herewith (the “ Separation Agreement ”); and

WHEREAS , pursuant to the Separation Agreement, PNX and Spinco have agreed to enter into this Agreement for the purpose of allocating between and among them assets, liabilities and responsibilities with respect to employee compensation and benefit plans and arrangements;

NOW, THEREFORE , in consideration of the foregoing premises, the mutual promises and covenants hereinafter set forth, and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the Parties, intending to be legally bound, agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

Section 1.1 Definitions . Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings assigned to such terms in the Separation Agreement. The following terms shall have the following meanings:

Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 5.3(a) of this Agreement.

Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSU ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 5.3(b) of this Agreement.

Agreement ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in the preamble to this Agreement.


Benefit Plan ” means, with respect to an entity, each plan, program, policy, on-going arrangement, agreement, payroll practice, contract, trust, insurance policy or commitment that is an employment, consulting, non-competition or deferred compensation agreement, or an executive compensation, incentive bonus or other bonus, employee pension, profit-sharing, savings, retirement, supplemental retirement, stock option, stock purchase, performance units, restricted stock, other equity-based compensation, severance pay, salary continuation, life, health, hospitalization, sick leave, vacation pay, disability or accident insurance plan, corporate-owned or key-person life insurance or other employee benefit plan, program, arrangement, agreement or commitment that covers employees, including any “employee benefit plan” (as defined in ERISA Section 3(3)) sponsored or maintained by such entity (or to which such entity contributes or is required to contribute).

COBRA ” means the continuation coverage requirements for “group health plans” under Title X of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, as amended, and as codified in Code Section 4980B and ERISA Sections 601 through 608, together with all regulations and other regulatory and legislative guidance in effect thereunder.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, including any proposed, temporary or final regulation and other regulatory guidance in force under that provision.

Distribution ” means the distribution to the holders of PNX Common Stock of all of the outstanding shares of Spinco Common Stock.

Distribution Date ” means the date upon which the Distribution shall be effective.

DOL ” means the United States Department of Labor.

ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, including any proposed, temporary or final regulation and other regulatory guidance in force under that provision.

HIPAA ” means the health insurance portability and accountability requirements for “group health plans” under the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, as amended.

IRS ” means the United States Internal Revenue Service.

Parties ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in the preamble to this Agreement.

PNX ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in the preamble to this Agreement.

PNX 401(k) Plan ” means the The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Savings and Investment Plan.

PNX Annual Incentive Plan ” means The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Performance Incentive Plan, comprised of the Corporate Component and the Investment Component.

PNX Benefit Plan ” means any Benefit Plan sponsored, maintained or contributed to by any member of the PNX Group as such Group is constituted on or after the Distribution Date.

 

2


PNX Common Stock ” means the outstanding shares of common stock, $0.01 par value, of PNX.

PNX Conversion Ratio ” means the PNX Final Price divided by the opening price of PNX Common Stock immediately following the Distribution, in each case as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.

PNX Employee ” means any individual who, at the relevant time, is employed by or will be employed by PNX or any member of the PNX Group, including active employees and employees on vacation and approved leave of absence (including maternity, paternity, family, sick leave, qualified military service under the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, short- or long-term disability leave, leave under the Family Medical Leave Act and other approved leave).

PNX ESPP ” means The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

PNX Excess Investment Plan ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 3.2(a) of this Agreement.

PNX Final Price ” means the closing price of PNX Common Stock immediately prior to the Distribution as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.

PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans ” means The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Health Care Reimbursement Plan and The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Dependent Care Reimbursement Plan.

PNX Option ” means an option to purchase shares of PNX Common Stock granted pursuant to one of the PNX Stock Plans.

PNX Participant ” means any individual who, following the Distribution Date, is (i) a PNX Employee, (ii) a former PNX Employee who is not a Spinco Employee, or (iii) a beneficiary, dependent or alternate payee of any of the foregoing.

PNX Performance-Vested RSU ” means a unit granted by PNX or one of its Affiliates pursuant to one of the PNX Stock Plans representing a general unsecured promise by PNX or one of its Affiliates to deliver a share of PNX Common Stock (or the cash equivalent) upon the satisfaction of one or more performance-based requirements.

PNX Retiree Medical Coverage ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 4.3 of this Agreement.

PNX Service Programs/Policies ” means, collectively, the PNX vacation program, short-term disability program and other PNX programs and policies to the extent eligibility for or the level of benefits thereunder depends on length of service.

PNX Service-Vested RSU ” means a unit granted by PNX or one of its Affiliates pursuant to one of the PNX Stock Plans representing a general unsecured promise by PNX or one of its Affiliates to deliver a share of PNX Common Stock (or the cash equivalent) upon the satisfaction of time-based vesting requirements.

 

3


PNX Stock Plans ” means, collectively, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Directors Stock Plan, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. 2003 Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit and Long-Term Incentive Plan and any other stock option or stock incentive compensation plan or arrangement maintained before the Distribution Date for employees, officers, or non-employee directors of PNX or its Affiliates, as amended.

PNX Welfare Plan ” means The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Welfare Benefit Plan.

Separation Agreement ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in the recitals to this Agreement.

Spinco ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in the preamble to this Agreement.

Spinco 401(k) Plan ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 3.1(a) of this Agreement.

Spinco Annual Incentive Plan ” means the Virtus Performance Incentive Plan, comprised of the Corporate Component and the Investment Component.

Spinco Benefit Plan ” means any Benefit Plan sponsored, maintained or contributed to by any member of the Spinco Group as such Group is constituted on or after the Distribution Date.

Spinco Common Stock ” means the outstanding shares of common stock, $0.01 par value, of Spinco.

Spinco Conversion Ratio ” means the PNX Final Price divided by the Spinco Initial Price.

Spinco Employee ” means any individual who, as of the Effective Time, is employed by or will be employed by Spinco or any member of the Spinco Group, including active employees and employees on vacation and approved leave of absence (including maternity, paternity, family, sick leave, qualified military service under the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, short- or long-term disability leave, leave under the Family Medical Leave Act and other approved leave).

Spinco Excess Investment Plan ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 3.2(b) of this Agreement.

Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans ” means the Virtus Health Care Reimbursement Plan and the Virtus Dependent Care Reimbursement Plan.

Spinco Initial Price ” means the opening price of Spinco Common Stock immediately following the Distribution as reported on NASDAQ.

Spinco Option ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 5.1(a) of this Agreement.

 

4


Spinco Participant ” means any individual who, following the Distribution Date, is a Spinco Employee or a beneficiary, dependent or alternate payee of a Spinco Employee.

Spinco Service Programs/Policies ” means, collectively, the Virtus vacation program, short-term disability program and other Virtus programs and policies to the extent eligibility for or the level of benefits thereunder depends on length of service.

Spinco Service-Vested RSU ” shall have the meaning assigned thereto in Section 5.2(a) of this Agreement.

Spinco Stock Plan ” means the Virtus Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan.

Spinco Welfare Plan ” means the Virtus Welfare Benefit Plan.

Section 1.2 References; Interpretation . References in this Agreement to any gender include references to all genders, and references to the singular include references to the plural and vice versa. Unless the context otherwise requires, the words “include”, “includes” and “including” when used in this Agreement shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase “without limitation.” Unless the context otherwise requires, references in this Agreement to Articles, Sections, Annexes, Exhibits and Schedules shall be deemed to be references to Articles and Sections of, and Annexes, Exhibits and Schedules to, this Agreement. Unless the context otherwise requires, the words “hereof”, “hereby” and “herein” and words of similar meaning when used in this Agreement refer to this Agreement in its entirety and not to any particular Article, Section or provision of this Agreement.

ARTICLE 2

GENERAL PRINCIPLES

Section 2.1 Transfer of Employees . For the avoidance of doubt, effective as of the Distribution Date, only those PNX Employees associated with the Spinco business who are actively at work, including those Employees on vacation, on such date shall terminate with PNX and be transferred to Spinco. PNX Employees associated with the Spinco business who are on an approved leave of absence (including maternity, paternity, family, sick leave, qualified military service under the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, short-term or long-term disability leave, leave under the Family Medical Leave Act and other approved leave) as of the Distribution Date shall not terminate with PNX and become Spinco Employees unless and until they return to work or are able to return to work. Such termination or transfer shall not be treated as a separation from service for purposes of any PNX Benefit Plan or agreement (or any benefit thereunder) which is subject to the provisions of Section 409A of the Code. Any PNX Employee associated with the Spinco business who does not timely return to work following an approved leave of absence that began prior to the Distribution Date shall be terminated by PNX or the PNX Group and any Liabilities associated with such termination shall be the responsibility of Spinco or the Spinco Group, including, but not limited to, the Liabilities set forth in Section 6.3.

 

5


Section 2.2 Assumption and Retention of Liabilities .

(a) As of the Effective Time, except as otherwise expressly provided for in this Agreement or any other agreement by and between the Parties and/or their Affiliates, PNX shall, or shall cause one or more members of the PNX Group to, retain and PNX hereby agrees to pay, perform, fulfill and discharge, in due course in full: (i) all Liabilities under all PNX Benefit Plans; and (ii) any other Liabilities or obligations expressly assigned to PNX or any of its Affiliates under this Agreement.

(b) As of the Effective Time, except as otherwise expressly provided for in this Agreement, or any other agreement by and between the Parties and/or their Affiliates, Spinco shall, or shall cause one or more members of the Spinco Group to, assume sponsorship of the Spinco Benefit Plans and retain or assume and Spinco hereby agrees to pay, perform, fulfill and discharge, in due course in full: (i) all Liabilities under all Spinco Benefit Plans; and (ii) any other Liabilities or obligations expressly assigned to Spinco or any of its Affiliates under this Agreement.

(c) From time to time after the Distribution Date, Spinco shall promptly reimburse PNX, upon PNX’s reasonable request and the presentation by PNX of such substantiating documentation as Spinco shall reasonably request, for the cost of any obligations or Liabilities satisfied or assumed by PNX or its Affiliates that are, or that have been made pursuant to this Agreement, the responsibility of Spinco or any of its Affiliates. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any such request for reimbursement must be made by PNX not later than the first anniversary of the Distribution Date, unless the obligations and Liabilities extend beyond the first anniversary.

(d) From time to time after the Distribution Date, PNX shall promptly reimburse Spinco, upon Spinco’s reasonable request and the presentation by Spinco of such substantiating documentation as PNX shall reasonably request, for the cost of any obligations or Liabilities satisfied or assumed by Spinco or its Affiliates that are, or that have been made pursuant to this Agreement, the responsibility of PNX or any of its Affiliates. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any such request for reimbursement must be made by Spinco not later than the first anniversary of the Distribution Date, unless the obligations and Liabilities extend beyond the first anniversary.

Section 2.3 Spinco Employee Participation in PNX Benefit Plans . Except as otherwise expressly provided for in this Agreement or as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between the Parties, effective on or before the Distribution Date each Spinco Employee and any other Spinco service provider (including any individual who is an independent contractor, temporary employee, temporary service worker, consultant, freelancer, agency employee, leased employee, on-call worker, incidental worker, or non-payroll worker of any member of the Spinco Group or in any other employment, non-employment, or retainer arrangement, or relationship with any member of the Spinco Group) shall cease to actively participate in, be covered by, accrue benefits under, be eligible to contribute to or have any rights as an active participant under any PNX Benefit Plan.

Section 2.4 Service Credit . Spinco (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall cause the Spinco Service Programs/Policies to provide each PNX Employee who becomes a

 

6


Spinco Employee credit for purposes of eligibility, vesting, determination of benefit levels, and, to the extent applicable, benefit accruals under the Spinco Service Programs/Policies for such Spinco Employee’s service with any member of the PNX Group to the same extent such service was recognized by the applicable PNX Service Programs/Policies; provided that such service shall not be recognized to the extent that such recognition would result in the duplication of benefits.

Section 2.5 Approval of Spinco Plans by PNX as Majority Shareholder . Effective as of the Distribution Date, Spinco shall adopt a Spinco plan which will permit the issuance of cash and equity awards. The Spinco Stock Plan shall be approved prior to the Distribution Date by PNX as Spinco’s sole shareholder.

ARTICLE 3

RETIREMENT PLANS

Section 3.1 PNX and Spinco 401(k) Plans .

(a) Spinco 401(k) Plan . Effective on or before the Distribution Date, Spinco will have a defined contribution retirement plan and trust for the benefit of Spinco Participants (the “ Spinco 401(k) Plan ”). Spinco shall be responsible for taking all necessary, reasonable and appropriate action to establish, maintain and administer the Spinco 401(k) Plan so that it is qualified under Code Section 401(a) and the trust thereunder is exempt under Code Section 501(a). Spinco (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall be responsible for any and all Liabilities and other obligations with respect to the Spinco 401(k) Plan.

(b) Transfer of PNX 401(k) Plan Assets . Within a reasonable period of time on or before the Distribution Date, PNX shall cause the accounts (including any outstanding loan balances and any qualified domestic relations orders (“QDROs”)) in the PNX 401(k) Plan attributable to Spinco Participants who are employed by Spinco as of the transfer date and all of the assets in the PNX 401(k) Plan trust related thereto to be transferred (based on the investments, including PNX Common Stock, in place on or as soon as administratively practicable before the transfer date) to the Spinco 401(k) Plan, and Spinco shall cause the Spinco 401(k) Plan and trust to accept such transfer of accounts and underlying assets, loans and QDROs and, effective as of the date of such transfer, to assume and to fully perform, pay and discharge all obligations of the PNX 401(k) Plan relating to the accounts of Spinco Participants as of the transfer date, to the extent the assets, liabilities, loans and QDROs related to those accounts are actually transferred from the PNX 401(k) Plan to the Spinco 401(k) Plan and the Spinco 401(k) Plan shall satisfy all protected benefit requirements under the Code, ERISA and applicable law with respect to the transferred accounts. The transfer of assets shall be conducted in accordance with Code Section 414(l), Treasury Regulation Section 1.414(1)-1, and ERISA Section 208. When the accounts and underlying assets have been (i) transferred from the PNX 401(k) Plan to the Spinco 401(k) Plan and (ii) the Parties have reviewed and approved the transaction, which review and approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, the PNX 401(k) Plan shall be relieved of any responsibility and liability for the transferred accounts and amounts. The PNX 401(k)

 

7


Plan accounts of individuals who become Spinco Participants after the Spinco 401(k) Plan is established that are not transferred to the Spinco 401(k) Plan pursuant to the procedure described above shall be governed by the terms of the PNX 401(k) Plan.

(c) Continuation of Elections . The Spinco 401(k) Plan will recognize and maintain PNX 401(k) Plan elections or designations, including participant deferral elections (to the extent possible), investment elections, beneficiary designations, and the rights of alternate payees under qualified domestic relations orders with respect to Spinco Participants, to the extent such elections or designations are available under the Spinco 401(k) Plan and continued pursuant to procedures adopted under the Spinco 401(k) Plan. With respect to Spinco Participant elections to invest in PNX Common Stock, the Spinco 401(k) Plan will invest new deferral amounts covered by such elections in the appropriate default fund under the Spinco 401(k) Plan and Spinco Participants may change the investment of such amounts in accordance with Spinco 401(k) Plan procedures. The PNX Common Stock investment alternative shall remain available under the Spinco 401(k) Plan for sale purposes only for up to one year (subject to further determination by the Spinco 401(k) Plan fiduciaries in their sole discretion) only with respect to accounts transferred from the PNX 401(k) Plan as described in paragraph (b) above and only to the extent that such accounts are invested in PNX Common Stock at the time of the transfer. The Spinco Stock Fund under the PNX 401(k) Plan will accept the Spinco dividend on the Distribution Date; the Spinco Stock Fund under the Spinco 401(k) Plan will only be available for additional purchases if and when activated by the Trustee in its sole discretion. Between the time when the assets are transferred from the PNX 401(k) Plan to the Spinco 401(k) Plan and the Spinco Stock Fund is activated, if at all, Participants may only sell Spinco shares, if possible.

(d) Contributions through the Distribution Date . All contributions, including employer matching contributions, payable to the PNX 401(k) Plan through the Distribution Date with respect to employee deferrals and contributions for PNX Employees who become Spinco Employees as of the Distribution Date, determined in accordance with the terms and provisions of the PNX 401(k) Plan, ERISA and the Code, shall be paid by PNX (or its affiliate) to the PNX 401(k) Plan prior to the date of the asset transfer described in paragraph (b) above.

Section 3.2 PNX Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan; Spinco Excess Investment Plan .

(a) PNX Excess Investment Plan . Except as provided in Section 3.2(c) below, following the Distribution Date the PNX Group shall retain all obligations and Liabilities under, or with respect to, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan (the “ PNX Excess Investment Plan ”).

(b) Spinco Excess Investment Plan . Effective on or before the Distribution Date, Spinco will have its non-qualified excess investment plan in effect to benefit, on a prospective basis, Spinco Participants who participated in the PNX Excess Investment Plan immediately prior to the Distribution Date and other eligible Spinco Employees (the “ Spinco Excess Investment Plan ”).

 

8


(c) Transfer of PNX Excess Investment Plan Assetized Amounts . Within a reasonable period of time on or before the Distribution Date, PNX shall cause the accounts in the PNX Excess Investment Plan attributable to Spinco Participants who are employed as of the transfer date and the assetized amounts in the PNX Excess Investment Plan Rabbi trust related thereto to be transferred (based on the investments in place on or as soon as administratively practicable before the transfer date) to the Spinco Excess Investment Plan, and Spinco shall cause the Spinco Excess Investment Plan and the Spinco Excess Investment Plan Rabbi trust to accept such transfer of accounts and associated assetized amounts and, effective as of the date of such transfer, to assume and to fully perform, pay and discharge all obligations of the PNX Excess Investment Plan relating to the accounts of Spinco Participants as of the transfer date, to the extent the assetized amounts related to those accounts are actually transferred from the PNX Excess Investment Plan to the Spinco Excess Investment Plan. For any PNX Employees or former PNX Employees who are hired by Spinco after the assetized amount transfer date, their account balances in the PNX Excess Investment Plan shall remain in the PNX Excess Investment Plan, if such account balances are still in such Plan, and will be governed by the terms of the PNX Excess Investment Plan. When the accounts and associated assetized amounts have been (i) transferred from the PNX Excess Investment Plan to the Spinco Excess Investment Plan and (ii) the Parties have reviewed and approved the transaction, which review and approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, the PNX Excess Investment Plan shall be relieved of any responsibility and liability for the transferred accounts and assetized amounts.

(d) Continuation of Elections . The Spinco Excess Investment Plan will recognize and maintain PNX Excess Investment Plan elections or designations, including participant deferral elections (to the extent possible), investment elections, beneficiary designations, and the rights of alternate payees under accepted domestic relations orders with respect to Spinco Participants, to the extent such elections or designations are available under the Spinco Excess Investment Plan and continued pursuant to procedures adopted under the Spinco Excess Investment Plan.

Section 3.3 PNX Defined Benefit Retirement Plans . Following the Distribution Date, the PNX Group shall retain all obligations and Liabilities under, or with respect to, any PNX or PNX Group qualified or non-qualified defined benefit retirement plan. The accrued benefits of Spinco Employees under any PNX or PNX Group qualified or non-qualified defined benefit retirement plan shall be fully vested, to the extent not already fully vested, on the earlier of the Distribution Date and December 31, 2008. Any rights of Spinco Employees earned under any such defined benefit retirement plan before the Distribution Date or their later date of separation from service with the PNX Group shall remain with such defined benefit retirement plan and shall be governed by the terms and conditions of the applicable plan documents. Individuals, including Spinco Employees, who separate from service with the PNX Group will become eligible for distribution of their benefits under the PNX Group qualified and non-qualified defined benefit retirement plans in accordance with the plan terms and administrative procedures; however, for the nonqualified plans, the Spinco spin-off is not considered a separation from service under Section 409A of the Code and therefore, such individuals will not be eligible for a distribution of benefits from any non-qualified defined benefit retirement plans, including but not limited to the PNX

 

9


SERPS and the PNX Excess Benefit Plan, until they separate from service from the Spinco Group. The PNX Group shall be responsible for any notices, forms and filings that are required to be furnished to a governmental agency as a result of the Distribution.

Section 3.4 Spinco Notice to PNX of Terminations of Employment . For purposes of PNX benefits administration for the nonqualified PNX plans affected by Code Section 409A, the Spinco Group agrees to provide each affected Spinco Employee written notice that (i) upon the termination of the employment of any Spinco Employee, such employee must promptly notify the PNX Human Resources Department of any such termination; and (ii) any failure to do so could result in substantial penalties to the employee under Code Section 409A, similar state laws or any other laws that may affect such distributions. The notice package shall include a written acknowledgement of receipt of such notice that must be executed by the employee and returned to Spinco. Spinco shall maintain a copy of each such notice and executed acknowledgement in its Human Resources/Benefits records and shall make them available to the PNX Group upon request.

ARTICLE 4

HEALTH AND WELFARE PLANS

Section 4.1 Spinco Welfare Plans .

(a) Establishment of Spinco Welfare Plans . Effective on or before the Distribution Date, Spinco will have health and welfare benefit plans for the benefit of eligible Spinco Participants (the “ Spinco Welfare Plans ”), who immediately prior to the Distribution Date are participants in the PNX health and welfare benefit plans (the “ PNX Welfare Plans ”).

(b) Terms of Participation in Spinco Welfare Plans . All Spinco Welfare Plans will (i) waive all limitations as to preexisting conditions, exclusions, and service conditions with respect to participation and coverage requirements applicable to Spinco Employees, other than limitations that were in effect with respect to participants as of the Distribution Date under the PNX Welfare Plans, (ii) waive any waiting period limitation or evidence of insurability requirement that would otherwise be applicable to a Spinco Employee following the Distribution Date to the extent such Spinco Participant had satisfied any similar limitation under the analogous PNX Welfare Plan, and (iii) honor any deductibles, out-of-pocket maximums and co-payments incurred by Spinco Employees under the corresponding PNX Welfare Plan in satisfying the applicable deductibles, out-of-pocket expenses or co-payments under such PNX Welfare Plan for calendar year 2008.

(c) Immediately after the Distribution Date, all Liabilities in respect of or relating to Spinco Employees under the PNX Welfare Plans shall cease to be Liabilities of any member of the PNX Group or the PNX Welfare Plans and any and all such Liabilities shall be assumed by Spinco and the Spinco Welfare Plans.

(d) Except for the account balances described in Section 4.2, nothing in this Agreement shall require PNX, any PNX Group member or any PNX Welfare Plan to transfer assets or reserves with respect to the PNX Welfare Plans to Spinco, any Spinco Group member or the Spinco Welfare Plans.

 

10


Section 4.2 Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans .

(a) Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans . Effective on or before the Distribution Date, Spinco will have health and dependent care reimbursement account plans (the “ Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans ”). The Spinco Health Care Reimbursement Plan shall reimburse medical expenses incurred by the Spinco Employees at any time during the PNX Health Care Reimbursement Plan’s plan year (including claims incurred prior to the Distribution Date but unpaid prior to the Distribution Date), up to the amount of the PNX Health Care Reimbursement Plan Participants’ election and reduced by amounts previously reimbursed by the PNX Health Care Reimbursement Plan. The debit and credit account balances, if any, under the PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans of any Spinco Employee who transfers to employment with the Spinco Group directly from employment with the PNX Group on or before the Distribution Date shall be transferred within a reasonable period to the Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans on behalf of that Participant and shall thereafter be administered in accordance with the terms of the Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans. If a Spinco Employee whose health reimbursement account is transferred to the Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans has received health reimbursements that exceed the amount he or she has contributed to the PNX health reimbursement account as of the transfer date, Spinco (or its affiliate) shall collect that Spinco Employee’s payroll contributions in accordance with the Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans procedures and remit them on a monthly basis to PNX until PNX has recouped the total health reimbursements paid to or for that PNX Participant under the PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans for the year; provided that such contributions and remittances will cease upon the Spinco Employee’s cessation of participation in the Spinco Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans. The PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans balances of any PNX Participant who transfers to employment with the Spinco Group after the Distribution Date will not be transferred to Spinco and will be handled in accordance with the terms and procedures of the PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plans.

(b) PNX Health and Dependent Care Reimbursement Plan . PNX shall retain the Liability for administering under the PNX Reimbursement Account Plan all reimbursement claims of PNX Participants (including PNX Participants who participate in the PNX Reimbursement Account Plan before becoming Spinco Employees) incurred through the Distribution Date, subject to the terms of transfer set forth in Section 4.2(a) above.

Section 4.3 Retiree Welfare Benefits .

(a) Retiree Medical Coverage . Effective on October 31, 2008, Spinco Employees who are eligible for a retiree medical coverage under the PNX Welfare Plan (“ PNX Retiree Medical Coverage ”) and are actively employed and not on long-term disability leave will retain their eligibility for such coverage under the PNX Welfare

 

11


Benefit Plan, on the same terms and conditions that exist from time to time for participants eligible for retiree coverage. Any Spinco Employee who is not eligible for PNX Retiree Medical Coverage on October 31, 2008 is not eligible for nor entitled to PNX Retiree Medical Coverage.

(b) PNX Retiree Medical Coverage . PNX shall retain all obligations and Liabilities under, or with respect to, the PNX Retiree Medical Coverage for Spinco Employees covered by paragraph (a) above. Any rights such qualified Spinco Employees has under the PNX Retiree Medical Coverage before November 1, 2008 shall remain subject to and shall be governed by the terms and conditions of the PNX Retiree Medical Coverage.

Section 4.4 COBRA and HIPAA . Effective on or before the Distribution Date, the Spinco Welfare Plans will assume responsibility for compliance with the health care continuation coverage requirements of COBRA with respect to Spinco Employees who, prior to the Distribution Date, were covered under a PNX Welfare Plan pursuant to COBRA. PNX (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall be responsible for administering compliance with any certificate of creditable coverage requirements of HIPAA or Medicare applicable to the PNX Welfare Plans with respect to Spinco Employees incurred while they were participants in the PNX Welfare Plans. The Parties hereto agree that neither the Distribution nor any transfers of employment directly from the PNX Group to the Spinco Group that occur on or before the Distribution Date shall constitute a COBRA qualifying event for purposes of COBRA.

Section 4.5 Liabilities .

(a) Insured Benefits . With respect to employee welfare and fringe benefits that are provided through the purchase of insurance, (i) PNX (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall cause the PNX Welfare Plan, through the appropriate insurers, to fully perform, pay and discharge, within the timeframes applicable under the relevant plan, all claims that are incurred under the PNX Welfare Plan through the Distribution Date, and (ii) Spinco (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall cause the Spinco Welfare Plan, through the appropriate insurers, to fully perform, pay and discharge, within the timeframes applicable under the relevant plan, all claims that are incurred under the Spinco Welfare Plan from and after the Distribution Date.

(b) Self-Insured Benefits . With respect to employee welfare benefits that are provided on a self-insured basis, (i) PNX (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall fully perform, pay and discharge, within the timeframes applicable under the PNX Welfare Plan, all claims that are incurred under the PNX Welfare Plan through the Distribution Date, and (ii) Spinco (acting directly or through its Affiliates) shall fully perform, pay and discharge, within the timeframes applicable under the relevant Spinco Welfare Plan, all claims that are incurred under the Spinco Welfare Plans from and after the Distribution Date.

(c) Incurred Claim Definition . For purposes of this Section 4.5, a claim or Liability is deemed to be incurred (i) with respect to medical, dental, vision and/or prescription drug benefits, upon the rendering of health services giving rise to such claim

 

12


or Liability; (ii) with respect to disability benefits, upon the date of an individual’s disability, as determined by the disability benefit insurance carrier or claim administrator, giving rise to such claim or Liability; and (iii) with respect to a period of continuous hospitalization, upon the date of admission to the hospital.

Section 4.6 Vacation and Other Time-Off Benefits . Spinco (or its Affiliate) shall credit each individual who becomes a Spinco Employee on or before the Distribution Date with the amount of accrued but unused vacation time (including banked vacation time) and other time-off benefits as such Spinco Employee had with the PNX Group on or before the Distribution Date or, if later, his or her date of transfer from the PNX Group to the Spinco Group. The Spinco Employees for whom Spinco (or its Affiliate) provides vacation and other time-off credits as described above shall not have a right to a cash payment for their accrued but unused vacation time (including banked vacation time) or other time-off benefits upon their transfer from the PNX Group to the Spinco Group as a result of the Distribution.

Section 4.7 Advancements or Reimbursements . If a Spinco Employee was provided with any advancements or reimbursements from PNX or any of its Affiliates under any PNX policy such as the Financial Assistance Program for Continuing Education and Professional Designations while a PNX Employee after June 30, 2008 but prior to transferring to Spinco, then Spinco shall reimburse PNX for the amount of such advancements and reimbursements pursuant to Section 2.2(c).

Section 4.8 Workers’ Compensation Liabilities . Spinco Liabilities shall include, but not be limited to, any Liabilities relating to, arising out of, or resulting from any worker’s compensation claims made by a Spinco Employee, regardless of when said claims were made, incurred or become manifest. Pursuant to Section 2.2(c), Spinco shall reimburse PNX for a commutation amount, mutually agreed upon by the Parties in good faith, intended to represent the present value as of the Distribution Date of any Liabilities that resulted from an accident or from an occupational disease which was incurred or becomes manifest, as the case may be, before the Distribution Date for a Spinco Employee. PNX, each PNX Group member, Spinco and each Spinco Group member shall cooperate with respect to any notification to appropriate governmental agencies of the disposition and the issuance of new, or the transfer of existing, workers’ compensation insurance policies and claims handling contracts.

ARTICLE 5

LONG-TERM INCENTIVE AWARDS

Section 5.1 Treatment of Outstanding PNX Options .

(a) Adjustment of All PNX Options of Spinco Employees . Except as otherwise provided herein or otherwise agreed in writing by the Parties, each PNX Option held by a Spinco Employee that is outstanding immediately prior to the Distribution Date shall, be converted into an option to purchase shares of Spinco Common Stock (a “ Spinco Option ”) in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of each such option in accordance with the applicable tax law requirements, and that generally preserves the remaining terms of such options. The Spinco Options will be

 

13


adjusted based on a formula determined by the PNX Compensation Committee in accordance with the pertinent terms of the applicable PNX Stock Plan and described in Exhibit A attached hereto. Such adjustment may involve an adjustment of the PNX Option exercise price, the number of underlying shares, and/or other adjustments permitted by the applicable PNX Stock Plan. Those PNX Employees who remain employed with PNX will continue to maintain their PNX Options subject to an adjustment of the PNX Option exercise price, the number of underlying shares, and/or other adjustments permitted by the applicable PNX Stock Plan. Effective as of the Distribution Date, Spinco Options shall become subject to the terms and conditions of the Spinco Stock Plan, which shall incorporate such options, and the individual agreements associated with such awards.

(b) Vesting of Spinco Options . Spinco Options held by Spinco Employees that have not fully vested or have not been exercised or forfeited shall remain in effect and continue to vest following the Distribution Date based on the optionee’s service with the Spinco Group.

(c) Exercise of Spinco Options . Upon the exercise of a Spinco Option, regardless of the holder thereof, the exercise price shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the Spinco Option. Spinco shall administer the Spinco Stock Plan and award agreements in accordance with their terms and, to the extent that any tax withholding or reporting is required, Spinco shall collect the withholding amount and remit it and the pertinent information to the entity with the withholding and reporting obligation.

Section 5.2 Treatment of Outstanding PNX Service-Vested RSUs .

(a) PNX Service-Vested RSUs of Spinco Employees . PNX Service-Vested RSUs held by Spinco Employees that have not fully vested, have not converted to shares pursuant to a deferral election or have not been forfeited by the Distribution Date shall remain in effect and continue to vest or be deferred following the Distribution Date based on the holder’s service with the Spinco Group. Each such outstanding award will be converted to service-vested RSUs that will be payable in Spinco Common Stock (“ Spinco Service-Vested RSUs ”). The Spinco Service-Vested RSUs will be adjusted in a manner intended to preserve the economic value of the restricted stock units based on a formula determined by the PNX Compensation Committee in accordance with the pertinent terms of the applicable PNX Stock Plan and described in Exhibit A attached hereto.

(b) Settlement of Spinco Service-Vested RSU Awards . Upon the vesting of Spinco Service-Vested RSUs, Spinco shall be responsible for the settlement of such Spinco Service-Vested RSUs. Spinco shall administer the applicable Spinco Stock Plan and award agreements in accordance with their terms and, to the extent that any tax withholding or reporting is required, Spinco shall collect the withholding amount and remit it and the pertinent information to the entity with the withholding and reporting obligation.

 

14


Section 5.3 Treatment of Outstanding PNX Performance-Vested RSU and Spinco Performance-Vested RSU Awards .

(a) Adjustment of all PNX Performance-Vested RSU Awards . Each PNX Performance-Vested RSU that is contingent on a PNX performance metric and is outstanding immediately prior to the Distribution Date shall be converted, into an adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU (an “ Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU ”) in a manner intended to preserve the economic value of the restricted stock units based on a formula determined by the PNX Compensation Committee in accordance with the pertinent terms of the applicable PNX Stock Plan and described in Exhibit A attached hereto. Each such PNX Adjusted Performance-Vested RSU will be pro-rated as of the Distribution Date and such adjusted award will remain outstanding and will, subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, continue to be payable in shares of PNX Common Stock or cash as determined by PNX’s Compensation Committee in accordance with the applicable PNX Stock Plan, except as provided in Section 5.3(c).

(b) Outstanding awards that are contingent on a Spinco performance metric will (i) continue to remain outstanding, (ii) be adjusted (“ Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSU ”) in a manner intended to preserve the economic value of the restricted stock units based on a formula determined by the PNX Compensation Committee in accordance with the pertinent terms of the applicable Spinco Stock Plan and described in Exhibit A attached hereto and be converted into Spinco RSUs, and (iii) subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, be payable in shares of Spinco Common Stock. Each such RSU award will continue to vest based on such Employee’s continued employment by Spinco and the satisfaction of applicable performance criteria, subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable Spinco Stock Plan and award agreements as in effect immediately prior to the Distribution Date.

(c) Settlement of Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU and Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSU Awards for Spinco Employees. Upon the vesting and payment of the Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs and Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs, Spinco shall be responsible for the settlement of all such awards. The settlement of Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU Awards shall be made in cash, based upon the applicable PNX metrics. Spinco shall administer the Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSU Awards under the applicable Spinco Stock Plan and award agreement in accordance with their terms and, to the extent that any tax withholding or reporting is required, Spinco shall collect the withholding amount and remit it and the pertinent information to the entity with the withholding and reporting obligation. Spinco may exclusively rely on PNX for the administration of the Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSU Awards and reporting to Spinco, as appropriate, for Spinco’s settlement of such awards.

Section 5.4 PNX ESPP . A PNX Participant who (a) is contributing to the PNX ESPP for the offering period in effect on the Distribution Date and (b) terminates employment with PNX and transfers directly to employment with Spinco in connection with the Distribution shall be permitted to purchase shares during that offering period with the cash credited to his or her PNX ESPP option account as of his or her employment termination date. The payroll deductions of PNX Participants covered by this provision shall continue through the last day on which such individuals are on the PNX payroll.

 

15


Section 5.5 Cooperation . Spinco shall establish an appropriate administration system to handle, in an orderly manner, exercises of Spinco Options and the settlement of Spinco Service-Vested RSUs and Adjusted Performance-Vested RSUs. The Parties will work together to unify and consolidate all indicative data and payroll and employment information on regular timetables and make certain that each applicable entity’s data and records in respect of such awards are correct and updated on a timely basis. The foregoing shall include employment status and information required for tax withholding/remittance, compliance with trading windows and compliance with the requirements of the Exchange Act and other applicable Laws.

Section 5.6 SEC Registration . The Parties mutually agree to use commercially reasonable efforts to maintain effective registration statements with the SEC with respect to the long-term incentive awards described in this Article 5, to the extent any such registration statement is required by applicable Law. To the extent that a registration requirement applies to a PNX Stock Plan, PNX shall be responsible for SEC rule compliance. To the extent that a registration requirement applies to a Spinco Stock Plan on or after the Distribution Date, Spinco shall be responsible for SEC rule compliance.

Section 5.7 Savings Clause . The Parties hereby acknowledge that the provisions of this Article 5 are intended to achieve certain tax, legal and accounting objectives and, in the event such objectives are not achieved, the Parties agree to negotiate in good faith regarding such other actions that may be necessary or appropriate to achieve such objectives.

ARTICLE 6

ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION MATTERS

Section 6.1 Annual Incentive Awards .

(a) PNX Employees directly associated with the Spinco business who become Spinco Employees on the Distribution Date shall receive their annual incentive awards for the full 2008 calendar year from either the Spinco Stock Plan or the Spinco Annual Incentive Plan, as applicable.

(b) Annual Incentive Liability . Except as otherwise provided in this Section 6.1, including but not limited to Section 6.1(a), PNX shall retain responsibility for all Liabilities to the Distribution Date, when such obligations become due, relating to any 2008 annual incentive awards under any PNX Annual Incentive Plan for PNX Employees who are not directly associated with the Spinco business prior to the Distribution Date and who transfer to Spinco on the Distribution Date.

The Spinco Group shall be responsible for and pay the 2008 annual incentive awards of PNX Employees who are not directly associated with the Spinco business prior to the Distribution Date and who become Spinco Employees on the Distribution Date. PNX shall reimburse Spinco for PNX’s portion of the 2008 annual incentive, if earned, pursuant to Section 2.2(d).

 

16


For the avoidance of doubt and by way of example, Section 6.1(b) would apply to a PNX Employee who worked in the PNX law department to the Distribution Date (assumed to be October 31, 2008) and transferred to Spinco on the Distribution Date. PNX would be responsible for 10/12 or approximately 83% of the employee’s 2008 incentive award, if earned, and Spinco would be responsible for 2/12 or approximately 17% of the employee’s 2008 annual incentive award, if earned.

If a Spinco Employee transfers to PNX on the Distribution Date and thereby becomes a PNX Employee, PNX shall be responsible for and pay the 2008 annual incentive award, if earned, of such employee under the PNX Annual Incentive Plan or the PNX Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Officers. Spinco shall reimburse PNX, pursuant to Section 2.2(c), for Spinco’s portion of the 2008 annual incentive award (January 1 through the Distribution Date), if earned, calculated consistent with the above example.

(c) Establishment of Spinco Annual Incentive Plan . Effective on the Distribution Date, Spinco (or its affiliate) will have an annual incentive plan for the 2008 fiscal year that permits the issuance of annual incentive awards on terms and conditions substantially comparable to those under the PNX Annual Incentive Plan, provided that the payment amounts and individual performance criteria shall be established in the discretion of the Spinco Board of Directors or the Compensation Committee thereof.

Section 6.2 PNX Individual Arrangements . PNX acknowledges and agrees that, except as otherwise provided herein, PNX (or its affiliate) shall have full responsibility with respect to any Liabilities and the payment or performance of any obligations arising out of or relating to any employment, consulting, non-competition, retention or other compensatory arrangement previously provided by any member of the PNX Group to any PNX Participant, including life insurance policies not held in any trust and covering any PNX Participant. The Parties shall transfer or assign, and shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause their respective employees to consent to the transfer or assignment, to Spinco or the Spinco Group the rights and Liabilities arising under any agreements entered into prior to the Distribution Date between PNX and Spinco Employees that do not terminate on or before the Distribution Date.

Section 6.3 Severance Benefits . PNX and Spinco acknowledge and agree that the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement will not constitute a termination of employment for purposes of any policy, plan, program or agreement of PNX or any member of the PNX Group that provides for the payment of severance, separation pay, salary continuation or similar benefits in the event of a termination of employment, including, but not limited to, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan, The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Severance Allowance Plan, any SCM Advisors, LLC employment agreements, any other partner employment agreements, and any change in control agreement between PNX and a Spinco Employee. Spinco Liabilities shall include, but not be limited to, any Liabilities under applicable PNX Benefit Plans related to the termination of any PNX employees primarily associated with the Spinco business. Following the Distribution Date, Spinco shall reimburse PNX monthly for any such Liabilities as provided in Section 2.2(c). Such termination Liabilities shall include, but are not limited to, severance, COBRA and outplacement.

 

17


(a) PNX shall continue to provide the COBRA coverage and any other associated termination benefits (such as outplacement) under the applicable PNX Benefit Plan;

(b) Spinco shall provide the severance payments remaining as of the Distribution Date under the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Severance Allowance Plan or the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan, as applicable;

(c) Spinco shall reimburse PNX monthly for any termination Liabilities associated with the coverages or benefits provided in Section 6.3(a), as provided in Section 2.2(c). Such termination Liabilities shall include, but are not limited to, COBRA (any subsidized amounts) and outplacement costs. The outplacement costs would relate to any employee working in the asset management or related business before the Effective Time who is terminated prior to or as of the Effective Time, but elects outplacement coverage on or after the Effective Time.

Section 6.4 Relocation Expenses; Talent Acquisition/Retention Agency Fees . Following the Distribution Date, Spinco shall reimburse PNX periodically, as invoices are received from PNX’s relocation vendor or talent acquisition/retention vendor, for any (a) relocation expenses (including home sale/purchase program expenses) provided under the applicable relocation policy/program and any individual agreement/offer letter that addressed any aspect of relocation and (b) talent acquisition/retention agency fees, both as related to any employees who, as of the Distribution Date, are Spinco Employees or PNX Employees associated with the Spinco business.

Section 6.5 Tax Matters .

(a) Tax Deductions in General . Subject to the provisions of Section 6.4(b), the Parties agree to take the actions that are necessary or desirable to enable the Party responsible for any payment under this Agreement to receive, to the extent possible, the benefit of any tax deduction related to such payment. If one party receives a tax benefit as a result of any payment or benefit funded by the other party under this Agreement, the first party shall reimburse the other party for that tax benefit at the time and to the extent that such tax benefit is realized. If the reimbursement to the other party is considered taxable income to the other party, the first party shall gross-up the reimbursement amount to the other party for taxes.

(b) Equity-Based Compensation Deductions . Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 6.4(a), the Parties agree that, to the extent permitted by law, tax deductions for equity-based compensation described in Sections 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 shall be allocated to and claimed by the entity or entities within the respective PNX Group or Spinco Group that employed the individual receiving the compensation during the relevant vesting period based on the number of months of such individual’s employment with such entity or entities. The entity claiming the deduction shall be responsible for any tax reporting obligations, including but not limited to the filing of any required form W-2, and payment

 

18


of any taxes imposed upon the employer in respect of the corresponding amounts, in proportion to the amount claimed as a deduction. The Party in control of the payment of any such amounts shall be responsible for effecting the withholding of any applicable income and employment tax withholding required to be effected from any such payment. The Parties shall cooperate with each other to facilitate any required tax reporting obligations, including sharing, as relevant, information regarding amounts withheld from the payments to the employees. To the extent deductions cannot be claimed in the manner referenced in this Section 6.4(b), or are disallowed or adjusted on audit, the entity that receives the tax benefit shall reimburse the entity that would have received such tax benefit pursuant to the preceding sentence as and when realized. To the extent such reimbursement is treated as taxable income, the reimbursing party shall gross-up the reimbursement amount for taxes.

(c) Code Section 409A . Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, the Parties agree to cooperate to minimize the loss of deductions and to utilize commercially reasonable best efforts to have the applicable plans, programs and arrangements comply with Section 409A of the Code.

ARTICLE 7

INDEMNIFICATION

Any claim for indemnification under this Agreement shall be governed by, and be subject to, the provisions of Article VI of the Separation Agreement, which provisions are hereby incorporated by reference into this Agreement, and any references to “Agreement” in such Article VI as incorporated herein shall be deemed to be references to this Agreement.

ARTICLE 8

GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE

Section 8.1 Sharing of Information . PNX and Spinco (acting directly or through their respective Affiliates) shall provide to the other and their respective agents and vendors all Information as the other may reasonably request to enable the requesting Party to administer efficiently and accurately each of its Benefit Plans and to determine the scope of, as well as fulfill, its obligations under this Agreement. Such information shall, to the extent reasonably practicable, be provided in the format and at the times and places requested, but in no event shall the Party providing such information be obligated to incur any out-of-pocket expenses not reimbursed by the Party making such request or make such Information available outside of its normal business hours and premises. Any Information shared or exchanged pursuant to this Agreement shall be subject to the confidentiality requirements set forth in Article XI of the Separation Agreement. With respect to personal health information (“PHI”) as defined in the Privacy Rule under HIPAA, the Parties agree to comply with the regulations under the Privacy Rule and the Security Standards, including, but not limited to, entering into any business associate agreements that may be required for the sharing of PHI.

Section 8.2 Reasonable Efforts/Cooperation . Each of the Parties hereto will use its commercially reasonable efforts to promptly take, or cause to be taken, all actions and to do, or cause to be done, all things necessary, proper or advisable under applicable Laws and regulations to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, including adopting

 

19


plans or plan amendments. Each of the Parties hereto shall provide reasonable cooperation on any issue relating to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement for which the other Party seeks a determination letter or private letter ruling from the IRS, an advisory opinion from the DOL or any other filing, consent or approval with respect to or by a Governmental Entity.

Section 8.3 Employer Rights . Nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit Spinco or any of its Affiliates from amending, modifying or terminating any Spinco Benefit Plan at any time within its sole discretion after the Distribution Date. In addition, other than as expressly provided in Article 3, Article 4, Article 5, or Article 6, nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit PNX or any PNX affiliate from amending, modifying or terminating any PNX Benefit Plan at any time within its sole discretion.

Section 8.4 Effect on Employment . Except as expressly provided in this Agreement, the occurrence of the Distribution alone shall not cause any employee to be deemed to have incurred a termination of employment that entitles such individual to the commencement of benefits under any of the PNX Benefit Plans. Furthermore, nothing in this Agreement is intended to confer upon any employee or former employee of PNX, Spinco or any of their respective Affiliates any right to continued employment, or any recall or similar rights to an individual on layoff or any type of approved leave.

Section 8.5 Consent of Third Parties . If any provision of this Agreement depends on the consent of any third party and such consent is withheld, the Parties shall use commercially reasonable efforts to implement the applicable provisions of this Agreement to the fullest extent practicable. If any provision of this Agreement cannot be implemented due to the failure of such third party to consent, the Parties shall negotiate in good faith to implement the provision in a mutually satisfactory manner.

Section 8.6 Beneficiary Designation/Release of Information/Right to Reimbursement . To the extent permitted by applicable Law and except as otherwise provided for in this Agreement, all beneficiary designations, authorizations for the release of information and rights to reimbursement made by or relating to Spinco Employees under PNX Benefit Plans shall be transferred to and be in full force and effect under the corresponding Spinco Benefit Plans until such beneficiary designations, authorizations or rights are replaced or revoked by, or no longer apply to, the relevant Spinco Employee.

Section 8.7 Not a Change in Control . The Parties hereto acknowledge and agree that the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement and this Agreement do not constitute a “change in control” for purposes of any PNX Benefit Plan, PNX Stock Plan, Spinco Stock Plan or Spinco Benefit Plan.

Section 8.8 Fiduciary Matter . PNX and Spinco each acknowledge that the transfer of account balances and assets from the PNX Savings and Investment Plan to the Spinco Savings and Investment Plan will be subject to fiduciary duties or standards of conduct under ERISA or other applicable law, and no Party shall be deemed to be in violation of this Agreement if it fails to comply with any provisions hereof based upon its good faith determination (as supported by advice from counsel experienced in such matters) that to do so would violate such a fiduciary duty or standard. Each Party shall be responsible for taking such actions as are deemed necessary and appropriate to comply with its own fiduciary responsibilities.

 

20


ARTICLE 9

MISCELLANEOUS

Section 9.1 Effect if Distribution Does not Occur . Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, if the Separation Agreement is not executed or if it terminates prior to the Effective Time, then all actions and events that are, under this Agreement, to be taken or occur effective prior to, as of or following the Distribution Date, or otherwise in connection with the distribution, shall not be taken or occur except to the extent specifically agreed to in writing by PNX and Spinco and neither Party shall have any Liability or further obligation to the other Party under this Agreement.

Section 9.2 Relationship of Parties . Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed or construed by the Parties or any third party as creating the relationship of principal and agent, partnership or joint venture between the Parties, it being understood and agreed that no provision contained herein, and no act of the Parties, shall be deemed to create any relationship between the Parties other than the relationship set forth herein.

Section 9.3 Affiliates . Each of PNX and Spinco shall cause to be performed, and hereby guarantees the performance of, all actions, agreements and obligations set forth in this Agreement to be performed by each of their Affiliates, respectively.

Section 9.4 Notices . All notices and communications under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given (a) when received, if such notice or communication is delivered by facsimile, hand delivery or overnight courier, or (b) three (3) business days after mailing if such notice or communication is sent by United States registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, first class postage prepaid. All notices and communications, to be effective, must be properly addressed to the party to whom they are directed at its address as follows:

To PNX:

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

One American Row

Hartford, CT 06102-5056

Attn: General Counsel

Facsimile: (860) 403-7899

With a copy to:

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

One American Row

Hartford, CT 06102-5056

Attn: Head of Human Resources

Facsimile: (860) 403-7269

 

21


To Spinco:

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

100 Pearl Street, 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

Attn: Kevin J. Carr

Facsimile: (860) 241-1028

With a copy to:

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

100 Pearl Street, 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

Attn: Head of Human Resources

Facsimile: (860) 241-1028

Either Party may, by written notice delivered to the other Party in accordance with this Section 9.4, change the address to which delivery of any notice shall thereafter be made.

Section 9.5 Entire Agreement . This Agreement, the Separation Agreement, and each other Ancillary Agreement, including any Annexes, Schedules and Exhibits hereto and thereto, as well as any other agreements and documents referred to herein and therein, shall constitute the entire agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and shall supersede all previous negotiations, commitments and writings with respect to such subject matter. In the event of any inconsistency between this Agreement and any Exhibit or Schedule hereto, the Exhibit or Schedule shall prevail.

Section 9.6 Waivers . No waiver of any terms, provision or condition of or failure to exercise or delay in exercising any rights or remedies under this Agreement, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such term, provision, condition, right or remedy or as a waiver of any other term, provision or condition of this Agreement.

Section 9.7 Amendments . Subject to the terms of Section 9.8 of this Agreement, this Agreement may not be modified or amended except by an instrument in writing signed by both of the Parties.

Section 9.8 Termination . If permitted by the Separation Agreement, this Agreement (including Article 7 hereof (Indemnification)) may be terminated and abandoned at any time prior to the Distribution Date by and in the sole discretion of PNX without the approval of Spinco or the shareholders of PNX, and it shall be deemed terminated if and when the Separation Agreement is terminated. In the event of such termination, neither Party shall have any liability of any kind to the other Party or any other Person. After the Distribution Date, this Agreement may not be terminated except by an agreement in writing signed by both Parties; provided, however, that Article 7 shall not be terminated after the Distribution Date in respect of any PNX Indemnitee or Spinco Indemnitee without the consent of such Person.

 

22


Section 9.9 Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the internal Laws of the State of Connecticut, without regard to the conflicts of law rules of such state.

Section 9.10 Dispute Resolution . The dispute resolution provisions in Section 15.15 of the Separation Agreement shall apply to this Agreement, except for any disputes regarding the Benefit Plans which are governed by the Plans’ claim procedures.

Section 9.11 Titles and Headings . Titles and headings to sections herein are inserted for the convenience of reference only and are not intended to be a part of or to affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement.

Section 9.12 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in more than one counterpart, each of which shall be deemed an original instrument and all of which together shall be considered one and the same agreement, and shall become effective when one or more such counterparts have been signed by each of the Parties and delivered to the other Parties.

Section 9.13 Assignment . Neither of the Parties hereto may assign its rights or delegate any of its duties under this Agreement without the prior written consent of the other Party or as otherwise provided in the Separation Agreement. This Agreement shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the Parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns. Nothing contained in this Agreement, express or implied, is intended to confer any benefits, rights or remedies upon any Person other than members of the PNX Group and the Spinco Group.

Section 9.14 Severability . In the event that any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein and therein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby. The Parties shall endeavor in good-faith negotiations to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions with valid provisions, the economic effect of which comes as close as possible to that of the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions.

Section 9.15 Exhibits and Schedules . The Exhibits and Schedules shall be construed with and as an integral part of this Agreement to the same extent as if the same had been set forth verbatim herein.

Section 9.16 Specific Performance . The Parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms. Accordingly, it is hereby agreed that the Parties shall be entitled to (a) an injunction or injunctions to enforce specifically the terms and provisions hereof in any arbitration in accordance with Section 9.10 of this Agreement, (b) provisional or temporary injunctive relief in accordance therewith in any court of the United States, and (c) enforcement of any such award of an arbitral tribunal or any court of the United States, or any other any other tribunal sitting in any state of the United States or in any foreign country that has jurisdiction, this being in addition to any other remedy or relief to which they may be entitled.

 

23


Section 9.17 Waiver of Jury Trial . SUBJECT TO SECTION 9.10 AND SECTION 9.16 OF THIS AGREEMENT, EACH OF THE PARTIES HEREBY WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY WITH RESPECT TO ANY COURT PROCEEDING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF AND PERMITTED UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT. EACH OF THE PARTIES HEREBY (a) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER AND (b) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT AND THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT, AS APPLICABLE, BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS IN THIS SECTION 9.17.

Section 9.18 Authorization . Each of the Parties hereby represents and warrants that it has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform this Agreement, that this Agreement has been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action on the part of such Party, that this Agreement constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of each such Party and that the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement by such Party does not contravene or conflict with any provision of law or of its charter or bylaws or any material agreement, instrument or order binding on such Party.

Section 9.19 No Third-Party Beneficiaries . This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and should not be deemed to confer upon third parties any remedy, claim, liability, reimbursement, cause of action or other right in excess of those existing without reference to this Agreement.

Section 9.20 Construction . The Parties have participated jointly in the negotiation and drafting of this Agreement. This Agreement shall be construed without regard to any presumption or rule requiring construction or interpretation against the party drafting or causing any instrument to be drafted.

[SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]

 

24


IN WITNESS WHEREOF , the Parties have caused this Agreement to be duly executed as of the day and year first above written.

 

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By:  

/s/ Peter A. Hofmann

Name:   Peter A. Hofmann
Title:   Chief Financial Officer
VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title:   President

 

[ Signature Page – Employee Matters Agreement ]


EXHIBIT A

EQUITY CONVERSION

PNX Options for Spinco Employees

PNX and Spinco shall take any and all action as shall be necessary or appropriate, so that each award of PNX Options issued and currently outstanding under any PNX Stock Plan held at the close of business on the Distribution Date by a Spinco Employee shall be adjusted, pursuant to the terms of the PNX Stock Plans and the PNX Options, by converting such options into Spinco Options. Such adjustment shall be effected by replacing such PNX Options with substitute Spinco Options in a manner such that immediately following the Distribution, (i) each such holder of a PNX Option will receive a number of substitute Spinco Options equal to the Spinco Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of PNX Options held by such holder, and (ii) the per share option exercise price of each such Spinco Option will be determined by dividing the exercise price of the original PNX Option by the Spinco Conversion Ratio, and such adjustment shall be effected in a manner intended to satisfy requirements of Code Section 424 and avoid treatment of the Spinco Options as non-qualified deferred compensation subject to Code Section 409A. Such substituted Spinco Options will in the sole and absolute judgment of the PNX Compensation Committee preserve the aggregate intrinsic value of the original PNX Options for which they are substituted and the ratio in the original option of the exercise price to the fair market value of the stock by adjusting the number of shares purchasable and the exercise price, based on a comparison of the PNX Final Price and the Spinco Initial Price. Such substitute Spinco Options will take into account all employment with both PNX and Spinco, and their respective subsidiaries and affiliates, for purposes of determining when the Spinco Options will become exercisable and/or vest. All of the calculations described above shall be applied using the rounding conventions determined in the sole discretion of PNX to carry out the purposes of this Exhibit A.

PNX Service-Vested RSUs for Spinco Employees

PNX and Spinco shall take any and all action as shall be necessary or appropriate so that Spinco Employees who hold PNX Service-Vested RSUs will have each of their awards of PNX Service-Vested RSUs adjusted pursuant to the terms of the PNX Stock Plans and PNX Service-Vested RSUs, by converting such PNX Service-Vested RSUs into Spinco Service-Vested RSUs. Such adjustment shall be effected by replacing such PNX Service-Vested RSUs with substitute Spinco Service-Vested RSUs in a manner such that immediately following the Distribution each such holder of a PNX Service-Vested RSU will receive a number of substituted Spinco Service-Vested RSUs equal to the Spinco Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of PNX Service-Vested RSUs held by such holder. Such substituted Spinco Service-Vested RSUs will take into account all employment with both PNX and Spinco, and their respective subsidiaries and affiliates, for purposes of determining when the Spinco Service-Vested RSUs will vest and/or be paid. Such adjustment and replacement shall be conducted in a manner intended not to modify the treatment of the Spinco Service-Vested RSU under Code Section 409A from the treatment that would otherwise apply with respect to the corresponding PNX Service-Vested RSU. The calculation described above shall be applied using the rounding conventions determined in the sole discretion of PNX to carry out the purposes of this Exhibit A.


PNX Performance-Vested RSUs subject to PNX Performance Metric for Spinco Employees

PNX and Spinco shall take any and all action as shall be necessary or appropriate so that Spinco Employees who hold PNX Performance-Vested RSUs that are contingent on a PNX Performance metric will have each of their awards adjusted pursuant to the terms of the PNX Stock Plans and PNX Performance-Vested RSUs, by (1) pro-rating each such award based on a factor equal to the number of months between the beginning of the performance period for each award and the Distribution Date (counting partial months as whole months) divided by thirty-six months, and (2) converting such pro-rated PNX Performance-Vested RSUs into Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs by replacing such pro-rated PNX Performance-Vested RSUs with substitute Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs in a manner such that immediately following the Distribution each such holder of a pro-rated PNX Performance-Vested RSU will receive a number of substituted Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs equal to the PNX Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of pro-rated PNX Performance-Vested RSUs held by such holder. Such substituted Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs will take into account all employment with both PNX and Spinco, and their respective subsidiaries and affiliates, for purposes of determining when the cash equivalent of the Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs will vest and/or be paid, and the determination of applicable performance results shall be made with respect to the results of the original, full, and non-pro-rated performance period. Such adjustment and replacement shall be conducted in a manner intended not to modify the treatment of the Adjusted PNX Performance-Vested RSUs under Code Section 409A from the treatment that would otherwise apply with respect to the corresponding PNX Performance-Vested RSU award. All of the calculations described above shall be applied using the rounding conventions determined in the sole discretion of PNX to carry out the purposes of this Exhibit A.

PNX Performance-Vested RSUs subject to Spinco Performance Metric for Spinco Employees.

PNX and Spinco shall take any and all action as shall be necessary or appropriate so that Spinco Employees who hold PNX Performance-Vested RSUs that are contingent on a Spinco Performance metric will have each of their awards adjusted pursuant to the terms of the PNX Stock Plans and PNX Performance-Vested RSUs, by converting such PNX Performance-Vested RSUs into Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs. Such adjustment shall be effected by replacing such PNX Performance-Vested RSUs with substitute Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs in a manner such that immediately following the Distribution each such holder of a PNX Performance-Vested RSU will receive a number of substituted Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs equal to the Spinco Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of PNX Performance-Vested RSUs held by such holder. Such substituted Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs will take into account all employment with both PNX and Spinco, and their respective subsidiaries and affiliates, for purposes of determining when the Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs will vest and/or be paid. Such adjustment and replacement shall be conducted in a manner intended not to modify the treatment of the Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSUs under Code Section 409A from the treatment that would otherwise apply with respect to the corresponding PNX Performance-Vested RSU award. The calculation described above shall be applied using the rounding conventions determined in the sole discretion of PNX to carry out the purposes of this Exhibit A.


Approval and Terms of Equity Awards.

PNX, acting as the sponsor of the PNX Stock Plans and as majority shareholder of Spinco shall, and shall cause Spinco to, take such actions and give or obtain such approvals as are necessary or desirable to ensure that the issuance of the Spinco awards provided for in this Exhibit A shall comply with all applicable tax, securities law and stock exchange requirements. The parties intend that each Spinco Option and Spinco Service-Vested RSU and Adjusted Spinco Performance-Vested RSU (each, a “Spinco Adjustment Award”) shall be (i) granted pursuant to governing plan terms of a Spinco Stock Plan which are substantially similar to the plan terms of the relevant PNX Stock Plan under which the relevant predecessor award was granted and (ii) subject to the terms of the applicable award agreement under which the relevant predecessor award was granted (as such plan and award documents may have been duly amended from time to time), except to the extent that the terms of such Spinco Adjustment Award shall be varied pursuant to the terms of this Agreement or by any action of Spinco.

Exhibit 10.4

CHANGE IN CONTROL AGREEMENT

This Change in Control Agreement (this “ Agreement ”), effective as of the Distribution Date (as defined in the Separation Agreement, Plan of Reorganization and Distribution by and between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.), is between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), and George R. Aylward, Jr. (the “ Executive ”).

RECITALS

The Company or one of its Affiliates (as defined below) has employed the Executive in an officer position and has determined that the Executive holds a critical position with the Company and/or such Affiliate.

The Company believes that, in the event it is confronted with a situation that could result in a change in ownership or control of the Company, continuity of management will be essential to its ability to evaluate and respond to such situation in the best interests of its shareholders.

The Company understands that any such situation will present significant concerns for the Executive with respect to the Executive’s financial and job security. The Company desires to assure the Company and its Affiliates of the Executive’s services during the period in which it is confronting such a situation, and to provide the Executive certain financial assurances to enable the Executive to perform the responsibilities of the Executive’s position without undue distraction and to exercise the Executive’s judgment without bias due to the Executive’s personal circumstances. To achieve these objectives, the Company and the Executive desire to enter into an agreement providing the Company and its Affiliates and the Executive with certain rights and obligations upon the occurrence of a Change in Control (as defined below).

The Company and the Executive therefore agree as follows:

1. Operation of Agreement .

(a) Term . The initial term of this Agreement shall commence on the date of this Agreement and continue through the second anniversary of the effective date of this Agreement, as set forth in the first paragraph above, unless terminated earlier as provided in Section 5. Upon the expiration of the initial or any renewal term, this Agreement shall automatically renew for successive one-year terms, subject to earlier termination as provided in Section 5, unless either party provides the other party with a written notice at least sixty (60) days prior to the end of the initial term or any renewal term that the Company or the Executive does not want the term to be so extended. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, the term of this Agreement shall in all events expire (regardless of when the term would otherwise have expired) on the second

 

1


anniversary of a Change in Control; provided that any payment obligations hereunder resulting from the Executive’s termination of employment prior to the expiration of the term shall continue in full force and effect following the expiration of the term.

(b) Effective Date . If a Change in Control occurs during the term of this Agreement, this Agreement shall govern the terms and conditions of the Executive’s employment and the benefits and compensation to be provided to the Executive commencing on the date on which a Change in Control occurs (the “ Effective Date ”) and ending on the second anniversary of the Effective Date; provided that if the Executive is not employed by the Company or one of its Affiliates on the Effective Date, this Agreement shall be void and without effect, and shall not constitute a contract of employment or a guarantee of employment for any period of time. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, in the event that prior to the Effective Date, the Executive’s employment with the Company or any of its Affiliates is terminated in connection with a Change in Control (which shall in all events be deemed the case if such termination is within 90 days prior to the Effective Date and deemed not to be the case if such termination is more than 180 days before the Effective Date) without Cause or for Good Reason (as such terms are defined in Sections 5(b) and 5(c) below, but without regard to the requirement under Section 5(c) that such termination occur after the Effective Date), the Executive shall be entitled to receive the benefits provided under Section 6(b), but only to the extent that such benefits are in excess of those previously received by the Executive as a result of the Executive’s prior termination.

2. Definitions .

(a) “ Affiliate ” means any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, trust or other entity which directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls, is under common control with, or is controlled by, the Company.

(b) “ Change in Control ” means the first occurrence of:

(i) any Person acquires “beneficial ownership” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “ Exchange Act ”)), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined Voting Power of the Company’s securities;

(ii) within any 24-month period, the persons who were directors of the Company at the beginning of such period (the “ Incumbent Directors ”) shall cease to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors (the “ Board ”) or the board of directors of any successor to the Company; provided that any director elected or nominated for election to the Board by a majority of the Incumbent Directors still in office shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director for purposes of this subclause 2(b)(ii);

 

2


(iii) the effective date of the consummation of any merger, consolidation, share exchange, division, sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company (a “ Corporate Event ”), if immediately following the consummation of such Corporate Event those Persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event do not hold, directly or indirectly, a majority of the Voting Power, in substantially the same proportion as prior to such Corporate Event, of (x) in the case of a merger or consolidation, the surviving or resulting corporation or (y) in the case of a division or a sale or other disposition of assets, each surviving, resulting or acquiring corporation which, immediately following the relevant Corporate Event, holds more than 25% of the consolidated assets of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event;

(iv) the approval by stockholders of the Company of a plan of liquidation with respect to the Company; or

(v) the occurrence of any other event occurs which the Board declares to be a Change in Control.

(c) Code means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

(d) Delay Period means for a Specified Employee, that period of time between the Specified Employee’s date of Separation from Service and the earlier of (i) six months from the Separation from Service date, and (ii) the Specified Employee’s date of death.

(e) “ Employment Period ” means the period during which the Executive remains employed with the Company or any Affiliate following the Effective Date through the expiration of the term of this Agreement.

(f) “ Person ” shall have the same meaning as ascribed to such term in Section 3(a)(9) of the Exchange Act, as supplemented by Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act, and shall include any group (within the meaning of Rule 13d-5(b) under the Exchange Act); provided that Person shall not include (i) the Company or any of its Affiliates, or (ii) any employee benefit plan (including an employee stock ownership plan) sponsored by the Company or any of its Affiliates.

(g) “ PIP ” means the Company’s Performance Incentive Plan (or any successor plan) or similar annual incentive plan applicable to the Executive.

(h) “ Separation from Service ” shall have the meaning set forth and described in the final regulations promulgated under Code section 409A.

 

3


(i) Specified Employee means an employee who, as of the date of the employee’s separation from service, is a key employee of the Company, whose stock is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise. An employee is a key employee if the employee meets the requirements of Code section 416(i)(1)(A)(i), (ii), or (iii) (applied in accordance with the regulations thereunder and disregarding Code section 416(i)(5)) (generally a key employee will be one of the top 50 officers having annual compensation greater than $150,000 in 2008) at any time during the 12-month period ending on a Specified Employee identification date. If an employee is a key employee as of a Specified Employee identification date, the employee is treated as a key employee (and therefore a Specified Employee) for the entire 12-month period beginning on the Specified Employee effective date. For any nonqualified deferred compensation plan or arrangement of the Company that is subject to Code section 409A, the Specified Employee identification date is December 31 of the preceding calendar year, and the Specified Employee effective date is April 1 of the current calendar year.

(j) “ Voting Power ” means such number of Voting Securities as shall enable the holders thereof to cast all the votes which could be cast in an annual election of directors of a company.

(k) “ Voting Securities ” means all securities entitling the holders thereof to vote in an annual election of directors of a company.

3. Business Time . During the Employment Period, the Executive shall devote substantially the Executive’s full business time and efforts to the performance of the Executive’s duties on behalf of the Company and its Affiliates, except for periods of vacation and sick leave or other leave period required by law. So long as the following activities do not (individually or in the aggregate) materially interfere with the performance of the Executive’s duties with the Company and its Affiliates and are conducted in compliance with the Company’s Code of Conduct (as in effect from time to time), the Executive may: (a) participate in charitable, civic, educational, professional, community or industry affairs or serve on the boards of directors or advisory boards of not for profit companies; and (b) manage his or her and his or her family’s personal financial and legal affairs. The Executive may serve on the boards of directors or similar governing bodies of any for profit entity only with the prior written consent of the Board and only as long as such service is not in violation of the Company’s Code of Conduct. It is expressly understood and agreed that the Executive’s continuing to serve to the same extent and in the same manner on any boards and committees on which the Executive is serving or with which the Executive is otherwise associated immediately preceding the Effective Date shall not be deemed to interfere with the performance of the Executive’s services to the Company and its Affiliates.

4. Compensation .

(a) Base Salary . During the Employment Period, the Executive shall

 

4


receive a base salary at a monthly rate at least equal to the monthly salary paid to the Executive immediately prior to the Effective Date. The base salary may be increased (but not decreased) at any time and from time to time by action of the Board or any committee thereof, the board of directors of any Affiliate or any committee thereof in the event the Executive is employed by an Affiliate, and any individual having authority to take such action in accordance with the Company’s or any Affiliate’s regular practices. The Executive’s base salary, as it may be increased from time to time, shall hereafter be referred to as the “ Base Salary .”

(b) Total Incentive Compensation . During the Employment Period, the total incentive compensation opportunities made available to the Executive in each year in the form of short-term incentive compensation and long-term incentive compensation (“ Total Incentive Compensation ”), whether in equity or cash, shall not be less than the Total Incentive Compensation made available to the Executive immediately prior to the Effective Date. For purposes of this Section 4(b), the amount of Total Incentive Compensation made available to the Executive, whether prior to or after a Change in Control, shall be conclusively determined by an independent compensation consultant selected by the Company prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control (or, if that entity is no longer able to serve or declines to serve in such capacity, such other independent compensation consultant that has no existing client relationship with the Company and its Affiliates as shall be selected by the designated consultant and reasonably acceptable to the Board (either such consultant hereinafter referred to as the “ Compensation Consultant ”)), using methods of valuation and comparison commonly used in competitive compensation practices, which shall be consistently applied. The Company shall provide the Compensation Consultant with any and all data that the consultant shall reasonably request in order to make its evaluations hereunder.

5. Termination .

(a) Death, Disability, or Voluntary Resignation . This Agreement shall terminate automatically upon the Executive’s termination due to death, termination due to “Disability” (as defined below), voluntary retirement (other than for Good Reason, as defined below) under any of the retirement plans of the Company or its Affiliates applicable to the Executive as in effect from time to time, or Executive’s voluntary resignation for any reason (other than for Good Reason). For purposes of this Agreement, “ Disability ” shall mean the Executive’s inability to perform his or her material duties for six consecutive months due to a physical or mental incapacity.

(b) Cause . The Company and each of its Affiliates that employ the Executive may terminate the Executive’s employment for Cause. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Cause ” means: (i) the Executive’s conviction of or plea of nolo contendere to, a felony (other than with respect to a traffic violation or an incident of vicarious liability); (ii) an act of willful misconduct on Executive’s part with regard to the Company or its Affiliates having a material adverse impact on the Company or its Affiliates (including, without limitation, a willful violation of the

 

5


Company’s Code of Conduct); or (iii) the Executive’s failure in good faith to attempt or refusal to perform legal directives of the Board or executive officers of the Company, as applicable, which directives are consistent with the scope and nature of the Executive’s employment duties and responsibilities and which failure or refusal is not remedied by the Executive within thirty (30) days after notice of such non-performance is given to the Executive. The Executive shall be provided an opportunity, together with his or her counsel, to be heard before the Board prior to termination and after such notice. If the majority of the members of the Board do not confirm, through a duly-adopted resolution following such opportunity, that the Company had grounds for a “Cause” termination, the Executive shall have the option to treat his or her employment as not having terminated or as having been terminated pursuant to a termination without Cause. No event shall constitute grounds for a “Cause” termination in the event that the Company fails to take action within 90 days after the Company’s Chairman or the Chairman of the Company’s Audit Committee obtains actual knowledge of the occurrence of such event. Additionally, for purposes of clause (ii) of this definition, no act, or failure to act, on the Executive’s part shall be deemed “willful” unless done, or omitted to be done, by the Executive not in good faith and without reasonable belief that the Executive’s act, or failure to act, was in the best interest of the Company and its subsidiaries.

(c) Good Reason . After the Effective Date, the Executive may resign from employment at any time for Good Reason. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Good Reason ” means the occurrence after the Effective Date of any of the following, without the express written consent of the Executive and which occurrence is not remedied by the Company within thirty (30) days after written notice of such occurrence is given to the Company):

(i) the material reduction in the Executive’s title, position, duties or responsibilities from the title, position, duties or responsibilities held or exercised by the Executive prior to the Effective Date;

(ii) any requirement by the Company that the geographic location where the Executive regularly provides services to the Company is materially changed to a location that is more than 35 miles from where the Executive provides services to the Company immediately prior to the Effective Date;

(iii) a material diminution/reduction by the Company of the Executive’s Base Salary or Total Incentive Compensation opportunity or a reduction in the employee benefits provided to the Executive under the Company’s employee benefit plans (unless the Executive is provided with substantially equivalent replacement benefits); or

(iv) any failure to obtain the assumption and agreement to perform this Agreement by a successor as contemplated by Section 12(b).

 

6


(d) Notice of Termination . Any termination of the Executive’s employment after the Effective Date by the Company and/or its Affiliates for Cause or by the Executive for Good Reason shall be communicated by Notice of Termination to the other party hereto in accordance with Section 14(e). For purposes of this Agreement, a “ Notice of Termination ” means a written notice given: (i) in the case of a termination for Cause, within 10 business days of the Company or any Affiliate that employs the Executive having actual knowledge of the events giving rise to such termination; or (ii) in the case of a termination for Good Reason, within 10 business days of the Executive’s having actual knowledge of the events giving rise to such termination, but in no event later than 90 calendar days after the actual event. Any such Notice of Termination shall (x) indicate the specific termination provision in this Agreement relied upon, (y) set forth in reasonable detail the facts and circumstances claimed to provide a basis for termination of the Executive’s employment under the provision so indicated, and (z) if the termination date is other than the date of receipt of such notice, specify the termination date of this Agreement (which date shall be not more than 15 days after the giving of such notice).

(e) Date of Termination . For the purpose of this Agreement, the term “ Date of Termination ” means: (i) in the case of a termination for which a Notice of Termination is required, the date of receipt of such Notice of Termination or, if later, the date specified therein, as the case may be, and (ii) in all other cases, the actual date on which the Executive’s Separation from Service occurs during the Employment Period.

6. Obligations of the Company or an Affiliate upon Termination .

(a) Death, Disability, Retirement, Voluntary Resignation and Termination for Cause . If the Executive’s employment is terminated during the Employment Period by reason of the Executive’s death, Disability, termination for Cause, or voluntary termination due to his or her retirement or other resignation (other than on account of Good Reason) this Agreement shall terminate without further obligations to the Executive or the Executive’s legal representatives under this Agreement other than those obligations accrued hereunder at the Date of Termination, and the Company or the Affiliate that employs the Executive shall pay to the Executive (or the Executive’s beneficiary or estate), at the times determined below: ( i ) the Executive’s full Base Salary through the Date of Termination (the “ Earned Salary ”), ( ii ) any vested amounts or benefits owing to the Executive under and in accordance with the terms and conditions of any otherwise applicable employee benefit plans, agreements and programs and any accrued vacation pay not yet paid (the “ Accrued Obligations ”), and ( iii ) any other benefits payable in such situation under the plans, agreements, policies or programs of the Company and its Affiliates and in accordance with the terms of such plans, policies and programs (the “ Additional Benefits ”). Any Earned Salary shall be paid in cash in a single lump sum as soon as practicable, but in no

 

7


event more than 30 days (or at such earlier or later date required by law), following the Date of Termination. Accrued Obligations and Additional Benefits shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan, program or arrangement.

(b) Termination Without Cause or for Good Reason . If, during the Employment Period, the Company or the Affiliate that employs the Executive terminates the Executive’s employment other than for Cause or the Executive terminates his or her employment for Good Reason:

(i) Additional Lump Sum Payments . In lieu of (and not in addition to) any severance benefits payable to the Executive under any other plan, policy or program of the Company or any Affiliate (each, a “ Severance Policy ”) or under any written agreement between the Executive and the Company (each, a “ Prior Agreement ”), the Company shall pay to the Executive (or cause the Executive to be paid), at the times determined below, the following amounts:

(A) the Executive’s Earned Salary;

(B) a cash amount (the “ Severance Amount ”) equal to 2.5 times the sum of ( x ) the Executive’s annual rate of Base Salary as then in effect and ( y ) the target applicable to the Executive under the PIP for the year in which the Executive’s employment terminates; and

(C) the Accrued Obligations and Additional Benefits.

The Earned Salary shall be paid in cash in a single lump sum as soon as practicable, but in no event more than 30 days (or at such earlier or later date required by law), following the Date of Termination. The Severance Amount shall be paid in a single lump sum as soon as practicable, but no later than 60 days, following the Date of Termination. The Accrued Obligations and Additional Benefits shall be paid in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan, program or arrangement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, but subject to Section 13(b), the Executive may elect in writing to receive the benefits payable under any Severance Policy that would otherwise be available to him or her, or the termination benefits under any Prior Agreement to which he or she is a party, in each case in lieu of receiving the benefits payable hereunder; provided, however, that such benefits shall be paid in a lump sum at the same times as in the preceding sentences of this paragraph.

(ii) Continuation of Benefits . The Executive (and, to

 

8


the extent applicable, the Executive’s dependents) shall be entitled, after the Date of Termination until 2.5 years from the Date of Termination (the “ End Date ”), to continue participation in all of the employee and executive plans providing medical, dental and long-term disability benefits that the Executive participated in prior to the Date of Termination (collectively, the “ Continuing Benefit Plans ”); provided that coverage with regard to medical and dental benefits for the period after the end of the eighteen (18)-month period following the Date of Termination shall be deemed to be monthly, in-kind payments of the premiums and will be taxable income to the Executive; and provided further that the participation by the Executive (and, to the extent applicable, the Executive’s dependents) in any Continuing Benefit Plan shall cease on the date, if any, prior to the End Date on which the Executive becomes eligible for comparable benefits under a similar plan, policy or program of a subsequent employer (“ Prior Date ”). The Executive agrees to notify the Company promptly if and when Executive begins employment with another employer and if and when Executive becomes eligible to participate in any benefit or other welfare plans, programs or arrangements of another employer. The Executive’s participation in the Continuing Benefit Plans will be on the same terms and conditions that would have applied had the Executive continued to be employed by the Company or the Affiliate that employs the Executive through the End Date or the Prior Date. To the extent any such benefits cannot be provided under the terms of the applicable plan, policy or program, the Company shall provide (or shall cause to be provided) comparable benefits under another plan or from its general assets. To the extent any medical or dental plan is a “self-insured medical reimbursement plan” under Code section 105(h) and such coverage would be discriminatory thereunder, the premiums (both during and after the eighteen (18)-month period) shall be taxable income to the Executive and the Company or its Affiliates shall pay the Executive promptly after the provision of such benefits additional cash payments to the extent necessary for the Executive to receive the same net after-tax benefits that the Executive would have received under such plans if the Executive had continued to receive such plan benefits while employed with the Company; provided that any such additional cash payment that would be paid within the Delay Period (as defined in Section 2(d) hereof) shall not be paid during such period, but shall be paid immediately thereafter.

(iii) Deemed Vesting for Certain Benefits . The Executive shall be deemed to have met all service and other requirements for full vesting of benefits under all stock option or other stock or equity compensation plans of the Company in which the Executive participates and the stock options held by the Executive shall remain exercisable for the lesser of 2 years or the duration of their normal terms.

 

9


(iv) Pro-Rata Payment of PIP and Long-Term Incentive Award . The Company shall pay to the Executive a cash amount equal to a pro rata portion of ( i ) the higher of the Executive’s target or actually earned annual incentive award under the PIP for the fiscal year in which the Executive’s Date of Termination occurs and ( ii ) any awards made to the Executive under the Company’s long-term incentive plan (or any successor plan) determined as if the targets applicable to such awards were achieved. The PIP amount and the long-term incentive awards amount shall be paid no later than March 15 of the year following the end of the applicable performance period; provided that any PIP amount and long-term incentive awards amount that are higher than the actual earned amount shall not be paid prior to six (6) months following the Executive’s Date of Termination. The pro-rata portion of each award shall be determined by multiplying the value of the award times a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days during the performance period applicable to each such award prior to the Date of Termination and the denominator of which is the number of days in the performance period applicable to each such award. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any amount payable under this subparagraph in respect of the annual incentive award or in respect of any long-term incentive plan shall be inclusive of the amounts, if any, otherwise payable to the Executive under the PIP and long-term incentive plans for the year in which the Date of Termination occurs.

(v) Savings and Investment Plans . If and to the extent the Executive is a participant in the Savings and Investment Plan or any successor plan thereto (“ SIP ”) and/or the Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan or any successor plan thereto (“ EIP ”), the Company shall pay the Executive, as soon as practicable, but no later than 60 days, after the Executive’s Date of Termination, on a nonqualified basis, a lump sum equal to the amount that the Company would have contributed to the SIP and/or credited to the EIP, over the 2.5 years following the Executive’s Date of Termination assuming that the Executive was contributing to each such plan during such period at the rate in effect immediately prior to the Date of Termination (or, if greater, at the rate in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control).

(vi) Outplacement . The Company shall provide the Executive with reasonable outplacement services at a level commensurate with the Executive’s position for up to twelve (12) consecutive months after the Executive’s Date of Termination.

(c) Discharge of the Company’s and its Affiliates’ Obligations . Except as expressly provided in the last sentence of this Section 6(c), the amounts payable to the Executive pursuant to this Section 6 following termination of the Executive’s employment shall be in full and complete satisfaction of the

 

10


Executive’s rights under this Agreement and any other claims the Executive may have in respect of the Executive’s employment by the Company and its Affiliates. Such amounts shall constitute liquidated damages with respect to any and all such rights and claims and, upon the Executive’s receipt of such amounts, the Company and its Affiliates shall be released and discharged from any and all liability to the Executive in connection with this Agreement or otherwise in connection with the Executive’s employment by the Company and its Affiliates. Notwithstanding the foregoing: (i) the Executive shall retain all rights with respect to the Company’s continuing obligations to indemnify the Executive as a former officer and/or director of the Company or its Affiliates, and to provide directors and officers liability insurance, to the fullest extent permitted under the Company’s certificate of incorporation and by-laws or any other arrangement and (ii) to the extent the Executive is entitled to greater rights with respect to any category of severance payments or benefits in any similar situation under any other arrangement with the Company, the Executive shall be entitled to such greater rights.

(d) Modification of Payments by the Company and its Affiliates .

(i) Application of Section 6(d) . In the event that any amount or benefit paid or distributed to, or on behalf of, the Executive pursuant to this Agreement, taken together with any amounts or benefits otherwise paid or distributed to, or on behalf of, the Executive by the Company, its Affiliates and their successors, including any acquiror of the Company or its Affiliates (or any person or entity required to be aggregated with the Company or its Affiliates for purposes of Code section 280G under any other plan, agreement, or arrangement (collectively, the “ Covered Payments ”), would be an “excess parachute payment” as defined in Code section 280G, and would thereby subject the Executive to the tax (the “ Excise Tax ”) imposed under Code section 4999 (or any similar tax that may hereafter be imposed), the Company shall pay (or cause to be paid) to the Executive at the time specified in Section 6(d)(iv) below an additional amount (the “ Tax Reimbursement Payment ”) such that the net amount retained by the Executive with respect to such Covered Payments, after deduction of any Excise Tax on the Covered Payments and any Federal, state and local (including foreign) income tax, payroll tax and Excise Tax on the Tax Reimbursement Payment provided for by this Section 6(d), but before deduction for any Federal, state or local (including foreign) income or employment tax withholding on such Covered Payments, shall be equal to the amount of the Covered Payments; provided that if the aggregate value of all Covered Payments exceeds the maximum amount which can be paid to the Executive without the Executive incurring an Excise Tax (the “ Cap Amount ”) by less than 10% (ten per cent) of the Cap Amount, the amounts payable to the Executive under this Section 6 shall be reduced (but not below zero) to the maximum amount which may be paid hereunder without the Executive becoming subject to such an Excise Tax as a result of all Covered Payments (such reduced payments to be referred

 

11


to as the “ Payment Cap ”). In the event that Executive receives reduced payments and benefits hereunder, Executive shall have the right to designate which of the payments and benefits otherwise provided for in this Agreement that the Executive will receive in connection with the application of the Payment Cap, but may not change the time of payment thereof.

(ii) Application of Section 280G . For purposes of determining whether any of the Covered Payments will be subject to the Excise Tax and the amount of such Excise Tax,

(A) such Covered Payments will be treated as “parachute payments” within the meaning of Code section 280G, and all “parachute payments” in excess of the “base amount” (as defined under Code section 280G(b)(3)) shall be treated as subject to the Excise Tax, unless, and except to the extent that, in the good faith judgment of the Company’s independent certified public accountants appointed prior to the Effective Date or tax counsel selected by such accountants (the “ Accountants ”), it is more likely than not that such Covered Payments (in whole or in part) either do not constitute “parachute payments” or represent reasonable compensation for personal services actually rendered (within the meaning of Code section 280G(b)(4)(B)) in excess of the portion of the “base amount allocable to such Covered Payments,” or such “parachute payments” are otherwise not subject to such Excise Tax, and

(B) the value of any non-cash benefits or any deferred payment or benefit shall be determined by the Accountants in accordance with the principles of Code section 280G.

(iii) Adjustments in Respect of the Payment Cap . If the Executive receives reduced payments and benefits under this Section 6(d) (or this Section 6(d) is determined not to be applicable to the Executive because the Accountants conclude that Executive is not subject to any Excise Tax) and it is established pursuant to a final determination of a court or an Internal Revenue Service proceeding (a “ Final Determination ”) that, notwithstanding the good faith of the Executive and the Company in applying the terms of this Agreement, the aggregate “parachute payments” within the meaning of Code section 280G paid to the Executive or for the Executive’s benefit are in an amount that would result in the Executive being subject to an Excise Tax, then the Accountants shall determine whether the Executive should have received the Tax Reimbursement Payment described in Section 6(d)(i), or whether the amounts payable to the Executive hereunder would still have been reduced pursuant to Section 6(d)(i). If the Tax Reimbursement Payment

 

12


would have been due, the Accountants shall determine the amount of any interest and penalties that may be imposed on the Executive by reason of having failed to have timely paid any Excise Tax (the “ Penalty Amount ”), and the amount of the Tax Reimbursement Payment due, treating the Penalty Amount as a Covered Payment. In the event a Tax Reimbursement Payment is due, the Company shall promptly (but in no event later than 10 business days after the Accountants have determined and informed the Company) pay the Executive such Tax Reimbursement Payment (as calculated in accordance with the immediately preceding sentence) and the Penalty Amount. If the Executive would still be subject to a reduction in the Covered Payments due hereunder, the Accountants shall determine the amount by which the Covered Payments exceeded the Cap Amount and the Executive shall have an obligation (to the extent permitted under applicable law) to repay such excess to the Company on demand, together with interest on such amount at the applicable Federal rate (as defined in Code section 1274(d)) from the date of the payment hereunder to the date of repayment by the Executive. It is expressly understood that such excess is not in the nature of a personal loan to the Executive, but rather a payment made to the Executive as a “mistake in fact.” If the Executive receives reduced payments and benefits by reason of this Section 6(d) and it is established pursuant to a Final Determination that the Executive could have received a greater amount without exceeding the Cap Amount, then the Company shall promptly thereafter pay the Executive the aggregate additional amount which could have been paid without exceeding the Cap Amount, together with interest on such amount at the applicable Federal rate (as defined in Code section 1274(d)) from the original payment due date to the date of actual payment by the Company. For greater clarity, if the Executive receives a Tax Reimbursement Payment under Section 6(d)(i), then this Section 6(d)(iii) shall not apply.

(iv) Timing .

(A) The Tax Reimbursement Payment (or portion thereof) provided for in Section 6(d)(i) above shall be paid to the Executive not later than ten (10) business days following the payment of the Covered Payments; provided that if the amount of such Tax Reimbursement Payment (or portion thereof) cannot be finally determined on or before the date on which payment is due, the Company shall pay to the Executive by such date an amount estimated in good faith by the Accountants to be the minimum amount of such Tax Reimbursement Payment and shall pay the remainder of such Tax Reimbursement Payment (together with interest at the rate provided in Code section 1274(b)(2)(B)) as soon as the amount thereof can be determined, but in no event later than 45 calendar days after payment of the related Covered Payment. In

 

13


the event that the amount of the estimated Tax Reimbursement Payment exceeds the amount subsequently determined to have been due, the Executive shall repay such excess to the Company (to the extent permitted under applicable law), payable as of the fifth business day after written demand by the Company for payment (together with interest at the rate provided in Code section 1274(b)(2)(B)). It is expressly understood that such excess is not in the nature of a personal loan to the Executive.

(B) Without extending any time period set forth under this Section 6(d), (1) the Tax Reimbursement Payment due hereunder shall in no event be made later than the end of the calendar year next following the calendar year in which the Executive pays the related tax, and (2) the reimbursement of expenses incurred due to a tax audit or litigation addressing the existence or amount of a tax liability shall in no event be made later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the taxes that are the subject of the audit or litigation are remitted to the taxing authority (or if no taxes are remitted as a result of such audit or litigation, the end of the calendar year next following the calendar year in which the audit is completed or there is a final and nonappealable settlement or other resolution of the litigation).

(v) Survival . The provisions of this Section 6(d) of the Agreement shall survive the termination of the Executive’s employment hereunder and the termination of this Agreement with regard to any event that occurred prior thereto.

7. Non-Solicitation Restrictions . During the Employment Period, and for a period of 2.5 years after the Employment Period, the Executive agrees not to induce, encourage, or solicit, either directly or indirectly, any customer, client, employee, officer, director, agent, broker, registered representative or independent contractor to either: (i) terminate their respective relationship or contracts with the Company or its Affiliates; or (ii) not place business with the Company or its Affiliates. The Executive agrees the restrictions in this paragraph apply whether the Executive voluntarily terminates his or her employment or is involuntarily terminated with or without Cause or for Good Reason during the Employment Period.

8. Non-Exclusivity of Rights . Except as expressly provided herein, nothing in this Agreement shall prevent or limit the Executive’s continuing or future participation in any benefit, bonus, incentive or other plan or program provided by the Company or any of its Affiliates and for which the Executive may qualify, nor shall anything herein limit or otherwise prejudice such rights as the Executive may have under any other agreements with the Company or any of its Affiliates, including employment agreements, stock option agreements, and other stock or equity compensation agreements. Amounts

 

14


which are vested benefits or which the Executive is otherwise entitled to receive under any plan or program of the Company or any Affiliate at or subsequent to the Date of Termination shall be payable in accordance with such plan or program.

9. No Offset . Except as expressly provided in this Agreement, the obligation of the Company to make the payments provided for in this Agreement or any of its Affiliates to make the payments provided for in this Agreement and otherwise to perform the obligations hereunder shall not be diminished or otherwise affected by any circumstances, including, but not limited to, any set-off, counterclaim, recoupment, defense or other right which the Company or any of its Affiliates may have against the Executive or others, whether by reason of the subsequent employment of the Executive or otherwise.

10. Legal Fees and Expenses . If the Executive asserts any claim in any contest (whether initiated by the Executive or by the Company or any of its Affiliates) as to the validity, enforceability or interpretation of any provision of this Agreement or to enforce and/or collect any payment or benefit payable hereunder, the Company shall pay the Executive’s legal expenses (or cause such expenses to be paid) including, but not limited to, the Executive’s reasonable attorneys fees, on a quarterly basis, promptly upon presentation of proof of such expenses in a form acceptable to the Company, which submission shall be made within forty-five (45) days after the end of such quarter; provided that the Executive shall reimburse the Company for such amounts (to the extent permitted under applicable law), plus simple interest thereon at the 90-day United States Treasury Bill rate as in effect from time to time, compounded annually, if the arbitrator determines that the Executive’s claims were substantially frivolous or brought in bad faith.

11. Surviving Agreements . This Agreement provides for certain payments and benefits to the Executive to be determined by the employee benefit plans and programs, incentive plans, stock option, and other stock or equity compensation plans of the Company and its Affiliates. To the extent so provided, such programs and plans constitute part of the agreement and understanding between the Executive and the Company and are incorporated herein and made a part hereof. The Executive and the Company hereby reaffirm their respective commitments under such programs and plans, and again agree to be bound by each of the covenants contained therein for the benefit of the Company in consideration of the benefits made available to the Executive hereby.

12. Successors .

(a) This Agreement is personal to the Executive and, without the prior written consent of the Company, shall not be assignable by the Executive otherwise than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Executive’s legal representatives and his or her estate.

(b) This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon

 

15


the Company and shall be assignable, in writing, by the Company only to the acquiror of all or substantially all, of the assets of the Company. The Company shall require any successor to all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Company, whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation, acquisition of stock, or otherwise, expressly to assume and agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent as the Company would be required to perform if no such succession had taken place.

13. Section 409A .

(a) The intent is that payments and benefits under this Agreement comply with Code section 409A and accordingly this Agreement shall be interpreted to be in compliance therewith. The Company may from time to time amend this Agreement, without obtaining the consent of the Executive, as the Company deems necessary or desirable to comply with the requirements of Code section 409A and the regulations and guidance provided thereunder, regardless of whether any such amendment would cause a reduction or cessation of a benefit accrued prior to the adoption of such amendment. To the extent that this Agreement is modified to comply with Code section 409A, such modification shall, to the extent reasonably possible, maintain the original intent of the applicable provision of this Agreement without violating the provisions of Code section 409A.

(b) It is intended that the payments under this Agreement, to the extent applicable, comply with the short-term deferral rule under Code section 409A.

14. Miscellaneous .

(a) Applicable Law . This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Connecticut, applied without reference to principles of conflict of laws.

(b) Arbitration . Any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement shall be resolved by binding arbitration. The arbitration shall be held in Hartford, Connecticut and except to the extent inconsistent with this Agreement, shall be conducted in accordance with the Expedited Employment Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then in effect at the time of the arbitration (or such other rules as the parties may agree to in writing), and otherwise in accordance with principles which would be applied by a court of law or equity. The arbitrator shall be acceptable to both the Company and the Executive. If the parties cannot agree on an acceptable arbitrator, the dispute shall be heard by a panel of three arbitrators, one appointed by each of the parties within 30 days of notice of such non-agreement and the third appointed by the other two arbitrators. The cost and expenses of the arbitration shall be paid by the Company.

(c) Amendments . Except as provided in Section 13(a), this

 

16


Agreement may not be amended or modified otherwise than by a written agreement executed by the parties hereto or their respective successors and legal representatives.

(d) Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the matters referred to herein, and completely supersedes and replaces any prior agreement between the Executive and the Company or any of its Affiliates concerning the subject matter herein. No subsequent agreement concerning the subject matter herein, oral or otherwise, shall be binding between the parties unless it is in writing and signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. Except as expressly provided herein, nothing in this Agreement shall be construed or interpreted to enhance, increase, reduce or diminish any rights, duties or obligations of the Executive under any agreement between the Executive and the Company or any of its Affiliates, or under any employee benefit plan program (as further set forth in Section 11) or procedure established by the Company or any of its Affiliates with respect to any subject matter herein. There are no promises, representations, inducements or statements between the parties other than those that are expressly contained herein. The Executive acknowledges that the Executive is entering into this Agreement of the Executive’s own free will and accord, and with no duress, that the Executive has read this Agreement and that the Executive understands it and its legal consequences.

(e) Notices . All notices and other communications hereunder shall be in writing and shall be given by hand-delivery to the other party, overnight mail, or by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, addressed as follows:

 

If to the Executive:    Home address of the Executive noted on the records of the Company
If to the Company:    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
   100 Pearl Street, 9 th Floor
   Hartford, CT 06103
   Attn.: Kevin Carr

or to such other address as either party shall have furnished to the other in writing in accordance herewith. Notice and communications shall be effective when actually received by the addressee.

(f) Tax Withholding . The Company shall withhold (or cause such withholding) from any amounts payable under this Agreement such Federal, state or local taxes as shall be required to be withheld pursuant to any applicable law or regulation.

(g) Severability; Reformation . In the event that one or more of the

 

17


provisions of this Agreement shall become invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein shall not be affected thereby.

(h) Waiver . Waiver by any party hereto of any breach or default by the other party of any of the terms of this Agreement shall not operate as a waiver of any other breach or default, whether similar to or different from the breach or default waived. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be implied from any course of dealing between the parties hereto or from any failure by either party hereto to assert its or the Executive’s rights hereunder on any occasion or series of occasions.

(i) Confidentiality . In further consideration for entering into this Agreement, the Executive, after termination of the Executive’s employment, shall retain in confidence any confidential or proprietary information known to the Executive concerning the Company and its Affiliates and their business so long as such information is not publicly disclosed and shall not use such information in any way injurious to the Company or its Affiliates except for any disclosure to which an authorized officer of the Company or such Affiliate has consented or any disclosure or use required by any order of any governmental body or court (including legal process). If requested, the Executive shall return to the Company and its Affiliates any memoranda, documents or other materials possessed by the Executive and containing confidential or proprietary information of the Company and its Affiliates. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the Executive shall not be required to return to the Company or its Affiliates, any memoranda, documents or other materials containing confidential or proprietary information of the Company or its Affiliates, if such materials were provided to the Executive in his or her capacity as a director of the Company or its Affiliates.

(j) Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

(k) Captions . The captions of this Agreement are not part of the provisions hereof and shall have no force or effect.

 

18


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Executive has hereunto set the Executive’s hand and the Company has caused this Agreement to be executed in its name on its behalf, and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed and attested by its Secretary, all as of the day and year first above written.

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:  

/s/ Kevin J. Carr

Name:   Kevin J. Carr
Title:   Vice President, Counsel and Secretary

 

EXECUTIVE:

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

George R. Aylward, Jr.

 

19

Exhibit 10.5

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

OMNIBUS INCENTIVE AND EQUITY PLAN

Effective as of December 31, 2008


VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

OMNIBUS INCENTIVE AND EQUITY PLAN

SECTION 1

PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to foster and promote the long-term financial success of the Company and to materially increase shareholder value by (a) providing flexibility to the Company to implement annual and long term incentives that are consistent with the Company’s goals, (b) encouraging and providing for the acquisition of an ownership interest in the Company by Employees, and (c) enabling the Company to attract and retain the services of high quality Employees, Directors and Consultants upon whose judgment, interest and special effort the successful conduct of its operations is largely dependent.

All outstanding awards under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. 2003 Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit and Long-Term Incentive Plan and The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan attributable to the Employees, as such awards have been or may be modified or equitably adjusted in connection with the spin-off, immediately prior to the effective date of the spin-off are hereby incorporated into this Plan and shall accordingly be treated as Awards under this Plan. However, each such award shall continue to be governed solely by the terms and conditions of the instrument(s) evidencing such grant or issuance, and, except as otherwise expressly provided herein or by the Committee, no provision of this Plan shall affect or otherwise modify the rights or obligations of holders of such incorporated awards. For these awards, the name of the company will be changed to the Company and the shares or equivalents will be converted to or settled in Company shares or equivalents, or cash, as determined by the Committee.

SECTION 2

DEFINITIONS

2.1 Definitions . Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

(a) “Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

 

- 2 -


(b) “Adjustment Event” means any stock dividend, stock split or share combination of, or extraordinary cash dividend on, the Common Stock or recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, exchange of shares, warrants or rights offering to purchase Common Stock at a price substantially below Fair Market Value, or other similar event affecting the Common Stock.

(c) “Annual Incentive Award” means an Award made pursuant to Section 9 with a Performance Cycle of one year or less.

(d) “Award” means any award made pursuant to the Plan, including but not limited to the award of an Annual Incentive Award, a Long-Term Incentive Award, an Option, a Stock Appreciation Right, a Restricted Stock Unit, Restricted Stock, or other award under the Plan

(e) “Award Agreement” means the electronic or written document by which each Award is evidenced, and which may, but need not be (as determined by the Committee), executed or acknowledged by a Participant as a condition to receiving an Award or the benefits under an Award, and which sets forth the terms and provisions applicable to Awards granted under the Plan to such Participant. Award Agreements shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan, whether or not explicitly provided in the particular Award Agreement.

(f) “Beneficial Owner” means any “person”, as such term is used in Section 13(d) of the Act, who, directly or indirectly, has or shares the right to vote or dispose of such securities or otherwise has “beneficial ownership” of such securities (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 and Rule 13d-5 under the Act), including pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (whether or not in writing).

(g) “Board” or “Board of Directors” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

(h) “Cause” means:

(i) the willful failure by the Participant to perform substantially his duties as an Employee (other than due to physical or mental illness) after reasonable notice to the Participant of such failure;

 

- 3 -


(ii) the Participant’s engaging in serious misconduct that is injurious to the Company or any Subsidiary in any way, including, but not limited to, by the way of damage to their respective reputations or standings in their respective industries;

(iii) the Participant’s having been convicted of, or having entered a plea of nolo contendere to, a crime that constitutes a felony; or

(iv) the breach by the Participant of any written covenant or agreement with the Company or any Subsidiary not to disclose or misuse any information pertaining to, or misuse any property of, the Company or any Subsidiary or not to compete or interfere with the Company or any Subsidiary.

(i) “Change in Control” means the first occurrence of:

(i) any person (other than the Company or employee benefit plan sponsored by the Company) acquires “beneficial ownership” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s securities;

(ii) within any 24-month period, the persons who were directors of the Company at the beginning of such period (the “Incumbent Directors”) shall cease to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors (the “Board”) or the board of directors of any successor to the Company; provided that any director elected or nominated for election to the Board by a majority of the Incumbent Directors then still in office shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director for purposes of this sub-clause 2.1(i)(ii);

(iii) the effective date of any merger, consolidation, share exchange, division, sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company which is consummated (a “Corporate Event”), if immediately following the consummation of such Corporate Event those Persons who were

 

- 4 -


stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event do not hold, directly or indirectly, a majority of the voting power, in substantially the same proportion as prior to such Corporate Event, of (x) in the case of a merger or consolidation, the surviving or resulting corporation or (y) in the case of a division or a sale or other disposition of assets, each surviving, resulting or acquiring corporation which, immediately following the relevant Corporate Event, holds more than 25% of the consolidated assets of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event;

(iv) the approval by stockholders of the Company of a plan of liquidation with respect to the Company; or

(v) the occurrence of any other event occurs which the Board declares to be a Change in Control.

(j) “Change in Control Settlement Value” shall mean, with respect to a share of Common Stock, the excess of the Change in Control Stock Value over the option price of the Option or the base price of the Stock Appreciation Right covering such share of Common Stock, provided that , (i) with respect to any Option which is an Incentive Stock Option, the Change in Control Settlement Value shall not exceed the maximum amount permitted for such Option to continue to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option and (ii) in respect of that portion, if any, of any Option or Stock Appreciation Right that had not become exercisable on or before December 31, 2004, the Change in Control Settlement Value shall not exceed the maximum amount permitted for such Option or Stock Appreciation Right to remain exempt from Section 409A.

(k) “Change in Control Stock Value” shall mean the value of a share of Common Stock determined as follows:

(i) if the Change in Control results from an event described in clause (iii) of the Change in Control definition, the highest per share price paid for shares of Common Stock of the Company in the transaction resulting in the Change in Control; or

(ii) if the Change in Control results from an event described in clause (i), (ii) (iv) or (v) of the Change in Control definition and no event

 

- 5 -


described in clause (iii) of the Change in Control definition has occurred in connection with such Change in Control, the highest sale price of a share of Common Stock of the Company on any trading day during the 60 consecutive trading days immediately preceding and following the date of such Change in Control as reported on the New York Stock Exchange Composite Tape, or other national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system, on which the Common Stock is then principally traded or listed.

(l) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

(m) “Committee” means the Compensation Committee of the Board (or such other committee of the Board that the Board shall designate), which shall consist of two or more members, each of whom, serving at the pleasure of the Board, shall be a “non-employee director” within the meaning of Rule 16b-3 (or any successor rule thereto), as promulgated under the Act, and an “outside director” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code and the Treasury regulations, rules and guidance promulgated thereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to Awards granted to non-employee Directors, the Committee shall mean the entire Board.

(n) “Common Stock” means the common stock of the Company.

(o) “Company” means Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and any successor thereto.

(p) “Consultant” means a person engaged to provide consulting or advisory services (other than as an Employee or a Director) to the Company or its Subsidiaries.

(q) “Director” means any individual who is a member of the Board of Directors.

(r) “Disability” has the meaning given in the Company’s long-term disability insurance policy or program as in effect from time to time; provided that a Participant shall not be treated as having incurred a Disability unless he or she qualifies for disability benefits under such policy or program.

 

- 6 -


(s) “Dividend Equivalents” means an amount equal to the cash dividends paid by the Company upon one share of Common Stock for each share of Common Stock represented by an Award to a Participant in accordance with the Plan, credited at the discretion of the Committee or as otherwise provided for by the Plan or in an Award Agreement.

(t) “Employee” means an individual who is paid on the payroll of the Company or one of its Subsidiaries (as determined by the Committee in its sole discretion); provided, however, that with respect to Incentive Stock Options, “Employee” means any person who is considered an employee of the Company or any Subsidiary for purposes of Treasury Regulation Section 1.421-1(h).

(u) “Executive Officer” means each person who is an officer of the Company or any Subsidiary and who is subject to the reporting requirements under Section 16(a) of the Act.

(v) “Fair Market Value” means, on any date: (i) the closing price reported for such day on the principal national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system on which the Common Stock is then listed for trading or in the event that there are no Common Stock transactions reported on such exchange or system on such date, Fair Market Value shall mean the closing price on the immediately preceding date on which Common Stock transactions were so reported; (ii) if the Common Stock is then principally listed in an over-the-counter market, the last sales price (or, if there is no last sales price reported, the average of the closing bid and asked prices) for the Common Stock on such date, or on the immediately preceding date on which Common Stock transactions were so reported; or (iii) if the Common Stock is not listed on such an exchange, system or market, the price as determined in good faith by the Committee.

(w) “Family Member” means as to a Participant, any (i) child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law or daughter-in-law (including adoptive relationships), of such Participant, (ii) trusts for the exclusive benefit of one or more such persons and/or the Participant and (iii) other entity owned solely by one or more such persons and/or the Participant.

(x) “Long-Term Incentive Award” means an Award made pursuant to Section 9 with a Performance Cycle of more than one year.

 

- 7 -


(y) “Net-Exercise” means a procedure based on such terms and conditions as the Committee shall establish by which the Participant will be issued a number of whole shares of Common Stock upon the exercise of an Option determined in accordance with the following formula:

N = X(A-B)/A, where

“N” = the number of shares of Common Stock to be issued to the Participant upon exercise of the Option;

“X” = the total number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which the Participant has elected to exercise the Option;

“A” = the Fair Market Value of one (1) share of Common Stock determined on the exercise date; and

“B” = the exercise price per share of Common Stock (as defined in the Participant’s Award Agreement)

(z) “Option” means the right to purchase shares of Common Stock at a stated price for a specified period of time. For purposes of the Plan, an Option may be either ( i ) an “Incentive Stock Option” with the meaning of Section 422 of the Code or ( ii ) an Option which is not an Incentive Stock Option (a “Non-Qualified Stock Option”).

(aa) “Participant” means any Employee, any non-employee Director of the Company, or Consultant designated by the Committee to receive an Award under the Plan, provided that non-employee Directors and Consultants shall not be eligible for Incentive Stock Options.

(bb) “Performance Cycle” means the period selected by the Committee during which the performance of the Company or any Subsidiary or unit thereof or any individual is measured for the purpose of determining the extent to which an Award subject to Performance Goals has been earned.

(cc) “Performance Goals” means the objectives for the Company, any Subsidiary or business unit thereof or individual that may be established by the Committee for a Performance Cycle with respect to any performance based Awards contingently awarded under the Plan. The Performance Goals for Awards that are intended to constitute “performance-based” compensation within the meaning of Section

 

- 8 -


162(m) of the Code shall be based on one or more of the following performance measures as specified by the Committee: (1) gross or net cash flow, free cash flow, cash flow return on investment (discounted or otherwise), cash operating income, net cash provided by operations, or cash flow in excess of cost of capital; (2) sales; (3) revenues; (4) earnings per share, stock price or stockholder return (on a gross or net basis), or any rating by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization; (5) net income; (6) return on assets (gross or net), return on investment, return on capital or return on equity (or any combination); (7) economic value created; (8) operating income, earnings before or after taxes, interest, depreciation, amortization or extraordinary or special items (or any combination), which may be determined on a per share basis (basic or diluted); (9) debt to capital ratio, or risk based capital ratio; (10) operating margin, gross margin or other financial margin; (11) assets under management, gross or net flows of assets under management, market capitalization, or net assets; (12) segment income; or (13) dividend payout. Performance Goals may reflect absolute entity performance or a relative comparison of entity performance to the performance of a peer group or other external measure. The targeted level or levels of performance with respect to Performance Goals may be established at such levels and in such terms as the Committee may determine, in its discretion, including absolute entity performance, as a goal relative to performance in prior periods, or a relative comparison of entity performance to the performance of one or more third parties or other companies, a peer group or special index or other group selected for comparison, or other external measure. The Committee may specify that any Performance Goals will be calculated before or after specific or identified items such as extraordinary or nonrecurring, special income, expense or other items, before or after changes in accounting principles or standards, before or after capital charges, before or after revenues, operations, earnings or losses of discontinued operations or acquisitions, or before or after Awards under this Plan or other incentive compensation.

(dd) “Plan” means the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan, as set forth herein and as the same may be amended from time to time.

(ee) “Restricted Period” means the period during which Restricted Stock Units or shares of Restricted Stock are subject to forfeiture or restrictions on transfer (if applicable) pursuant to Section 8 of the Plan.

 

- 9 -


(ff) “Restricted Stock” means Common Stock awarded to a Participant pursuant to the Plan which is subject to a Restricted Period in accordance with Section 8 of the Plan.

(gg) “Restricted Stock Unit” means a Participant’s right to receive pursuant to the Plan one share of Common Stock at the end of a Restricted Period in accordance with Section 8 of the Plan.

(hh) “Retirement” means termination of a Participant’s employment or service on or after the Participant attains age 55 with 10 years of credited service with the Company and its Subsidiaries. For this purpose, “credited service” means service as an employee or service as a director.

(ii) “Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

(jj) “Stock Appreciation Right” means the right to receive a payment from the Company, in cash or Common Stock, in an amount determined under Section 7 of the Plan.

(kk) “Subsidiary” means any corporation, partnership or limited liability company in which the Company owns, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of such corporation or of the capital interest or profits interest of such partnership or limited liability company.

2.2 Construction . Captions and titles contained herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of any provision of the Plan. Except when otherwise indicated by the context, words in the masculine gender used in the Plan shall include the feminine gender, the singular shall include the plural, and the plural shall include the singular.

SECTION 3

ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

Participants in the Plan shall be those Employees, non-employee Directors, and Consultants selected by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

 

- 10 -


SECTION 4

ADMINISTRATION

4.1 Power to Grant and Establish Terms of Awards . The Committee shall have the authority, subject to the terms of the Plan, to determine the Participants to whom Awards shall be granted, the Fair Market Value of shares of Common Stock or other property, and the terms, conditions and restrictions of any and all Awards, including but not limited to the number of shares of Common Stock to be covered by each Award, the time or times at which Awards shall be granted, and the terms and provisions of the instruments by which Awards shall be evidenced; to designate Options as Incentive Stock Options or Non-Qualified Stock Options; to determine the period of time during which restrictions on Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units shall remain in effect; to establish and administer any Performance Goals applicable to Awards granted hereunder, as well as to determine the terms and conditions of any Annual Incentive and Long-Term Incentive Awards; to determine the method(s) for satisfaction of any tax withholding obligation arising in connection with Awards, including by the withholding or delivery of shares of Common Stock; to determine whether an Award will be settled in shares of Common Stock, cash, or in any combination thereof; and to determine all other matters relating to Awards and the Plan. The terms and conditions of each Award shall be determined by the Committee at the time of grant, and, except as provided in the Plan or any Award Agreement, such terms and conditions shall not be subsequently changed in a manner which would be adverse to the Participant without the consent of the Participant to whom such Award has been granted. The Committee may establish different terms and conditions for different Participants receiving Awards and for the same Participant for each Award such Participant may receive, whether or not granted at different times. The grant of any Award to any Participant shall neither entitle such Participant to, nor disqualify him from, the grant of any other Awards.

4.2 Administration . The Committee shall be responsible for the administration of the Plan. Any Award granted by the Committee may be subject to such conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Committee shall determine. The Committee, by majority action thereof, is authorized to prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award; to provide for conditions deemed necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company; to interpret the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award; and to make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the

 

- 11 -


Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award, to carry out its provisions and purposes. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Committee pursuant to the provisions of the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award, shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons. The Committee is authorized to correct any defect, supply any omission or reconcile any inconsistency in the Plan or any Award Agreement and to make all other determinations and take such other actions with respect to the Plan or any Award as the Committee may deem advisable to the extent not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan or applicable law. The Committee and each member thereof, and any person acting pursuant to authority delegated by the Committee, shall be entitled, in good faith, to rely or act upon any report or other information furnished by any Executive Officer, other officer or Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary or affiliate, the Company’s auditors, consultants, legal counsel, or any other agents assisting in the administration of the Plan. Members of the Committee, any person acting pursuant to authority delegated by the Committee, and any officer or Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary or affiliate acting at the direction or on behalf of the Committee or a delegatee, shall not be personally liable for any action or determination taken or made or omitted in good faith with respect to the Plan.

4.3 Delegation . Actions of the Committee may be taken by the vote of a majority of its members. To the extent not inconsistent with applicable law and the applicable rules and regulations of the New York Stock Exchange and any other national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system on which shares of Common Stock are then principally listed or traded, (a) the Committee may delegate any of its powers under the Plan to a subcommittee of the Committee or to one of its members, (b) the Committee may allocate among its members any of its administrative responsibilities and (c) notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Committee may delegate the determination of Awards to Employees who are not Executive Officers to one or more officers of the Company designated by the Committee from time to time.

4.4 Restrictive Covenants and Other Conditions . The Committee may condition the grant of any Award under the Plan upon the Participant to whom such Award would be granted agreeing in writing to certain conditions in addition to the provisions regarding exercisability of, the vesting or payment of any Award (such as restrictions on the ability to

 

- 12 -


transfer the underlying shares of Common Stock) or covenants in favor of the Company and/or its Subsidiaries (including, without limitation, covenants not to compete, not to solicit employees and customers that may have effect following the termination of the Participant’s employment and, whether before or after the Award has been exercised or has vested, as applicable, including, without limitation, the requirement that the Participant disgorge any profit, gain or other benefit received in respect of the Award prior to any breach of any such covenant by the Participant).

4.5 409A Compliance . The Plan is intended to be administered in a manner consistent with the requirements, where applicable, of Section 409A of the Code. Where reasonably possible and practicable, the Plan shall be administered in a manner to avoid the imposition on Participants of immediate tax recognition and additional taxes pursuant to such Section 409A. To that end, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, unless otherwise expressly provided herein or in any Award Agreement, any amount payable or shares distributable hereunder in connection with any Award (including upon the satisfaction of any applicable performance criteria) shall be paid not later than two and one-half months (or such other time as is required to cause such amounts not to be treated as deferred compensation under Section 409A of the Code) following the end of the taxable year of the Company or the Participant in which the Participant’s rights with respect to the corresponding Award (or portion thereof) ceased to be subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither the Company nor the Committee shall have any liability to any person in the event such Section 409A applies to any such Award in a manner that results in adverse tax consequences for the Participant or any of his beneficiaries or transferees.

SECTION 5

STOCK SUBJECT TO PLAN

5.1 Plan Award Limitation . Subject to the provisions of Section 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4, the number of shares of Common Stock available for delivery in connection with Awards under the Plan shall be 1.8 million shares.

The total number of shares with respect to which Incentive Stock Options may be granted shall not exceed 1.8 million shares.

The type and form of Awards under this Plan shall be in the discretion of the Committee.

 

- 13 -


The shares to be delivered under the Plan may consist, in whole or in part, of Common Stock held in treasury or authorized but unissued Common Stock, not reserved for any other purpose, or any combination thereof.

5.2 Share Counting Rules . Each share of Common Stock underlying an Award shall count as one share of Common Stock for purposes of determining the number of shares of Common Stock granted pursuant to the limits set forth in Sections 5.1 and 5.5 of the Plan. If the exercise price of an Option is paid by tender to the Company, or attestation to the ownership, of shares of Common Stock owned by the Participant, or by means of a Net-Exercise, the number of shares available for issuance under the Plan shall be reduced by the gross number of shares for which the Option is exercised. Shares withheld or reacquired by the Company in satisfaction of tax withholding obligations pursuant to Section 13.6 shall not again be available for issuance under the Plan. With respect to Stock Appreciation Rights, the number of shares remaining for issuance under the Plan shall be determined as though the full number of shares corresponding to the portion of a Stock Appreciation Right exercised had been issued. Shares of Common Stock issued in connection with awards that are assumed, converted or substituted as a result of the Company’s acquisition of another company (including by way of merger, combination or similar transaction) will not count against the number of shares that may be issued under the Plan, but shall be available under the Plan by virtue of the Company’s assumption of the plan(s), arrangement(s) or agreement(s) of the acquired company or business.

5.3 Cancelled, Terminated, or Forfeited Awards . Any shares of Common Stock subject to an Award issued under this Plan, including those Phoenix awards assumed by the Plan as explained in Section 1, which for any reason expires, or is canceled, terminated or otherwise settled without the issuance of any consideration, whether in cash, Common Stock or other property (including, without limitation, any shares issued in connection with a Restricted Stock Award that are subsequently forfeited) shall again be available under the Plan.

5.4 Adjustment Due to Change in Capitalization . In the event of any Adjustment Event, (i) the aggregate number of shares of Common Stock available for Awards under Section 5.1(including the sub-limits identified in Section 5.1), (ii) the individual limitations on the number of shares that may be awarded to any particular Participant in any particular period under Section 5.5 and (iii) the aggregate number of shares subject to outstanding Awards and the respective prices and/or vesting and other applicable criteria applicable to outstanding Awards shall be proportionately adjusted to reflect, as deemed equitable and

 

- 14 -


appropriate by the Committee, such Adjustment Event. To the extent deemed equitable and appropriate by the Committee, subject to any required action by stockholders, in any merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution, or other similar transaction, any Award granted under the Plan shall pertain to the securities and other property, including cash, to which a holder of the number of shares of Common Stock covered by the Award would have been entitled to receive in connection with such event.

Any shares of stock (whether Common Stock, shares of stock into which shares of Common Stock are converted or for which shares of Common Stock are exchanged or shares of stock distributed with respect to Common Stock) or cash or other property received with respect to any Award granted under the Plan as a result of any Adjustment Event-or any distribution of property shall, except as provided in Section 11 or as otherwise provided by the Committee at or after the date an Award is made by the Committee, be subject to the same terms and conditions, including restrictions on transfer, as are applicable to such shares of the original underlying Award and any stock certificate(s) representing or evidencing any shares of stock so received shall be legended in such manner as the Company deems appropriate.

5.5 Individual Award Limitations . Subject to Section 5.4:

(a) the total number of shares of Common Stock subject to Options and Stock Appreciation Rights that may be awarded to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed 250,000 shares, plus any unused shares pursuant to this subsection (a) as of the close of the prior calendar year under this Plan;

(b) the total number of shares of Common Stock subject to any Restricted Stock subject to Performance Goals or Restricted Stock Units subject to Performance Goals that may be awarded to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed 250,000 shares or units, as the case may be, plus any unused shares or units pursuant to this subsection (b) as of the close of the prior calendar year under this Plan;

(c) the total amount of any Annual Incentive Award paid to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed $5 million, plus any unused amounts pursuant to this subsection (c) as of the close of the prior calendar year under this Plan; and

(d) the total amount of any Long-Term Incentive Award paid to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed $7 million, plus any unused amounts pursuant to this subsection (d) as of the close of the prior calendar year under this Plan.

 

- 15 -


SECTION 6

STOCK OPTIONS

6.1 Grant of Options . Options may be granted to Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Committee; provided that, in no event shall the Committee be permitted to grant Options conditioned on the surrender or cancellation of previously granted Options. Options granted to non-employee Directors shall be in such amounts and intervals as determined by the Board from time to time. Options granted under the Plan may be of two types: ( i ) Incentive Stock Options and ( ii ) Non-Qualified Stock Options. The date of grant of an Option under the Plan will be the date on which the Option is awarded by the Committee or, if so determined by the Committee, the date on which occurs any event the occurrence of which is an express condition precedent to the grant of the Option. Subject to Section 5.5, the Committee shall determine the number of Options, if any, to be granted to the Participant. Each Option Award shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement that shall specify the type of Option granted, the exercise price, the duration of the Option, the number of shares of Common Stock to which the Option pertains, and such other terms and conditions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Committee shall determine.

6.2 Option Price . Non-Qualified Stock Options and Incentive Stock Options granted pursuant to the Plan shall have an exercise price that is not less than the Fair Market Value on the date the Option is granted. Except in the event of an Adjustment Event, the Committee shall not have the power or authority to reduce the exercise price of any outstanding Option, whether through amendment, through the cancellation of existing grants and the issuance of new grants with lower exercise prices or by any other means. The Committee shall not have the right to re-price outstanding Options or to grant new Options under the Plan in substitution for or upon the cancellation of Options previously granted. Except in connection with a corporate transaction involving the Company (including, without limitation, any stock dividend, stock split, extraordinary cash dividend, recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, or exchange of shares), the terms of outstanding Awards may not be amended to reduce the exercise price of outstanding Options or SARs or cancel outstanding Options or SARS in exchange for cash, other awards or Options or SARs with an exercise price that is less than the exercise price of the original Options or SARs without stockholder approval.

 

- 16 -


6.3 Exercise of Options . Options awarded to a Participant under the Plan shall be exercisable at such times and shall be subject to such restrictions and conditions including the performance of a minimum period of service or the satisfaction of Performance Goals, as the Committee may impose either at or after the time of grant of such Options, subject to the Committee’s right to accelerate the exercisability of such Option in its discretion. Notwithstanding the foregoing, unless otherwise determined by the Committee at grant, Options shall become exercisable in three substantially equal installments on each of the first three anniversaries of the date of grant. Except as may be provided in any provision approved by the Committee pursuant to this Section 6.3, after becoming exercisable each installment shall remain exercisable until expiration, termination or cancellation of the Option. An Option may be exercised from time to time, in whole or in part, up to the total number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which it is then exercisable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Option shall be exercisable for more than 10 years after the date on which it is granted.

6.4 Payment and Settlement . The Committee shall establish procedures governing the exercise of Options. No shares shall be delivered pursuant to any exercise of an Option unless arrangements satisfactory to the Committee have been made to assure full payment of the exercise price. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Committee may direct that payment of the exercise price may be made ( i ) in cash or cash equivalents, ( ii ) by exchanging shares of Common Stock (either by delivery or attestation) which have been owned by the Participant at the time of exercise (or owned for a stated period of time prior to the time of exercise as the Committee may determine), (iii) by issuing a lesser number of shares of Common Stock pursuant to a Net Exercise transaction having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the amount, if any, by which the aggregate Fair Market Value of the shares of Common Stock as to which the Option is being exercised exceeds the aggregate exercise price for such shares, based on such terms and conditions as the Committee shall establish, (iv) by any combination of the foregoing; provided that the combined value of all cash and cash equivalents paid and the Fair Market Value of any such Common Stock so tendered to the Company, valued as of the date of such tender, is at least equal to the exercise price, ( v ) through an arrangement with a broker approved by the Company whereby payment of the exercise price is accomplished with the proceeds of the sale of Common Stock, or (vi) through such other procedures as the Committee may determine. As soon as administratively practicable after receipt of a written exercise notice and payment of the exercise price in accordance with this Section 6.4, the Company shall deliver to the Participant a certificate or certificates representing the acquired shares of Common Stock or shall deposit the acquired

 

- 17 -


shares of Common Stock to the Participant’s brokerage account associated with this Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, in any case above in this Section, the number of shares remaining for issuance under the Plan shall be determined as though the full number of shares corresponding to the portion of such Option settled or net-exercised pursuant to this Section 6.4 had been issued.

6.5 Incentive Stock Options . Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, no term of the Plan relating to Incentive Stock Options shall be interpreted, amended or altered, nor shall any discretion or authority granted under the Plan be so exercised, so as to disqualify the Plan under Section 422 of the Code, or, without the consent of any Participant affected thereby, to cause any Incentive Stock Option previously granted to fail to qualify for the Federal income tax treatment afforded under Section 421 of the Code.

6.6 Termination of Employment or Service Due to Disability or Retirement . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates by reason of Disability or Retirement, any such Options granted to such Participant shall continue to become exercisable in accordance with Section 6.3 notwithstanding such Participant’s termination of employment or service and may be exercised by the Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of such Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at the time of grant) following the Participant’s termination of employment or service, whichever period is shorter.

6.7 Termination of Employment or Service Due to Death . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates by reason of death, any such Options granted to such Participant shall become immediately exercisable in full at the date of such Participant’s death and may be exercised by the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of such Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at the time of grant) following the Participant’s death, whichever period is shorter.

6.8 Certain Divestitures, etc . In the event that a Participant’s employment or service is terminated in connection with a sale, divestiture, spin-off or other similar transaction involving a Subsidiary, division or business segment or unit, the Committee may provide at the

 

- 18 -


time of grant or otherwise that all or any portion of any Options granted to such Participant which are then outstanding shall become exercisable in accordance with Section 6.3 notwithstanding such termination of employment or service and may be exercised by the Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of the Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at or following the time of grant) following the Participant’s termination of employment or service, whichever period is shorter.

6.9 Termination of Employment or Service for Cause . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary is terminated for Cause as determined in good faith by the Company, all Options granted to such Participant which are then outstanding (whether or not exercisable prior to the date of such termination) shall be immediately forfeited.

6.10 Termination of Employment or Service for Any Other Reason . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at or after the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates for any reason other than one described in Section 6.6, 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9, any Options granted to such Participant which are exercisable at the date of such Participant’s termination of employment or service shall be exercisable at any time prior to 90 days following such Participant’s termination of employment or service or the remaining term of such Option, whichever period is shorter.

6.11 Extension of Termination Date . An Optionholder’s Award Agreement may also provide that if the exercise of the Option following the Optionholder’s termination of employment or service (other than upon the Optionholder’s death or Disability) would be prohibited at any time solely because the issuance of shares of Common Stock would violate the registration requirements under the Securities Act, then the Option shall terminate on the earlier of (i) the expiration of the term of the Option or (ii) the expiration of a period of 90 days following the Optionholder’s termination of employment or service during which the exercise of the Option would not be in violation of such registration requirements.

 

- 19 -


SECTION 7

STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS

7.1 Grant of Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted to any Participants, all Participants or any class of Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Committee. Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted in tandem with an Option, or may be granted on a freestanding basis, not related to any Option. A grant of a Stock Appreciation Right shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement, whether as part of the agreement governing the terms of the Option, if any, to which such Stock Appreciation Rights relate or pursuant to a separate written agreement with respect to freestanding Stock Appreciation Rights, in each case containing such provisions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Committee shall approve.

7.2 Terms and Conditions of Stock Appreciation Rights . The terms and conditions (including, without limitation, the exercise period of the Stock Appreciation Right, the vesting schedule applicable thereto and the impact of any termination of service on the Participant’s rights with respect to the Stock Appreciation Right) applicable with respect to ( i ) Stock Appreciation Rights granted in tandem with an Option shall be substantially identical (to the extent possible taking into account the differences related to the character of the Stock Appreciation Right) to the terms and conditions applicable to the tandem Options and ( ii ) freestanding Stock Appreciation Rights shall be substantially identical (to the extent possible taking into account the differences related to the character of the Stock Appreciation Right) to the terms and conditions that would have been applicable under Section 6 above were the grant of the Stock Appreciation Rights a grant of an Option. In no event shall the term of a Stock Appreciation Right exceed a period of ten years from the date of grant.

7.3 Exercise of Tandem Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights which are granted in tandem with an Option may only be exercised upon the surrender of the right to exercise such Option for an equivalent number of shares and may be exercised only with respect to the shares of Common Stock for which the related Option is then exercisable.

7.4 Exercise Price . Each Stock Appreciation Right will be denominated in shares of Common Stock equivalents. The exercise price of each Stock Appreciation Right shall not be less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock equivalents subject to the Stock Appreciation Right on the date of grant.

7.5 Payment of Stock Appreciation Right Amount . Upon exercise of a Stock Appreciation Right, the holder shall be entitled to receive payment, in cash, in shares of Common Stock or in a combination thereof, as determined by the Committee, of an amount

 

- 20 -


determined by multiplying the excess, if any, of the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock at the date of exercise over the exercise price of the Stock Appreciation Right determined by the Committee at the time of grant, by the number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which the Stock Appreciation Rights are then being exercised.

SECTION 8

RESTRICTED STOCK AND RESTRICTED STOCK UNITS

8.1 Grant of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units . Except as otherwise delegated as provided in Section 4.3, the Committee may make awards in the form of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units. Any Award made hereunder in the form of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan and to any other terms and conditions not inconsistent with the Plan (including, but not limited to, requiring the Participant to pay the Company an amount equal to the par value per share for each share of Restricted Stock awarded) as shall be prescribed by the Committee in its sole discretion. As determined by the Committee, with respect to an Award of Restricted Stock, the Company shall either ( i ) transfer or issue to each Participant to whom an Award of Restricted Stock has been made the number of shares of Restricted Stock specified by the Committee or ( ii ) hold such shares of Restricted Stock for the benefit of the Participant for the Restricted Period. In the case of an Award of Restricted Stock Units, no shares of Common Stock shall be issued at the time an Award is made, and the Company shall not be required to set aside a fund for the payment of such Award.

8.2 Restrictions on Transferability . Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged, hypothecated or otherwise encumbered by the Participant during the Restricted Period, except as hereinafter provided. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Committee may permit (on such terms and conditions as it shall establish) Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock to be transferred during the Restricted Period pursuant to Section 13.1, provided that any Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock so transferred shall remain subject to the provisions of this Section 8.

8.3 Rights as a Shareholder . Except for the restrictions set forth herein and unless otherwise determined by the Committee, the Participant shall have all the rights of a shareholder with respect to such shares of Restricted Stock, including but not limited to, the right to vote and the right to receive dividends. A Participant shall not have any right, in respect

 

- 21 -


of Restricted Stock Units awarded pursuant to the Plan, to vote on any matter submitted to the Company’s stockholders or to dispose of the shares of Common Stock underlying such Restricted Stock Units, nor shall a Participant have any beneficial ownership in respect of any shares of Common Stock underlying Restricted Stock Units, until such time as the shares of Common Stock attributable to such Restricted Stock Units have been issued (including, at the discretion of the Committee, issuance to a trust for purposes of hedging or funding Restricted Stock Unit obligations). At the discretion of the Committee, a Participant’s Restricted Stock Unit account may be credited with Dividend Equivalents during the Restricted Period.

8.4 Restricted Period . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at or after the date an Award of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units is made to the Participant by the Committee, the Restricted Period shall commence upon the date of grant and shall lapse with respect to the shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units in three approximately equal installments on each of the first three anniversaries of the date of grant, unless sooner terminated as otherwise provided herein. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Committee may provide for termination of the Restricted Period upon the achievement by the Participant of Performance Goals specified by the Committee at the date of grant. The determination of whether the Participant has achieved such Performance Goals shall be made by the Committee in its sole discretion.

8.5 Legend . Each certificate issued to a Participant in respect of shares of Restricted Stock awarded under the Plan shall be registered in the name of the Participant and shall be legended in such manner as the Company deems appropriate.

8.6 Death, Disability or Retirement . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at the date of grant or otherwise, if a Participant ceases to be employed or service is terminated by the Company or any Subsidiary by reason of death, Disability or Retirement, the Restricted Period will lapse as to a pro rated portion of the shares of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units transferred or issued to such Participant under the Plan based on the number of days the Participant actually worked since the date the shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units were granted (or in the case of an Award which becomes vested in installments, since the date, if any, on which the last installment of such Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units became vested); provided that , in the case of an Award with respect to which the restrictions will lapse, if at all, based on the attainment of Performance Goals or targets, such vesting shall be deferred until the end of the applicable performance period and such prorated portion will be determined based on that number of shares of Restricted Stock or

 

- 22 -


Restricted Stock Units, if any, that would have been earned based on the attainment or partial attainment of such Performance Goals or targets. Except as otherwise expressly determined by the Committee or provided in an Award Agreement, any shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units as to which the Restricted Period has not lapsed at the date of a Participant’s termination of employment by reason of death, Disability or Retirement (or which do not become vested after such date under the preceding sentence) shall automatically be cancelled upon such Participant’s termination of employment.

8.7 Termination of Employment or Service . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at or after the date of grant, if a Participant ceases to be employed by or terminates service with the Company or any Subsidiary for any reason other than those specified in Section 8.6 at any time prior to the date when the Restricted Period lapses, all shares of Restricted Stock held by the Participant shall revert back to the Company and all Restricted Stock Units and any corresponding Dividend Equivalents credited but not yet paid to such Participant shall be forfeited upon the Participant’s termination of employment or service.

8.8 Issuance of New Certificates; Settlement of Restricted Stock Units . Upon the lapse of the Restricted Period with respect to any shares of Restricted Stock, such shares shall no longer be subject to the restrictions imposed under Section 8.2 and the Company shall issue or have issued new share certificates without the legend described in Section 8.5 in exchange for those previously issued. Upon the lapse of the Restricted Period with respect to any Restricted Stock Units, the Company shall deliver to the Participant, or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, one share of Common Stock for each Restricted Stock Unit as to which restrictions have lapsed and any Dividend Equivalents credited with respect to such Restricted Stock Units. The Committee may, in its sole discretion, elect to pay cash or part cash and part Common Stock in lieu of delivering only Common Stock for Restricted Stock Units. If a cash payment is made in lieu of delivering Common Stock, the amount of such cash payment for each share of Common Stock to which a Participant is entitled shall be equal to the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date on which the Restricted Period lapsed with respect to the related Restricted Stock Unit.

8.9 Performance Related Awards . Notwithstanding anything else contained in the Plan to the contrary and unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at the time of grant, to the extent required to ensure that the grant of an Award of Restricted Shares or Restricted Stock Units to an Executive Officer (other than an Award which will vest solely on the basis of the passage of time) is deductible by the Company or such Subsidiary pursuant to

 

- 23 -


Section 162(m) of the Code, any such Award shall become vested, if at all, upon the determination by the Committee that Performance Goals established by the Committee have been attained, in whole or in part.

SECTION 9

ANNUAL AND LONG-TERM INCENTIVE AWARDS

9.1 Annual Incentive Awards . Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or after the date of grant, Annual Incentive Awards shall be payable in cash. If a Participant terminates employment before the end of a Performance Cycle due to death, Disability or Retirement, such Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, shall be eligible to receive a prorated Annual Incentive Award based on the actual achievement of the Performance Goals for such Performance Cycle, in each case prorated for the portion of the Performance Cycle coming before the Participant’s termination of employment. Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or, in the case of any Participant who is not an Executive Officer, after the date of grant, if a Participant terminates employment before payment of an Annual Incentive Award is authorized by the Committee for any reason other than death, Disability or Retirement, the Participant shall forfeit all rights to such Annual Incentive Award.

9.2 Long-Term Incentive Awards . Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or after the date of grant, Long-Term Incentive Awards shall be payable in cash. If a Participant terminates employment before the end of a Performance Cycle due to death, Disability or Retirement, such Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, shall be eligible to receive a prorated Long-Term Incentive Award based on the actual achievement of the Performance Goals for such Performance Cycle, in each case prorated for the portion of the Performance Cycle coming before the Participant’s termination of employment. Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at, or, in the case of a Participant who is not an Executive Officer, after the date of grant, if a Participant terminates employment before payment of a Long-Term Incentive Award is authorized by the Committee for any reason other than death, Disability or Retirement, the Participant shall forfeit all rights to such Long-Term Incentive Award.

 

- 24 -


SECTION 10

OTHER STOCK-BASED AWARDS

The Committee may grant other types of equity-based or equity-related Awards (including the grant or offer for sale of unrestricted shares of Common Stock) in such amounts and subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee may determine. Such Awards may entail the transfer of actual shares of Common Stock to Award recipients and may include Awards designed to comply with or take advantage of the applicable local laws of jurisdictions other than the United States.

SECTION 11

CHANGE IN CONTROL

11.1 Accelerated Vesting and Payment . Subject to the provisions of Section 11.2 below, in the event of a Change in Control, each Option and Stock Appreciation Right then outstanding shall be fully exercisable regardless of the exercise schedule otherwise applicable to such Option and/or Stock Appreciation Right and the Restricted Period shall lapse as to each share of Restricted Stock and each Restricted Stock Unit then outstanding. In connection with such a Change in Control, the Committee may, in its discretion, provide that each Option and/or Stock Appreciation Right (regardless of whether any such Option or Stock Appreciation Right is then “in the money”, including if as of the date on which the Change in Control Settlement Value is determined, the Fair Market Value of the shares subject to such Option, Stock Appreciation Right or similar other stock-based Award is less than the exercise price or base price of such Option or Stock Appreciation Right) shall, upon the occurrence of such Change in Control, be canceled in exchange for a cash payment, if any is then due, by the Company of the Change in Control Settlement Value per share.

11.2 Alternative Awards . Notwithstanding Section 11.1, no cancellation, acceleration of exercisability, vesting, cash settlement or other payment shall occur with respect to any Option, Stock Appreciation Right, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit or any other stock-based Award if the Committee reasonably determines in good faith prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control that such Award shall be honored or assumed, or new rights substituted therefor (such honored, assumed or substituted award hereinafter called an “Alternative Award”), by a Participant’s employer (or the parent or an affiliate of such employer) immediately following the Change in Control; provided that any such Alternative Award must:

(i) be based on stock which is traded on an established securities market, or that the Committee reasonably believes will be so traded within 60 days after the Change of Control;

 

- 25 -


(ii) provide such Participant with rights and entitlements substantially equivalent to or better than the rights, terms and conditions applicable under such award, including, but not limited to, an identical or better exercise or vesting schedule and identical or better timing and methods of payment;

(iii) have substantially equivalent economic value to such award (determined at the time of the Change in Control in accordance with principles applicable under Section 424 of the Code); and

(iv) have terms and conditions which provide that in the event that the Participant’s employment or service is involuntarily terminated for any reason (including, but not limited to a termination due to death, Disability or not for Cause) or Constructively Terminated (as defined below), all of such Participant’s Option and/or Stock Appreciation Rights shall be deemed immediately and fully exercisable, the Restricted Period shall lapse as to each of the Participant’s outstanding Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Unit Awards, and each such Alternative Award shall be settled for a payment per each share of stock subject to the Alternative Award in cash, in immediately transferable, publicly traded securities or in a combination thereof, in an amount equal to, in the case of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right, the excess of the Fair Market Value of such stock on the date of the Participant’s termination over the corresponding exercise or base price per share and, in the case of any Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Unit Award, the Fair Market Value of the number of shares of Common Stock subject or related thereto.

For this purpose, a Participant’s employment or service shall be deemed to have been Constructively Terminated if, without the Participant’s written consent, the Participant terminates employment or service within 90 calendar days following either (x) a material reduction in the Participant’s base salary or a Participant’s incentive compensation opportunity, or (y) the relocation of the Participant’s principal place of employment or service to a location more than 35 miles away from the Participant’s immediately prior principal place of employment or service.

 

- 26 -


11.3 Annual Incentive and Long-Term Incentive Awards . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee, in the event of a termination of employment after or related to a Change in Control (other than for Cause and other than a voluntary resignation not constituting being Constructively Terminated), (i) any Annual or Long-Term Incentive Awards relating to Performance Cycles ending prior to the Change in Control which have been earned but not paid shall become immediately payable, (ii) any Performance Cycle for which Annual Incentive Awards are outstanding shall end, the Participant shall earn a pro rata Award equal to the product of (a) such Participant’s earned Award for the Performance Cycle in question and (b) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of completed months that have elapsed since the beginning of such Performance Cycle to the date of such employment termination and the denominator of which is twelve, the Company shall pay all such Annual Incentive Awards, if earned, by the March 15 following the end of the Performance Cycle after the Committee has made its determination, and (iii) all then in progress Performance Cycles for Long-Term Incentive Awards that are outstanding shall end, the Participant shall earn a pro rata Award equal to the product of (a) such Participant’s earned Award for the Performance Cycle in question and (b) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of completed months that have elapsed since the beginning of such Performance Cycle to the date of such employment termination, the denominator of which is the total number of months in such Performance Cycle, the Company shall pay all such Long-Term Incentive Awards, if earned, by the March 15 following the end of the Performance Cycle after the Committee has made its determination.

11.4 Termination of Employment or Service Prior to Change in Control . In the event that prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant’s termination of employment or service with the Company or any of its affiliates will be deemed to be in connection with a Change in Control (other than for Cause and other than a voluntary resignation not constituting being Constructively Terminated) and either (a) such termination is within 90 days prior to the date of a Change in Control, or (b) such termination occurs on or after the date, if any, on which the shareholders of the Company approve such Change in Control transaction, but prior to the consummation thereof. Such Participant shall be entitled to receive the applicable benefits provided under this Section 11, but only to the extent that such benefits are in excess of those previously received by the Participant as a result of the Participant’s prior termination of employment or service.

11.5 Distribution of Amounts Subject to Section 409A . Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, if any amount that is subject to Section 409A of the Code is

 

- 27 -


to be paid or distributed solely on account of a Change in Control (as opposed to being paid or distributed on account of termination of employment or within a reasonable time following the lapse of any substantial risk of forfeiture with respect to the corresponding Award), solely for purposes of determining whether such distribution or payment shall be made in connection with a Change in Control, the term Change in Control shall be deemed to be defined in the manner provided in Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder. If any such distribution or payment cannot be made because an event that constitutes a Change in Control under the Plan is not a change in control as defined under Section 409A, then such distribution or payment shall be distributed or paid at the next event, occurrence or date at which such distribution or payment could be made in compliance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

SECTION 12

AMENDMENT, MODIFICATION, AND TERMINATION OF PLAN

The Board may at any time terminate or suspend the Plan, and from time to time may amend or modify the Plan; provided, however, that any amendment which would (a) increase the number of shares available for issuance under the Plan, (b) lower the minimum exercise price at which an Option or stock-settled Stock Appreciation Right may be granted or (c) extend the maximum term for Options or stock-settled Stock Appreciation Rights granted hereunder shall be subject to the approval of the Company’s shareholders. Except as otherwise provided in this Plan or in any Award Agreement, no action of the Board may, without the consent of a Participant, alter or impair his or her rights under any previously granted Award, except as expressly provided in the Plan or in the applicable Award Agreement.

SECTION 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 Transferability of Awards . No Award granted under the Plan may be sold, transferred, pledged or assigned, or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than in accordance with Section 13.2 below, by will or by laws of descent and distribution; provided that, the Committee may permit transfers of Non-Qualified Stock Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, Restricted Stock Units or Restricted Shares to Family Members (including, without limitation, transfers affected by a domestic relations order) subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee shall determine.

 

- 28 -


13.2 Beneficiary Designation . Each Participant under the Plan may from time to time name any beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) to whom any benefit under the Plan is to be paid or by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of his death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form prescribed by the Committee, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Committee during his lifetime. In the absence of any such designation, benefits remaining unpaid or Awards outstanding at the Participant’s death shall be paid to or exercised by (a) the Participant’s surviving spouse or domestic partner, (b) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner, the Participant’s children (including stepchildren and adopted children) per stirpes, or (c) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner and/or children per stirpes, the Participant’s estate.

13.3 Committee Discretion . Notwithstanding anything else to the contrary, the Committee may permit all or any portion of any Award to be exercised following a Participant’s termination of employment for any reason on such terms and subject to such conditions as the Committee shall determine for a period up to and including, but not beyond, the expiration of the term of such Award. The Committee shall have the power to accelerate the time at which an Award may first be exercised or the time during which an Award or any part thereof will vest in accordance with the Plan, notwithstanding the provisions in the Award stating the time at which it may first be exercised or the time during which it will vest.

13.4 Interpretation . Notwithstanding anything contained in the Plan to the contrary, to the extent required to so qualify any Award intended to be qualified as other performance-based compensation within the meaning of Section 162(m)(4)(c) of the Code, the Committee shall not be entitled to exercise any discretion otherwise authorized under the Plan (such as the right to authorize payout at a level above that dictated by the achievement of the relevant Performance Goals) with respect to such Award if the ability to exercise discretion (as opposed to the exercise of such discretion) would cause such Award to fail to qualify as other performance-based compensation.

13.5 No Guarantee of Employment . Nothing in the Plan shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or service at any time, nor confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or service of the Company or any Subsidiary or affiliate.

 

- 29 -


13.6 Tax Withholding . The Company or any Subsidiary shall have the power to withhold, or require a Participant to remit to the Company or such Subsidiary promptly upon notification of the amount due, an amount, which may include shares of Common Stock, sufficient to satisfy Federal, state and local, including foreign, withholding tax requirements with respect to any Award (including payments made pursuant to Section 9), and the Company may defer payment of cash or issuance or delivery of Common Stock until such requirements are satisfied. The Committee may, in its discretion, permit a Participant to elect, subject to such conditions as the Committee shall impose ( i ) to have Common Stock otherwise issuable or deliverable under the Plan withheld by the Company or ( ii ) to deliver to the Company previously acquired shares of Common Stock, in each case, having a Fair Market Value sufficient to satisfy not more than the Participant’s statutory minimum Federal, state and local tax obligations associated with the transaction.

13.7 Indemnification . Each person who is or shall have been a member of the Committee or of the Board shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from any loss, cost, liability, or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by him in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit, or proceeding to which he may be made a party or in which he may be involved by reason of any action taken or failure to act under the Plan, provided he shall give the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before he undertakes to handle and defend it on his own behalf. The foregoing right of indemnification shall not be exclusive and shall be independent of any other rights of indemnification to which such persons may be entitled under the Company’s Articles of Incorporation or By-laws, by contract, as a matter of law, or otherwise.

13.8 No Limitation on Compensation . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its employees in cash or property, in a manner which is not expressly authorized under the Plan.

13.9 Requirements of Law . The granting of Awards and the issuance of shares of Common Stock shall be subject to all applicable laws, rules, and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges or national automated quotation systems as may be required.

13.10 Governing Law . The Plan, and all Awards made and actions taken thereunder, shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Connecticut.

 

- 30 -


13.11 Impact on Benefits . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee, Awards granted under the Plan are not compensation for purposes of calculating an Employee’s rights under any employee benefit program or arrangement, including any severance arrangement.

13.12 Securities Law Compliance . Instruments evidencing Awards may contain such other provisions, not inconsistent with the Plan, as the Committee deems advisable, including a requirement that the Participant represent to the Company in writing, when an Award is granted or when he receives shares with respect to such Award (or at such other time as the Committee deems appropriate) that he is accepting such Award, or receiving or acquiring such shares (unless they are then covered by a Securities Act of 1933 registration statement), for his own account for investment only and with no present intention to transfer, sell or otherwise dispose of such shares except such disposition by a legal representative as shall be required by will or the laws of any jurisdiction in winding up the estate of the Participant. Such shares shall be transferable, or may be sold or otherwise disposed of only if the proposed transfer, sale or other disposition shall be permissible pursuant to the Plan and if, in the opinion of counsel satisfactory to the Company, such transfer, sale or other disposition at such time will be in compliance with applicable securities laws.

 

- 31 -

Exhibit 10.9

LOAN AGREEMENT

THIS LOAN AGREEMENT ( this “Agreement”) is made as of the 30 th day of December 2005, by and between PHOENIX LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY, (“ Lender ”) a New York domiciled insurance company with a mailing address of One American Row, Hartford, Connecticut 06115 and PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD (“Borrower”) , a Delaware corporation with a mailing address of 56 Prospect Street, Hartford, Connecticut 06115.

 

1. GENERAL DEFINITIONS.

1.1 Defined Terms . When used herein, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Agreement - has the meaning assigned to such term in the first paragraph hereof.

Assets Under Management - means all assets, other than general account assets of Phoenix Life Insurance Company and PHL Variable Insurance Company, subject to investment management services provided by the Borrower and its subsidiaries and reported in Form 10Q and Form 10K for the asset management segment of The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

Interest Rate - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.3 of this Agreement.

Borrower - has the meaning assigned to such term in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

Business Day - means any day other than a Saturday, Sunday or other day on which commercial banks in New York City or Hartford, Connecticut are authorized or required by law to close.

Closing Date - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.1 of this Agreement.

Default - an event or condition the occurrence of which would, with a lapse of time or the giving of notice or both, become an Event of Default.

EBITDA - means, as of the end of any fiscal quarter of the Borrower, earnings of the Borrower and its subsidiaries before Interest Expense, taxes, depreciation and amortization for the four fiscal quarters then ending, determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP, as reported in Form 10Q and Form 10K for the asset management segment of The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

EBITDA to Senior Interest Expense Ratio - means the ratio, as determined at the end of each fiscal quarter of the Borrower of (a) EBITDA, determined for the four fiscal quarters of the Borrower ending as of such quarter’s end to (b) total Interest Expense on Senior Debt, determined for the four fiscal quarters of the Borrower ending as of such quarter’s end.


EBITDA to Total Interest Expense Ratio - means the ratio, as determined at the end of each fiscal quarter of the Borrower of (a) EBITDA, determined for the four fiscal quarters of the Borrower ending as of such quarter’s end to (b) total Interest Expense, determined for the four fiscal quarters of the Borrower ending as of such quarter’s end.

Event of Default - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 7.1 of this Agreement.

GAAP - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 1.2 of this Agreement.

Highest Lawful Rate - means the maximum rate of interest, if any, that at any time or from time to time may be contracted for, taken, charged or received by the Lender on the obligations owed to it under the laws applicable to the Lender and this transaction.

Indebtedness - means, with respect to any person and without duplication, (a) all indebtedness for borrowed money; (b) all obligations issued, undertaken or assumed as the deferred purchase price of property or services (other than trade payables entered into in the ordinary course of business on ordinary terms); (c) all non-contingent reimbursement or payment obligations with respect to any letters of credit (including standby and commercial), banker’s acceptances, bank guaranties, surety bonds and similar instruments; (d) all obligations evidenced by notes, bonds, debentures or similar instruments, including obligations so evidenced incurred in connection with the acquisition of property, assets or businesses; (e) all indebtedness created or arising under any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, or incurred as financing, in either case with respect to property acquired by such person (even though the rights and remedies of the seller or bank under such agreement in the event of default are limited to repossession or sale of such property); (f) all obligations with respect to capital leases (g) all net obligations with respect to any agreement (including any master agreement and any agreement, whether or not in writing, relating to any single transaction) that is an interest rate swap agreement, basis swap, forward rate agreement, commodity swap, commodity option, equity or equity index swap or option, bond option, interest rate option, forward foreign exchange agreement, rate cap, collar or floor agreement, currency swap agreement, cross-currency rate swap agreement, currency option or any other, similar agreement (including any option to enter into any of the foregoing); (h) all indebtedness referred to in clauses (a) through (g) above secured by (or for which the holder of such Indebtedness has an existing right, contingent or otherwise, to be secured by) any lien upon or in property (including accounts and contracts rights) owned by such person, even though such person has not assumed or become liable for the payment of such Indebtedness; and (i) all obligations in respect of guaranteeing, purchasing or otherwise discharging indebtedness or obligations of others of the kinds referred to in clauses (a) through (g) above.

Interest Expense - means, with respect to any fiscal period of the Borrower, interest expense of the Borrower and its subsidiaries for such period, determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP.

Interest Payment Date - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.3 of this Agreement.

Interest Period - means the period in which interest under the Loan shall be calculated, which date shall commence, with respect to the first Interest Period, on the Closing Date and, with respect to all subsequent Interest Periods, on the first (1 st ) day of each successive calendar quarter after the Closing

 

2


Date and ending, with respect to the first Interest Period, on the last day of the calendar quarter in which the Closing Date falls, and, with respect to all other Interest Periods, on the last date of the calendar quarter in which such commencement date fell; provided that no Interest Period shall extend beyond the Maturity Date. For the avoidance of doubt, the first Interest Period shall commence on the Closing Date and end on March 31, 2006 and the second Interest Period shall commence on April 1, 2006 and end on June 30, 2006.

Lender - has the meaning assigned to such term in the first paragraph of this Agreement.

Loan - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.1 of this Agreement.

Maturity Date - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.2 of this Agreement.

Note - has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.1 of this Agreement.

Senior Debt - means all Indebtedness of the Borrower other than subordinated debt.

Senior Debt to EBITDA Ratio - means the ratio, as determined at the end of each fiscal quarter of the Borrower, of (a) Senior Debt, determined as of such quarter’s end, to (b) EBITDA, determined for the four fiscal quarters of the Borrower ending as of such quarter’s end.

Shareholders Equity - means the shareholders’ equity of the Borrower and its subsidiaries determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP.

1.2 Accounting Terms . Any accounting terms used in this Agreement which are not specifically defined shall have the meanings customarily given them in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) at the time in effect.

 

2. LOAN

2.1 The Loan . Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, and in exchange for a payment of $3,000,000 and a Subordinated Note of the Borrower owned by the Lender as of the date of this Agreement (the “Closing Date”), Lender agrees to accept from Borrower on the Closing Date a senior note in the principal amount of $66,018,833 (the “Note”), substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto. The indebtedness of the Borrower evidenced by the Note is hereinafter referred to as the “Loan”. The Note shall be a registered note and the Borrower shall maintain a registry showing, at all times, the holder of such Note. As a condition precedent to the making of the Loan, Borrower shall have delivered to Lender on the Closing Date a certificate of its secretary or an assistant secretary as to (a) resolutions of the Board of Directors of the Borrower then in full force and effect authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and the Note and (b) the incumbency and signatures of those officers of the Borrower authorized to act with respect to this Agreement and the Note.

2.2 Principal Payments of the Loan . The Borrower shall pay $3,000,000 of the principal amount of the Loan on each Interest Payment Date (together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon.)

 

3


Any outstanding principal amount (together with accrued and unpaid interest therein) shall be paid on December 30, 2010 (the “Maturity Date”). Payments of principal shall be made by the Borrower as set forth below in the Lender’s signature block hereto or as otherwise directed in writing by the Lender.

2.3 Interest . The Loan shall bear interest on the principal amount thereof outstanding from and after the Closing Date at a rate per annum equal to 6.55% (the “ Interest Rate ”). Anything contained herein to the contrary notwithstanding, after the Maturity Date, after the date on which the Loan shall have become due and payable pursuant to Section 7 or in any period during which a Default shall exist, the Loan shall bear interest at a rate per annum equal to the Interest Rate plus 2.0% and such interest shall be due and payable on demand. Except as set forth in the immediately preceding sentence, interest on the Loan shall be due and payable in arrears on the last day of each Interest Period (and if such day is not a Business Day, then on the next Business Day) (the “Interest Payment Date”). Interest shall also be paid on the date of any prepayment of Loans under Section 2.4 for the portion of the Loan so prepaid. At no time shall the interest rate payable on the Loan exceed the Highest Lawful Rate applicable to the Lender. All interest shall be determined on a year of 360-days and the actual number of days elapsed.

2.4 Optional Prepayments . The Borrower may, at any time or from time to time on any Interest Payment Date (or such other date to which the Lender shall have consented in writing), upon not less than 4 Business Days’ irrevocable notice to the Lender, prepay the Loan in whole or in part, in minimum amounts of $2,000,000 or any multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof. Such notice of prepayment shall specify the date and amount of such prepayment. If such notice is given by the Borrower, the Borrower shall make such prepayment and the payment amount specified in such notice shall be due and payable on the date specified therein, together with accrued interest to each such date on the amount prepaid. No prepayment premium shall be payable in connection with any such prepayment.

 

3. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

As an inducement to Lender to make the Loan, Borrower warrants and represents to Lender that:

3.1 Organization and Qualification . Borrower is a corporation duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware.

3.2 Corporate Powers . Borrower has the right and power and is duly authorized and empowered to enter into, execute, deliver and perform this Agreement and the Note. This Agreement and the Note have each been duly authorized and approved by the shareholders and Board of Directors of Borrower, and are the legal, valid and binding obligations of Borrower, enforceable against Borrower in accordance with their respective terms.

3.3 Compliance with Laws, Other Instruments, etc . Neither the execution, delivery and performance by the Borrower of this Agreement and the Note will (a) contravene, result in any breach of, or constitute a default under, or result in the creation of any lien in respect of any property of the Borrower or any subsidiary under, any indenture, mortgage, deed of trust, loan, purchase or credit agreement, lease, corporate charter or by-laws, or any other agreement or instrument to which the Borrower or any subsidiary is bound or by which the Borrower or any subsidiary or any of their respective properties may be bound or

 

4


affected other than in respect of those certain indentures, mortgages, deeds of trust, loans, purchase or credit agreements or leases, or any other agreements or instruments for which written consents shall have been obtained either prior to, or contemporaneously with, the closing of this Agreement; (b) conflict with or result in a breach of any of the terms, conditions or provisions of any order, judgment, decree, or ruling of any court, arbitrator or governmental authority applicable to the Borrower or any subsidiary, or (c) violate any provision of any statute or other rule or regulation of any governmental authority applicable to the Borrower or any subsidiary).

3.4 Governmental Authorizations, etc . No consent, approval or authorization of, or registration, filing or declaration with, any governmental authority is required in connection with the execution, delivery or performance by the Borrower of this Agreement or the Note.

3.5 Litigation: Observance of Agreements, Statutes and Orders . There are no actions, suits or proceedings pending or, to the knowledge of the Borrower, threatened against or affecting the Borrower or any subsidiary or any property of the Borrower or any subsidiary in any court or before any arbitrator of any kind or before or by any governmental authority that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the business, financial position or prospects of the Borrower. Neither the Borrower nor any subsidiary is in default under any term of any agreement or instrument to which it is a party or by which it is bound, or any order, judgment, decree or ruling of any court, arbitrator or governmental authority or is in violation of any applicable law, ordinance, rule or regulation of any governmental authority.

3.6 Taxes . The Borrower and its subsidiaries have filed all tax returns that are required to have been filed in any jurisdiction, and have paid all taxes shown to be due and payable on such returns and all other taxes and assessments levied upon them or their properties, assets, income or franchises, to the extent such taxes and assessments have become due and payable and before they have become delinquent, except for any taxes and assessments (a) the amount of which is not individually or in the aggregate material or (b) the amount, applicability or validity of which is currently being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and with respect to which the Borrower or a subsidiary, as the case may be, has established adequate reserves in accordance with GAAP. The Borrower knows of no basis for any other tax or assessment that could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on its business, financial position or prospects. The charges, accruals and reserves on the books of the Borrower and its subsidiaries in respect of federal, state or other taxes for all fiscal periods are adequate.

3.7 Title to Property: Leases . The Borrower and its subsidiaries have good and sufficient title to the properties that the Borrower and the subsidiaries own or purport to own that individually or in the aggregate are material (except as sold or otherwise disposed of in the ordinary course of business), in each case free and clear of liens prohibited by this Agreement. All leases that individually or in the aggregate are material are valid and subsisting and are in full force and effect in all material respects.

3.8 Licenses, Permits, etc . The Borrower and its subsidiaries own or possess all licenses, permits, franchises, authorizations, patents, copyrights, service marks, trademarks and trade names, or rights thereto, that individually or in the aggregate are material, without known material conflict with the rights of others. To the best knowledge of the Borrower, no product of the Borrower infringes in any material respect any license, permit, franchise, authorization, patent, copyright, service mark, trademark,

 

5


trade name or other right owned by any other person. To the best knowledge of the Borrower, there is no material violation by any person of any right of the Borrower or any of its subsidiaries with respect to any patent, copyright, service mark, trademark, trade name or other right owned or used by the Borrower or any of its subsidiaries.

 

4. AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS.

4.1 Affirmative Covenants . Borrower covenants that, unless otherwise consented to by Lender in writing, it will: (a) preserve and maintain its corporate existence and all rights, privileges and franchises in connection therewith; (b) file all federal, state and local tax returns and other reports that the Borrower is required by law to file, maintain adequate reserves for the payment of all taxes, assessments, governmental charges and levies imposed upon it, its income or its profits, or upon any property belonging to it, and pay and discharge all such taxes, assessments, governmental charges and levies prior to the date on which penalties attach thereto, except where the same are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and provided that in such event adequate book reserves have been established with respect to each such claim being contested; (c) maintain its property in good condition and make all necessary renewals, repairs, replacements, additions and improvements thereto; (d) not be in violation of any federal, state, or local laws, ordinances, governmental rules and regulations to which it is subject, and not fail to obtain any licenses, permits, franchises or other governmental authorizations necessary to the ownership of its properties or to the conduct of its business, which violation or failure to obtain might materially and adversely affect the business, prospects, profits, properties or condition (financial or otherwise) of Borrower; (e) keep adequate records and books of account with respect to its business activities in which proper entries are made in accordance with GAAP reflecting all its financial transactions.

 

5. NEGATIVE COVENANTS.

5.1 Negative Covenants . The Borrower covenants that, unless otherwise consented to by the Lender in writing, it: (a) will not, and will not permit any of its subsidiaries to, consolidate or merge with or into any other person or convey, transfer or lease all or substantially all of its assets in a single transaction or series of transactions to any person (except that any subsidiary may consolidate or merge with or into, or convey, transfer or lease all or substantially all of its assets in a single transaction or series of transactions to, the Borrower (provided the Borrower is the surviving person) or any subsidiary or any person that, contemporaneously with the consummation of any such event, becomes a subsidiary), provided that the foregoing restrictions do not apply to the consolidation or merger of the Borrower with or into, or the conveyance, transfer or lease of all or substantially all of the assets of the Borrower in a single transaction or series of transactions to, any person so long as (i) the successor formed by such consolidation or the survivor of such merger or the person that acquires by conveyance, transfer or lease all or substantially all of the assets of the Borrower as an entirety, as the case may be (the “Successor Company”), shall be a solvent corporation organized and existing under the laws of the United States of America or any State thereof (including the District of Columbia); (ii) if the Borrower is not the Successor Company, such Successor Company shall have executed and delivered to the Lender its assumption of the due and punctual payment of the principal of and premium, if any, and interest on the Loan and the Note, according to its tenor, and the due and punctual performance and observance of each covenant and condition of this

 

6


Agreement and the Note and shall have caused to be delivered to the Lender an opinion of nationally recognized independent counsel or other independent counsel, reasonably satisfactory to the Lender, to the effect that all agreements or instruments effecting such assumption have been duly authorized, executed and delivered and are enforceable in accordance with their terms and comply with the terms hereof; (iii) immediately before and after giving effect to such transaction no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing. No such conveyance, transfer or lease of substantially all of the assets of the Borrower shall have the effect of releasing the Borrower or any Successor Company from its liability under this Agreement or the Note; (b) the Borrower will not and will not permit any subsidiary to engage in any business if, as a result, the general nature of the businesses in which the Borrower and the subsidiaries, taken as a whole, would then be engaged would be substantially changed from the general nature of the businesses of the Borrower and the subsidiaries on the date of this Loan Agreement; (c) the Borrower will not and will not permit any of its subsidiaries to directly or indirectly create, incur, assume or permit to exist (upon the happening of a contingency or otherwise) any lien on or with respect to any property or asset of the Borrower or such subsidiary, whether now owned or held or hereafter acquired, or any income or profits therefrom or assign or otherwise convey any right to receive such income or profits, provided that the foregoing restrictions and limitations shall not apply to: (i) liens for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges the payment of which is not yet due and payable or the payment of which is not at the time required by Section 4.1 (b) hereof, (ii) liens arising from judicial attachments and judgments, unless the judgment it secures shall not, within 60 days after the entry thereof, have been discharged or execution thereof stayed pending appeal, or shall not have been discharged within 60 days after the expiration of any such stay, (iii) statutory liens of landlords and liens of carriers, warehousemen, mechanics, materialmen, inventory suppliers and other similar Liens, in each case, incurred in the ordinary course of business for sums not yet due, (iv) leases or subleases granted to others, licenses, easements, rights-of-way, restrictions, zoning restrictions, governmental restrictions in respect of any property or property right or franchise of the Borrower or any subsidiary, minor survey exceptions and other similar charges or encumbrances, in each case incidental to, and not interfering with, the ordinary conduct of the business of the Borrower and the subsidiaries, taken as a whole, provided that such charges and encumbrances do not, in the aggregate, materially detract from the value or utility of such property, (v) liens incurred or deposits made in the ordinary course of business in connection with workers’ compensation, unemployment insurance and other types of social security or retirement benefits, or to secure (or to obtain letters of credit that secure) the performance of tenders, statutory obligations, surety bonds, appeal bonds, bids, leases, performance bonds, purchase, construction or sales contracts, leases and other similar obligations, in each case not incurred or made in connection with the borrowing of money, the obtaining of advances or credit or the payment of the deferred purchase price of property, and which liens do not, in the aggregate, materially impair the use of the property subject thereto in the operation of the business of the Borrower and the subsidiaries or the value of such property for the purposes of such business, (vi) liens existing on the Closing Date; (vii) liens created to secure all or any part of the purchase price, or to secure Indebtedness incurred or assumed to pay all or any part of the purchase price or cost of construction, of property (or any improvement thereon) acquired or constructed by the Borrower or any subsidiary, (viii) liens existing on property of a person immediately prior to its being consolidated or merged into the Borrower or any subsidiary or its becoming a subsidiary, or any lien existing on any property acquired by the Borrower or any subsidiary at the time such property is so acquired (whether or not the Indebtedness secured thereby shall have been assumed), and (ix) liens renewing, extending or replacing liens permitted by this subclause (c).

 

7


6. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

6.1 Financial Covenants . (a) The Borrower shall maintain an EBITDA to Total Interest Expense Ratio of 1.05 to 1.00 during 2006, 1.15 to 1.00 during 2007, and 1.25 to 1.00 thereafter; (b) the Borrower shall maintain an EBITDA to Senior Interest Expense Ratio of 3.00 to 1.00; (c) the Borrower shall maintain Shareholder Equity of at least $115,000,000, (d) the Borrower shall maintain Assets Under Management of at least $19,000,000,000 and (e) the Borrower shall at all times maintain a Senior Debt to EBITDA Ratio of not more than 5.0 to 1.0 during 2006 and not more than 2.75 to 1.0 thereafter.

 

7. EVENTS OF DEFAULT; RIGHTS AND REMEDIES ON DEFAULT

7.1 Events of Default . The occurrence of any one or more of the following events shall constitute an “Event of Default”: (a) (i) the failure to make any payment of principal on the Note when due as provided for herein or in the Note or (ii) the failure to make any payment of interest on the Note within 5 Business Days after the due date thereof as provided for herein or in the Note; (b) any warranty, representation or other statement made or furnished to Lender by or on behalf of Borrower or in any instrument furnished in compliance with or in reference to this Agreement proves to have been false or misleading in any material respect when made or furnished; (c) Borrower fails or neglects to perform, keep or observe any other term, provision, condition or covenant contained in this Agreement, which is required to be performed, kept or observed by Borrower and the same is not cured to Lender’s satisfaction within 30 days after such occurrence becomes known to any officer of Borrower; (d) the occurrence of any default or event of default or failure of performance on the part of Borrower or any subsidiary (including specifically, but without limitation, due to nonpayment) under any agreement, document or instrument to which Borrower or such subsidiary is a party or by which Borrower or such subsidiary is bound, creating or relating to any other Indebtedness of Borrower or such subsidiary; and (e) dissolution, termination of existence, insolvency (failure of Borrower or any subsidiary to pay its debts as they mature), appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian or similar fiduciary, assignment for the benefit of creditors or the commencement of any proceedings under the Bankruptcy Code by or against Borrower or any subsidiary (if against Borrower or a subsidiary, the continuation of such proceeding for more than 60 days).

7.2 Acceleration of the Obligations . Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default as above provided, all or any portion of the Loan due or to become due from Borrower to Lender, whether under this Agreement, the Note or otherwise, shall, at the option of Lender, and without notice or demand by Lender, become at once due and payable together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon; Borrower will thereafter forthwith pay to Lender, in addition to any and all sums and charges due, the entire principal of and interest accrued on the Loan.

7.3 Remedies . Upon and after the occurrence of an Event of Default, Lender shall have any and all rights and remedies available to Lender at law or in equity.

7.4 Remedies Cumulative . All covenants, conditions, provisions, warranties, guaranties, indemnities and other undertakings of Borrower contained in this Agreement, or in any document referred to herein or contained in any agreement supplementary hereto, or in any schedule or contained in any

 

8


other agreement between Lender and Borrower, heretofore, concurrently or hereafter entered into, shall be deemed cumulative to and not in derogation or substitution of any of the terms, covenants, conditions or agreements of Borrower herein contained.

8. GUARANTY OF LOAN – The Loan shall be guaranteed by The Phoenix Companies, Inc. on substantially the terms set forth in Exhibit B attached hereto.

9. MISCELLANEOUS

9.1 Transaction Expenses . In addition to a restructuring fee of $99,028 payable by the Borrower to Lender on the Closing Date, the Borrower will pay all costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees) incurred in connection with the Loan and in connection with any amendments, waivers or consents under or in respect of this Agreement or the Note (whether or not such amendment, waiver or consent becomes effective), including, without limitation: (a) the costs and expenses incurred in enforcing or defending (or determining whether or how to enforce or defend) any rights under this Agreement or the Note or in responding to any subpoena or other legal process or informal investigative demand issued in connection with this Agreement or the Note, or by reason of being the Lender, and (b) the costs and expenses, including financial advisors’ fees, incurred in connection with the insolvency or bankruptcy of the Borrower or any subsidiary or in connection with any work-out or restructuring (whether or not such work-out or restructuring becomes effective) of the transactions contemplated hereby and by the Note. The Borrower will also pay the reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements of counsel to the Lender incurred in connection with enforcing or defending (or determining whether or how to enforce or defend) any rights under this Agreement or the Note, responding to any subpoena or other legal process or informal investigative demand issued in connection with this Agreement or the Note, the insolvency or bankruptcy of the Borrower or any subsidiary or any work-out or restructuring (whether or not such work-out or restructuring becomes effective) of the transactions contemplated hereby and by the Note.

9.2 Survival of Representations and Warranties . All warranties and representations shall survive the making of the Loan.

9.3 Successors and Assigns . All covenants and other agreements contained in this Agreement by or on behalf of any of the parties hereto bind and inure to the benefit of their respective successors and assigns, whether so expressed or not.

9.4 Payments Due on Non-Business Days. Anything in this Agreement or the Note to the contrary notwithstanding, any payment of principal of or interest on the Note that is due on a date other than a Business Day shall be made on the next succeeding Business Day without including the additional days elapsed in the computation of the interest payable on such next succeeding Business Day.

9.5 Construction . Each covenant contained herein shall be construed (absent express provision to the contrary) as being independent of each other covenant contained herein, so that compliance with any one covenant shall not (absent such an express contrary provision) be deemed to excuse compliance with any other covenant. Where any provision herein refers to action to be taken by

 

9


any person, or which such person is prohibited from taking, such provision shall be applicable whether such action is taken directly or indirectly by such person. The headings in this Agreement and in any related agreement, document or instrument are for purposes of reference and shall not limit or otherwise affect the meaning hereof or thereof.

9.6 Severability . Wherever possible, each provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law, but if any provision of this Agreement shall be prohibited by or invalid under applicable law, such provision shall be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity, without invalidating the remainder of such provision or the remaining provisions of this Agreement.

9.7 Modification of Agreement . This Agreement and the Note may not be modified, altered or amended, except by an agreement in writing signed by Borrower and Lender.

9.8 Governing Law . THIS AGREEMENT HAS BEEN NEGOTIATED, EXECUTED AND DELIVERED AT AND SHALL BE DEEMED TO HAVE BEEN MADE AT HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. THE LOAN PROVIDED FOR HEREIN IS TO BE FUNDED AND REPAID AT AND THIS AGREEMENT IS OTHERWISE TO BE PERFORMED AT HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT AND THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE INTERPRETED, AND THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES HERETO DETERMINED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF CONNECTICUT.

9.9 Notices . Except as otherwise provided herein, any notice required hereunder shall be in writing, and shall be deemed to have been validly served, given or delivered upon deposit in the United States mails, with proper postage prepaid, and addressed to the party to be notified as set forth in the first paragraph of this Agreement or to such other address as each party may designate for itself by like notice given in accordance with this Section.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been duly executed as of the day and year specified at the beginning hereof.

 

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

By:

 

/s/ Glenn H. Pease

Name:

 

Glenn H. Pease

Title:

 

Vice President, Finance

PHOENIX LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY

By:

 

/s/ Christopher Wilkos

Name:

 

Christopher Wilkos

Title:

 

Sr. Vice President

Payments of interest and principal shall be made by the Borrower as follows:

 

10


EXHIBIT A

[FORM OF NOTE]

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Senior Note Due December 30, 2010

 

$ 66,018,833   December 30, 2005
Registration No.        Hartford, Connecticut

FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned, PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD., a Delaware corporation (herein called the “Borrower”), hereby promises to pay to PHOENIX LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY, or registered assigns, the principal sum of SIXTY SIX MILLION EIGHTEEN THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED and THIRTY THREE DOLLARS ($66,018,833) with interest (computed on the basis of a 360-day year and the actual number of days elapsed) (a) on the unpaid balance thereof at a rate equal to the Interest Rate as defined and in that certain Loan Agreement between the Borrower and Phoenix Life Insurance Company dated as of December 30, 2005, as amended from time to time (the “Loan Agreement”), from the date hereof, as provided in the Loan Agreement, and (b) to the extent permitted by law, on any overdue payment or prepayment of principal and any overdue payment of interest, at a rate per annum from time to time equal to Interest Rate plus 2.0% per annum, payable on demand. Commencing on March 31, 2006 and in accordance with the Loan Agreement on every Interest Payment Date thereafter though September 30, 2010, the Borrower shall pay all quarterly interest and a principal payment of $3,000,000 and on December 30, 2010 the Borrower shall pay all remaining principal and accrued interest.

Payments of principal of and interest with respect to this Note are to be made in lawful money of the United States of America at Hartford, Connecticut or at such other place as the Borrower shall have designated by written notice to the holder of this Note as provided in the Loan Agreements.

This Note is the sole senior promissory note issued pursuant to the Loan Agreement.

This Note is a registered Note and, upon surrender of this Note for registration of transfer, duly endorsed, or accompanied by a written instrument of transfer duly executed, by the registered holder hereof or such holder’s attorney duly authorized in writing, a new Senior Note for a like principal amount will be issued to, and registered in the name of, the transferee. Prior to due presentment for registration of transfer, the Borrower may treat the person in whose name this Note is registered as the owner hereof for the purpose of receiving payment and for all other purposes, and the Borrower will not be affected by any notice to the contrary. Presentment of this Note for payment is hereby waived.

This Note is subject to prepayment, in whole or from time to time in part, at the times and on the terms specified in the Loan Agreement, but not otherwise.

If an Event of Default, as defined in the Loan Agreement, occurs and is continuing, the principal of this Note may be declared or otherwise become due and payable in the manner and with the effect provided in the Loan Agreement.

 

11


THIS NOTE SHALL BE CONSTRUED AND ENFORCED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAW OF THE STATE OF CONNECTICUT, EXCLUDING CHOICE-OF-LAW PRINCIPLES OF THE LAW OF SUCH STATE THAT WOULD REQUIRE THE APPLICATION OF THE LAWS OF A JURISDICTION OTHER THAN SUCH STATE.

 

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

By

 

 

Its

 

 


EXHIBIT B

GUARANTY AGREEMENT

THIS GUARANTY AGREEMENT, executed as of the 30 th day of December 2005, by and between Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd., a Delaware corporation (“PXP”) and The Phoenix Companies, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“Parent”).

RECITALS

PXP wishes to refinance its existing indebtedness to Phoenix Life Insurance Company (“Phoenix Life”) pursuant to a Loan Agreement dated as of February 26, 2001. To effect that refinancing, Phoenix Life and PXP have entered into a a Loan Agreement dated as of December 30, 2005 (“Loan Agreement”) pursuant to which PXP has issued a Note in the amount of $66,018,833 payable to Phoenix Life (“Senior Note”), which Note will be guaranteed by the Parent. As Parent believes this arrangement to be in the best interest of both PXP and Phoenix Life, it has agreed to enter into this Guaranty Agreement.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto do hereby agree as follows.

Section 1. Guaranty . Parent hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees the full and punctual payment (whether at stated maturity, upon acceleration or otherwise) of the principal of and interest on the Senior Note issued by PXP and the full and punctual payment of all obligations of PXP under the Loan Agreement. Upon failure by PXP to pay punctually any such amount, the Parent shall forthwith on demand pay the amount not so paid at the place and in the manner specified in the Loan Agreement.

Section 2. Guaranty Unconditional . The obligations of the Parent under this Guaranty Agreement shall be unconditional and absolute and, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, shall not be released, discharged or otherwise affected by:

 

  (i) any extension, renewal, settlement, compromise, waiver or release in respect of any obligation of PXP under the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note, by operation of law or otherwise;

 

  (ii) any modification or amendment of or supplement to the Loan Agreement or Senior Note;

 

  (iii) any release, impairment, non-perfection or invalidity of any direct or indirect security for any obligation of PXP under the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note;

 

  (iv) any change in the corporate existence, structure or ownership of PXP or any insolvency, bankruptcy, reorganization or other similar proceeding affecting PXP or its assets or any resulting release or discharge of any obligation of PXP contained in the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note;

 

13


  (v) the existence of any claim, set-off or other right which the Parent may have at any time against PXP, or any other person, whether in connection with the Loan Agreement or any unrelated transaction, provided that nothing herein shall prevent the assertion of any such claim by separate suit or compulsory counterclaim;

 

  (vi) any validity or unenforceability relating to or against PXP for any reason of the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note, or any provision of applicable law or regulation purporting to prohibit the payment by PXP of the principal of or interest on the Senior Note or any other amount payable by PXP under the Loan Agreement; or

 

  (vii) any other act or omission to act or delay of any kind by PXP or any other person, or any other circumstance whatsoever which might, but for the provisions of this paragraph, constitute a legal or equitable discharge of PXP or of the Parent’s obligations as guarantor hereunder.

Section 3. Discharge Only Upon Payment in Full; Reinstatement in Certain Circumstances . The Parent’s obligations as guarantor hereunder shall remain in full force and effect until all obligations of PXP pursuant to the Loan Agreement and the Senior Note shall have been indefeasibly paid in full. If at any time any payment of principal, interest or any other amount payable by PXP under the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note is rescinded or must be otherwise restored or returned upon the insolvency, bankruptcy or reorganization of PXP or otherwise, the Parent’s obligations hereunder with respect to such payment shall be reinstated as though such payment had been due but not made at such time.

Section 4. Waiver by the Parent. The Parent irrevocably waives acceptance hereof, presentment, demand, protest and any notice not provided for herein, as well as any requirement that at any time any action be taken by any person against PXP or any other person.

Section 5. Subrogation. Notwithstanding any payment made by or for the account of the Parent pursuant to this Guaranty Agreement, the Parent shall not be subrogated to any right of Phoenix Life until such time as Phoenix Life shall have received final payment in cash of the full amount of all obligations pursuant to the Loan Agreement and the Senior Note.

Section 6. Stay of Acceleration . If acceleration of the time for payment of any amount payable by PXP under the Loan Agreement or the Senior Note is stayed upon the insolvency, bankruptcy or reorganization of PXP, all such amounts otherwise subject to acceleration under the terms of the Loan Agreement shall nonetheless be payable by the Parent under this Guaranty Agreement forthwith on demand by Phoenix Life.

Section 7. Governing Law. This Guaranty Agreement shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Connecticut.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement by their undersigned duly authorized officers.

 

14


THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By  

 

Its  

 

PHOENIX LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
By  

 

Its  

 

 

15

Exhibit 10.10

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD

FIRST AMENDMENT

Dated as of June 1, 2006

to

LOAN AGREEMENT

Dated as of December 30, 2005

Re: $66,018,833 – 6.55% Senior Note Due December 30, 2010


FIRST AMENDMENT TO LOAN AGREEMENT

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT dated as of June 1, 2006 to the Loan Agreement dated as of December 30, 2005 is between Phoenix Investment Partners, LTD. a Delaware corporation (the “Company”) and Phoenix Life Insurance company (the “Noteholder”).

RECITALS:

A. The Company and the Noteholder have heretofore entered into the Loan Agreement dated as of December 30, 2005 (the “Loan Agreement”). The Company has heretofore issued the $66,018,833 6.55% Senior Note Due December 30, 2010 (the “Note”) dated December 30, 2005 pursuant to the Loan Agreement.

B. The Company and the Noteholder now desire to amend the Loan Agreement in the respects, but only in the respects, hereinafter set forth.

NOW, THEREFORE, the Company and the Noteholder, in consideration of good and valuable consideration the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, do hereby agree as follows:

Section 7.1 (a) (i) of the Loan Agreement shall be and is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows:

the failure to make any payment of principal on the Note when due as provided for herein or in the Note, provided, however, that the Borrower shall in each calendar year, be entitled to one (1) grace period of five (5) Business Days as to any required payment of principal other than a principal payment due on December 31; and, provided further, that additional interest accrued as a result of the election by Borrower to avail itself of such grace period shall, at the option of the Borrower, be paid by Borrower at the time of making such deferred payment or at the time of the next scheduled principal payment or

This First Amendment shall be construed in connection with and as part of the Loan Agreement, and except as modified and expressly amended by this amendment, all terms, conditions and covenants contained in the Loan Agreement and the Note are hereby ratified and shall be and remain in full force and effect. Any and all notices, requests, certificates and other instruments executed and delivered after the execution and delivery of this amendment may refer to the Loan Agreement without making specific reference to this amendment but nevertheless all such references shall be deemed to include this amendment unless the context otherwise requires. This First Amendment shall be governed by and construed in accordance with Connecticut law.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Company and the Noteholder have caused this instrument to be executed, all as of the day and year first above written.

 

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.
By:  

/s/ Glenn H. Pease

  Its Vice President, Finance
PHOENIX LIFE INSURANCE COMPANY
BY:  

/s/ John H. Beers

  John H. Beers
  Its Vice President

 

3

Table of Contents

EXHIBIT 99.1

LOGO

December 23, 2008

Dear Stockholder of The Phoenix Companies, Inc.:

We are pleased to inform you that on December 12, 2008, the board of directors of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”) approved the spin-off of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”), a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX, into an independent publicly traded asset management firm. When the spin-off is completed, PNX will be primarily a life and annuity business, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in our financial statements as our Life and Annuity segment, as well as the assets and business of our wholly owned subsidiary, Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc.

The spin-off will occur on December 31, 2008 through a pro rata distribution of Company common stock to PNX’s stockholders. This means each PNX stockholder will receive one share of Company common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock held at 5 p.m., New York City time, on December 22, 2008, the record date of the spin-off. The distribution will be made in book-entry form. We intend that the Company common stock you receive in the spin-off (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash) will be treated as a taxable distribution for U.S. federal income tax purposes. You should consult your own tax advisor regarding the particular consequences of the spin-off to you.

Following the spin-off, you will own shares in both PNX and the Company. PNX common stock will continue to trade on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PNX.” The shares of Company common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.” Stockholder approval of the spin-off is not required, and you do not need to take any action to receive your Company common stock.

The spin-off will create two separate companies. We believe it will enhance value for PNX stockholders by allowing PNX and the Company to each focus on maximizing their own, distinct opportunities.

The enclosed information statement is being mailed to all PNX stockholders. It describes the spin-off in detail and contains important information about the Company, including its financial statements.

I look forward to your continued support as a stockholder and remain committed to working on your behalf to build long-term value.

Sincerely,

LOGO

Dona D. Young

Chairman, President and

Chief Executive Officer

LOGO


Table of Contents

LOGO

December 23, 2008

Dear Stockholder of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.:

It is my pleasure to welcome you as a future stockholder of our new company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”). Our strategy as an independent publicly traded company is to maximize value to our stockholders by building on our current strengths and capitalizing on the opportunities we see in the market where we believe we can be competitive and achieve growth.

We will continue to maintain, extend and improve our product offerings by leveraging the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers and subadvisers, as well as attracting new investment management talent and developing new products to meet the evolving needs of our distribution partners and clients. We also believe we can grow by expanding our current relationships with select distributors that have the capacity to sell a larger volume and broader array of our products. Other key elements of our strategy include attracting and retaining talented personnel in both investment management and distribution in order to better serve our key distribution partners and their clients, and enhancing our shared service model to build greater efficiency and economies of scale into our business.

I invite you to learn more about the Company by reviewing the enclosed information statement. We look forward to our future as an independent publicly traded company and to your support as a holder of our common stock.

Sincerely,

LOGO

George R. Aylward, Jr.

President and Chief Executive Officer

LOGO


Table of Contents

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION STATEMENT

 

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Common Stock

(par value $.01 per share)

This information statement is being furnished in connection with the distribution to holders of common stock, par value $.01 per share, of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”) of all of the outstanding shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share, of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”).

We are currently a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in PNX’s financial statements as PNX’s Asset Management segment and operating as the Company, but excluding the assets and business of PNX’s wholly owned subsidiary, Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc. (“Goodwin”).

Shares of our common stock will be distributed to holders of PNX common stock of record as of the close of business on December 22, 2008 (the “record date”). These stockholders will receive one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock held on the record date. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form. The spin-off will be effective at 5:00 p.m., New York City time on December 31, 2008. PNX intends the spin-off to be a taxable transaction for U.S. federal income tax purposes.

No stockholder approval of the spin-off is required or sought. We are not asking you for a proxy and you are requested not to send us a proxy. PNX stockholders will not be required to pay for the shares of our common stock to be received by them in the spin-off or to surrender or exchange shares of PNX common stock in order to receive our common stock or to take any other action in connection with the spin-off.

There is no current trading market for our common stock. However, we expect that a limited market, commonly known as a “when-issued” trading market, for our common stock will develop on or shortly before the record date for the spin-off, and we expect that “regular way” trading of our common stock will begin the first trading day after the spin-off. The shares of our common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.”

In reviewing this information statement, you should carefully consider the matters described under “ Risk Factors ” for a discussion of certain factors that should be considered by recipients of our common stock.

 

 

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this information statement is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

This information statement does not constitute an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to buy any securities.

 

 

The date of this information statement is December 23, 2008.


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page

Questions and Answers About the Company and the Spin-Off

   1

Summary

   5

Risk Factors

   16

Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements

   26

The Spin-Off

   27

Dividend Policy

   32

Capitalization

   33

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

   35

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data

   37

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

   46

Business

   77

Management

   92

Corporate Governance

   97

Compensation of Executive Officers

   99

Compensation of Directors

   126

Security Ownership by Certain Beneficial Owners and Management

   127

Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off

   130

Description of Our Capital Stock

   136

Equity Investment

   145

Indemnification and Limitation of Liability of Directors and Officers

   150

Description of Indebtedness

   151

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   151

Where You Can Find More Information

   152

Index to Consolidated Financial Statements

   F-1

This information statement is being furnished solely to provide information to PNX stockholders who will receive shares of our common stock in the distribution. It is not and is not to be construed as an inducement or encouragement to buy or sell any of our securities or any securities of PNX. This information statement describes our business, our relationship with PNX and how the spin-off affects PNX and its stockholders, and provides other information to assist you in evaluating the benefits and risks of holding or disposing of our common stock that you will receive in the distribution. You should be aware of certain risks relating to the spin-off, our business and ownership of our common stock, which are described under the heading “Risk Factors.”

You should not assume that the information contained in this information statement is accurate as of any date other than the date set forth on the cover. Changes to the information contained in this information statement may occur after that date, and we undertake no obligation to update the information, except in the normal course of our public disclosure obligations and practices.


Table of Contents

QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ABOUT THE COMPANY AND THE SPIN-OFF

 

Q: Why am I receiving this document?

 

A: PNX is delivering this document to you because you were a holder of PNX common stock on the record date for the distribution of shares of our common stock. Accordingly, you are entitled to receive one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock that you held on the record date. No action is required for you to participate in the distribution.

 

Q: What is the spin-off?

 

A: The spin-off is the overall transaction of separating the Company from PNX, which will be accomplished through a series of transactions which will result in our stockholders owning the Asset Management business operated by PNX and currently reported in its financial statements as its Asset Management segment, but excluding the assets and business of Goodwin. The final step of the transactions will be the pro rata distribution of our common stock by PNX to holders of PNX common stock (the “distribution”).

 

Q: What is the Company?

 

A: We are an existing majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, providing investment management products and services to individuals and institutions.

 

Q: Why is PNX separating the Company and distributing its stock?

 

A: PNX and the Company are fundamentally different types of businesses, and the separation of the two businesses will help highlight unique characteristics and values of these businesses for investors and better position each company to access the capital markets. The separation of the Asset Management business from PNX will result in two separate companies that can each focus on maximizing opportunities for its distinct business. We believe this separation will present the opportunity for enhanced performance of each of the two companies.

PNX’s board of directors has determined that separating the Asset Management business from PNX is in the best interests of PNX and its stockholders. The following potential benefits were considered by PNX’s board of directors in making the determination to effect the spin-off:

 

   

allowing each company to separately pursue the business strategies that best suit its long-term interests;

 

   

creating separate companies that have different financial characteristics, which may appeal to different investor bases and allow for clarity on valuation of the respective businesses;

 

   

creating opportunities to more efficiently develop and finance ongoing operations and future acquisitions;

 

   

allowing each company to establish an expense structure appropriate for its business and size; and

 

   

creating effective management incentives tied to each company’s performance.

For a further explanation of the reasons for the spin-off and more information about our business, see “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off” and “Business.”

 

Q: Why is the separation of the two companies structured as a spin-off?

 

A: PNX’s board of directors believes that a distribution of shares of our common stock is a cost-effective way to separate the companies.

 

Q: What is the record date for the distribution?

 

A: The record date is December 22, 2008, and ownership will be determined as of 5:00 p.m., New York City Time, on that date.

 

1


Table of Contents
Q: When will the distribution occur?

 

A: Shares of our common stock will be distributed on or about December 31, 2008 (the “distribution date”).

 

Q: Can PNX decide to cancel the distribution of Company common stock even if all the conditions have been met?

 

A: Yes. The distribution is conditioned upon satisfaction or waiver of certain conditions. See “The Spin-Off—Spin-Off Conditions and Termination.” PNX has the right to terminate the stock distribution, even if all of these conditions are met, if at any time PNX’s board of directors determines, in its sole discretion, that PNX and the Company are better served being a combined company, thereby making the distribution not in the best interest of PNX and its stockholders.

 

Q: What will happen to the listing of PNX common stock?

 

A: Nothing. PNX common stock will continue to be traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PNX.”

 

Q: Will the spin-off affect the market price of my shares of PNX common stock?

 

A: Yes. As a result of the spin-off, we expect the trading price of your shares of PNX common stock immediately following the distribution date to be lower than immediately prior to the distribution date because the trading price will no longer reflect the value of the Company business. In addition, until the market has fully analyzed the operations of PNX without this business, the price of your shares of PNX common stock may fluctuate significantly. Furthermore, the combined trading prices of PNX common stock and our common stock after the distribution date may be less than the trading price of PNX common stock prior to the distribution date.

 

Q: What will PNX stockholders receive in the spin-off?

 

A: In the spin-off, PNX stockholders will receive one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock they own as of the record date of the spin-off. No fractional shares will be issued. Those stockholders who would otherwise be entitled to receive fractional shares will receive cash in lieu of fractional shares. For example, a PNX stockholder that holds 210 shares of PNX common stock as of the record date will, after the spin-off, (i) continue to hold 210 shares of PNX common stock and (ii) receive 10 shares of Company common stock and cash in lieu of fractional shares. Immediately after the spin-off, PNX stockholders will still own their shares of PNX common stock and the same stockholders will still own all of PNX’s current businesses, but they will own them as two separate investments rather than as a single investment.

After the spin-off, the certificates and book-entry interests representing the “old” PNX common stock will represent such stockholders’ interests in the PNX businesses following the spin-off, excluding the Company but including Goodwin, and the book-entry interests representing our common stock that such stockholders receive in the spin-off will represent their interest in our Asset Management business only.

 

Q: What does a PNX stockholder need to do now?

 

A: PNX stockholders do not need to take any action, although we urge you to read this entire document carefully. The approval of the PNX stockholders is not required or sought to effect the spin-off and PNX stockholders have no appraisal rights in connection with the spin-off. PNX is not seeking a proxy from any stockholders and you are requested not to send us a proxy.

PNX stockholders will not be required to pay anything for the shares of our common stock distributed in the spin-off or to surrender any shares of PNX common stock. PNX stockholders should not send in their PNX share certificates. PNX stockholders will automatically receive their shares of our common stock when the spin-off is effected and will receive cash for any fractional shares.

 

2


Table of Contents
Q: Are there risks to owning Company common stock?

 

A: Yes. Our business is subject to both general and specific risks relating to our operations. In addition, our spin-off from PNX presents risks relating to our becoming an independent publicly traded company as well as risks relating to the nature of the spin-off transaction itself.

 

Q: What are the U.S. federal income tax consequences of the spin-off to PNX stockholders?

 

A: It is intended that the spin-off will be a taxable transaction for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Accordingly, a taxable U.S. stockholder receiving shares of our common stock (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash) in the spin-off will be treated as if such stockholder had received a taxable distribution in an amount equal to the fair market value of our common stock received (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash). Such distribution will be treated as a dividend to the extent of PNX’s current and accumulated earnings and profits, which subject to certain limitations may be taxable to individuals at a reduced rate of 15%. To the extent in excess of our earnings and profits, the receipt of our common stock will generally result in a reduction of a stockholder’s basis in PNX common stock and capital gain to the extent of any excess. Capital gains may be taxable at a reduced rate of 15% for individuals that have held their shares of PNX common stock for more than one year. In addition, a stockholder’s tax basis in our common stock will be equal to its fair market value at the time of the spin-off and the holding period in our common stock will begin the day after the spin-off. Depending on the circumstances, a non-U.S. stockholder may be subject to a withholding tax at a rate of 30% on the fair market value of the common stock received by such stockholder (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash), unless such stockholder is entitled to an exemption from or reduction in withholding under the benefit of an applicable income tax treaty or the amount treated as a taxable dividend is effectively connected with such non-U.S. stockholder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States, and the stockholder provides to us appropriate certification.

See “The Spin-off—Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Spin-off.”

You should consult your own tax advisor as to the particular consequences of the spin-off to you.

 

Q: What if I want to sell my PNX common stock or my Company common stock?

 

A: You should consult with your own financial advisors, such as your stockbroker, bank or tax advisor. PNX does not make any recommendations on the purchase, retention or sale of shares of PNX common stock or our common stock to be distributed.

If you do decide to sell any shares, you should make sure your stockbroker, bank or other nominee understands whether you want to sell your PNX common stock or your Company common stock after it is distributed, or both.

 

Q: Where will I be able to trade shares of my Company common stock?

 

A: There is not currently a public market for our common stock. The shares of our common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.” We anticipate that trading in shares of our common stock will begin on a “when-issued” basis on or shortly before the record date and before the distribution date, and “regular way” trading will begin on the first trading day following the distribution date. If trading does begin on a “when-issued” basis, you may purchase or sell our common stock after that time, but your transaction will not settle until after the distribution date. On the first trading day following the distribution date, when-issued trading in respect of our common stock will end and regular way trading will begin. We cannot predict the trading prices for our common stock before or after the distribution date.

 

3


Table of Contents
Q: Where can PNX stockholders get more information?

 

A: Before the distribution, if you have any questions relating to the distribution, you should contact:

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

Investor Relations

One American Row

Hartford, CT 06102

Telephone: (860) 403-7100

After the distribution, if you have any questions relating to our common stock, you should contact:

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Investor Relations

100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

Telephone: (800) 248-7971

 

Q: Who will be the distribution agent, transfer agent and registrar for Company common stock?

 

A: The distribution agent for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services LLC.

After the distribution, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services LLC.

 

4


Table of Contents

SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this information statement and may not contain all of the information that may be important to you. For a complete understanding of the Asset Management business and the spin-off, you should read this summary together with the more detailed information and the Company financial statements appearing elsewhere in this information statement. You should read this entire information statement carefully, including the “Risk Factors” and “Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements” sections.

References in this information statement to (1) the “Company,” “Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.,” “Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.,” “we,” “us” or “our” refer to Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, and (2) “PNX” refer collectively to The Phoenix Companies, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, in each case, unless the context otherwise requires. The transaction in which the Company will be separated from PNX and become an independent publicly traded company is referred to in this information statement as the “spin-off.”

Our Company

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

Our Strengths

We believe the following business strengths position us to capitalize on the opportunities presented by the market for asset management products and services:

 

   

We offer our clients investment capabilities across a broad range of products. Our roster of affiliated managers and unaffiliated sub-advisors is comprised of investment management teams with expertise across a spectrum of investment capabilities. We have capabilities in traditional categories such as core, value and international equity, fixed income and money market, as well as specialized categories such as REITs and utilities. As of September 30, 2008, 61%, 69% and 63% of our third-party assets under management were in the top third of relative peer groups on a one, three and five year basis, respectively. See “Business—Our Performance” for additional information.

 

 

5


Table of Contents
   

We offer products in multiple styles and multiple disciplines. Unlike many competitors of a similar size, our product set is highly diversified by manager, style and discipline. Our products are managed by a number of different managers, both affiliated and unaffiliated. We have multiple offerings by asset category (equity, fixed income, money market and alternative), in all market-caps (large, mid and small), in different styles (growth, blend and value) and with various investment approaches (fundamental, quantitative, thematic). By offering a broad array of products, we believe we can appeal to a greater number of investors and be less exposed to changes in market cycles and investor preferences. This provides the opportunity to participate in growth opportunities across different market cycles.

 

   

We distribute through multiple channels, with particular strength in retail distribution. We operate in both the institutional and retail markets. In retail markets, we have a broad presence in the national, regional and independent broker-dealer firms that are the major distributors of mutual funds and separately managed accounts to retail customers. In many of these firms, we have a number of products that are on the firms’ preferred “recommended” lists and on fee-based advisory programs. In 2007, our gross sales of retail mutual funds were $3.4 billion.

 

   

We provide an attractive environment for investment teams. Our affiliated managers maintain their own identity and participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements. They are supported by shared distribution and administrative services, allowing them to focus their time and attention on managing client assets. We believe we provide an attractive environment for investment management professionals, which allows us to retain talent and attract new high-performing managers, teams and firms.

 

   

We have a strong and active product management and development capability. We have developed an active product management capability to allow for the continuous improvement of our product line. In our retail business, from 2005 through 2007 we completed 57 fund actions, comprised of launching or adopting new funds, changing sub-advisors and merging or liquidating funds. In addition, we have developed a number of new products that leverage our existing capabilities, through product line extensions such as our alternative fund of funds, Diversifier, and a new international REIT offering, or by identifying and acquiring new capabilities, such as our partnership with Vontobel Asset Management, the sub-advisor to our $1.1 billion Foreign Opportunities Fund.

Our Strategy

We believe we can enhance stockholder value by building upon our strengths and effectively executing the following strategies:

 

   

Maintain, extend and improve our offerings of high quality investment management capabilities. Our goal is to provide the highest quality products possible to our clients. In product categories where we do not have the capability from our affiliated managers, we partner with unaffiliated sub-advisors, selecting managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers. We manage our product offerings in the same fashion that our distribution partners balance and manage their clientele’s portfolios, seeking to maximize returns while minimizing risks via a diversified, balanced suite of offerings with a long-term horizon.

 

   

Leverage our internal capabilities to develop new products. We intend to leverage our affiliated portfolio management capabilities by offering those capabilities in other product forms and extending them into new strategies. For example, our domestic REIT strategy was first developed for a closed-end fund, and was then introduced as an open-end fund, made available as an institutional account and within a variable annuity product. We then extended that domestic strategy into an international REIT offering in October 2007. We intend to seek to take similar steps with other

 

 

6


Table of Contents
 

investment capabilities. We also intend to continue to develop and introduce new offerings to meet the evolving needs of investors and to identify strong performing additional products that can be added to our line-up.

 

   

Build upon our current distribution access to generate higher levels of sales. We intend to selectively expand our distribution resources, including sales and relationship personnel. In the retail business, our wholesaling force is smaller than those of many of our competitors. We believe we can build upon the growth we have seen in the retail market by expanding these resources. In addition, through our intermediaries, we currently do business with a large number of producers that employ only one or two of our products. Our strategy is to focus on these producers in order to become one of their preferred mutual fund families. We believe this can be accomplished through appropriate incentives, focused activities and targeted marketing efforts. We also intend to expand into specific growth areas where we have a smaller presence, such as the registered investment advisors (“RIA”) channel. This channel is one of the fastest growing components of the advisory industry.

 

   

Develop and attract additional high-caliber investment professionals. We believe we can attract high-caliber investment management professionals based on the relative attractiveness of our business model, which allows each affiliated manager to maintain its identity and participate in the earnings it generates. We intend to employ a variety of approaches to grow in this manner, including the expansion of existing teams and direct hiring of new teams. Similarly, we believe the structure of our business is attractive to sub-advisors looking for distribution and other support.

 

   

Enhance our shared administrative and distribution services and achieve greater economies of scale. We intend to continue to enhance our shared services to allow for even greater efficiencies and economies of scale. The spin-off provides several opportunities to enhance the scope of the shared services we provide to our affiliated managers. Specifically, we will now have control over the costs related to all forms of shared services and the ability to deploy expenditures to best serve a stand-alone asset management business. We believe the spin-off will provide additional savings related to costs shared with PNX, primarily facilities and administrative support.

We believe that we have an opportunity to expand our profit margins by increasing assets under management and associated revenues while applying disciplined expense management. Generally speaking, we believe that in the asset management business an increase in assets under management to certain levels does not result in additional material fixed costs.

Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in PNX’s financial statements as PNX’s Asset Management segment and operating as the Company, but excluding the assets and business of Goodwin.

We describe in this information statement PNX’s Asset Management business that will be owned by us following the spin-off as if it were our sole business for all historical periods described. However, we are currently a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX that also owns other assets and is engaged, indirectly, in other businesses which will not be part of the Company following the spin-off. References in this document to our historical assets, liabilities, products, business, operations or activities generally refer to the historical assets, liabilities, products, business, operations or activities of PNX’s Asset Management business as it was conducted as part of PNX and its subsidiaries, including the Company and its subsidiaries, before the spin-off. Our historical financial results as part of PNX contained in this information statement may not be indicative of our financial results in the future as an independent company or reflect what our financial results would have been had we been an independent company during the periods presented.

 

 

7


Table of Contents

Summary Consolidated Financial Data

The following tables set forth our summary consolidated financial data. The summary results of operations data for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement, which have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“GAAP”). The results of operations data for the nine months ended September 30, 2007 and September 30, 2008 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement. The unaudited consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as our audited consolidated financial statements and in our opinion include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments that we consider necessary for a fair statement of our results of operations and financial position for these periods and as of such dates.

The following tables also present our summary unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information, which has been derived from our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Years Ended December 31,  
       2008     Pro Forma
2008
    2007    2007     Pro Forma
2007
   2006     2005  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

                

Total revenues

   $ 143.4     $ 125.7     $ 170.0    $ 226.2     $ 203.3    $ 218.6     $ 237.4  

Total operating expenses

     589.6       574.5       166.1      220.9       198.6      262.5       256.5  

Operating income (loss)

     (446.2 )     (448.8 )     3.9      5.3       4.7      (43.9 )     (19.1 )

Net income (loss)

     (349.9 )     (351.5 )     10.2      (14.2 )     2.3      (47.6 )     (33.1 )

Adjusted net income(1)

    
13.6
 
     
13.5
     16.5          5.0       4.8  

Cash Flow Data

                

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

   $ (2.8 )     $ 4.8    $ 13.0        $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Capital expenditures

     (2.4 )       —        (0.5 )        (1.6 )     (0.8 )

EBITDA(2)

     7.8            38.1          26.2       22.1  
     As of September 30    As of December 31,  
     2008     Pro Forma
2008
    2007    2007          2006     2005  

Balance Sheet Data

                

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 44.5     $ 32.8    $ 36.8        $ 33.9     $ 23.8  

Current assets (including cash and cash equivalents)

     60.9       81.7       83.0      83.1          82.2       66.3  

Total assets

     365.0       274.3       760.7      752.2          781.1       825.0  

Current liabilities (excluding current maturities of notes payable)

     55.4       37.6       56.9      74.3          71.0       54.0  

Notes payable to related parties (including current maturities)

     33.0       20.0       370.0      42.0          436.3       508.1  

Other liabilities

     1.7       12.5       29.6      11.0          20.3       35.9  

Convertible preferred equity

     —         45.0       —        —            —         —    

Stockholder’s equity

     274.9       159.2       304.2      624.9          253.5       227.0  

Assets Under Management

                
($ in billions)                                         

Total assets(3)

   $ 41.2       $ 59.4    $ 55.5        $ 58.1     $ 50.9  

Third-party assets(3)

     28.7         46.5      42.5          45.0       37.4  

Pro forma assets(3)

     27.0         44.4      40.4          43.6       35.7  

 

Notes to Summary Consolidated Financial Data

 

(1)

The supplemental performance measure “adjusted net income” is provided in addition to net income, but is not a substitute for net income determined in accordance with GAAP and may not be comparable to other

 

 

8


Table of Contents
 

non-GAAP performance measures, including measures of cash earnings or cash income, of other companies. Furthermore, adjusted net income is not a liquidity measure and should not be used in place of cash flow measures determined in accordance with GAAP. We consider adjusted net income, regularly used in the asset management business, to be a meaningful operating measure of our financial performance. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure when evaluating the performance of the Company and believe the presentation of these amounts provides the reader with information to better analyze the Company’s operations for the periods presented. See our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of net income to adjusted net income in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measures.”

 

(2) The supplemental measure “EBITDA,” a non-GAAP liquidity measure, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry.

 

(3) “Total assets” reflect all related party and unrelated party assets managed by the Company, including PNX’s general account. Historical financial results included in this information statement are presented using total assets as the basis of the Company’s operations. “Third-party assets” are total assets excluding PNX’s general account. Historical financial results of the Asset Management segment of PNX are presented using third-party assets as the basis of the segment’s operations. “Pro forma assets” exclude Goodwin’s portion of PNX’s general account as well as third-party institutional assets managed by Goodwin. Pro forma financial results included in this information statement, as well as the Company’s future results, are presented using pro forma assets as the basis of the Company’s operations.

Our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statements have been prepared to reflect adjustments to our historical financial information to give effect to the distribution of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX and the following transactions, as if these transactions had been completed at earlier dates:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

Operating costs related to human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax service were previously charged to the Company by PNX. Costs for these functions are now directly incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been adjusted to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. This resulted in net cost adjustments of ($4.7) million and ($1.9) million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company (“Phoenix Life”). The Company will seek to renegotiate and keep approximately $20.0 million of this indebtedness outstanding on a third-party, arm’s-length basis. The pro forma financial presentation assumes a renegotiated interest rate on this indebtedness of LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation on or after the distribution date.

 

   

Sale of $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock to Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”). On October 30, 2008, the Company signed a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, to take a 23% equity position in the Company in connection with the spin-off.

 

 

9


Table of Contents

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were generated primarily by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets, as well as due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off that may result in all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers to not be available to the Company following the spin-off. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial data presented for the year ended December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 is derived from our audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007 and our unaudited consolidated financial statements for the nine months ended September 30, 2008. The unaudited pro forma consolidated results of operations data for the year ended December 31, 2007 and the nine months ended September 30, 2008 assumes the items listed above occurred as of January 1, 2007. For a more complete explanation see “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data.”

Our consolidated financial information may not be indicative of our future performance and does not necessarily reflect what our financial condition and results of operations would have been had we operated as a separate, stand-alone entity during the periods presented, including many changes that will occur in the operations and capitalization of the Company as a result of our separation from PNX.

 

 

10


Table of Contents

Summary of the Spin-Off

The following is a summary of the terms of the spin-off. See “The Spin-Off” for a more detailed description of the matters described below.

 

Distributing company

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

 

Distributed company

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

 

Distribution ratio

Each holder of PNX common stock will receive a dividend of one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock held on the record date.

 

Securities to be distributed

Shares of our common stock and accompanying share purchase rights, which will constitute all of the outstanding shares of our common stock immediately after the spin-off. The number of shares that PNX will distribute to its stockholders will be reduced to the extent that cash payments are to be made in lieu of the issuance of fractional shares of Company common stock, as described below. See “Description of our Capital Stock—Common Stock” and “Description of our Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Provisions—Rights Agreement.”

 

Fractional shares

PNX will not distribute any fractional shares of our common stock to its stockholders. Instead, the distribution agent will aggregate fractional shares into whole shares, sell the whole shares in the open market at prevailing market prices and distribute the aggregate net cash proceeds of the sales pro rata to each holder of PNX common stock who otherwise would have been entitled to receive a fractional share in the distribution. Recipients of cash in lieu of fractional shares will not be entitled to any interest on the amounts of payment made in lieu of fractional shares.

 

Record date

The record date is the close of business on December 22, 2008. In order to be entitled to receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off, holders of shares of PNX common stock must be stockholders as of the close of business on the record date.

 

Distribution date

The distribution date will be on or about December 31, 2008.

 

Relationship between the Company and PNX after the spin-off

After the spin-off, neither PNX nor the Company will have any ownership interest in the other, and each of PNX and the Company will be an independent publicly traded company. In connection with the spin-off, we are entering into a number of transitional agreements with PNX that will govern our future relationship with PNX. Under these transitional agreements, we expect PNX will provide us with the following transition services, among others: information technology support, human resources, legal and other limited services consistent with past practices. We will also enter into other agreements with PNX providing for the allocation of tax benefits, employee matters and liabilities arising from periods prior to the spin-off. We may enter

 

 

11


Table of Contents
 

into other agreements with PNX prior to or concurrently with the distribution that would relate to other aspects of our relationship with PNX following the spin-off. See “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.”

 

Management of the Company

Following the spin-off, we will have an initial board of directors (the “Board”) consisting of nine directors. Our certificate of incorporation and our bylaws will provide that our Board is divided into three classes. The term of the first class of directors expires at our 2009 annual meeting of stockholders, the term of the second class of directors expires at our 2010 annual meeting of stockholders and the term of the third class of directors expires at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. At each of our annual meetings of stockholders, the successors of the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting of stockholders will be elected for a three year term, one class being elected each year by our stockholders. See “Management—Board of Directors.”

 

Description of indebtedness

We currently intend to obtain new third-party financing, the proceeds of which will be used to pay down certain existing related party payables, the outstanding balance on our notes payable to Phoenix Life, to provide for our working capital requirements, to support letters of credit and for other general corporate requirements, including the financing of acquisitions. See “Description of Indebtedness” and Notes 9 and 15 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement.

 

Dividend policy

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

 

Payment of intercompany indebtedness

The Company intends to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life in connection with this spin-off transaction. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation. See “Description of Indebtedness.”

 

Anti-takeover provisions

In connection with the spin-off, we intend to adopt a stockholders’ rights agreement, which will expire on or before June 19, 2011, which could have the effect of discouraging, delaying or preventing a change of control of the Company not approved by our Board. If the rights become exercisable, the rights will cause substantial dilution to a person or group that attempts to acquire us on terms not approved

 

 

12


Table of Contents
 

by our Board. Thus, while the rights are intended to encourage persons who may seek to acquire control of us to initiate such an acquisition through negotiations with our Board, their actual effect may be to discourage a third party from making a partial tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain a substantial equity position in our equity securities or seeking to obtain control of us. See “Description of Our Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Provisions—Rights Agreement.”

Provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the “DGCL”) may have the effect of discouraging, delaying or preventing a change of control of the Company not approved by our Board. Such provisions may also have the effect of discouraging third parties from making proposals involving an acquisition or change of control of the Company, although such proposals, if made, might be considered desirable by a majority of the stockholders of the Company. Such provisions could further have the effect of making it more difficult for third parties to cause the replacement of our Board.

 

Risk factors

You should carefully consider the matters discussed under the section entitled “Risk Factors.”

Corporate Information and Structure

We are a Delaware corporation and an existing majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. Our principal executive offices are located at 100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor, Hartford, CT 06103, and our telephone number is (800) 248-7971 .

Pursuant to the spin-off, we will be separated from PNX and become an independent publicly traded company. The spin-off and our resulting separation from PNX involve the following steps:

 

   

Before the distribution date:

 

   

The PNX board of directors will determine the record date for the dividend of our common stock to PNX stockholders, declare that dividend and determine the distribution ratio.

 

   

Our common stock is expected to begin trading on a “when-issued” basis on or shortly before the record date for the spin-off.

 

   

PNX, as the majority stockholder, will:

 

  i. elect our Board;

 

  ii. approve our adoption of certain benefit plans; and

 

  iii. approve various actions related to the spin-off as described in this information statement.

 

   

Our Board will approve:

 

  i. the adoption of certain benefit plans;

 

  ii. our corporate governance documents and policies; and

 

  iii. various actions related to the spin-off as described in this information statement.

 

   

The Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) will declare effective under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part.

 

   

PNX will mail this information statement to its stockholders.

 

 

13


Table of Contents
   

On or before the distribution date:

 

   

We will have entered into numerous agreements with PNX, including a:

 

  i. Separation and Distribution Agreement;

 

  ii. Transition Services Agreement;

 

  iii. Tax Separation Agreement; and

 

  iv. Employee Matters Agreement.

 

   

On the distribution date:

 

   

Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), our direct parent and a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, will transfer all of our common stock to PNX.

 

   

We will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX.

 

   

PNX will distribute 100% of the shares of our common stock (other than shares withheld to satisfy certain withholding obligations) pro rata to all of its stockholders of record as of the record date.

 

   

Following the distribution date:

 

   

We expect that our common stock will begin trading on the Nasdaq Global Market on a “regular way” basis under the symbol “VRTS” on the first trading day following the distribution date. We will operate as an independent publicly traded company.

For a further explanation of the spin-off, see “The Spin-Off.”

The Company is not a registered investment advisor. However, it has seven subsidiaries that are active registered investment advisors.

The following diagram depicts our corporate structure after giving effect to the distribution and the other concurrent transactions described in this information statement:

LOGO

 

 

14


Table of Contents

Recent Developments

On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and PIM, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in us and our direct and wholly owned subsidiary. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

For additional information on the agreement with Harris Bankcorp, see “Equity Investment.”

 

 

15


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

You should carefully consider the risks described below, together with all of the other information included in this information statement, in evaluating the Company and our common stock. If any of the risks described below actually occurs, our business, financial results, financial condition and stock price could be materially adversely affected.

Recent Risk Factors Related to the Current Market Environment

Recent market and economic developments may materially and adversely affect our business, revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management, financial condition and results of operations.

Recent markets have experienced unprecedented credit and liquidity issues as well as volatility and declines in the equity markets. Lending practices in past years, particularly in the “sub-prime” market, coupled with dramatic declines in home prices, rising mortgage defaults and increasing home foreclosures, have resulted in significant write-downs of asset values by financial institutions, including government-sponsored entities and major commercial and investment banks. These write-downs, initially of mortgage-backed securities but spreading to most sectors of the credit markets, and to credit default swaps and other derivative securities, have caused many financial institutions to seek additional capital, to merge with larger and stronger institutions, to be subsidized by the U.S. Government and, in some cases, to fail. Reflecting concern about the stability of the financial markets generally and the strength of counterparties, credit markets have worsened considerably, with many lenders and institutional investors reducing, and in some cases, ceasing to provide funding to borrowers, including other financial institutions. Additionally, concerns over increasing unemployment, fluctuating inflation and energy costs as well as geopolitical issues have contributed to diminished expectations for the economy and the financial markets going forward. These factors, combined with declining business and consumer confidence and increased unemployment, have precipitated an economic slowdown and fears of a prolonged recession. As a result, the financial markets and the U.S. economy are experiencing a period of extreme volatility.

This economic environment has had a direct impact on the actions of both retail and institutional investors. The continued erosion of the equity and fixed income markets has materially and adversely impacted the value of our assets under management, which has resulted in lower fee revenues. Although it is not possible to predict how long this economic downturn will continue, it is expected to have a direct impact on our fourth quarter 2008 results. During the interim period from September 30, 2008 through November 30, 2008 third-party assets under management have declined by $4.6 billion or 16.0% from $28.7 billion at September 30, 2008 to $24.1 billion at November 30, 2008.

The decrease in assets under management was comprised of $3.8 billion of market related depreciation, $1.5 billion of outflows, partially offset by sales of $0.6 billion and positive net change in money market funds assets under management of $0.1 billion.

The decrease in our assets under management is driven in great part due to the equity markets, with the S&P 500 Index down 23.1% for the two-month period from September 30, 2008 through November 30, 2008. We have seen decreased investment inflows and an increase in redemptions of certain products. Revenue for retail funds, which is based on average assets during the quarter, will be negatively impacted for the fourth quarter 2008 as compared to third quarter 2008 and fourth quarter 2007. Fourth quarter 2008 revenue for separately managed accounts and institutional accounts will be based primarily on September 30, 2008 asset under management levels, which were lower than the levels at June 30, 2008. These decreases will have a direct effect on our net income and liquidity. For example, the $4.6 billion decrease in our assets under management has the effect of reducing our annual revenues by approximately $18.0 million to $20.0 million. Reductions in related variable expenses, primarily incentive compensation and distribution costs, would marginally compensate for this loss of revenue but the Company would experience a material reduction in income from operations.

General account assets under management at September 30, 2008 were $12.5 billion. The fees earned on general account assets are not based on a percentage of assets under management, but rather, a reimbursement of

 

16


Table of Contents

cost. Therefore, recent market activity has not had a significant effect on revenues or liquidity. In addition, the Company will not be managing the general account assets following the spin-off, and the related revenues and expenses are excluded from the pro forma financial presentation.

It is difficult to predict how long the current economic and market conditions will continue, how the coordinated actions of the U.S. Government and other international economic leaders will affect the current environment, and whether the financial markets will continue to deteriorate and which aspects of our products and/or business will be adversely affected. However, the resulting lack of available credit, lack of confidence in the financial sector, increased volatility in the financial markets and reduced business activity may materially and adversely affect us. Recent market and economic developments have affected, or have the potential to affect, us negatively by:

 

   

reducing the value of the assets we manage, which has resulted in, and may continue to result in, lower fee revenues;

 

   

increasing consumer concerns about the returns and attractiveness of our investment products, which may cause existing clients to withdraw assets and diminish our ability to attract assets from new and existing clients, which would result in lower sales and fee revenues;

 

   

affecting the access to, and reliability of, service levels provided by our intermediary distribution channels and service providers, which could materially affect our sales, redemptions and business operations;

 

   

exacerbating the conditions which caused us to recognize an impairment of the goodwill and intangible assets on our balance sheet and may lead to future impairments;

 

   

increasing competition from stronger rivals in a more consolidated financial services industry, driven by regulatory action or other opportunistic transactions;

   

causing regulators to change the laws and regulations that affect us, which may result in greater compliance costs and restrictions on our ability to do business;

 

   

encouraging litigation, arbitration and regulatory action in response to the increased frequency and magnitude of investment losses, which may result in unfavorable judgments, awards and settlements, regulatory fines and an increase in our related legal expenses;

 

   

reducing our ability to obtain financing to support the development of our business on favorable terms, or eliminating our ability to obtain financing at all;

 

   

increasing the difficulty of performing administrative functions such as determining the fair value of assets we manage and changing our investment positions in assets we manage, which may affect our service levels and the ability to retain existing clients or attract new clients;

 

   

damaging our reputation indirectly by association with the industries most seriously affected by market and economic developments, or directly due to a decline in investment performance or service levels, which may affect our ability to retain existing clients or attract new clients;

 

   

damaging our reputation due to the inability of investors to redeem auction rate preferred securities due to the failure, since February 2008, of such remarketing auctions caused by illiquidity in the auction rate preferred market, which previously provided investment liquidity to certain of our closed-end funds; and

 

   

damaging our reputation or creating pressure to contribute capital to certain of our money market funds should these funds become at risk of falling below a $1.00 net asset value, referred to as “breaking the buck,” due to illiquidity in the money markets or credit-related impairments of their holdings.

Any of these negative effects may materially and adversely affect our business, revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management, financial condition and results of operations.

 

17


Table of Contents

Risk Factors Relating to the Spin-Off

Our historical and pro forma consolidated financial information is not necessarily representative of the results we would have achieved as a stand-alone company and may not be a reliable indicator of our future results.

Our historical consolidated financial information included in this information statement does not reflect the financial condition, results of operations or cash flows we would have achieved as a stand-alone company during the periods presented or those we will achieve in the future. This is primarily a result of the following factors:

 

   

our historical financial information reflects the assets and business of Goodwin that will not be part of the Company following the distribution;

 

   

our historical financial results reflect allocations of corporate expenses from PNX, which may be different than the comparable expenses we would have actually incurred or will incur in the future as a stand-alone company;

 

   

our cost of debt and our capitalization will be different from that reflected in our historical consolidated financial statements; and

 

   

significant changes may occur in our cost structure, management, financing and business operations as a result of our separation from PNX, including the costs for us to establish our new operating infrastructure.

We have made adjustments based upon available information and assumptions that we believe are reasonable to reflect these factors, among others, in our pro forma financial information. However, our assumptions may prove not to be accurate, and accordingly, our pro forma financial information should not be assumed to be indicative of what our financial condition or results of operations actually would have been as a stand-alone company nor to be a reliable indicator of what our financial condition or results of operations actually may be in the future.

The agreements we are entering into with PNX may involve, or may appear to involve, conflicts of interest.

Because the spin-off involves the separation of PNX’s existing businesses into two independent companies, we are entering into certain agreements with PNX to provide a framework for our initial relationship with PNX following the spin-off. We have negotiated these agreements with PNX while we are still a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. Accordingly, the persons who are expected to become our officers are currently employees or officers of PNX or its subsidiaries and, as such, have an obligation to serve the interests of PNX and its subsidiaries. As a result, they could be viewed as having a conflict of interest.

As we build our information technology infrastructure and transition our data to our own systems, we could experience temporary business interruptions and incur substantial additional costs.

After the spin-off, we will install and implement information technology infrastructure to support our business functions. We anticipate this will involve significant costs. We may incur temporary interruptions in business operations if we cannot transition effectively from PNX’s existing technology infrastructure, as well as the people and processes that support them. We may not be successful in implementing our new technology infrastructure and transitioning our data, and we may incur substantially higher costs for implementation than currently anticipated. Our failure to avoid operational interruptions as we implement the new infrastructure and transition our data, or our failure to implement the new infrastructure and transition our data successfully, could disrupt our business and have a material adverse effect on our profitability.

Our separation from PNX could increase our U.S. federal income tax costs.

Due to the separation we will not be able to file a consolidated U.S. federal income tax return with PNX. As a result, the Company and PNX will no longer be able to offset one another’s net operating and capital gains with net operating and capital losses to the extent available. It is also possible that, due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off, all or a portion of the Company’s related net operating loss

 

18


Table of Contents

and capital loss carryovers may not be available to the Company following the spin-off. Additionally, any other benefits relating to taxes arising from being part of the larger PNX company may be lost. As a result, the aggregate amount of U.S. federal income taxes applicable to our business may increase after the distribution.

Risk Factors Relating to Our Business

Poor performance of the securities markets could adversely affect our revenues, earnings, sales and assets under management.

The securities markets can be volatile and experience both periods of strong growth and of substantial declines. There are several ways in which market declines and volatility have affected, or have the potential to affect, us negatively, including:

 

   

limiting our fee revenues by reducing the value of the assets we manage;

 

   

decreasing sales of our investment products;

 

   

causing existing clients to withdraw assets from our managed investment products, which would result in lower fee revenues; and

 

   

diminishing our ability to attract assets from existing and new clients.

Any of these negative effects may result in lower revenues and earnings.

For example, during the first nine months of 2008, the market value of our assets under management declined $4.3 billion due to declines in the securities markets. Accordingly, our management fees, which are calculated based on a percentage of the market value of assets under management, declined at an annualized rate of $19.1 million. Future periods of poor securities market performance, which will affect our investment management fees, may have an adverse effect on our revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management and the carrying value of our goodwill or intangible assets.

For the first nine months of 2008, we had a loss of $349.9 million as compared to a loss of $10.2 million for the same period in 2007. The primary contributors to the 2008 loss were pre-tax non-cash impairment charges of $432.2 million related to goodwill and intangible assets. Our 2007 loss was primarily driven by interest expense on $325.0 million of intercompany debt, which was extinguished on December 31, 2007.

Poor relative investment performance of some of our asset management strategies may result in outflows of assets under management, lower revenues and lower earnings.

Net flows related to our asset management strategies can be affected by investment performance. Further, our asset management strategies are rated or ranked by independent third parties and individual distribution partners, and many industry periodicals and services provide assessments of the relative performance of our strategies. These assessments often affect the decisions of customers regarding which strategies to invest in. If the relative performance or assessments of our strategies decline materially, the assets under management related to these strategies may decrease as customers select strategies with better performance. Any loss of assets under management would decrease the fees that we earn from such strategies. This could result in lower assets under management, lower revenues and lower earnings.

Our business operations, investment returns and profitability could be adversely impacted by inadequate performance of third-party relationships.

We are dependent on certain third-party relationships to maintain essential business operations. These services include, but are not limited to, information technology infrastructure, application systems support, mutual fund and investment accounting services, transfer agent and cash management services, custodial services, records storage management, backup tape management, security pricing services, payroll, legal and employee benefit programs. In addition, we maintain contractual relationships with certain investment advisory and investment management firms to leverage their expertise. These firms manage select investments or portions of portfolios under sub-advisory agreements.

 

19


Table of Contents

We periodically negotiate provisions and renewals of these relationships and there can be no assurance that such terms will remain acceptable to such third parties or us. An interruption in our continuing relationship with certain of these third parties or any material delay or inability to deliver essential services could materially affect our business operations and potentially adversely affect our profitability.

Clients can withdraw assets from our management for a variety of reasons, which could lead to a decrease in our revenues and earnings.

Generally, our clients can terminate their relationships with us or our distribution partners at will or on relatively short notice. They can also reduce the aggregate amount of managed assets or shift their funds to other types of accounts for any number of reasons, including investment performance, changes in investment preferences, changes in reputation in the marketplace, changes in client management or ownership, loss of key investment management personnel and financial market performance. In declining markets, the pace of mutual fund redemptions and withdrawals of assets from other accounts could accelerate. Poor performance relative to other asset management firms may result in decreased purchases of fund shares, increased redemptions of fund shares, and the loss of institutional or individual accounts. A reduction in the assets we manage, and the associated decrease in revenues and earnings, could have a material adverse effect on our business.

Our separation from PNX could adversely affect our business and profitability due to the loss of PNX’s brand, reputation and capital base.

As a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX, we have marketed certain of our products and services using the “Phoenix” brand name and logo. Our separation from PNX and change in name may adversely affect our ability to attract and retain customers and their investments, which could result in outflows or reduced sales from our mutual funds and other investment products. We cannot predict the effect that our separation from PNX will have on our business or customers, sub-advisors, distribution partners and employees.

We might be unable to attract or retain personnel who are key to our business.

The success of our business is dependent to a large extent on our ability to attract and retain key employees. Competition in the job market for professionals such as portfolio managers, securities analysts and sales personnel is generally intense. In general, our employees are not subject to employment contracts or non-compete agreements. Any inability to retain our key employees, or attract and retain additional qualified employees, could have a negative impact on us.

The independent trustees of our mutual funds and closed-end funds, intermediary program sponsors, managed account clients and institutional asset management clients could terminate their contracts with us. This would reduce our revenues and earnings.

Each of the mutual funds and closed-end funds for which we act as investment advisor or sub-advisor is registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “Investment Company Act”) and is governed by a board of trustees or board of directors. Each fund’s contract is renewed annually by the fund board. Either the board members or, in limited circumstances, the stockholders may terminate an advisory contract with us and move the assets to another investment advisor. The board members also may deem it to be in the best interests of a fund’s stockholders to make other decisions adverse to us, such as reducing the compensation paid to us or imposing restrictions on our management of the fund.

Our asset management agreements with intermediary program sponsors, private clients and institutional clients are generally terminable by these sponsors and clients upon short notice without penalty. As a result, there would be little impediment to these sponsors or clients terminating our agreements if they became dissatisfied with our performance.

The termination of any of the above agreements relating to a material portion of assets under management would adversely affect our investment management fee revenues and earnings and could require us to take a charge to earnings as a result of the impairment of the goodwill or intangible assets associated with our asset managers.

 

20


Table of Contents

Goodwill or intangible assets could become impaired requiring a charge to earnings in the event of significant market declines, net outflows of assets or losses of investment management contracts.

The amount of goodwill and intangible assets on our balance sheet is supported by the assets under, management and the related revenues of the business. In the nine months ended September 30, 2008, we have recognized goodwill and intangible asset impairments totaling $432.2 million. These impairment charges were triggered by the significant declines in the equity markets and the decline in valuations of financial companies experienced in 2008, particularly in the third quarter. It might be necessary to recognize additional impairment of these assets should these events worsen or recur or if we experience a drop in assets under management for other reasons such as material outflows, the termination of a material investment management contract or material outflows if clients withdraw their assets following the departure of a key employee.

We face strong competition in our businesses from mutual fund companies, banks and asset management firms. This competition could impair our ability to retain existing customers, attract new customers and maintain our profitability.

We face strong competition in our businesses. We believe that our ability to compete is based on a number of factors, including investment performance, service, distribution capabilities and relative scale. We are also highly dependent on our distribution relationships. Our actual and potential competitors include a large number of mutual fund companies, banks and asset management firms, many of which have advantages over us. Recent industry consolidation has resulted in larger competitors with financial resources, marketing and distribution capabilities and brand identities that are stronger than ours. Larger firms also may be able to offer, due to economies of scale, lower cost products. If we do not compete effectively in this environment, our profitability and financial condition would be materially adversely affected.

Our operations may depend on the availability of additional financing and, after the spin-off, we may not be able to obtain financing.

To support the development of our business, we may require additional financing for liquidity, capital requirements or growth initiatives. After the spin-off, PNX will not provide additional financing to us. Accordingly, we will depend on our ability to generate cash flow from operations and to borrow funds and issue securities in the capital markets to maintain and expand our business. We may need to incur debt on terms and at interest rates that may not be as favorable as those historically available to PNX. Any inability by us to obtain financing in the future could have a negative effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

Potential changes in federal and state regulation may increase our business costs, which could adversely affect our business, consolidated operating results, financial condition or liquidity.

We are subject to regulation by the SEC, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) and other federal and state agencies and self-regulatory organizations. Each advisor (including unaffiliated sub-advisors) is registered with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (the “Investment Advisers Act”). Each closed-end fund and open-end fund is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act. Our broker-dealer is registered with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act and is a member of FINRA. All of our funds currently available for sale are qualified in all 50 states, Washington, DC, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Most aspects of our investment management business, including the business of the sub-advisors, are subject to various federal and state laws and regulations.

These laws and regulations are primarily intended to benefit the investment product shareholder and generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict us and any sub-advisor from carrying on its investment management business in the event that it fails to comply with such laws and regulations. In such an event, the possible sanctions which may be imposed include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on our engaging in the investment management business for specified periods of time, the revocation of the advisors’ registrations as investment advisors or other censures and fines.

 

21


Table of Contents

These laws and regulations are complex and subject to change. Moreover, because they are administered and enforced by a number of different governmental authorities, each of which exercises a degree of interpretive latitude, we are subject to the risk that compliance with any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue may not result in compliance with another regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of the same issue, particularly when compliance is judged in hindsight. In addition, there is risk that any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue may change over time to our detriment, or that changes in the overall legal environment may, even absent any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue changing, cause us to change our views regarding the actions we need to take from a legal risk management perspective, thus necessitating changes to our practices that may, in some cases, limit our ability to grow and improve the profitability of our business.

Compliance with these laws and regulations is also time consuming and personnel-intensive, and changes in these laws and regulations may increase materially our direct and indirect compliance costs and other expenses of doing business, thus having an adverse effect on our business, consolidated operating results, financial condition and liquidity.

Legal and regulatory actions are inherent in our businesses and could result in financial losses or harm to our businesses.

We are regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. In addition, various regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of us and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, securities laws and laws governing the activities of broker-dealers. There has been a significant increase in federal and state regulatory activity relating to financial services companies, with regulatory inquiries focusing on late-trading, market timing and valuation issues. Financial services companies have also been the subject of broad industry inquiries by state regulators and attorneys general which do not appear to be company-specific. We have had inquiries relating to market timing and distribution practices in the past, and we continue to cooperate with the applicable regulatory authorities in these matters. While no regulatory authority has ever taken action against us with regard to these inquiries, we may be subject to further related or unrelated inquiries or actions in the future.

It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or regulatory proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. We believe that the outcomes of our litigation and regulatory matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners is difficult to detect and deter and could harm our business, results of operations or financial condition.

Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners could result in violations of law by us, regulatory sanctions and/or serious reputational or financial harm. Misconduct can occur in each of our businesses and could include:

 

   

binding us to transactions that exceed authorized limits;

 

   

hiding unauthorized or unsuccessful activities resulting in unknown and unmanaged risks or losses;

 

   

improperly using or disclosing confidential information;

 

   

recommending transactions that are not suitable;

 

   

engaging in fraudulent or otherwise improper activity;

 

   

engaging in unauthorized or excessive trading to the detriment of customers; or

 

   

otherwise not complying with laws or our control procedures.

 

22


Table of Contents

We cannot always deter misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners, and the precautions we take to prevent and detect this activity may not be effective in all cases. Prevention and detection among our sub-advisors and distribution partners, who are not employees of the Company, present additional challenges. Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations or financial condition.

Changes in accounting standards issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board or other standard-setting bodies may adversely affect our financial statements.

Our financial statements are subject to the application of GAAP, which is periodically revised and/or expanded. Accordingly, from time to time we are required to adopt new or revised accounting standards or guidance issued by recognized authoritative bodies, including the Financial Accounting Standards Board. It is possible that future accounting standards we are required to adopt could change the current accounting treatment that we apply to our consolidated financial statements and that such changes could significantly affect our reported financial condition and results of operations.

We may be unsuccessful in our future acquisition endeavors, if any, which may have an adverse effect on our business.

One aspect of our future growth rate depends in part on our selective acquisition of additional businesses. We may be unable to identify suitable targets for acquisition or make acquisitions at favorable prices. If we identify a suitable acquisition candidate, our ability to successfully implement the acquisition would depend on a variety of factors, including our ability to obtain financing and, for larger transactions, requisite government approvals.

Acquisitions involve risks, including those associated with integrating the operations, financial reporting, technologies and personnel of acquired companies; managing geographically dispersed operations; the diversion of management’s attention from other business concerns; the inherent risks in entering markets or lines of business in which we have either limited or no direct experience; unknown risks; and the potential loss of key employees, customers and strategic partners of acquired companies. We may not successfully integrate any businesses or technologies we may acquire in the future and may not achieve pre-acquisition anticipated revenue and cost benefits. Acquisitions may be expensive, time consuming and may strain our resources. Acquisitions may not be accretive to our earnings and may negatively impact our results of operations as a result of, among other things, the incurrence of debt, one-time write-offs of goodwill and amortization expenses of other intangible assets. In addition, future acquisitions that we may pursue could result in dilutive issuances of equity securities.

Risk Factors Relating to Our Common Stock

Because of our size, there may be little institutional interest or trading volume in, or research analyst coverage of, our common stock.

Public companies with relatively small market capitalizations have difficulty generating institutional interest or trading volume, which illiquidity can translate into price discounts as compared to industry peers or to the shares’ inherent value. In addition, the smaller size of our market capitalization after the separation and distribution, compared to the market capitalization of PNX prior to the separation and distribution, may result in the loss of research analyst coverage of us. The absence of research analyst coverage makes it difficult for a company to establish and hold a market following. Accordingly, our size could lead to our shares trading at prices that are significantly lower than our estimate of their inherent value.

Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock following the spin-off may adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the issuance of additional shares will dilute all other stockholdings.

Sales or distributions of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market or otherwise following the spin-off, or the perception that such sales could occur, could adversely affect the market price of our common stock. After the spin-off, all of the shares of our common stock will be eligible for

 

23


Table of Contents

immediate resale in the public market. Investment criteria of certain investment funds and other holders of our common stock may result in the immediate sale of our common stock after the spin-off to the extent such stock no longer meets these criteria. Substantial selling of our common stock, whether as a result of the spin-off or otherwise, could adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

Our rights plan and applicable laws may discourage takeovers and business combinations that our stockholders might consider in their best interests.

We will be subject to the provisions of Delaware law described below regarding business combinations with interested stockholders.

Section 203 of the DGCL applies to a broad range of business combinations between a Delaware corporation and an interested stockholder. The Delaware law definition of “business combination” includes mergers, sales of assets, issuances of voting stock and certain other transactions. An “interested stockholder” is defined as any person who owns, directly or indirectly, 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of a corporation.

Section 203 prohibits a corporation from engaging in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date on which the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination before the stockholder became an interested stockholder, or the board of directors approved the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

   

upon completion of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, such stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock outstanding when the transaction began other than shares held by directors who are also officers and other than shares held by certain employee stock plans; or

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination after the stockholder became an interested stockholder and the business combination was approved at a meeting by at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock not owned by such stockholder.

In addition, we intend to adopt a stockholders’ rights agreement. Under the agreement, if any person or group (other than Bank of Montreal and its controlled affiliates) acquires, or begins a tender or exchange offer that could result in such person acquiring, 15% or more of our common stock, without approval by our Board under specified circumstances, our other stockholders will have the right to purchase shares of our common stock, or shares of the acquiring company, at a substantial discount to the public market price. See “Description of Our Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Provisions—Rights Agreement.”

We cannot predict the price range or volatility of our common stock after the spin-off.

From time to time, the market price and volume of shares traded of companies in the asset management industry experience periods of significant volatility. Company-specific issues and general developments in the asset management industry or the economy may cause this volatility. The market price of our common stock may fluctuate in response to a number of events and factors, including:

 

   

general economic, market and political conditions;

 

   

quarterly variations in results of operations or results of operations that could be below the expectations of the public market analysts and investors;

 

   

changes in financial estimates and recommendations by securities analysts;

 

   

operating and market price performance of other companies that investors may deem comparable;

 

   

press releases or publicity relating to us or our competitors or relating to trends in our markets; and

 

   

purchases or sales of common stock or other securities by insiders.

 

24


Table of Contents

In addition, broad market and industry fluctuations, as well as investor perception and the depth and liquidity of the market for our common stock, may adversely affect the trading price of our common stock, regardless of actual operating performance.

There can be no assurance as to the price at which our common stock will trade after the distribution date. Until an orderly market develops in our common stock, the price at which our common stock trades may fluctuate significantly and may be lower or higher than the price that would be expected for a more seasoned outstanding issue.

There may not be an active trading market for shares of our common stock.

Prior to the spin-off, there has been no public trading market for shares of our common stock. The shares of our common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.” We cannot predict the extent to which investor interest in the Company will lead to the development of an active trading market in our common stock or how liquid such a market might become. It is possible that, after the spin-off, an active trading market will not develop or continue and there can be no assurance as to the price at which our common stock will trade. The initial price of shares of our common stock may not be indicative of prices that will prevail in any future trading market.

In addition, because of the significant changes that will take place as a result of the spin-off, the trading market for each of our common stock and PNX common stock after the spin-off may be significantly different from that for PNX common stock prior to the spin-off. The market may view the Company and PNX as “new” companies after the spin-off and it is possible that neither of us will be the subject of significant research analyst coverage. The absence of significant research analyst coverage of the Company can adversely affect the market value and liquidity of our common stock.

We may not pay dividends on our common stock.

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

Risk Factors Relating to the Equity Investment

The agreements the Company has entered into in connection with the equity investment contain restrictions and limitations on our ability to obtain additional equity financing.

Following the spin-off, the approval of the holders of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock will be required to effect certain significant issuances of equity securities of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries. Such required approval may restrict our ability to carry out our business objectives, take advantage of opportunities such as acquisitions that could supplement or grow our business and could have a material adverse effect on our ability to service our debt and operate our business.

The voting power of the holders of our convertible preferred stock may discourage third party acquisitions of the Company at a premium.

Holders of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock will have the right to approve any merger, consolidation, acquisition, business combination, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or its subsidiaries, or any similar transaction or pledge of assets, in certain circumstances. This may have the effect of discouraging offers to acquire control of the Company and may preclude holders of Company common stock from receiving any premium above market price for their shares that may otherwise be offered in connection with any attempt to acquire control of the Company.

For more information, see “Description of our Capital Stock—Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock” and “Equity Investment.”

 

25


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE ABOUT FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This information statement and other materials filed or to be filed by the Company and PNX, as well as information in oral statements or other written statements made or to be made by the Company and PNX, contain statements, including in this document under the captions “Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business,” that are, or may be considered to be, forward-looking statements. All statements that are not historical facts, including statements about our beliefs or expectations, are forward-looking statements. You can identify these forward-looking statements by the use of forward-looking words such as “outlook,” “believes,” “expects,” “potential,” “continues,” “may,” “will,” “should,” “seeks,” “approximately,” “predicts,” “intends,” “plans,” “estimates,” “anticipates,” “foresees” or the negative version of those words or other comparable words and phrases. Any forward-looking statements contained in this information statement are based upon our historical performance and on current plans, estimates and expectations. The inclusion of this forward-looking information should not be regarded as a representation by us or any other person that the future plans, estimates or expectations contemplated by us will be achieved.

We believe that the factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially include but are not limited to the factors we describe in this information statement, including under “Risk Factors,” “The Spin-Off” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.” The following list represents some, but not necessarily all, of the factors that could cause actual results to differ from historical results or those anticipated or predicted by these forward-looking statements:

 

   

expected benefits from the spin-off may not be fully realized;

 

   

our revenues and operating costs may be different than expected following the spin-off;

 

   

volatility in the securities markets;

 

   

competition in our industry;

 

   

difficulty in implementing our business strategy; and

 

   

our ability to attract and retain qualified personnel.

These factors should not be construed as exhaustive and should be read in conjunction with the other cautionary statements that are included in this information statement. If one or more of these or other risks or uncertainties materialize, or if our underlying assumptions prove to be incorrect, actual results may vary materially from what we projected. Consequently, actual events and results may vary significantly from those included in or contemplated or implied by our forward-looking statements. The forward-looking statements included in this information statement are made only as of the date of this information statement, and we undertake no obligation to publicly update or review any forward-looking statement made by us or on our behalf, whether as a result of new information, future developments, subsequent events or circumstances or otherwise.

 

26


Table of Contents

THE SPIN-OFF

General

PNX currently has two operating businesses: its Asset Management business and its Life and Annuity business. Historically, these two distinct business segments have been operated by PNX in different locations, utilizing separate management teams and pursuing different business strategies. The results of these segments, consistent with past practice, are regularly reviewed by PNX’s chief operating decision makers and the executive team to assess the performance of each segment and to determine resource allocations among the segments. As part of its periodic reviews of the businesses, the PNX board of directors and its management assessed the possibility of separating the Asset Management business and the Life and Annuity business, including through the spin-off of one of these business segments.

On February 7, 2008, PNX announced that its board of directors had decided to pursue the spin-off of the Asset Management business from PNX in order to enhance stockholder value.

On December 12, 2008, the PNX board of directors formally approved the spin-off and declared a dividend payable to each holder of record at the close of business on December 22, 2008 of one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock held by such holder.

The separation of the Asset Management business from the Life and Annuity business, and the distribution of our common stock to holders of PNX common stock, will be accomplished through several steps, which PNX has determined based on a variety of contractual, structural, legal, tax and other reasons. As the final step in the spin-off, PNX will distribute 100% of our common stock to its stockholders (other than shares withheld to satisfy certain withholding obligations) such that a holder of 20 outstanding shares of PNX common stock will be entitled to receive one share of our common stock.

Reasons for the Spin-Off

PNX’s board of directors believes that the spin-off will better position both the Company’s Asset Management business and PNX’s Life and Annuity business to achieve their strategic and financial objectives. The Company’s Asset Management business and PNX’s Life and Annuity business are fundamentally different types of businesses, and the separation of the two businesses will help highlight the unique qualities and values of these businesses for investors, better position each company to access the capital markets and allow each company to separately pursue distinct business strategies.

The board of directors of PNX considered the following potential benefits in making its determination to effect the spin-off:

 

   

allowing each company to separately pursue the business strategies that best suit its long-term interests;

 

   

creating separate companies that have different financial characteristics, which may appeal to different investor bases and allow for clarity on valuation of the respective businesses;

 

   

creating opportunities to more efficiently develop and finance ongoing operations and future acquisitions and investments;

 

   

allowing each company to establish an expense structure appropriate for its business and size; and

 

   

creating effective management incentives tied to each company’s performance.

Neither we nor PNX can assure you that, following the spin-off, any of these benefits will be realized to the extent anticipated or at all.

 

27


Table of Contents

PNX’s board of directors also considered a number of other factors in evaluating the spin-off, including:

 

   

the one-time and on-going time expenditures and financial costs of the spin-off to both PNX and the Company;

 

   

the possibility that PNX and the Company may not achieve the expense reductions anticipated in connection with the spin-off;

 

   

the possibility that the spin-off may affect the financial strength or senior debt ratings of PNX or its subsidiaries;

 

   

the potential tax consequences to PNX, PNX stockholders and the Company; and

 

   

the risk that the combined trading prices of our common stock and PNX common stock after the distribution may be lower than the trading price of PNX’s common stock before the distribution.

PNX’s board of directors concluded, however, that the potential benefits of the spin-off outweigh these factors and that spinning off the Asset Management business to PNX stockholders is appropriate and advisable for PNX and its stockholders.

Manner of Effecting the Spin-Off

The general terms and conditions relating to the spin-off are set forth in a separation and distribution agreement between the Company and PNX. The spin-off will be effective at 5:00 p.m., New York City time on the distribution date, which is December 31, 2008. Prior to the distribution, Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), our direct parent and a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, will transfer all of our common stock to PNX, and we will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX. As a result of the spin-off, each PNX stockholder will receive one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock that such stockholder owns. No fractional shares will be issued. Those stockholders who would otherwise be entitled to receive fractional shares will receive cash in lieu of fractional shares. In order to be entitled to receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off, PNX stockholders must be stockholders at the close of business of the New York Stock Exchange on the record date, which is December 22, 2008. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form. Each share of our common stock that is distributed will be validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable and free of preemptive rights. See “Description of Our Capital Stock.”

PNX stockholders will not be required to pay for shares of our common stock received in the spin-off or to surrender or exchange shares of PNX common stock in order to receive our common stock or to take any other action in connection with the spin-off. No vote of PNX stockholders is required or sought in connection with the spin-off and PNX stockholders have no appraisal rights in connection with the spin-off.

In addition, at the time of the spin-off, certain outstanding options to purchase PNX common stock and certain outstanding service vested restricted stock units held by our employees on the distribution date will be converted into options to purchase Company common stock and restricted stock units, respectively. The formula used in the conversion will be based on the applicable plans and accounting rules with the intention of keeping the holders in the same financial position immediately following the conversion as existed immediately before the conversion. See “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off—Employee Matters Agreement—Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees.”

IN ORDER TO BE ENTITLED TO RECEIVE SHARES OF OUR COMMON STOCK IN THE SPIN-OFF, YOU MUST BE A HOLDER OF PNX COMMON STOCK AT THE CLOSE OF BUSINESS ON THE RECORD DATE.

The distribution agent will not deliver any fractional shares of our common stock in connection with the distribution. Instead, the distribution agent will aggregate fractional shares into whole shares, sell the whole shares in the open market at prevailing market prices and distribute the aggregate net cash proceeds of the sales

 

28


Table of Contents

pro rata to each holder of PNX common stock that would otherwise be entitled to receive a fractional share in the distribution. Such holders will then receive a cash payment in an amount equal to their pro rata share of the total net proceeds of those sales. Such cash payments will be made to the holders in the same accounts in which the underlying shares are held. If a PNX stockholder physically holds PNX stock certificates, such holder’s check for any cash that he or she may be entitled to receive instead of fractional shares of our common stock will be included together with the account statement in the mailing that the distribution agent expects to send out on the distribution date.

None of PNX, the Company or the distribution agent will guarantee any minimum sale price for the fractional shares of Company common stock. Neither PNX nor the Company will pay any interest on the proceeds from the sale of fractional shares.

Results of the Spin-Off

After the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company. Immediately following the spin-off, we expect to have approximately 26,000 beneficial holders of shares of our common stock, based on the number of beneficial stockholders of PNX common stock on December 17, 2008, and approximately 5,720,826 shares of our common stock outstanding. The actual number of shares to be distributed will be determined on the record date and will reflect any exercise of PNX options between the date the board of directors of PNX declares the dividend for the spin-off and the record date for the spin-off.

The Company and PNX will be parties to a number of agreements that govern the spin-off and the future relationship between our companies. For a more detailed description of these agreements, see “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.”

Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Spin-Off

The following is a summary of certain U.S. federal income tax consequences to holders of PNX common stock. This summary does not discuss all tax considerations that may be relevant to stockholders in light of their particular circumstances, nor does it address the consequences to stockholders subject to special treatment under the U.S. federal income tax laws, such as tax-exempt entities, non-resident alien individuals, foreign entities, foreign trusts and estates and beneficiaries thereof, stockholders who acquire shares as compensation for services, insurance companies and dealers in securities. In addition, this summary does not address any state, local or foreign tax consequences.

All stockholders should consult their own tax advisors concerning the specific tax consequences of the distribution of our common stock to holders of PNX common stock in light of their particular circumstances. This summary is not intended to be, nor should it be construed to be, legal or tax advice to any particular investor.

Each taxable U.S. stockholder of PNX receiving shares of our common stock (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash) in the spin-off will be treated as if such stockholder had received a taxable distribution in an amount equal to the fair market value of our common stock received (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash). Such distribution will be treated as a dividend to the extent of PNX’s current and accumulated earnings and profits, which subject to certain limitations may be taxable to individuals at a reduced rate of 15%. To the extent in excess of our earnings and profits, the receipt of our common stock will generally result in a reduction of a stockholder’s basis in PNX common stock and capital gain to the extent of any excess. Capital gains may be taxable at a reduced rate of 15% for individuals that have held their shares of PNX common stock for more than one year. A stockholder’s tax basis in our common stock will be equal to its fair market value at the time of the spin-off and the holding period in our common stock will begin the day after the spin-off.

 

29


Table of Contents

In addition, non-U.S. stockholders may be subject to a withholding tax at a rate of 30% on the fair market value of the common stock received by them (including fractional shares for which stockholders receive cash) to the extent of their share of PNX’s earnings and profits, unless such non-U.S. stockholders provide to us or our distribution agent, as the case may be, a properly executed (i) Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) Form W-8BEN (or other applicable form) claiming an exemption from or reduction in withholding under the benefit of an applicable income tax treaty or (ii) IRS Form W-8ECI (or other applicable form) stating that the amount treated as a taxable dividend is not subject to withholding tax because it is effectively connected with such non-U.S. stockholder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States. Effectively connected dividends (and, if an income tax treaty applies, dividends attributable to a permanent establishment), although not subject to withholding tax, are subject to U.S. federal income tax at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. In addition, dividends received by corporate non-U.S. stockholders that are effectively connected with a United States trade or business of the corporate non-U.S. stockholder (and, if an income tax treaty applies, are attributable to a corporate non-U.S. stockholder’s permanent establishment in the United States) may also be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% (or such lower rate as may be specified in an applicable income tax treaty).

In addition, backup withholding may apply with respect to the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a U.S. stockholder if such U.S. stockholder fails to provide a taxpayer identification number or certificate of other exempt status or fails to report in full dividend and interest income. In general, no backup withholding will be required with respect to the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a non-U.S. stockholder if such non-U.S. stockholder establishes an exemption, for example, by properly certifying its non-U.S. status on an IRS Form W-8BEN (or other applicable form). Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules will be allowed as a refund or credit against a stockholder’s U.S. federal income tax liability provided the required information is furnished to the IRS. In general, information regarding the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a stockholder will be reported to the IRS unless an exception applies.

If any withholding (including backup withholding) is required, shares of our common stock may be held back and sold on the market to the extent necessary to remit cash to the IRS and to pay brokerage and other costs.

Listing and Trading of Our Common Stock

There is currently no public market for our common stock. The shares of our common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.” We anticipate that trading of our common stock will commence on a when-issued basis on or shortly before the record date. When-issued trading refers to a sale or purchase made conditionally because the security has been authorized but not yet issued. On the first trading day following the distribution date, when-issued trading with respect to our common stock will end and regular way trading will begin. Regular way trading refers to trading after a security has been issued and typically involves a transaction that settles on the third full business day following the date of the transaction.

We cannot predict what the trading prices for our common stock will be before or after the distribution date. In addition, we cannot predict any change that may occur in the trading price of PNX common stock as a result of the spin-off. In addition, until our common stock is fully distributed and an orderly market develops in our common stock, the price at which it trades may fluctuate significantly and may be lower or higher than the price that would be expected for a fully distributed issue. See “Risk Factors––Risks Relating to Our Common Stock.”

The shares of our common stock distributed to PNX stockholders will be freely transferable except for shares received by persons who may be deemed to be “affiliates” of the Company under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”). Persons that may be considered affiliates of the Company after the spin-off generally include individuals or entities that control, are controlled by or are under common control with the Company.

 

30


Table of Contents

Spin-Off Conditions and Termination

We expect that the spin-off will be effective on the distribution date, December 31, 2008, provided that, among other things:

 

   

the SEC has declared effective our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, under the Exchange Act, and no stop order relating to our Form 10 is in effect;

 

   

the Company and PNX have received all material licenses, permits, estoppels, consents, approvals, authorizations, qualifications and orders of governmental authorities and third parties as are necessary for consummation of the spin-off; and

 

   

no action, proceeding or investigation shall have been instituted or threatened before any court or administrative body to restrain, enjoin or otherwise prevent the consummation of the spin-off, and no restraining order or injunction issued by any court of competent jurisdiction shall be in effect restraining the consummation of the spin-off.

The fulfillment of the foregoing conditions will not create any obligation on PNX’s part to effect the spin-off, and the board of directors of PNX has reserved the right to amend, modify or abandon the spin-off and the related transactions at any time prior to the distribution date. The board of directors of PNX may also waive any of these conditions.

In addition, PNX has the right not to complete the spin-off and related transactions if, at any time, the PNX board of directors determines, in its sole discretion, that the distribution is not in the best interests of PNX and its stockholders.

Reason for Furnishing this Information Statement

This information statement is being furnished solely to provide information to PNX stockholders who will receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off. It is not and is not to be construed as an inducement or encouragement to buy or sell any securities. We believe that the information contained in this information statement is accurate as of the date set forth on the cover. Changes may occur after that date and neither we nor PNX undertakes any obligation to update the information except in the normal course of our respective public disclosure obligations.

 

31


Table of Contents

DIVIDEND POLICY

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant.

 

32


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth the consolidated capitalization of the Company (i) on an actual basis as of September 30, 2008 and 2007 and (ii) on pro forma basis as of September 30, 2008 as adjusted to give effect to:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life. The Company will seek to renegotiate and keep approximately $20.0 million of this indebtedness outstanding on a third-party, arm’s-length basis. The pro forma financial presentation assumes a renegotiated interest rate on this indebtedness of LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were primarily generated by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets, as well as due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off that may result in all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers to not be available to the Company following the spin-off. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

 

   

On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and PIM, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

You should read this table in conjunction with “Selected Consolidated Financial Data,” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes that are included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

     As of September 30, 2008     As of September 30, 2007  
     Actual     Pro Forma     Actual  
($ in millions)       

Debt

      

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

   $ 12.0     $ 10.0     $ 12.0  

Notes payable to related parties

     21.0       10.0       358.0  
                        

Total debt

     33.0       20.0       370.0  
                        

Convertible preferred equity

     —         45.0       —    
                        

Stockholder’s Equity

      

Common stock, par value $.01 per share (1,000,000,000 shares of common stock authorized, 5,714,546 shares issued and outstanding, actual and as adjusted)

     —         —         —    

Additional paid-in capital

     962.5       920.5       637.5  

Accumulated deficit

     (687.4 )     (761.1 )     (333.3 )

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (0.2 )     (0.2 )     —    
                        

Total stockholder’s equity

     274.9       159.2       304.2  
                        

Total Capitalization (Debt, convertible preferred equity and stockholder’s equity)

   $ 307.9     $ 224.2     $ 674.2  
                        

 

33


Table of Contents

 

The number of shares of common stock shown to be outstanding excludes:

 

   

Shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding employee stock options and upon vesting of outstanding service-vested restricted stock units which will be converted from outstanding PNX grants as of the distribution date; and

 

   

1.8 million additional shares available for future issuance under our stock option and incentive plans as of January 2, 2009, which includes shares issuable pursuant to outstanding PNX equity grants that will be converted as of the distribution date.

See “Management” and “Compensation of Executive Officers” for more information about options and restricted stock units that may be granted.

 

34


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

The historical financial data has been derived from PNX’s consolidated financial statements using the historical results of operations and bases of the assets and liabilities of PNX’s businesses and give effect to allocations of expenses from PNX. The historical consolidated results of operations data set forth below does not reflect changes that will occur in the operations and funding of the Company as a result of our separation from PNX. The historical consolidated balance sheet data set forth below reflects the assets and liabilities that were or are expected to be transferred to us as a result of our separation from PNX.

The selected consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified by reference to “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the historical audited and interim unaudited financial statements and the accompanying notes thereto, which for certain periods are included elsewhere in this information statement. The results of operations and the balance sheet data for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are derived from the audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement and should be read in conjunction with those consolidated financial statements and the accompanying notes. The results of operations and the balance sheet data set forth below for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 are derived from the unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement. In management’s opinion, these unaudited consolidated financial statements have been prepared on substantially the same basis as the audited financial statements and include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair statement of the financial data for the periods presented. The results of operations for the interim period are not necessarily indicative of the operating results for the entire year or any future period.

 

     Nine Months
Ended September 30,
    Years Ended December 31,  
       2008(1)     2007(1)     2007(2)     2006(2)     2005(2)     2004(1)     2003(3)  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

              

Revenues

   $ 143.4     $ 170.0     $ 226.2     $ 218.6     $ 237.4     $ 273.7     $ 258.5  

Expenses

     589.6       166.1       220.9       262.5       256.5       262.8       265.9  

Operating income (loss)

     (446.2 )     3.9       5.3       (43.9 )     (19.1 )     10.9       (7.4 )

Net loss

     (349.9 )     (10.2 )     (14.2 )     (47.6 )     (33.1 )     (18.7 )     (23.8 )

Adjusted net income(4)

     13.6       13.5       16.5       5.0       4.8       9.2       7.2  

EBITDA (5)

    
7.8
 
    29.3       38.1       26.2       22.1       37.0       20.7  
     As of September 30,     As of December 31,  
     2008(1)     2007(1)     2007(2)     2006(2)     2005(1)     2004(3)     2003(3)  

Balance Sheet Data

              

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 32.8     $ 36.8     $ 33.9     $ 23.8     $ 50.0     $ 38.7  

Intangible assets, net

     86.1       215.6       208.2       237.7       295.9       308.4       335.1  

Goodwill

     122.7       454.4       454.4       454.4       454.4       416.9       408.1  

Total assets

     365.0       760.7       752.2       781.1       825.0       834.0       843.5  

Accrued compensation and benefits

     25.1       28.0       34.1       35.3       30.1       31.9       39.6  

Notes payable to related parties

     33.0       370.0       42.0       436.3       508.1       460.0       446.0  

Total liabilities

     90.1       456.5       127.3       527.6       598.0       607.7       612.5  

Total stockholder’s equity

     274.9       304.2       624.9       253.5       227.0       226.3       231.0  

Assets Under Management

              
($ in billions)                                           

Total assets(6)

   $ 41.2     $ 59.4     $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 50.9     $ 56.2     $ 59.2  

Third-party assets(6)

     28.7       46.5       42.5       45.0       37.4       42.9       46.3  

Pro forma assets(6)

     27.0       44.4       40.4       43.6       35.7       39.9       41.1  

 

35


Table of Contents

 

Notes to Selected Consolidated Financial Data

 

(1) Derived from unaudited consolidated financial statements.

 

(2) Derived from audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

(3) Derived from audited consolidated financial statements not included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

(4) The supplemental performance measure “adjusted net income” is provided in addition to net income, but is not a substitute for net income determined in accordance with GAAP and may not be comparable to other non-GAAP performance measures, including measures of cash earnings or cash income, of other companies. Furthermore, adjusted net income is not a liquidity measure and should not be used in place of cash flow measures determined in accordance with GAAP. We consider adjusted net income, regularly used in the asset management business, to be a meaningful operating measure of our financial performance. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure when evaluating the performance of the Company and believe the presentation of these amounts provides the reader with information necessary to better analyze the Company’s operations for the periods presented. See our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of net income to adjusted net income in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measures.”

 

(5) The supplemental measure “EBITDA,” a non-GAAP liquidity measure, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry.

 

(6) “Total assets” reflect all related party and unrelated party assets managed by the Company, including PNX’s general account. Historical financial results included in this information statement are presented using total assets as the basis of the Company’s operations. “Third-party assets” are total assets excluding PNX’s general account. Historical financial results of the Asset Management segment of PNX are presented using third-party assets as the basis of the segment’s operations. “Pro forma assets” exclude PNX’s general account as well as third-party institutional assets managed by Goodwin. Pro forma financial results included in this information statement, as well as the Company’s future results, are presented using pro forma assets as the basis of the Company’s operations.

 

36


Table of Contents

UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information presented below has been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007 and our unaudited consolidated interim financial statements for the nine months ended September 30, 2008. This unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information should be read in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and notes related to those consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement.

The unaudited pro forma consolidated statements of operations for the year ended December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 have been prepared as if the distribution had occurred as of January 1, 2007. The unaudited pro forma consolidated balance sheet as of September 30, 2008 has been prepared as if the distribution occurred as of September 30, 2008. The pro forma adjustments are based on the best information available and assumptions that our management believes are reasonable. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information is for illustrative and informational purposes only and is not intended to represent or be indicative of what our results of operations or financial position would have been had the transactions contemplated by the separation and distribution and related transactions occurred on the dates indicated. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information also should not be considered representative of our future results of operations or financial position.

Our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statements have been prepared to reflect adjustments to our historical financial information to give effect to the distribution of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX and the following transactions, as if these transactions had been completed at earlier dates:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

Operating costs related to human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax service were previously charged to the Company by PNX. Costs for these functions are now directly incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been adjusted to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. This resulted in net cost adjustments of ($4.7) million and ($1.9) million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life. The Company will seek to renegotiate and keep approximately $20.0 million of this indebtedness outstanding on third-party, arm’s-length basis. The pro forma financial presentation assumes a renegotiated interest rate on this indebtedness of LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

   

On October 30, 2008, the Company and its parent companies, PNX and PIM, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were primarily generated by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets, as well as due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off that may result in all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers to not be available to the Company following the spin-off. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

 

37


Table of Contents

The pro forma income statement adjustments do not give effect to:

 

   

Non-recurring separation costs primarily comprised of services to effect the transaction and establish two independent companies, primarily infrastructure-related.

See the notes to the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information for a more detailed discussion of these events.

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information has been prepared on a consolidated basis from the Company’s consolidated financial statements using the historical results of operations and bases of the assets and liabilities of Company businesses and give effect to allocations of expenses from PNX. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information is not indicative of our future performance or what our results of operations and financial position would have been if we had operated as an independent company during the periods presented or if the transactions reflected therein had actually occurred as of January 1, 2007 or September 30, 2008, as the case may be. The unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of operations may not reflect the complete impact of one-time and ongoing incremental costs required to operate as an independent publicly traded company. These pro formas do not reflect the costs of a new equity incentive plan that the Company expects to adopt after the distribution.

 

38


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

For the Year Ended December 31, 2007

 

          Pro Forma Adjustments        
    Historical     Transferred
Business(1)
    Cost
Adjustments(2)
    Financing(3)     Pro-
Forma
 
($ in thousands, except per share data)                              

Revenues

         

Investment management fees

  $ 158,998     $ (22,853 )       $ 136,145  

Distributor and service fees

    36,467             36,467  

Administration and transfer agent fees

    23,354             23,354  

Other income and fees

    7,398             7,398  
                                       

Total revenues

    226,217       (22,853 )     —         —         203,364  
                                       

Operating Expenses

         

Employment expenses

    94,849       (10,246 )     (2,847 )       81,756  

Distribution and administration expenses

    50,089             50,089  

Other operating expenses

    44,438       (4,645 )     (1,843 )       37,950  

Intangible asset impairment

    301             301  

Depreciation and other amortization

    1,095       (23 )         1,072  

Amortization of intangible assets

    30,097       (2,640 )         27,457  
                                       

Total operating expenses

    220,869       (17,554 )     (4,690 )     —         198,625  
                                       

Operating Gain (Loss)

    5,348       (5,299 )     4,690       —         4,739  
                                       

Other Income (Expense)

         

Unrealized depreciation on trading securities

    (2,569 )           (2,569 )

Other income

    2,227             2,227  
                                       

Total other income (expense), net

    (342 )     —         —         —         (342 )
                                       

Interest (Expense) Income

         

Interest expense

    (26,739 )         25,397       (1,342 )

Interest income

    1,633             1,633  
                                       

Total interest income (expense), net

    (25,106 )     —         —         25,397       291  
                                       

Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes

    (20,100 )     (5,299 )     4,690       25,397       4,688  

Income tax expense (benefit)

    (5,950 )     (2,173 )(4)     1,641 (4)     8,889 (4)     2,407  
                                       

Net Income (Loss)

  $ (14,150 )   $ (3,126 )   $ 3,049     $ 16,508     $ 2,281  
                                       

Preferred shareholder dividends

    —         —         —         (3,600 )     (3,600 )
                                       

Net Income (Loss) Available to Common Shareholders

  $ (14,150 )   $ (3,126 )   $ 3,049     $ 12,908     $ (1,319 )
                                       

Weighted average shares outstanding(5)

            5,715  
               

Basic loss per share(5)

          $ (0.23 )
               

Diluted loss per share(5)

          $ (0.23 )
               

 

See Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

39


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

For the Nine Months ended September 30, 2008

 

    Historical   Pro Forma Adjustments     Pro Forma
    Transferred
Business(1)
    Cost
Adjustments(2)
    Financing(3)    
($ in thousands, except per share data)    

Revenues

         

Investment management fees

  $ 102,211   $ (17,640)         $ 84,571

Distribution and service fees

    24,345           24,345

Administration and transfer agent fees

    15,072           15,072

Other income and fees

    1,759           1,759
                                   

Total revenues

    143,387     (17,640)       —         —         125,747
                                   

Operating Expenses

         

Employment expenses

    65,802     (8,081)       (1,219)         56,502

Distribution and administration expenses

    33,586           33,586

Other operating expenses

    35,087     (3,160)       (708)         31,219

Goodwill impairment

    331,706           331,706

Intangible asset impairment

    100,492           100,492

Depreciation and other amortization

    549     (17)           532

Amortization of intangible assets

    22,413     (1,980)           20,433
                                   

Total operating expenses

    589,635     (13,238)       (1,927)       —         574,470
                                   

Operating Gain (Loss)

    (446,248)     (4,402)       1,927       —         (448,723)
                                   

Other Income (Expense)

         

Unrealized depreciation on trading securities

    (2,350)           (2,350)

Other income

    580           580
                                   

Total other income (expense), net

    (1,770)     —         —         —         (1,770)
                                   

Interest (Expense) Income

         

Interest expense

    (2,037)         1,031       (1,006)

Interest income

    675           675
                                   

Total interest income (expense), net

    (1,362)     —         —         1,031       (331)
                                   

Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes

    (449,380)     (4,402)       1,927       1,031       (450,824)

Income tax expense (benefit)

    (99,503)     (894) (4)     675 (4)     361 (4)     (99,361)
                                   

Net Income (Loss)

  $ (349,877)   $ (3,508)     $ 1,252     $ 670     $ (351,463)
                                   

Preferred shareholder dividends

    —       —         —         (2,700)       (2,700)
                                   

Net Income (Loss) Available to Common Shareholders

  $ (349,877)   $ (3,508)     $ 1,252     $ (2,030)     $ (354,163)
                                   

Weighted average shares outstanding (5)

            5,715
             

Basic loss per share (5)

          $ (61.97)
             

Diluted loss per share(5)

          $ (61.97)
             

 

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

(1) Reflects the dividend of Goodwin to PNX. Thus, revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively, have been excluded from the pro forma consolidated statements of operations.

 

(2)

Reflects the new costs for certain services, previously provided by PNX, which will be replaced or eliminated. The costs for other services provided by PNX that are not expected to change are reflected in the historical financial statements. Costs that will change or be eliminated relate to human resources, facilities,

 

40


Table of Contents
 

corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax. Costs for these functions will be directly incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been added to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. The pro forma adjustments exclude the general overhead costs allocated to the Company by PNX that will no longer be incurred. Effective November 1, 2008 the PNX cost allocations were ended and the new cost structure was put in place. Details of the cost adjustments are as follows:

 

     For the Year Ended December 31, 2007  
     Expense
Sharing Charge
   New Cost     Savings  
($ in millions)                  

Employment expenses:

       

Human resources—pension costs

   $ 1.4    $ —   (a)   $ 1.4  
                       
       

Other operating expenses:

       

Rent and occupancy

     2.1      0.8 (b)     1.3  

Human resources—administration

     2.4      0.8 (c)     1.6  

Corporate and staff

     1.3      0.2 (d)     1.1  

Corporate communications

     1.8      0.6 (e)     1.2  

Public company expenses

     —        1.9 (f)     (1.9 )
                       
     7.6      4.3       3.3  
                       

Total Cost Adjustments

   $ 9.0    $ 4.3     $ 4.7  
                       

 

     For the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008  
     Expense
Sharing Charge
   New Cost     Savings  
($ in millions)                  

Employment expenses:

       

Human resources—pension costs

   $ 1.0    $ —   (a)   $ 1.0  
                       

Other operating expenses:

       

Rent and occupancy

     1.7      0.6 (b)     1.1  

Human resources—administration

     1.0      0.6 (c)     0.4  

Corporate and staff

     0.5      0.2 (d)     0.3  

Corporate communications

     0.9      0.4 (e)     0.5  

Public company expenses

     —        1.4 (f)     (1.4 )
                       
     4.1      3.2       0.9  
                       

Total Cost Adjustments

   $ 5.1    $ 3.2     $ 1.9  
                       
 
  (a) —For Human resources—pension costs, the Company eliminated expense sharing charges related to a defined benefit pension plan because it will not have such a plan.

 

  (b) —For Rent and occupancy expenses, the expense sharing charge reflects the cost for the corporate headquarters currently occupied in part by the Company. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects the square footage requirements of the Company at market rates. This rate is supported by a new, eight-year lease agreement already executed by the Company.

 

  (c) —For Human resources—administration, the expense sharing charge includes charges for human resource professionals as well as costs for employee programs and systems. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects executed contracts for payroll processing, 401(k) administration, stock plan administration, benefits administration as well as employment expenses for the personnel required to support the ongoing business function.

 

41


Table of Contents
  (d) —The Corporate and staff expense sharing charges include overhead expenses for PNX’s executive and public company costs. The pro forma expense, or new cost, presentation eliminates these expense sharing charges and separately identifies the Company’s public company expenses.

 

  (e) —For Corporate communications, the expense sharing charges include charges for communication personnel as well as costs associated with internal and external communication programs. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects the employment of an individual and the terms of an executed agreement with an external public relations company experienced in supporting public companies of similar size and scale to the Company.

 

  (f) —For Public company expenses, the pro forma expenses, or new cost, reflect the Company’s board of directors fees, exchange listing fees, transfer agent expenses and other incidental costs associated with being an independent public company.

 

(3) Reflects the following:

 

   

The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million and to terminate the outstanding credit instruments extended by PNX in favor of the Company effective December 31, 2007.

 

   

Reduction of interest expense as the Company intends to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life in connection with this spin-off transaction. The Company will seek to renegotiate and keep approximately $20.0 million of this indebtedness outstanding on a third-party, arm’s-length basis. The pro forma financial presentation assumes a renegotiated interest rate on this indebtedness of LIBOR plus 400 basis points. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation on or after the distribution date.

 

   

Reflects an agreement entered into on October 30, 2008 with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position of the Company on a fully-diluted basis. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed on October 31, 2008 and the second step of which is expected to be completed in connection with the distribution.

 

(4) Reflects the tax attributes of the above pro forma adjustments at an incremental U.S. federal income tax rate of 35% and at varying state tax rates.

 

(5) Pro forma basic and diluted loss per share and weighted average shares outstanding for the periods presented are based on The Phoenix Companies, Inc. common shares outstanding as of September 30, 2008, adjusted for the expected distribution ratio of one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. common stock.

 

42


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Balance Sheet

As of September 30, 2008

 

          Pro Forma Adjustments        
($ in thousands)   Historical     Transferred
Business(1)
    Intercompany
Financing(2)
    Preferred
Equity

Financing(3)
    Other(4)     Pro Forma  

Assets

           

Current Assets

           

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 22,610     $ (100 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ —       $ 44,491  

Trading securities, at fair value

    10,463       —         —         —         —         10,463  

Available-for-sale securities, at fair value

    1,517       —         —         —         —         1,517  

Accounts receivable

    5,903       (590 )     —         —         —         5,313  

Receivables from related parties

    17,914       (85 )     —         —         —         17,829  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

    2,453       (410 )     —         —         —         2,043  
                                               

Total current assets

    60,860       (1,185 )     (13,019 )     35,000       —         81,656  
                                               

Deferred commissions

    2,212       —         —         —         —         2,212  

Furniture, equipment and leasehold improvements, net

    4,054       (11 )     —         —         —         4,043  

Intangible assets, net

    86,119       (13,022 )     —         —         —         73,097  

Goodwill

    122,663       (11,900 )     —         —         —         110,763  

Deferred taxes, net

    86,643       (3,452 )     —         —         (83,191 )     —    

Long-term investments and other assets

    2,501       —         —         —         —         2,501  
                                               

Total assets

  $ 365,052     $ (29,570 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ (83,191 )   $ 274,272  
                                               

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

           

Current liabilities

           

Accrued compensation and benefits

  $ 25,121     $ (2,872 )   $ —       $ —       $ 770     $ 23,019  

Accounts payable

    2,545       —         —         —         1,800       4,345  

Payables to related parties

    9,442       —         —         —         (9,442 )     —    

Securities sold short, at fair value

    698       —         —         —         —         698  

Income taxes payable

    8,148       (3,291 )     —         —         (4,857 )     —    

Other accrued liabilities

    3,648       —         —         —         —         3,648  

Broker dealer payable

    5,837       —         —         —         —         5,837  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

    12,000       —         (2,000 )     —         —         10,000  
                                               

Total current liabilities

    67,439       (6,163 )     (2,000 )     —         (11,729 )     47,547  

Deferred taxes, net

    —         —         —         —         10,809       10,809  

Notes payable to related parties

    21,019       —         (11,019 )     —         —         10,000  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

    1,667       —         —         —         —         1,667  
                                               

Total liabilities

    90,125       (6,163 )     (13,019 )     —         (920 )     70,023  
                                               

Convertible preferred equity

    —         —         —         45,000       —         45,000  
                                               

Stockholder’s Equity

           

Common stock

    —         —         —         —         —         —    

Additional paid-in-capital

    962,546       (42,392 )     —         (10,000 )     10,329       920,483  

Accumulated deficit

    (687,450 )     18,985       —         —         (92,600 )     (761,065 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

    (169 )     —         —         —         —         (169 )
                                               

Total stockholder’s equity

    274,927       (23,407 )     —         (10,000 )     (82,271 )     159,249  
                                               

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

  $ 365,052     $ (29,570 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ (83,191 )   $ 274,272  
                                               

 

43


Table of Contents

 

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

(1) Reflects the transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX.

 

(2) Reflects a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life. The Company will seek to renegotiate and keep approximately $20.0 million of this indebtedness outstanding on a third-party, arm’s-length basis. The pro forma financial presentation assumes a renegotiated interest rate on this indebtedness of LIBOR plus 400 basis points. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation on or after the distribution date.

 

(3) On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

 

(4) Reflects settlement of intercompany payables in connection with the spin-off as well as a valuation allowance of $94.0 million against deferred tax assets. Intercompany payables are settled by either cash or, in some instances, forgiven. Intercompany payables settled in cash consist of services provided under intercompany shared services agreement. The establishment of the valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were generated primarily by federal net operating losses, was due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets, as well as due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off that may result in all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers to not be available to the Company following the spin-off. This adjustment was made when considering the Company on a separate return basis, as the Company was previously included in a tax sharing agreement with PNX.

Pro Forma Adjusted Net Income Reconciliation Schedule

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2007  
           Pro Forma Adjustments       
       Historical     Transferred
Business
    Cost
Adjustments
   Financing    Pro Forma  
($ in millions)       

Net income (loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (3.1 )   $ 3.1    $ 16.5    $ 2.3  

Add back:

            

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1       (2.6 )     —        —        27.5  

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       —         —        —        0.3  

Intangible asset related deferred taxes

     0.3       0.9       —        —        1.2  
                                      

Adjusted net income(1)

   $ 16.5     $ (4.8 )   $ 3.1    $ 16.5    $ 31.3  
                                      
     Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008  
           Pro Forma Adjustments       
     Historical     Transferred
Business
    Cost
Adjustments
   Financing    Pro Forma  
($ in millions)       

Net income (loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (3.5 )   $ 1.3    $ 0.6    $ (351.5 )

Add back:

            

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4       (2.0 )     —        —        20.4  

Intangible asset impairment

     100.5       —         —        —        100.5  

Goodwill impairment

     331.7       —         —        —        331.7  

Goodwill and intangible asset related deferred taxes

     (91.1 )     0.8       —        —        (90.3 )
                                      

Adjusted net income(1)

   $ 13.6     $ (4.7 )   $ 1.3    $ 0.6    $ 10.8  
                                      

 

44


Table of Contents

 

Notes to Pro Forma Adjusted Net Income Reconciliation Schedule

 

(1) As supplemental information, we provide a non-GAAP performance measure that we refer to as adjusted net income. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, net income determined in accordance with GAAP. Adjusted net income is defined as net income (loss) plus amortization and impairments of goodwill and intangible assets and deferred taxes related to those assets. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance as we believe it most accurately represents the operating performance of the Company adjusted for non-cash expenses related to acquisitions. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure to be useful to investors because it is an important metric in measuring economic performance of asset management companies, as an indicator of value and because it facilitates comparison of our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Adjusted net income is also used by the Company as one of the inputs for calculating performance-based incentives. Please review our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of adjusted net income to net income, included in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measure.”

 

45


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF

FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following discussion of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes which appear elsewhere in this information statement.

This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. See “Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements” for more information. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including those discussed below and elsewhere in this information statement, particularly under the heading “Risk Factors.”

On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and PIM, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement (the “Agreement”) with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in us and our direct and wholly owned subsidiary. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off. In certain cases, Harris Bankcorp can put the securities to us. See Note 4 to our September 30, 2008 unaudited consolidated financial statements for additional information concerning Harris Bankcorp’s put option.

Overview

We are currently a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. PNX has determined to spin off the Company by distributing all of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX as a dividend. We will enter into a separation and distribution agreement with PNX (the “Separation Agreement”) containing the key provisions relating to our separation from PNX. The Separation Agreement identifies the assets to be transferred, liabilities to be assumed and contracts to be assigned to us. Our capital structure will be changed significantly at the date of our separation from PNX. See the related discussion in “Capitalization.”

Our Business

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

 

46


Table of Contents

Our Profitability Drivers

Our profitability is primarily driven by the following factors:

 

   

Investment management fees earned on assets under management. Depending on the product, these fees can be based on average daily market values, beginning-of-quarter market values, or outstanding principal values of the assets being managed. Assets under management are principally driven by the following factors:

 

  ¡  

sales less redemptions (net flows); and

 

  ¡  

absolute and relative performance.

 

   

Operating expenses, including:

 

  ¡  

base compensation;

 

  ¡  

variable incentive compensation;

 

  ¡  

distribution expenses; and

 

  ¡  

administrative expenses.

 

   

Amortization of intangibles, principally related to acquired investment contracts.

Recent Market Developments

Recent markets have experienced unprecedented credit and liquidity issues as well as volatility and declines in the equity markets. Lending practices in past years, particularly in the “sub-prime” market, coupled with dramatic declines in home prices, rising mortgage defaults and increasing home foreclosures, have resulted in significant write-downs of asset values by financial institutions, including government-sponsored entities and major commercial and investment banks. These write-downs, initially of mortgage-backed securities but spreading to most sectors of the credit markets, and to credit default swaps and other derivative securities, have caused many financial institutions to seek additional capital, to merge with larger and stronger institutions, to be subsidized by the U.S. Government and, in some cases, to fail. Reflecting concern about the stability of the financial markets generally and the strength of counterparties, credit markets have worsened considerably, with many lenders and institutional investors reducing, and in some cases, ceasing to provide funding to borrowers, including other financial institutions. Additionally, concerns over increasing unemployment, fluctuating inflation and energy costs as well as geopolitical issues have contributed to diminished expectations for the economy and the financial markets going forward. These factors, combined with declining business and consumer confidence and increased unemployment, have precipitated an economic slowdown and fears of a prolonged recession. As a result, the financial markets and the U.S. economy are experiencing a period of extreme volatility.

This economic environment has had a direct impact on the actions of both retail and institutional investors. The continued erosion of the equity and fixed income markets has materially and adversely impacted the value of our assets under management which has resulted in lower fee revenues. Although it is not possible to predict how long this economic downturn will continue, it is expected to have a direct impact on our fourth quarter 2008 results. The following table presents interim third-party assets under management by product for the periods indicated:

 

($ in billions)

   November 30,
2008
   September 30,
2008
   Change  

Mutual Funds

   $ 15.2    $ 17.7    $ (2.5 )

Separately Managed Accounts

     3.0      3.8      (0.8 )

Institutional Accounts

     4.9      5.9      (1.0 )

Structured Finance Products

     1.0      1.3      (0.3 )
                      

Ending Balance

   $ 24.1    $ 28.7    $ (4.6 )
                      

 

47


Table of Contents

General account assets under management at September 30, 2008 were $12.5 billion. The fees earned on general account assets are not based on a percentage of assets under management but, rather, a reimbursement of cost. Therefore, recent market activity has not had a significant effect on revenues or liquidity. In addition, the Company will not be managing the general account assets following the spin-off, and the related revenues and expenses are excluded from the pro forma financial presentation.

The following table summarizes interim period asset flows for third-party assets under management for the two-month period from September 30, 2008 through November 30, 2008:

 

     Two Months
Ended

November 30,
2008
 
($ in billions)       

September 30, 2008 balance

   $ 28.7  

Sales

     0.6  

Redemptions

     (1.5 )
        

Net flows

     (0.9 )

Market depreciation

     (3.8 )

Money market funds—net change in assets under management

     0.1  
        

Net change in assets under management

     (4.6 )
        

November 30, 2008 balance

   $ 24.1  
        

The decrease in our assets under management is driven in great part due to the equity markets, with the S&P 500 Index down 23.1% for the two-month period from September 30, 2008 through November 30, 2008. We have seen decreased investment inflows and an increase in redemptions of certain products. Revenue for retail funds, which is based on average assets during the quarter, will be negatively impacted for the fourth quarter 2008 as compared to third quarter 2008 and fourth quarter 2007. Fourth quarter 2008 revenue for separately managed accounts and institutional accounts will be based primarily on September 30, 2008 asset under management levels, which were lower than levels at June 30, 2008. These decreases will have a direct effect on our net income and liquidity.

In response, the Company is evaluating all elements of its cost structure. Specifically, during the recent equity declines in the markets, management reduced its support staff by approximately 15% and outsourced its transfer agent functions, further reducing its fixed cost base. Variable costs, primarily comprised of incentive compensation and distribution costs, are directly related to revenue levels and will decline accordingly. The Company will continue to review measures to reduce its fixed costs.

The value of the Company’s goodwill and intangibles assets is based on assets under management and the related revenue. As a result, significant and sustained declines in assets under management would impact the valuation of these intangible assets. The Company will be performing its annual impairment test of goodwill in the fourth quarter of 2008 and again in connection with the closing of the spin-off transaction. Given the recent market trends described above, the results of these tests will be reasonably likely to have an adverse impact on the results of operations.

Summary Analysis of Results of Operations

Nine months ended September 30, 2008 compared to nine months ended September 30, 2007. Our results declined to a net loss of $349.9 million in the first nine months of 2008 compared with a net loss of $10.2 million in the first nine months of 2007. This was primarily driven by $432.2 million non-cash goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges. Revenues decreased by $26.6 million primarily due to a decrease in average assets under management as a result of market declines in the second half of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008

 

48


Table of Contents

combined with net outflows of assets since the first six months of 2007. Operating expenses, excluding the impairment charges, decreased $8.5 million due to lower employment and distribution expenses, partially offset by increases in certain other expenses.

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Our results improved to a net loss of $14.2 million in 2007 from a net loss of $47.6 million in 2006. This was primarily driven by a $32.5 million non-cash impairment charge on intangible assets recorded in 2006 as compared to a $0.3 million impairment charge in 2007. Restructuring and severance charges in 2006 of $13.6 million did not recur in 2007. Revenues increased $7.6 million mainly from higher mutual fund management and administrative fees. Total assets under management at December 31, 2007 were $55.5 billion including $13.0 billion of PNX general account assets, down slightly from the prior year end primarily due to net redemptions in our separately managed accounts and institutional products. Net outflows were $0.6 billion in 2007, a significant improvement over net outflows of $4.0 billion in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Our results declined to a net loss of $47.6 million in 2006 compared with a net loss of $33.1 million in 2005. This was primarily driven by a higher intangible asset non-cash impairment charge of $32.5 million in 2006 as compared to an $11.1 million intangible asset impairment in 2005. In addition, investment management fees were $27.5 million lower in 2006, due to a shift in assets to those generating lower management fees. Partially offsetting these reduced fees were lower employment expenses.

Significant Product Introductions and Developments

The following events are important components in developing our multi-manager, multiple distribution channel business model over the past several years:

Adoption of Mid-Cap Value Fund and Foreign Opportunities Fund

In October 2004, we adopted the Mid-Cap Value Fund with $17 million in assets under management. The fund grew to $1 billion in 2007, before it was partially closed to new investors, and had $546 million in assets under management at September 30, 2008. In June 2005, we adopted the Foreign Opportunities Fund and grew the assets under management from $86 million at the time of adoption to approximately $1.1 billion at September 30, 2008.

Completion of Purchase of Remaining Interest in Two Affiliates

In May 2005, we completed the acquisition of the minority interest in SCM Advisors, LLC, formerly Seneca Capital Management (“SCM”), thereby increasing our ownership to 100%. SCM manages a full spectrum of fixed income investment products, primarily institutional.

In September 2005, we completed the acquisition of the minority interest in Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”). KAR’s expertise is primarily in separately managed accounts and private client arenas, as well as in mutual funds and institutional accounts.

See Note 3 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Introduction of Alternative Investment Fund-of-Funds

In November 2005, we introduced the Diversifier fund, an addition to our asset allocation fund-of-funds options. The Diversifier fund offers investors the opportunity to hold interests in a number of our alternative investment options, such as REITs, global utilities and market neutral strategies, as well as several specialized exchange-traded funds (“ETFs”).

 

49


Table of Contents

Strategic Alliance with Harris Investment Management, Inc.

In May 2006, we acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds (the “Insight Funds”) from Harris Investment Management, Inc. (“Harris”). This adoption added 18 funds to our existing mutual fund product line, including a diverse mix of equity, international, fixed income and money market funds, with an additional $10.2 billion in assets under management, including $7.0 billion of money market funds. See Note 3 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Assets Under Management

Our total assets under management as of September 30, 2008 were $41.2 billion, which includes the $14.2 billion of fixed income assets managed by Goodwin that will not be managed by us after the distribution date. The revenues earned from the $14.2 billion managed by Goodwin have been removed from our results in the pro forma information included in “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data.”

Assets Under Management by Product

The following table presents our assets under management by product for the periods indicated:

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
         2008            2007            2007            2006            2005    
($ in billions)                         

Retail assets

              

Mutual fund assets

              

Money market funds

   $ 4.4    $ 7.5    $ 6.2    $ 5.7    $ 0.1

Long-term open-end funds

     8.9      11.7      11.0      11.3      7.8

Closed-end funds

     4.4      5.1      5.1      4.9      4.2
                                  

Total mutual fund assets

     17.7      24.3      22.3      21.9      12.1
                                  

Separately managed accounts

              

Intermediary sponsored programs

     2.0      3.0      2.7      3.8      6.1

Private client accounts

     1.8      3.0      2.7      3.0      3.3
                                  

Total managed account assets

     3.8      6.0      5.4      6.8      9.4
                                  

Total retail assets

     21.5      30.3      27.7      28.7      21.5

Institutional assets(1)

     5.9      11.3      11.2      12.3      13.4

Structured finance products(2)

     1.3      4.9      3.6      4.0      2.5
                                  

Third-party assets

     28.7      46.5      42.5      45.0      37.4

PNX General Account

     12.5      12.9      13.0      13.1      13.5
                                  

Total

   $ 41.2    $ 59.4    $ 55.5    $ 58.1    $ 50.9
                                  

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

50


Table of Contents

Asset Flows by Product

The following table summarizes our asset flows by product for the periods indicated:

 

     Nine Months
Ended September 30,
    Years Ended December 31,  
         2008             2007             2007             2006             2005      
($ in billions)                               

Retail Products

          

Mutual Funds

          

Beginning balance

   $ 22.3     $ 21.9     $ 21.9     $ 12.1     $ 12.3  

Sales

     2.0       3.0       3.6       2.6       2.0  

Redemptions

     (2.4 )     (2.8 )     (3.9 )     (2.8 )     (2.4 )
                                        

Net flows

     (0.4 )     0.2       (0.3 )     (0.2 )     (0.4 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (2.3 )     0.5       0.3       1.5       0.1  

Money market funds net change in assets under management

     (1.8 )     1.8       0.5       (1.4 )     —    

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     (0.1 )     (0.1 )     (0.1 )     9.9       0.1  
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (4.6 )     2.4       0.4       9.8       (0.2 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 17.7     $ 24.3     $ 22.3     $ 21.9     $ 12.1  
                                        

Separately Managed Accounts

          

Beginning balance

   $ 5.4     $ 6.8     $ 6.8     $ 9.4     $ 13.5  

Sales

     0.7       1.0       1.2       1.1       1.8  

Redemptions

     (1.7 )     (2.1 )     (2.6 )     (4.3 )     (5.7 )
                                        

Net flows

     (1.0 )     (1.1 )     (1.4 )     (3.2 )     (3.9 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (0.6 )     0.3       0.1       0.6       (0.1 )

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     —         —         (0.1 )     —         (0.1 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (1.6 )     (0.8 )     (1.4 )     (2.6 )     (4.1 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 3.8     $ 6.0     $ 5.4     $ 6.8     $ 9.4  
                                        

Institutional Products

          

Beginning balance

   $ 11.2     $ 12.3     $ 12.3     $ 13.4     $ 14.2  

Sales

     0.5       0.9       1.2       1.6       5.5  

Redemptions

     (5.5 )     (1.5 )     (2.0 )     (3.5 )     (6.6 )
                                        

Net flows

     (5.0 )     (0.6 )     (0.8 )     (1.9 )     (1.1 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (0.3 )     0.5       0.6       1.1       0.4  

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     —         (0.9 )     (0.9 )     (0.3 )     (0.1 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (5.3 )     (1.0 )     (1.1 )     (1.1 )     (0.8 )
                                        

Ending balance(1)

   $ 5.9     $ 11.3     $ 11.2     $ 12.3     $ 13.4  
                                        

Structured Finance Products

          

Beginning balance

   $ 3.6     $ 4.0     $ 4.0     $ 2.5     $ 2.9  

Sales

     —         2.3       2.3       2.4       1.0  

Redemptions

     (1.2 )     (0.4 )     (0.4 )     (1.1 )     (1.2 )
                                        

Net flows

     (1.2 )     1.9       1.9       1.3       (0.2 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (1.1 )     (1.0 )     (2.3 )     0.2       (0.2 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (2.3 )     0.9       (0.4 )     1.5       (0.4 )
                                        

Ending balance(2)

   $ 1.3     $ 4.9     $ 3.6     $ 4.0     $ 2.5  
                                        

General Account

          

Ending balance

   $ 12.5     $ 12.9     $ 13.0     $ 13.1     $ 13.5  
                                        

Total

          

Beginning balance

   $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 58.1     $ 50.9     $ 56.2  

Sales

     3.2       7.2       8.3       7.7       10.3  

Redemptions

    
(10.8
)
    (6.8 )     (8.9 )     (11.7 )     (15.9 )
                                        

Net flows

     (7.6 )     0.4       (0.6 )     (4.0 )     (5.6 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (4.3 )     0.3       (1.3 )     3.4       0.2  

Money market net change

     (1.8 )     1.8       0.5       (1.4 )     —    

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     (0.6 )     (1.2 )     (1.2 )     9.2       0.1  
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (14.3 )     1.3       (2.6 )     7.2       (5.3 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 41.2     $ 59.4     $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 50.9  
                                        

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

51


Table of Contents

Assets Under Management by Investment Category

The following table summarizes our assets under management by investment category:

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
         2008            2007            2007            2006            2005    
($ in billions)     

Investment Categories

              

Equity assets

   $ 12.6    $ 18.1    $ 16.7    $ 19.2    $ 18.9

Fixed income assets(1)

     11.7      20.9      19.6      20.1      18.3

Money market assets

     4.4      7.5      6.2      5.7      0.2
                                  

Third-Party Assets

     28.7      46.5      42.5      45.0      37.4

PNX General Account

     12.5      12.9      13.0      13.1      13.5
                                  

Total

   $ 41.2    $ 59.4    $ 55.5    $ 58.1    $ 50.9
                                  

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.7, $2.1, $2.1, $1.4 and $1.7 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

Nine months ended September 30, 2008 compared to nine months ended September 30, 2007 . At September 30, 2008, we managed $41.2 billion in total assets, a decrease of $18.2 billion from September 30, 2007. This was primarily driven by net outflows totaling $8.6 billion over the prior four quarters, of which $5.2 billion was in institutional accounts, combined with market depreciation of $5.9 billion and a decrease in money market assets of $3.1 billion over that period. Of the $5.2 billion of institutional net redemptions, $3.7 billion related to a terminated relationship with one institutional client, a general account mandate for a non-affiliated insurance company. The fees earned on these assets were approximately five basis points. Of the $5.9 billion market depreciation, $2.4 billion related to structured finance products while $3.5 billion related to other products. This was the result of the significant downturn in the securities markets.

Both equity assets and fixed income assets were lower driven by market depreciation in the fourth quarter of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, as well as structured finance market depreciation over the four quarters ending September 30, 2008. Also contributing to the decreases in equity assets were net outflows in separately managed accounts. Fixed income assets declined further due to net outflows in the first quarter of 2008 related to a terminated relationship with one institutional client.

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006 . At December 31, 2007, we managed $55.5 billion in total assets, a decrease of $2.6 billion from December 31, 2006. This decrease was driven by unfavorable net flows in our institutional and separately managed account products as well as market depreciation in structured finance products. Net outflows in institutional and separately managed accounts were related to underperformance in certain strategies. Market depreciation in structured finance products was driven by the significant deterioration of the fixed income market in the second half of 2007. Partially offsetting these decreases in assets under management was $1.0 billion of market appreciation, excluding structured finance products and positive net flows in structured finance products due to the three new products issued during the year. Each of these issuances occurred in the first two quarters of 2007, before significant declines in value of these securities took hold. Despite a decrease in our long-term open-end mutual fund assets at period end, we had sales of $3.6 billion in 2007 driven in large part by the successful fund adoptions of the Foreign Opportunities Fund and Mid Cap Value Fund. Also contributing to sales was focused wholesaling efforts. However, these increases were offset by higher redemptions in funds affected by sector preferences, such as real estate.

Assets under management by investment category changed slightly as equity assets became less attractive for investors given the market volatility that was seen in the second half of 2007 combined with the underperformance of certain equity strategies within our separately managed account platform, resulting in net outflows of $1.4 billion.

 

52


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005 . At December 31, 2006, we managed $58.1 billion in total assets, an increase of $7.2 billion from December 31, 2005. This increase was driven by the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006, which added $10.2 billion to our assets under management, consisting of $7.0 billion in money market funds and $3.2 billion in long-term equity and fixed income funds. Also contributing to the increase in total assets was market appreciation of $3.4 billion in 2006. We also had positive net flows in structured finance products as a result of three issuances in 2006. Partially offsetting these increases were net outflows in our separately managed accounts and institutional products. The net outflows were driven by underperforming large cap equity strategies that have since largely been redeemed. Net outflows in money market funds were driven by institutional investors who use these funds for cash management purposes.

Assets under management by investment category changed significantly in 2006 due to the adoption of the Insight Funds which included $7.0 billion, $2.3 billion and $0.9 billion of money market, equity and fixed income assets, respectively, at the time of acquisition. Fixed income assets also increased due to the three structured finance product issuances during the period.

Average Fee Earning Assets Under Management and Average Basis Points

The average fee earning assets under management and average fees earned expressed in basis points presented in the table below are intended to provide information in the analysis of our asset based revenue and distribution expenses. Money market and long-term mutual fund fees are calculated based on either average daily net assets or average weekly net assets. Separately managed accounts and institutional fees are generally calculated based on beginning of period, average or end of period asset values. Structured finance product fees are calculated based on a combination of the underlying cash flows and the principal value of the product.

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
       Average Fees
Earned in 2008
Expressed in BPS
   2008    2007      2007        2006        2005  
($ in billions)                              

Products

                 

Money market mutual funds

   10.7    $ 5.9    $ 6.0    $ 6.2    $ 4.3    $ 0.1

Long-term mutual funds

   61.1      15.2      16.7      17.0      14.2      15.0

Separately managed accounts

   46.3      4.8      6.5      6.4      8.1      10.4

Institutional(1)

   25.8      7.9      11.9      11.7      12.7      14.1

Structured finance products(2)

   19.7      2.8      5.5      5.4      2.7      1.7
                                     

Third-Party Assets

   40.3      36.6      46.6      46.7      42.0      41.3

PNX General Account

   9.6      12.8      13.1      13.1      13.3      13.4
                                     

Total

   32.3    $ 49.4    $ 59.7    $ 59.8    $ 55.3    $ 54.7
                                     

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

53


Table of Contents

First Nine Months Results of Operations

Summary Financial Data

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,     Increase (Decrease)  
         2008             2007             2008 vs. 2007      
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

      

Investment management fees

   $ 102.2     $ 119.5     $ (17.3 )

Other revenue

     41.2       50.5       (9.3 )
                        

Total revenues

     143.4       170.0       (26.6 )
                        

Operating expenses

     135.0       143.5       (8.5 )

Goodwill and intangible asset impairment

     432.2       —         432.2  

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4       22.6       (0.2 )
                        

Total expenses

     589.6       166.1       423.5  
                        

Operating (loss) income

     (446.2 )     3.9       (450.1 )

Other income (expense)

     (1.8 )     0.6       (2.4 )

Interest expense, net

     (1.4 )     (18.9 )     (17.5 )
                        

Income (loss) before income taxes

     (449.4 )     (14.4 )     (435.0 )

Income tax benefit

     (99.5 )     (4.2 )     95.3  
                        

Net income (loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (10.2 )   $ (339.7 )
                        

Revenues

The decrease in revenues was primarily a result of a decrease in average assets under management due in large part to the volatility in the securities markets in the second half of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008 and net outflows of assets occurring after the third quarter of 2007. Revenues by source were as follows:

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Increase (Decrease)  
            2008                  2007           2008 vs. 2007  
($ in millions)       

Investment management fees

        

Mutual funds

   $ 56.8    $ 63.5    $ (6.7 )

Separately managed accounts

     16.7      22.7      (6.0 )

Institutional accounts

     15.3      18.7      (3.4 )

Structured finance products

     4.2      6.0      (1.8 )
                      

Third-party management fees

     93.0      110.9      (17.9 )

PNX general account

     9.2      8.6      0.6  
                      

Total investment management fees

     102.2      119.5      (17.3 )

Distribution and service fees

     24.3      27.1      (2.8 )

Administration and transfer agent fees

     15.1      17.5      (2.4 )

Other income and fees

     1.8      5.9      (4.1 )
                      

Total revenues

   $ 143.4    $ 170.0    $ (26.6 )
                      

Investment Management Fees

Investment management fees decreased primarily due to a decrease in average fee earning assets under management. Average fee earning assets under management decreased primarily as a result of all products experiencing net outflows during the four quarters ending September 30, 2008 combined with market depreciation.

 

54


Table of Contents

Distribution and Service Fees

Distribution and service fees decreased as these fees are asset based and, therefore, reflect the decrease in our average assets under management in the first nine months of 2008 as compared the same period in the prior year. The decrease in fees was partially offset by a corresponding decrease in trail commissions, which are a component of distribution expenses (“trail commissions”). Trail commissions represent asset-based payments to our distribution partners based on a percentage of our assets under management.

Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

Administration and transfer agent fees decreased as a result of a $1.1 million decrease in fund administration fees and a $1.0 million decrease in transfer agent fees in the first nine months of 2008 as compared to the same period in 2007. Fund administration fees decreased due to the decline in the average assets under management upon which these fees are based. Transfer agent fees decreased due to a decline in the number of accounts and a change in the contract with the service provider which also reduced our cost to provide these services. Additionally, underwriting fees decreased $0.3 million due to a decrease in sales of Class-A mutual fund shares on which underwriting fees were earned.

Other Income and Fees

Other income and fees decreased primarily due to a decline in fees earned for the distribution of non-affiliated products.

Operating Expenses

Operating expenses increased primarily due to non-cash goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges recorded in the third and, to a lesser degree, first quarters of 2008. Partially offsetting this was a decrease in employment expenses resulting from lower sales-based and other incentive compensation combined with lower trail commissions and other distribution costs. Operating expenses by category were as follows:

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Increase (Decrease)  
            2008                  2007           2008 vs. 2007  
($ in millions)       

Operating expenses

     

Employment expenses

   $     65.8    $ 72.5    $ (6.7 )

Distribution and administrative expenses

     33.6      37.2      (3.6 )

Other operating expenses

     35.6      33.8      1.8  

Goodwill and intangible asset impairments

     432.2      —        432.2  

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4      22.6      (0.2 )
                      

Total operating expenses

   $ 589.6    $ 166.1    $ 423.5  
                      

Employment Expenses

Employment expenses decreased primarily due to a $7.4 million decrease in incentive compensation partially offset by a $1.2 million increase in base compensation payments. Sales-based incentive compensation decreased due to reduced mutual fund sales. Other incentive compensation decreased due to lower fee revenues in the first nine months of 2008. Base compensation increased primarily due to severance payments in 2008 partially offset by a reduction in the number of employees.

Distribution and Administrative Expenses

Distribution and administrative expenses decreased primarily due to $2.9 million in decreased asset-based expenses paid to our distribution partners, $0.4 million in reduced fees to our fund administrator, and a 0.3 million decrease in mutual fund commission amortization.

 

55


Table of Contents

Other Operating Expenses

Other operating expenses increased primarily as a result of a $1.7 million increase in rent resulting from vacating and/or moving office space at three of our affiliates. Additionally, increased legal, consultant and portfolio management operational costs were offset by reduced PNX chargebacks.

Goodwill and Intangible Asset Impairments

In the first quarter of 2008, a $10.5 million non-cash intangible asset impairment charge was recorded as a result of an interim impairment test of identified intangibles valued at $29.3 million. The test was triggered by our assessment that previous declines in assets and revenue supporting the intangible assets, coupled with a notice of termination from one large account, required such a test. In connection with this impairment, we also performed a test for impairment of goodwill. No such goodwill impairment was required.

In the third quarter of 2008, we recorded a $421.7 million pre-tax impairment charge related to goodwill and other intangible assets. We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing and, given the current market conditions and the existence of impairment indicators we expanded the fair value estimations used in impairment testing to incorporate other data including third party valuation analyses obtained from our financial advisors, discounted cash flow models and market transactions. This analysis resulted in $331.7 million in goodwill and $90.0 million in intangible asset impairments. The primary drivers of the impairment were the reduction in assets under management, due to markets being at multi-year lows, and valuation multiples for asset managers also being at multi-year lows.

Intangible Asset Amortization

Amortization was down slightly due to certain intangible assets having become fully amortized during 2007.

Other Income and Expenses

Other Income (Expense), Net

Other income (expense), net decreased as the market value of our trading securities decreased in 2008 resulting in realized and unrealized losses totaling $2.4 million as compared to gains of $0.2 million in 2007. These losses were partially offset by an increase in the equity earnings of our unconsolidated holdings.

Interest Expense, Net

Interest expense, net decreased as a result of a reduction in the amount of debt outstanding during the first nine months of each year. Effective December 31, 2007, PNX forgave $325.0 million of debt by making a capital contribution to us. Also contributing, to a lesser degree, was the $12.0 million of debt repayments we made to PNX during the twelve month period ended September 30, 2008.

Income Taxes

Our income tax benefit increased from $4.2 million in the first nine months of 2007 to $99.5 million in the first nine months of 2008 primarily due to an increase in our pretax loss from $14.4 million in the first nine months of 2007 to $449.4 million in the first nine months of 2008. The significant goodwill and intangible asset impairments recorded in 2008 resulted in deferred tax benefits.

 

56


Table of Contents

Annual Results of Operations

Summary Financial Data

 

     Years Ended December 31,     Increase (Decrease)  
       2007     2006     2005     2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

          

Investment management fees

   $ 159.0     $ 164.0     $ 191.5     $ (5.0 )   $ (27.5 )

Other revenue

     67.2       54.6       45.9       12.6       8.7  
                                        

Total revenues

     226.2       218.6       237.4       7.6       (18.8 )
                                        

Operating expenses

     190.5       198.0       212.1       (7.5 )     (14.1 )

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       32.5       11.1       (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1       32.0       33.3       (1.9 )     (1.3 )
                                        

Total expenses

     220.9       262.5       256.5       (41.6 )     6.0  
                                        

Operating income

     5.3       (43.9 )     (19.1 )     49.2       (24.8 )

Other income (expense)

     (0.3 )     1.5       (6.5 )     (1.8 )     8.0  

Interest expense, net

     (25.1 )     (32.0 )     (27.1 )     6.9       (4.9 )
                                        

Income (loss) before income taxes

     (20.1 )     (74.4 )     (52.7 )     54.3       (21.7 )

Income tax benefit

     (5.9 )     (26.8 )     (19.6 )     (20.9 )     7.2  
                                        

Net income (loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (47.6 )   $ (33.1 )   $ 33.4     $ (14.5 )
                                        

Revenues

The increase in revenues during 2007 as compared to 2006 was primarily a result of an increase in mutual fund investment management, distribution and service fees resulting from higher average mutual fund assets under management. The decrease in revenues in 2006 as compared to 2005 was primarily due to significant redemptions of separately managed accounts and the loss of several institutional clients. This decrease was partially offset by increased distribution and service fees due to higher mutual fund assets under management resulting, in part, from the acquisition of the Insight Funds in May 2006. Revenues by source were as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,    Increase (Decrease)  
       2007    2006    2005    2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Investment management fees

             

Mutual funds

   $ 84.9    $ 76.3    $ 71.1    $ 8.6     $ 5.2  

Separately managed accounts

     29.5      35.7      52.4      (6.2 )     (16.7 )

Institutional accounts

     24.9      34.1      49.9      (9.2 )     (15.8 )

Structured finance products

     8.1      8.0      8.7      0.1       (0.7 )
                                     

Third-party management fees

     147.4      154.1      182.1      (6.7 )     (28.0 )

PNX general account

     11.6      9.9      9.4      1.7       0.5  
                                     

Total investment management fees

     159.0      164.0      191.5      (5.0 )     (27.5 )

Distribution and service fees

     36.5      29.8      25.6      6.7       4.2  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     23.3      19.8      16.2      3.5       3.6  

Other income and fees

     7.4      5.0      4.1      2.4       0.9  
                                     

Total revenues

   $ 226.2    $ 218.6    $ 237.4    $ 7.6     $ (18.8 )
                                     

 

57


Table of Contents

Investment Management Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Investment management fees decreased primarily due to a decline in fees earned on separately managed accounts and institutional accounts. These fees decreased due to net outflows of assets resulting from underperforming large cap growth strategies that have since been largely redeemed and also due to a one-time final accelerated $5.2 million fee in 2006 from an early termination of an institutional contract. This decrease was partially offset by an increase in mutual fund investment management fees, as we earned fees from the Insight Funds for the full year in 2007 as compared to only a post-adoption partial year in 2006. Additionally, fees earned from managing closed-end funds increased $2.6 million due to secondary or preferred offerings as well as market appreciation. Fees earned from managing PNX’s general account increased $1.7 million primarily due to a change in the fee structure.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Investment management fees decreased, despite an increase in average assets under management, as a majority of the increased assets were in lower fee products. In May 2006, with the adoption of the Insight Funds, money market assets, a lower fee product, increased by $7.0 billion. Along with an increase in other mutual fund assets under management, both open-end and closed-end, mutual funds management fees increased $5.2 million year-over-year. However, for assets under management in other asset classes, particularly in separately managed accounts and in institutional accounts, net flows were negative, more than offsetting market appreciation and resulting in a $27.5 million overall decrease in management fees.

Distribution and Service Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Distribution and service fees for open-end mutual funds are earned based upon average assets under management. Average mutual fund assets increased by 25% from 2006 to 2007 in large part due to the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Distribution and service fees increased as a result of a 23% increase in average mutual fund assets under management. The increase was primarily due to the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006.

Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Administration and transfer agent fees represent payments made to us for fund administration and transfer agent services provided. Fund administration fees increased by $2.8 million, while transfer agent fees increased by $0.5 million. Due to the increase in average assets under management resulting primarily from the adoption of the Insight Funds, transfer agent fees also increased, as they are earned based on the number of accounts. Underwriting fees increased $0.3 million due to an increase in sales on which these fees are earned.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Fund administration fees increased by $3.6 million as a result of the adoption of the Insight Funds. Transfer agent fees increased $0.7 million due to the increase in shareholder accounts related to the partial year impact of the Insight Funds adoption.

Other Income and Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Other income and fees increased primarily as a result of increased sales of non-affiliated products for which we earned distribution income. In addition, $1.0 million received in 2007 related to the issuance of a structured product.

 

58


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Other income and fees increased primarily due to the initial sales of non-affiliated products, partially offset by reduced brokerage commissions earned.

Operating Expenses

Operating expenses decreased in 2007 as compared to 2006, primarily as a result of a non-cash intangible asset impairment charge of $32.5 million recorded in 2006 as compared to a $0.3 million impairment in 2007. In addition, certain employment charges, including staff reductions, and lease related charges totaling $13.6 million associated with the restructuring of the business in 2006 did not recur in 2007. In 2006 as compared to 2005, operating expenses increased primarily as a result of a $32.5 million intangible asset impairment recognized in 2006 as compared to a $11.1 million charge in 2005. Both years had restructuring charges: $13.6 million in 2006 and $12.5 million in 2005. Employment expenses decreased $12.7 million in 2006 because of reduced staff levels resulting in part from the 2005 restructuring and also due to reduced variable compensation. Operating expenses by category were as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,    Increase (Decrease)  
       2007    2006    2005    2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Operating expenses

             

Employment expenses

   $ 94.9    $ 97.7    $ 110.4    $ (2.8 )   $ (12.7 )

Distribution and administrative expenses

     50.1      41.3      35.8      8.8       5.5  

Other operating expenses

     45.5      45.4      53.4      0.1       (8.0 )

Restructuring and severance

     —        13.6      12.5      (13.6 )     1.1  

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3      32.5      11.1      (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1      32.0      33.3      (1.9 )     (1.3 )
                                     

Total operating expenses

   $ 220.9    $ 262.5    $ 256.5    $ (41.6 )   $ 6.0  
                                     

Employment Expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Employment expenses decreased to $94.9 million from $97.7 million, primarily as a result of a decrease in staffing levels as part of the restructuring that occurred in 2006. Base salaries decreased by $8.8 million, partially offset by increased incentive compensation paid on higher mutual fund sales in 2007. In 2006, $2.6 million of incentive compensation was recorded relating to an accelerated fee from the early termination of an institutional contract which did not recur in 2007. Other employment expenses, including employee related charges such as benefits and payroll taxes, decreased by $1.0 million primarily as a result of the reduced compensation, partially offset by an increase in human resource administration costs.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Employment expenses decreased to $97.7 million from $110.4 million primarily due to a decrease in base salaries related to the reduction in the number of employees as part of the restructuring that occurred in both 2005 and 2006. Additionally, a decrease in performance-based compensation was primarily driven by lower investment management fees upon which this compensation was based.

Distribution and administrative expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Distribution and administrative expenses increased, due primarily to an increase in trail commissions related to an increase in mutual fund assets under management. Other distribution-related costs and costs associated with fund accounting of the mutual funds increased primarily due to the adoption of the Insight Funds, which increased both sales and assets under management.

 

59


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Distribution and administrative expenses increased, due primarily to an increase in trail payments and fund accounting costs related to the adoption of the Insight Funds.

Other Operating Expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006 . Other operating expenses consist primarily of computer services, professional fees, investment research fees, travel, training, entertainment, portfolio management operational costs and other office and corporate expenses including items such as rent, insurance, printing and general taxes. The services provided by PNX are detailed in the related party note, Note 15, to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement.

Other operating expenses were basically unchanged from 2006 to 2007 as management focused on controlling costs. Increases in investment research fees, portfolio management operational costs and printing were offset by decreases in outside services, insurance, consultants and professional fees.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005 . Operating expenses decreased primarily as a result of the 2006 restructuring. Rent, marketing costs, consulting fees, computer services, clearance costs, insurance and outside services were reduced, more than offsetting increases in communications costs and investment research fees.

Restructuring and Severance

In 2005, we initiated a significant restructuring program. Specifically, the Company: (i) streamlined its operating structure from being a collection of majority-owned and wholly owned affiliated firms into a single business of affiliated managers with common distribution and support operations, (ii) eliminated redundant functions and management layers, (iii) took actions to restructure its product portfolio focusing on mutual fund products, and (iv) repositioned its distribution strategy with an increased focus on retail mutual fund distribution. The Company had not undertaken changes of a similar magnitude at any time prior to or since 2006 and does not expect to do so in the future. These actions resulted in costs totaling $26.1 million, of which $12.5 million were recognized in 2005 and $13.6 million in 2006.

The charges were primarily related to actions taken at several of our affiliated asset managers. Charges at SCM totaled $12.0 million, primarily comprised of $7.8 million of one-time severance payments and $3.5 million of vacated office space. Charges at EAM were comprised of $9.5 million in connection with terminating its large-cap strategy. The primary components of the charges at EAM included $5.0 million of severance payments and $2.6 million of vacated office space. We incurred $2.8 million of charges at KAR, including $1.6 million of severance payments. Another charge of $1.8 million was primarily related to reconfiguring investment strategies of the Duff and Phelps investment teams largely to focus that firm on its core strengths.

Intangible Asset Impairment

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. In 2007 and 2006, we recorded impairment charges of $0.3 million and $32.5 million, respectively. Each of the impairments was the result of the loss during those years of a significant portion of the revenues supporting identifiable intangible assets.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. In 2006 and 2005 we recorded impairment charges of $32.5 million and $11.1 million, respectively. The impairments in each year were the result of the loss of a significant portion of the revenues supporting identifiable intangible assets.

 

60


Table of Contents

Intangible Asset Amortization

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Intangible asset amortization is recognized on our definite-lived intangible assets on a straight-line basis over the estimated remaining lives of those assets. Amortization decreased primarily as a result of the impairment recorded in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Amortization decreased primarily as a result of the impairment recorded in 2005.

Other Income and Expenses

Other Income (Expense), Net

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Other income (expense), net decreased. We hold investments in certain affiliated mutual funds and institutional accounts that are classified as trading securities. Changes in the market value of these investments are included in other income (expense). The difference between the cost and the market value of these holdings decreased by $2.6 million as compared to a $0.7 million increase in the prior year, or a net $3.3 million increase in the unrealized loss year over year. Partially offsetting this increase in the unrealized loss was an increase of $1.2 million in realized gains on securities in 2007 as compared to 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Other income (expense), net increased. In 2005, the Company acquired the remaining minority interests in certain of its asset management subsidiaries. The minority interest recorded in 2005 until the time of these final acquisitions was $6.7 million. Changes in the market value of its trading securities gained $0.7 million in 2006 as compared to a loss of $1.2 million in 2005, a net $1.9 million increase in 2006 over 2005. Changes in other income and expense items resulted in a $0.7 million decrease.

Interest Expense, Net

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Interest expense, net is mainly comprised of interest expense on the intercompany debt owed by us to PNX, but also includes interest and dividend income earned. Interest expense in 2007 was lower by $3.4 million as compared to 2006 due to lower interest rates of variable rate notes as well as lower renegotiated fixed interest rates. The $57.2 million remaining portion of a promissory note agreement with a subsidiary’s minority members to finance the remainder of that subsidiary’s acquisition was paid in early 2007 thereby reducing interest expense by $2.8 million in 2007. The $25.0 million outstanding on an unsecured revolving credit facility with outside lenders was repaid in 2006 further reducing interest expense by $0.5 million in 2007. Interest and dividend income increased to $1.6 million in 2007 from $1.5 million in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. The increase was primarily the result of an increase in the interest rate on one of the debt agreements with PNX, which increased interest expense by $3.0 million, and the promissory note with a subsidiary’s minority members that was entered into in mid-year 2005, increasing interest expense by $2.0 million in 2006. Interest and dividend income decreased to $1.5 million in 2006 from $1.6 million in 2005.

Income Tax Expense

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Our income tax benefit decreased from $26.8 million in 2006 to $6.0 million in 2007 primarily due to a decrease in our pretax loss from $74.4 million in 2006 to $20.1 million in 2007. The rate of our income tax benefit decreased from 36% to 30% primarily due to a shift in income between certain affiliates which significantly impacted state taxes as the shift was to affiliates in higher tax jurisdictions. As of December 31, 2007, we had deferred tax assets of $38.8 million and $0.4 million related to net operating and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $9.8 million for state net operating losses. The related federal net operating loss carryovers were $110.9 million,

 

61


Table of Contents

and the related federal capital loss carryovers were $1.0 million. However, due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off, all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers may not be available to the Company following the spin-off. To the extent such losses are generally available to the Company following the spin-off, the related federal net operating loss carryovers of $110.9 million are scheduled to expire between the years 2023 and 2027, and the related federal capital loss carryovers of $1.0 million are scheduled to expire in 2010 and 2012. The state net operating losses of $118.7 million are scheduled to expire as follows: $0.2 million in 2007; $59.6 million in 2008 through 2017 and $58.9 million in 2018 through 2026. We have established a $9.8 million valuation allowance at December 31, 2007, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Our income tax benefit increased from $19.6 million in 2005 to $26.8 million in 2006 primarily due to an increase in our pretax loss from $52.7 million in 2005 to $74.4 million in 2006. Our effective tax rate was relatively unchanged between the two years. As of December 31, 2006, we had deferred tax assets of $31.5 million and $0.3 million related to net operating and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $9.8 million for state net operating losses. We have established a $9.8 million valuation allowance at December 31, 2007, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

Effects of Inflation

For the first nine months of 2008 and the years 2007, 2006 and 2005, inflation did not have a material effect on our consolidated results of operations.

Supplemental Performance Measure

As supplemental information, we provide a non-GAAP performance measure that we refer to as adjusted net income. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, net income determined in accordance with GAAP. Adjusted net income is defined as net income (loss) plus amortization and impairments of intangible assets, impairments of goodwill, and deferred taxes related to those assets. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance as we believe it most accurately represents the operating performance of the Company adjusted for non-cash expenses related to acquisitions. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure to be useful to investors because it is an important metric in measuring economic performance of asset management companies, as an indicator of value and because it facilitates comparison of our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Adjusted net income is also used by the Company as one of the inputs for calculating performance-based incentives.

In calculating adjusted net income we added back amortization and impairments attributable to acquisition related intangible assets, such as management contracts, to adjusted net income to reflect the fact that these non-cash expenses make it difficult to compare our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Because goodwill and indefinite-lived assets are not amortized under GAAP, and since they generate deferred tax expenses that typically do not reverse, we added back these non-cash expenses, and their related tax attributes, to net income to measure operating performance. We added back impairments on intangible assets and goodwill to reflect that these non-cash items makes it difficult to compare our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions.

Adjusted net income is one of the key measures we analyze in managing our business. Additionally, we believe that adjusted net income is a measure that is useful to investors because it identifies the earnings of the ongoing operations of our business. Adjusted net income is not a substitute for net income or measures that are derived in accordance with GAAP and may differ from similarly titled measures of other companies. We encourage investors to review and consider GAAP net income, as well as adjusted net income, in evaluating the results of our operations.

 

62


Table of Contents

The following tables provide reconciliations of net income (loss) to adjusted net income:

 

    

Nine Months Ended

September 30,

    Increase/(Decrease)  
     2008     2007     2008 vs 2007  

($ in millions)

      

Net Income (Loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (10.2 )   $ (339.7 )

Add back:

      

Amortization of intangible assets

     22.4       22.6       (0.2 )

Goodwill and intangible asset impairment

     432.2       —         432.2  

Goodwill and intangible asset related deferred taxes

     (91.1 )     1.1       (92.2 )
                        

Adjusted Net Income

   $ 13.6     $ 13.5     $ 0.1  
                        

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—First Nine Months Results of Operations—Operating Expenses—Goodwill and Intangible Asset Impairments” for a discussion of the goodwill and intangible asset impairments.

 

     Year Ended December 31,       Increase/(Decrease)  
     2007     2006     2005     2007 vs
2006
    2006 vs
2005
 

($ in millions)

          

Net Income (Loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (47.6 )   $ (33.1 )   $ 33.4     $ (14.5 )

Add back:

          

Amortization of intangible assets

     30.1       32.0       33.3       (1.9 )     (1.3 )

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       32.5       11.1       (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset related deferred taxes

     0.3       (11.9 )     (6.5 )     12.2       (5.4 )
                                        

Adjusted Net Income

   $ 16.5     $ 5.0     $ 4.8     $ 11.5     $ 0.2  
                                        

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Annual Results of Operations—Operating Expenses—Restructuring and Severance” for a discussion on the nature of the restructuring and severance charges and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Annual Results of Operations—Operating Expenses— Intangible Asset Impairments” for a discussion of the intangible asset impairments.

Limitations of Adjusted Net Income

Because the calculation of adjusted net income excludes amortization and impairments of goodwill and intangible assets, and deferred taxes related to those intangible assets, it has certain material limitations and should not be viewed in isolation or as a substitute for GAAP measures of earnings. See the Consolidated Statements of Operations included in the Company’s financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement. As a non-GAAP performance measure, adjusted net income has certain material limitations as follows:

 

   

It does not include operating expenses related to amortization or impairments of intangible assets and impairments of goodwill. Although these expenses represent non-cash charges that do not directly affect the current cash position of the Company, the expenses represent a loss in value of previously acquired investment advisory contracts and goodwill that provide the Company with the ability to generate revenue. The decrease in value may be indicative of the loss of future earnings potential of the Company. Therefore, any measure that excludes amortization has material limitations.

 

   

It does not include deferred taxes related to amortization and impairments of intangible assets and goodwill. Because the payment or benefit of taxes is a necessary and ongoing part of the Company’s operations, any measure that excludes deferred taxes has material limitations.

 

63


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

The following table summarizes certain key financial data relating to our liquidity and capital resources:

 

     Nine Months Ended
September 30, 2008
    Year Ended December 31,  
       2007     2006     2005  
($ in millions)       

Balance Sheet Data

        

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 36.8     $ 33.9     $ 23.8  

Marketable securities

     12.0       14.4       14.5       12.2  

Current portion of notes payable

     12.0       12.0       69.2       9.8  

Long-term notes payable and other debt

     21.0       30.0       367.0       498.3  

Cash Flow Data

        

Provided by (used in)

        

Operating activities

   $ (2.8 )   $ 13.0     $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Investing activities

     (2.5 )     (1.7 )     (8.0 )     (13.8 )

Financing activities

     (9.0 )     (8.3 )     2.2       (0.9 )

EBITDA (1)

   $ 7.8     $ 38.1     $ 26.2     $ 22.1  

 

(1) EBITDA is a non-GAAP liquidity measure defined as net income before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization. For a reconciliation of EBITDA to cash flow from operations, see “Supplemental Liquidity Measure” on page 67.

We believe that our available cash, marketable securities and cash to be generated from operations will be sufficient to fund current operations and capital requirements in the short-term, which we consider the next twelve months. Short-term uses of cash also include interest payments on notes payable that are also expected to be financed from cash generated from operations. Our day-to-day activities do not require large amounts of excess cash. Our largest payments are compensation-related. Incentive compensation, generally a function of earnings, is accrued throughout the calendar year and paid in the first quarter of the next calendar year.

Our one outstanding note in favor of Phoenix Life, a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, contains financial and operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that we maintain a maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 2.75 and minimum stockholder’s equity of $115.0 million. As of September 30, 2008, we had $33.0 million outstanding under this loan and were in compliance with all applicable financial and operating covenants. We intend to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on this note in connection with the distribution. We expect approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the spin-off is completed. The current portion, defined as amounts payable within the next twelve months, is $10.0 million with the remaining $10.0 million payable through December 31, 2010. We currently have no other outstanding debt. See Note 9 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for additional information on this indebtedness.

The Company anticipates obtaining financing to retire the remainder of its debt obligation to Phoenix Life. Potential types of financing arrangements include secured or unsecured credit facilities, lines of credit or other bank financing arrangements. On December 11, 2008, the Company signed a commitment letter with a commercial bank to act as the lead arranger in a $50.0 million senior secured revolving credit facility. Closing of the facility is subject to a standard due diligence process, executing a credit agreement, identifying additional lenders to participate in the facility, no adverse changes in the market and other closing conditions. We expect the closing of the facility to occur on or after the distribution date. In light of the continued challenges in the credit markets there can be no assurances that the Company will be able to close this transaction. If we are unable to replace the existing debt obligation by the distribution date, we will attempt to renegotiate the terms of the Phoenix Life debt on a third-party, arm’s-length basis.

 

64


Table of Contents

Working capital is defined as current assets less current liabilities. Our working capital was a negative $6.6 million at September 30, 2008, primarily due to adverse conditions in the equity markets and $3.0 million in quarterly debt repayments to Phoenix Life along with the related interest due thereon. The adverse market conditions caused a decline in our assets under management, resulting in lower revenues and available cash. On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and PIM entered into an agreement with Harris Bankcorp, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position of the Company on a fully-diluted basis. In accordance with the terms of the agreement, the acquisition will be completed upon consummating the spin-off transaction. The Company expects $35.0 million of proceeds from this transaction. Of those proceeds, the Company will be using $13.0 million to make a one-time pre-payment on its intercompany debt obligation to Phoenix Life. The Company expects its net working capital position to be approximately $33.0 million after this transaction which will satisfy the Company’s short-term working capital requirements.

At various times during the past few years, we have had negative working capital. Historically, the majority of the operating cash flows generated by the Company were used to service debt to PNX. During 2007, we had total debt in excess of $400.0 million and had total debt service obligations in excess of $40.0 million a year, including principal and interest payments. On December 31, 2007, $325.0 million of debt obligations to PNX was extinguished through loan forgiveness. The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intercompany indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million. No cash proceeds were delivered to the Company in connection with this action.

Long-term capital requirements primarily include repayment of notes payable and lease obligations. Long-term notes payable include various agreements the Company entered into with PNX during 2001 and 2002 that had original maturity dates at various times in 2007 that were subsequently extended to 2010. Interest was payable in arrears at annual rates ranging from 5.32% to 7.56% for the years 2006 and 2007. During 2006 and 2007, each of these notes was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX. The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million.

Other possible long-term capital requirements could include strategic acquisitions, seed money for new products and infrastructure improvements. In addition to our intention to obtain third-party bank financing to support our future capital requirements, potential sources of long-term capital include additional common or preferred equity raises, revolving credit facilities or secured financing arrangements. There can be no assurances that any of these financing arrangements will be available to the Company in the future.

In 2005, 2006 and the first quarter of 2008, we recorded impairment charges related to terminated investment management contracts which resulted in lost revenues. In 2005 and 2006, we experienced significant redemptions in our separately managed accounts. These redemptions, totaling $1.3 billion in the two years, resulted in lost annual revenues of approximately $8.2 million from these accounts. Partially offsetting the decrease in revenues were decreased variable costs and fixed costs from the resultant staff reductions and restructuring. The impairment charge recorded in 2008 was triggered by the loss of a significant institutional client resulting in $1.8 million of lost annual revenue, partially offset by a related $0.9 million decrease in variable incentive compensation. In the third quarter of 2008, we recorded goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges which were triggered, in large part, by the downturn in the markets. As a result of this downturn, our assets under management have decreased by $4.3 billion in the first nine months of 2008 due solely to market depreciation. This has resulted in lost annual revenues of approximately $19.0 million.

The financial markets are experiencing a period of significant decline and extreme volatility. The continued erosion of the equity and fixed income markets has materially and adversely impacted the value of our assets under management, which has resulted in lower fee revenues. For the two month period ending November 30, 2008, our assets under management have decreased by $4.6 billion. Should assets remain at this level, continue their downward trend, or only marginally increase in the immediate future, the impact on our current and future

 

65


Table of Contents

cash flows could be significant. For example, the $4.6 billion decrease in our assets under management has the effect of reducing our annual revenues by approximately $18.0 million to $20.0 million. Reductions in related variable expenses, primarily incentive compensation and distribution costs, would marginally compensate for this loss of revenue but the Company would experience a material reduction in income from operations.

Balance Sheet

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash in banks and highly liquid affiliated money market mutual fund investments. Cash and cash equivalents typically increase in the second, third and fourth quarters of the year as we accrue for, but do not pay, variable compensation for our affiliated managers. Historically, annual incentives are paid in the first quarter of the year, which is the primary reason for the $14.2 million decrease in cash during the first nine months of 2008. Marketable securities consist primarily of our affiliated mutual fund shares and other proprietary strategies. We provide capital for funds and strategies in their early stages of development to facilitate creating performance track records. Current portion of notes payable represents notes due within twelve months of the date of the financial statements. Our notes payable decreased by $9.0 million during the first nine months of 2008 as we made our quarterly note repayments to PNX. Current portion of notes payable decreased in 2007 due to the payment to a subsidiary’s minority members to finance the remainder of the acquisition of that subsidiary. Long-term notes payable and other debt represents notes due twelve months or more after the date of the financial statements. The decrease in long-term notes payable and other debt in 2007 was primarily the result of $325 million that was forgiven by PNX through a capital contribution. The remaining $12 million decrease was due to the reclassification of a separate intercompany note payable to current portion of notes payable. The decrease in long-term notes payable and other debt in 2006 was the result of $49 million that was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX, combined with the reclassification of notes payable from long-term to current.

Cash Flows

For the nine months ended September 30, 2008, net cash used in operating activities was $2.8 million, primarily due to annual incentives paid by our affiliated managers. Net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2007 decreased $2.9 million compared to the prior year period. Net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2006 increased $27.4 million due to minority interest payments made in 2005.

Net cash used in investing activities consists primarily of capital expenditures related to our business operations, purchases of investment contracts or subsidiaries, and purchases of available-for-sale securities. Cash used in investing activities of $2.5 million in the first nine months of 2008 was primarily for purchasing capital items. Net cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2007 decreased $6.4 million compared to the prior year primarily due to the 2006 acquisition of the Insight funds. Net cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2006, decreased $5.7 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2005 primarily due to the 2005 purchase of a subsidiary partially offset by the 2006 acquisition of the Insight funds.

Net cash from financing activities consists primarily of capital contributions and borrowings from PNX as well as repayments of debt to PNX. For the nine months ended September 30, 2008, net cash used in financing activities consisted of three $3.0 million quarterly note repayments to PNX. Net cash used in financing activities was $8.3 million in 2007 due to repayments of debt to the parent of $69.2 million partially offset by capital contributions of $60.9 million. Net cash provided by financing activities was $2.2 million in 2006 due to borrowings from related parties and capital contributions totaling $49.0 million partially offset by repayments of debt to the parent of $46.8 million. Net cash used in financing activities was $0.9 million in 2005 due to distributions to minority interests and repayments of debt totaling $18.9 million partially offset by borrowings from related parties of $18.0 million.

 

66


Table of Contents

Supplemental Liquidity Measure

As supplemental information, we provide information regarding EBITDA, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, a non-GAAP liquidity measure. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry. The following table provides a reconciliation of cash flow from operations to EBITDA:

 

     Nine months Ended
September 30, 2008
    Year Ended  
         2007     2006     2005  

Cash flow from operations

   $ (2.8 )   $ 13.0     $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Interest expense

     2.0       26.7       33.4       28.7  

Current tax provision

     (99.5 )     (6.0 )     (26.8 )     (19.6 )

Changes in assets and liabilities and other adjustments

     108.1       4.4       3.7       24.5  
                                

EBITDA(1)

   $ 7.8     $ 38.1     $ 26.2     $ 22.1  
                                

 

(1)  See page 64 for the definition of EBITDA.

We view our ratio of debt to EBITDA (our leverage ratio) as an important gauge of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. The leverage covenant of our senior note with Phoenix Life requires that we maintain a maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 2.75, where EBITDA is for the preceding twelve month period. As of September 30, 2008, our leverage ratio was 1.64:1. For each of the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007 we were in compliance with the maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio covenants of our senior note.

Limitations of EBITDA

Because EBITDA is calculated before certain recurring cash charges, including interest expense and taxes and other recurring cash requirements of the business, it should not be considered as a measure of discretionary cash available to invest in the growth of the business. See the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows included in the attached financial statements. As a non-GAAP liquidity measure, EBITDA has certain material limitations as follows:

 

   

It does not include interest expense. Because the Company has borrowed money to finance some of its operations, interest is a necessary part of the Company’s costs and ability to generate revenue. Therefore, any measure that excludes interest has material limitations.

 

   

It does not include amortization expense. Although amortization expenses represent non-cash charges that do not directly affect the current cash position of the Company, the expenses represent a loss in value of previously acquired investment advisory contracts which provide the Company with the ability to generate revenue. The decrease in value may be indicative of future needs for the development or acquisition of investment advisory contracts or relevant trends causing asset value changes. Therefore, any measure that excludes amortization has material limitations.

 

   

It does not include depreciation expense. Although depreciation expenses represent non-cash charges that do not directly affect the current cash position of the Company, the expenses represent the wear and tear and reduction in value of property and other capital assets of the Company which may be indicative of future needs for capital expenditures. Therefore, any measure that excludes depreciation has material limitations.

 

   

It does not include taxes. Because the payment of taxes is a necessary and ongoing part of the Company’s operations, any measure that excludes taxes has material limitations.


 

67


Table of Contents

Contractual Obligations

The following table summarizes our contractual obligations as of December 31, 2007:

 

     Payments Due
     Total    Less Than
1 Year
   1-3 Years    3-5 Years    More Than
5 Years
($ in millions)     

Operating lease obligations(1)

   $ 13.8    $ 4.6    $ 4.9    $ 1.4    $ 2.9

Senior note including interest(2)

     47.1      14.5      32.6      —        —  
                                  

Total

   $ 60.9    $ 19.1    $ 37.5    $ 1.4    $ 2.9
                                  

 

(1) Amounts shown are net of income from subleases.

 

(2) We currently have a senior note agreement with Phoenix Life. The principal balance at December 31, 2007 is $42.0 million. The agreement matures at the end of 2010. We are required to make quarterly payments of $3.0 million through September 2010 and must make a final $9.0 million payment in December 2010. The note bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%.

Except for the three $3.0 million quarterly note repayments made in 2008, there have been no material changes in our contractual obligations at September 30, 2008.

The table does not include liabilities for uncertain tax positions ($0.5 million at December 31, 2007) as we cannot predict when such liabilities will be paid.

We believe that we can meet these contractual obligations through existing cash, future cash flows from operations and, if necessary, borrowings under a future credit facility.

Financing Arrangements

For a discussion of our financing arrangements, see “Description of Indebtedness.”

Impact of New Accounting Standards

For a discussion of accounting standards, see Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Our financial statements and the accompanying notes are prepared in accordance with GAAP, which requires the use of estimates. Actual results will vary from these estimates. Management believes the following critical accounting policies are important to understanding our results of operations and financial position.

Goodwill

As of September 30, 2008, the carrying amount of goodwill was $122.7 million. Goodwill represents the excess of purchase price of acquisitions and mergers over the fair value of identified net assets and liabilities. For goodwill, impairment tests at the reporting unit level are performed annually, or more frequently, should circumstances change which would reduce the fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying amount. In 2005, in conjunction with the conversion of the business to a wholly owned structure, goodwill was consolidated into a single reporting unit for purposes of goodwill impairment testing. For purposes of the impairment test of goodwill, the fair value of the reporting unit is based on a multiple of revenue plus the fair value of the unit’s tangible fixed assets. We employ a market approach in our valuation methodology. For each test of goodwill we determine the run rate revenues for our products and apply a revenue multiple to determine a fair value for each

 

68


Table of Contents

reporting unit. Key inputs of the valuation method are the revenue multiplier assumption, management fee rates used to determine run rate revenues and the level of assets under management. We assess our revenue multiple by comparing it to the revenue trading multiples of publicly traded peer asset management companies and applying a control premium, which control premium would not be reflected in such revenue trading multiples. Management fee rates are taken from the most recent actual rates available for our investment products.

We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter of 2008 as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing. While the Company believes the existing approach as discussed above was appropriate, we complemented the testing with an additional discounted cash flow model that incorporated financial data obtained in connection with analyses prepared for the spin-off transaction. Management also considered the approximate implied valuation based on the equity investment made by a third party in October 2008. In connection with this third quarter test for goodwill, the Company weighted these estimates of fair value to derive the implied valuation used in the impairment testing. The impairment test in the third quarter resulted in an impairment charge of $331.7 million.

In light of the additional information available to us due to the spin-off transaction, we developed the September 30, 2008 valuation assessment using a weighting of two distinct valuation methods, specifically: (i) market-based multiple models, which includes the revenue multiple model described above and an assets under management (“AUM”) multiple model; and (ii) a discounted cash flow model. A description of each valuation for the goodwill impairment analysis is provided below:

Market-based multiple models—The significant assumptions used in assessing the implied valuation include the average trading multiples of peer asset management companies based on revenues, and assets under management. The average revenue multiple used was 2.1x revenues and the average AUM multiple was 0.9% of AUM. A 10.0% decrease in the revenue multiple used would have increased the third quarter impairment charge by $21.0 million; a 10.0% decrease in the run-rate revenue assumption would have increased the impairment by $17.0 million and a 10.0% decrease in the AUM multiple would have increased the impairment by $4.0 million.

Discounted cash flow model—The significant assumptions used in the discounted cash flow model include projected revenue growth rates, operating margins and the discount rate used to determine the present value of the cash flows. Projected revenues are assumed to have a 5% long term growth rate, operating margins are estimated at approximately 12.0% and projected net cash flows are discounted at 17% to determine the present value. The discount rate is based on an estimated cost of capital that reflects the current economic conditions. A decrease to 2.5% in the growth rate applied to gross revenues would have increased the impairment charge by $2.0 million, a decrease of 100 basis points in the operating margin assumption would have increased the impairment by $2.0 million and an increase in the discount rate to 19.5% would have increased the impairment charge by $4.0 million.

In weighting these methods, we applied a weighting of approximately 60% for the market-based multiple models and 40% for the discounted cash flow model. The Company gave more weight to the market-based multiple models primarily due to the observable nature of the revenue and AUM multipliers that are the significant model valuation inputs. Management believes these market observable inputs provided a reliable measure of implied valuation as of September 30, 2008. The revenue multiple model served as the primary source of the implied value derived from the market-based multiple models. We corroborated this valuation by preparing an assets under management model from information that was available to us in connection with the spin-off transaction. Management believes that the revenue model is most indicative and most relevant to how market participants value asset management companies and that the assets under management approach does not distinguish as well the differences of the operating models or product types among asset management companies. Specifically, management ascribed an 80% weighting on the revenue multiple model and a 20% weighting from the assets under management model. The Company used a discounted cash flow model to provide an income-

 

69


Table of Contents

based valuation model from additional data obtained in connection with the spin-off transaction. The discounted cash flow valuation was supported by the implied spin-off value from the terms of the Company’s equity transaction that was announced on October 30, 2008. Had the Company weighted these models using a 50% / 50% ratio the impairment charge would have increased by $13.0 million.

Given the Company recorded a goodwill impairment charge in third quarter 2008, any significant declines in values in the Company would likely result in further impairment charges.

The Company will be performing its annual impairment test of goodwill in the fourth quarter of 2008 and again in connection with the closing of the spin-off transaction. Given the recent market trends described above, the results of these tests will be reasonably likely to have an adverse impact on the results of operations.

Indefinite-Lived Intangible Assets

As of September 30, 2008 the carrying values of indefinite-lived intangible assets were $36.1 million. Indefinite-lived intangible assets are comprised of investment advisory contracts with affiliated closed-end registered investment companies. Indefinite-lived intangible asset impairment tests are performed annually, or more frequently should circumstances change which would reduce the fair value below its carrying value.

As noted above, the Company has recorded impairment charges on each of the indefinite-lived intangible assets at September 30, 2008. Accordingly, the carrying value of these assets is equal to fair value as derived from the Company’s discounted cash flow model. The Company believes the discounted cash flow analysis is most appropriate in valuing the remaining indefinite-lived intangible assets because it has concluded that it is a likely method that would be utilized by market participants. The key variables impacting the valuation of the intangible assets under this model include the discount rate and assets under management related to the relevant investment advisory contracts. A 2.5% increase in the discount rate to 19.5% would result in additional impairment of $4.3 million. A 10% decrease in assets under management underlying these investment advisory contracts would result in additional impairment of $3.6 million.

In conducting impairment tests, the Company uses a revenue multiple model to each of the intangible assets to derive its estimated fair value. The rationale for using the revenue multiplier on these intangible assets is that, due to their nature, closed-end mutual funds, unlike open-end mutual funds, do not routinely issue and redeem their shares and, as such, their revenues will continue indefinitely (affected only by market performance or by a decision by the fund boards to terminate the advisory contract). It is for this reason that the Company values its closed-end funds similarly to how it values the Company. Specifically, the key inputs included in valuation analysis are (i) a revenue multiplier; (ii) management fee rates; and (iii) assets under management. Each of these items can be directly ascribed at the intangible asset level; we therefore view this methodology as an appropriate assessment of value.

In the third quarter 2008, the Company recorded a $37.2 million impairment related to its indefinite-lived intangible assets. We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity, and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing and, while the Company believed the existing approach as discussed above was appropriate, given the current market conditions and the existence of impairment indicators we expanded the fair value estimations used in impairment testing to incorporate a discounted cash flow model. The most sensitive assumption used in this approach is the discount rate applied of which the Company used a 17% rate which reflects the current market environment.

In connection with this third quarter impairment test for indefinite-lived intangible assets the Company used both methods described above as inputs into its valuation assessment.

 

70


Table of Contents

Definite-Lived Intangible Assets

As of September 30, 2008 the carrying values of definite-lived intangible assets were $50.1 million. Definite-lived intangible assets are comprised of acquired investment advisory contracts. The Company monitors the useful lives of definite-lived intangible assets and revises the useful lives, if necessary, based on the circumstances. Significant judgment is required to estimate the period that these assets will contribute to our cash flows and the pattern over which these assets will be consumed. A change in the remaining useful life of any of these assets could have a significant impact on our amortization expense. All amortization expense has been, and continues to be, calculated on a straight-line basis.

For definite-lived intangible assets, impairment testing is performed whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. If the Company determines the carrying value of the definite-lived intangible assets is less than the sum of the undiscounted cash flows expected to result from the asset it will quantify the impairment using a discounted cash flow model.

The key assumptions in the discounted cash flow model include:

 

   

estimated remaining useful life of the intangible asset;

 

   

discount rate;

 

   

investment management fee rate on assets under management; and

 

   

market expense ratio factor.

Of the key variables, both the discount rate and remaining useful lives are the significant assumptions in the discounted cash flow model. A one-year decrease in the remaining useful life of definite-lived intangible assets would have resulted in an additional $0.8 million of intangible asset impairments and a 2.5% increase from a 17.0% discount rate that was used in the model to a 19.5% discount rate would have increased the impairment charge by $1.0 million.

In 2008, the Company had $5.5 billion of institutional account redemptions. Of that amount $4.9 billion were from one affiliated manager, and $3.7 billion was from a single account relationship. The Company believes that the useful life for the remaining $7.6 million of institutional definite-lived intangible asset is approximately nine years given the characteristics of the remaining assets under management. These characteristics include both long standing relationships with remaining clients and product performance of remaining assets under management.

In February 2008, the Company performed an interim impairment test of one of its intangible contracts valued at $29.3 million. The test was triggered by management’s assessment that previous declines in assets and revenue supporting the intangible contract coupled with a notice of termination from one large account in February 2008 required such a test. As a result of the test, the Company recorded a pre-tax impairment of $10.5 million.

Management estimates remaining useful lives using its historical experience and long-term operating trends. This results in a range of 2-16 years, depending on the product. For investment management fee rate we use contractually stated rates for mutual funds and average basis points earned for the other products. The discount rate reflects the current estimated cost of capital of the Company; and market expense ratio factor applied reflects an acquiror’s expected margin from the asset.

The Company has taken a definite-lived intangible asset impairment charge of $52.8 million in the third quarter of 2008. The impairment test was performed as the result of Management’s assessment that the carrying amount of the definite lived intangible assets may not be recoverable as a result of changes in the market environment, primarily driven by equity market declines through the third quarter. Other contributors to the assessment were a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets.

 

71


Table of Contents

We recorded impairment charges of $10.5 million, $32.5 million and $10.6 million in the first quarter of 2008, and in 2006 and 2005, respectively. Associated with these impairments and in accordance with FAS 142, we performed interim tests of goodwill. In each instance, we utilized the revenue multiple consistent with the method used for our annual test of goodwill. For the first quarter 2008 test, we estimated that the fair value exceeded carrying value by $90.3 million. The revenue multiple method is appropriate because it provides comparability with asset management firms with different expense structures. Based on this test, the reporting unit was not impaired. The goodwill of the reporting unit was $454.4 million as of March 31, 2008. Similar tests of goodwill performed in 2007, 2006 and 2005 did not result in impairment charges.

After the Company recorded the definite-lived intangible asset impairments noted above, the carrying value on $17.3 million of definite-lived intangible assets is equal to their fair value. Three definite-lived intangible assets with a carrying value of $32.8 million were estimated to have a fair value of $73.4 million as of September 30, 2008.

Revenue Recognition, Investment Management Fees

We earn revenue by providing investment management services pursuant to the terms of the underlying advisory contracts and such revenue is based on a contractual investment advisory fee applied to the assets in each portfolio. Any fees collected in advance are deferred and recognized over the period earned.

The policy of valuing our mutual fund assets under management are the responsibility of the funds’ respective boards of directors. Primary responsibility for valuation of separately managed accounts and institutional accounts rests with the account custodians.

Given management’s reliance on the data provided by the mutual funds and the custodians in the pricing of its assets under management, management has adopted policies and procedures to govern the valuation process and ensure consistency in the application of its revenue recognition policy. Management oversees numerous controls and protocols over the valuation of the mutual funds’ assets under management including: nightly variance testing, purchase/disposition verification, monthly comparatives of broker-priced fixed income securities and stale pricing review.

The boards of our mutual funds have formal approved pricing policies and procedures for their investment management companies to follow. Under these policies and procedures, the boards of the mutual funds have formed valuation committees that are responsible for setting valuation procedures. The valuations of the mutual fund assets under management, which are not reflected within our consolidated financial statements, vary by security type. Equity securities are generally valued at the official closing price on the exchange on which the securities are primarily traded or, if no closing price is available, at the last bid price. Debt securities are generally valued on the basis of broker quotations or valuations provided by market data reporting services which utilize information with respect to recent sales, market transactions in comparable securities, quotations from dealers and various relationships between securities. Certain foreign common stocks may be independently valued where closing prices are not readily available or are deemed not reflective of readily available market prices. Short-term investments, including money-market holdings valuation, is recorded at amortized cost, which approximates market. In light of the current illiquidity and credit crisis in the short term commercial paper market, in May 2008 we implemented additional review procedures and began to shadow price our money market funds on a daily basis to ensure they were within acceptable tolerances.

Contractually, we are not the primary agent in determining the fair values of the assets of separately managed accounts and institutional accounts, and we do not have access to the precise fair value methodology of the custodians responsible for such valuations. For custodial pricing processes, management has established internal procedures to corroborate that custodial pricing appears adequate. Management has developed processes to ensure valuation discrepancies are investigated and resolved with the custodian.

 

72


Table of Contents

Management has identified four primary pricing methodologies applied to its assets under management:

 

   

Cash and cash equivalents—based on verifiable holdings in funds;

 

   

Independent pricing service; unadjusted market quotes—valuations delivered to the funds based on active, liquid market inputs; largely represent the equity securities held in the mutual fund portfolios;

 

   

Amortized cost—valuations for all money market holdings and any short term investments having a remaining maturity of 60 days or less; and

 

   

Independent prices; observable market inputs—valuations provided from broker dealers where prices are often determined by a market-maker’s price levels; included in this category are international equity securities and debt securities.

The sources of fair values of the assets under management of our mutual funds were as follows:

Mutual Funds

 

                                                   
    As of September 30,     As of December 31,  
($ in billions)   2008     2007     2007     2006     2005  
    AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %  

Cash & Equivalents

  $ 0.7   4 %   $ 0.5   2 %   $ 0.9   4 %   $ 0.5   2 %   $ 0.5   4 %

Independent pricing service; unadjusted market quotes

    5.0   28 %     11.6   48 %     8.7   39 %     10.3   47 %     7.2   60 %

Amortized Cost

    4.3   24 %     6.9   28 %     5.8   26 %     5.7   26 %     0.1   1 %

Independent prices; observable market inputs

    7.7   44 %     5.3   22 %     6.9   31 %     5.4   25 %     4.3   35 %
                                                           
  $ 17.7   100 %   $ 24.3   100 %   $ 22.3   100 %   $ 21.9   100 %   $ 12.1   100 %
                                                           

The sources of fair values of the assets under management of our separately managed accounts and institutional accounts were as follows:

Separately Managed Accounts and Institutional Accounts

 

                                                   
    As of September 30,     As of December 31,  
($ in billions)   2008     2007     2007     2006     2005  
    AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %     AUM   %  

Cash & Equivalents

  $ 0.2   2 %   $ 0.5   3 %   $ 0.3   2 %   $ 0.1   1 %   $ 0.0   0 %

Independent pricing service; unadjusted market quotes

    4.8   50 %     7.2   42 %     6.4   39 %     9.0   47 %     12.1   53 %

Amortized Cost

    0.2   2 %     0.2   1 %     0.2   1 %     0.2   1 %     0.1   0 %

Independent prices; observable market inputs

    4.5   46 %     9.4   54 %     9.7   58 %     9.8   51 %     10.6   47 %
                                                           
  $ 9.7   100 %   $ 17.3   100 %   $ 16.6   100 %   $ 19.1   100 %   $ 22.8   100 %
                                                           

Fees related to structured finance products include collateralized loan and collateralized debt obligations (“CLOs” and “CDOs,” respectively) and consist of both senior management fees and subordinate management fees. Senior management fees on the CLOs and CDOs are calculated with the contractual fee rate applied against the current par value of the total collateral being managed. Subordinate management fees, also calculated with the contractual fee rate applied against the current par value of the total collateral being managed, are recognized only after certain portfolio criteria are met, such as interest coverage and asset over-collateralization levels.

 

73


Table of Contents

Distribution and service fees are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective distribution and service fee contracts, which require a monthly payment from affiliated mutual funds.

Administration and transfer agent fees consist of administrative fees, shareholder service agent fees, fund administration fees, dealer concessions and transfer agent fees. Dealer concessions and transfer agent fees earned net of related expenses from the distribution and sale of affiliated mutual fund shares and other securities are recorded on a trade date basis.

Accounting for Income Taxes

The Company and its subsidiaries are included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and each is party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if each subsidiary’s tax liability had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

Significant management judgment is required in determining the provision for income taxes and, in particular, any valuation allowance recorded against our deferred tax assets. Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. We carried a valuation allowance of $6.7 million on $93.3 million of deferred tax assets at September 30, 2008, due to uncertainties related to our ability to utilize some of the deferred tax assets in certain state jurisdictions. The amount of the valuation allowance has been determined based on our estimates of taxable income by each jurisdiction in which we operate over the periods in which the deferred tax assets will be recoverable. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

We concluded that a valuation allowance on the remaining $86.6 million of deferred tax assets at September 30, 2008 was not required. Our methodology for determining the realizability of deferred tax assets involves estimates of future taxable income from our operations and consideration of available tax planning strategies and actions that would be implemented by PNX, if necessary, as well as the expiration dates and amounts of carryforwards related to net operating losses and capital losses. These estimates are projected through the life of the related deferred tax assets based on assumptions that we believe to be reasonable and consistent with demonstrated operating results. The projection also includes consideration of the reversal of deferred tax liabilities that are in the same period and jurisdiction and are of the same character as the temporary differences that gave rise to the deferred tax assets. Changes in future operating results not currently forecasted may have a significant impact on the realization of deferred tax assets. The amount of the future pre-tax income necessary to realize the Company’s deferred tax assets is approximately $250.0 million.

The information used to support the projection of future taxable income was derived from the same anticipated future trends used to support the calculations in our goodwill and intangible asset impairment analyses. However, when performing the assessment of the need for a valuation allowance under SFAS 109, paragraph 25 requires that the evidence be weighted to the extent to which it can be objectively verified. Aspects of the projections used in our impairment analyses, while fair and reasonable, may not be highly objectively verifiable. Accordingly, certain assumptions, such as those for future growth, were not included in our SFAS 109 analysis because those assumptions would not carry sufficient weight to support realization of deferred tax assets.

In concluding that a valuation allowance was not required on the remaining deferred tax assets, we considered both the positive and negative evidence regarding our ability to generate sufficient taxable income to

 

74


Table of Contents

realize those deferred tax assets. Positive evidence included PNX having achieved profitability for financial reporting purposes since 2004. Further positive evidence included the fact that the Company’s net operating losses will not begin to expire until 2023, while projected PNX earnings indicate that the deferred tax assets will be offset by taxable earnings prior to that expiration. Negative evidence included a history of net operating losses in the non-life insurance company subgroup, including the Company’s losses due to goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges in the current and prior years.

In weighing the positive and negative evidence above, including potential tax planning strategies that if they became necessary would be implemented, we considered the more likely than not criteria pursuant to SFAS 109. Based on this analysis we concluded that it was more likely than not that the deferred tax assets of $86.6 million would be realized.

However, in assessing the need for a valuation allowance against our deferred tax assets upon the distribution of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX, the Company believes, based on the weight of available evidence, that it is more likely than not that the deferred tax asset will not be realized because certain potential tax planning strategies available to PNX will no longer be available to the Company. In addition, it is possible that, due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off, all or a portion of the Company’s deferred tax assets generated by related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers may not be available to the Company following the spin-off. Accordingly, the Company will record a full valuation allowance upon spin-off from PNX. This adjustment will reflect full consideration of the Company’s deferred tax assets on a separate return basis, whereas the Company was previously included in a tax sharing agreement with PNX and its subsidiaries.

Uncertain tax positions taken by the Company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Loss Contingencies

The likelihood that a loss contingency exists is evaluated using the criteria of SFAS No. 5, “ Accounting for Contingencies, ” and is recorded if the likelihood of a loss is considered both probable and reasonably estimable at the date of the financial statements.

Capital and Reserve Requirements

We currently have one subsidiary that is a broker-dealer registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission and is therefore subject to certain rules regarding minimum net capital, as defined by those rules. The subsidiary is required to maintain a ratio of “aggregate indebtedness” to “net capital,” as defined, which may not exceed 15 to 1 and must also maintain a minimum amount of net capital. Failure to meet these requirements could result in adverse consequences to us including additional reporting requirements, tighter ratios and business interruption. At September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007, the ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital of the broker-dealer was well below the maximum allowed and the minimum net capital was well in excess of that required.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

Market Risk

Our exposure to market risk is directly related to our role as investment advisor for various accounts we manage and the funds for which we act as advisor. Most of our revenue for the three years ended December 31, 2007 and the nine months ended September 30, 2008 was derived from investment management fees, which are typically based on the market value of assets under management. Accordingly, a decline in the prices of securities would cause our revenue and income to decline due to a decrease in the value of the assets we manage. In addition, such a decline could cause our clients to withdraw their funds in favor of investments offering higher returns or lower risk, which would cause our revenue and income to decline further.

 

75


Table of Contents

We are also subject to market risk due to a decline in the prices of our investments, consisting primarily of marketable securities. At September 30, 2008, the fair value of the net position of these assets was $11.3 million. Assuming a 10% increase or decrease, the fair value would increase or decrease by $1.13 million at September 30, 2008.

Interest Rate Risk

On February 26, 2001, we entered into a $69.0 million subordinated note agreement with Phoenix Life due March 1, 2006, in exchange for debentures held by Phoenix Life. In December 2005 this agreement was renegotiated to provide for quarterly payments of $3.0 million. The renegotiated note matures in December 2010 and bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%. The related note agreement contains financial and/or operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that the Company not exceed a specified debt to earnings ratio and maintain a minimum specified stockholder’s equity. At September 30, 2008 and at December 31, 2007, we were in compliance with all covenants under the note agreement. The outstanding balance on the note at September 30, 2008 and at December 31, 2007 was $33.0 million and $42.0 million, respectively. As the interest rate payable on this note is fixed, it would be unaffected in the event that interest rates were to increase.

 

76


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

Overview

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

Assets under management are an important driver of our financial performance. The majority of our revenues consist of fees based on the value of the assets we manage. Our pro forma assets under management, excluding PNX’s general account and Goodwin-managed third-party assets, as of September 30, 2008 totaled $27.0 billion. The mix of assets under management is diversified across products, both retail and institutional accounts, and by asset class. As of September 30, 2008, 50% of our pro forma assets by product were in open-end funds, 16% were in closed-end funds, 14% were in separately managed accounts and 20% were in institutional assets. As of September 30, 2008, 44% of our assets by investment category were in equity assets, 41% were in fixed income assets and 15% were in money market assets. We believe that this diversification provides us with the opportunity to address a wide range of investor needs and to offer products and services suited for various market environments.

Our Strengths

We believe the following business strengths position us to capitalize on the opportunities presented by the market for asset management products and services:

 

   

We offer our clients investment capabilities across a broad range of products. Our roster of affiliated managers and unaffiliated sub-advisors is comprised of investment management teams with expertise across a spectrum of investment capabilities. We have capabilities in traditional categories such as core, value and international equity, fixed income and money market, as well as specialized categories such as REITs and utilities. As of September 30, 2008, 61%, 69% and 63% of our third-party assets under management were in the top third of relative peer groups on a one, three and five year basis, respectively. See “Business—Our Performance” for additional information.

 

   

We offer products in multiple styles and multiple disciplines . Unlike many competitors of a similar size, our product set is highly diversified by manager, style and discipline. Our products are managed by a number of different managers, both affiliated and unaffiliated. We have multiple offerings by asset category (equity, fixed income, money market and alternative), in all market-caps (large, mid and

 

77


Table of Contents
 

small), in different styles (growth, blend and value) and with various investment approaches (fundamental, quantitative, thematic). By offering a broad array of products, we believe we can appeal to a greater number of investors and be less exposed to changes in market cycles and investor preferences. This provides the opportunity to participate in growth opportunities across different market cycles.

 

   

We distribute through multiple channels, with particular strength in retail distribution . We operate in both the institutional and retail markets. In retail markets, we have a broad presence in the national, regional and independent broker-dealer firms that are the major distributors of mutual funds and separately managed accounts to retail customers. In many of these firms, we have a number of products that are on the firms’ preferred “recommended” lists and on fee-based advisory programs. In 2007, our gross sales of retail mutual funds were $3.4 billion.

 

   

We provide an attractive environment for investment teams. Our affiliated managers maintain their own identity and participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements. They are supported by shared distribution and administrative services, allowing them to focus their time and attention on managing client assets. We believe we provide an attractive environment for investment management professionals, which allows us to retain talent and attract new high-performing managers, teams and firms.

 

   

We have a strong and active product management and development capability. We have developed an active product management capability to allow for the continuous improvement of our product line. In our retail business, from 2005 through 2007 we completed 57 fund actions, comprised of launching or adopting new funds, changing sub-advisors and merging or liquidating funds. In addition, we have developed a number of new products that leverage our existing capabilities, through product line extensions such as our alternative fund of funds, Diversifier, and a new international REIT offering, or by identifying and acquiring new capabilities, such as our partnership with Vontobel Asset Management, the sub-advisor to our $1.1 billion Foreign Opportunities Fund.

Our Strategy

We believe we can enhance stockholder value by building upon our strengths and effectively executing the following strategies:

 

   

Maintain, extend and improve our offerings of high quality investment management capabilities . Our goal is to provide the highest quality products possible to our clients. In product categories where we do not have the capability from our affiliated managers, we partner with unaffiliated sub-advisors, selecting managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers. We manage our product offerings in the same fashion that our distribution partners balance and manage their clientele’s portfolios, seeking to maximize returns while minimizing risks via a diversified, balanced suite of offerings with a long-term horizon.

 

   

Leverage our internal capabilities to develop new products . We intend to leverage our affiliated portfolio management capabilities by offering those capabilities in other product forms and extending them into new strategies. For example, our domestic REIT strategy was first developed for a closed-end fund, and was then introduced as an open-end fund, made available as an institutional account and within a variable annuity product. We then extended that domestic strategy into an international REIT offering in October 2007. We intend to seek to take similar steps with other investment capabilities. We also intend to continue to develop and introduce new offerings to meet the evolving needs of investors and to identify strong performing additional products that can be added to our line-up.

 

   

Build upon our current distribution access to generate higher levels of sales. We intend to selectively expand our distribution resources, including sales and relationship personnel. In the retail business, our wholesaling force is smaller than those of many of our competitors. We believe we can build upon the growth we have seen in the retail market by expanding these resources. In addition, through our intermediaries, we currently do business with a large number of producers that employ

 

78


Table of Contents
 

only one or two of our products. Our strategy is to focus on these producers in order to become one of their preferred mutual fund families. We believe this can be accomplished through appropriate incentives, focused activities and targeted marketing efforts. We also intend to expand into specific growth areas where we have a smaller presence, such as the RIA channel. This channel is one of the fastest growing components of the advisory industry.

 

   

Develop and attract additional high-caliber investment professionals . We believe we can attract high-caliber investment management professionals based on the relative attractiveness of our business model, which allows each affiliated manager to maintain its identity and participate in the earnings it generates. We intend to employ a variety of approaches to grow in this manner, including the expansion of existing teams and direct hiring of new teams. Similarly, we believe the structure of our business is attractive to sub-advisors looking for distribution and other support.

 

   

Enhance our shared administrative and distribution services and achieve greater economies of scale. We intend to continue to enhance our shared services to allow for even greater efficiencies and economies of scale. The spin-off provides several opportunities to enhance the scope of the shared services we provide to our affiliated managers. Specifically, we will now have control over the costs related to all forms of shared services and the ability to deploy expenditures to best serve a stand-alone asset management business. We believe the spin-off will provide additional savings related to costs shared with PNX, primarily facilities and administrative support.

Our Repositioning of the Business

During the period from 2002 through 2007, we undertook a number of critical actions to reposition our business for long-term growth and improved profitability. Through these actions, we focused on our operating structure, product mix, distribution strategy and operating expense base:

 

   

We streamlined our operating structure from being a collection of majority-owned and wholly owned affiliated firms into a single business of affiliated managers with common distribution and support operations.

 

   

We took actions to restructure our product portfolio with a focus on improved investment performance, focusing on mutual fund products as the initial stage of product repositioning.

 

   

We repositioned our distribution strategy to provide greater balance by distribution partner and with an increased focus on retail mutual fund distribution.

 

   

We took actions to significantly reduce our operating expenses.

Streamlined Operating Structure

We converted our operating structure from a collection of majority-owned and wholly owned affiliated firms into a single business that is comprised of individual affiliated managers, each with its own brand and identity, but supported by shared distribution and support services. To better align the interests between the affiliated managers and the overall company, this strategy required the buy-in of outstanding minority interests and facilitated the establishment of our shared services.

Restructured Product Portfolio

We introduced a new product strategy designed to address issues of product underperformance and a lack of breadth in our product line. Historically, a significant portion of our assets under management were concentrated in large-cap growth equity mandates offered in separately managed accounts and institutional accounts. As the equity markets fell dramatically from 2001 to 2003, we experienced material asset outflows. From 2002 to 2007, we experienced a net decrease in assets of $14.8 billion associated with these particular strategies.

In order to improve the overall quality of our fund products, we executed a strategy to rebuild our mutual fund product line-up. From 2005 to 2007, we completed 22 mutual fund mergers or liquidations. Simultaneously,

 

79


Table of Contents

we adopted or launched 35 new funds to fill gaps in product offerings, add diversification to our product set or replace underperforming strategies. The actions are summarized below:

 

Action

   2005    2006    2007    Total

New Funds

   11    2    1    14

Fund Adoptions

   2    19    0    21

Mergers

   1    6    5    12

Liquidations

   1    7    2    10
                   

Total

   15    34    8    57

The successful execution of our strategy is demonstrated in the recent performance of our products. The following table illustrates how our assets under management in funds achieving a rating of 3, 4 or 5 stars from Morningstar, Inc. have increased.

 

     As of December 31,     As of September 30,  

% of Assets Under Management

   2005     2006     2007     2008  

3 – 5-star funds

   39 %   53 %   75 %   82 %

1 & 2-star funds

   61 %   47 %   25 %   18 %

 

Note: Includes only assets for funds with at least one class rated by Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”) and includes assets for the largest class for each fund. These assets do not include assets under management for money market funds. On a load waived basis, the percentage of assets under management for 3-5 star funds was 86% and for 1-2 star funds was 14% as of both September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007. Morningstar is a provider of investment research in the United States and in major international markets. The Morningstar rating for funds is Morningstar’s measure of a fund’s risk-adjusted return, relative to other funds in the category. Funds are rated from one to five stars, with the best performers receiving five stars and the worst performers receiving a single star. We neither endorse nor adopt the methodology used, or the rating determinations made, by Morningstar.

Repositioned Distribution Strategy

To support our product restructuring, we repositioned our retail distribution strategy from its historical focus on separately managed accounts to an approach which emphasizes mutual funds. We refocused our wholesalers, which is our primary sales force, on selling a balance of mutual funds and separately managed accounts, and added dedicated managed account specialists. We also employed a multi-year effort to expand the number of producers, including third-party financial planners and advisors, doing business with our wholesalers. From January 2005 through November 2006, we added over 10,000 new producers with an average gross sale of approximately $225,000. These changes, in combination with the product strategy changes, have had a significant positive impact on our open-end mutual fund sales as illustrated in the chart below:

OPEN-END MUTUAL FUND SALES

LOGO

 

Note: Chart excludes money market fund sales.

(1) Compound Annual Growth Rate

 

80


Table of Contents

A second critical step in our distribution initiative was to implement changes in our strategy to gather institutional assets. In late 2006, we made personnel changes and adopted the strategy of coordinated distribution utilizing shared distribution resources in conjunction with specialists from each affiliated manager.

Reduced Operating Expenses

During the period 2003 to 2006, we took significant actions to appropriately size our cost structure and implement shared services. Our total headcount decreased from 700 to approximately 400. Movement to shared services helped reduce employment expenses by approximately $15.5 million, or 14%, from 2005 to 2007.

Generally speaking, we believe that in the asset management business an increase in assets under management to certain levels does not necessarily result in additional material fixed costs. Accordingly, we believe that we have an opportunity to expand our profit margins by increasing assets under management and associated revenues while continuing to apply disciplined expense management.

Our Investment Products

Our assets under management are comprised of mutual fund assets (open- and closed-end), separately managed accounts (intermediary sponsored and private client) and institutional accounts (traditional institutional mandates and structured products).

Third-Party Assets Under Management By Product as of September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

 

Retail Products

  

Institutional Products

Mutual fund assets:

     Separately managed accounts:      Institutional accounts   $ 5.9

Open-end funds

  $ 13.3    Intermediary sponsored   $ 2.0    Structured products     1.3

Closed-end funds

    4.4    Private client accounts     1.8     

Total mutual fund assets

  $ 17.7   

Total managed account assets

  $ 3.8    Total institutional assets   $ 7.2
               

Total Third-Party Assets Under Management

  $ 28.7

Open-End Mutual Funds

As of September 30, 2008, we managed over 50 open-end funds, across a variety of equity and fixed income styles, including money market, asset allocation fund-of-funds and alternative investments, with total assets of $13.3 billion. As of September 30, 2008, approximately 43% of our mutual fund assets were managed by our affiliated teams.

Our equity fund offerings encompass a number of market caps and investment styles, including large-, mid- and small-cap funds offered in value, core and growth styles, and including dividend income, international, global and emerging market and sector-specific funds. Our equity funds represented $5.1 billion of the assets under management at September 30, 2008. Our fixed income fund offerings cover a broad range of fixed income asset classes, including core, multi-sector, tax-exempt and high yield. These fixed income funds represented $3.8 billion of our assets under management at June 30, 2008.

 

81


Table of Contents

We offer a variety of money market funds, including individual funds focused on corporate, tax-exempt and government securities. Our money market funds comprised $4.4 billion in assets under management at September 30, 2008. Our fund family also includes a number of asset allocation fund-of-funds, including a set of target risk funds and one that invests primarily in alternative investments.

Our family of open-end mutual funds is comprised of the following:

Open-End Funds as of September 30, 2008

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee(1)
    Annualized
Return(2)
 
     ($ in millions)          3 YR     5 YR  
Alternative          

Virtus Alternatives Diversifier Fund(4)

   $ 131.6    0.10     n/a     n/a  

Virtus Global Infrastructure Fund

     77.6    0.65%-0.55 %(3)   5.40 %   n/a  

Virtus International Real Estate Securities Fund

     54.8    1.00-0.90 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Market Neutral Fund

     139.7    1.50     -5.10     -2.25 %

Virtus Real Estate Securities Fund

     1,082.2    0.75-0.65 (3)   6.94     14.61  
Balanced          

Virtus Balanced Fund

     754.2    0.55-0.45 (3)   1.53     3.86  

Virtus Income & Growth Fund

     221.4    0.70-0.60 (3)   0.98     3.68  

Virtus Allocation Balanced Fund

     65.5    0.50     0.64     5.73  
Equity          

Virtus All-Cap Growth Fund

     68.2    0.90-0.70 (3)   -4.21     1.60  

Virtus Capital Growth Fund

     315.3    0.70-0.60 (3)   -4.54     -0.48  

Virtus Growth & Income Fund

     204.9    0.75-0.65 (3)   0.70     5.47  

Virtus Growth Opportunities Fund

     34.0    0.75-0.65 (3)   -1.86     3.38  

Virtus Core Equity Fund

     108.8    0.70     0.14     6.45  

Virtus Index Fund

     36.7    0.20     0.53     5.22  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Growth Fund

     20.8    0.75     -4.60     3.88  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Opportunity Fund

     105.4    0.75     -5.46     4.00  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Value Fund

     88.5    0.70     -2.10     8.90  

Virtus Value Equity Fund

     225.2    0.70     1.65     9.15  

Virtus Mid-Cap Growth Fund

     93.9    0.80-0.70 (3)   -6.63     -0.28  

Virtus Mid-Cap Value Fund

     546.5    0.75     2.79     10.78  

Virtus Quality Small-Cap Fund

     76.0    0.90-0.80 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Small-Cap Growth Fund

     86.4    1.00-0.80 (3)   -5.36     1.26  

Virtus Small-Cap Sustainable Growth Fund

     17.3    0.90-0.80 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Small-Cap Value Fund

     97.0    0.90-0.80 (3)   -5.69     4.41  

Virtus Small-Mid Cap Fund

     51.1    0.85     -0.50     4.41  

Virtus Strategic Growth Fund

     118.0    0.70-0.60 (3)   -3.90     -0.35  

Virtus Value Opportunities Fund

     71.5    0.75-0.65 (3)   -1.75     n/a  
Fixed Income          

Virtus Bond Fund

     174.5    0.50     2.65     2.98  

Virtus CA Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     62.1    0.45-0.35 (3)   1.28     2.08  

Virtus Core Bond Fund

     58.0    0.45-0.35 (3)   2.20     2.15  

Virtus High Yield Fund

     95.8    0.65-0.55 (3)   -0.27     2.56  

Virtus High Yield Income Fund

     48.1    0.45     -0.16     2.96  

Virtus Intermediate Government Bond Fund

     29.8    0.45     5.12     3.96  

Virtus Intermediate Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     142.2    0.45     1.08     1.77  

Virtus Short/Intermediate Bond Fund

     158.9    0.55     2.21     2.15  

Virtus Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     115.2    0.45     0.97     1.91  

 

82


Table of Contents

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee(1)
     Annualized
Return(2)
     ($ in millions)           3 YR    5 YR

Virtus Institutional Bond Fund

     78.1    0.45-0.40 (3)    1.89    2.85

Virtus Multi-Sector Fixed Income Fund

     117.2    0.55-0.45 (3)    0.37    3.01

Virtus Multi-Sector Short Term Bond Fund

     1,691.2    0.55-0.45 (3)    1.10    2.21

Virtus Senior Floating Rate Fund

     14.9    0.60-0.50 (3)    n/a    n/a
Fund of Funds(4)            

Virtus Wealth Accumulator Fund

     n/a    0.10      -0.35    n/a

Virtus Wealth Builder Fund

     n/a    0.10      0.36    4.17

Virtus Wealth Guardian Fund

     n/a    0.10      0.49    3.61
International/Global            

Virtus Foreign Opportunities Fund

     1,113.0    0.85      4.93    13.14

Virtus Emerging Markets Opportunities Fund

     104.2    1.00      9.33    17.20

Virtus Worldwide Strategies Fund

     76.6    0.85-0.75 (3)    -0.84    6.09
Money Market Funds            

Virtus Insight Government Money Market Fund

     576.3    0.14-0.10 (3)    4.29    3.27

Virtus Insight Money Market Fund

     2,460.8    0.14-0.10 (3)    4.53    3.45

Virtus Insight Tax-Exempt Money Market Fund

     1,267.5    0.14-0.10 (3)    3.11    2.41

Virtus Money Market Fund

     85.5    0.40-0.30 (3)    3.80    2.76
               

Total Open-End Funds

   $ 13,362.4         
               

 

(1) Percentage of average daily net assets of each fund.

 

(2) Annualized return reflects performance of the largest share class as measured by net assets.

 

(3) These funds have breakpoints at which advisory fees decrease as assets in the funds increase.

 

(4) These funds invest in other Phoenix open-end mutual funds. The related assets are reflected in the balances of the respective funds.

Fund past performance is not necessarily an indication of how the Fund will perform in the future.

Closed-End Mutual Funds

We manage the assets of five closed-end funds as of September 30, 2008, each of which is traded on the New York Stock Exchange. Closed-end funds do not continually offer to sell and redeem their shares, rather, daily liquidity is provided by the ability to trade the shares of these funds at prices that may be above or below the shares’ net asset value. This distinguishing feature provides for a more stable source of investment management fees. Our closed-end products encompass utility and tactical asset allocation strategies provided by two of our affiliated managers. Our closed-end fund assets under management totaled $4.4 billion as of September 30, 2008.

 

83


Table of Contents

Our family of closed-end mutual funds is comprised of the following:

Closed-End Funds as of September 30, 2008

 

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee
    Annualized
Return
 
     ($ in millions)          3 YR     5 YR  

Balanced

         

Zweig Total Return

   $ 496.2    0.70 %(1)   3.80 %   4.54 %

DNP Select Income Fund Inc.

     2,826.0    0.60-0.50 (2)   3.21     10.00  

Equity

         

Zweig Fund

     402.7    0.85 (1)   3.09     6.03  

Fixed

         

DTF Tax-Free Income Inc.

     188.2    0.50 (3)   0.12     1.75  

Duff & Phelps Utility and Corporate Bond Trust Inc.

     485.2    0.50 (3)   1.85     2.35  
             

Total Closed-End Funds

   $ 4,398.3       
             

 

(1) Percentage of average net assets of each fund.

 

(2) Percentage of average weekly net assets. This fund has breakpoints at which advisory fees decrease as assets in the fund increase.

 

(3) Percentage of average weekly managed assets.

Fund past performance is not necessarily an indication of how the Fund will perform in the future.

Separately Managed Accounts

Intermediary sponsored programs are individual portfolios comprised primarily of investments that offer investors the opportunity for a greater degree of customization than packaged products. These programs enable the sponsor’s client to select managed account offerings for which the client pays an asset-based fee paid to the broker-dealer who, in turn, pays a management fee to us. We also offer private client services to high-net-worth individuals through several of our affiliated managers. Private clients of our affiliated investment firms are able to access a variety of investment strategies while benefiting from customized investment advisory services. Intermediary sponsored programs and private client account assets totaled $3.8 billion at September 30, 2008.

Institutional Accounts

We offer a variety of equity, fixed income and real estate investment trust strategies to institutional clients, including corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowments and special purpose funds. Our institutional assets under management totaled $5.0 billion as of September 30, 2008. We also provide investment management services to certain funds available to purchasers of variable life and variable annuity products. As of September 30, 2008, we managed $0.9 billion of these assets.

As of September 30, 2008, we managed $1.3 billion of structured finance products. The Company acts as the collateral manager on pools of CDOs and CLOs that it manages. The underlying types of collateral are primarily comprised of high yield, asset-backed and mortgage-backed securities and loans. The Company has no financial or operational obligations with respect to the underlying performance of the collateral. Management fees for structured finance products were $1.1 million or 3.4% of gross management fees for the three-month period ending September 30, 2008, comprised of $0.7 million from senior management fees and $0.4 million from subordinate management fees from its management activities. Current market conditions have contributed to a further reduction of structured finance products assets under management to $1.0 billion as of November 30, 2008. This reduction does not have a direct impact on the Company’s balance sheet. If performance on the

 

84


Table of Contents

underlying collateral deteriorates further, however, this could impact the ability for the Company to collect its subordinate management fees. In addition, in certain circumstances the equity investors in our CDOs or CLOs can redeem the transaction prior to the maturity date.

Significant Product Introductions

In October 2004, we adopted the Mid-Cap Value Fund with $17 million in assets. The fund grew to $1 billion in 2007 before it was partially closed to new investors and had $546 million at September 30, 2008. In June 2005, we adopted the Foreign Opportunities Fund and grew this fund from $86 million at the time of adoption to $1.1 billion at September 30, 2008.

In November 2005, we introduced our “alternative” investment fund-of-funds, the Diversifier, as an addition to our asset allocation fund-of-funds options. The Diversifier offers investors the opportunity to hold interests in a number of our alternative “non-correlated” investment options, such as REITs, global utilities and market neutral strategies, as well as several specialized ETFs. We have grown this fund to $405 million at September 30, 2008, despite not yet having a three-year track record.

In May 2006, we acquired the Harris Insight Funds, adding 18 funds to our existing mutual fund product line, including a diverse mix of equity, international, fixed income and money market funds. As of September 30, 2008, the Harris relationship represented $5.4 billion in assets under management, including $4.3 billion of money market funds.

Our Asset Managers

Our asset management services are provided by our affiliated managers as well as by unaffiliated external sub-advisors through sub-advisory agreements. These managers, which are registered investment advisors under the Investment Advisers Act, manage our mutual funds and closed-end funds, and provide investment management services for institutional and individual managed accounts. We provide our managers with consolidated distribution and administrative support, thereby allowing each affiliate to focus on asset management. We monitor the quality of the managers’ products by assessing their performance, style consistency and the discipline with which they apply their investment process.

 

85


Table of Contents

Our affiliated firms manage investments in both retail and institutional products. In our retail mutual funds, we complement our affiliates’ skills with those of unaffiliated boutique sub-advisors who offer strategies which we believe would also appeal to investors. Our affiliated firms participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements which include incentive bonus pools based on their affiliate’s profits and, in some cases, on the specific performance of each fund or account they manage. Our affiliated firms and sub-advisors, and their respective styles, products and assets under management, are as follows:

 

   

Affiliated Managers

   

Duff & Phelps
Investment
Management

 

SCM Advisors

  

Kayne
Anderson
Rudnick
Investment
Management

  

Oakhurst

Asset

Managers

 

Zweig

Advisors

 

Engemann

Asset
Management

Affiliated Manager

Assets Under

Management at

September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

  $6.7   $3.3    $4.1    $1.2   $1.0   $0.2

 

Location

  Chicago, IL   San Francisco, CA    Los Angeles, CA    Scotts Valley, CA   New York, NY   Pasadena, CA

 

Investment Style

             

Equities

 

•   Fundamental

•   REITs

•   Utilities

 

•   Fundamental

•   Large, Mid, Small, Micro and All Cap Growth

  

•   Fundamental

•   Quality at a Reasonable Price

•   Small Cap Core, Growth & Value

•   Mid Cap Core

  

•   Quantitative

•   Large Cap Value

•   Large Cap Core

 

•   Fundamental

•   Small Cap Value

•   Tactical Asset Allocation

 

•   Fundamental

•   Small Cap Growth

 

Fixed

Income

 

•   Tax Advantaged

 

•   Core, Core Plus

•   High Quality High Yield

  

•   CA Muni

    

•   Tactical Asset Allocation

 

 

Products

             

Open-End

Funds

  ü   ü    ü    ü   ü   ü

 

Closed-End

Funds

  ü           ü  

 

Separately

Managed

Accounts

—Intermediary

    ü    ü        ü

 

Separately

Managed

Accounts—

Private

Client

    ü    ü        ü

 

Institutional

  ü   ü    ü    ü     ü

 

 

86


Table of Contents
   

Mutual Fund Sub-Advisory Relationships

   

Harris Investment
Management

 

Goodwin Capital
Advisers

 

Vontobel Asset
Management

 

SASCO Capital

 

Other

Company Assets Under

Management at

September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

  $5.8   $2.6*   $1.2   $0.5   $0.4

 

Location / Date of

Affiliation

  Chicago, IL / 2006   Hartford, CT / N.A.   New York, NY / 2005   Fairfield, CT / 2004   Various

 

Investment Style

         

Equities

 

•   Quantitative

•   Core, Growth & Value

•   Large, Mid & Small Cap

   

•   Fundamental

•   International

 

•   Fundamental

•   Contrarian Mid Cap Value

 

•   Quantitative & Fundamental

•   Large-Mid Cap Growth

•   Market Neutral

•   International

 

Fixed Income

 

•   Money Market

•   Muni

•   Government

•   Investment Grade

 

•   Multi-Sector Approach

•   Core & Core Plus

•   Short, Intermediate and Long-Duration

•   Money Market

•   CA Muni

     

 

* Represents pro forma assets under management, which exclude the general account and certain other mandates which will not be part of the Company following the spin-off.

Our Performance

As a result of our repositioning, our performance profile has significantly improved in the past four years.

PERCENTAGE OF THIRD-PARTY ASSETS UNDER MANAGEMENT

IN TOP ONE-THIRD OF PEER GROUP

LOGO

 

Note: This chart includes assets under management for all lines of business for which peer group rankings are available from Lipper, Inc. for our retail products and from PSN/Informa Solutions, Inc. for our institutional products. Lipper, Inc. is an organization that ranks the performance of mutual funds. Funds are ranked within a universe of funds similar in portfolio characteristics and capitalization. PSN/Informa Investment Solutions, Inc. is a supplier of investment manager database reporting and research tools, including performance measurement and universe comparison. We neither endorse nor adopt the methodology used, or the rating determinations made, by Lipper, Inc. and PSN/Informa Investment Solutions, Inc.

 

87


Table of Contents

Our Investment Advisory, Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

We provide investment management services to funds and accounts pursuant to investment management agreements. With respect to mutual funds and closed-end funds, we receive fees based on each fund’s average daily or weekly net assets. With respect to separately managed and institutional accounts, we generally receive fees, on a quarterly basis, based on the value of the assets managed on a particular date, such as the end of a quarter.

Pursuant to sub-advisory agreements, our unaffiliated firms provide sub-advisory services to our mutual funds and are responsible for the day-to-day investment activities of the majority of those funds.

 

     Net Investment Advisory,
Administration and Transfer Agent Fees
Years Ended December 31,
             2007                2006                2005      
($ in millions)     

Investment advisory fees

        

Open-end funds

   $ 58.7    $ 52.7    $ 47.8

Closed-end funds

     26.2      23.5      23.3

Separately managed accounts

     29.5      35.7      52.4

Institutional products

     22.5      30.9      44.4
                    

Total investment advisory fees

     136.9      142.8      167.9

Administration fees – funds

     15.0      12.2      9.3

Transfer agent fees – funds

     6.3      5.5      4.8
                    

Total

   $ 158.2    $ 160.5    $ 182.0
                    

Our advisory fee schedules for mutual funds currently provide for maximum annual fees ranging from 0.10% to 1.50% of average assets under management, depending on the type of fund. Maximum fees in the case of the closed-end funds currently range from 0.50% to 0.85% of total net assets. For separately managed accounts, fees are negotiated and are based primarily on asset size, portfolio complexity and individual needs. For separately managed accounts, fees can range from 0.35% to 1.00% for equity and 0.25% to 0.50% for fixed income strategies.

We pay each of our sub-advisors a portfolio advisory fee for their services. The sub-advisory fees are based on the percentage of the aggregate amount of average daily net assets in the funds they sub-advise. Most fee schedules provide for rate declines as asset levels increase to certain thresholds.

We also receive fees from the open-end funds and certain of the closed-end funds for acting as administrator for such funds. Under these arrangements, Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation (“PEPCO”) provides administrative services, such as recordkeeping and preparing and filing documents required to comply with federal and state securities laws. Additionally, we receive fees from the open-end funds for serving as transfer and dividend disbursing agent, which means that PEPCO is responsible for handling orders for shares of our mutual funds.

Our Retail Mutual Fund Investment Management Agreements

Each of our mutual funds has entered into an investment management agreement with a Company advisory subsidiary (each, an “Adviser”). Although specific terms of agreements vary, the basic terms are similar. Pursuant to the agreements, the Adviser provides overall management services to each fund, subject to supervision by the fund’s board of directors. The investment management agreements are approved initially by fund shareholders and must be approved annually by each fund’s board of directors, including a majority of the directors who are not “interested persons” of the Adviser. Agreements may be terminated by either party upon 60 days’ written notice, and may terminate automatically in certain situations, for example, a “change in control” of the Adviser.

 

88


Table of Contents

Each fund bears all expenses associated with its operations, including the costs associated with the issuance and redemption of securities, where applicable. The funds do not bear compensation expenses of directors or officers of the fund who are employed by the Company or its subsidiaries. In some cases, to the extent certain enumerated expenses exceed a specified percentage of a fund’s or a portfolio’s average net assets for a given year, the Adviser may absorb such excess through a reduction in the management fee and, if necessary, pay such expenses so that the year-to-date net expense will not exceed the specified percentage.

Our Distribution

Our principal retail marketing strategy is to distribute funds and separately managed accounts through financial intermediaries to individuals. We have a broad reach in this marketplace, with distribution partners that include national and regional broker-dealers, independent broker-dealers and independent financial advisory firms. We support these distribution partners with a team of regional sales professionals (“wholesalers”), a national account relationship group and separate teams for the retirement market and the registered investment advisory market. Our sales and marketing professionals serve as a resource to financial advisors seeking to help clients address wealth management issues and support the marketing of our products and services tailored to this marketplace. Over 18,000 financial advisors placed mutual fund trades with us in 2007.

We also commit significant resources to serving high-net-worth clients who access investment advice outside of traditional retail broker-dealer channels. Specialized teams at our affiliates develop relationships in this market and deal directly with these clients.

Our institutional distribution strategy combines both a coordinated and partner-centric model. Our product specialists, who are part of the portfolio management teams at our affiliated managers, team with sales generalists and consultant relationship personnel, representing all of our investment strategies. Through relationships with consultants, they target key market segments, including foundations and endowments, corporate, public and Taft-Hartley pension plans.

Our Broker-Dealer Services

PEPCO, a broker-dealer registered under the Exchange Act, serves as principal underwriter and national wholesale distributor of open-end mutual funds and managed accounts. PEPCO also provides a wide range of investment management support services, including fund administration and transfer agent services. Mutual fund shares are distributed by PEPCO under sales agreements with unaffiliated national and regional broker-dealers and financial institutions. PEPCO also markets advisory services of affiliated asset managers to sponsors of managed account programs.

Our Administrative Services

PEPCO also acts as administrative agent of each trust, which means that PEPCO is responsible for managing the business affairs of our mutual funds subject to the oversight of the funds’ trustees. Administrative services include recordkeeping, preparing and filing documents required to comply with Federal and state securities laws, legal administration and compliance services, supervising the activities of various of the funds’ other service providers and providing assistance in connection with the funds’ shareholder meetings, as well as providing office space and facilities, equipment and personnel that may be necessary for managing and administering the business affairs of the funds.

Our Transfer Agent Services

PEPCO also acts as transfer and dividend disbursing agent of each trust, which means that PEPCO is responsible for handling orders for shares of our mutual funds. Transfer agent services include receiving and processing orders for purchases, exchanges and redemptions of fund shares; conveying payments; maintaining shareholder accounts; preparing shareholder meeting lists; mailing, receiving and tabulating proxies; mailing

 

89


Table of Contents

shareholder reports and prospectuses; withholding taxes on shareholder accounts; preparing and filing required forms for dividends and distributions; preparing and mailing confirmation forms, statements of account and activity statements; and providing shareholder account information.

Our Competition

We face significant competition from a wide variety of financial institutions, including other asset management companies, as well as from proprietary products offered by our distribution sources such as banks, broker-dealers and financial planning firms. Competition in our businesses is based on several factors including investment performance, access to distribution channels, service to advisors and their clients and fees charged. Our competitors, which include larger companies, often offer similar products, use similar distribution sources, offer less expensive products, have greater access to key distribution channels and have greater resources than us.

Our Regulatory Matters

We are subject to regulation by the SEC, FINRA and other federal and state agencies and self-regulatory organizations. Each advisor, including unaffiliated sub-advisors, is registered with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act. Each closed-end fund, open-end fund and defined portfolio is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act. Each broker-dealer is registered with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act and is a member of FINRA.

The financial services industry is one of the most highly regulated in the United States, and failure to comply with related laws and regulations can result in the revocation of registrations, the imposition of censures or fines, and the suspension or expulsion of a firm and/or its employees from the business.

All of our funds currently available for sale are qualified in all 50 states, Washington, DC, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Most aspects of our investment management business, including the business of the sub-advisors, are subject to various federal and state laws and regulations. These laws and regulations are primarily intended to benefit the investment product shareholder and generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict us and any sub-advisor from carrying on its investment management business in the event that it fails to comply with such laws and regulations. In such an event, the possible sanctions, which may be imposed, include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on our engaging in the investment management business for specified periods of time, the revocation of the advisors’ registrations as investment advisors or other censures and fines.

Our officers, directors, and employees may, from time to time, own securities that are also held by one or more of our funds. Our internal policies with respect to personal investments are established pursuant to the provisions of the Investment Company Act and/or the Investment Advisers Act. Employees, officers, and directors who, in the function of their responsibilities, meet the requirements of the Investment Company Act or Investment Advisers Act, or of FINRA regulations, must disclose personal securities holdings and trading activity. Those employees, officers and directors with investment discretion and access to investment decisions are subject to additional restrictions with respect to the pre-clearance of the purchase or sale of securities over which they have investment discretion or beneficial interest. Other restrictions are imposed upon access persons with respect to personal transactions in securities held, recently sold or contemplated for purchase by the Company’s open-end and closed-end funds. All access persons are required to report holdings and transactions, on an annual and quarterly basis pursuant to the provisions of the Investment Company Act and Investment Advisers Act. In addition, certain transactions are restricted so as to seek to avoid the possibility of improper use of information relating to the management of client accounts.

Our Employees

As of December 15, 2008, we had approximately 300 full time equivalent employees. None of our employees is a union member. We consider our relations with our employees to be good.

 

90


Table of Contents

Our Properties and Facilities

Our principal offices are located at 100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor, Hartford, CT 06103 . In addition, our wholly owned asset management firms lease office space in Illinois, California and New York, which will remain unchanged following the spin-off.

Our Legal Proceedings

We are regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. In addition, various regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of us and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, securities laws, laws governing the activities of broker-dealers and other laws and regulations affecting our products. It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or regulatory proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. We believe that the outcomes of our litigation and regulatory matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods. See “Risk Factors,” Note 10 to our audited consolidated financial statements (December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005) and Note 4 to our unaudited consolidated financial statements (September 30, 2008 and 2007) in this information statement for additional information.

 

91


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Directors and Executive Officers

The following table sets forth information regarding individuals who are expected to serve as our directors and executive officers following the spin-off, including their anticipated positions with the Company following the spin-off.

We have identified those individuals who, in addition to Mr. Aylward, we expect to be members of our Board. We selected our director nominees with the assistance of an external director search firm and in consultation with PNX while a majority-owned subsidiary of PNX. The nominees have been appointed by the majority stockholder, PNX, effective as of the distribution date. Our new directors will serve terms of up to 3 years, as described in more detail under “—Board of Directors” below.

 

Name

   Age   

Positions

Mark C. Treanor

   61    Director and Non-Executive Chairman

James R. Baio

   54    Director

Susan F. Cabrera

   38    Director

Diane M. Coffey

   66    Director

Timothy A. Holt

   55    Director

Edward M. Swan, Jr.

   67    Director

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   44    President, Chief Executive Officer and Director

Michael A. Angerthal

   41    Chief Financial Officer

Nancy G. Curtiss

   55    Head of Operations

J. Steven Neamtz

   49    Head of Retail Distribution

Francis G. Waltman

   46    Head of Product Development

Directors

Information about each person who will serve as a director of the Company effective as of the distribution date is set forth below.

Mr. Treanor served as Senior Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary of Wachovia Corporation from 2001 to August 2008 with responsibilities for legal, regulatory, corporate governance and government relations activities for all domestic and international businesses, including Evergreen Investments, Wachovia’s asset management division which provides mutual funds, institutional portfolios, alternative investments and separately managed accounts to institutional and individual investors, and was a member of Wachovia’s Operating Committee which was responsible for overall management of Wachovia. Previously, from 1999 until 2001, he held similar responsibilities as Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary of First Union Corporation, Wachovia’s predecessor which he joined in 1998 after serving as President and Senior Partner of the law firm Treanor, Pope & Hughes, which he founded.

Mr. Baio was Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice President of Capmark Financial Group, Inc., a private equity portfolio company engaged in global real estate finance, from 2006 until his retirement in 2007. Prior to that, from 1989 to 2006, he held various positions at Franklin Resources, Inc., a global investment management organization known as Franklin Templeton Investments. He served as Chief Financial Officer, Treasurer and Executive Vice President, Chief Administrative Officer, Senior Vice President and Treasurer, Templeton Mutual Funds and Mutual Series Mutual Funds and Senior Vice President and Risk Manager. Prior to that, he was Senior Manager, Audit and Tax at Ernst & Young from 1977 to 1989.

Ms. Cabrera is currently a consultant and executive educator. She began at Capital Z Financial Services as a Principal in 1998, and was promoted to Partner in 2001. It was at Capital Z where she founded the successor fund to Insurance Partners valued at $1.85 billion. Prior to that, she was Vice President at Insurance Partners Advisors,

 

92


Table of Contents

LP, a private equity firm, from 1994 to 2003 and held various positions at Morgan Stanley & Co. from 1992 to 1994. Ms. Cabrera has served as a member of the board of directors of Hanover Investors and its affiliated funds since 2006.

Ms. Coffey has been a Managing Director and partner of Peter J. Solomon Company, Ltd., an independent investment banking firm, since 2000. From 1996 to 2000, she served as the firm’s Chief Administrative Officer. From 1990 to 1996, she held various positions with The Dreyfus Corporation. She was Vice President, Corporate Communications, Director of Corporate Communications, Portfolio Manager for the Dreyfus Third Century Fund, Government and Community Affairs and Internal Communications, Portfolio Manager, and assistant to the Chairman.

Mr. Holt held various positions with Aetna, Inc. from 1977 until his retirement in 2008. He was Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer from 1997 to 2008, Chief Enterprise Risk Officer from 2005 to 2007, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Aetna Retirement Services from 1996 to 1997, Vice President of Portfolio Management Group from 1992 to 1995, Vice President of Aetna Portfolio Management from 1991 to 1992, Vice President - Finance and Treasurer from 1989 to 1991, Vice President of Public Bonds from 1987 to 1989, Property/Casualty Portfolio Manager from 1983 to 1987, Investment Officer from 1981 to 1982 and Investment Officer/Analyst from 1977 to 1981.

Mr. Swan served as President of FIS Group, an asset management firm, from 2002 until his retirement in 2007. Prior to that he taught at Florida A&M’s Graduate School of Business and Industry from 2000 to 2002. He also served as Managing Director of MFS Asset Management from 1997 to 2000, Vice President of UBS Asset Management from 1996 to 1997 and Managing Director of Mitchell Hutchins Asset Management from 1988 to 1996. In addition, he was Senior Vice President of W. R. Lazard & Co. from 1985 to 1988, Senior Vice President of Franklin Management Co. 1984 to 1985, and Analyst at Prudential Insurance Co. 1975 to 1984.

Harris Bankcorp will have the right to designate two additional members of the Board at the time of the spin-off.

Mr. Aylward’s information is presented under “—Executive Officers” below because he will be an employee director.

Executive Officers

Information about each person who will serve as an executive officer of the Company immediately following the spin-off is set forth below. After the spin-off, none of these individuals will continue to be employees of PNX.

Mr. Aylward is President and will be Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Aylward has been Senior Executive Vice President and President, Asset Management, of PNX since February 2007. He has also served as President of the Company since November 6, 2006. Previously, Mr. Aylward served as Senior Vice President, Asset Management of PNX since November 6, 2006. Mr. Aylward also served as Senior Vice President and Chief Operating Officer, Asset Management, of PNX from 2004 through 2006, and as Chief of Staff to Dona D. Young, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of PNX, from 2002 through 2004. Mr. Aylward joined Phoenix in 1996 and served in several senior financial positions in its Asset Management business prior to 2002.

Mr. Angerthal is our Chief Financial Officer. Mr. Angerthal also serves as our principal accounting officer. Mr. Angerthal joined the Company on October 6, 2008. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Angerthal had been the Chief Financial Officer of CBRE Realty Finance from 2005 to 2008. Prior to that, he held several positions with GE Corporation from 1996 to 2005. From 2002 to 2005, he served as Manager, Financial Planning & Analysis of GE Real Estate; from 1999 to 2002, he served as Staff Analyst, Investor Relations of GE Capital Corp.; and from 1996 to 1999, he served as Director, Finance of NBC. Prior to GE, he was a manager of business assurance in the audit practice of Coopers & Lybrand in New York.

 

93


Table of Contents

Ms. Curtiss is our Senior Vice President, Operations. She is responsible for operations, mutual fund transfer agency and shareholder servicing, performance and analytics, and institutional product operations in several locations. She also works with key individuals at affiliated managers to provide support, with a particular focus on enterprise-wide operations. She has been associated with the Company and its predecessor, Phoenix Investment Partners, in various capacities since 1987. She previously served as Treasurer and Chief Financial Officer for Phoenix Investment Partners’ mutual funds and their boards, and managed PNX’s mutual fund accounting and administration. She has 28 years experience in the asset management and financial services business, including financial planning, asset/liability management, performance measurement, internal controls and product development, including 11 years specifically in the mutual funds arena.

Mr. Neamtz is Senior Vice President, Retail Distribution, a title and position he has held at PNX since he joined there in December 2007 to direct the retail distribution efforts for PNX’s family of mutual funds and its separately managed account offerings. Prior to joining PNX, Mr. Neamtz had been Managing Partner of Ridgeline Capital, LLC from 2006 to 2007 with responsibility for business management. Prior to that, he held several positions with AIG SunAmerica, Inc. From 1996 to 2006, he served as Chief Executive Officer and Director of AIG SunAmerica Capital Services, Inc., a subsidiary of AIG SunAmerica that distributes annuities, mutual funds and asset management products, and as Executive Vice President and Director of AIG SunAmerica Asset Management, Inc.

Mr. Waltman is Senior Vice President, Product Development, a title and position he has held at the Company since July 28, 2008. Prior to that, he held several positions at the Company, including Senior Vice President, Product Development and Management from February 2006 to December 2007, Vice President, Product Development and Management from January 2005 to February 2006, Chief Administrative Officer from August 2003 to December 2004 and Second Vice President from October 2002 to August 2003. Mr. Waltman first joined the Company in August 1990. Mr. Waltman currently serves as Senior Vice President for numerous trusts and mutual funds sponsored by the Company.

Board of Directors

Our bylaws will provide that our Board will have a minimum of three members and that the number of members of our Board will be fixed by a majority vote of our Board. Our certificate of incorporation and our bylaws will provide that our Board is divided into three classes. The term of the first class of directors expires at our 2009 annual meeting of stockholders, the term of the second class of directors expires at our 2010 annual meeting of stockholders and the term of the third class of directors expires at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. At each of our annual meetings of stockholders, the successors of the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting of stockholders will be elected for a three year term, one class being elected each year by our stockholders. Our directors may be removed only for cause by a majority vote of stockholders. Any vacancies in our Board caused by removal of a director may be filled at a meeting of stockholders. Any vacancies in our Board caused by death, resignation, removal of a director (that is not filled at a stockholder meeting) or otherwise, or by an increase in the number of directors by a majority vote of our Board, will be filled by a majority vote of the directors then in office. A significant majority of our Board will consist of independent, non-management directors who meet the criteria for independence required by the Nasdaq Marketplace Rules. Except for Mr. Aylward, we do not expect that any of our Board members will have been or will be an employee of the Company.

Director Independence

A majority of the directors of our Board must meet the criteria for independence established by our Board in accordance with the Nasdaq Marketplace Rules. Under these rules, a director will not qualify as independent unless our Board affirmatively determines that the director has no material relationship with the Company. Our Governance Committee (described in more detail under “—Governance Committee” below) will recommend, and our Board will adopt, a set of categorical standards (the “Categorical Independence Standards”) to assist our Board in making independence determinations. These Categorical Independence Standards may be found on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.”

 

94


Table of Contents

Committees of Our Board

Our Board will establish the following four standing committees to assist it with its responsibilities: Audit, Compensation, Governance and Finance and Investment. All members of the Audit, Compensation and Governance Committees will meet the criteria for independence as established by the Nasdaq Marketplace Rules, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and related SEC rules and regulations. Each of the Committees is described in greater detail below. The Board will establish written charters for each of the Committees, which will be available on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.” Following the spin-off, any changes to the charters will be reflected on our web site.

Audit Committee

The Audit Committee of our Board (the “Audit Committee”) will consist of Mr. Baio, who will serve as chairman, Mr. Holt and Mr. Swan. Our Audit Committee will report to our Board and to be responsible for overseeing and monitoring our financial accounting and reporting process, the system of internal control over financial reporting established by management and our audit process. The Board will adopt a written charter for the Audit Committee which will conform to requirements under applicable law, SEC regulations and Nasdaq listing standards. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Audit Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements of the committee, as well as the relationship of the Audit Committee to our independent registered public accounting firm, internal auditor and management. Specifically, the charter will require that the Audit Committee be comprised of at least three directors, all of whom must be independent under the Nasdaq Marketplace Rules, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and related SEC rules and regulations. In addition, each member of the Audit Committee will be financially literate within the meaning of Nasdaq listing standards, and at least one member will be an “audit committee financial expert,” as determined by our Board in accordance with SEC rules.

The Audit Committee will oversee our financial reporting process on behalf of our Board. Our management has the primary responsibility for the preparation, presentation and integrity of our financial statements and for our reporting process, including its systems of internal control over financial reporting. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) is our independent registered public accounting firm, responsible for auditing our annual financial statements and performing quarterly reviews. In fulfilling its responsibilities, the Audit Committee relies, without independent verification, on the information provided by our management and by PwC.

In fulfilling its oversight responsibilities, the Audit Committee will review and meet and discuss with our management and with PwC, our audited financial statements (the “audited statements”). The Audit Committee will also discuss with PwC the matters required to be discussed by the Statement on Auditing Standards No. 114, The Auditor’s Communication With Those Charged With Governance , as adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (the “PCAOB”) in Rule 3200T.

Additionally, the Audit Committee will meet throughout the year with PwC, our chief financial officer and our internal auditor to discuss the results of their examinations and evaluations of our internal control over financial reporting and of the overall quality, not just the acceptability, of our financial reporting process. The meetings with PwC may occur both with and without members of management present. The meetings with the chief financial officer and the internal auditor may occur both with and without other members of management present.

The Audit Committee will receive from PwC the written disclosure and the letter required by applicable requirements of the PCAOB regarding PwC’s communications with the Audit Committee concerning independence and discuss with PwC its independence from the Company. PwC will confirm in such letter that, in its professional judgment, it is independent of the Company within the meaning of the federal securities laws. The Audit Committee will consider whether provision of the non-audit services rendered by PwC during our most recent fiscal year is compatible with maintaining the independence of such auditors.

 

95


Table of Contents

Compensation Committee

The Compensation Committee of our Board (the “Compensation Committee”) will consist of Ms. Coffey, who will serve as chairwoman, Mr. Baio and Mr. Treanor. Our Compensation Committee will consist of independent members of our Board, and will meet at scheduled times during the year. Its purpose will be to assist our Board in fulfilling its responsibility to maximize long-term return to stockholders by ensuring that directors and employees are compensated according to our compensation philosophies, objectives and policies. The Compensation Committee’s responsibilities will be explicitly set forth within the terms of its charter, and will be reviewed by our Board at least once a year. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Compensation Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements for the Compensation Committee.

Governance Committee

The Governance Committee of our Board (the “Governance Committee”) will consist of Ms. Cabrera, who will serve as chairwoman, Ms. Coffey and Mr. Treanor. Our Governance Committee will be responsible for proposing qualified candidates to our Board. In considering candidates for nomination to our Board, the Governance Committee will seek individuals with strong intellectual ability, breadth of experience, demonstrated professional achievement, diverse backgrounds and the highest integrity. Prospective directors should also be able and willing to devote significant attention to our needs through regular attendance at meetings, preparation for meetings and availability for regular consultation between meetings.

The Governance Committee may also consider particular areas of expertise with respect to a given vacancy either because of needs arising from the retirement of a director or those arising out of changes in our business focus, our industry or the regulatory environment.

The Governance Committee will look to its members and to other directors for recommendations for new directors. It may also retain a search firm and will consider individuals recommended by stockholders. Stockholders should submit their recommendation as outlined under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.” If a vacancy on our Board exists or is anticipated, the Governance Committee will evaluate all proposed nominees in light of the standards above, as well as others deemed relevant. Following its evaluation of all proposed nominees and consultation with our chief executive officer, the Governance Committee will recommend to our Board the individual(s) it considers most qualified to be nominated to run for election to our Board. The Board will make the final determination as to the individual(s) who will be nominated to run for election.

Finance and Investment Committee

The Finance and Investment Committee of our Board (the “Finance and Investment Committee”) members will be Mr. Holt, who will serve as chairman, Ms. Cabrera and Mr. Swan. Our Finance and Investment Committee will meet at scheduled times during the year. Its purpose will be to assist our Board in fulfilling its responsibilities with respect to the oversight of our financial policies and the general supervision of our affiliated managers, subsidiaries and material assets. The Finance and Investment Committee will also exercise general supervision over our relationships with our unaffiliated sub-advisors. The Finance and Investment Committee’s responsibilities will be explicitly set forth within the terms of its charter, and will be reviewed by our Board at least once a year. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Finance and Investment Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements for the Finance and Investment Committee.

Board Committee Independence

Our Board will limit membership of the Audit Committee, Compensation Committee and Governance Committee to independent, non-management directors. Members of these three committees must also meet certain other independence standards, including those of the Nasdaq Marketplace Rules. The Audit, Compensation and Governance Committees have authority to retain advisors to help fulfill their responsibilities.

 

96


Table of Contents

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Following the spin-off, we will initially observe corporate governance practices and principal governance documents substantially the same as those currently adopted by PNX. Our principal governance documents will be as follows:

 

   

Corporate Governance Guidelines.

 

   

Board committee charters:

 

  ¡  

Audit Committee charter,

 

  ¡  

Compensation Committee charter, and

 

  ¡  

Governance Committee charter.

 

   

Code of Conduct.

Our Board will be responsible for providing effective governance over our affairs. Our corporate governance practices will be designed to align the interests of our Board and management with those of our stockholders and to promote honesty and integrity. More information about our corporate governance will be found on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.”

Our Board plans to adopt Corporate Governance Principles, which will outline our corporate governance policies and procedures. These principles, which will embody many of our long-standing practices and incorporate our current corporate governance best practices, will be available on our web site identified above. Copies may also be obtained by contacting our Corporate Secretary at one of the addresses listed under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.”

Executive Sessions of Our Board

As will be provided in the Corporate Governance Principles, our non-management directors will meet in executive session at each regular Board meeting.

Board Attendance and Annual Meeting Policy

As will be provided in the Corporate Governance Principles, our directors will be expected to attend our Annual Meetings of Stockholders, Board meetings and meetings of the committees on which they serve. Each of our directors will be expected to attend at least 75% of the meetings of our Board and committees on which he or she serves.

Code of Conduct

We will adopt a written Code of Conduct which applies to all of our directors, officers and employees, including our principal executive officer, principal financial officer and principal accounting officer. We are committed to the highest standards of ethical and professional conduct and the Code of Conduct will provide guidance on how to uphold these standards. The Code of Conduct is available on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.” We intend to post any amendments to, or waivers of, the Code of Conduct applicable to our principal executive officer, principal financial officer or principal accounting officer on our web site. You may request a printed copy of the Code of Conduct by writing to the Corporate Secretary at either of the addresses listed under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.”

Policy Regarding Transactions with Related Persons

Our Board will adopt a written Policy Regarding Transactions with Related Persons (the “Related Person Policy”). Pursuant to the Related Person Policy, any Related Person (as defined by Item 404(a) of Regulation S–K) must promptly report to the Company’s legal department any direct or indirect material interest in any transaction

 

97


Table of Contents

that is reportable by the Company in its Proxy Statement pursuant to Item 404(a) of Regulation S–K (each, a “Related Person Transaction”). Pursuant to the Related Person Policy, no Related Person Transaction may be consummated or shall continue without the approval or ratification of the Audit Committee and any director interested in a Related Person Transaction shall recuse himself or herself from any such vote.

Transactions with Related Persons

PNX

After the distribution, we will be an independent publicly traded company. For a discussion of transactions and arrangements between PNX and the Company, see “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.” We do not believe that there will be any related person transactions between PNX and the Company following the distribution date to which PNX would be deemed a “related person” (as defined in Item 404 of Regulation S-K) of the Company.

Harris Bankcorp

Following the spin-off, it is expected that Harris Bankcorp will hold 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock which will be initially convertible into approximately 23% of our fully diluted common stock.

In 2006, the Company acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds from Harris, an affiliate of Harris Bankcorp. In connection with the acquisition, the Company is required to make certain additional annual payments to Harris based upon the net profits earned on those funds. The Company made annual payments to Harris of $1.1 million and $1.2 million in 2007 and 2008, respectively, and has accrued additional obligations relating to the third year of the agreement that will be paid in 2009. Harris continues to manage the majority of the Insight Funds as sub-advisor. Our agreements with Harris require that the Company make additional payments to Harris should the Company terminate this sub-advisory relationship without cause. Additionally, the Company has appointed Harris as sub-advisor to certain non-Harris funds and has incurred certain contingent obligations in connection therewith.

Pursuant to Item 404 of Regulation S-K, Harris may be deemed a “related person” of the Company by virtue of Harris Bankcorp’s ownership (on an as-converted basis) of more than 5% of our common stock. Accordingly, our current sub-advisory arrangements and other contractual obligations with Harris may be deemed related person transactions.

For more information regarding our relationship with Harris, see Note 3 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, “Merger, Acquisitions, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets—Insight Funds” and “Equity Investment.”

Stockholder and Interested Party Communications

A copy of our bylaws may be obtained from our Corporate Secretary by e-mail to corporate.secretary@virtus.com or by mail to:

Corporate Secretary

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor

Hartford, CT 06103

Stockholders and other interested parties who wish to communicate with any director(s), committee(s), the presiding director at meetings of our non-management directors, our non-management directors as a group or our entire Board, should send such communication to the relevant director, committee, or group of directors in care of the Corporate Secretary at the mailing address above or to the e-mail address listed above, indicating the director, committee, or group of directors with which they wish to communicate. If stockholders or other interested parties making such communications want their identity to be kept confidential, they should so indicate in their letter or e-mail. The Corporate Secretary will promptly forward all communications to the designated director(s).

 

98


Table of Contents

COMPENSATION OF EXECUTIVE OFFICERS

The following compensation discussion contains statements regarding future individual and Company performance targets and goals. These targets and goals are disclosed in the limited context of our discussion regarding the compensation of our executive officers in this information statement and should not be interpreted, or relied upon, as statements of our expectations or estimates of results or other guidance. We specifically caution our stockholders not to apply these statements to other contexts.

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

Overview

The prior compensation actions and decisions made in respect of executives of the Company generally have been made within the context of the framework of the PNX compensation program. Accordingly, the practices and objectives that applied to our executives in 2007 are likely to be modified to reflect both differences in competitive practices for asset management companies, our existence as an independent publicly traded company and the differences in the nature of our business from that of PNX.

Under applicable disclosure rules, we have set forth below a discussion of the compensation practices and decisions made with respect to the 2007 compensation of our chief executive officer (our “CEO”) and certain other of our named executive officers who are listed in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year.” Such information will be of value primarily as a historical reference, as the practices that we will apply in the future will likely evolve to reflect the factors outlined above. While many decisions on these matters have not been made, and may be left to the judgment of the independent members of our Board or our Compensation Committee, the following decisions have been made regarding the transition from the PNX compensation system to our compensation system, which will apply to our executives following the distribution date:

 

   

Any outstanding options in respect of PNX common stock held by our executives will be converted on the distribution date to options to purchase shares of our common stock in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of each such option in accordance with the applicable tax law requirements, and that generally preserves the remaining terms of such options;

 

   

Long-term PNX performance-based awards in the form of restricted stock units will remain outstanding and remain subject to the same performance criteria as are applicable to PNX executives. Our executives will earn whatever award they would have earned had the spin-off not occurred, but pro-rated for service through the distribution date. We anticipate that the independent members of our Board will make new and appropriate long-term incentive awards to our executives related to the performance of our business in respect of service from and after the distribution date; and

 

   

Long-term PNX service-vested awards in the form of restricted stock units outstanding at the distribution date will be converted into Company restricted stock units in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of such awards. The other terms and conditions of the converted awards (such as the vesting and exercise schedules, the impact of termination of employment on such awards, and the right in respect of restricted stock units to receive the benefit of any dividend equivalents) will be substantially the same as those applicable to the corresponding PNX grants.

The equity compensation conversion formulas are based on certain trading prices of PNX and Company common stock. The specific conversion formulas for each type of equity compensation held by Company employees are set forth in “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off—Employee Matters Agreement—Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees.”

We will not maintain any qualified or non-qualified defined benefit plans. Such plans are generally not maintained by asset management companies. The liabilities associated with benefits accrued by our executives under existing PNX sponsored plans for service through the earlier of the spin-off date and December 31, 2008 will be the ongoing responsibility of PNX.

 

99


Table of Contents

We have identified Mr. George R. Aylward, Jr., Mr. Michael A. Angerthal, Ms. Nancy G. Curtiss, Mr. J. Steven Neamtz and Mr. Francis G. Waltman as our named executive officers (“NEOs”). The historical executive compensation of Mr. Aylward, Ms. Curtiss, Mr. Neamtz and Mr. Waltman is reflected in the tabular disclosure and associated narrative discussion that follows this Compensation Discussion and Analysis. The material components of the executive compensation package for Mr. Angerthal, who was hired by the Company effective October 6, 2008, will not be reflected throughout this section, but a discussion of the material components of his compensation is set forth in “—Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year—Material Components of Compensation for the NEO Not Listed in the Summary Compensation Table.”

Objectives of the PNX Compensation Program

The PNX executive compensation program is designed to:

 

   

attract, retain and motivate executive talent in support of its overall business strategy;

 

   

tie annual and long-term incentives to the achievement of performance objectives, including the enhancement of stockholder value; and

 

   

create a total compensation opportunity comparable to that provided at companies it competes with for executive talent.

Elements of Compensation

Historically, the PNX executive compensation program has consisted of base pay, annual incentives and long-term incentives (collectively referred to as “Direct Compensation”), broad-based benefit plans available to all employees, stock awards to recognize special circumstances, share ownership and retention guidelines, a supplemental retirement plan, deferred compensation, perquisites, executive severance and change-in-control arrangements. We will not offer a supplemental retirement plan and a broad-based defined benefit pension plan after we become a public company, because these elements of compensation are not reflective of market practice for an asset management company.

 

100


Table of Contents

A description and the objective of each of PNX’s compensation elements that are applicable to our NEOs and other asset management executives for 2007 and part of 2008 are summarized in the table that follows.

 

Compensation Element  

Description

 

Objective

Base Salary  

Fixed rate of pay that has historically compensated employees for fulfilling their basic job responsibilities

 

For executives, increases have historically been provided only in the case of shortfalls relative to industry practice, to recognize a significant increase in responsibilities, or to maintain internal equity among peer executives. For other employees, increases are determined primarily based on merit.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Annual Incentives  

Incentive compensation that has historically promoted and rewarded the achievement of annual performance objectives

 

Historically, substantially all employees have participated in an incentive plan. For executives, the incentive pool in 2007 was determined by the improvement in PNX’s return on equity and line of business earnings growth.

 

Link compensation to annual performance results

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Long-Term Incentives  

Incentive compensation that has historically promoted and rewarded the achievement of long-term performance objectives

 

The core program has historically provided grants of performance-based restricted stock units, stock options and, in limited or special circumstances, service-vested restricted stock units.

 

Link compensation to long-term performance results

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Service-Vested Stock
Options and Restricted
Stock Units
  Service-vested stock option and restricted stock unit grants were used historically in special circumstances, such as to recognize promotions or attract new hires, reward significant individual contributions or extraordinary efforts that may not be reflected in other incentive plan awards, provide retention incentives, or shift compensation mix.  

Link compensation to performance results (in the case of stock options)

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Share Ownership and
Retention Guidelines
  Guidelines have historically provided a target ownership level to be attained and required the retention of a portion of all stock awards, including long-term incentive restricted stock units   Align the interests of executives and stockholders
Non-Qualified Deferred
Compensation
 

Opportunity for certain executives to defer receipt of compensation to assist executives in tax and retirement planning

 

Salary deferral has historically included additional matching contributions which were otherwise above Internal Revenue Code limits on PNX’s broad-based 401(k) plan.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Perquisites   Perquisites provided to NEOs include a nominal reimbursement for preventive medical care expenses, a financial planning allowance, relocation benefits, and reimbursements for spousal travel expenses when required for business functions.   Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Executive Severance and
Change-in-Control
Agreements
 

Certain executives have historically been eligible to receive executive severance and change-in-control protections in certain circumstances.

 

These benefits provide income protection in the event of involuntary loss of employment not due to cause in exchange for the executive’s agreement not to bring claims against PNX.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership

 

101


Table of Contents

Determining Direct Compensation Levels

Historically, the PNX compensation committee has determined Direct Compensation for its executives, including its asset management executives, by:

 

   

evaluating the strategic value of each position;

 

   

aligning compensation with strategic value;

 

   

identifying the market value of each position; and

 

   

determining the appropriate mix of Direct Compensation elements for each position.

These steps are described in the four subsections that follow.

Evaluating Strategic Value

Historically, PNX has evaluated each senior executive with respect to his or her capacity to influence its business strategy and financial results. This analysis was conducted so that the compensation opportunity for each role, expressed as a target percentile of market as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Determining Direct Compensation Levels—Aligning Compensation with Strategic Value” in the subsection that follows, was based on strategic value, which was PNX’s analysis of criticality to the execution of its business objectives. The first step in this strategic value analysis was an assessment of the degree to which each position enabled it to meet its financial targets and strategic objectives. The second step was an evaluation of each senior executive’s leadership abilities, business acumen, general management experience, degree of employment retention risk, and the impact of these factors on an individual’s ability to enable it to meet its financial targets and strategic objectives. This analysis was presented to the PNX compensation committee for its approval.

Aligning Compensation with Strategic Value

Based on the strategic value assessments, Direct Compensation for asset management executives has historically been targeted at the 50 th percentile of the size-adjusted market levels described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Determining Direct Compensation Levels—Identifying Market Value” below. PNX targeted pay at this level because it:

 

   

believed the complexity of, and difficulty of achieving, its business objectives were comparable to that of its peer group, even though PNX is smaller;

 

   

needed to attract and retain high-caliber talent to accomplish its business objectives, and the market for talent that can achieve such objectives is competitive; and

 

   

believed that the performance goals in its executive compensation program were set at aggressive levels representing significant improvement from prior year results when achieved.

Identifying Market Value

For market comparisons for asset management executives, PNX considered appropriate groups of asset management companies. In doing so, it relied on two surveys conducted by McLagan, an independent, third-party organization.

PNX used the results of all surveyed companies who have a similar position to the position benchmarked. For determining the market value of the head of asset management and the head of operations, PNX used McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey. For the head of product development, PNX used McLagan’s 2006 Sales and Marketing—Investment Products Survey. The companies represented in each of these surveys are comprised of banks, insurance companies and investment management and advisory firms. However,

 

102


Table of Contents

McLagan does not disclose the identities of the companies included in each benchmarked comparative group, and the companies used by McLagan to create comparative groups are generally not the same from job position to job position.

PNX used the numbers reported in the applicable McLagan survey to assess the compensation of our head of asset management, head of operations and head of product development against the market, as determined by the respective McLagan comparative group survey results. For the head of asset management, PNX used the 25th percentile figures as a proxy for the 50th percentile of peer companies closer to its size, since, for this position, the survey data suggested strong correlation between amount of compensation paid and size of the organization. For the head of operations and the head of product management, 50th percentile figures were used as the benchmark since, for these positions, there was no certain correlation between amount of compensation paid and size of the organization. In its analysis, PNX reviewed each of the following compensation elements to the extent provided in the surveys: base salary, cash bonus, total cash compensation, long-term and deferred awards, and total direct compensation.

In each case, PNX used the total direct compensation element as its primary market benchmark, representing the external comparison of total compensation opportunity. The other compensation elements (salary, cash bonus, and long-term awards) were used in conjunction with our executive compensation philosophy for setting the mix of pay among salary, annual incentives and long-term incentives. PNX generally considered an executive’s target total direct compensation to be “at target” if it is within 10% of the target market percentile for that position. For 2007, the target total direct compensation for our head of asset management was below the target percentile (25th percentile as reported in McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey) because Mr. Aylward was relatively new to the role and the target total direct compensation for our head of operations and our head of product development were at target (50th percentile as reported in McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey and McLagan’s 2006 Sales and Marketing—Investment Products Survey, respectively).

PNX believed that the McLagan surveys provided the most appropriate market data for comparing its compensation practices for its asset management positions since the companies participating in the surveys were all in the asset management industry and had positions of similar scope and responsibility.

Determining Mix of Direct Compensation Elements

Base Salary and Incentive Pay Mix . One of the central beliefs on which PNX’s compensation philosophy was based historically was that a greater percentage of compensation should be at risk for the executives who bear higher levels of responsibility for its performance. As such, PNX believed the majority of senior executive compensation should come from incentive pay. PNX generally targeted base salary between 25% and 35% of total Direct Compensation, and incentive pay between 65% and 75% of total Direct Compensation.

2007 Guideline Compensation Mix

 

Position

  

NEO

   Base Salary     Incentive Pay  

President and CEO

   George R. Aylward, Jr.    25 %   75 %

Head of Operations

   Nancy G. Curtiss    35 %   65 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   J. Steven Neamtz    25 %   75 %

Head of Product Development

   Francis G. Waltman    30 %   70 %

Annual and Long-Term Incentive Mix . The target mix between annual and long-term incentives was designed to support PNX’s annual and long-term strategic plans. For our CEO, this mix was balanced to motivate both the achievement of annual goals and long-term strategic planning, consistent with PNX’s practice for its line of business leaders.

 

103


Table of Contents

Target annual and long-term incentive opportunities for 2007 are shown in the table below.

 

     2007 Incentive Targets as
a Percentage of Base Salary
 

Position

   Annual Incentive     Long-Term Incentive  

President and CEO

   135 %   135 %

Head of Operations

   54 %   25 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   N/A (1)   50 %

Head of Product Development

   65 %(2)   60 %(2)

 

(1) Mr. Neamtz was hired on December 11, 2007 and not eligible for the 2007 annual incentive.
(2) Mr. Waltman resigned on December 14, 2007 and forfeited eligibility for these 2007 incentives.

Incentive Compensation

Annual Incentives

Under PNX’s annual incentive plan for 2007, executives were eligible for incentive awards based upon the achievement of pre-determined PNX financial goals approved by the compensation committee, departmental performance objectives approved by PNX’s chief executive officer, and individual performance objectives.

The financial goals approved by the PNX compensation committee determined the size of the annual incentive pool based on actual results versus the goals. These financial goals (threshold, target, and maximum) were established based on the strategic and financial plans adopted by the PNX board of directors. The PNX compensation committee determined these goals based on an assessment of the degree of difficulty and the minimum acceptable performance results. Threshold financial goals were generally set to require performance above prior year results so that payouts are limited if performance does not improve over time. Target financial goals were set at an aggressive but achievable level. Maximum financial goals were set to reward performance that was significantly better than target performance.

In 2007, the financial measure for determining the funding of the pool under the annual incentive plan was a combination of PNX ROE and line of business earnings growth, as measured by Asset Management EBITDA. For executives, PNX continued to attach a significant portion of their incentive opportunity to PNX ROE to focus the PNX management team on enterprise-wide goals. Following the spin-off, we will tie incentive opportunities to key performance indicators of the asset management business. In 2007, however, Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss had 50% and 35%, respectively, of their incentive opportunity tied to PNX’s ROE results, as reflected in the table below:

2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding

 

Position

   PNX
ROE(1)
    Asset
Management
EBITDA(2)
 

President and CEO

   50 %   50 %

Head of Operations

   35 %   65 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   N/A     N/A  

Head of Product Development

   N/A     N/A  

 

(1) ROE is (a) PNX after tax operating income divided by (b) the average of each month’s equity, where each month’s equity is the average of the equity at the beginning and ending of each month, exclusive of accumulated other comprehensive income, the accounting of effects of Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 46 (“FIN 46”), and equity attributed to discontinued operations. This measure may differ from the non-GAAP measure of the same name used to assess PNX’s performance and furnished to its investors on a periodic basis.

 

(2) Asset Management EBITDA was pre-tax operating income before depreciation, amortization of goodwill and intangibles, and, at the discretion of the compensation committee, excluded certain restructuring charges (“Asset Management EBITDA”).

 

104


Table of Contents

The 2007 financial goals for the annual incentive plan and the corresponding performance results are reflected in the following table:

2007 Annual Incentive Financial Goals and Results

 

       Threshold     Target     Maximum     Actual
Financial
Results
    Actual Pool
Funding(1)(2)
 
($ in millions)       

PNX ROE

     4.9 %     5.3 %     5.5 %     5.6 %   200 %

Asset Management EBITDA

   $ 40.5 (4)   $ 51.9     $ 54.9     $ 40.5     50 %

Incentive Pool Funding(2)

     50 %     100 %     250 %(3)    

 

(1) Based on the pool funding results and the weight attached to each financial goal as reflected in the previous table, the final pool result for our CEO was 125% and for our Head of Operations was 103%.

 

(2) Incentive pool funding was determined as a percentage of the aggregate target annual incentive awards. For results between threshold and target and target and maximum, this percentage is pro-rated.

 

(3) For 2007, PNX’s maximum award for its named executive officers, including Mr. Aylward, was increased from 200% to 250%.

 

(4) The PNX compensation committee used its discretion to adjust the threshold by $1.4 million (from $41.9 million to $40.5 million) to reflect unplanned investments in growth to position the Company for strategic options such as the announced spin-off.

After the incentive pool funding level was determined, individual incentive awards were determined 50% based on department results and 50% based on individual performance results.

The weights given to department and individual results reflected the PNX compensation committee’s intent to balance departmental teamwork with individual accountability. In total, executives could earn between 50% and 200% of their target annual incentive award for performance between threshold and maximum. For performance above threshold but below maximum, incentive payments are adjusted ratably. For 2007 and 2008, the maximum award for PNX’s named executive officers, including Mr. Aylward, was increased from 200% of target to 250% to further motivate the continued engagement and focus required of executives to execute significant corporate initiatives, including the spin-off of asset management. Any payments resulting from this increase for 2007 were paid in restricted stock units (“RSUs”), which vest ratably over two years to provide additional retention incentive to recipients.

2007 Annual Incentive Awards . Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss participated in the 2007 bonus payout as reflected in the table below. Mr. Neamtz was not eligible due to his date of hire. Mr. Waltman forfeited eligibility upon his resignation on December 14, 2007.

Mr. Aylward’s 2007 annual incentive award was paid at 122% of his target, excluding the RSU enhancement described above. Ms. Curtiss’s 2007 annual incentive award was paid at 118% of her target. In determining these awards, equal weight was given to departmental performance and individual performance:

 

   

Fifty Percent Based on Department Results: Mr. Aylward’s department goals were established at the beginning of 2007 based on PNX’s overall strategic plan, including specific metrics that were used to measure department performance. All of the department initiatives were linked to the strategic objectives that framed PNX’s strategic plan and to the corresponding financial objectives, which were centered on creating value for PNX shareholders. The four primary department goals that Mr. Aylward’s performance was measured against were margin, net and gross flows, percent of assets under management above benchmark (one and three years), and customer service quality. Based on 2007 departmental performance results as summarized in the table below and the pool funding results summarized above, this component of Mr. Aylward’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $211,613. Ms. Curtiss’s department goals were established at the beginning of 2007 based on PNX’s overall strategic plan, including specific metrics that were used to measure the performance of asset

 

105


Table of Contents
 

management operations. The three primary department goals that Ms. Curtiss’s performance was measured against were quality of operations, quality of customer service, and fund accounting accuracy. Based on these performance results, as summarized in the table below, and the pool funding results, this component of Ms. Curtiss’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $47,500.

 

                    Incentive Weight     Department Pool Results  

Department

 

2007 Measure/

Initiative

  2007
Target
    2007
Performance
Results
    Head of
Asset
Manage-
ment
    Head of Asset
Management
Operations
    Head of Asset
Management
    Head of Asset
Management
Operations
 

Asset Management

- All departments

  Margin     22.70 %     16.70 %   11.7 %   11.7 %     0.0 %     0.0 %
  Net Flows ($millions)*   $ 1,300     -$ 2,451     5.8 %   5.8 %     0.0 %     0.0 %
  Gross Flows ($millions)*   $ 6,600     $ 6,046     5.8 %   5.8 %     5.3 %     5.3 %
  AUM per Proprietary Portfolio Manager ($millions)   $ 960     $ 863     11.7 %   11.7 %     9.3 %     9.3 %

Investment

Manufacturing

  % of AUM above Benchmark     65 %     59 %   5.4 %   0.0 %     3.8 %     0.0 %
  Sales from new products ($millions)   $ 1,876     $ 1,880     5.4 %   0.0 %     5.4 %     0.0 %
  # of Funds With Improved Scale < $200 m     35       34     5.4 %   0.0 %     8.0 %     0.0 %

Investment

Operations

  NQR - Operations(1)     98.40       98.00     5.4 %   21.6 %     3.2 %     13.0 %
  NQR - Communications(2)     2.89       2.73     5.4 %   21.6 %     2.9 %     11.5 %
  NAV Accuracy     99.70       99.88     5.4 %   21.6 %     9.4 %     37.4 %

Retail Distribution

  Gross Retail sales ($millions)   $ 4,000     $ 3,989     16.3 %   0.0 %     16.2 %     0.0 %

Institutional Distribution

  Gross Institutional sales ($millions)   $ 1,061     $ 598     16.3 %   0.0 %     9.2 %     0.0 %

Total Department Results

50% of 2007 Incentive Target

 

 

    73 %     76 %
  $ 222,750     $ 62,500  

2007 Incentive Attributable to Department Results

Adjustment for PNX ROE Results(3)

 

 

  $ 162,608     $ 47,500  
  $ 49,005     $ —    

Total Incentive Attributable to Department Performance

 

  $ 211,613     $ 47,500  

 

             

*       Excludes Structured Products

         

   

(1)    Target = results above the Industry Average of our 5 Star peers over the year based on the National Quality Review, an independent firm that benchmarks the quality of operations of financial industry firms

       

(2)    Target = placement in the first quartile of customer service quality of total client pool as measured by the National Quality Review

       

 

106


Table of Contents
(3) To focus the PNX executive team on enterprise-wide results, Mr. Aylward, along with the other PNX named executive officers, had more weight placed on PNX ROE results (50%) than the non-executive population (35%) for purposes of funding the departmental portion of the bonus pool. Since the PNX ROE results were funded at the maximum level, Mr. Aylward received the additional pool funding attributable to the greater weight placed on ROE as part of his departmental bonus. Mr. Aylward’s portion was $49,005, calculated as follows:

 

     Weight to ROE     Weight to
Business
Units
    Pool Result  

Pool Funding for Executives

     50 %   50 %   125 %

Pool Funding for non-Executives

     35 %   65 %   103 %
                    

Additional Pool Funding for Executives

       22 %

50% of Mr. Aylward’s Target Incentive

   $ 222,750      

Additional Pool Funding for Executives

     22 %    
            

Mr. Aylward’s Award Adjustment for ROE results

   $ 49,005      

 

   

Fifty Percent Based on Individual Performance: Mr. Aylward’s individual goals were set by PNX’s chief executive officer at the beginning of 2007 in support of Company and department strategic plans. For 2007, these goals were a combination of his 2007 departmental goals for the asset management business, as described above, and Mr. Aylward’s personal effectiveness behaviors, which measured specified behaviors that PNX believed were integral to building and sustaining PNX’s performance culture, such as leadership, vision, teamwork, innovation, and focus on results. PNX’s chief executive officer was responsible for assessing these performance results. Based on his 2007 performance, this component of Mr. Aylward’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $332,300. Ms. Curtiss’s individual goals were set by Mr. Aylward at the beginning of 2007 in support of Company and department strategic plans. These goals were a combination of her 2007 departmental goals for the asset management business, as described above, other goals set by Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss’s personal effectiveness, which measured specified behaviors that PNX believed were integral to building and sustaining PNX’s performance culture, such as leadership, vision, teamwork, innovation, and focus on results. Mr. Aylward was responsible for assessing these performance results. Based on her 2007 performance, this component of Ms. Curtiss’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $100,000.

Based on the above components, Mr. Aylward’s total 2007 annual incentive bonus was $543,913 excluding the RSU enhancement and Ms. Curtiss’s total 2007 annual incentive bonus was $147,500. Mr. Aylward’s RSU enhancement component is described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards.”

2007 NEO Annual Incentive Awards

 

     Regular 2007 Cash Annual
Incentive Award
   Enhancement to be
Paid in RSUs(1)
   Total Value of 2007
Annual Incentive

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   $ 543,913    $ 49,207    $ 593,120

Nancy G. Curtiss

   $ 147,500      —      $ 147,500

J. Steven Neamtz(2)

     —        —        —  

Francis G. Waltman(3)

     —        —        —  

 

(1) The number of RSUs was determined based on the closing price of PNX common stock on March 5, 2008, which was $11.05.
(2) Mr. Neamtz was hired on December 11, 2007 and not eligible for this 2007 incentive.
(3) Mr. Waltman resigned effective December 14, 2007 and forfeited eligibility for this 2007 incentive.

 

107


Table of Contents

Long-Term Incentives

In 2007, long-term incentives were provided to PNX’s executives, including its asset management executives, to promote and reward the achievement of long-term goals, requiring performance goals to be met or exceeded for any incentives to be earned, and basing the ultimate value of the awards on PNX’s stock performance. Executives received grants of RSUs subject to the achievement of specified performance objectives over a three-year cycle. Each RSU awarded is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

The number of performance shares held by our executives as of the distribution date will be adjusted to reflect the value of the Company dividend in the same manner as applies to performance shares held by other PNX officers and executives. As noted above, we expect that the performance share awards with respect to our executives will continue in effect in accordance with their terms without regard to the spin-off but that the actual number of shares or corresponding dollar amount distributable to our executives, if any, will be pro-rated based on their service during the performance period and through and including the distribution date. We anticipate that the independent members of our Board will make new and appropriate long-term incentive awards to our executives related to the performance of our business in respect of service from and after the distribution date.

Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units

For 2007, stock options and service-vested RSUs were not part of PNX’s Direct Compensation strategy. Stock options were not a viable choice due to share limitations in PNX’s stock option plan entering into 2007, and PNX utilized performance-based RSUs for the long-term incentive component of Direct Compensation. However, PNX did use stock option and service-vested RSUs for special circumstances. Mr. Aylward received a stock option grant to purchase 30,000 shares of PNX common stock in connection with his promotion to senior executive vice president on February 8, 2007. On September 5, 2007, Mr. Aylward was awarded a service-vested RSU award equal to one and one-half times his salary for a three-year retention period. Mr. Waltman also received a stock option grant on February 8, 2007 to purchase 10,000 shares of PNX common stock in recognition of his performance in 2006. These options were forfeited when Mr. Waltman resigned on December 14, 2007.

In 2008, PNX changed the structure of its annual long-term incentive awards. Beginning in 2008, share limitations in PNX’s stock option plan no longer prevented the broader use of stock option grants. Therefore, PNX’s compensation committee decided to reintroduce stock options as a core part of the long-term incentive program, recognizing the focus stock options could provide on creating stockholder value. Fifty percent of the 2008 long-term incentive value for executives was provided through stock option grants. The compensation committee decided to provide the remaining 50% of target long-term incentive opportunity in the form of service-vested RSUs. The asset management executives are eligible to receive and have received 2008 PNX grants.

As previously noted, for our executives, PNX stock options and service-vested RSUs outstanding at the distribution date will be converted into stock options and RSUs in respect of our common stock in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of such awards at the distribution date. The other terms and conditions of the converted awards, such as the vesting and exercise schedules, the impact of termination of employment on such awards, and the right in respect of RSUs to receive the benefit of any dividend equivalents, will be substantially the same as those applicable to the corresponding PNX grants.

Equity Grant Procedures

Equity grants to PNX’s executives, including its asset management executives, have historically been made pursuant to its equity grant policy. Under this policy:

 

   

all stock option and RSU awards made as part of a recurring annual compensation program, such as annual long-term incentive awards to NEOs, are to be approved and granted at a meeting, whether in person or telephonically, of PNX’s compensation committee that occurs within 20 days after PNX’s earnings release for the prior fiscal year.

 

108


Table of Contents
   

all other stock options and RSUs are granted by PNX’s chief executive officer, compensation committee or board, as applicable, on four scheduled grant dates each year, to occur following the filing of each quarter’s periodic report with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). The first such grant date occurs 65 calendar days following year-end, which is five days following the due date of PNX’s Form 10-K. Subsequent grant dates occur 45 calendar days following the end of the first, second and third fiscal quarters, each of which is five days following the due date of PNX’s Form 10-Q for each fiscal quarter. If this date falls on a day that no shares of PNX common stock are traded on the New York Stock Exchange, then the grant date is the next date that trading occurs. Awards are approved by PNX’s chief executive officer, compensation committee or board, as applicable, at the last meeting preceding the applicable grant date, to be effective on the grant date.

 

   

PNX’s compensation committee may, in its discretion, approve and grant equity awards at other times, if it determines that such action is in the best interests of stockholders.

 

   

material inside information is not considered in determining award amounts or grant dates, and the policy reinforces this practice by intentionally selecting grant dates when decision makers are the least likely to be in possession of material inside information.

Share Ownership and Retention Guidelines

We intend to adopt share ownership guidelines in respect of our executives, including our NEOs, but given the fact that the trading value of our stock has not been established, and the on-going equity grant practices have not been established, we have not yet determined what the appropriate guidelines should be for our NEOs.

Supplemental Retirement Benefits

While PNX maintained a qualified and non-qualified defined benefit plan for its executives, including certain executives in the asset management business, including our CEO, we do not intend to offer any defined benefit plan. The liabilities accrued in respect of our executives under the PNX plans will be the ongoing responsibility of PNX.

Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation

PNX maintains certain nonqualified deferred compensation plans. We will not replicate all of these plans. Currently, we have adopted a plan similar in design to PNX’s plan for the deferral of salary that will allow our NEOs an opportunity to defer tax payments and receive matching contributions on their cash contributions in excess of the Code limits on compensation placed on an IRS-qualified 401(k) plan. The match will be based upon our 401(k) plan formula.

Perquisites

Perquisites have historically been an immaterial part of PNX’s executive compensation program. We expect that perquisites will be an immaterial component of our executive compensation program.

Severance and Change-in-Control Agreements

Severance

PNX has established a program under which severance benefits are made available to PNX senior executives, whose employment is terminated without cause, including certain asset management executives. These benefits are tiered based on years of service, and calculated based upon the executive’s base salary and the average of the last two annual incentive awards paid to the executive as of the termination date.

We will adopt an executive severance plan, which will provide severance, continued subsidized health care coverage and outplacement benefits. See “—Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreement—Executive Severance Allowance Plan.”

 

109


Table of Contents

Change-in-Control Agreements

Mr. Aylward is currently a party to a change-in-control agreement with PNX, related to a change in control of PNX. That agreement will not be triggered by the spin-off and will terminate pursuant to its terms on the distribution date.

We have executed a new change in control agreement with our CEO, to be effective on the distribution date, that contains terms that are substantially similar to his current agreement with PNX but related to a change in control of the Company. See “—Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreements—Change-in-Control Agreements.” It is expected that our independent directors will review the appropriateness of change-in-control agreements for our other executives, and determine whether, and the extent to which, to offer the protections afforded by such agreements to any other of our NEOs.

Pay Decisions

PNX has historically had a practice of using independent compensation consultants for executive compensation matters, such as chief executive officer compensation, executive compensation philosophy and plan design, compensation targets, director compensation, equity grants, key executive new hire packages and change-in-control design.

Historically, PNX’s chief executive officer was responsible for making compensation recommendations to PNX’s compensation committee regarding other PNX named executive officers. PNX’s chief executive officer has also historically been responsible for evaluating all departmental results in conjunction with the annual incentive program based on pre-defined performance goals established at the beginning of each year, and evaluating individual performance results for direct reports, including other PNX named executive officers. The PNX chief executive officer has historically shared her evaluation of each named executive officer with the PNX compensation committee, along with corresponding compensation recommendations for Direct Compensation, taking into account factors such as performance relative to job responsibilities, key achievements, contributions to the leadership team, overall leadership, retention risk, strategic value and market value. The PNX compensation committee has historically been responsible for reviewing these recommendations and making final decisions with regard to compensation.

We anticipate that we will develop our process for determining compensation following the distribution date, in collaboration with our independent directors, and in particular those appointed to serve on our Compensation Committee. As the input, direction and agreement of these representatives of stockholders will be of paramount importance in establishing any such decision-making process, including the appointment and utilization of any outside consultants, we can not speculate as to any element of that process.

Tax and Accounting Considerations

Code section 162(m) generally disallows a tax deduction to publicly held companies for compensation over $1 million paid to a company’s chief executive officer or any of the three other most highly compensated executive officers unless the compensation is performance-based. Qualifying performance-based compensation will not be subject to the deduction limit if certain requirements are met. Where appropriate, we intend to structure compensation for our NEOs so that it qualifies for deductibility under Code section 162(m). However, the deductibility of compensation is but one of the several critical factors in the design and implementation of any compensation arrangement and our Board reserves the right to pay non-deductible compensation if and to the extent it determines that such actions are in the best interests of stockholders.

Other tax considerations will factor into the design of our compensation programs. Code section 409A provides that amounts deferred under non-qualified deferred compensation plans are included in an employee’s income when vested unless certain requirements are met. If these requirements are not met, employees are also subject to an additional income tax and interest penalties. It is our intent that our non-qualified deferred compensation plans be operated and administered to meet, and will be designed or amended to meet, these requirements.

 

110


Table of Contents

Congress and the Internal Revenue Service consider from time to time legislation, regulations and other regulatory rulings that could modify or eliminate these tax benefits. Such actions would prompt an evaluation of the impact on our executive compensation programs.

Accounting considerations will also be taken into account in designing the compensation programs made available to NEOs. Principal among these is Financial Accounting Standards Board Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment (“FAS 123R”), which addresses the accounting treatment of certain equity-based compensation.

Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year

The following table sets forth information concerning the 2007 compensation of certain of our NEOs as of December 31, 2007. Additional information may be found in the narrative and supporting tables that accompany this table.

 

Name and
Principal
Position
(a)

  Year
(b)
  Salary(1)
(c)
  Bonus
(d)
  Stock
Awards(2)

(e)
    Option
Awards(3)

(f)
  Non-Equity
Incentive
Plan
Compen-
sation(4)

(g)
  Change in
Pension Value
and Non-
Qualified
Deferred
Compen-
sation
Earnings

(h)
  All Other
Compen-
sation(5)
(i)
  Total
(j)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ 330,000   $ —     $ 216,449     $ 103,000   $ 543,913   $ —     $ 17,400   $ 1,210,762

President & CEO(6)

                 

Nancy B. Curtiss

  2007     229,167     262     16,804       —       147,500    
—  
    9,000     402,732

Head of Operations

  2006     219,583     5,000     —         —      
80,000
   
—  
    8,783     313,367

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     16,042     —       —         —       —       —       722     16,764

Head of Retail Distribution(7)

                 

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     196,042     —       —         3,107     —       —       37,850     236,909

Head of Product Development(8)

  2006     200,000     —       (4,375 )     33,183     90,000     —       8,000     326,808

 

(1) Figures are shown for the year earned and have not been reduced for deferrals. For 2007, Mr. Aylward elected to defer $5,250 until following termination of employment. For more information on compensation deferrals, see the Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation in Fiscal Year 2007 table.

 

(2) Represents the expense reflected in PNX’s financial statements in 2006 and 2007 for all stock awards granted to NEOs (excluding stock options which are reflected in column (f)) as calculated pursuant to FAS 123R, with the only modification being that the forfeiture assumption for not meeting vesting service requirements is omitted from the calculation pursuant to SEC rules. These expenses include awards granted in 2006 and 2007 and awards granted in prior years that are subject to multiple-year service or performance conditions. A summary of the various awards incorporated in this expense are:

 

FAS 123R Accounting Expense for NEO RSU Awards(a)

 

Name

  Year   2004-2006
LTIP Cycle
  2005-2007
LTIP Cycle
    2006-2008
LTIP Cycle
  2007-2009
LTIP Cycle
  Other
Performance-
Contingent
RSU Awards
  Service-
Vested
RSU
Awards
  2007 Annual
Incentive
Enhancement
  Grand
Total
 

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ —     $ —       $ 31,249   $ 130,198   $ —     $ 55,001   $ —     $ 216,449  

Nancy G. Curtiss

  2007     —       —         —       16,804     —       —       —       16,804  
  2006     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    
  2006     12,126     (16,501 )     —       —       —       —       —       (4,375 )

 

  (a) Negative amounts in this table reflect reversal of expenses that were charged in prior years, based on revised expectations regarding projected incentive results.

 

111


Table of Contents
(3) Represents the expense reflected in PNX’s financial statements in 2006 and 2007 for all stock option awards granted to NEOs as calculated pursuant to FAS 123R, with the only modification being that the forfeiture assumption for not meeting vesting service requirements is omitted from the calculation pursuant to SEC rules. These expenses include awards granted in 2006 and 2007, and awards granted in prior years that are subject to multiple-year service conditions. The assumptions used for determining this value are stated in note 19 of PNX’s financial statements included in its 2006 and 2007 Annual Reports on Form 10-K. The various awards incorporated in this expense are:

 

FAS 123R Accounting Expense for NEO Stock Option Awards

Name

  Year   2004 Stock Option
Awards
  2005 Stock Option
Awards
  2006 Stock Option
Awards
  2007 Stock Option
Awards
  Grand Total

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ —     $ —     $ 45,250   $ 57,750   $ 103,000

Nancy G. Curtiss

  2007     —       —       —       —       —  
  2006     —       —       —       —       —  

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     —       —       —       —       —  

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     —       —       3,017     —       3,017
  2006     —       —       33,183     —       33,183

 

(4) Represents the cash-based incentive earned under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Officers with respect to Mr. Aylward, and under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. performance Incentive plan with respect to Ms. Curtiss and Mr. Waltman for the applicable performance year, paid in the following March.

 

(5) All Other Compensation Sub-Table

 

Name

   Year      Company
Contributions
to 401(k)

Plan and Excess
Investment
Plan
     Vacation Payout      Total

George R. Aylward

   2007      $ 17,400      $ —        $ 17,400

Nancy G. Curtiss

   2007        9,000        —          9,000
   2006        8,783        —          8,783

J. Steven Neamtz

   2007        722        —          722

Francis G Waltman

   2007        11,111        26,739        37,850
   2006        8,000        —          8,000

 

(6) Mr. Aylward was appointed as Senior Executive Vice President, Asset Management on February 8, 2007.

 

(7) Mr. Neamtz was hired by PNX on December 11, 2007. The figures reflect the applicable amounts from his date of hire through December 31, 2007.

 

(8) Mr. Waltman resigned effective December 14, 2007 and was rehired by the Company on July 28, 2008. His 2007 figures represent the applicable amounts from January 1, 2007 though December 14, 2007.

2007 Base Salary Adjustments

Mr. Waltman and Ms. Curtiss were the only NEOs who received a base salary increase in 2007. Mr. Waltman’s base salary was increased from $200,000 to $205,000, effective February 1, 2007. Ms. Curtiss’s base salary was increased from $220,000 to $230,000, effective February 1, 2007.

Material Components of Compensation for the NEO Not Listed in the Summary Compensation Table

We have identified Mr. Aylward, Mr. Angerthal, Ms. Curtiss, Mr. Neamtz and Mr. Waltman as our NEOs. Our NEO who is not reflected in the tables and accompanying narrative is Michael A. Angerthal, our Chief Financial Officer, who also serves as our principal accounting officer.

Mr. Angerthal has been hired as the Company’s Chief Financial Officer, effective October 6, 2008. Mr. Angerthal’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $350,000; an annual incentive target of $350,000 (set at 100% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum of $350,000 for 2008, and a maximum of $700,000; and commencing for the 2009 cycle, a long-term incentive target of $150,000 (set at approximately 43% of annual base salary). Mr. Angerthal will also receive a sign-on bonus of $200,000 payable in installments

 

112


Table of Contents

(some may occur after the distribution date), subject to certain conditions, to compensate him for equity and cash incentives foregone with his previous employer. If involuntarily terminated other than for cause prior to the distribution date, Mr. Angerthal will receive, subject to certain conditions similar to the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan, a base severance payment equal to twelve months of pay (generally, salary and average of last two annual incentive awards); be eligible to receive a pro-rated annual incentive plan payment based on actual results for the year of termination; and receive subsidized health care coverage for one year and outplacement coverage. On and after the distribution date, Mr. Angerthal will participate in the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan.

Executive Compensation Update Post-2007

Mr. Aylward

Mr. Aylward’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $350,000, an annual incentive target of $490,000 (set at 140% of annual base salary) and a long-term incentive target of $490,000 (set at 140% of annual base salary). Mr. Aylward received 21,491 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 53,728 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on March 5, 2008, an award for 4,453 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the enhancement from the 2007 annual incentive. Mr. Aylward is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Based on a review of market comparables of asset management companies and compensation practices, taking into consideration the size of the firm, the experience of the chief executive officer and the pay mix of asset management firms, the target compensation of Mr. Aylward, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer, will be increased, effective as of the distribution date, by $470,000. This increase is composed of a $75,000 increase to his base annual salary to $425,000, a $360,000 increase to his annual incentive target to $850,000 and a $35,000 increase to his long-term incentive target to $525,000.

Ms. Curtiss

Ms. Curtiss’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $240,000, an annual incentive target of $132,000 (set at 55% of annual base salary) and a long-term incentive target of $96,000 (set at 40% of annual base salary). Ms. Curtiss received 4,211 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 10,526 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on March 5, 2008, a stock option award for 20,000 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.05) in connection with her promotion to Senior Vice President. Ms. Curtiss is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Mr. Neamtz

Mr. Neamtz was hired by PNX to be the Company’s Head of Retail Distribution effective December 11, 2007. Mr. Neamtz’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $275,000, an annual incentive target of $600,000 (set at approximately 220% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum and certain restrictions for 2008 and 2009) and a long-term incentive target of $137,500 (set at 50% of annual base salary). Mr. Neamtz received 6,031 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 15,077 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on February 13, 2008, a performance-contingent restricted stock unit award for 8,017 target shares in connection with his participation in

 

113


Table of Contents

the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle. On March 5, 2008, Mr. Neamtz received 9,050 PNX restricted stock units in connection with his employment offer that will vest on the third anniversary of the award date, subject to employment with the Company and the terms of the award agreement. Mr. Neamtz is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Mr. Waltman

Mr. Waltman was rehired by PNX to be the Company’s Head of Product Development effective July 28, 2008. Mr. Waltman’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $250,000, an annual incentive target of $175,000 (set at 70% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum of $95,000 for 2008, and a long-term incentive target of $150,000 (set at 60% of annual base salary). Mr. Waltman is also receiving a sign-on bonus of $105,000 payable in installments (one may occur after the distribution date), subject to certain conditions, to compensate him for equity and cash incentives foregone with his previous employer. On August 14, 2008, Mr. Waltman received 6,539 PNX restricted stock units in connection with his employment offer that will vest on the third anniversary of the award date, subject to employment with the Company and the terms of the award agreement. Mr. Waltman is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Salary and Incentives as a Percentage of Total Compensation

In 2007, the proportion of salary and incentives reflected in columns (c) through (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” to total compensation as reflected in column (j) of that table was from 84% to 99%.

Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table supplements the information provided in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” concerning 2007 awards granted to NEOs, including the range of compensation opportunities under PNX’s 2007 annual incentive plan and the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle if specified pre-determined performance goals are met. Additional information concerning these awards may be found in the narrative that accompanies the table below. Except for awards for the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle, we intend to convert the equity awards reflected in the table to Company equity or stock options, as applicable, on the distribution date. The equity compensation conversion formulas are based on certain trading prices of PNX and Company common stock. The specific conversion formulas for each type of equity compensation held by Company employees are set forth in “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off—Employee Matters Agreement—Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees.”

 

        Estimated Future Payouts Under
Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards(1)
  Number of
Estimated Future Payouts

Under Equity Incentive
Plan Awards(3)
  All Other
Stock
Awards:
Number
of

Shares of
Stock or
Units
(i)
    All Other
Option
Awards:
Number
of
Securities
Underlying
Options
(j)
    Exercise
or

Base Price
of Option
Awards
per share

(k)
  Grant Date
Fair Value
of Stock
and
Option

Awards(4)
(l)
 

Name (a)

  Grant
Date
(b)
  Threshold
(c)
  Target
(d)
  Maximum
(2)

(e)
  Threshold
(f)
  Target
(g)
  Maximum
(h)
       

George R. Aylward, Jr.

    $ 222,750   $ 445,500   $ 1,113,750              
  02/08/2007                 30,000 (5)   $ 14.53   $ 189,000 (6)
  03/05/2007         14,152   28,304   56,608           390,595  
  09/05/2007               35,896 (7)         495,006 (8)

Nancy G. Curtiss

 

03/05/2007

    62,500     125,000     250,000   1,827   3,653   7,306           50,411  

J. Steven Neamtz

                     

Francis G. Waltman

      
02/08/2007

03/05/2007

    66,625     133,250     333,125   3,907   7,814   15,628     10,000 (9)     14.53    

 

63,000

107,833

(6)

 

 

(1)

Represents the incentive opportunity under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Officers with respect to Mr. Aylward and under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Performance Incentive Plan with respect to Ms. Curtiss and Mr. Waltman for the

 

114


Table of Contents
 

2007 performance period, as described in “2007 Awards.” Mr. Neamtz was not eligible for any 2007 incentive awards due to his date of hire. Mr. Waltman forfeited eligibility due to his resignation on December 14, 2007. Awards under this plan were funded when PNX met established thresholds for return on equity and EBIDTA with respect to Asset Management, as defined in the footnotes to the “2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding” table. Awards between threshold and target were paid in cash. Awards above target were paid in a mix of cash and RSUs. The actual 2007 cash incentive payments pursuant to this award are reflected in column (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year.” The RSU portion of this incentive is described in note 2 below.

 

(2) With respect to Mr. Aylward and Mr. Waltman, represents the maximum award equal to 250% of target, including a portion that would be paid in service-vested RSUs in connection with the 2007 annual incentive enhancement as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards.” The actual number of RSUs was determined based on the closing price of PNX common stock on March 5, 2008. For Ms. Curtiss, represents the maximum award equal to 200% of target.

 

(3) Represents performance-contingent RSUs awarded pursuant to the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle. These incentives are determined based on PNX’s 2009 ROE. The actual payments pursuant to this award, if any, will be made in 2010 based on achievement of performance criteria measured at completion of the three-year performance cycle. Mr. Waltman’s award for this cycle was forfeited upon his resignation on December 14, 2007.

 

(4) Except as footnoted otherwise, these figures represent the grant date fair value of the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle awards, measured as of the grant date based on FAS 123R. The value reported is based on the closing market price of PNX common stock on the grant date of $13.80 and the expected outcome of awards, as measured on the grant date, equal to 100% of target results. The actual value of these awards, if any, will depend on the ROE performance results for this LTIP cycle, the participant’s employment status at the end of the performance cycle, and the market value of PNX common stock on the date final awards are determined.

 

(5) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s promotion as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis— Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units.” These options vest in one-third increments on February 8 of 2008, 2009 and 2010 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, if employment is terminated in connection with a change-in-control). The term of the option is 10 years from date of grant.

 

(6) The grant date fair value of this stock option is presented pursuant to SEC rules and calculated under the Black-Scholes Model for pricing options. The material assumptions used for this calculation were: (i) an exercise price equal to the closing price of PNX common stock on the date of grant ($14.53); (ii) a volatility factor of 30.391%; (iii) a risk-free rate of return of 4.734%; (iv) a dividend yield of 1.10%; (v) a three-year vesting schedule; and (vi) a 10-year option term. This grant date fair value is not intended to forecast possible appreciation, if any, of PNX common stock. The ultimate value of the options will depend on the future market price of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock, which cannot be forecast with reasonable accuracy. The actual value, if any, an optionee will realize upon exercise of an option will depend on the excess of the market value of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock, on the date the option is exercised, over the exercise price.

 

(7) Represents a one-time retention incentive, as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units.” These RSUs, which vest on the third anniversary of the award date (or earlier, in certain circumstances, either pro rata or fully, if employment is terminated due to death, disability, approved retirement, involuntary termination that qualifies for severance or in connection with a change-in-control), are credited with dividend equivalents and interest thereon. The RSUs are scheduled to convert into our or PNX, as applicable, common stock on the third anniversary of the award date.

 

(8) Represents the grant date fair value of the award described in note 7 above, measured as of the grant date based on FAS 123R. The value reported is based on the closing market price of PNX common stock on the grant date ($13.79). The actual value of this award, if any, will depend on the participant’s employment status and the market value of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock on the vesting date.

 

(9) Represents the grant of stock options in recognition of Mr. Waltman’s performance. These options were forfeited on December 14, 2007 upon Mr. Waltman’s resignation.

Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards

Actual incentive awards were determined based on the factors described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.” These awards, reflected in column (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year,” were paid on March 15, 2008.

Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards

The primary equity incentives for the PNX NEOs were provided through the LTIP, which PNX stockholders approved in 2003. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” In 2007, PNX’s compensation committee approved the performance objective of a 2009 ROE target of 9% for the 2007-2009 performance cycle. If this target is achieved, the RSUs for this incentive award reflected in column (g) of the preceding table will be paid. The RSUs for this incentive

 

115


Table of Contents

award reflected in column (f) (threshold) will be paid for 2009 ROE of 8%, and the RSUs for this incentive award in column (h) (maximum) will be paid for 2009 ROE of 10%. The RSUs for the 2007-2009 cycle, if any, are scheduled to convert into shares of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock or such cash equivalent in 2010.

In 2007, a special enhancement to the annual incentive plan was provided to Mr. Aylward and Mr. Waltman. The normal annual incentive plan provides employee incentive opportunities between 0% and 200% of target incentive levels based on the achievement of pre-determined performance goals, including financial, department and individual goals. For 2007, the maximum payout level of 200% of target incentive levels was increased to 250%. Achievements in excess of target goals would yield awards above target performance results that would be determined by interpolating between target payment (100% of target incentive levels) and 250%, instead of the normal interpolation between target and 200%. Any payments resulting from the enhancement would be paid in service-vested RSUs that would vest incrementally over the two-year period following determination of final awards results. Mr. Waltman’s incentive opportunity under this program was forfeited upon his resignation on December 14, 2007. Based on actual 2007 performance results, Mr. Aylward participated in the 2007 incentive payout, including the special enhancement. See the 2007 NEO Annual Incentive Awards table under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.”

Stock Option Plan

In 2007, with respect to awards for NEOs, PNX granted ISOs first, and then non-qualified options if ISO limits precluded the full award from being made in ISOs. All option awards are granted at the grant date fair market value of PNX common stock on the date the award is approved, or, if later, effective. Generally, all awards are subject to a three-year graded vesting schedule, and recipients have a maximum of 10 years to exercise the option. Upon termination of employment, stock options generally must be exercised within 30 days following termination of employment. In cases of termination due to death, disability or retirement, options must be exercised within five years from the date of termination of employment. For termination of employment in connection with a qualifying business disposal or divestiture, the compensation committee may allow options that must be exercised within three years from the date of termination of employment or divestiture. In the case of terminations due to cause, all outstanding options expire immediately.

Outstanding Equity Awards at 2007 Fiscal Year-End

The following table sets forth information concerning stock options and non-vested RSU awards with respect to PNX common stock held by the NEOs as of December 31, 2007.

 

    Option Awards   Stock Awards

Name (a)

  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options

Exercisable
(b)
  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options

Unexercisable
(c)
    Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Unearned
Options

(d)
  Option
Exercise
Price

(e)
  Option
Expiration
Date

(f)
  Number
of
Shares
or Units
of Stock
That
Have
Not
Vested

(g)
    Market
Value of
Shares
or Units
of Stock
That
Have
Not
Vested
(1)

(h)
  Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Number of
Unearned
Shares,
Units
or Other
Rights That
Have Not
Vested(2)

(i)
    Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Market or
Payout Value
of Unearned
Shares, Units
or Other
Rights That
Have Not
Vested(1)

(j)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  8,333
20,000
6,500
  30,000

16,667

(6)

(8)

    $
 
 
 
14.53
14.49
10.83
16.20
  02/08/17
02/02/16
11/04/14
06/25/12
  35,896 (7)   $ 426,086   28,304

13,326

6,270

(3)

(4)

(5)

  $
 
 
335,968
158,180
74,425

Nancy G. Curtiss

  6,000         16.20   06/25/12       3,653 (3)     43,361

J. Steven Neamtz

                 

Francis G. Waltman

  6,666

10,000

       

 

14.49

16.20

  01/16/08

01/16/08

       

 

116


Table of Contents

 

(1) Based on the December 31, 2007, the last trading day in 2007, closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87.

 

(2) These figures, which are rounded to the nearest whole number, represent the number of RSUs which may be earned at target performance. Actual payouts are scheduled to occur in the quarter following the end of the relevant performance period and will be based on actual performance relative to the performance target established for each award. Each RSU is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

 

(3) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs payable, if any, will be determined in 2010 based on actual 2009 ROE, as defined in note 1 to the “2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding” table under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.”

 

(4) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2006-2008 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs payable, if any, will be determined in 2009 based on actual three-year average return on equity for the 2006-2008 period relative to the performance target established for this period. For this purpose, return on equity means (a) operating income divided by (b) average adjusted stockholders’ equity. Operating income represents income from continuing operations, before realized investment gains or losses and certain other items not related to our operating performance. The average adjusted stockholders’ equity represents the 12-month average of the average monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity, where monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity is defined as the average of the total equity at the beginning and end of each month adjusted for accumulated other comprehensive income, accumulated realized losses in retained earnings related to collateralized obligation trusts consolidated under FIN 46R and equity attributed to discontinued operations.

 

(5) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2005-2007 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs awarded, as reflected in the table below, was determined in 2008 to be 0% of target based on actual three-year average of Cash ROE for the 2005-2007 period relative to the performance target established for this period. For this purpose, Cash ROE means (a) operating income from continuing operations, excluding realized investment gains or losses, venture capital, amortization of intangibles and non-recurring items; divided by (b) average adjusted stockholders’ equity. The average adjusted stockholders’ equity represents the 12-month average of the average monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity, where monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity is defined as the average of the total equity at the beginning and end of each month adjusted for accumulated other comprehensive income, accumulated realized losses in retained earnings related to collateralized obligation trusts consolidated under FIN 46(R) and equity attributed to discontinued operations.

Results of the 2005-2007 LTIP Cycle

 

Name

   Threshold
Number of

RSUs
   Target
Number of

RSUs
   Maximum
Number of
RSUs
   Actual
Number of
RSUs
   12/31/2007
Market Value
of Actual
RSUs
Awarded

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   3,135    6,270    12,540    —      $ —  

Nancy G. Curtiss

              

J. Steven Neamtz

              

Francis G. Waltman

   3,583    7,166    14,332    —        —  

 

(6) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s promotion to Senior Executive Vice President and President of Asset Management. One-third of these options vested on February 8, 2008. Of the remaining options, one-half will vest in on February 8, 2009 and one-half will vest on February 8, 2010.

 

(7) Represents a one-time retention incentive. These RSUs, which vest on September 5, 2010 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, either pro rata or fully, if employment is terminated due to death, disability, approved retirement, involuntary termination that qualifies for severance or in connection with a change-in-control), are credited with dividend equivalents and interest thereon. The RSUs are scheduled to convert into PNX common stock on September 5, 2010.

 

(8) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s performance in 2005. Fifty percent of these options vested on February 2, 2008 and the remaining 50% will vest on February 2, 2009 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, if employment is terminated in connection with a change-in-control).

 

117


Table of Contents

Option Exercises and Stock Vested in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table sets forth information concerning the vesting of RSUs that occurred during 2007. None of the NEOs exercised any stock options in 2007.

 

     Option Awards    Stock Awards

Name (a)

   Number of
Shares
Acquired
on Exercise
(b)
   Value
Realized
on Exercise
(c)
   Number of
Shares
Acquired
on Vesting(1)(3)
(d)
   Value
Realized
on Vesting(2)
(e)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

         2,451    $ 33,824

Nancy G. Curtiss

           

J. Steven Neamtz

           

Francis G. Waltman

         3,064      42,283

 

(1) These figures, which are rounded to the nearest whole number, represent the number of RSUs which vested in 2007 prior to any reduction for tax withholding. Each RSU is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

 

(2) Represents the market value of the RSUs based on the closing price of PNX common stock on the vesting date.

 

(3) Represents the final number of RSUs that were awarded in connection with PNX’s 2004-2006 LTIP cycle. These RSUs converted to shares of PNX common stock, without consideration, on March 5, 2007.

Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table sets forth information concerning NEO participation in deferred compensation plans, excluding The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Savings and Investment Plan (the “401(k) Plan”). The table includes 2007 compensation deferrals, PNX contributions, earnings, withdrawal activity, total balances as of December 31, 2007 and the portion of the aggregate balances as of December 31, 2007 that were reported in Summary Compensation Tables for prior years.

 

Name (a)

  Deferral Type   Executive
Contributions
in Last FY(1)

(b)
  Registrant
Contributions
in Last FY(2)

(c)
  Aggregate
Earnings
in Last
FY(3)

(d)
    Aggregate
Withdrawals/
Distributions

(e)
  Aggregate
Balance
at Last
FYE(4)

(f)
  Portion of
Aggregate
Balance
at Last
FYE
Reported
in Prior
SCT

(g)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  Excess Investment Plan   $ 5,250   $ 6,300   $ (133 )   $ —     $ 13,838   $    —  

Nancy G. Curtiss

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       27,442       —       411,185     —  

J. Steven Neamtz

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       —         —       —       —  

Francis G. Waltman

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       372       5,118     —       —  

 

(1) These figures represent voluntary deferrals of 2007 salary into The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan (the “Excess Investment Plan”), as described in the following narrative. The corresponding salary figures in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” include these deferral amounts.

 

(2) These figures represent the 2007 non-qualified PNX matching contribution made in the Excess Investment Plan.

 

(3) Represents the change in account value between December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2007, less any executive or PNX contributions, plus any account distributions.

 

(4) Based on the market value of assumed investment options as of December 31, 2007.

The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan

Certain of PNX employees, including its named executive officers, could have elected to defer up to 60% of their base pay and up to 100% of their annual incentive awards under the Excess Investment Plan. Base pay deferrals commence when year-to-date base pay exceeds the Code limitation on qualified plan compensation which was $225,000 in 2007.

 

118


Table of Contents

With respect to base pay deferrals only, PNX made a corresponding match credit using the same formula as provided in its 401(k) Plan. For the first half of 2007, this match formula was the same for all participants, equal to 100% on the first 3% deferred, plus 50% on the next 2% deferred, for a maximum Company match of 4% of base pay between the Excess Investment Plan and the 401(k) Plan.

Effective July 1, 2007, all of the NEOs received the PNX match based on the following schedule:

 

Years of Service on January 1

  

PNX Match Formula

   Maximum PNX
Match Rate as a
Percentage of
Base Pay
 

Less than 5 years

   100% on first 3% of pay saved; 50% on next 3%    4.5 %

5 to 9 years

   100% on first 6% of pay saved    6.0 %

10 to 14 years

   100% on first 3% of pay saved; 150% on next 3%    7.5 %

15 years or more

   150% on first 6% of pay saved    9.0 %

Based on this schedule, the maximum PNX match rate for 2007, as a percentage of base pay for our NEOs, was:

 

     Maximum 2007 PNX Match Rate for NEOs  

Name

   Prior to July 1, 2007     After June 30, 2007  

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   4 %   7.5 %

Nancy G. Curtiss

   4 %   9.0 %

J. Steven Neamtz

   4 %   4.5 %

Francis G. Waltman

   4 %   9.0 %

The Excess Investment Plan provided participants with a choice of mutual fund offerings similar to those funds made available to employees under the 401(k) Plan. There are no above-market or guaranteed returns in the Excess Investment Plan. Participants could have modified their investment elections at any time under the Excess Investment Plan. Deferrals were credited to the funds selected by the participants and based on the market price for such funds on the date such compensation would otherwise have been paid.

Account balances under the plan, reflecting cumulative appreciation/depreciation and interest credits (depending on the investment fund(s) chosen by the participant) are paid to participants, based on their election made prior to deferral, in lump sum or annual installments following the termination of services with the Company. In-service withdrawals may only be taken to remedy severe financial hardship caused by an unforeseeable emergency as permitted under Code section 409A, and any other applicable laws. Loans are not permitted under this plan. All balances under this plan are unfunded general obligations of the Company, which the Company, at its discretion, may hedge in full or in part by making contributions to a trust subject to the claims of its creditors in certain circumstances. Currently, the Company hedges 100% of this obligation by making investments in the same funds and in the same amounts as participants have elected.

Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreements

PNX has entered into certain agreements and maintains certain plans that will require it to provide compensation to certain of our NEOs in the event of a termination of employment, including termination of employment in connection with a change-in-control. The amounts payable to each NEO are estimated in the tables provided in this section. No incremental benefits are provided under these programs in the event of a voluntary termination by the NEO without good reason or by PNX for cause.

Upon termination of employment, all NEOs would receive their vested benefits under any IRS-qualified plan; benefits and conversion rights under the Consolidated Omnibus Budget and Reconciliation Act (“COBRA”), if applicable; and the non-qualified plans’ benefits pursuant to the terms of the plans.

 

119


Table of Contents

Change-in-Control Agreements

Effective January 1, 2006, PNX entered into an agreement with Mr. Aylward which, in certain circumstances, would have provided separation benefits upon the termination of employment in connection with a change-in-control. This agreement superseded a similar agreement that expired on January 1, 2006. The protections provided under the agreement can only be triggered by termination of employment either (i) by PNX for reasons other than death, disability (as defined in the agreements), Cause or retirement, or (ii) by the executive for good reason, provided such termination occurs following, or is effectively connected with, the occurrence of a change-in-control. This agreement had an initial term of two years with provisions for automatic renewals for successive one-year periods, unless either party provides to the other party written notice at least 60 days prior to the end of the initial term or any renewal term that PNX or NEO does not want the term so extended.

This agreement for Mr. Aylward provides for Change-in-Control severance benefits including: (i) vesting of pension plan benefits and an enhanced pension benefit in an amount equal to two years of additional service and age credit and/or pension equity formula credits, as applicable, under such plans payable at the same time, and in the same form as regular pension benefits; (ii) in lieu of any severance benefits payable under any other plan, policy or program, a cash amount equal to two times the sum of base salary plus the greater of the average of annual incentive compensation earned in the last three fiscal years prior to the Change-in-Control and the annual incentive target for the year in which employment terminates; (iii) two years of continued medical, dental and long-term disability coverage; (iv) vesting of benefits under equity compensation plans; (v) an amount equal to a pro-rata portion of the annual incentive award earned for the year in which termination occurs (or target incentive, if greater) and a pro-rata portion of long-term awards for each then open cycle at target; (vi) an amount equal to two years of additional contributions that would have made to PNX’s 401(k) Plan and/or the Excess Investment Plan; and (vii) outplacement services. Mr. Aylward would be subject to a confidentiality covenant after his termination of employment, which will require him to maintain the confidentiality of any confidential or proprietary information and a non-solicitation covenant for two years after the Employment Period (as defined in the agreement) during which he could solicit employees of the Company.

This agreement terminates automatically upon Mr. Aylward’s death, termination due to disability (as defined in the agreements), termination for Cause or voluntary retirement. If his employment is terminated during the Employment Period (as defined in the agreements) by reason of his death or disability (as defined in the agreement), the agreement will terminate and PNX would pay (i) his base salary through the date of termination; (ii) any vested amounts or benefits under applicable employee benefit plans, agreements and programs, as well as any accrued vacation pay not yet paid; and (iii) any other benefits payable in such situation under the plans, agreements, policies or programs of PNX.

In addition, as a result of Mr. Aylward’s February 8, 2007 appointment as Senior Executive Vice President and President, Asset Management, he received a higher multiple (2.5 instead of 2.0) and gross-up provisions.

Mr. Aylward has a change in control agreement with PNX effective January 1, 2008 that contains certain revisions from the previous agreement as a result of a comprehensive market assessment of such agreements in 2007 directed by the PNX board of directors. The following changes are reflected in Mr. Aylward’s 2008 agreement: (i) a two-year term with automatic renewals for successive one-year periods unless either party provides prior written notice; (ii) in connection with the change to PNX’s pension plan formula as of July 1, 2007, the pension enhancement under the PNX SERP is applied only to the new pension equity portion of the SERP benefit; and (iii) with respect to the determination of the severance amount, the portion of the formula based on annual incentive compensation will be based solely on the target amount for the year of termination of employment instead of the greater of such target amount and the average of actual annual incentives paid for the prior three years. Mr. Aylward’s agreement was also revised to comply with Code section 409A, based on guidance available at that time. Mr. Aylward’s agreement will not be triggered by the spin-off and will terminate pursuant to its terms effective upon the distribution date.

 

120


Table of Contents

We have executed a new change in control agreement with our CEO, to be effective on the distribution date, that contains substantially similar terms, with a few changes to reflect differences in industry practice, such as no pension and SERP provisions because the Company will not have those plans.

It is expected that our independent directors will review the appropriateness of change-in-control agreements for our other executives, and determine whether, and the extent to which, to offer the protections afforded by such agreements to any other of our NEOs.

Executive Severance Allowance Plan

In 2007, if certain of our NEOs were involuntarily terminated, subject to certain exceptions, he or she would have been eligible to receive (i) a payment equal to the executive’s annual base salary, paid in the form of a lump sum payment or in installments, in each case commencing as soon as practicable following separation from service; (ii) a pro-rata portion of the annual incentive awards he or she earned for the fiscal year in which he or she separated from service; (iii) outplacement services; and (iv) continued active participant rates in the medical and dental plans for 12 months of the COBRA continuation period, if the executive elects coverage under COBRA.

Benefits are paid from our general assets and are conditioned on a number of factors, including covenants within the terms of the Executive Severance Allowance Plan and the signing of an agreement containing certain covenants (see (i), (ii) and (iv) in the next sentence) and a release of claims against PNX. The Executive Severance Allowance Plan conditions receipt of benefits on (i) refraining from interfering with ongoing operations and making disparaging remarks concerning PNX, its representatives, agents and employees; (ii) refraining from solicitation of employees, agents, representatives and/or clients of PNX; (iii) returning all PNX property; and (iv) complying with maintaining the confidentiality of confidential and proprietary information. Failure to comply with any of these covenants/conditions will cause immediate cessation of all payments under the plan and the executive must immediately reimburse PNX for all payments previously made.

All payments due under the plan are to be paid no later than March 15 of the calendar year following separation from service, except for any payments that are required to be paid at a later date pursuant to Code section 409A.

Effective January 1, 2008, the benefits became tiered based on years of service, and calculated based upon the executive’s base salary and the average of the last two annual incentive awards paid to the executive as of the termination date.

Our Executive Severance Allowance Plan, which will be effective on the distribution date, is modeled based on PNX’s design, but with a non-service based severance formula that will provide a more consistent level of severance protection for NEOs regardless of service history. For the first two years of the Plan, the severance formula will provide 12 months (18 months in the case of our CEO) of base salary plus target annual incentive bonus for the year of termination. Subsequently, the severance formula will provide 12 months (18 months in the case of our CEO) of base salary plus the average of the last two annual incentives (if any). Additionally, as in the PNX plan, NEOs would receive (i) a pro-rated payment under our applicable annual incentive plan, if any, for the year of termination based upon actual results; (ii) continued subsidized medical and dental coverage for one year; and (iii) executive outplacement coverage for six months.

 

121


Table of Contents

Illustrations of Compensation and Benefits Upon Termination of Employment for Various Reasons

The following table summarizes the value of the compensation and benefits that certain of our NEOs would have received if their employment had been involuntarily terminated (other than for cause) as of December 31, 2007.

 

Payment for Involuntary Terminations
    George R. Aylward, Jr.   Nancy G. Curtiss   J. Steven Neamtz   Francis G. Waltman

Severance

       

Base Salary Component

  $ 330,000   $ 194,615   $ 275,000   $ 205,000

Other Compensation

       

2007 Annual Incentive(1)

    543,913            

Unvested Service-Based RSUs(2)

    45,485            

Subtotal Severance and Other Compensation

    919,398     194,615     275,000     205,000

Benefits

       

Health & Welfare(3)

    3,597     3,597     10,110     10,110

Outplacement

    10,000     5,195     10,000     10,000

Total Severance, Other Compensation, and Benefits

  $ 932,996   $ 203,407   $ 295,110   $ 225,110

 

(1) Reflects the actual 2007 annual incentive earned (excluding the annual incentive enhancement component that was awarded in RSUs in 2008 as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards”).

 

(2) RSU amounts are valued based on the December 31, 2007 closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87 per share.

 

(3) Reflects estimated Company cost of continuing to subsidize certain health and welfare benefits for the NEOs for 12 months, based on coverage elections in effect for 2007.

The following table summarizes the value of the compensation and benefits that Mr. Aylward would have received if his employment had been terminated involuntarily (other than for Cause) or if Mr. Aylward had terminated employment for good reason in connection with a change-in-control of PNX as of December 31, 2007.

 

Change-in-Control Payments  
     George R. Aylward, Jr.  

Severance

  

Base Salary Component

   $ 660,000  

Annual Incentive Component

     891,000  

Other Compensation

  

2007 Annual Incentive(1)

     543,913  

2005-2007 LTIP Cycle(2)

     74,425  

2006-2008 LTIP Cycle(2)

     105,453  

2007-2009 LTIP Cycle(2)

     111,989  

Unvested Service-Based RSUs(2)

     426,086  

Unvested Stock Options(2)

      

Incremental Non-Qualified Company Match(3)

     49,500  

280G Cut-back(4)

     (1,332,439 )

Subtotal Severance & Other Compensation

     1,529,927  

Benefits and Perquisites

  

Health & Welfare(5)

     8,572  

Outplacement

     20,000  

Total Severance, Other Compensation, Benefits and Perquisites

   $ 1,558,499  

 

(1) Reflects the higher of target 2007 annual incentive and actual 2007 annual incentive, excluding the annual incentive enhancement component that was awarded in RSUs in 2008 as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards.”

 

122


Table of Contents
(2) All LTIP and RSU amounts are valued based on the December 31, 2007 closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87 per share. Stock options reflect the spread value between the exercise price and $11.87 for any options vesting upon a change-in-control.

 

(3) Reflects the applicable PNX matching formula from the 401(k) Plan and the Excess Investment Plan multiplied by the base salary component of severance.

 

(4) If change-in-control payments are greater than three times the average W-2 reported compensation for the preceding five years, then an excise tax is imposed on the portion of the payment that exceeds one times the average W-2 reported compensation for the preceding five years (the “base amount”). The change-in-control agreement for Mr. Aylward as of December 31, 2007 limited payments in connection with a change-in-control to 2.99 times the base amount. As such, Mr. Aylward’s figures reflect the reduction in benefits required to meet this limit.

 

(5) Reflects estimated PNX cost of continuing to subsidize certain health and welfare benefits for 24 months.

New Plan

In connection with the spin-off, and effective on the distribution date, we will adopt the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan (the “Omnibus Plan”).

Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan

The purpose of the Omnibus Plan is to allow us to incent and reward employees, non-employee directors and consultants by means of cash or shares of our common stock. The following is a summary of the expected terms of the Omnibus Plan.

Common Stock Available for Awards. The maximum number of shares of our common stock available for issuance under the Omnibus Plan will be 1.8 million shares. In the discretion of our Compensation Committee, 1.8 million of these shares may be granted in the form of incentive stock options. If any shares covered by an award are cancelled, forfeited, terminated, expire unexercised or are settled through issuance of consideration other than shares of our common stock (including, without limitation, cash), these shares will again become available for award under the Omnibus Plan.

Eligibility. Awards may be made under the Omnibus Plan to any employee of the Company or its subsidiaries, any of our non-employee directors or consultants. Because participation and the types of awards under the Omnibus Plan are subject to the discretion of our Compensation Committee, the number of participants in the plan and the benefits or amounts that will be received by any participant or groups of participants are not currently determinable.

Administration. Effective as of the distribution date, our Compensation Committee will administer the Omnibus Plan. Subject to the terms of the Omnibus Plan, the administrator of the plan may select participants to receive awards, determine the types of awards and the terms and conditions of awards, interpret provisions of the plan and make all factual and legal determinations regarding the plan and any award agreements.

Types of Awards. The Omnibus Plan will provide for grants of stock options (which may consist of incentive stock options or nonqualified stock options), stock appreciation rights, stock awards (which may consist of restricted stock and restricted stock units), performance awards (both cash and equity) and any other types of equity awards. The terms of the awards will be embodied in an award agreement and awards may be granted singly, in combination or in tandem. All or part of an award may be subject to such terms and conditions established by our Compensation Committee, including, but not limited to, continuous service with the Company and its subsidiaries, achievement of specific business objectives and attainment of performance goals. No award may be re-priced.

 

   

Stock Options and Stock Appreciation Rights. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of stock options to purchase shares of our common stock and stock appreciation rights. The exercise price of each stock

 

123


Table of Contents
 

option and stock appreciation right may not be less than the fair market value of our common stock on the date of grant. The term of each stock option or stock appreciation right will be set by our Compensation Committee and may not exceed ten years from the date of grant. Our Compensation Committee will determine the date each stock option or stock appreciation right may be exercised and the period of time, if any, after retirement, death, disability or other termination of employment during which stock options or stock appreciation rights may be exercised. In general, a grantee may pay the exercise price of an option in cash or shares of common stock.

 

   

Stock Awards. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of stock awards. Stock awards that are not performance awards will generally be restricted for a minimum period of three years from the date of grant based on a graded vesting schedule; provided, however, that our Compensation Committee may provide for cliff vesting, immediate vesting or earlier vesting following an employee’s termination of employment for death, disability or retirement or upon a change of control or other specified events.

 

   

Performance Awards. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of performance awards in the form of cash and/or equity. Performance awards will be subject to the satisfaction of specified performance criteria; provided, however, that our Compensation Committee may provide for earlier vesting following an employee’s termination of employment for death, disability or retirement or upon a change in control or other specified events. Our Compensation Committee will determine the terms, conditions and limitations applicable to the performance awards and set the performance goals in its discretion. The performance goals will determine the value and amount of performance awards that will be paid to participants and the portion of an award that may be exercised to the extent such performance goals are met. Performance awards may be designed by our Compensation Committee to qualify as performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code (“Section 162(m)”), such as for awards for our executive officers. For purposes of Section 162(m), performance goals will be designated by our Compensation Committee and will be based upon one or more of the following performance goal measures:

 

   

gross or net cash flow, free cash flow, cash flow return on investment (discounted or otherwise), cash operating income, net cash provided by operations, or cash flow in excess of cost of capital;

 

   

sales;

 

   

revenues;

 

   

earnings per share, stock price or stockholder return (on a gross or net basis), or any rating by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization;

 

   

net income;

 

   

return on assets (gross or net), return on investment, return on capital or return on equity (or any combination);

 

   

economic value created;

 

   

operating income, earnings before or after taxes, interest, depreciation, amortization or extraordinary or special items (or any combination), which may be determined on a per share basis (basic or diluted);

 

   

debt to capital ratio, or risk based capital ratio;

 

   

operating margin, gross margin or other financial margin;

 

   

assets under management, gross or net flows of assets under management, market capitalization, or net assets;

 

   

segment income; and

 

   

dividend payout.

 

124


Table of Contents

Any performance criteria selected by our Compensation Committee may be used to measure our performance as a whole or the performance of any of our segments, and may be measured for the Company alone or relative to a peer group or index.

Awards to Non-Employee Directors. Our Compensation Committee may grant non-employee directors one or more awards, including unrestricted common stock, and establish the terms of the award in the applicable award agreement. No award will confer upon any director any right to serve as a director for any period of time or to continue at any rate of compensation.

Award Payments. Awards may be paid in cash, common stock or a combination of cash and common stock. In addition, in the discretion of our Compensation Committee, rights to dividends or dividend equivalents may be extended to any shares of common stock or units denominated in shares of our common stock. Under the plan, during any one-year period, participants may not be granted options or stock appreciation rights exercisable for more than 250,000 shares of common stock or stock awards exercisable for more than 250,000 shares of common stock.

Adjustments. If there are any changes in the number of shares of our common stock resulting from stock splits, stock dividends, reorganizations, recapitalizations, the number of any merger or consolidation of the Company, or any other event that affects our capitalization occurs, the terms of any outstanding awards and the number of shares of our common stock issuable under the Omnibus Plan will be adjusted to prevent enlargement or dilution of the benefits or potential benefits intended to be made available under the Omnibus Plan.

Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code. Section 162(m) limits us to an annual deduction for federal income tax purposes of $1,000,000 for compensation paid to covered employees. Performance-based compensation is excluded from this limitation. The Omnibus Plan is designed to permit our Compensation Committee to grant awards that qualify as performance-based for purposes of satisfying the conditions of Section 162(m).

Assignability. Generally, no award under the Omnibus Plan is assignable or otherwise transferable, unless otherwise determined by our Compensation Committee.

Amendment, Modification and Termination. Our Board or our Compensation Committee may amend, modify, suspend or terminate the Omnibus Plan, to the extent that no such action will materially adversely affect the rights of a participant holding an outstanding award under the Omnibus Plan without such participant’s consent, and no such action will be taken without stockholder approval, to the extent stockholder approval is legally required.

 

125


Table of Contents

COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS

Director Compensation

Our compensation philosophy for non-employee members of our Board is to:

 

   

establish a basic compensation program that provides competitive levels of pay to attract and retain high quality board of director talent;

 

   

use a balanced combination of cash and equity; and

 

   

align board members’ compensation and stockholders’ interests by requiring share ownership for all directors.

Non-employee director compensation will consist of (i) a retainer of $110,000 per year, (ii) an additional retainer of $50,000 per year for our non-executive board chairman, and (iii) an additional retainer of $10,000 for each committee chairman for each committee chaired. Such director compensation will be paid 50% in cash and 50% in Company common stock. The cash portion will be paid quarterly in advance and the equity portion will be paid in outright grants of common stock, granted annually at the annual stockholders meeting with a pro-rated initial grant upon registration of shares for the Company’s Omnibus Plan. The directors will not be able to defer receipt of their cash and equity compensation. We will not provide directors who are also our employees any additional compensation for serving as a director.

To evidence or reinforce the alignment of directors’ interest with stockholders’ interests, our share ownership guidelines require the retention of a fixed number of shares in an amount equal to $300,000 divided by the average closing prices of our common stock over the first thirty days that our shares trade on the Nasdaq Global Market, rounded to the nearest 500 share increment.

Director Compensation Peer Group Assessment

PNX management conducted a review and assessment of the current market practices for asset management companies’ director compensation. Several factors entered into the selection of the companies and the assessment of results:

 

   

similar to PNX’s situation, many of the companies included in the review were significantly larger than the Company, and pay level, even for directors, generally correlates with company size;

 

   

PNX looked at compensation at the 25th percentile for setting the total pay level, which is comparable to the pay levels of other small companies in the peer group; and

 

   

as a secondary reference, PNX also considered compensation relative to PNX’s board of directors .

PNX analyzed the following components of board compensation, including:

 

   

total compensation for all directors compared to peer companies; and

 

   

cash and equity compared to peer companies.

The following peer companies were used for purposes of PNX’s assessment of market practice:

Director Compensation Peer Companies

 

Public Asset Management Companies – Less Than

$1 Billion Market Capitalization

 

Public Asset Management Companies – Greater Than

$1 Billion Market Capitalization

Calamos Asset Management, Inc.

  Affiliated Managers Corp.

Diamond Hill

  Alliance Capital Management

Epoch Holding Corp.

  BNY Mellon Asset Management

Gamco Investors, Inc.

  Cohen & Steers, Inc.

Pzena Investments

  Eaton Vance
  Federated Investors
  Franklin Resources
  Janus Capital Group
  Nuveen Investments
  T. Rowe Price Group

 

126


Table of Contents

SECURITY OWNERSHIP BY

CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

Beneficial Ownership

Common Stock

All of the outstanding shares of our common stock are, and will be, prior to the distribution, held beneficially and of record by PNX. The following table sets forth information concerning shares of our common stock projected to be beneficially owned immediately after the distribution date by each person or entity known by us to be the beneficial owner of 5% or more of the outstanding shares of PNX’s common stock

The projected share amounts in the table below are based on the number of shares of PNX common stock owned by each person or entity as of the date indicated, as adjusted to reflect the distribution ratio of one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock. Cash will be distributed in lieu of fractional shares. To our knowledge, except as otherwise indicated in the footnotes below, each person or entity has sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares of common stock set forth opposite such person’s or entity’s name. Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to the securities. Shares of common stock and stock options that are vested or are scheduled to vest within 60 days are deemed to be outstanding and to be beneficially owned by the persons holding the options for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of the person.

 

Name

  Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
PNX Common
Stock
    Percent of Class
of PNX Common
Stock
    Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
Company
Common Stock(6)

Toscafund Asset Management LLP

90 Long Acre

7 th Floor

London, WC2E 9RA

  10,583,818 (1)   9.30 %(1)   529,190

Third Point LLC

390 Park Avenue

New York, NY 10022

  10,000,000 (2)   8.70 %(2)   500,000

Morgan Stanley

1585 Broadway

New York, NY 10036

  6,478,460 (3)   5.70 %(3)   323,923

Dimensional Fund Advisors LP

1299 Ocean Avenue

Santa Monica, CA 90401

  6,002,951 (4)   5.25 %(4)   300,147

State Farm Mutual Automobile Insurance Company

One State Farm Plaza

Bloomington, IL 61710

  5,934,451 (5)   5.19 %(5)   296,722

 

(1) Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on November 6, 2008 by Toscafund Asset Management LLP (“Tosca Management”). The filing discloses that as of October 21, 2008, Tosca Management had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 10,583,818 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by it as manager of TOSCA, a Cayman Island Exempt Company.

 

(2) Based on a Schedule 13D/A filed with the SEC on July 18, 2008 by Third Point LLC (“Third Point”). The filing discloses that as of July 16, 2008, Third Point had shared dispositive and voting power with respect to 10,000,000 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that Third Point beneficially owns the shares by virtue of the authority granted to it by the funds and managed accounts that it manages. The 10 million shares represent 8.70% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2008.

 

(3) Based on Schedule 13G filed with the SEC on April 10, 2008 by Morgan Stanley (“Morgan Stanley”). The filing discloses that as of April 3, 2008, Morgan Stanley had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 6,478,460 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by certain operating units of Morgan Stanley.

 

127


Table of Contents
(4) Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on February 6, 2008 by Dimensional Fund Advisors LP (“Dimensional”). The filing discloses that as of December 31, 2007, Dimensional had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 6,002,951 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by investment companies to which Dimensional serves as investment advisor and certain other commingled group trusts and accounts to which Dimensional serves as investment manager. The filing also specifies that Dimensional disclaims beneficial ownership of the securities reported. The 6,002,951 shares represent 5.25% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of December 31, 2007.

 

(5) Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on January 30, 2008 by State Farm Mutual Automobile Insurance Company (“State Farm”). This amount includes 5,881,918 shares of PNX common stock owned by State Farm as of December 31, 2007 and 52,533 shares of PNX common stock owned by three affiliated investment companies for which a State Farm subsidiary is the investment advisor as of December 31, 2007. The 5,934,451 shares represent 5.19% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of December 31, 2007.

 

(6) Based on the ratio of one share of Company common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock, as announced on December 12, 2008; cash will be distributed in lieu of fractional shares. The Percent of Class of Company Common Stock cannot be calculated at this time due to the impact of the Harris Bankcorp transaction explained below.

Convertible Preferred Stock

All of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock are currently held beneficially and of record by Harris Bankcorp. In connection with the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will be exchanged by Harris Bankcorp to PIM for an equal number of shares of our Series B Preferred Stock, and that PIM will sell an additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock to Harris Bankcorp. As a result of such exchange, all of the outstanding shares of our Series B Preferred Stock will be held beneficially and of record by Harris Bankcorp. The following table sets forth information concerning shares of our Series B Preferred Stock that we expect to be beneficially owned immediately after the distribution date by each person or entity known by us to be the beneficial owner of 5% or more of the outstanding shares of our Series B Preferred Stock. To our knowledge, each person or entity has sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares of Series B Preferred Stock set forth opposite such person’s or entity’s name. Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to the securities. In addition, under SEC rules, a person is deemed to be the beneficial owner of securities which may be acquired by such person upon the exercise of options and warrants or the conversion of convertible securities within 60 days from the date on which beneficial ownership is to be determined.

 

Name

   Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
our Series B
Preferred Stock
Immediately
Prior to the
Distribution
   Percent of
Class of
Series B
Preferred Stock
    Total Percentage of
Voting Power
Immediately Prior
to the Distribution
 

Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

111 W. Monroe Street,

Chicago, IL 60603

   45,000    100 %   23 %

Management Ownership

Common Stock

The following table sets forth the expected beneficial ownership of our common stock calculated as of September 30, 2008, based upon the distribution of one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock (cash will be distributed in lieu of fractional shares) by:

 

   

each executive officer;

 

   

each of our directors; and

 

   

all of our executive officers and directors as a group.

To the extent our directors and executive officers own shares of PNX common stock at the time of the distribution, they will participate in the distribution on the same terms as other holders of shares of PNX common stock.

 

128


Table of Contents

Following the distribution, we will have an aggregate of approximately 5,720,826 million shares of common stock outstanding, based on approximately 114,416,512 million shares of PNX common stock outstanding on December 17, 2008. Following the distribution, we will have approximately 196,638 holders of our common stock, based upon such number of PNX stockholders as of December 17, 2008. The percentage ownership of each beneficial owner of PNX common stock will be the same in the Company after the distribution.

The number of shares beneficially owned by each director or officer is determined according to the rules of the SEC and the information is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. The mailing address for each of the directors and executive officers listed below is c/o Corporate Secretary, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., 100 Pearl St., 9 th Floor, Hartford, CT 06103.

 

Name of

Beneficial Owner

   Shares
Beneficially
Owned(1)(2)
    Options
Exercisable
Within 60
Days(1)(3)
   Restricted
Stock Units(1)(4)
   Total(1)(5)    Percent of
Common
Stock(6)

James R. Baio

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Susan F. Cabrera

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Diane M. Coffey

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Timothy A. Holt

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Edward M. Swan, Jr.

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Mark C. Treanor

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Michael A. Angerthal

   0 (8)   0    0    0    *

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   11,284     53,166    61,840    126,290    *

Nancy G. Curtiss

   1,509     6,000    4,211    11,720    *

J. Steven Neamtz

   0     0    15,081    15,081    *

Francis G. Waltman

   3,766     0    6,539    10,305    *

All directors, director nominees and executive officers as a group (13 persons)

   16,559 (9)   59,166    87,671    163,396    *

 

* Less than 1%

 

(1) All holdings are stated as of September 30, 2008, and are rounded to the nearest whole number.

 

(2) In the case of the executive officers, the figures include share equivalents held in The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Savings and Investment Plan (the “401(k) Plan”). For Mr. Aylward, Ms. Curtiss, and Mr. Waltman, their numbers include 2,611, 1,509, and 3,766, respectively, share equivalents in the PNX 401(K) plan.

 

(3) Reflects the number of shares that could be acquired under options exercisable within 60 days of September 30, 2008.

 

(4) Reflects those RSUs outstanding whose conversion into shares is not contingent upon any performance-based criteria. Officers do not have the power to vote the shares underlying the RSUs. All are not vested.

 

(5) Represents the sum of the total shares beneficially owned, the shares underlying options exercisable within 60 days and the shares into which the RSUs will be converted if the applicable conditions for vesting and issuance are met.

 

(6) Reflects, as a percent of PNX outstanding common stock, the total of the first two columns.

 

(7) The directors will receive a pro-rated initial grant of our common stock equal to 50% of their respective applicable retainers upon the registration of shares of our common stock for the Company’s Omnibus Plan, as set forth in “—Compensation of Directors—Director Compensation.”

 

(8) Mr. Angerthal was hired by the Company on October 6, 2008.

 

(9) Includes 7,887 share equivalents held in the 401(k) Plan.

Convertible Preferred Stock

We expect that none of our executive officers or directors will hold shares of our preferred stock before or after the distribution.

 

129


Table of Contents

OUR RELATIONSHIP WITH PNX AFTER THE SPIN-OFF

We are presently majority-owned by PIM, a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, and the results of operations of entities that are or will be its subsidiaries have been included in PNX’s consolidated financial results. As a part of PNX, in the ordinary course of business, we have received from PNX various services mainly related to information technology support, human resources, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax. Our historical financial statements included in this information statement include allocations by PNX of a portion of its direct costs and overhead related to these services. These cost allocations have been determined on a basis that the Company and PNX consider to be reasonable reflections of the use of these services. PNX allocated to us $20.4 million in 2005, $22.2 million in 2006 and $19.2 million in 2007 of expenses. Through September 30, 2008, PNX allocated to us $12.7 million of expenses. By the end of 2008, we expect to have assumed responsibility for substantially all of these services and their related expenses.

In connection with the spin-off, PNX is distributing its entire equity interest in the Company to PNX stockholders in a transaction that is intended to be a taxable transaction to PNX and its stockholders. The spin-off will be subject to a number of conditions, some of which are described more fully under “The Spin-Off.” After the spin-off, PNX will not have any ownership interest in the Company, and we will be an independent publicly traded company. In addition, after the spin-off, we will not have any ownership interest in PNX, and PNX will be an independent publicly traded company. PNX may, in its sole discretion, change the terms of the spin-off or decide not to complete the spin-off before the distribution date.

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX has entered into the Separation Agreement and several other ancillary agreements to complete the separation of our business from PNX and to distribute our common stock to PNX stockholders. These agreements will govern the relationship between the Company and PNX after the distribution and will also provide for the allocation of employee benefits, taxes and other liabilities and obligations attributable to periods prior to the distribution. The agreements have been prepared before the distribution and reflect agreement between affiliated parties established without arms-length negotiation. We believe, however, that the terms of these agreements will equitably reflect the benefits and costs of our ongoing relationships with PNX. Along with the Separation Agreement, the other ancillary agreements include a:

 

   

Transition Services Agreement;

 

   

Tax Separation Agreement; and

 

   

Employee Matters Agreement.

These agreements governing our future relationships with PNX are summarized below. We may enter into other agreements with PNX prior to or concurrently with the distribution that would relate to other aspects of our relationship with PNX following the spin-off. Following the distribution, we may enter into other commercial agreements with PNX from time to time, the terms of which will be determined at those relevant times.

Copies of the forms of the agreements described below are filed as exhibits to our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part. The summaries of the material agreements are qualified in their entireties by reference to the full text of the agreements. We encourage you to read the full text of these material agreements.

Separation Agreement

The Separation Agreement sets forth the agreement between the Company and PNX with respect to the principal corporate transactions required to effect our separation from PNX; the transfer of certain assets and liabilities required to effect such separation; the distribution of shares of our common stock to PNX stockholders; and other agreements governing the relationship between the Company and PNX following the separation. PNX will consummate the spin-off only if specified conditions are met. For additional information regarding conditions to the distribution, see “Summary—Corporate Information and Structure.”

 

130


Table of Contents

Even if these conditions are satisfied, other events or circumstances could occur that could impact the timing or terms of the spin-off or PNX’s ability or plans to consummate the spin-off. As a result of these factors, the spin-off may not occur and, if it does occur, it may not occur on the terms or in the manner described, or in the timeframe contemplated.

The Contribution; Allocation of Assets and Liabilities; No Representations and Warranties

In connection with the distribution, PNX has contributed or will contribute to us certain assets to be included in our business, as described in this information statement. It will effect this contribution by transferring, or causing its subsidiaries to transfer, certain assets related to the conduct of our business. In addition, PIM will transfer all of our common stock to PNX, and we will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX. After the spin-off, PNX will have no interest in our assets and business and, subject to certain exceptions described below, generally will have no obligation with respect to our liabilities after the distribution. Similarly, after the spin-off we will have no interest in the assets of PNX’s other businesses and generally will have no obligation with respect to the liabilities of PNX’s retained businesses after the distribution.

Except as expressly set forth in the Separation Agreement or in any ancillary agreement, neither we nor PNX will make any representation or warranty as to the assets, businesses or liabilities transferred or assumed as part of the contribution. Furthermore, unless expressly provided to the contrary in any ancillary agreement, all assets will be transferred on an “as is, where is” basis, and the respective transferees will agree to bear the economic and legal risks that any conveyance is insufficient to vest in the transferee good and marketable title free and clear of any security interest and that any necessary consents or approvals are not obtained or that requirements of laws or judgments are not complied with.

The Distribution

Following the satisfaction or waiver of all conditions to the distribution as set forth in the Separation Agreement, PNX will deliver to the distribution agent a certificate or certificates representing all of the outstanding shares of our common stock. PNX will instruct the distribution agent to distribute those shares on the distribution date or as soon thereafter as practicable, so that each PNX stockholder will receive one share of our common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock they own as of the record date of the spin-off. Cash will be distributed in lieu of fractional shares. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form.

Releases and Indemnification

The Separation Agreement generally provides for a full and complete mutual release and discharge as of the date of the spin-off of all liabilities existing or arising from all acts and events occurring or failing to occur or alleged to have occurred or have failed to occur and all conditions existing or alleged to have existed on or before the distribution, between or among PNX or its affiliates, on the one hand, and us or our affiliates, on the other hand, except as expressly set forth in the Separation Agreement. The liabilities released or discharged will include liabilities arising under any contractual agreements or arrangements existing or alleged to exist between or among any such members on or before the distribution, other than the Separation Agreement, the ancillary agreements described below and the other agreements referred to in the Separation Agreement.

Subject to certain exceptions, we agreed to indemnify PNX and its affiliates, and each of their directors, officers and employees, from and against all liabilities relating to, arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

the business, operations, contracts, assets and liabilities of the Company and our affiliates, other than Goodwin, whether arising before or after the spin-off;

 

   

liabilities or obligations associated with our business, as defined in the Separation Agreement, or otherwise assumed by us pursuant to the Separation Agreement, including liabilities associated with litigation related to our business;

 

131


Table of Contents
   

any breach by us of the Separation Agreement or any of the ancillary agreements entered into in connection with the Separation Agreement; or

 

   

any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact contained in this information statement or any amendment or supplement thereto or the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated, except for information for which PNX may agree to indemnify us as described below.

Subject to certain exceptions, PNX agreed to indemnify us and our affiliates, and each of our directors, officers and employees, from and against all liabilities relating to, arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

the business, operations, contracts, assets and liabilities of PNX and its affiliates, other than our business but including Goodwin, whether arising before or after the spin-off;

 

   

liabilities or obligations of PNX or its affiliates, including Goodwin, other than those of an entity forming part of our business or otherwise assumed by us pursuant to the Separation Agreement, including liabilities associated with litigation that is not related to our business;

 

   

any breach by PNX of the Separation Agreement or any of the ancillary agreements entered into in connection with the Separation Agreement; or

 

   

any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact regarding PNX included in “Summary—Our Company,” “Summary—Summary of The Spin-Off” or “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off” above and any information regarding whether the distribution is taxable contained in this information statement.

Non-Solicitation of Employees

Except with the written approval of the other party and subject to certain exceptions provided in the Separation Agreement, we and PNX will agree not to, for a period of 18 months following the separation, directly or indirectly solicit or hire employees of the other party or its subsidiaries.

Non-Competition

Except with the written approval of the Company, PNX agrees that it will not for a period of two years following the separation, sponsor or act as an investment adviser or sub-adviser (or otherwise provide investment advisory services, directly or indirectly) to or in respect of any fund utilizing a substantially similar strategy to the Virtus Multi-Sector Short Term Bond Fund.

Expenses

The Separation Agreement provides that PNX will pay all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the spin-off and the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement, and all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the preparation, execution, delivery and implementation of the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements. PNX will also pay other expenses of the transaction, including the legal, filing, accounting, printing and other expenses incurred in connection with the preparation, printing, and filing of our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, and this information statement.

Litigation Matters

The Separation Agreement provides that we will diligently conduct, at our sole cost and expense, the defense of any actions related to the Company business, that we will notify PNX of any material developments related to such litigation, and that we will agree not to file cross claims against PNX in relation to such actions. PNX will make corresponding agreements with respect to actions that are not related to the Company business. The Company and PNX have agreed to share the cost and expense of certain actions that we cannot currently

 

132


Table of Contents

identify as being related to the Company or PNX businesses, until they can be so classified. Furthermore, the Separation Agreement will require the Company and PNX to cooperate to, among other matters, maintain attorney-client privilege and work product immunity in connection with litigation against us or PNX, as further set forth in the common interest agreement described below.

Amendments and Waivers; Further Assurances

The Separation Agreement provides that no provisions of it or any ancillary agreement will be deemed waived, amended, supplemented or modified by any party unless the waiver, amendment, supplement or modification is in writing and signed by the authorized representative of the party against whom that waiver, amendment, supplement or modification is sought to be enforced.

The Company and PNX will agree to use our respective reasonable efforts to:

 

   

execute and deliver any additional instruments and documents and take any other actions the other party may reasonably request to effectuate the purposes of the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements and their terms; and

 

   

take all actions and do all things reasonably necessary under applicable laws and agreements or otherwise to consummate and make effective the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements.

Dispute Resolution

The Separation Agreement contains provisions that govern, except as otherwise provided in any ancillary agreements, the resolution of disputes, controversies or claims that may arise between the Company and PNX. These provisions contemplate that efforts will be made to resolve disputes, controversies or claims by escalation of the matter to senior management, independent Board committees or other Company or PNX representatives. If those efforts are not successful, the parties may by mutual agreement submit the dispute, controversy or claim to arbitration, subject to the provisions of the Separation Agreement.

Transition Services Agreement

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX has entered into a transition services agreement (the “Transition Services Agreement”) pursuant to which PNX will provide us, among other things, certain administrative and other services on an interim basis following the distribution date, such as information technology support, human resources, facilities, legal and other limited services consistent with past practices. For each of these areas, a transition service schedule summarizes the services to be provided and the responsibilities of the Company and PNX. The cost to both parties for these services will be at fair market value rates.

Tax Separation Agreement

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX has entered into a tax separation agreement (the “Tax Separation Agreement”), which sets forth the responsibilities of the Company and PNX with respect to, among other things, liabilities for federal, state, local and foreign taxes for periods before and including the spin-off, the preparation and filing of tax returns for such periods and disputes with taxing authorities regarding taxes for such periods. PNX will be generally responsible for federal, state, local and foreign income taxes of the Company for periods before and including the spin-off. We will be generally responsible for all other taxes relating to our business. The Company and PNX will each generally be responsible for managing those disputes that relate to the taxes for which each of us is responsible and, under certain circumstances, may jointly control any dispute relating to taxes for which both of us are responsible.

 

133


Table of Contents

Employee Matters Agreement

General

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX has entered into an employee matters agreement (the “Employee Matters Agreement”), which provides for the transition of our employees from PNX’s employee plans and programs to employee plans and programs at the Company. The agreement allocates responsibility for certain employee benefit matters and liabilities after the distribution date. In general, and except as described below, the Company and PNX is responsible for all obligations and liabilities relating to our respective current and former (after the distribution date) employees and their dependents and beneficiaries.

Employee Benefit Plans, Programs and Policies

Under the Employee Matters Agreement, we provide specified health and welfare and retirement benefits for our employees and retirees (employees who retire on or after October 31, 2008) after October 31, 2008, which will generally be similar to the benefits offered by PNX, but revised to reflect benefits offered generally by other asset management companies. As of November 1, 2008 or the distribution date, as applicable, our employees will cease active participation in PNX employee benefit plans and programs and begin active participation in our plans and programs; we will cease to be a participating employer in the employee benefit plans and programs maintained by PNX. We will generally recognize, among other things, our employees’ past service with PNX for purposes of our employee benefit plans, programs and policies to the extent such crediting does not result in a duplication of benefits. Nothing in that agreement will restrict our or PNX’s ability to amend or terminate any of our or PNX’s employee benefit plans.

We established our own 401(k) plan, effective as of November 1, 2008, with similar terms to the PNX 401(k) plan, except that (i) the Company match contribution is not enhanced, (ii) a discretionary Company match contribution provision is included, and (iii) more investment options are available. Our plan covers all currently active Company employees who, as of October 31, 2008, were participants in PNX’s 401(k) plan. The PNX 401(k) plan has transferred to our 401(k) plan the account balances and related assets, including outstanding loan balances and QDROs, of each of these participants. We also established our own non-qualified excess plan, effective as of November 1, 2008, with similar terms to the PNX non-qualified excess plan, except that (i) the Company match contribution is not enhanced, (ii) a discretionary Company match contribution provision is included, and (iii) more investment options are available. Our excess plan covers all currently active Company employees who, as of October 31, 2008, are participants in PNX’s non-qualified excess plan. The appropriate assetized amount has been transferred from a PNX Rabbi trust to a Company Rabbi trust.

Consistent with asset management industry practices, we will not establish a defined benefit pension plan. For purposes of PNX’s defined benefit pension plan, employees of the Company and its affiliates who are participants as of October 31, 2008 will have their benefits under such plan frozen as of December 31, 2008 or the distribution date, if earlier. Those employees of the Company who are participants in the plan as of that date and have non-vested accrued benefits will vest in their accrued benefits on that date. Also, we will not establish a non-qualified defined benefit pension plan. For purposes of PNX’s non-qualified defined benefit pension plans, the benefits attributable to the employees of the Company and its affiliates who are participants as of October 31, 2008 will be frozen as of December 31, 2008 or the distribution date, if earlier, but distributions will not be permitted until the Company employees terminate from the Company and its affiliates.

Effective as of November 1, 2008, we established health and welfare plans, including a flexible benefit plan, for our employees comparable to those maintained by PNX as of that date, but retiree coverages are not provided. Included in the menu of benefits is a broad-based severance plan and an executive severance plan (the executive severance plan will not become effective until the distribution date); for the broad-based plan, we recognize PNX service for purposes of calculating the severance amount. We have credited each of our employees with the amount of accrued but unused vacation time and other time-off benefits that each of our employees had with PNX as of November 1, 2008, and each Company employee’s service with PNX will be recognized for those policies/benefits.

 

134


Table of Contents

Effective as of the distribution date, we will establish annual and long-term incentive plans/programs for our employees with eligibility and other terms substantially comparable to those maintained by PNX. Some of the incentives will be provided through a newly established omnibus incentive and equity plan, which consolidates several coverages that were provided by separate plans for PNX.

Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees

Certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold previously-awarded options to purchase shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award will be converted to options to purchase shares of Company common stock. These Company stock options will be adjusted on the distribution date in a manner intended to preserve the relative economic value of the options based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan. These Company stock options will continue to vest contingent upon the employee’s continued employment by the Company and the employee will continue to have up to ten years from the original PNX grant date to exercise vested options, subject to the terms of the applicable plan and option agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date. The conversion formula for PNX stock options is the closing price of PNX common stock immediately prior to the distribution as reported on the New York Stock Exchange (the “PNX Final Price”) divided by the opening price of Company common stock immediately following the distribution as reported on the Nasdaq Global Market (the “Company Initial Price”) (this equation to be known as the “Company Conversion Ratio”) multiplied by the number of PNX stock options held by a Company employee. The per share option exercise price of each such Company stock option will be determined by dividing the exercise price of the original PNX stock option by the Company Conversion Ratio.

Additionally, certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold outstanding awards of service-vested RSUs payable in shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award will remain outstanding and will be converted to Company awards payable in Company common stock. These Company RSUs will be adjusted in a manner intended to preserve the relative economic value of the RSUs based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan. These Company RSUs will continue to vest based on such employee’s continued employment with the Company, subject to the terms of the applicable plan and award agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date. The conversion formula for PNX service-vested RSUs is the Company Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of PNX service-vested RSUs held by a Company employee.

Finally, certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold outstanding performance RSU awards payable in shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award that is contingent on a PNX performance metric will be pro-rated as of the distribution date based on the number of months between the beginning of the performance period and the distribution date (partial months are counted as whole months) divided by 36 months and such adjusted award will remain outstanding and will, subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, be payable in cash. The conversion formula for pro-rated PNX performance-vested RSUs that are contingent on a PNX performance metric is the PNX Final Price as reported on the New York Stock Exchange divided by the opening price of PNX common stock immediately following the distribution as reported on the New York Stock Exchange (the “PNX Conversion Ratio”), multiplied by the number of pro-rated PNX performance-vested RSUs held by a Company employee. Outstanding awards that are contingent on a Company performance metric will continue to remain outstanding and will, subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, be payable in shares of Company common stock. The conversion formula for PNX performance-vested RSUs that are contingent on a Company performance metric is the Company Conversion Ratio multiplied by the number of PNX performance-vested RSUs held by a Company employee. Each RSU award will be adjusted in a manner intended to preserve the economic value of the RSUs based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the applicable plan, and each RSU award will continue to vest based on such employee’s continued employment by the Company and the satisfaction of applicable performance criteria, subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable plan and award agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date.

 

135


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF OUR CAPITAL STOCK

General

Immediately following the spin-off, we expect that our authorized capital stock will consist of 1 billion shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, and 250 million shares of preferred stock, par value $0.01 per share. The authorized preferred shares will include 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and 45,000 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock that is expected to be sold to the investor immediately prior to the distribution. Based on the approximately 114,416,512 shares of PNX common stock that we expect to be outstanding on the record date, and a distribution ratio of one share of Company common stock for every 20 shares of PNX common stock, we will have approximately 5,720,826 shares of common stock outstanding immediately following the spin-off. The actual number of shares to be distributed will be determined on the record date.

Common Stock

Authorized Shares

We are authorized to issue up to 1,000,000,000 shares of common stock.

Dividends

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

Voting Rights

Each share of common stock will be entitled to one vote in the election of directors and all other matters submitted to stockholder vote. Except as otherwise required by law or provided in any resolution adopted by our Board with respect to any series of preferred stock, the holders of our common stock will possess all voting power. There will be no cumulative voting rights. In general, all matters submitted to a meeting of stockholders, other than as described below, shall be decided by vote of a majority of the shares of the Company’s common stock present in person or represented by proxy at the meeting and entitled to vote on the matter. Directors are elected by a plurality of the shares of the Company’s common stock present in person or represented by proxy at the meeting and entitled to vote on the election of directors.

It is expected that the approval of at least 75% of the shares of the Company’s outstanding common stock entitled to vote will be necessary to approve certain actions, such as amending the provisions of the Company’s bylaws (or at least 66-  2 / 3 % of the shares of the Company’s outstanding common stock entitled to vote with regard to amending the Company’s certificate of incorporation) relating to the plurality voting standard for the election of directors, the number and manner of election and removal of directors, the classified nature of our Board, the manner of filling vacancies thereon or prohibiting any action by the stockholders by written consent, or electing a director to fill a vacancy if the stockholders’ power to do so is expressly conferred by the DGCL. Other amendments to the Company’s bylaws and certificate of incorporation, and certain extraordinary transactions (such as a merger or consolidation involving the Company or a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company), must be approved by a majority of the Company’s outstanding common stock entitled to vote.

Liquidation Rights

If we liquidate, dissolve or wind-up our business, whether voluntarily or not, our common stockholders will share equally in the distribution of all assets remaining after payment to creditors and any Company preferred stockholders.

 

136


Table of Contents

Preemptive Rights

Our common stock will have no preemptive or similar rights.

Preferred Stock

Our certificate of incorporation authorizes our Board, without the approval of our stockholders, to fix the designation, powers, preferences and rights of one or more series of preferred stock, which may be greater than those of our common stock. We believe that the ability of our Board to issue one or more series of preferred stock will provide us with flexibility in structuring possible future financings and acquisitions and in meeting other corporate needs that might arise. The issuance of shares of our preferred stock, or the issuance of rights to purchase shares of preferred stock, could be used to discourage an unsolicited acquisition proposal. See “Anti-Takeover Provisions” below.

Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock

Our Board has authorized the issuance of 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock (the “Series A Preferred Stock”). On October 31, 2008, the Series A Preferred Stock was sold to Harris Bankcorp. Following the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will have been exchanged for an equal number of shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock (the “Series B Preferred Stock”). The terms of our Series A Preferred Stock are set forth in a certificate of designations and are described below.

The Series A Preferred Stock will have similar rights, preferences, privileges, powers and terms as the Series B Preferred Stock, except that the Series A Preferred Stock will not have voting rights other than:

 

   

the right to vote as a separate class to approve any increase or decrease to the number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock outstanding; and

 

   

the right to vote as a single class on certain matters, as described below under “Description of Our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock—Voting Rights.”

For additional information on the exchange of Series A Preferred Stock for Series B Preferred Stock, see “Equity Investment.”

Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock

Following the spin-off, we expect that 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock (together with the Series A Preferred Stock, the “Convertible Preferred Stock”) will have been sold to Harris Bankcorp. The terms of our Series B Preferred Stock are set forth in a certificate of designations and are described below.

Stated Value

Our Convertible Preferred Stock will have a stated value of $1,000.00 per share (the “stated value”).

Rank

With respect to payments of dividends and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, the Convertible Preferred Stock will rank (i) senior to our common stock and to any class or series of stock of the Company that we may issue in the future unless the terms of such stock expressly provides otherwise and (ii) junior to our existing and future indebtedness and liabilities.

 

137


Table of Contents

Dividends

When and if declared by our Board, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock are entitled to receive dividends per share equal to 8.0% per annum of the stated value then in effect, before any dividends are declared, set aside or paid upon any equity securities of the Company that rank junior to the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to payment of dividends or rights upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Company (the “junior stock”). Subject to certain limitations, such dividends may be paid in shares of our Convertible Preferred Stock or in cash at the sole discretion of the Company. In addition, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock are entitled to share in any dividends paid on shares of our common stock pro rata with the holders of our common stock, as if the Convertible Preferred Stock had been converted into shares of common stock immediately prior to the record date for determining the stockholders eligible to receive such dividends.

Dividends payable on our Convertible Preferred Stock will be cumulative and will continue to accumulate daily, whether or not declared and whether or not there are net profits or surplus legally available for the payment of dividends in the applicable fiscal year. Subject to certain exceptions, if the Company fails to pay any dividend required to be paid to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock, no dividends may be declared, set apart for, or paid on any junior stock, and no redemption, purchase, or acquisition of our common stock may be made by the Company, until all required dividends on our Convertible Preferred Stock have been paid in full.

Liquidation Preference

Upon a liquidation, winding up or dissolution (each, a “liquidation”) of the Company, after satisfaction of our creditors and before any distribution or payment is made to holders of any junior stock, each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock will be entitled to receive a per share amount equal to the greater of (i) the stated value then in effect, plus any accumulated but unpaid dividends thereon (whether or not declared) through the date of such liquidation, and (ii) the amount holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock would be entitled to receive immediately prior to such liquidation if their Convertible Preferred Stock were converted into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate (as described below) then in effect immediately prior to such liquidation, plus all declared accumulated but unpaid dividends on our common stock through the date of such liquidation (the greater of (i) and (ii), the “liquidation preference”).

Conversion

Holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock may convert any or all of their shares into shares of our common stock at any time at the conversion rate set out below. In the event that the holders of a majority in liquidation preference of the then outstanding Convertible Preferred Stock approve a mandatory conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock, all of the shares of our Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding will be converted automatically into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate set out below.

The initial conversion rate for each share of Convertible Preferred Stock is 5.11 shares of our common stock per each share of Convertible Preferred Stock. The conversion rate is subject to customary anti-dilution adjustments.

In the event that the closing price of our common stock exceeds 175% of the then applicable conversion price for at least twenty days out of the previous thirty days on which our common stock has traded, we may elect to cause each share of our Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate then in effect. However, holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock may elect to retain their shares of Convertible Preferred Stock and forfeit their right to thereafter participate in any dividends paid on our common stock.

 

138


Table of Contents

Redemption

At any time after the sixth year anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock, we will have the option, on not less than 30 days’ notice to all holders, to redeem all (but not less than all) of the then outstanding shares of Convertible Preferred Stock for cash consideration equal to the liquidation preference thereof plus all accumulated and unpaid dividends and all accrued interest thereon at a rate of LIBOR plus 3% per annum. At the election of the holders of a majority in liquidation preference of the Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding, the Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted into shares of common stock immediately prior to any such redemption by us at the conversion rate then in effect.

At any time after the seventh year anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock will have the option to require us to redeem any or all of the then outstanding shares of their Convertible Preferred Stock for cash consideration equal the liquidation preference thereof plus any accumulated and unpaid dividends and all accrued interest thereon a rate of LIBOR plus 3% per annum.

Voting Rights

Subject to the limitation described below, the holders of shares of Series B Preferred Stock:

 

   

will be entitled to vote with the holders of our common stock on all matters submitted for a vote of holders of common stock other than the election of directors; and

 

   

will be entitled to a number of votes equal to the number of shares of common stock into which each such share of Series B Preferred Stock is then convertible at the time of the related record date.

To the extent the aggregate voting power of the Series B Preferred Stock exceeds 24.9% of the total voting power of our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis), the number of Series B Preferred Shares that represents such excess voting power will become non-voting, except as required under applicable law, and will not be considered “outstanding” for purposes of any vote or consent. However, if at any time (i) the holders of our Series B Preferred Stock hold securities representing more than 33-1/3% of our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis) or (ii) a third party acquires beneficial ownership of 25% or more of either our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis) or the total voting power of our capital stock, the limitation on the voting power of our Series B Preferred Stock described above will no longer operate and our Series B Preferred Stock will become fully voting.

For as long as 66-2/3% of the Convertible Preferred Stock is outstanding, the holders of our Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as applicable, will generally be entitled to vote as a single class with respect to:

 

   

the amendment, alteration or repeal of any of the rights, preferences, privileges or powers of, or the restrictions provided for the benefit of, the holders of equity securities of the Company that is adverse to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock;

 

   

the amendment, alteration or repeal of any provision of our bylaws or amended and restated certificate of incorporation in a manner that is adverse to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock; or

 

   

the creation, authorization or issuance of securities having any preference or priority in relation to, or ranking pari passu with, the Convertible Preferred Stock, as to dividends, voting or liquidation.

In addition, so long as at least 66-2/3% of the aggregate shares of Series B Preferred Stock sold immediately prior to the spin-off remain outstanding, the following actions by the Company will require approval of the holders of 66-2/3% of the issued and outstanding Series B Preferred Stock:

 

   

any merger, consolidation, acquisition, business combination, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or its subsidiaries, or any similar transaction or pledge of assets (other than any bona fide financing arrangement entered in the ordinary course of business and which is on prevailing

 

139


Table of Contents
 

market terms and conditions) in which securities or assets representing more than 50% of the Company’s consolidated net revenue in the fiscal year most recently ended would be acquired or pledged, directly or indirectly, by or to a person or group that does not control the Company immediately prior to the execution of any agreement in respect of such transaction, if such transaction is completed during the three years following the issuance of the Series B Preferred Stock;

 

   

any issuance of equity securities of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries (including options to acquire such equity securities) except where such issuance is (i) pursuant to any employee incentive plan, (ii) pursuant to any merger, consolidation, acquisition or business combination (subject to the approval of holders of our Series B Preferred Stock as described above) or (iii) at a price per share not less than the market price of such equity security and in which no person or group acquires 25% or more of the outstanding, fully diluted equity of the Company;

 

   

commencement of any voluntary proceeding in respect of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries seeking liquidation, reorganization, dissolution or bankruptcy;

 

   

any redemption, repurchase or other acquisition of outstanding common stock of the Company by the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries, other than where such transaction is in connection with incentive arrangements;

 

   

any change in the number of members on our Board; and

 

   

except as otherwise agreed by Harris Bankcorp, any usage of the Harris Bankcorp name, the name of any affiliate of Harris Bankcorp or any related brand name.

Listing

The shares of our common stock have been approved for listing on the Nasdaq Global Market under the symbol “VRTS.”

Transfer Agent and Registrar

After the distribution, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services LLC.

Anti-Takeover Provisions

Certificate of Incorporation; Bylaws

Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws contain provisions that could make more difficult the acquisition of the Company by means of a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise. These provisions are summarized below.

Classes of Preferred Stock. Under our certificate of incorporation, our Board has the full authority permitted by Delaware law to determine the voting rights, if any, and designations, preferences, limitations and special rights of any class or any series of any class of the preferred stock, which may be greater than those of our common stock. The effects of the issuance of a new series or class of preferred stock might include, among other things, restricting dividends on our common stock, diluting the voting power of our common stock, impairing the liquidation rights of our common stock, or delaying or preventing a change in control of the Company.

Removal of Directors; Filling Vacancies. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that directors may be removed only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all the outstanding shares of stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. Additionally, subject to the rights of the holders of preferred stock, only our Board will be authorized to fix the number of directors and to fill any vacancies on our Board. These provisions could make it more difficult for a potential acquirer to gain control of our Board.

 

140


Table of Contents

Stockholder Action. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that stockholder action can be taken only at an annual or special meeting of stockholders and may not be taken by written consent in lieu of a meeting. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that special meetings of stockholders can be called only by our Chairman of the Board or pursuant to a resolution adopted by our Board. Stockholders are not permitted to call a special meeting or to require that the Board call a special meeting of stockholders.

Advance Notice Procedures. Our bylaws establish an advance notice procedure for stockholders to make nominations of candidates for election as directors, or bring other business before an annual or special meeting of our stockholders. This notice procedure provides that only persons who are nominated by, or at the direction of our Board, the Chairman of the Board, or by a stockholder who has given timely written notice to the secretary of the Company prior to the meeting at which directors are to be elected, will be eligible for election as directors. This procedure also requires that, in order to raise matters at an annual or special meeting, those matters be raised before the meeting pursuant to the notice of meeting we deliver or by, or at the direction of, our chairman or by a stockholder who is entitled to vote at the meeting and who has given timely written notice to the secretary of the Company of his intention to raise those matters at the annual meeting. If our chairman determines that a person was not nominated, or other business was not brought before the meeting, in accordance with the notice procedure, that person will not be eligible for election as a director, or that business will not be conducted at the meeting.

Classified Board of Directors. Our certificate of incorporation provides for our Board to be divided into three classes of directors, as nearly equal in number as possible, serving staggered terms. Approximately one-third of our Board will be elected each year. Under Section 141 of the DGCL, directors serving on a classified Board can only be removed for cause. We expect that Class I directors will have an initial term expiring in 2009, Class II directors will have an initial term expiring in 2010 and Class III directors will have an initial term expiring in 2011. After the distribution, we expect our Board will consist of nine directors. After the initial term of each class, our directors will serve three-year terms. At each annual meeting of stockholders, a class of directors will be elected for a three-year term to succeed the directors of the same class whose terms are then expiring.

The provision for a classified board could prevent a party that acquires control of a majority of the outstanding voting stock from obtaining control of our Board until the second annual stockholders meeting following the date the acquiror obtains the controlling stock interest. The classified board provision could have the effect of discouraging a potential acquiror from making a tender offer for our shares or otherwise attempting to obtain control of us and could increase the likelihood that our incumbent directors will retain their positions. We believe that a classified board will help to assure the continuity and stability of our Board and our business strategies and policies as determined by our Board, because a majority of the directors at any given time will have prior experience on our Board. The classified board provision should also help to ensure that our Board, if confronted with an unsolicited proposal from a third party that has acquired a block of our voting stock, will have sufficient time to review the proposal and appropriate alternatives and to seek the best available result for all stockholders.

Amendments. Our certificate of incorporation provides that the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66-  2 / 3 % of the voting power of the outstanding shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class, is required to amend the provisions of our certificate of incorporation relating to the prohibition of stockholder action without a meeting, the number, election and term of our directors, the classified board and the removal of directors. Our certificate of incorporation further provides that our bylaws may be amended by our Board or by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 75% of the outstanding shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class.

Rights Agreement

Our Board expects to adopt a rights agreement. Under the rights agreement, we expect to issue one preferred share purchase right for each outstanding share of common stock. A description of the terms of the rights is set forth in a rights agreement between the Company and the designated rights agent. The following description is intended as a summary of the expected rights agreement, which will be filed in its entirety as an exhibit to our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part.

 

141


Table of Contents

Purchase Price. Once the rights become exercisable, each right will entitle the registered holder to purchase from us one one-thousandth of a share of our Series C Junior Participating Preferred Stock, or preferred shares, par value $0.01 per share, at a price to be determined by the Board prior to entering into the rights agreement.

Flip-In. In the event that any person or group of affiliated or associated persons (other than Bank of Montreal or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, each holder of a right, other than rights beneficially owned by the acquiring person (which will thereafter be void), will thereafter have the right to receive upon exercise that number of shares of our common stock having a market value of two times the exercise price of the right.

Flip-Over. If we are acquired in a merger or other business combination transaction or 50% or more of our combined assets or earning power are sold after a person or group (other than Bank of Montreal or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, each holder of a right (other than rights beneficially owned by the acquiring person, which will be void) will thereafter have the right to receive that number of shares of common stock of the acquiring company which at the time of such transaction will have a market value of two times the exercise price of the right.

Distribution Date. The distribution date is the earlier of: (1) 10 days following a public announcement that a person or group of affiliated or associated persons have acquired beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock; or (2) 10 business days (or such later date as may be determined by action of our Board prior to such time as any person or group of affiliated persons acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock) following the commencement of, or announcement of an intention to make, a tender offer or exchange offer the consummation of which would result in the beneficial ownership by a person or group of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock.

Transfer and Detachment. Until the distribution date, the rights will be evidenced by book entry in our direct registration system. Until the distribution date (or earlier redemption or expiration of the rights), the rights will be transferred with and only with the common stock, and transfer of those shares will also constitute transfer of the rights.

Exercisability. The rights are not exercisable until the distribution date. The rights will expire at the earliest of (1) June 19, 2011, unless that date is extended, (2) the time at which we redeem the rights, as described below, or (3) the time at which we exchange the rights, as described below.

Adjustments. The purchase price payable, and the number of preferred shares or other securities or property issuable, upon exercise of the rights are subject to adjustment from time to time to prevent dilution in the event of stock dividends, stock splits, reclassifications, or certain distributions with respect to preferred shares. The number of outstanding rights and the number of one one-thousandths of a preferred share issuable upon exercise of each right are also subject to adjustment if, prior to the distribution date, there is a stock split of our common stock or a stock dividend on our common stock payable in common stock or subdivisions, consolidations or combinations of our common stock. With certain exceptions, no adjustment in the purchase price will be required until cumulative adjustments require an adjustment of at least 1% in the purchase price.

Preferred Shares. Preferred shares purchasable upon exercise of the rights will not be redeemable. Each preferred share will be entitled to a minimum preferential quarterly dividend payment of the greater of $1.00 per share and an amount equal to 1000 times the dividend declared per share of common stock. In the event of liquidation, the holders of the preferred shares will be entitled to a minimum preferential liquidation payment of $1,000 per share but will be entitled to an aggregate payment of 1,000 times the payment made per share of common stock. Each preferred share will have 1,000 votes, voting together with the common stock. Finally, in the event of any merger, consolidation or other transaction in which shares of our common stock are exchanged, each preferred share will be entitled to receive 1,000 times the amount received per share of common stock. These rights are protected by customary anti-dilution provisions.

 

142


Table of Contents

The value of the one one-thousandth interest in a preferred share purchasable upon exercise of each right should, because of the nature of the preferred shares’ dividend, liquidation and voting rights, approximate the value of one share of our common stock.

Exchange. At any time after any person or group (other than Bank of Montreal or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, and prior to the acquisition by such person or group of beneficial ownership of 50% or more of our outstanding common stock, our Board may exchange the rights (other than rights owned by the acquiring person, which will have become void), in whole or in part, at an exchange ratio of one share of our common stock, or one one-thousandth of a preferred share (subject to adjustment).

Redemption. At any time prior to any person or group (other than Bank of Montreal or its controlled affiliates) acquiring beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, our Board may redeem the rights in whole, but not in part, at a price of $0.01 per right. The redemption of the rights may be made effective at such time on such basis with such conditions as our Board in its sole discretion may establish. Immediately upon any redemption of the rights, the right to exercise the rights will terminate and the only right of the holders of rights will be to receive the redemption price.

Amendments. The terms of the rights may be amended by our Board without the consent of the holders of the rights, except that the Board may not reduce or cancel the redemption price and from and after such time as any person or group of affiliated or associated persons (other than Bank of Montreal or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, no such amendment may adversely affect the interests of the holders of the rights.

Rights of Holders. Until a right is exercised or exchanged, the holder thereof, as such, will have no rights as a stockholder of the Company, including, without limitation, the right to vote or to receive dividends.

Anti-Takeover Effects. The rights have certain anti-takeover effects. If the rights become exercisable, the rights will cause substantial dilution to a person or group that attempts to acquire us on terms not approved by our Board, except pursuant to any offer conditioned on a substantial number of rights being acquired. The rights should not interfere with any merger or other business combination approved by our Board since the rights may be redeemed by us at a nominal price prior to the time that a person or group has acquired beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our common stock. Thus, the rights are intended to encourage persons who may seek to acquire control of us to initiate such an acquisition through negotiations with our Board. However, the effect of the rights may be to discourage a third party from making a partial tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain a substantial equity position in our equity securities or seeking to obtain control of us. To the extent any potential acquirors are deterred by the rights, the rights may have the effect of preserving incumbent management in office.

Delaware Law

We are also subject to the provisions of Delaware law described below regarding business combinations with interested stockholders.

Section 203 of the DGCL applies to a broad range of business combinations between a Delaware corporation and an interested stockholder. The Delaware law definition of “business combination” includes mergers, sales of assets, issuances of voting stock and certain other transactions. An “interested stockholder” is defined as any person who owns, directly or indirectly, 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of a corporation.

 

143


Table of Contents

Section 203 of the DGCL prohibits a corporation from engaging in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date on which the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination before the stockholder became an interested stockholder, or the board of directors approved the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

   

upon completion of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, such stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock outstanding when the transaction began other than shares held by directors who are also officers and other than shares held by certain employee stock plans; or

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination after the stockholder became an interested stockholder and the business combination was approved at a meeting by at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock not owned by such stockholder.

These limitations on business combinations with interested stockholders do not apply to a corporation that does not have a class of stock listed on a national securities exchange, authorized for quotation on an interdealer quotation system of a registered national securities association or held of record by more than 2,000 stockholders.

Our Board has expressly approved the equity investment by Harris Bankcorp prior to it becoming an interested stockholder of the Company under Section 203 of the DGCL.

 

144


Table of Contents

EQUITY INVESTMENT

The following is a summary of the material terms and provisions of the investment agreement (defined below). All references to the investment agreement are to the investment agreement, as amended or supplemented from time to time. The following summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the complete text of the investment agreement. The full text of the investment agreement is included in this Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, and is incorporated herein by reference. We encourage you to read the entire investment agreement.

Equity Investment

Pursuant to an Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among the Company, PIM, Harris Bankcorp and PNX (the “investment agreement”), our Board authorized the sale of 9,783 shares of our Series A Preferred Stock to Harris Bankcorp (the “investor”). On October 31, 2008, PIM contributed all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01, of Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd., which was renamed Virtus Partners, Inc., to the Company (the “contribution”) in exchange for all of the common stock and Convertible Preferred Stock of the Company and (ii) after the contribution, PIM sold to the investor all of the Series A Preferred Stock owned by it for a nominal amount. In connection with the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will be exchanged by the investor to PIM for an equal number of shares of our Series B Preferred Stock, and that PIM will sell an additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million. Following the conversion and sale described above, we expect that the investor will hold an aggregate total of 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock immediately prior to the spin-off. Based on the formula set forth under “Description of our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Voting Participating Convertible Preferred Stock—Conversion,” the Series B Preferred Stock is expected to be initially convertible into approximately 23% of our fully diluted common stock. As a result of the equity investment by the investor in the Company, the spin-off will be treated as a taxable transaction.

For additional information on the terms of the Series B Preferred Stock, see “Description of Our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Convertible Preferred Stock.”

Board Seat

The investor shall have the right to nominate one (1) director to our board of directors. Additionally, so long as at least 66-2/3% of the Series B Preferred Stock initially sold to the investor is outstanding, the holders of a majority of the then outstanding shares of Series B Preferred Stock will have the right to elect one (1) director. Upon conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock into shares of common stock, the holders of such converted stock will have contractual rights to require the Company to include on our recommended slate of directors a proportionate number (relative to the holders’ as-converted ownership of common stock) of investor designees, subject to our Board’s fiduciary duties.

Additional Financing Right

For so long as the investor or any of its affiliates holds at least 10% of our outstanding common stock (including shares issuable on the conversion of our Series B Preferred Stock) and subject to receipt of the approval by the board of directors and shareholders of our funds, if at any time prior to the 24 month anniversary of the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock we determine to raise equity financing for the purpose of financing our business (other than shares issued pursuant to any employee benefit plan, in connection with the acquisition of another company or pursuant to any stock split, stock dividend or recapitalization by the Company), we must offer the investor the initial opportunity to provide such financing up to a principal amount of $25 million of newly issued preferred stock. Such newly issued preferred stock shall have the same terms as the Series B Preferred Stock, except with respect to the conversion price. The conversion price for such new preferred stock

 

145


Table of Contents

will be the lower of (i) the then applicable conversion price of the Series B Preferred Stock and (ii) the current per share volume-weighted average price of our common stock over the ten trading days immediately prior to the consummation of this additional financing right.

In the event that the investor exercises this additional financing right and beneficially owns in excess of 33% of our outstanding common stock (including shares issuable on the conversion of our Series B Preferred Stock) after giving effect to such additional financing right, the investor will have the right to appoint one (1) additional member to our Board, subject to regulatory considerations.

If the consummation of such additional financing by the investor would result in an “assignment” of the investment advisory contracts of our clients (within the meaning of the Investment Company Act and the Advisers Act), then the Company and the investor will structure the new securities to be issued (including, without limitation, by altering voting rights granted to the investor) to ensure that such an assignment will not occur.

Investor Put Right; Company Call Option

Investor Put Right

At any time on or after the third anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock to the investor, the investor will have the right (the “put right”) to require the Company to repurchase all of the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the investor (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock) for a purchase price (the “put price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the intended date of settlement of the put right). The put price may be payable by the Company in immediately available funds or, at the election of the Company, may be paid in the form of two senior promissory notes each having an aggregate principal amount equal to one-half (1/2) of the put price of the Company, paying interest at LIBOR plus 3% per annum, the first maturing on the one (1) year anniversary of the put closing date and the second maturing on the two (2) year anniversary of the put closing date.

Company Call Option

The Company will have the option (the “call option”) at any time after the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock to the investor and prior to any exercise of the put right by the investor, to repurchase from the investor all of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock) then held by the investor, for a purchase price (the “call price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the put closing date).

Termination of Put Right and Call Option

The put right and the call option will expire if at the time of the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock to the investor is consummated or at anytime afterwards, the average closing price on the applicable stock exchange for the common stock of the Company during any five (5) consecutive trading day period exceeds the conversion price per share of the Convertible Preferred Stock. The put right and the call option will also expire if the investor converts any or all of the Series A Preferred Stock received by it into common stock of the Company (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock), but in the event that the investor converts some but not all of Series A Preferred Stock or such Series B Preferred Stock, as the case may be, then the put right and the call option will expire only with respect to such converted shares and the termination provisions will apply to the remaining shares of Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as the case may be.

 

146


Table of Contents

Restrictions on Transfer

Subject to the exceptions described below, the investor has agreed that it will not transfer or dispose of any of its Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) until the 30 month anniversary of the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor. Following the expiration of this period, except for sales pursuant to Rule 144 under the Securities Act or a registered offering, any such sale or disposition of the Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) will be subject to regulatory constraints and may not be made to certain asset management companies that compete with the Company.

Notwithstanding the restriction on transfer described above, the investor may at all times transfer or dispose of any or all of its Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) if any such transfer is:

 

   

to an affiliate entity under common control with the investor’s ultimate parent entity, if the transferee agrees to be bound by the investor’s obligations under the investment agreement;

 

   

pursuant to a merger, tender offer or exchange offer or other business combination, acquisition of assets or similar transaction or change of control involving the Company or any of our subsidiaries;

 

   

commenced after the commencement of bankruptcy or insolvency proceedings of the Company;

 

   

made in connection with a pledge to, and any foreclosure of such pledge and the subsequent sale of the securities to, a financial institution to secure debt financing; or

 

   

made with the prior written consent of the Company.

Standstill

Subject to the exceptions described below, the investor has agreed that, until the three year anniversary of the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor, the investor and its affiliates will not acquire or seek to acquire beneficial ownership of our common stock, or any other equity securities of the Company, without the prior approval of the Company if such acquisition would result in the investor and its affiliates having beneficial ownership of more than 23.0% of the outstanding shares of our common stock (calculated on an as-converted basis). This general restriction will not apply, however, to any acquisition that is made:

 

   

pursuant to the investor’s additional financing right, as described above;

 

   

pursuant to any other rights or entitlements afforded the investor by the investment agreement, our certificate of incorporation or the terms of our Convertible Preferred Stock;

 

   

in the open market and would not result in the investor having beneficial ownership of more than 24.9% of the outstanding shares of our common stock (calculated on a fully diluted basis) at the time of the acquisition; or

 

   

in the open market and only to maintain the investor’s percentage of beneficial ownership in the Company following the issuance of our common stock pursuant to any of our employee benefit plans or other equity based compensation plans, but only if the investor has not previously declined to exercise its additional financing right.

The investor has agreed to support the slate of directors recommended by our Board at each meeting of the Company’s stockholders for the election of directors and has further agreed that, for the period described above, it will not:

 

   

enter into or agree, offer, propose or seek or otherwise be involved in any acquisition transaction, merger or other business combination relating to all or part of the Company or its subsidiaries, assets or business;

 

   

make, or in any way participate in, any “solicitation” of “proxies” (as such terms are defined under Regulation 14A under the Exchange Act, disregarding clause (iv) of Rule 14a-1(1)(2) and including

 

147


Table of Contents
 

any otherwise exempt solicitation pursuant to Rule 14a-2(b)) to vote, or seek to advise or influence any person or entity with respect to the voting of, any voting securities of the Company or any of its subsidiaries;

 

   

call or seek to call a meeting of the stockholders of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or initiate any stockholder proposal for action by stockholders of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, form, join or in any way participate in a “group” (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder) with respect to any voting securities of the Company, or seek, propose or otherwise act alone or in concert with others, to influence or control the Company’s management, our Board or policies of the Company or any of its subsidiaries; or

 

   

bring any action that would contest the validity, or seek any amendment or waiver of, any of the standstill restrictions;

provided, however, that none of these restrictions will otherwise prevent the investor or any of its affiliates from voting its securities in any manner other than with respect to voting in favor of the slate of directors recommended by our Board as referenced above, and none of these restrictions will apply to the investor’s board representatives solely in their capacity as directors of the Company.

The foregoing standstill restrictions will cease to operate (i) if it is publicly disclosed that the Company is pursuing a sale of a controlling interest in its business, (ii) if it is publicly disclosed that another person or group has offered to acquire an interest in the Company, or assets representing, at least 50% of the Company’s market capitalization and the Company has approved or recommended that its stockholders approve such transaction, or the Company has entered into an agreement providing for such transaction, (iii) if a party unaffiliated with the investor acquires control of our Board, (iv) with respect to any acquisition by the investor of any assets or securities of the Company pursuant to bankruptcy proceedings, (v) with respect to any sale or exchange by the investor of securities in a tender or exchange offer initiated by a person other than the investor or its affiliates or (vi) with respect to any actions taken by the investor or its affiliates required by the investment agreement or necessary to consummate the transactions contemplated therein.

Interim Operations

The Company and PNX have agreed that from the date of the investment agreement until the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock the Company shall operate in the ordinary course consistent with past practice.

Indemnification

The Company, PNX and PIM have agreed jointly and severally to indemnify the investor, its affiliates and each of their respective directors, officers, members, partners and employees, and each person who controls the investor, for aggregate losses in excess of $250,000 (such indemnification to extend only for the amount in excess of $250,000, and excluding de minimis losses of less than $10,000 per loss) arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

any inaccuracy in or breach of the representations, warranties, agreements or covenants made by the Company, PNX or PIM in the investment agreement;

 

   

certain losses for which the Company is entitled to indemnification pursuant to certain ancillary agreements between the Company and PNX without duplication for any loss that the Company is made whole; and

 

   

certain litigation matters.

Our obligation to indemnify the parties listed above for losses arising from breaches of representations and warranties is limited to a maximum of $35 million.

The investor has agreed to indemnify the Company, its affiliates and each of their respective directors and officers, and each person who controls the Company for losses arising out of or resulting from any inaccuracy in

 

148


Table of Contents

or breach of the representations, warranties, agreements or covenants made by the investor in the investment agreement. The investor’s obligation to indemnify such parties for losses arising from breaches of representations and warranties is limited to a maximum of $35 million.

The Company’s representations and warranties generally survive for a period of eighteen (18) months from the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor except for certain fundamental representations and warranties relating to the Company’s organization, capital structure and the authorization and enforceability of the investment agreement, which survive indefinitely.

Other Matters

We have agreed to file a shelf registration statement for the registration of any shares of common stock issuable upon conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock after the transfer restriction period described above.

Conditions of the Investment

The consummation of the investment will be contingent upon the satisfaction of certain conditions, including the following:

 

   

all conditions to the distribution, as set forth in the Separation Agreement, shall have been satisfied;

 

   

our working capital shall be in excess of $28 million;

 

   

any intercompany debt owed by the Company to PNX or any of its Affiliates immediately after the distribution, together with any such intercompany debt that shall have been paid off by the Company immediately prior to or in connection with the distribution, will not exceed $33 million; and

 

   

since the date of the investment agreement, there have been no material adverse changes in our business or operations.

Termination Rights

The investment agreement between the Company and the investor generally may be terminated as follows:

 

   

if the transactions contemplated in the investment agreement are not completed on or prior to January 31, 2009 by either the Company or the investor, but only with respect to the sale of the additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock;

 

   

if any governmental authority shall have issued a nonappealable final order, decree or ruling or taken any other action having the effect of permanently restraining, enjoining or otherwise prohibiting the transactions contemplated in the investment agreement; or

 

   

by mutual written agreement of the Company and the investor.

 

149


Table of Contents

INDEMNIFICATION AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

Reference is made to Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL which enables a corporation in its original certificates of incorporation or an amendment thereto to eliminate or limit the personal liability of a director for violations of the director’s fiduciary duty, except (i) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) for liability of directors for unlawful payment of dividends or unlawful stock purchase or redemptions pursuant to Section 174 of the DGCL, or (iv) for any transaction from which a director derived an improper personal benefit.

Reference also is made to Section 145 of the DGCL, which provides that a corporation may indemnify any persons, including officers and directors, who are, or are threatened to be made, parties to any threatened, pending or completed legal action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of such corporation), by reason of the fact that such person was an officer, director, employee or agent of such corporation or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation or enterprise. The indemnity may include expenses, including attorney’s fees, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, provided such officer, director, employee or agent acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the corporation’s best interest and, for criminal proceedings, had no reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was unlawful. A Delaware corporation may indemnify officers and directors in an action by or in the right of the corporation under the same conditions, except that no indemnification is permitted without judicial approval if the officer or director is adjudged to be liable to the corporation. Where an officer or director is successful on the merits or otherwise in the defense of any action referred to above, the corporation must indemnify him against the expenses that such officer or director actually and reasonably incurred.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will provide for the mandatory indemnification of our directors and officers and the discretionary indemnification of our employees and other agents, to the maximum extent permitted by the DGCL. As permitted by sections 102 and 145 of the DGCL, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will eliminate director personal liability for monetary damages to the Company and our stockholders arising from a breach of director fiduciary duty, other than for a breach of director duty of loyalty or for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, and except as otherwise provided under the DGCL.

 

150


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF INDEBTEDNESS

We may enter into one or more credit facilities, including a revolving credit facility, in order to provide for our working capital requirements, to support letters of credit and for other general corporate requirements, including the financing of acquisitions.

For example, we currently intend to issue $20 million of notes payable to PNX, the proceeds of which will be used to pay down the existing $33.0 million related party note. The Company currently intends to obtain third-party financing on or after the distribution date to repay such notes payable. See Note 9 and Note 15 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for additional information regarding our notes payable and related party payables to PNX.

We also currently intend to obtain a revolving credit facility. In general, the terms of any new credit facilities we obtain may contain certain customary events of default which generally give the banks the right to accelerate payments of outstanding debt, including without limitation:

 

   

failure to maintain required covenant ratios;

 

   

failure to make a payment of principal, interest or fees within a grace period; and

 

   

default, beyond any applicable grace period, on any of our aggregate indebtedness exceeding a certain amount.

The credit facilities may also contain certain customary financial covenants limiting our indebtedness (maximum leverage ratios) and requiring minimum EBITDA coverage of interest expense (minimum interest coverage ratios), as well as limitations on additional debt, dividends and asset sales.

On December 11, 2008, the Company signed a commitment letter with a commercial bank to act as the lead arranger in a $50.0 million senior secured revolving credit facility. Closing of the facility is subject to a standard due diligence process, executing a credit agreement, identifying additional lenders to participate in the facility, no adverse changes in the market and other closing conditions. We expect the closing of the facility to occur on or after the distribution date. In light of the continued challenges in the credit markets there can be no assurances that the Company will be able to close this transaction. If we are unable to replace the existing debt obligation by the distribution date, we will attempt to renegotiate the terms of the Phoenix Life debt on a third-party, arm’s- length basis.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The consolidated financial statements of the Company as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 included in this information statement have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein.

 

151


Table of Contents

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

The Company has filed with the SEC a Form 10 with respect to the shares of our common stock to be received by PNX stockholders in the spin-off. This information statement does not contain all of the information set forth in the Form 10 and the exhibits to the Form 10. For further information with respect to us and the shares of our common stock, reference is hereby made to the Form 10, including its exhibits. Statements made in this information statement relating to the contents of any contract, agreement or other documents are not necessarily complete and you should refer to the exhibits attached to the Form 10 for copies of the actual contract, agreement or other document, with each such statement being qualified in all respects by reference to the document to which it refers. You may review a copy of the Form 10, including its exhibits, at the SEC’s public reference room, located at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549. You may obtain copies of all or any part of these materials from the SEC upon the payment of certain fees prescribed by the SEC. You may obtain further information on the operation of the public reference room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, copies of the Form 10 and related documents may be obtained through the SEC Internet address at http://www.sec.gov.

As a result of the spin-off, we will become subject to the information and reporting requirements of the Exchange Act and, in accordance with the Exchange Act, will file reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. After the spin-off, these reports, proxy statements and other information may be inspected and copied at the public reference facilities of the SEC listed above. You also will be able to obtain copies of this material from the public reference facilities of the SEC as described above, or inspect them without charge at the SEC’s web site.

In addition, we intend to furnish holders of our common stock with annual reports containing consolidated financial statements audited by an independent accounting firm.

 

152


Table of Contents

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT S

 

       Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   F-2

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2007 and 2006

   F-3

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-4

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity for the Years Ended December  31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-5

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-6

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

   F-7

Unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-30

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-31

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-32

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-33

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Unaudited)

   F-34

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Stockholder of

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.:

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholder’s equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2006, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

June 20, 2008

Hartford, CT

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

     December 31,  
             2007                     2006          
($ in thousands, except share data)             

Assets

  

Current Assets

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 36,815     $ 33,862  

Trading securities, at market value

     12,743       12,910  

Available-for-sale securities, at market value

     1,621       1,588  

Accounts receivable

     7,420       6,521  

Receivables from related parties

     22,276       25,357  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     2,252       2,001  
                

Total current assets

     83,127       82,239  

Deferred commissions

     2,581       1,835  

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements, net

     2,232       3,336  

Intangible assets, net

     208,176       237,746  

Goodwill

     454,369       454,369  

Long-term investments and other assets

     1,678       1,527  
                

Total assets

   $ 752,163     $ 781,052  
                

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

    

Current Liabilities

    

Accrued compensation and benefits

   $ 34,115     $ 35,258  

Accounts payable

     3,667       5,067  

Payables to related parties

     11,295       12,185  

Securities sold short, at fair value

     854       —    

Income taxes payable

     12,028       9  

Other accrued liabilities

     5,471       9,352  

Broker-dealer payable

     6,908       9,090  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

     12,000       69,243  
                

Total current liabilities

     86,338       140,204  

Deferred taxes, net

     9,114       16,381  

Notes payable to related parties

     30,019       367,019  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

     1,765       3,967  
                

Total liabilities

     127,236       527,571  
                

Contingent Liabilities (Note 10)

    

Stockholder’s Equity

    

Common stock, $.01 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, and 10,000 shares issued and outstanding

     —         —    

Additional paid-in capital

     962,546       576,646  

Accumulated deficit

     (337,573 )     (323,168 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

     (46 )     3  
                

Total stockholder’s equity

     624,927       253,481  
                

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

   $ 752,163     $ 781,052  
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands, except per share data)                   

Revenues

      

Investment management fees

   $ 158,998     $ 163,951     $ 191,500  

Distribution and service fees

     36,467       29,805       25,624  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     23,354       19,802       16,189  

Other income and fees

     7,398       5,078       4,125  
                        

Total revenues

     226,217       218,636       237,438  
                        

Operating Expenses

      

Employment expenses

     94,849       97,730       110,384  

Distribution and administration expenses

     50,089       41,315       35,829  

Other operating expenses

     44,438       44,309       51,724  

Restructuring and severance

     —         13,634       12,494  

Intangible asset impairment

     301       32,471       11,099  

Depreciation and other amortization

     1,095       1,057       1,686  

Amortization of intangible assets

     30,097       32,007       33,260  
                        

Total operating expenses

     220,869       262,523       256,476  
                        

Operating Income (Loss)

     5,348       (43,887 )     (19,038 )
                        

Income to Minority Interest

     —         —         (6,682 )

Other Income (Expense)

      

Unrealized (depreciation) appreciation on trading securities

     (2,569 )     745       (1,216 )

Other income

     2,227       714       1,341  
                        

Total other income (expense), net

     (342 )     1,459       125  
                        

Interest (Expense) Income

      

Interest expense

     (26,739 )     (33,433 )     (28,723 )

Interest income

     1,633       1,467       1,606  
                        

Total interest expense, net

     (25,106 )     (31,966 )     (27,117 )
                        

Loss Before Income Taxes

     (20,100 )     (74,394 )     (52,712 )

Income tax expense (benefit)

     (5,950 )     (26,841 )     (19,599 )
                        

Net Loss

   $ (14,150 )   $ (47,553 )   $ (33,113 )
                        

Weighted average shares outstanding

     10,000       10,000       10,000  
                        

Earnings per share

   $ (1,415 )   $ (4,755 )   $ (3,311 )
                        

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity

 

     For the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005  
     Common Stock
and Additional
Paid-In Capital
   Accumulated
Deficit
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  
($ in thousands)                        

Balances at December 31, 2004

   $ 468,646    $ (242,502 )   $ 107     $ 226,251  
                               

Net loss

     —        (33,113 )     —         (33,113 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (119 )     (119 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (33,232 )

Contribution from parent

     34,000      —         —         34,000  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2005

     502,646      (275,615 )     (12 )     227,019  
                               

Net loss

     —        (47,553 )     —         (47,553 )
         

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized appreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         15       15  
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (47,538 )

Contribution from parent

     74,000      —         —         74,000  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2006

     576,646      (323,168 )     3       253,481  
                               

Implementation of FIN 48

     —        (255 )     —         (255 )

Net loss

     —        (14,150 )     —         (14,150 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (49 )     (49 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (14,454 )

Contribution from parent

     385,900      —         —         385,900  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2007

   $ 962,546    $ (337,573 )   $ (46 )   $ 624,927  
                               

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

      

Net loss

   $ (14,150 )   $ (47,553 )   $ (33,113 )

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

      

Amortization of intangible assets

     30,097       32,007       33,260  

Intangible assets impairments

     301       32,471       11,099  

Amortization of deferred commissions

     1,052       1,070       992  

Depreciation and other amortization

     1,095       2,726       1,690  

Income to minority interest

     —         —         6,682  

(Gain) loss on sale of marketable securities

     (1,774 )     (543 )     (774 )

Proceeds from sale of trading investments

     11,593       2,394       1,805  

Purchase of trading investments

     (11,370 )     (3,237 )     (1,791 )

Unrealized depreciation (appreciation) on trading securities

     2,569       (745 )     1,216  

Equity in earnings of unconsolidated affiliates, net of dividends

     (191 )     26       10  

Payments of deferred commissions

     (1,798 )     (620 )     (878 )

Deferred taxes

     (7,242 )     (17,747 )     (18,442 )

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

      

Accounts receivable

     (899 )     3,486       4,665  

Receivables from related parties

     3,081       (7,201 )     1,396  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     (251 )     143       134  

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

     (5,327 )     12,579       (10,613 )

Payables to related parties

     (890 )     919       1,004  

Income taxes payable

     12,019       (827 )     (1,308 )

Implementation of FIN 48

     (255 )     —         —    

Deferred revenue

     (1 )     (1,094 )     (1,953 )

Other liabilities

     (4,673 )     7,658       (6,589 )
                        

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

     12,986       15,912       (11,508 )
                        

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

      

Purchase of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

     —         (50 )     (12,826 )

Purchase of mutual fund management contract

     (1,123 )     (6,321 )     —    

Purchase of available-for-sale investments

     (107 )     (104 )     (106 )

Capital expenditures

     (460 )     (1,552 )     (797 )

Purchase of long-term investments, net

     —         (19 )     (37 )
                        

Net cash used in investing activities

     (1,690 )     (8,046 )     (13,766 )
                        

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

      

Borrowings from related parties

     —         24,000       18,000  

Capital contributions

     60,900       25,000       —    

Repayment of debt

     (69,243 )     (46,807 )     (3,000 )

Distribution to minority interest

     —         —         (15,913 )
                        

Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities

     (8,343 )     2,193       (913 )
                        

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     2,953       10,059       (26,187 )

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

     33,862       23,803       49,990  
                        

Cash and Cash Equivalents, End of Year

   $ 36,815     $ 33,862     $ 23,803  
                        

Supplemental Cash Flow Information:

      

Interest paid

   $ 30,802     $ 30,558     $ 28,159  

Income taxes paid, net

   $ (10,531 )   $ (8,226 )   $ 117  

Non-Cash Financing Activities:

      

Contribution from parent

   $ 325,000     $ 49,000     $ 34,000  

Repayment of debt to related party

   $ (325,000 )   $ (49,000 )   $ (34,000 )

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

 

1. Organization and Business

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (the “Company”), was formed on November 1, 1995 through a reverse merger with Duff & Phelps Corporation. From 1995 to 2001, the Company was a majority-owned indirect subsidiary of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”).

On January 11, 2001, pursuant to a Merger Agreement between the Company and PM Holdings, Inc. (“PM Holdings”), PM Holdings acquired the outstanding shares of the Company not already owned by PM Holdings, and the Company became a wholly owned subsidiary of PM Holdings. The acquisition of the Company by PM Holdings was effected by merging the Company with a subsidiary of PM Holdings, with the Company as the surviving entity. The Company became an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of PNX concurrent with PM Holdings transferring its interest in the Company to Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, in 2001.

The Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries provide a variety of investment management and related services to a broad base of individual and institutional clients throughout the U.S. The Company’s businesses include investment advisory and broker-dealer operations. Retail investment management services (including administrative services) are provided to individuals through products consisting of open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds, and separately managed accounts. Separately managed accounts are offered to high-net-worth individuals and include intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by non-affiliated broker-dealers, and individual direct managed account investment services that are sold and administered by the Company. Institutional investment management services are provided primarily to corporate entities, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowment, insurance, and other special purpose funds. In addition, investment management services are provided on structured finance products, including collateralized debt obligations backed by portfolios of assets. The principal operating subsidiaries of the Company included in these consolidated financial statements are as follows:

 

   

Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation (“PEPCO”), a registered broker-dealer and registered transfer agent, serves principally as distributor, underwriter and financial agent for products registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).

 

   

Phoenix Investment Counsel, Inc. (“PIC”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PEPCO, is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily under agreements with affiliated registered investment companies.

 

   

Duff & Phelps Investment Management Co. (“Duff & Phelps”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services to a variety of institutions and individuals, including affiliated registered investment companies; corporate, public and multi-employer retirement funds; endowment, insurance and other special purpose funds, and high yield bond portfolios.

 

   

Engemann Asset Management (“EAM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to individual investors and affiliated registered investment companies.

 

   

SCM Advisers LLC (“SCM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to institutional accounts, individual investors, structured finance products and affiliated registered investment companies. SCM became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company effective May 2, 2005. See Note 3.

 

   

Zweig Advisers LLC (“PZA”) and its wholly owned subsidiary, Euclid Advisors LLC (“Euclid”), are registered investment advisors providing investment management services primarily under agreements with affiliated registered investment companies. PZA and Euclid are collectively referred to as “Zweig” in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents
   

Walnut Asset Management, LLC (“WAM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to high-net-worth individuals. As part of the acquisition of WAM, the Company also acquired Rutherford, Brown & Catherwood, LLC (“RBC”), a WAM related broker-dealer. WAM and RBC are collectively referred to as “Walnut” in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

   

Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to high-net-worth individuals and affiliated registered investment companies. KAR became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company effective September 30, 2005. See Note 3.

 

   

Goodwin Capital Advisors Ltd. (“Goodwin”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to institutional accounts, structured finance products, affiliated registered investment companies and Phoenix Life Insurance Company’s (“Phoenix Life”) general account.

 

2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

The significant accounting policies, which have been consistently applied, are as follows:

Principles of Consolidation and Basis of Presentation

The Company’s consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”). The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Material intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires the use of estimates. Accordingly, certain amounts in the consolidated financial statements contain estimates made by management. Actual results could differ from these estimates. Significant estimates, specifically those used to determine the carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets, are discussed in these notes to the consolidated financial statements.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The Company adopted the provisions of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, Interpretation No. 48 , Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes , or FIN 48, on January 1, 2007. The Company recognized a $0.3 million cumulative effect adjustment as a result of the implementation of FIN 48. Including the cumulative effect adjustment, the Company had approximately $0.5 million of total gross unrecognized tax benefits as of January 1, 2007.

In September 2006, the SEC staff issued Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 108, Considering the Effects of Prior Year Misstatements when Quantifying Misstatements in Current Year Financial Statements , or SAB 108. SAB 108 provides guidance for how errors should be evaluated to assess materiality from a quantitative perspective. SAB 108 permits companies to initially apply its provisions by either restating prior financial statements or recording the cumulative effect of initially applying the approach as adjustments to the carrying values of assets and liabilities as of January 1, 2006 with an offsetting adjustment to retained earnings. The Company adopted SAB 108 on December 31, 2006 with no effect to the financial statements.

Effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment (“SFAS 123(R)”), which requires that compensation cost related to share-based payment transactions be recognized in financial statements at the fair value of the instruments issued. In addition, the accounting for certain grants of equity awards to individuals who are retirement eligible on the date of grant has been clarified. SFAS 123(R) states that an employee’s share based award becomes vested at the date that the employee’s right to receive or retain equity shares is no

 

F-8


Table of Contents

longer contingent on the satisfaction of a market, performance or service condition. Accordingly, awards granted to retirement eligible employees are not contingent on satisfying a service condition and, therefore, are recognized at fair value on the date of the grant. Additionally, the period over which cost is recognized for awards granted to those who become retirement eligible before the vesting date, will be from the grant date to the retirement eligible date rather than to the vesting date.

While prior to the issuance of SFAS 123(R) recognition of such costs at fair value was optional, PNX elected to do so for all share-based compensation that was awarded after December 31, 2002 and charged the Company its portion of those costs. Accordingly, the adoption of SFAS 123(R) did not have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements. Upon the adoption of fair value accounting for stock-based compensation in 2003, the prospective method of transition provided by the new standard was used, which resulted in expense recognition for stock options awarded after December 31, 2002.

Valuation and related assumption information used for the options granted include these key variables: weighted-average expected volatility, weighted-average risk-free interest rate and weighted-average common share dividend yield. See Note 17 to these financial statements for additional information related to share-based compensation.

Accounting standards not yet adopted

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 141(R), Accounting for Business Combinations, or SFAS 141(R). SFAS 141(R) requires the acquiring entity in a business combination to recognize all the assets acquired and liabilities assumed in the transaction, establishes the acquisition-date fair value as the measurement objective for all assets acquired and liabilities assumed and requires the acquirer to disclose all information needed to evaluate and understand the nature and financial effect of the combination and is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008. The Company will adopt this standard effective January 1, 2009 and do not expect it to have a material impact on our financial position and results of operations.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS 160, Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements, or SFAS 160. SFAS 160 requires all entities to report noncontrolling interests in subsidiaries in the same way—as equity in the consolidated financial statements and requires that associated transactions be treated as equity transactions—and is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008. The Company will adopt this standard effective January 1, 2009 and do not expect it to have a material impact on our financial position and results of operations.

In June 2007, the AICPA issued Statement of Position 07-1, Clarification of the Scope of the Audit and Accounting Guide “Investment Companies” and Accounting by Parent Companies and Equity Method Investors for Investments in Investment Companies, or SOP 07-1. SOP 07-1 broadens the definition of an investment company for application of this guidance. It provides that an entity that meets the definition of an investment company use fair value as a basis of accounting and reporting and that a parent retains the specialized fair value accounting of the entity if certain criteria are met. On October 17, 2007, the FASB deferred the effective date of SOP 07-1 indefinitely.

On February 15, 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities , or SFAS 159, which gives entities the option to measure eligible financial assets, financial liabilities and firm commitments at fair value (i.e., the fair value option), on an instrument-by-instrument basis, that are otherwise not permitted to be accounted for at fair value under other accounting standards. The election to use the fair value option is available when an entity first recognizes a financial asset or financial liability or upon entering into a firm commitment. Subsequent changes in fair value must be recorded in earnings. Additionally, SFAS 159 allows for a one-time election for existing positions upon adoption, with the transition adjustment recorded to beginning retained earnings. The Company adopted SFAS 159 as of January 1, 2008 with no impact on our financial position or results of operations.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements , or SFAS 157. SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS 157 provides guidance on how to measure fair value when required under existing accounting standards. The statement establishes a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad levels (“Levels 1, 2 and 3”). Level 1 inputs are observable inputs that reflect quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that have the ability to access at the measurement date. Level 2 inputs are observable inputs, other than quoted prices included in Level 1, for the asset or liability. Level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs reflecting our estimates of the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability (including assumptions about risk). Quantitative and qualitative disclosures will focus on the inputs used to measure fair value for both recurring and non-recurring fair value measurements and the effects of the measurements in the financial statements. FASB Staff Position FAS 157-2 delayed application of SFAS 157 for non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities until fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008. The Company adopted SFAS 157 as of January 1, 2008 for those assets and liabilities that were not deferred with no material impact on its financial position or results of operations.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash in banks and highly liquid affiliated money market mutual fund investments.

Marketable Securities

Marketable securities consist of mutual fund investments and other publicly traded securities which are carried at market value in accordance with SFAS No. 115 , “Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities.” Mutual fund investments held by the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiary are classified as assets held for trading purposes. The Company provides the initial capital to funds or separately managed account strategies for the purpose of creating track records. Any unrealized appreciation or depreciation on these assets is included in “Other income” in the Consolidated Statements of Operations (“Statements of Operations”). Other mutual fund investments or publicly traded securities held by the Company are considered to be available-for-sale, with any unrealized appreciation or depreciation, net of income taxes, reported as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income in stockholder’s equity. Marketable securities are marked to market based on the respective publicly quoted net asset values of the funds or market prices of the equity securities or bonds.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions are commissions paid to broker-dealers on sales of Class B and Class C mutual fund shares (“Class B and C shares”). These commissions are recovered by the receipt of monthly asset-based distributor fees received from the mutual funds or contingent deferred sales charges received upon redemption of the Class B and Class C shares within five and one years of purchase, respectively.

The deferred costs resulting from the sale of Class B shares subsequent to December 31, 2002 are amortized on a straight-line basis over a three or five-year period, depending on the fund, or until the underlying Class B shares are redeemed. Deferred costs resulting from the sale of Class C shares are amortized on a straight-line basis over a one-year period. Amortization expense, including adjustments for redemptions, was $3.1 million, $3.0 million and $3.7 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005 respectively, and is included in Other operating expenses in the Statements of Income. PEPCO periodically assesses the deferred commission asset for impairment and records additional amortization expense as appropriate.

Furniture, Equipment and Leasehold Improvements

Furniture, equipment and leasehold improvements are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of 3 to 10 years for furniture and office equipment, and 3 to 5 years for computer equipment and software. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the lives of

 

F-10


Table of Contents

the related leases. Major renewals or betterments are capitalized and recurring repairs and maintenance are charged to operations.

Intangible Assets and Goodwill

Definite-lived intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated remaining lives of such assets and are reevaluated on an ongoing basis in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-lived Assets,” by comparing estimates of future undiscounted cash flows to the carrying value of assets. Assets are considered impaired if the carrying value exceeds the expected future undiscounted cash flows and an impairment is recorded.

Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price of acquisitions and mergers over the identified net assets and liabilities. In accordance with SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,” goodwill is not being amortized. A single reporting unit has been identified for the purpose of assessing potential future impairments of goodwill. An impairment analysis of goodwill is performed annually or more frequently, if warranted by events or changes in circumstances affecting the Company’s business.

Indefinite-lived intangible assets are comprised of investment advisory contracts with affiliated closed-end registered investment companies. These assets are also tested for impairment annually and when events or changes in circumstances indicate the asset might be impaired.

Revenue Recognition

Investment management fees, distribution and service fees, and administration and transfer agent fees are recorded as income during the period in which services are performed. Investment management fees, which are accrued monthly, are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management, and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective investment management contracts, which generally require monthly or quarterly payment.

Investment management fees earned on open-end mutual funds range from 0.10% to 1.50% of average assets under management, depending on the type of fund. Investment management fees earned on closed-end funds range from 0.50% to 0.85% of average assets under management. Investment management fees earned on separately managed accounts and institutional accounts are negotiated and are based primarily on asset size, portfolio complexity and individual needs and range from 0.15% to 1.00%. Investment management fees earned on structured finance products range from 0.08% to 0.45% of the principal outstanding.

Investment management fees related to Phoenix Life’s general account are earned on a cost-recovery basis. In addition, in August 2002 the Company agreed to waive investment management fees, for 2002 and future years, related to Phoenix Life’s Employee Retirement Plan until those fees totaled $2.5 million. As of December 31, 2007 a cumulative total of $3.4 million of investment management fees has been earned, of which $2.5 million had been waived pursuant to this agreement and the Company has recognized $0.9 million of fees in 2007.

Management fees contingent upon achieving certain levels of performance are recorded when earned. Certain fees related to collateralized loan and collateralized debt obligations (“CLOs” and “CDOs,” respectively) are subordinate and contingent upon the portfolio meeting certain financial criteria. As of December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, three CDOs did not meet all the criteria and, accordingly, no fees were recognized. At such time as the criteria are met, all or a portion of the subordinated fees may be recovered.

Distribution and service fees are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management, and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective distribution and service fee contracts, which require a monthly payment.

Administration and transfer agent fees consist of administrative fees, shareholder service agent fees, fund administration fees, dealer concessions and transfer agent fees. Dealer concessions and transfer agent fees earned net of related expenses from distribution and sale of affiliated mutual fund shares and other securities are recorded on a trade date basis.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Other income and fees consist primarily of brokerage commissions and fees earned for distribution of nonaffiliated products. Commissions earned (and related expenses) are recorded on a trade date basis and are computed based upon contractual agreements.

Income Taxes

The Company and its subsidiaries are included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and each is party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if each subsidiary’s tax liability had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the Company’s consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

The ultimate tax outcome of many transactions is uncertain. Significant judgment is required in evaluating tax positions and in computing the tax provision including valuation allowances, the timing of reversals of net operating losses, and other items, many of whose outcomes can not be known at the date of the financial statements. Uncertain tax positions taken by the company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. A valuation allowance has been established relative to state deferred tax assets due to the inability to combine certain sub-groups for state income tax reporting purposes. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

Earnings Per Share

Earnings per share (“EPS”) is calculated in accordance with SFAS No. 128, “Earnings Per Share.” Basic EPS is computed by dividing income available to common stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares for the period.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, accrued liabilities, and long-term debt are reflected in the financial statements at carrying value which equals or approximates fair value. Marketable securities are reflected in the financial statements at fair value based upon publicly quoted market prices.

Concentrations of Credit Risk

Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk consist principally of cash and cash equivalents. The Company maintains cash and cash equivalents in bank deposits with financial institutions. Cash deposits at these financial institutions may exceed Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation insurance limits.

Market Risk

The Company’s primary exposure to market risk is directly related to its role as investment advisor for various accounts it manages and the funds for which it acts as advisor. Most of the Company’s revenues are derived from investment management fees, which are based on the market value of the assets under management. A decline in the values of securities under management would cause revenues and income to decline.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

The Company is also subject to market risk due to a decline in the values of its investments in marketable securities for its own account. A change in the market value of these investments would result in a corresponding change to either net income or other comprehensive income.

Employee Benefits

Certain current and former employees of the Company and its subsidiaries are members of a group medical and group life plan, are covered under a qualified defined benefit pension plan, and are eligible to participate in a defined contribution 401(k) retirement plan, each of which is sponsored by PNX and administered by a third-party administrator. The qualified pension and 401(k) retirement plans comply with the requirements established by the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”). Employees may contribute a percentage of their eligible compensation into the 401(k) retirement plan, as defined, subject to certain limitations imposed by the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). The Company matches employee contributions, subject to certain limitations. Additionally, an excess benefits plan provides for those portions of pension obligations that are in excess of amounts permitted by the Code. The Company is charged by Phoenix Life for its costs under these plans and for the Company’s matching portion of the 401(k) retirement plan. These costs were $8.9 million, $10.0 million and $6.2 million for 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

In addition, certain employees of the Company have been granted options to purchase common stock of PNX. The Company records compensation expense related to the PNX options that were issued to employees since 2002 over a three-year vesting period based on the fair value of the options as of the grant date.

Business Segment

SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,” establishes disclosure requirements relating to operating segments in annual and interim financial statements. Management has determined that the Company operates in one business segment, namely as an asset manager providing investment management and distribution services for retail and institutional products. Although the Company does make some disclosure regarding assets under management and other asset flows by product, the Company’s determination that it operates in one business segment is based on the fact that management reviews financial performance at an aggregate level. All of the products and services provided relate to asset management and are subject to a similar regulatory framework. Groups within the Company are generally not aligned with specific product lines. Investment professionals may manage both retail and institutional products.

 

3. Merger, Acquisitions, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

The carrying amount of goodwill at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $454,369.

Intangible assets at December 31, were as follows:

 

          2007     2006  
($ in thousands)                  

Definite-lived intangible assets:

       

Investment contracts

      $ 305,492     $ 304,679  

Accumulated amortization

        (170,607 )     (140,224 )
                   

Definite-lived intangible assets, net

        134,885       164,455  
                   

Indefinite-lived intangible assets

        73,291       73,291  
                   

Total intangible assets, net

      $ 208,176     $ 237,746  
                   

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Activity in Intangible Assets

      
     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Intangible assets

      

Purchases

   $ 828     $ 6,372     $ 31,776  

Amortization

     (30,097 )     (32,007 )     (33,260 )

Impairment

     (301 )     (32,471 )     (11,099 )
                        

Change in intangible assets

     (29,570 )     (58,106 )     (12,583 )

Balance, beginning of period

     237,746       295,852       308,435  
                        

Balance, end of period

   $ 208,176     $ 237,746     $ 295,852  
                        

Intangible asset amortization for the next five years is estimated as follows: 2008—$29.2 million, 2009—$27.7 million, 2010—$25.9 million, 2011—$17.1 million, 2012—$9.9 million and thereafter—$25.1 million. At December 31, 2007, the weighted average estimated remaining amortization period for investment contracts is 6 years.

In the fourth quarter of 2007, the Company performed an interim test on certain of its definite-lived intangible assets in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Standard Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long Lived Assets” as a result of significant outflows in assets under management experienced at one of its operating subsidiaries due to the loss of a significant number of accounts. A pre-tax impairment charge of $0.3 million was recorded.

In the first quarter of 2006, the Company recorded a $32.5 million pre-tax impairment on $33.4 million of definite-lived intangible assets related to certain investment management contracts. This impairment resulted from the termination of the associated management contracts and related lost revenues.

In 2005, the Company performed interim tests on certain of its definite-lived intangible assets as a result of significant outflows in assets under management experienced as a result of the departure of a significant number of accounts. Pre-tax impairment charges of $11.1 million were recorded.

For each of the impairment losses noted above, a goodwill impairment test was also performed in accordance with SFAS No. 142 and did not result in impairment charges.

Acquisition of Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”)

On September 30, 2005, the Company completed the acquisition of the minority interest of KAR. On that date, the Company acquired the remaining 34.8% non-controlling interest in KAR for $77.2 million, including $0.5 million of transaction costs. A cash payment of $9.7 million was made in October 2005 and promissory notes totaling $67.0 million were issued to the minority members to finance the remainder of the acquisition. These notes were paid in full as of January 2, 2007. See Note 9. These payments were recorded as additional purchase price of which $31.9 million was allocated to identified intangible assets and the remaining $45.4 was, in accordance with SFAS No. 142, classified as goodwill and is not being amortized.

Acquisition of SCM Advisors, LLC (formerly named Seneca Capital Management, LLC)

On May 2, 2005, the Company completed the acquisition of the minority interest of SCM and SCM became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. This transaction cost $1.2 million and was allocated entirely to goodwill.

Insight Funds

On May 18, 2006, the Company acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds from Harris Investment Management, Inc. (“Harris”) for $4.1 million plus $1.3 million of transaction costs.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Under the terms of the agreement, during its first four years, the Company is required to make additional annual payments to Harris related to the purchase of contracts of certain money market funds based upon the net profits earned on those funds (as defined in the Transaction Agreement). The Company made an annual payment of $1.1 million in 2007 related to the first year of this agreement and has accrued $0.6 million for the second year payment. The initial purchase price and these additional money market payments have been allocated to identified intangible assets and are being amortized over periods ranging from one to five years. Harris continues to manage the majority of the Insight Funds as sub-advisor.

Provisions of the agreement require that the Company make additional payments to Harris should the Company terminate Harris for reasons other than cause. At this time, the Company does not intend to terminate the agreement and, therefore, has not established any such related accruals.

Additionally, the Company entered into a strategic partnership agreement with Harris, whereby Harris would be available to the Company as a sub-advisor for non-Harris funds. Harris was subsequently appointed a sub-advisor to certain funds. The agreement states with regard to these sub-advised funds, if the sub-advisory fees Harris earns in the first five years of the agreement do not reach a specified amount, the Company must pay Harris an amount as predetermined by the agreement. The Company would be required to pay a maximum amount of $20.0 million under the agreement. If the Company were to terminate the contracts without cause, the termination costs would be based on $35.0 million, adjusted by a factor for the percentage of original assets that remain. The agreement was executed on March 28, 2006 and to date the Company has paid Harris approximately $12.0 million of the obligation. As the calculations are based on facts that can only be determined at the end of five years, and as there are significant variables that can impact such calculations, any obligation is not estimable at this time. The Company has done a hypothetical calculation and determined that no payment would be required. The Company does not believe that it is probable or reasonably possible that a liability has been incurred. The Company will continue to review the contingent obligation.

 

4. Marketable Securities

The Company’s marketable securities consist of both trading and available-for-sale securities. The composition of the Company’s marketable securities at December 31, was as follows:

 

     Cost    Unrealized
Gain (Loss)
    Market
($ in thousands)                

2007

       

Trading:

       

Equity securities (managed account)

   $ 861    $ —       $ 861

Other affiliated mutual funds

     12,875      (993 )     11,882
                     

Total trading securities

     13,736      (993 )     12,743
                     

Available-for-sale:

       

Affiliated closed-end funds

     1,621      —         1,621
                     

Total marketable securities

   $ 15,357    $ (993 )   $ 14,364
                     

 

F-15


Table of Contents

There were no changes to the unrealized portion of available-for-sale investments. The Company holds securities sold short that represent the short portion of a 130/30 equity strategy that the Company seeded in 2007. The 130/30 equity strategy involves selling short positions for approximately 30% of the portfolio value and purchasing long positions with the remaining portfolio value including the proceeds received from the short sales.

 

     Cost    Unrealized
Gain (Loss)
   Market
($ in thousands)               

2006

        

Trading:

        

Equity securities (managed account)

   $ 6,713    $ 1,449    $ 8,162

Municipal bonds

     1,021      —        1,021

Other affiliated mutual funds

     3,600      127      3,727
                    

Total trading securities

     11,334      1,576      12,910
                    

Available-for-sale:

        

Affiliated closed-end funds

     1,513      75      1,588
                    

Total marketable securities

   $ 12,847    $ 1,651    $ 14,498
                    

 

5. Furniture, Equipment, and Leasehold Improvements

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements at December 31, were comprised of the following:

 

     2007     2006  
($ in thousands)             

Computer equipment and software

   $ 4,262     $ 4,363  

Leasehold improvements

     7,627       8,495  

Furniture and office equipment

     11,918       10,958  
                
     23,807       23,816  

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

     (21,575 )     (20,480 )
                

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements, net

   $ 2,232     $ 3,336  
                

 

6. Long-Term Investments and Other Assets

Long-term investments are accounted for using the equity method, when appropriate. The Company’s share of the earnings of unconsolidated investments is included in Other income in the Statements of Operations.

Inverness/Phoenix and Related Partnerships

At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company had a 23% interest in Inverness/Phoenix Capital LLC (“IPC”). IPC is a joint venture with Inverness Management LLC, an unrelated third-party. IPC acts as a general partner to several partnerships that invest in private equity transactions (primarily management led buy-outs), expansion financing and recapitalizations involving management participation. At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company’s combined investment in IPC and one of its related partnerships was $1.5 million and $1.3 million, respectively.

 

7. Collateralized Debt or Bond Obligations and Hedge Funds

The Company adopted Financial Interpretation No. (“FIN”) 46-R, “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51,” for special purpose entities in which it holds a variable interest through PIC and SCM, on December 31, 2003. FIN 46-R interprets the existing standards on consolidation

 

F-16


Table of Contents

of certain entities in which equity investors do not have the characteristics of a controlling financial interest or do not have sufficient equity at risk for the entity to finance its activities without additional subordinated financial support from other parties (variable interest entities or “VIEs”). Variable interest entities are required to be consolidated by their primary beneficiaries if they do not effectively disperse risks among all parties involved. The primary beneficiary of a VIE is the party that absorbs a majority of the entity’s expected losses, receives a majority of its expected residual returns, or both, as a result of holding either explicit or implicit variable interests.

At December 31, 2007, PIC or SCM served as the investment advisors to ten collateralized debt or loan obligation (“CDO/CLOs”) trusts. The CDO/CLOs, which are investment trusts, have aggregate assets of $3.6 billion, $4.0 billion and $2.5 billion at December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, that are primarily invested in a variety of fixed income securities acquired from third parties. The CDO/CLOs, in turn, issued tranched collateralized debt and residual equity securities to third parties as well as to Phoenix Life’s general account. The CDO/CLOs reside in bankruptcy remote, special purpose entities in which the Company provides neither recourse nor guarantees. The Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these VIEs as defined by FIN 46-R. Accordingly, the Company’s financial exposure to these CDO/CLOs stems only from the investment management fees it earns, which totaled $9.1 million, $8.0 million and $8.8 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

For a portion of 2006 and years prior, SCM was the managing member of, and acted as the investment manager to, a hedge fund limited liability company and was the investment manager of a separate offshore hedge fund limited partnership. The purpose of these partnerships was to invest in long and short fixed income positions by U.S. and tax-exempt investors. As investment manager to these funds, SCM earned management fees totaling $0.2 million and $0.8 million in 2006 and 2005, respectively. These hedge funds are not considered to be VIEs, pursuant to FIN 46-R. Taking into consideration the limited partner/investor rights with respect to SCM’s appointment as the investment advisor of each fund, the Company has determined that consolidation is not required and accounts for these investments under the equity method of accounting.

 

8. Income Taxes

The components of the provision for income taxes for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)       

Current

      

Federal

   $ (499 )   $ (9,831 )   $ (1,370 )

State

     1,790       737       214  
                        

Total current tax expense (benefit)

     1,291       (9,094 )     (1,156 )
                        

Deferred

      

Federal

     (7,244 )     (16,349 )     (17,503 )

State

     3       (1,398 )     (940 )
                        

Total deferred tax benefit

     (7,241 )     (17,747 )     (18,443 )
                        

Total expense (benefit) for income taxes

   $ (5,950 )   $ (26,841 )   $ (19,599 )
                        

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Deferred taxes resulted from temporary differences between the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and the tax basis of assets and liabilities. The tax effects of temporary differences at December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007     2006  
($ in thousands)       

Deferred tax assets:

    

Intangible assets

   $ 13,641     $ 14,799  

Net operating losses

     49,831       41,572  

Other

     3,716       4,104  
                

Gross deferred tax assets

     67,188       60,475  

Valuation allowance

     (10,642 )     (9,761 )
                

Gross deferred tax assets after valuation allowance

     56,546       50,714  
                

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

Intangible assets

     65,446       66,273  

Other investments

     214       822  
                

Gross deferred tax liabilities

     65,660       67,095  
                

Deferred tax liability, net

   $ (9,114 )   $ (16,381 )
                

The Company is included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and is a party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if they had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

The ultimate tax outcome of many transactions is uncertain. Significant judgment is required in evaluating tax positions and in computing the tax provision including valuation allowances, the timing of reversals of net operating losses, and other items, many of whose outcomes can not be known at the date of the financial statements. Uncertain tax positions taken by the company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. A valuation allowance has been established relative to state deferred tax assets due to the inability to combine certain sub-groups for state income tax reporting purposes. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

As of December 31, 2007, the Company had deferred tax assets of $38.8 million and $0.4 million related to net operating losses and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $10.6 million for state net operating losses. The related federal net operating losses were $110.9 million, and the related federal capital losses were $1.0 million. However, due to certain tax rules relating to the treatment of losses in connection with a spin-off, all or a portion of the related net operating loss and capital loss carryovers may not be available to the Company following the spin-off. To the extent such losses are generally available to the Company following the spin-off, the related federal net operating loss carryovers of $110.9 million are scheduled to expire between the years 2023 and 2027, and the related federal capital loss carryovers of $1.0 million are scheduled to expire in 2010 and 2012. The state net operating losses of

 

F-18


Table of Contents

$127.2 million are scheduled to expire as follows: $77.8 million in 2008 through 2017 and $49.4 million in 2018 through 2026. Due to the inability of PNX to combine the life insurance and non-life insurance subgroups for state income tax purposes, the Company established a $10.6 million and $9.8 million valuation allowance at the end of 2007 and 2006, respectively, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

The following presents a reconciliation of the provision (benefit) for income taxes computed at the federal statutory rate to the provision (benefit) for income taxes recognized in the Statements of Operations for the periods indicated:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)       

Tax at statutory rate

   $ (7,035 )    (35 )%   $ (26,038 )    (35 )%   $ (18,449 )    (35 )%

State taxes, net of federal benefit

     1,141      5       (369 )    —         (428 )    (1 )

Goodwill amortization and impairments

     17      —         80      —         58      —    

Adjustments to tax accruals

     13      —         78      —         (760 )    (1 )

Audit settlement

     —        —         —        —         482      1  

Other, net

     (86 )    —         (592 )    (1 )     (502 )    (1 )
                                             

Income tax expense (benefit)

   $ (5,950 )    (30 )%   $ (26,841 )    (36 )%   $ (19,599 )    (37 )%
                                             

The Company adopted the provisions of FASB, Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes, or FIN 48, on January 1, 2007. As a result of the implementation of FIN 48, the Company recognized a cumulative effect adjustment of approximately $0.3 million increase in liabilities for uncertain tax benefits, which was accounted for as an increase to the January 1, 2007 balance of accumulated deficit. Including the cumulative effect adjustment, the Company had approximately $0.5 million of total gross unrecognized tax benefits as of January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2007.

The entire amount of unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2007 would, if recognized, impact the annual effective tax rate upon recognition.

Based upon the timing and status of our current examinations by taxing authorities, the Company does not believe that it is reasonably possible that any changes to the balance of unrecognized tax benefits occurring within the next 12 months will result in a significant change to the results of operations, financial condition or liquidity. In addition, the Company does not anticipate that there will be additional payments made or refunds received within the next 12 months with respect to the years under audit. The Company does not anticipate any increases to the unrecognized tax benefits that would have a significant impact on the financial position of the Company.

Together with PNX, the Company and its subsidiaries file consolidated, combined, unitary or separate income tax returns in the U.S. federal, various state and foreign jurisdictions. The Company is no longer subject to income tax examinations by federal authorities for tax years prior to 2004. PNX’s consolidated U.S. federal income tax returns for 2004 and 2005 are currently being examined. The Company does not believe that the examination will result in a material change in its financial position. State examinations are being conducted by Connecticut for the years 1996 through 2005 and New York for the years 2003 through 2005. It is not believed that these examinations will result in a material change to the Company’s financial position, and there have been no penalties paid related to this examination.

 

9. Long-Term Debt

Credit Facilities and Other Note Agreements :

On September 30, 2005, in connection with the final acquisition of KAR, the Company entered into promissory note agreements with the KAR minority members totaling $67.0 million to finance the remainder of the acquisition, of which $9.8 million plus interest was paid on January 3, 2006 and the remaining $57.2 million plus interest was paid on January 2, 2007. The funds to make this payment were made available to the Company as a result of a $60.9 million capital contribution from PNX to the Company on January 2, 2007. The interest rate on the notes was 4.75%. See Note 3.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

On June 6, 2006, an existing $150.0 million unsecured senior revolving credit facility, dated as of November 22, 2004 was amended and restated. The financing commitments under the Amended Facility will terminate on June 6, 2009. Potential borrowers on the credit line are PNX, the Company and Phoenix Life. PNX unconditionally guaranteed any loans under this facility to the Company and Phoenix Life. Base rate loans bear interest at the greater of Wachovia Bank, National Association’s prime commercial rate or the federal funds rate plus 0.50%. Eurodollar rate loans bear interest at London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) plus an applicable percentage based on PNX’s Standard & Poor’s and Moody’s ratings. The $25.0 million that had been outstanding at December 31, 2005 was repaid in its entirety on May 5, 2006 and there has been no further borrowing against this facility since that time. The Company was removed as a borrower of the facility effective April 2, 2008.

Interest expense related to the promissory note agreements and the credit facility including any facility, usage, commitment, and guarantee fees, was $0.1 million, $3.4 million and $2.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

Notes Payable to Related Parties :

The Company entered into various debt agreements with PNX in 2001 and 2002 that had original maturity dates at various times in 2007 that were subsequently extended to 2010. Interest was payable in arrears at annual rates ranging from 5.32% to 7.56% for the years 2006 and 2007. During 2006 and 2007, each of these notes was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX. The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million. This debt was forgiven effective as of December 31, 2007. Debt outstanding at each of the last three year ends related to these debt agreements was as follows:

 

     Original
Note
Date
   Notes Outstanding at
December 31,
      2007    2006    2005
($ in millions)                    

Subordinated Agreement with PNX

   12/27/01    $ 0    $ 150    $ 150

Subordinated Agreement with PNX

   1/29/02      0      100      100

Senior Agreement with PNX

   12/23/02      0      75      100

Additionally, on February 26, 2001, the Company entered into a separate $69.0 million subordinated note agreement with Phoenix Life due March 1, 2006 in exchange for debentures held by Phoenix Life. In December 2005 this agreement was renegotiated to provide for quarterly payments of $3 million. The renegotiated note matures in December 2010 and bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%. The note agreement contains financial and operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that the Company maintain a maximum debt to earnings ratio and minimum stockholder’s equity. At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company was in compliance with all covenants. The outstanding balance on this note at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $42.0 million and $54.0 million, respectively. The fair value of this note at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $41.2 million and $52.7 million, respectively.

Interest expense related to notes payable to related parties was $26.6 million, $30.0 million and $26.7 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

 

10. Contingent Liabilities

Litigation and Arbitration Matters

The Company is regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. The litigation and arbitration naming us as a defendant ordinarily involves our activities as an employer, investor, investment advisor, broker-dealer or taxpayer. It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or arbitration proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. The

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Company believes that the outcomes of our litigation and arbitration matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and arbitration, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Regulatory Matters

State regulatory bodies, the SEC, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) and other regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of the Company and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, insurance laws, securities laws, and laws governing the activities of broker-dealers. The Company endeavors to respond to such inquiries in an appropriate way and to take corrective action if warranted.

In addition, federal and state regulatory authorities from time to time make inquiries and conduct examinations regarding our compliance with securities and other laws and regulations affecting our products. The Company endeavors to respond to such inquiries in an appropriate way and to take corrective action if warranted. There has been a significant increase in federal and state regulatory activity relating to financial services companies, with a number of recent regulatory inquiries focusing on late-trading, market timing and valuation issues.

In 2005, the Boston District Office of the SEC completed a compliance examination of certain of our affiliates that are registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 or the Investment Advisers Act of 1940. Following the examination, the staff of the Boston District Office issued a deficiency letter primarily focused on perceived weaknesses in procedures for monitoring trading to prevent market timing activity. The staff requested the Company to conduct an analysis as to whether stockholders, policyholders and contract holders who invested in the funds that may have been affected by undetected market timing activity had suffered harm and to advise the staff whether the Company believes reimbursement is necessary or appropriate under the circumstances. A third party was retained to assist the Company in preparing the analysis. Based on this analysis, the Company advised the SEC that it does not believe that reimbursement is appropriate.

Over the past several years, a number of companies have announced settlements of other types of enforcement actions with various regulatory agencies, primarily the SEC and the New York Attorney General’s Office. It is possible that one or more regulatory agencies may pursue this type of action against the Company in the future. Financial services companies have also been the subject of broad industry inquiries by federal and state regulators and attorneys general which do not appear to be company-specific.

These types of regulatory actions may be difficult to assess or quantify, may seek recovery of indeterminate amounts, including punitive and treble damages, and the nature and magnitude of their outcomes may remain unknown for substantial periods of time. While it is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all pending inquiries, investigations, legal proceedings and other regulatory actions, or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses, the Company believes that their outcomes are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these actions and the inherent unpredictability of regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operation or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Other Matters

The Company indirectly guarantees the activities of its broker-dealer subsidiaries. In addition, in the ordinary course of business the Company may enter into contracts with third parties pursuant to which the third parties provide services on the Company’s behalf or the Company provides services on behalf of the third parties. In certain circumstances, the Company may agree to indemnify the third-party service provider. The terms of indemnification may vary from contract to contract and the amount of indemnification liability, if any, cannot be determined. The Company made no payments to third parties in

 

F-21


Table of Contents

2007 and 2006, and has recorded no liabilities with regard to commitments as of December 31, 2007. The Company believes that any risk of loss for direct or indirect guarantees is remote and would not have a material impact on the Company’s operating results or financial position.

 

11. Capital and Reserve Requirement Information

As broker-dealers registered with the SEC, PEPCO and RBC are subject to certain rules regarding minimum net capital. PEPCO and RBC operate pursuant to Rule 15c3-1, paragraph (a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and, accordingly, are each required to maintain a ratio of “aggregate indebtedness” to “net capital” (as those items are defined) which may not exceed 15 to 1.

Aggregate indebtedness, net capital, and resultant ratios for PEPCO are as follows:

 

     December 31
     2007    2006
($ in thousands)     

Aggregate indebtedness

   $ 13,705    $ 14,282

Net capital

     7,448      5,464

Ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital

     1.8 to 1      2.6 to 1

PEPCO’s minimum required net capital at December 31, 2007 and 2006 based on its aggregate indebtedness on those dates, is $.9 million and $1.0 million, respectively.

Aggregate indebtedness, net capital, and resultant ratios for RBC are as follows:

 

     December 31,
     2007    2006
($ in thousands)     

Aggregate indebtedness

   $ 90    $ 89

Net capital

     1,083      964

Ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital

     .1 to 1      .1 to 1

RBC’s minimum required net capital at December 31, 2007 and 2006 is $100 thousand.

The operations of PEPCO and RBC do not include the physical handling of securities or the maintenance of open customer accounts. Accordingly, PEPCO and RBC are exempt from the reserve provisions of Rule 15c3-3 under the exemption allowed by paragraphs (k)(2)(i) and (k)(2)(ii), respectively, of such rule.

 

12. Other Operating Expenses

Other operating expenses for the years ended December 31, were comprised of the following:

 

     2007    2006    2005
($ in thousands)               

Investment research

   $ 7,078    $ 5,044    $ 4,157

Computer services

     5,956      6,417      7,175

Rent and other occupancy

     5,888      5,789      7,707

Professional fees

     4,792      5,041      5,642

Outside services

     2,685      3,966      4,702

Travel, training and entertainment

     2,679      2,690      2,932

Communications and branding

     1,815      1,339      552

National and regional meetings

     1,750      1,494      1,313

Insurance

     1,619      2,315      2,759

PNX staff chargeback

     1,531      1,022      1,243

Consulting and administration fee

     1,264      1,220      1,902

Marketing materials

     1,076      1,316      2,578

Telephone and postage

     1,074      1,205      1,606

General taxes

     860      749      859

Equipment rental and maintenance

     617      666      807

Brokerage clearing and execution costs

     348      592      1,157

Other expenses

     3,406      3,444      4,633
                    

Total

   $ 44,438    $ 44,309    $ 51,724
                    

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Certain of these operating expenses are provided by Phoenix Life. See Note 15.

 

13. Restructuring and Severance

In 2005, the Company undertook a restructuring of the business as a result of certain underperforming investment strategies which represented a significant portion of the Company’s assets under management. These costs are primarily related to employee staff reductions including severance. Additionally, as a result of these reductions, in 2006, excess office space was vacated and made ready to sublet. Lease losses associated with various abandoned office space have been recognized representing the Company’s best estimate of the present value of the amount owed under the leases reduced by sub-lease income. No such costs were incurred in 2007. The costs incurred each year and unpaid balances at December 31 were as follows:

 

     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Beginning unpaid balance

   $ 6,939     $ 414     $ —    

Costs incurred and expensed:

      

Employee staff reductions

     —         4,876       11,863  

Lease abandonment and other

     —         8,758       631  
                        

Total costs incurred and expensed

     —         13,634       12,494  

Costs paid

     (3,238 )     (7,109 )     (12,080 )
                        

Ending unpaid balance

   $ 3,701     $ 6,939     $ 414  
                        

 

14. Other Comprehensive Income

The components of other comprehensive income, and related tax effects, were as follows:

 

     Before
Tax
    Tax
Expense
(Benefit)
    Net-of-
Tax
 
($ in thousands)                   

Year Ended December 31, 2007

      

Unrealized losses on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding losses arising during period

   $ (75 )   $ 26     $ (49 )
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ (75 )   $ 26     $ (49 )
                        

Year Ended December 31, 2006

      

Unrealized gains on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding gains arising during period

   $ 24     $ (9 )   $ 15  
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ 24     $ (9 )   $ 15  
                        

Year Ended December 31, 2005

      

Unrealized losses on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding losses arising during period

   $ (183 )     64     $ (119 )
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ (183 )     64       (119 )
                        

There were no sales of available-for-sale securities during the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005.

 

F-23


Table of Contents
15. Other Related Party Transactions

As discussed in further detail throughout these notes, the Company has certain agreements with related parties whereby the Company and/or the related party provides services on behalf of the other party. Any intercompany balances outstanding associated with these transactions are reviewed monthly and are settled to the extent cash is available.

Revenues

The Company provides investment advisory services to affiliated mutual funds. The Company also manages assets and provides other investment advisory services to PNX, and Phoenix Life and its subsidiaries (e.g., general account and variable separate account products). The revenues earned from managing related party assets for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006     2005
($ in thousands)                

Management fees:

       

Affiliated mutual and closed-end funds

   $ 84,887    $ 76,246     $ 71,085

CDO/CBO

     3,206      6,464       8,696

Phoenix Life General Account

     11,589      9,840       9,424

Phoenix Life variable product separate accounts, net of reimbursement

     2,332      3,046       4,430

Other

     853      (5 )     885
                     

Total management fees

   $ 102,867    $ 95,591     $ 94,520
                     

Distribution and service fees:

   $ 36,467    $ 29,805     $ 25,624
                     

Administration fees:

       

Fund administration

   $ 14,322    $ 11,500     $ 8,139

Shareholder service agent

     6,466      5,754       5,054

Other

     495      591       526
                     

Total administration fees

   $ 21,283    $ 17,845     $ 13,719
                     

Other income and fees

     645      683       1,203
                     

Total

   $ 161,262    $ 143,924     $ 135,066
                     

Pursuant to the terms of its distribution plans with affiliated mutual funds, the Company received a combined $36.5 million, $29.8 million and $25.6 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, from affiliated mutual funds for providing distribution and other services. Of these amounts, $30.8 million, $24.4 million and $20.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, was paid in the form of trailing commissions for services rendered to unaffiliated broker-dealers. Trailing commissions are included in other operating expenses on the Statements of Income. The remaining distributor fees of $5.7 million, $5.4 million and $5.6 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, were retained as reimbursement for distribution services provided by the Company.

The Company serves as the administrator to the affiliated mutual funds. For its services, which include financial agent services, the Company received administration fees of $14.3 million, $11.5 million and $8.1 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Of these amounts, $8.7 million, $7.9 million and $6.5 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, were paid out to an unaffiliated third party for fund accounting services provided.

The Company also serves as transfer agent for certain affiliated mutual funds. For these services, the Company earned fees totaling $10.4 million, $7.6 million and $5.1 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, and paid out sub-transfer agent fees of $4.0 million, $1.8 million and $0 in those years, respectively. These fees are presented net in “Administration fees.”

 

F-24


Table of Contents

The Company received management fees averaging approximately .09%, .07% and .07% of the net asset value of the Phoenix Life General Account assets under management in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The Company’s transaction with affiliates comprised approximately 71%, 66% and 57% of total revenues, for the years ended 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. For each of these years, approximately 6% of total revenues are related to Phoenix Life.

Receivables from Related Parties

Receivables from affiliates as of December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006
($ in thousands)          

Investment management fees

   $ 13,574    $ 15,707

Distribution and service fees

     3,102      2,842

Administration fees

     3,047      4,176

Other receivables

     2,553      2,632
             
   $ 22,276    $ 25,357
             

Operating Expenses

Phoenix Life provides certain administrative services at the request of the Company. Additionally, certain of the Company’s active and retired employees participate in the Phoenix Life multi-employer retirement and benefit plans (see Note 2). The expenses recorded by the Company for significant services provided by Phoenix Life for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006    2005
($ in thousands)               

Computer services

   $ 4,095    $ 4,023    $ 4,010

Professional fees

     3,569      4,457      6,155

Communications

     1,815      1,339      552

Administrative fees

     1,678      1,475      1,722

Corporate and staff

     1,245      736      957

Rent

     2,711      2,531      2,546

Employee related charges:

        

Healthcare and life insurance benefits

     3,042      3,759      1,610

Pension and savings plans

     2,691      3,387      2,435

Human resources administration

     2,915      2,576      1,696

Equipment rental and maintenance, and other

     60      78      24
                    

Total

   $ 23,821    $ 24,361    $ 21,707
                    

The Company pays these charges based on contractual agreements. Computer services are based upon actual or specified usage. Other charges are based on hourly rates, square footage or head count. The Company reimburses Phoenix Life for employee related charges based on actual costs paid by Phoenix Life. Management believes that the methods used by Phoenix Life to allocate these expenses to the Company are reasonable.

Payables to Related Parties

Payables to related parties, principally Phoenix Life, for operating expenses as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 were $11.3 million and $12.2 million, respectively.

 

F-25


Table of Contents
16. Lease Contingencies

The Company incurred rental expenses on operating leases of $4.2 million, $10.7 million and $5.9 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, and received income from subleases of $1.1 million, $0.9 million and $0.8 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The Company is committed to the following future net minimum rental payments under non-cancelable operating leases:

 

     Lease
Payments
   Income
From
Subleases
   Net
Lease
Payments
($ in thousands)               

2008

   $ 7,432    $ 2,764    $ 4,668

2009

     3,067      226      2,841

2010

     2,265      227      2,038

2011

     938      69      869

2012

     491      —        491

2013 and thereafter

     2,880      —        2,880
                    
   $ 17,073    $ 3,286    $ 13,787
                    

 

17. Share-Based Compensation

Stock Option Plan

Certain employees of the Company have been granted options to purchase common stock of PNX under an approved PNX stock option plan. These options, which were granted at various times beginning in June 2002, vest over a three-year period and terminate ten years from the date of grant. PNX options are granted with an exercise price equal to the market value of the shares at the date of grant. The Company recorded compensation expense, relating to charges from PNX for allowing the Company employees to participate in the plan, of $0.5 million, $0.4 million and $0.3 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005 respectively, related to these options. A total of 570,906 option shares which have been granted to the Company’s active and retired employees were outstanding as of December 31, 2007, of which 372,269 are vested.

Restricted Stock Awards

Certain employees of the Company have been granted restricted stock units (“RSUs”) of PNX stock under an approved PNX restricted stock unit plan. Each RSU, once vested, entitles the holder to one share of PNX common stock when the restriction expires. The RSUs may be either time-vested or performance-contingent. The Company recorded compensation expense, related to charges from PNX for allowing the Company employees to participate in the RSU plan, of $2.6 million, $0.8 million and $1.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. At December 31, 2007, 649,799 RSUs were outstanding and which had either not vested or for which stipulated performance had not as yet been achieved.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Share-Based Payments

On January 1, 2006 the Company adopted SFAS 123(R) using the modified prospective method.

Certain Company employees have been granted stock options and restricted stock under PNX plans further described below. The compensation cost that has been charged against income for these plans is summarized in the following table:

Share-based Compensation Plans:

 

     Year Ended December 31
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Compensation cost charged to income

   $ 1.2    $ 1.2    $ 1.2
                    

Income tax benefit

   $ 0.4    $ 0.4    $ 0.4
                    

The Company did not capitalize any cost of stock-based compensation during the three years ended December 31, 2007.

Stock options

Each option, once vested, entitles the holder to purchase one share of PNX common stock. The options vest over a three-year period. Once vested, options become exercisable. For stock options awarded, the Company recognizes expense over the vesting period equal to their fair value at issuance. The Company calculates the fair value of options using the Black-Scholes option valuation model.

Key Assumptions Used in Valuing Each PNX-related Option:

 

     Years Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005

Expected term

   9.9 years    10.0 years    10.0 years

Weighted-average expected volatility

   28.6%    24.3%    35.8%

Weighted-average interest rate

   4.6%      4.6%      4.1%

Weighted-average common share dividend yield

   1.1%      1.1%      1.4%

PNX Stock Option Activity related to Company Employees at

Weighted-Average Exercise Price:

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2007
       Common  
shares
      Price  

Outstanding, beginning of year

   904,619     $ 14.36

Granted

   139,000       14.06

Exercised

   (99,212 )     9.22

Forfeited

   (51,501 )     14.38

Canceled/expired

   (243,500 )     16.19
        

Outstanding, end of year

   649,406       14.39
        

The aggregate intrinsic value of options outstanding at December 31, 2007 was $0.2 million.

As of December 31, 2007, 430,769 options were vested and exercisable, with an aggregate intrinsic value of $.02 million. These options had a weighted-average exercise price of $14.63 and a weighted-average remaining contractual term of 4.7 years.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Weighted-Average

Fair Value:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005
     Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
   Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
   Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
PNX Options granted to Company employees    139,000    $ 5.77    155,500    $ 5.67    69,719    $ 5.35

Option Values:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Intrinsic value of options exercised

   $ 0.5    $ 0.1    $ 0.0

Cash received from option exercises for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005 was $0.9 million, $0.2 million and $0, respectively.

As of December 31, 2007, there was $0.7 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested stock options granted to Company employees. That cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 1.8 years.

Restricted stock units and restricted stock

The Company participates in PNX RSU plans under which RSUs are granted to employees. Each RSU, once vested, entitles the holder to one share of PNX common stock when the restriction expires. The Company recognizes compensation expense over the vesting period of the RSUs, which is generally three years for each award.

PNX RSU Activity Related to Company Employees at

Weighted-Average Grant Price

 

     Year Ended
December 31, 2007
     RSUs     Fair Value

Outstanding, beginning of year

   268,270     $ 11.13

Awarded

   324,175       14.09

Converted to common shares/applied to taxes

   (184,397 )     9.71

Canceled

   (11,606 )     14.60
        

Outstanding, end of year

   396,442       14.10
        

Generally, the shares underlying these awards will be issued upon vesting unless the participant elects to defer receipt. Deferred awards will be issued on each employee’s respective termination or retirement.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Weighted-Average

Fair Value:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005
     RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
   RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
   RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
PNX RSUs awarded to
Company employees
   324,175    $ 14.09    110,989    $ 14.60    70,493    $ 12.91

RSU Values:

     Year Ended December 31,
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Intrinsic value of RSUs converted

   $ 3.6    $ 2.3    $ 0.0

Total grant date fair value of RSUs vested

   $ 1.0    $ 1.0    $ 0.7

As of December 31, 2007, there was $3.4 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested RSUs granted to Company employees. That cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.1 years.

In addition to the RSU activity above, 0.3 million RSUs are subject to future issuance based on the achievement of performance criteria established under certain of the incentive plans. The performance contingencies for these RSUs will be resolved no later than December 31, 2009.

 

18. Subsequent Events

Spin-Off of Asset Management Business

On February 7, 2008, PNX announced its intention to spin-off the Company by way of a dividend of the Company’s stock to the PNX stockholders. The spin-off is intended to be a taxable transaction for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the PNX stockholders and the spin-off and related transactions are expected to be completed in the fourth quarter of 2008.

Identified Intangible Assets

In February 2008, the Company performed an interim impairment test of one of its intangible contracts valued at $29.3 million. The test was triggered by management’s assessment that previous declines in assets and revenue supporting the intangible coupled with a notice of termination from one large account in February 2008 required such a test. As a result of the test, the Company recorded a pre-tax impairment of $10.5 million.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

(Unaudited)

 

     September 30,
2008
    December 31,
2007
 
($ in thousands, except share data)             

Assets

    

Current Assets

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22,610     $ 36,815  

Trading securities, at fair value

     10,463       12,743  

Available-for-sale securities, at fair value

     1,517       1,621  

Accounts receivable

     5,903       7,420  

Receivables from related parties

     17,914       22,276  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     2,453       2,252  
                

Total current assets

     60,860       83,127  

Deferred commissions

     2,212       2,581  

Furniture, equipment and leasehold improvements, net

     4,054       2,232  

Intangible assets, net

     86,119       208,176  

Goodwill

     122,663       454,369  

Deferred taxes, net

     86,643        

Long-term investments and other assets

     2,501       1,678  
                

Total assets

   $ 365,052     $ 752,163  
                

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

    

Current Liabilities

    

Accrued compensation and benefits

   $ 25,121     $ 34,115  

Accounts payable

     2,545       3,667  

Payables to related parties

     9,442       11,295  

Securities sold short, at fair value

     698       854  

Income taxes payable

     8,148       12,028  

Other accrued liabilities

     3,648       5,471  

Broker-dealer payable

     5,837       6,908  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

     12,000       12,000  
                

Total current liabilities

     67,439       86,338  

Deferred taxes, net

           9,114  

Notes payable to related parties

     21,019       30,019  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

     1,667       1,765  
                

Total liabilities

     90,125       127,236  
                

Stockholder’s Equity

    

Common stock, $.01 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, and 10,000 shares issued and outstanding

            

Additional paid-in capital

     962,546       962,546  

Accumulated deficit

     (687,450 )     (337,573 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

     (169 )     (46 )
                

Total stockholder’s equity

     274,927       624,927  
                

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

   $ 365,052     $ 752,163  
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-30


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Operations

(Unaudited)

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,  
           2008                 2007        
($ in thousands, except per share data)       

Revenues

    

Investment management fees

   $ 102,211     $ 119,478  

Distribution and service fees

     24,345       27,122  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     15,072       17,544  

Other income and fees

     1,759       5,883  
                

Total revenues

     143,387       170,027  
                

Operating Expenses

    

Employment expenses

     65,802       72,523  

Distribution and administration expenses

     33,586       37,188  

Other operating expenses

     35,087       32,821  

Goodwill impairment

     331,706       —    

Intangible asset impairment

     100,492       —    

Depreciation and other amortization

     549       941  

Amortization of intangible assets

     22,413       22,608  
                

Total operating expenses

     589,635       166,081  
                

Operating Income (Loss)

     (446,248 )     3,946  
                

Other Income (Expense)

    

Unrealized (depreciation) appreciation on trading securities

     (2,350 )     (1,573 )

Other income

     580       2,165  
                

Total other income (expense), net

     (1,770 )     592  
                

Interest (Expense) Income

    

Interest expense

     (2,037 )     (20,117 )

Interest income

     675       1,166  
                

Total interest expense, net

     (1,362 )     (18,951 )
                

Loss Before Income Taxes

     (449,380 )     (14,413 )

Income tax expense (benefit)

     (99,503 )     (4,246 )
                

Net Loss

   $ (349,877 )   $ (10,167 )
                

Weighted average shares outstanding

     10,000       10,000  
                

Earnings per share

   $ (34,988 )   $ (1,017 )
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-31


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity

For the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007

(Unaudited)

 

     Common
Stock and
Additional
Paid-In
Capital
   Accumulated
Deficit
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  
($ in thousands)                        

Balances at December 31, 2006

   $ 576,646    $ (323,168 )   $ 3     $ 253,481  

Net loss

     —        (10,167 )     —         (10,167 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (25 )     (25 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (10,192 )

Contribution from parent

     60,900      —         —         60,900  
                               

Balances at September 30, 2007

   $ 637,546    $ (333,335 )   $ (22 )   $ 304,189  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2007

   $ 962,546    $ (337,573 )   $ (46 )   $ 624,927  

Net loss

     —        (349,877 )     —         (349,877 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (123 )     (123 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (350,000 )
                               

Balances at September 30, 2008

   $ 962,546    $ (687,450 )   $ (169 )   $ 274,927  
                               

 

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-32


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

(Unaudited)

 

     Nine Months Ended
September 30,
 
         2008             2007      
($ in thousands)             

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

    

Net loss

   $ (349,877 )   $ (10,167 )

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

    

Amortization of intangible assets

     22,413       22,608  

Goodwill impairments

     331,706       —    

Intangible assets impairments

     100,492       —    

Amortization of deferred commissions

     1,052       849  

Depreciation and other amortization

     549       941  

Proceeds from sale of trading investments

     974       10,633  

Purchase of trading investments

     (845 )     (6,069 )

Gain on sale of marketable securities

     —         (1,804 )

Unrealized depreciation (appreciation) on trading securities

     2,350       1,573  

Equity in earnings of unconsolidated affiliates, net of dividends

     (582 )     (192 )

Payments of deferred commissions

     (683 )     (2,046 )

Deferred taxes

     (95,691 )     10,648  

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

    

Accounts receivable

     1,518       (2,918 )

Receivables from related parties

     4,362       3,248  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     (301 )     (682 )

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

     (12,113 )     (11,450 )

Payables to related parties

     (1,852 )     (776 )

Income taxes payable

     (3,880 )     (5,994 )

Deferred revenue

     21       15  

Other liabilities

     (2,363 )     (3,597 )
                

Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities

     (2,750 )     4,820  
                

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

    

Purchase of mutual fund management contract

     —         (525 )

Purchase of available-for-sale investments

     (85 )     (80 )

Capital expenditures

     (2,370 )     18  
                

Net cash used in investing activities

     (2,455 )     (587 )
                

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

    

Capital contributions

     —         60,900  

Repayment of debt

     (9,000 )     (66,243 )
                

Net cash used in financing activities

     (9,000 )     (5,343 )
                

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     (14,205 )     (1,110 )

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period

     36,815       33,862  
                

Cash and Cash Equivalents, End of P eriod

   $ 22,610     $ 32,752  
                

Supplemental Cash Flow Information:

    

Interest paid

   $ 6,825     $ 24,019  

Income taxes paid (refunded), net

   $ 29     $ (8,941 )

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-33


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

September 30, 2008 and 2007

(Unaudited)

 

1. Organization and Business

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (“PXP” or the “Company”) is an indirect majority-owned subsidiary of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”). On February 7, 2008, PNX announced its intention to spin-off PXP by way of a dividend of PXP’s stock to PNX’s shareholders. The spin-off is expected to be completed in the fourth quarter of 2008. In connection with the spin-off, PXP changed its name to Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

The Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries provide a variety of investment management and related services to a broad base of institutional, corporate, and individual clients throughout the U.S. The Company’s businesses include investment advisory and broker-dealer operations. Retail investment management services including administrative services are provided to individuals through products consisting of open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds, and separately managed accounts. Separately managed accounts are offered to high-net-worth individuals and include intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by non-affiliated broker-dealers, and individual direct managed account investment services that are sold and administered by the Company. Institutional investment management services are provided primarily to corporate entities, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowment, insurance and other special purpose funds. In addition, investment management services are provided on structured finance products, including collateralized debt obligations backed by portfolios of assets.

Principles of Consolidation

The accompanying unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements should be read in conjunction with the audited financial statements of the Company as of and for the year ended December 31, 2007. The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Material intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated.

The interim financial data as of September 30, 2008 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and September 30, 2007 is unaudited; however, in the opinion of the Company, the interim data includes all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair statement of the results for the interim periods.

Fair Value Measurements

In September 2006, the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 157, Fair Value Measurements , which defines “fair value,” establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. FASB Staff Position FAS 157-2 delayed application of SFAS 157 for non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities, except for those that are recognized or disclosed at fair value in the financial statements on a recurring basis (at least annually) until years beginning after November 15, 2008. The Company adopted SFAS 157 as of January 1, 2008 for those assets and liabilities that were not deferred with no material impact on its financial position or results of operations. The Company deferred fair value measurements for its goodwill and intangible assets. Goodwill and intangible assets have carrying amounts of $122.7 million and $86.1 million, respectively, as of September 30, 2008.

Separation Costs

All expenses incurred by the Company in connection with the proposed spin-off from PNX are being recorded by PNX.

 

F-34


Table of Contents
2. Goodwill and Intangible Assets

Goodwill and intangible assets at September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were as follows:

 

     September 30, 2008     December 31, 2007  
($ in thousands)             

Definite-lived intangible assets:

    

Investment contracts

   $ 300,259     $ 305,492  

Accumulated amortization

     (250,194 )     (170,607 )
                

Definite-lived intangible assets, net

     50,065       134,885  
                

Indefinite-lived intangible assets

     36,054       73,291  
                

Total intangible assets, net

   $ 86,119     $ 208,176  
                

Goodwill

   $ 122,663     $ 454,369  
                

Activity in Intangible Assets and Goodwill

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,  
         2008             2007      
($ in thousands)             

Intangible assets

    

Purchases

   $ 848     $ 454  

Amortization

     (22,413 )     (22,608 )

Impairment

     (100,492 )     —    
                

Change in intangible assets

     (122,057 )     (22,154 )

Balance, beginning of period

     208,176       237,746  
                

Balance, end of period

   $ 86,119     $ 215,592  
                

Goodwill

    

Impairment

   $ (331,706 )   $ —    
                

Change in goodwill

     (331,706 )     —    

Balance, beginning of period

     454,369       454,369  
                

Balance, end of period

   $ 122,663     $ 454,369  
                

During the third quarter of 2008, the Company recorded impairments of $421.7 million on intangible assets and goodwill. The Company determined that a triggering event requiring an impairment assessment had occurred as a result of significant declines in the equity markets, and the decline in valuations of financial companies experienced in 2008, particularly in the third quarter. The Company performed the impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing. The Company used a discounted cash flow model to calculate the fair value of definite- and indefinite-lived intangible assets. To test for impairment of goodwill, the Company obtained and weighted several estimates of the fair value of the reporting unit, including valuations from third parties, as well as using a sum of a multiple of revenue plus the fair value of the unit’s tangible net assets. The primary drivers of the impairment were a reduction in assets under management, due to markets being at multi-year lows, and valuation multiples for asset managers also being multi-year lows. During the first quarter of 2008, the Company recorded a $10.5 million pre-tax impairment on identified intangible assets related to institutional investment management contracts. This impairment resulted from the termination of certain contracts and related factors. As a result of impairment charges and other losses, the Company has net deferred tax assets as of September 30, 2008 of $86.6 million. The Company expects that the deferred tax assets will have a full valuation allowance recorded against them post spin-off from PNX.

 

F-35


Table of Contents
3. Related Parties

The Company has certain agreements with related parties whereby the Company and/or the related party provides services on behalf of the other party. Any intercompany balances outstanding associated with these transactions are reviewed monthly and are settled to the extent cash is available. During the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007, the Company earned approximately $109.6 million and $120.3 million, respectively, in revenues from managing related party assets.

Receivables from affiliates, including investment management fees, fund administration fees and other receivables at September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were $18 million and $22 million, respectively.

PNX provides certain administrative services at the request of the Company and certain of the Company’s active and retired employees participate in PNX multi-employer retirement and benefit plans. Expenses recorded by the Company for significant services provided by PNX for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 were approximately $16.2 million and $18.3 million, respectively.

Payables to related parties, principally PNX, for operating expenses as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were $9 million and $11 million, respectively.

 

4. Contingent Liabilities

On May 20, 2008, SCM Advisors, LLC (“SCM”), a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, was named a respondent in an arbitration commenced with the American Arbitration Association by former institutional clients, Forethought Investment Management, Inc., Forethought Life Insurance Company, Forethought Life Assurance Company and Forethought Financial Group, Inc., for alleged losses sustained while SCM was providing investment advisory services. The investment losses are primarily related to investments in collateralized debt obligations and are alleged to exceed $38 million. The Company is currently engaged in the discovery process with regard to this matter. Accordingly, the Company is not able to assess at this time whether it is probable, reasonably possible or remote that related losses could be material. The Company believes that the claims lack merit and SCM intends to defend this matter vigorously.

In September 2008, a security held in the Phoenix Insight Money Market Fund (the “Fund”), for which the Company is the advisor and Harris Investment Management is the sub-advisor, had decreased in value and had the potential to cause the Fund’s net asset value per share to dip below 99.5 cents. In connection with actions taken to maintain the Fund’s net asset value, the Company agreed to partially address the ultimate loss, if any, on the security by restructuring existing money market agreements with Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”), a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, or by an alternative means subject to a maximum of $15 million. The contingency was extinguished in October, 2008 concurrent with the agreement with Harris Bankcorp for it to take a 23% equity position in the Company in connection with the planned spin-off.

The 23% equity position taken by Harris Bankcorp is to be in the form of Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock. In accordance with the agreement, at any time after the three year anniversary of the issuance of the preferred stock, Harris Bankcorp will have the right to require the Company to repurchase the Series A Preferred Stock for a purchase price ( the “put price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of preferred stock. The put price may be payable by the Company in immediately available funds or, at the election of the Company, may be paid in the form of two senior promissory notes each having an aggregate principal amount equal to one-half of the put price of the Company, paying interest at LIBOR plus 3% per annum, the first maturing on the one year anniversary of the put closing date and the second maturing on the two year anniversary of the put closing date. According to the agreement, the put right will expire if at the time that the 23% equity position sale is consummated or at anytime thereafter the average closing price for the common stock of the Company during any five consecutive trading day period exceeds the conversion price per share of the preferred stock, as adjusted from time to time.

 

F-36


Table of Contents
5. Subsequent Event

On October 30, 2008, the Company and its parent companies, PNX and PIM, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement (the “Agreement”) with Harris Bankcorp pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp will acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in the Company and its direct and wholly owned subsidiary. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off. The Company expects $35.0 million of proceeds from this transaction.

 

F-37